project manual - spokane transit

SPOKANE TRANSIT AUTHORITY

PLAZA UPGRADE

PROJECT #15-STA-512

PROJECT MANUAL

July 31, 2015

Spokane Transit Authority TABLE OF CONTENTS Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Page 1

July 31, 2015 Table of Contents

Section Title DIVISION 0: SPECIAL SECTIONS

001100 Advertisement 002100 STA Instructions to Bidders 003100 Project Description and Scope of Work 004200 Bid Submittal Checklist 004213 Bid Proposal Form 004215 STA Bid Response 004512 STA Responsibility Criteria 005200 STA Form of Contract Between Owner and Contractor 006211.F Submittal Transmittal Form 006313.F Request for Information 006324.F Substitution Request (During Bidding) 006325.F Substitution Request (After Bidding) 006336.F Field Authorization, Change Order Proposal, Change Order 007200 General Conditions For Spokane Transit Authority Facility Construction 007300 Special Conditions For Spokane Transit Authority Facility Construction 007346 State Prevailing Wage (Spokane County) DIVISION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 Summary 013100 Project Management and Coordination 014000 Quality Control 014200 References Standards and Definitions 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 016000 Product Requirements 017300 Execution DIVISION 2: EXISTING CONDITIONS

024119 Selective Demolition DIVISION 3: CONCRETE

033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete 033543 Polished Concrete Finishing DIVISION 4: MASONRY – NOT USED

DIVISION 5: Metals

051200 Structural Steel Framing 053100 Steel Decking 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 055000 Metal Fabrications 057313 Glazed Decrotive Metal Railings DIVISION 6: WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES

061000 Rough Carpentry 061053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 061600 Sheathing 064116 Plastic-Laminate-faced Archtiectural Cabinets 064216 Flush Wood Paneling 066400 Plastic Paneling



DIVISION 7: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

071413 Hot Fluid-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing 072100 Thermal Insulation 072500 Weather Barriers 072600 Vapor Retarders 074243 Metal Composite Material Wall Panels 075423 Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing 075423.1 Carlisle Membrane Material Warranty 078100 Applied Fireproofing 079200 Joint Sealants DIVISION 8: OPENINGS

081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 083113 Access Doors and Frames 084113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts 084229.23 Sliding Automatic Entrances 084413 Glazed Aluminum Curtainwalls 087100 Door Hardware 088000 Glazing 089119 Fixed Louvers DIVISION 9: FINISHES

090000 Finish Schedule 090001 Finish Legend 092216 Non-Load Bearing Steel Framing 092900 Gypsum Board 093013 Ceramic Tile 095113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories 096519 Resilient Tile Flooring 096813 Tile Carpeting 099113 Exterior Painting 099123 Painting DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES

101100 Visual Display Boards 101419 Signs 102113.13 Metal Toilet Comparments 102600 Wall and Door Protection 102800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 104413 Fire-Extinguisher Cabinets DIVISION 11: EQUIPMENT

115000 Equipment DIVISION 12: FURNISHINGS

123640 Stone Countertops 123661.19 Quartz Agglomerate Countertops DIVISION 14: FURNISHINGS

143100 Escalators



DIVISION 21: FIRE PROTECTION

211313 Fire Protection Systems DIVISION 22: PLUMBING

220500 Common Work for Plumbing

220700 Plumbing Insulation Systems

221100 Water Distribution Systems

221300 Sanitary Sewerage Systems

224000 Plumbing Fixtures

DIVISION 23: HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITION

230500 Common Work Results for HVAC

230523 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping REV 2011

230540 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC

230550 Identification for Piping and Equipment

230590 Testing Adjusting and Balancing

230700 Insulation Systems

230900 Instrumentation and Control Systems

231123 Facility Natural Gas Piping

232100 Hydronic Piping

232123 Hydronic Pumps

233100 Metal Ducts and Casings

233300 Air Duct Accessories

233400 HVAC Fans

233700 Air Inlets and Outlets

234100 Particulate Air Filtration

237433 Packaged Outdoor Heating Cooling Units

238100 Unitary HVAC Equipment

238219 Fan Coil Units

DIVISION 26: ELECTRICAL

260500 Common Work Results 260519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables

260526 Ground and Bonding

260529 Hangars and Supports

260533 Raceways and Fittings

260540 Outlet, Junction and Pull Boxes

260553 Identification

260923 Lighting Control Devices

260943 Network Lighting Controls

262416 Panelboards

262726 Wiring Devices

262813 Fuses

262816 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers

262913 Enclosed Controllers

265100 Interior Lighting



DIVISION 27: COMMUNICATIONS

270500 Common Work Results for Communications

271100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings

271300 Communications Backbone Wiring

271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling

DIVISION 28: ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

280500 Electrical Requirements for Integrated Security System

283100 Fire Alarm System

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS



This page intentionally left blank.

Spokane Transit Authority ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Section 001100

July 31, 2015 Advertisement for Bids

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

Sealed bid proposals will be accepted for the following project: PROJECT NO.: 15-STA-512 TITLE: STA Plaza Upgrade AGENCY: Spokane Transit Authority PROJECT MANAGER: Jessica Charlton, Project Manager PRE-BID WALK-THROUGH: 10:00 A.M., Wednesday August 12, 2015

Spokane Transit Authority (Owner)

Project Site, Located at 701 W Riverside Avenue,

Spokane, WA 99201

PUBLIC BID OPENING: 3:00 P.M., Wednesday September 9, 2015

Spokane Transit Authority (Owner), located at

1229 W Boone Avenue, Spokane, WA 99201

Contractors may obtain electronic copies of plans and specifications from the Project Manager, Jessica Charlton by phone at (509)325-6049 or email at [email protected].

Plans and specifications may also be viewed at Local and Regional plan centers.

The minimum prevailing wage provisions for Washington State law apply to this project. Pursuant to RCW 39.04.320 and due to the estimated cost of this project fifteen percent (15%), minimum, of the labor hours are to be performed by apprentices.

Use of DBE/MBE/WBE/MWBE contractors and suppliers is encouraged by not mandatory. Contractors submitting bids may contact the Washington State Office of Minority and Women’s Business Enterprise to obtain information on certified firms.

The Owner reserves the right to reject or accept any or all bids and to waive minor informalities in the process.

No contractor submitting may withdraw their bids after hour set for opening thereof unless contract award is delayed for a period exceeding ninety (90) days.

Spokane Transit is an Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO) organization which does not discriminate against any prospective supplier on the basis of race, color, creed, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity, or presence of any sensory, mental, or physical disability in the consideration of contract award. The successful contractor submitting a bid will be required to comply with all EEO federal, state, and local laws and regulations.

Spokane Transit assures nondiscrimination in accordance with Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964. For information, see www.spokanetransit.com. Upon request, alternative formats of this information will be produced for people who are disabled. The meeting facility is accessible for people using wheelchairs. For other accommodations, please call (509) 325-6094 (TTY WA Relay 711) at least forty-eight (48) hours in advance.

Spokane Transit Authority ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Section 001100

July 31, 2015 Advertisement for Bids


Spokane Transit Authority INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Section 002100

July 31, 2015 002100-1

SECTION 002100 – STA INSTRUCTIONS TO CONTRACTORS SUBMITTING BIDS DEFINITIONS A. Addenda are written or graphic instruments, approved and issued by the Owner prior to the time

designated for Opening of Bids, which amend, modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications, or corrections.

B. An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is the amount stated in the Bid to be added or deducted from the amount

of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in project scope or materials or methods of construction described in the Bidding Documents is accepted.

C. A Bid is the submission of a complete and properly signed authorized solicitation form (Bid Proposal

Form) together with Bid Bond, if applicable, and the certifications and representations required to comply with the Invitation for Bid.

D. Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the work described as the

Base, to which work may be added or deducted from sums stated in Alternate Bids (if any). E. Bidder is one who submits a Bid for a prime contract with the Owner for the Work described in the

Construction Documents. F. A Non-responsive Bid is any Bid which fails to conform in all respects to the material requirements of

the Bidding Documents or imposes conditions which would modify requirements of the Bidding Documents or would limit a bidder's liability to the Spokane Transit Authority so as to give the bidder an advantage over the Bidders as determined by the Spokane Transit Authority.

G. Responsible Bidder means a contractor who meets the criteria listed in RCW 39.04.350. H. Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement or materials or services as

described in the Construction documents as defined in the General Conditions of the Contract between STA, as Owner, and the Contractor


July 31, 2015 002100-2

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 EXPLANATION TO PROSPECTIVE CONTRACTORS SUBMITTING BIDS

A. Materials submitted in response to this competitive procurement shall become the property of Spokane Transit Authority. All received Proposals shall be deemed public records as defined in Ch. 42.56RCW “Public Records Act.” Any information in the Bid that the Contractor desires to claim as proprietary and exempt from discloser under the provisions of state law shall be clearly designated. Each page claimed to be exempt from disclosure must be clearly identified by the word “Confidential” printed on it. Marking the entire Bid exempt from discloser will not be honored. STA will consider a Contractor’s request for exemption from disclosure; however, the agency will make a decision predicated upon state law and regulations. If any information is marked as proprietary in the Bid, it will not be made available until the affected Contractor has been given an opportunity to seek a court injunction against the requested disclosure. STA assumes no liability for disclosure of proprietary material submitted by Contractors. Bid submittals shall be considered public documents under applicable Washington state law and shall be available for inspection and copying by the public, except to the extent portions of the submittals are otherwise protected under applicable law. Each Contractor will be responsible for protecting any disclosure of its submittal under applicable law.

B. Any prospective contractor submitting bids desiring an explanation or interpretation of the solicitation, drawings, specifications, etc., must submit a request in writing to the Architect/Engineer (A/E) seven (7) calendar days before the bid due date. Oral explanations or instructions given before the award of a contract will not be binding. Any information given a prospective contractor submitting bids concerning a solicitation will be furnished promptly to all other prospective contractors submitting bids by addendum to the solicitation, if that information is necessary in submitting bids or if the lack of it would be prejudicial to other prospective contractors submitting bids.

C. STA is committed to ensuring that all firms regardless of race, color, sex or national origin have equal opportunity to participate in STA contracts. Therefore, STA has established an annual agency goal for Disadvantaged Business Enterprise (DBE) participation in its contracting opportunities. In accordance with the legislative findings and policies set forth in Chapter 39.19 RCW STA encourages participation in all of its contracts by Minority Business Enterprises (MBE), Women Owned Business Enterprise (WBE, and Minority Women Owned Business Enterprise (MWBE) firms certified by the Office of Minority and Women’s Business Enterprises (OMWBE). Participation may be either on a direct basis in response to this invitation or as a subcontractor to a contractor submitting bids. However, unless required by federal statutes, regulations, grants, or contract terms referenced in the contract documents, no preference will be included in the evaluation of bids, no minimum level of DBE/MBE/WBE/MWBE participation shall be required as a condition for receiving an award, and bids will not be rejected or considered non-responsive on that basis. Any affirmative action requirements set forth in federal regulations or statutes included or referenced in the contract documents will apply.

D. On applicable projects the bid advertisement and Bid Proposal form shall establish a

minimum required percentage of apprentice labor hours compared to the total labor hours.

Contractors submitting bids may contact the Department of Labor and Industries, Specialty

Compliance Services Division, Apprenticeship Section, P.O. Box 44530, Olympia, WA 98504-

4530, by phone (360) 902-5320, and e-mail at [email protected], to obtain information on

available apprenticeship programs.


July 31, 2015 002100-3

E. In addition to the payment and performance bond required by work law the Contractor shall purchase and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized and admitted to do business in the State of Washington possessing a Best’s policyholder’s rating of A- or better and a financial rating of no less than VII, and reasonably acceptable to STA, an occurrence-based Commercial General Liability Insurance Policy which shall provide bodily injury and property damage liability on its own operations and vehicles on Work the Contractor may subcontract or sublet to others, in no less than the amounts specified in Part 2 of the attached STA General Conditions.

F. The general description and scope of work for the project can be found in section 003100 of this document.

1.2 PREPARATION OF BIDS – CONSTRUCTION

A. Bids must be: (1) submitted on the bid proposal forms, or copies of forms, furnished by the Owner or the Owner’s agent, and (2) signed in ink. The person signing a bid must initial each change appearing on any bid form. If the bid is made by a corporation, it shall be signed by the corporation’s authorized designee. The address of the contractor submitting bids shall be typed or printed on the bid form in the space provided.

B. The bid form may require contractors submitting bids to submit bid prices for one or more items on various bases, including: (1) lump sum base bid; (2) lump sum bid alternate prices; (3) unit prices; or (4) any combination of items 1 through 3 above.

C. If the solicitation includes alternate bid items, failure to provide a bid on the alternates may disqualify the bid. If quoting on all items is not required, contractors submitting bids should insert the words “no bid” in the space provided for any item on which no price is submitted.

D. Substitute bid proposals will not be considered unless this solicitation authorizes their submission.

1.3 BID GUARANTEE

A. When the sum of the base bid plus all additive bid alternates is $35,000.00 or less, bid security is not required. When the sum of the base bid plus all additive alternates is greater than $35,000.00, a bid guarantee in the amount of 5% of the base bid amount is required. Failure of the contractor submitting bids to provide bid guarantee when required shall render the bid non-responsive.

B. Acceptable forms of bid guarantee are: A bid bond or postal money order, or certified check or cashier’s check made payable to Spokane Transit Authority. The Owner will return bid guarantees (other than bid bond) to unsuccessful contractors submitting bids as soon as practicable, but not sooner than the execution of a contract with the successful contractor submitting bids. The bid guarantee of the successful contractor submitting bids will be returned to the successful contractor submitting bids with its official notice to proceed with the work of the contract.


July 31, 2015 002100-4

C. The contractor submitting bids will allow 90 days from bid opening date for acceptance of its bid by the Owner. The contractor submitting bids will return to the Owner a signed contract, insurance certificate and bond or bond waiver within 15 days after receipt of the contract. If the apparent successful contractor submitting bids fails to sign all contractual documents or provide the bond and insurance as required or return the documents within 15 days after receipt of the contract, the Owner may terminate the award of the contract.

D. In the event a contractor submitting bids discovers an error in its bid following the bid opening, the contractor submitting bids may request to withdraw its bid under the following conditions:

1. Written notification is received by the Owner within 24 hours following bid opening.

2. The contractor submitting bids provides written documentation of the claimed error to the satisfaction of the Owner within 72 hours following the bid opening.

The Owner will approve or disapprove the request for withdrawal of the bid in writing. If the contractor’s request for withdrawal of its bid is approved, the contractor submitting bids will be released from further obligation to the Owner without penalty. If it is disapproved, the Owner may retain the contractor’s bid guarantee.

1.4 ADDITIVE OR DEDUCTIVE BID ITEMS

A. The low contractor submitting bids, for purposes of award, shall be the responsive contractor submitting bids offering the low aggregate amount for the base bid item, plus additive or deductive bid alternates selected by the Owner, and within funds available for the project.

B. The contractor submitting bids agrees to hold all bid alternate prices for ninety (90) days from date of bid opening.

1.5 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ADDENDA

A. Contractors submitting bids shall acknowledge receipt of all addenda to this solicitation by identifying the addenda numbers in the space provided for this purpose on the bid proposal form. Failure to do so may result in the bid being declared non-responsive.

1.6 SITE INVESTIGATION AND CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE WORK

A. The contractor submitting bids acknowledges that it has taken steps necessary to ascertain the nature and location of the work, and that it has investigated and satisfied itself as to the general and local conditions which can affect the work or its cost, including but not limited to (1) conditions bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling, and storage of materials; (2) the availability of labor, water, electric power, and road; (3) uncertainties of weather, river stages, tides, or similar physical conditions at the site; (4) the conformation and conditions of the ground; and (5) the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the work. The contractor submitting bids also acknowledges that it has satisfied itself as to character, quality, and quantity of surface and subsurface materials or obstacles to be encountered insofar as this information is reasonably ascertainable from an inspection of the site, including exploratory work done by the Owner, as well as from the drawings and specifications made a part of this contract. Any failure of the contractor submitting bids to take the actions described and acknowledged in this paragraph will not relieve the contractor submitting bids from responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty and cost of successfully performing the work.


July 31, 2015 002100-6

B. If Bidder is unable to attend the scheduled Pre-Bid meeting, please contact Jessica Charlton,

Project Manager as listed in theses instructions to arrange a separate site visit. Bids submitted by

contractors that have not either attended a pre-bid meeting or inspected the site in the

presence of STA staff will be considered non-responsive.

1.7 TIME OF COMPLETION

A. Work may begin when the Contractor receives a formal “Notice to Proceed.” Contractor shall proceed with promptness and dispatch and shall substantially complete all work associated with Phase 1 including occupancy within two hundred forty (240) calendar days beginning on the day of commencement as stated in a Notice to Proceed. All Phase 2 work shall be substantially complete, with occupancy, within three hundred seventy five (375) calendar days of the Notice to Proceed. Finally, all contract work shall be complete within four hundred eighty (480) calendar days beginning on the day of commencement as stated in a Notice to Proceed.

1.8 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

A. The Contractor agrees to pay to STA liquidated damages in the amount of $250.00 for each day the Contractor fails to provide services or respond to an STA request for services hereinafter provided. These liquidated damages are for the purpose of any delay or impact caused to STA by virtue of the Contractor’s acts or omissions and do not cover any other actual or consequential damages other than delay. STA and the Contractor agree that such damage cannot be reasonably determined at this time. Such damages are very difficult to accurately estimate because of numerous factors, including, but not limited to inconvenience to STA. Further, the parties agree this is a reasonable forecast of all factors now known and available for consideration relating to the delay caused by failure to perform. Liquidated damages shall be deducted from the contract by change order.

1.9 WAGE RATE SCHEDULES

A. The Contractor shall pay the highest prevailing wage rate by trade or occupation as specified by the State of Washington, Department of Labor and Industries. The Prevailing Wage rates for the State of Washington are current at the time of submission and are available through the website provided in Section 007346 of this document. It is the responsibility of the prospective bidder to verify these publications are current at the time of bidding

1. If requested, certified Payrolls for the prime and all subcontractors shall accompany all applications for payment.

2. An approved Intent to Pay Prevailing wage form must be received by STA for the contractor and any subcontractors prior to commencement of any work.

B. Any disputes as to wage rates will be referred to the US Secretary of Labor and the Director of Labor and Industries for the State of Washington who will determine the prevailing local wage rate for the trade in dispute.

5


July 31, 2015 002100-6

1.10 TAXES

A. A small portion of this contract qualifies under WAC 458-20-171 Public Road Construction, herein after referred to as Rule 171. The scope of work in the following building areas qualifies under Rule 171:

1. All scope of work associated with main floor waiting areas P103, P122, P124, and P125 except for HVAC distribution systems/equipment and power/data wiring.

2. All scope of work associated with main floor entry areas P113, P117, and P119, except for HVAC

distribution systems/equipment and power/data wiring. 3. All scope of work associated with main floor traffic areas P116, P120, P121, and P127, except

for HVAC distribution systems/equipment and power/data wiring.

Any scope of work not listed above or specifically excluded above does not qualify under Rule 171.

B. Therefore, the portion of the Bid that includes the scope listed as qualifying under Rule 171 shall include Washington State Sales Tax (WSST). The Owner will include WSST in progress payments for remaining scope of the project which does not qualify as Rule 171. All other taxes imposed by law shall be included in the bid amount. The contractor shall pay the WSST to the Department of Revenue and shall furnish proof of payment to the Owner if requested.

C. Rule 171: The Contractor shall pay taxes, including sales tax, for the work or portions thereof provided by the Contractor and these taxes shall be included in the Contract amount.

Washington sales tax is payable on the “selling price” or gross proceeds of sale” of the “tangible personal property” as these terms are defined in WAC 458-20-107 (Rule 107) except as excluded by WAC 458-20-171 (Rule 171).

A large portion of the project qualifies as “public road construction” as described in Rule 171, WAC 458-20-171, and therefore only material used or consumed by Contractor will be subject to Washington State sales tax. See section 1.10.A.1-3 for specific qualifications. The Contractors charges for labor, profit, overhead, etc., to STA are not subject to retail sales tax for scope of work of the project described above.

Contractors are advised that they are considered the end consumers of all material, including prefabricated and pre-cast items, equipment and supplies used or consumed by them in performing the work, and must pay any applicable retail sales tax/use tax to their material men and suppliers. In order to maximize the sales tax exemption. Contractors are encouraged to have all material delivered to the job site for consumption. Work performed away from the job site should be minimized in order to maximize the sales tax exemption. If the Contractor has questions about the application of Rule 171, the Contractor is advised to contact the Department of Revenue.

The Contract Amount must include labor, overhead, profit and applicable sales tax on materials, pursuant to Washington State Department of Revenue Rule 171. Contractors are cautioned against paying sales tax more than once on materials used or consumed, such as by paying sales tax to material men or suppliers, and again remitting sales tax to the state on total costs.


July 31, 2015 002100-7

All applicable taxes which the Contractors are required to pay, including retail sales/use tax as specified above, shall be included by them in their proposed prices for the work under their proposal. No adjustment will be made in the amount to be paid by STA under the contract because of any misunderstanding by or lack of knowledge of the Bidder/Contractor as to their liability for, or the amount of any taxes or because of any increases in tax rates imposed by any federal, state or local government

NOTE: Contractor must bond for total contract amount plus WSST.


July 31, 2015 002100-8

1.11 BIDMOUNTS

A. The bid prices shown for each item on the bid proposal shall include all labor, material, equipment, overhead and compensation, as well as municipal permits and fees to complete all of the work for that item.

B. The actual cost of building permit (only) and the public utility hookup fees will be a direct reimbursement to the Contractor or paid directly to the permitting agency by the Owner. Fees for these permits should not be included by the Contractor submitting bids in the bid amount.

C. The Contractor submitting bids agrees to hold the base bid prices for ninety (90) days from date of bid opening.

1.12 SUBMISSION OF BIDS

A. Bid Proposals must be submitted on or before the time specified in the Advertisement for Bids or as extended in Contract Documents.

B. If the base bid and the sum of the additive alternates is one million dollars or more, the Bid Proposal shall comply with the following requirements:

1. Pursuant to RCW 39.30.060, if the base bid and the sum of the additive alternates is one million dollars or more, the Contractor submitting bids shall provide names of the Subcontractors with whom the Contractor submitting bids will subcontract for performance of heating, ventilation and air conditioning (HVAC), plumbing, and electrical.

2. The Contractor submitting bids can name itself for the performance of the work.

3. The Contractor submitting bids shall not list more than one Subcontractor for each category of work identified UNLESS Subcontractors vary with bid alternates, in which case the Contractor submitting bids must indicate which Subcontractor will be used for which alternate.

4. Failure of the Contractor submitting bids to submit as part of the bid the NAMES of such Subcontractors or to name itself to perform such work shall render the contractor’s bid nonresponsive and, therefore, void.

C. The Bid Proposal shall be submitted in a sealed envelope addressed to the office specified in the Advertisement for Bids. Oral, telephonic, electronic, for facsimile bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. The envelope shall have printed on the outside:

1. The project number and description.

2. The name and address of the contractor submitting bids.

3. Identification as Bid Proposal.


July 31, 2015 002100-9

D. Bids will be accepted no later than 3:00 pm at the reception desk located in STA’s Maintenance

Facility, on the south side of Boone Avenue located at 1229 W. Boone Ave, in Spokane,

Washington. The Owner’s representative will designate the official bid clock fifteen (15) minutes prior to bid due time; bid opening will immediately follow in meeting room within the facility. Any part of the bid proposal or bid modification not received prior to the times specified, per the designated bid clock, will not be considered and the bid will be returned to the contractor unopened.

E. A bid may be withdrawn in person by the authorized representative of the contractor submitting bids before the opening of the bids. The representative of the contractor submitting bids will be required to show ID and sign on bid summary sheet before it will be released.

F. People with disabilities who wish to request special accommodation, (e.g., sign language interpreters, Braille, etc.) need to contact the Owner ten (10) working days prior to the scheduled bid opening.

1.13 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS

A. Spokane Transit Authority shall have the right to reject any or all bids and to reject bids considered non-responsive including but not limited to Bids not accompanied by any required bid security, certifications, or data required by the Bidding Documents or a Bid not signed by the authorized legal representative.

B. The Owner shall have the right to waive any informality or irregularity in any Bid received.

C. In the event that a single bid is received, Spokane Transit will conduct a cost/price analysis of the bid. This analysis will compare the price and quality of the proposed equipment with that involved in recent similar purchases with similar specifications made by this or other governmental agencies in an attempt to determine the competitive integrity of the submitted bid.

1.14 BID RESULTS

A. After the Bid Opening, Contractors submitting bids may obtain bid results from the Owner.

1.15 LOW RESPONSIBLE

A. Mandatory Responsibility Criteria: Before award of a public works contract, a contractor submitting bids must meet the following mandatory responsibility criteria under RCW 39.04.350 (1) to be considered a responsible contractor submitting bids and qualified to be awarded a public works project. The contractor submitting bids must:

1. At the time of bid submittal, have a certificate of registration of contractor in compliance with Chapter 18.27 RCW;

2. Have a current state unified business identifier number;

3. If applicable, have industrial insurance coverage for the employees of the contractor submitting bids working in Washington as required in Title 51 RCW; an employment security department number as required in Title 50 RCW; a state excise tax registration number as required in Title 82 RCW; an electrical contractor license as required by Chapter 19.28 RCW; and an elevator contractor license by Chapter 70.87 RCW


July 31, 2015 002100-10

4. Not be disqualified from quoting on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or 39.12.065(3); and

5. If quoting on a public works project subject to the apprenticeship utilization requirements

in RCW 39.04.320, not have been found out of compliance by the Washington state

apprenticeship and training council for working apprentices out of ratio, without

appropriate supervision, or outside their approved work processes as outlined in their

standards of apprenticeship under chapter 49.04 RCW for the one-year period

immediately preceding the date of the bid solicitation.

B. Supplemental Responsibility Criteria: In addition to the mandatory contractor submitting bids responsibility, the Owner may adopt relevant supplemental criteria for determining contractor submitting bids responsibility applicable to a particular project which the contractor submitting bids must meet (RCW 39.04.350 (2)).

1. If applicable, the Owner shall consider an overall accounting of the attached supplemental criteria for determining contractor submitting bids responsibility.

2. At least seven (7) days prior to the bid submittal deadline, a potential contractor submitting bids may request that the Owner modify the supplemental responsibility criteria. The Owner will evaluate the information submitted by the potential contractor submitting bids and respond before the bid submittal deadline. If the evaluation results in a change of the criteria, the Owner will issue an addendum to the quoting documents identifying the new criteria.

3. Upon Owner’s request, the apparent low contractor submitting bids must supply the requested responsibility information within two (2) business days of request by Owner. Withholding information or failure to submit all the information requested within the time provided may render the bid non-responsive.

4. Upon request of the Owner, a Bidder whose proposal is under consideration for award of Contract shall submit promptly satisfactory evidence of his/her financial resources, experience, organization, and equipment available for performance of the Contract on AIA Form A305 “contractor’s Qualification Statement” or similar form approved by the Owner.

5. If the Owner determines that the apparent low contractor submitting bids is not responsible, the Owner will notify the contractor submitting bids of its preliminary determination in writing.

6. Within three (3) days after receipt of the preliminary determination, the contractor submitting bids may withdraw its bid or request a hearing where the contractor submitting bids may appeal the preliminary determination and present additional information to the Owner.

7. The Owner will schedule a hearing within three (3) working days of receipt of the contractor’s request. The hearing members will include a STA Executive or designee, and Project Manager.

8. The Owner will issue a Final Determination after reviewing information presented at the hearing.


July 31, 2015 002100-11

9. If the Owner determines a contractor submitting bids to be not responsible, the Owner will provide, in writing, the reasons for the determination. If the final determination affirms that the contractor submitting bids is not responsible, the Owner will not execute a contract with any other contractor submitting bids until two (2) business days after the contractor submitting bids determined to be not responsible has received the final determination.

10. The Owner’s Final Determination is specific to this project, and will have no effect on other or future projects.

1.16 CONTRACT AWARD

A. The Owner will evaluate bids responsiveness and responsibility.

1. A bid will be considered responsive if it meets the following requirements:

a. It is received at the proper time and place.

b. It meets the stated requirements of the bid proposal.

c. It is accompanied by a bid guarantee, if required.

2. A bid will be considered responsible if it meets the following requirements:

a. It is submitted by a licensed/registered contractor within the state of Washington at the time of bid opening and is not banned from quoting by the Department of Labor and Industries.

b. It meets the mandatory responsibility criteria established in RCW 39.04.350 for Prime and Subs and an overall accounting of the supplemental responsibility criteria established for the project.

B. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bid proposals and to waive informalities.

C. The Owner may negotiate bid price adjustments with the low responsive contractor submitting bids, including changes in the contract documents, to bring the bid within the available funding per RCW 39.04.015.

D. The apparent low contractor submitting bids, for purpose of award, shall be the responsive and responsible contractor submitting bids offering the low aggregate amount for the base bid plus selected additive or deductive bid alternates and meeting all other bid submittal requirements.

E. The Contract will only become effective when signed by the Owner. Prior to the Owner’s signature, any and all costs incurred shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor submitting bids.

F. The Contractor must purchase and maintain insurance coverage as stated in Part 2 of Spokane Transit Authority’s Public Works Construction Project General Conditions.

G. Note: AIA Payment Bond and Performance Bond forms (A312) are required. These forms will not be provided by the Owner.


July 31, 2015 002100-12

1.17 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Contract Documents under which it is proposed to execute this work consists of all material bound herein, plus any addenda incorporated into the documents. An Addendum providing further clarification will be issued during the week beginning August 10th, 2015.

B. These Contract Documents are intended to be mutually cooperative and to provide all details reasonably required for the execution of the proposed work. Any person contemplating the submission of a proposal shall have thoroughly examined all of the various parts of these documents, and should there be any doubt as to the meaning or intent of said Contract Documents, the Bidder should request the Architect/Engineer, in writing (at least six (6) working days prior to bid opening), and interpretation thereof. Any interpretation or change in said Contract Documents will be made only in writing, in the form of addenda to the documents and will be furnished to all Bidders receiving a set of documents, who shall indicate receipt of same in the space provided on the proposal form. The Owner will not be responsible for any other explanation or interpretation of said documents.

1.18 DISCREPANCIES & CONTRACT DOCUMENT REVIEW

A. The intent of Spokane Transit Authority and Project Contract Documents is to describe a complete Project. These Contract Documents are complimentary. What is required by one part of the Contract Documents shall be binding as if required by all.

B. In the event of a discrepancy between Spokane Transit Authority and Federal Funded Project Contract Documents, the Contractor will use the Contract Document that imparts the highest cost to their bid and/or longest delay in their schedule. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to bring these discrepancies to the attention of the Architect as soon as they are discovered.

1.19 PROTEST PROCEDURES

A. STA maintains a set of protest procedures. If any bidder desires this information, it may be obtained by calling the Office of the Purchasing Manager, Jacqueline Tjards at (509) 325-6032.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not used)

END OF SECTION 002100

Spokane Transit Authority PROJECT DESCRIPTION AND SCOPE OF WORK Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Section 003100

July 31, 2015 003100-1

SECTION 003100 – STA PROJECT DESCRIPTION AND SCOPE OF WORK PROJECT DESCRIPTION Spokane Transit Authority (STA) wishes to make alterations to its downtown transit station, the Plaza, in order to improve the customer experience. Alterations will enhance customer access to STA Customer Service, public restrooms, and will provide purposeful passenger waiting. More tenant space is being made available on the main floor as well. Security operations will be relocated to the second floor to facilitate many of these revisions. Mechanisms/equipment/hardware that are original to the building will be upgraded or replaced as well including but not limited to HVAC equipment, electrical systems, lighting, and escalators. A pre-planned Addendum will be issued during the week beginning August 10th, 2015. The Addendum will provide further clarification, which will include but is not limited to the following:

1. Refinements on sheets A-402 and A-603

2. Casework refinement/clarifications

3. Structural support and lighting refinements for cougar artwork

4. Some sturctural framing and detailing at the customer service area

5. Possible omission of Fire Protection Sprinklers replacement in some areas

6. Architectural/Engineering coordination refinement and/or clarification

Project Location: Site is located at 701 W. Riverside Avenue, in Spokane, Washington. Time Line: The Contractor agrees to coordinate the completion of all construction and finish work within four hundred eighty (480) calendar days beginning on the day of commencement as stated in a Notice to Proceed. The Contractor also agrees to coordinate the completion of all construction and finish work associated with Phase 1, including occupancy, within two hundred forty (240) calendar days from Notice to Proceed. The Contractor also agrees to coordinate the completion of all construction and finish work associated with Phase 2, including occupancy, within three hundred seventy five (375) calendar days from Notice to Proceed. See sheet G-004 of the construction drawings for the Phasing Plan. Exclusions: 55”+ LCD/LED Display Monitors as well as other equipment and furniture shown on the drawings as by others or provided by Owner/STA. PROJECT GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK The work shall generally consist of however is not limited to the following:

1. Obtain and pay for all required fees and permitting 2. Perform all work area preparation and erect separations 3. Perform all required demolition work. 4. Install all materials and equipment as indicated in the contract documents 5. Provide finishes and furnishings as indicated in the contract documents 6. Record all “as-built” information for delivery to Owner as required for final closeout 7. Provide O&M manuals to Owner as required for final closeout 8. All work to be completed as shown and specified on the associated plans and specifications for the

project

Spokane Transit Authority PROJECT DESCRIPTION AND SCOPE OF WORK Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Section 003100

July 31, 2015 003100-1

All work shall meet/exceed all codes, utility locating, rules and regulations, as set forth by the City, County and State of Washington. Contractor shall perform work in accordance with the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries Safety Standards.

Contractor is responsible for the supply of all equipment, materials, and labor necessary to complete the project in coordination with the portion of the work to be completed by the Bus Wash Manufacturer.

Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damage and cleanup costs. Contractor negligence shall be repaired immediately at no cost to STA.

All work will be subject to inspection and acceptance by STA’s project manager or designee prior to payment.

STA reserves the right to increase or decrease the amount of related services listed in the scope of work for a fairly negotiated price.


2

Spokane Transit Authority BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Section 004200

July 31, 2015 004200-1

SECTION 004200 STA BID SUBMITTAL CHECKLIST

BID CHECKLIST- STA PLAZA UPGRADE 15-STA-512

To be included with Bid Proposal Form when you submit your Bid. Failure of the contractor submitting a bid to submit these forms with the bid shall render the bid non-responsive and shall be grounds for rejection of said bid. Check off each of the following as completed, and included with this proposal:

� Section 004200 - STA Bid Submittal Checklist - Statement of Compliance, signed and dated below.

� Section 004213 - Bid Proposal Form: Submitted on appropriate form, filled out legibly and completely.

� Section 004215 - Bid Response: Submitted on appropriate form, filled out legibly and completely.

� Section 004512 – STA Responsibility Criteria: Submit filled out legibly and completely.

� Bid Security attached in the Amount of 5% of Total Bid (Base Bid including applicable WSST), see instructions to contractors.

� Work Plan: The Contractor submitting a bid must provide the following required information with the bid form. Failure to submit such information to the satisfaction of the Owner may render the bid non-responsive.

The Contractor’s work plan is to include with description the following minimum elements: a. Installation of safety barriers and traffic control plans b. Phasing c. Project coordination meetings d. Final cleanup and closeout

� Bid is submitted in a sealed opaque envelope, identified with the following: Project Name: STA – Plaza Upgrade Project Number: 15-STA-512

Contractor’s Name: Contractor’s Address:

NOTE: If mailed, enclose sealed bid in a separate mailing envelope with the notation “Sealed Bid Enclosed”.

STATEMENT OF COMPLIANCE

The undersigned has reviewed, read and fully understands these Bid Documents and this checklist, fully complies therein, and certifies that all required elements, as marked herein and contained within the specification are included in this Bid Proposal. Authorized Signature: Date: END OF SECTION 004200

Spokane Transit Authority BID PROPOSAL FORM Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Section 004213

July 31, 2015 004213-1

SPOKANE TRANSIT AUTHORITY

1230 W. BOONE AVE

SPOKANE, WASHINGTON 99201

BID PROPOSAL – STA PLAZA UPGRADE 15-STA-512

Name of Firm (Contractor submitting bid): ______________________________________ Each bid shall constitute an offer to STA as outlined herein and no bidder may withdraw his/her bid after the hour set for the bid opening thereof except under the conditions explained in the Instructions to Contractors Section. Per RCW 39.04.320 no less than fifteen percent (15%) of the labor hours for this project are to be performed by apprentices. In compliance with the contract documents, the following bid proposal is submitted:

Base Bid “A” (Non-Rule 171 Items: Everything not listed under Rule 171 Items)

$

(Please print dollar amount in space above) (Does Not Include Washington State Sales Tax)

Base Bid “B” (Rule 171 Items: All scope of work within areas P103, P113, P116, P117, P119, P120, P121, P122, P124, P125, & P127 except HVAC distribution systems/equipment and power/data wiring:)

$

(Please print dollar amount in space above) (Rule 171, Does include Washington State Sales Tax)

TOTAL BASE BID:

$

(Please print dollar amount in space above)

Bid Alternates (Specify whether additive or deductive)

{There are no bid alternates on this project}

$ N/A

Unit Prices (Specify whether additive or deductive)

{There are no bid alternates on this project}

$ N/A

The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all bid prices within ninety (90) days of the bid date. Bidder agrees and understands that any additional taxes, permits, bonds, prevailing wage certifications, etc. Applicable to this project, have been included in the above Bid Amounts.

PRODUCTS/BRANDS OTHER THAN SPECIFIED IN BID DOCUMENT TO BE USED:

NOTE: Any deviation from technical specifications provided in bid document must be approved in advance by Owner.

Bidder Name & Signature:


Spokane Transit Authority BID RESPONSE FORMS Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Section 004215

July 31, 2015 004215-1

TO: SPOKANE TRANSIT PLANNING DEPARTMENT 1230 West Boone Avenue Spokane, Washington 99201-2686

RE: Project Number: 15-STA-512 STA Plaza Upgrade

NAME OF FIRM SUBMITTING BID:

Each bid shall constitute an offer to STA as outlined herein and no bidder may withdraw his bid after the hour set for the bid opening thereof except under the conditions explained in the Instructions to Bidders Section. EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS:

A. Having carefully examined all Bidding Documents entitled “Plaza Upgrade” by the Spokane Transit Authority, as well as the site and local conditions affecting the work, the undersigned proposes to perform all work in accordance with the Contract Documents for compensation to be computed from the enclosed bid amounts.

B. Receipt of the following Addenda to the Specifications and Drawings is hereby acknowledged:

Addendum No. Date_______________



REJECTION: STA reserves the right to reject any or all bid proposals, portions or parts thereof and to waive

minor irregularities in bidding. Special attention will be directed to the qualifications of the bidders when

considering an award of contract.

TIME FOR COMPLETION: The Contractor agrees to coordinate the completion of all construction work within Two hundred forty (240) calendar days for Phase 1, Three hundred seventy five (375) calendar days for Phase 2 and Four hundred eighty (480) calendar days for all scope of work in total. All time periods stated are relative to the date of original Notice to Proceed.

LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: Per the STA Instructions to Contractors Submitting Bids

SUBMITTAL: The “Bid Response Documents”, “Bid Proposal Form”, and “Responsibility Criteria” constitute the Bid Proposal when completed and submitted. Please do not submit the entire Invitation for Bid manual.

PRICES: Each bid item will be priced unless stated otherwise.

UNIT PRICE: Unit prices, if requested, shall govern in case of extension error.

Bidder Name:


July 31, 2015 004215-2

FREIGHT: Bid price(s) to include all freight costs to the project site.

COMPLETION OF BID PROPOSAL FORM:

All bidding procedures and other requirements of Instructions to Bidders and all Contract Documents have been followed.

ATTACHMENTS:

A. Bid security as required by the Bidding Documents in the amount of 5% of the Base Bid.

B. Detailed Work Plan based on project plans, pre-bid walk-through, project summary and specifications.

AWARD OF CONTRACT:

A. If written notice of acceptance of all or part of this submittal is mailed, sent electronically, or delivered to undersigned within ninety (90) days after opening of proposals, the undersigned will, within fifteen (15) days after date of such notice, execute and deliver the Form of Agreement as specified and furnish Insurance Certificates, Performance Bonds, and Labor and Material Payment Bonds as required.

B. If the undersigned fails to complete the above requirements, amount of Bid Security shall be forfeited to the Owner.

Bidder Name:


July 31, 2015 004215-3

I CERTIFY that no final determination of violation of RCW 50.12.070(1)(b), or 82.32.070(1)(b) has been made by the Washington State Departments of Employment Security, Labor and Industries or Revenue respectively dated within two (2) years of the date of the opening of this bid. I understand further that no bid may be submitted, considered or contract awarded for a public work to any person or entity that has a determination of violation of the above reference statutes within two (2) years from the date that a violation is finally determined and the date of this bid opening.

1. ANTI-KICKBACK: No officer or employee of STA, having the power or duty to perform an official act or action related to this submittal, shall have or acquire any interest in this submittal, or have solicited, accepted or granted a present or future gift, favor, service, or other thing of value from or to any person involved in this submittal.

DEBARRED BIDDERS: The undersigned represents that the Bidder and all officers with a controlling interest herein are not currently and have not previously been on any debarred bidders list maintained by the United States Government.

I CERTIFY that to the best of my knowledge, the information contained in this proposal is accurate and complete and that I have the legal authority to commit this Firm to a contractual agreement. I realize the final funding for any service is based upon budget levels and the approval of the Spokane Transit Authority’s Board of Directors.

SUBMITTED BY:

BIDDER NAME

(As registered with the State of Washington)

BY (Signature)

PRINTED NAME & TITLE

DATE:


July 31, 2015 004215-4

BIDDER ADMINISTRATIVE INFORMATION

BIDDER NAME: (As registered with the State of Washington)

PHYSICAL ADDRESS:

MAILING ADDRESS:

CITY, STATE, ZIP:

TELEPHONE and FAX NUMBERS, including area code:

WASHINGTON STATE CONTRACTORS REGISTRATION NUMBER:

WASHINGTON STATE ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR’S LICENSE NUMBER:

FEDERAL TAX IDENTIFICATION NUMBER:

WASHINGTON STATE UBI NUMBER:

STATE INDUSTRIAL ACCOUNT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER:

** NOTE: If a corporation, write State of Incorporation under signature. If a partnership, give full names of all partners.

INSURANCE COMPANY:

Name of company:

Mailing Address including zip code:

Name of Insurance Agent:

Telephone number including area code:

Fax number including zip code:

BONDING COMPANY:

Name of Surety:

Mailing Address including zip code:

Name of Bonding Agent:

Telephone number including area code:


July 31, 2015 004215-5

BIDDER QUALIFICATION STATEMENT

The following statements of experience, personnel, equipment, and general qualifications of the Bidder are submitted with the assurance that the owner can rely on its accuracy and truthfulness. If more space is required for your answers, please attach a continuation sheet(s) to the corresponding bid response page referencing the item number.

1. The company has been in business continuously from (month and year) .

2. The company has had experience comparable to that required under the proposed contract:

a. As a prime contractor for years.

b. As a subcontractor for years.

3. The following is a partial list of work completed that was on an order of magnitude equal to or greater in scope and complexity to that required under the proposed contract.

Year Owner & Contact Person Phone No. Location Contract Value

4. A list of supervisory personnel and/or the project manager currently employed by the Bidder that will be responsible for work on this project. Please attach a brief (1 page maximum) resume for each person listed. If a resume(s) is not included in the bid documents, the bidder agrees to furnish a resume(s) within 24 hours of notice by STA.

Name Title Years of Experience

5. Following is a listing of all projects the company has undertaken in the last five (5) years which have resulted in:

a. Arbitration or litigation.

b. Claims or violations being filed by the Federal Government or the Washington State Departments of L&I, Employment Security, or Revenue.

c. Liens being filed by suppliers or subcontractors.

Person/Entity Name: Signature of Bidder:


July 31, 2015 004215-6

BIDDER COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATION

2. PROJECT COMPLIANCE In compliance with the Invitation for Bid, bidder hereby proposes to perform all work for this project in strict accordance with the contract documents, within the time set forth therein, and at the prices bid.

3. SPECIFICATION COMPLIANCE The bidder certifies below that his bid complies in all respects with the attached specification documents, including the minimum specifications. YES NO If NO, list below, in detail, any and all deviations. LIST DEVIATIONS: Person/Entity Name: Signature of Bidder


July 31, 2015 004215-7

SUBCONTRACTOR LIST

Project Number: 15-STA-512 The Bidder will provide a list of all subcontractors anticipated to be used on this project as required per RCW 39.30.060.

Use a copy of this page as a master for attachment if necessary.

If no subcontractors are listed, it will be considered the bidder’s affirmation that it does not intend to use any subcontractors on this project.

Type of work - Name of Firm (please print): (As registered with the State of Washington) Physical Address: City, State, Zip: Telephone/Fax Numbers: Washington State Contractors Registration Number: Washington State Electrical or Plumbers License Number: Federal Tax Identification Number: Washington State UBI Number: State Industrial Account Identification Number: **Note: If a corporation, write State of Incorporation under signature. If a partnership, give full names of all partners.

Person/Entity Name: Signature of Bidder


July 31, 2015 004215-8

CERTIFICATION REGARDING DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION, INELIGIBILITY AND VOLUNTARY EXCLUSION IN A LOWER

TIER COVERED TRANSACTION

This contract is a covered transaction for purposes of 2 CFR Parts 1200 and 180. As such, the CONSULTANT or CONTRACTOR is required to comply with 2 CFR Part 180, Subpart C and must include the requirement to comply with 2 CFR Part 180, Subpart C in any lower tier covered transaction it enters into.

By signing and submitting its bid or proposal, the bidder or proposer certifies as follows:

The certification in this clause is a material representation of fact relied upon by Spokane Transit Authority. If

it is later determined that the bidder or proposer knowingly rendered an erroneous certification, in addition to

remedies available to Spokane Transit Authority, the Federal Government may pursue available remedies,

including but not limited to suspension and/or debarment. The bidder or proposer agrees to comply with the

requirements of 2 CFR Part 180, Subpart C while this offer is valid and throughout the period of any contract

that may arise from this offer. The bidder or proposer further agrees to include a provision requiring such

compliance in its lower tier covered transactions.

Company Name of Respondent: Company Address: Telephone Number: Fax Number: Email Address: Authorized Signature: Printed Name and Title: Date Signed:


July 31, 2015 004215-9

DETAILED WORK PLAN

STA Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512

Upon Receipt of Notice to Proceed:

*Reference: Bid Checklist “Work Plan” parts a through d. Person/Entity Name: Signature of Bidder


Spokane Transit Authority RESPONSIBILITY CRITERIA Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Section 004512

July 31, 2015 004512-1

SECTION 004512 – RESPONSIBILITY CRITERIA

RESPONSIBILITY CRITERIA – STA PLAZA UPGRADE 15-STA-512 1.

In accordance with RCW 39.04, before award of a public works contract, a Bidder must meet the following responsibility criteria to be considered a responsible bidder and qualified to be awarded a public works project. The Bidder must: 1. At the time of bid submittal, have a certificate of registration in compliance with chapter 18.27 RCW; 2. Have a current state unified business identifier (UBI) number; 3. If applicable, have industrial insurance coverage for the Bidder’s employees working in Washington as required in Title

51 RCW; 4. If applicable, have an employment security department number as required in Title 50 RCW; 5. If applicable, have a state excise tax registration number as required in Title 82 RCW; and 6. Not be disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or 39.12.065(3). In accordance with RCW 39.06, a public works contractor must verify responsibility criteria for each first tier subcontractor, and a subcontractor of any tier that hires other subcontractors must verify responsibility criteria for each of its subcontractors. Verification shall include that each subcontractor, at the time of subcontract execution, meets the responsibility criteria and possesses an electrical contractor license, if required by RCW 19.28, or an elevator contractor license, if required by RCW 70.87. This verification requirement, as well as the responsibility criteria, must be included in every public works contract and subcontract of every tier. Providing the following information is MANDATORY in order to meet “Responsible Bidder” requirements. Failure to provide this information may disqualify your bid as being “Non-Responsive”. If your business is not required to have

one of the following numbers, provide an explanation.

1. State of Washington Contractor Registration No.

2. State of Washington Unified Business Identifier No.

3. Employment Security Department No.

4. State Excise Tax Registration No.

5. Is the payment of Worker’s Comp (Industrial Insurance) Premiums current? If your business does not have a Worker’s Comp account with the WA State Dept. of L&I, please explain why.

[ ] Yes

[ ] No (If No, you are not eligible to bid on this project)

[ ] No Account – Explain why:

6. Are you disqualified from bidding on public works projects in the State of Washington?

[ ] Yes (If Yes, you are not eligible to bid on this project)

[ ] No

Spokane Transit Authority RESPONSIBILITY CRITERIA Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Section 004512

July 31, 2015 004512-2

The contractor submitting a bid must provide the following-required information with the bid form. Failure to submit such information to the satisfaction of the Owner may render the bid non-responsive.

Low Responsible Contractor Submitting Bid It is the intent of the Owner to award a contract to the low responsible contractor submitting a bid. In determining the contractor’s responsibility, the Owner shall consider an overall accounting of the items listed below. The contractor submitting a bid must submit the following information, demonstrating they meet the listed criteria:

Category Required Information / Criteria Checklist

Experience: Compliant with Relevant Projects

(Similar Size & Scope)

Contractor is to demonstrate a minimum of seven (7) consecutive years’ experience as a prime contractor and also having experience running publicly funded construction projects of similar size and complexity.

�

Experience: Project Manager/Superintendent

Submit resume and references of the person proposed by the contractor submitting a bid to manage the project and superintend the work. This person shall have managed projects of similar complexity and similar size, and successfully completed the project(s) within the last five (5) years.

�

References from Owners of Previous Projects

Owner may check references by contacting owners and architects of previous projects on contractor’s performance over the past three (3) years. On average, such references shall be satisfactory or better on a five-category scale with “satisfactory” at mid-scale. A reference score sheet will be utilized for rating completed projects of similar scope and value.

�

Public Agency Debarment Contractor submitting bid shall not have been debarred by any Public agency within the past two (2) years.

�


Spokane Transit Authority STA Form of Contract Between Owner and Contractor Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Section 005200

July 31, 2015 005200-2

Form of Contract Between Owner and Contractor

For Spokane Transit Authority Public Works Construction Projects

Agreement is made as of the day of in the year 2015.

Between the Owner: Spokane Transit Authority, a public agency,

Located at: 1230 West Boone Avenue,

Spokane, Washington, 99201-2686

And the Contractor:

Located at: (address)

State Contractor Registration Number:

UBI Number:

For the following project: (project name, location, and description)

The design professional: (architect or engineer)

Located at: (address)

1

SAMPLE


July 31, 2015 005200-2

The owner and contractor agree as follows:

1. The Contract Documents include:

A. This agreement signed by the Owner and the Contractor

B. The Advertisement for Bids and all Bid Documents

C. The General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions [and Special Conditions]

D. The drawings and specifications prepared by the design professional

(List the drawing number range from page 1 to ___ and the date[s]

(List the specifications number range from page 1 to ___ and the date)

E. The Invitation for Bid (IFB)

F. The addenda: (list any/all addenda by number, date and quantity of pages)

Number Date Quantity of pages

G. Changes in the work issued after execution of the agreement

H. Other documents identified as follows:

2. Contract sum: (list base individually the bid amount plus any/all alternates taken)

3. Unit prices: (list items by description, the units and limits and the price per unit)

Item(s) Units/limits Price per unit

4. Allowances included in contract sum: (list any allowances included in the contract sum)

Item Price

5. Other terms or conditions not otherwise covered in the noted previous documents.

SAMPLE


July 31, 2015 005200-3

6. In cases where communication is required between the Contractor and STA, such as further

information, furnishing of specifications, or obtaining approval of proposed work, such

communications from the Contractor shall be forwarded directly to:

Jessica Charlton

Project Manager

Spokane Transit Authority

1230 W. Boone Ave.

Spokane, WA 99201

(509) 325-6049

7. If any provision of this contract is held invalid, the remainder of this contract shall not be affected thereby,

if such remainder would then continue to conform to the terms and requirements of applicable law.

8. This Agreement may be executed in one or more counterparts, each of which shall constitute an original

Agreement but all of which together shall constitute one and the same instrument.

Owner: Contractor:

____________________________________________ ________________________________ (signature and title of authorized agent) (signature and title of authorized agent)

E. Susan Meyer____________________ _____ ________________________________ (printed name) (printed name)

CEO__________________________________ ________________________________ (title) (title)

Disadvantaged Business Enterprise

Review and Approval:

____________________________________________ (signature and title of authorized agent)

Jacque Tjards_______________________ (printed name)

DBE Liaison Officer

________________________________________ (title)


SAMPLE


July 31, 2015 005200-4


Spokane Transit Authority SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Section 006211.F

July 31, 2015 006211.F-1

SECTION 006211.F – SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL FORM

Spec Section No.: Description:

Note: Complete one submittal transmittal form for each specification section.

Transmittal A (Supplier/Subcontractor) � Resubmittal

Date Transmitted: Qty: From:

(Supplier/Sub)

(Company/Manufacturer)

Contact Name: Email: Phone: To:

(GC)

� Submitted for review and approval � Product(s) are available to meet construction schedule

Transmittal B (General Contractor) � Resubmittal Date Received by GC: Qty:

Date Transmitted to Architect: Qty: Contractor’s Stamp:

Transmittal C (Engineering Subconsultants) � Not Applicable

Date Received by Architect: Qty:

Date Transmitted to Subconsultant: Qty: ___

To: (Subconsultant)

Engineer’s Stamp:

� Review Comments Attached

Transmittal D (Architect)

Date Received by Architect: Qty:

Date Transmitted to GC: Qty: Architect’s Stamp:

� Review Comments Attached ___ Qty Retained by


Spokane Transit Authority REQUEST FOR INFORMATION Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 006313.F

July 31, 2015 006313.F -1

Project: To: Re:

R.F.I. Number: RFI - From: Date: A/E Project Number: Contract For:

Specification Section: Paragraph: Drawing Reference: Detail:

Request:

Signed by: Date: Response:

Attachments

Response From: To: Date Rec’d: Date Ret’d: Signed by: Date: Cc: Owner Consultants File

Spokane Transit Authority SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (DURING BIDDING) Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-5142 Section 006324.F

July 31, 2015 006324.F-1

Section 006324.F – Substitution Request (During the Bidding Phase)

Project: Substitution Request Number:__________________

From: _____________________________________ To: Date: _____________________________________

A&E Project Number:_________________________ Re: Contract For: ________________________________ Specification Title: _________________________________ Description: ________________________________________ Section: ________________ Page:______________ Article/Paragraph:___________________________________ Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: Phone: Trade Name: Model No.: Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, and performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. The Undersigned certifies:

• Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product.

• Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product.

• Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available.

• Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule.

• Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.

• Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the substitution. Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address:

Telephone: A/E’s REVIEW AND ACTION

Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 012500. Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 012500. Substitution rejected - Use specified materials. Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials.

Signed by: Date: Supporting Data Attached: Drawings Product Data Samples Tests Reports

Spokane Transit Authority SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (AFTER BIDDING) Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Section 006325.F

July 31, 2015 006325.F-1

Section 006325.F – Substitution Request (After the Bidding Phase)

Project:

To:

Re:

Substitution Request Number: From: Date: A/E Project Number: Contract For:

Specification Title: Description:

Section: Page: Article/Paragraph: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Address: Phone: Trade Name: Model No.: Installer: Address: Phone:

History: � New Product � 1-4 years old � 5-10 years old � More than 10 years old Differences between proposed substitution and specified product:

� Point-by-point comparative data attached – REQUIRED BY A/E Reason for not providing specified item: Similar Installation: Project:___________________________________________ Architect:_____________________________________________________ Address: __________________________________________ Owner: ______________________________________________________ _________________________________________________ Date Installed: _________________________________________________ Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: � No � Yes; explain: Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: ($ ) Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: � No � Yes [ADD] [Deduct] Days

Supporting Data Attached: Drawings Product Data Samples Tests Reports

Spokane Transit Authority SUBSTITUTION REQUEST (AFTER BIDDING) Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Section 006325.F

July 31, 2015 006325.F-2

The Undersigned certifies:

• Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product.

• Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product.

• Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available.

• Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule.

• Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.

• Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the substitution.

Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address:

Telephone: Attachments: A/E’s REVIEW AND ACTION

Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 012500. Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 012500. Substitution rejected - Use specified materials. Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials.

Signed by: Date:

Additional comments: � Contractor � Subcontractor � Supplier � Manufacturer � A/E �

Spokane Transit Authority FIELD AUTHORIZATION Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Section 006336.F

July 31, 2015 006336.F-1

Spokane Transit Authority

TO: (CONTRACTOR)

REVISED:

When authorized by E&AS, you are directed to proceed with work as described below and/or detailed on the attachments referred hereto:

INCREASE NO CHANGE DECREASE

CALENDAR DAYS

Cost data required by one of the following methods in accordance with the General and Supplemental Conditions.

UNIT PRICE

(Method of Measurement)

DETAILED COST BREAKDOWN

w ithin (Ow ner's Rep.)

(CONTRACTOR) DATE:

DATE

DATE

DATE

CALENDAR DAYS

PROJECT NO.:

The above amount covers the maximum amount required in connection w ith the change.

ACCEPTED BY

ACTUAL COST: T&M w ith daily w ork sheets that list the name, trade, firm, hours, itemized materials, equipment and other job related costs.

Contractor must provide verif ication of hours to:

FIELD AUTHORIZATION PROJECT TITLE

PROPOSAL REQUEST DATE:

FA #

days from the day w ork w as performed.

The foregoing amount covers everything required in connection with the change. All other provisions of the contract remain in full force and effect. We understand

that work shall not begin prior to authorization.

Spokane Transit Authority hereby accepts the foregoing proposal and authorizes the performance of the changes specified.

This constitutes a change order to the contract only when authorizing signature is affixed.

We have carefully examined this proposal and find the unit prices and estimated maximum cost to be reasonable.

APPROVED BY:

FUNDING VERIFICATION BY:

AUTHORIZED BY:

W

OR

K D

ES

CR

IPT

ION

AN

D M

AX

IMU

M C

OS

TC

OS

T C

OLLE

CT

ION

DIR

EC

TIO

N T

O P

RO

CE

ED

REASON FOR CHANGE:

CHANGE ORIGINATED BY:

(company)(name)

It is our opinion that this work will result in a change to the contract. You are authorized as follows:

INCREASE

NO CHANGE

DECREASE

TO THE CONTRACT AMOUNT WITHIN THE ESTIMATED MAXIMUM INCREASE OF: $

TO THE CONTRACT AMOUNT WITHIN THE ESTIMATED MAXIMUM DECREASE OF: $

NEW CONTRACT COM PLETION DATE:

Spokane Transit Authority CHANGE ORDER Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Section 006336.F

July 31, 2015 006336.F-2

COP No.

TO: (CONTRACTOR)

REVISED:

REASON FOR CHANGE

DATE PROPOSAL REQUIRED CHANGE ORIGINATED BY

PROPOSAL REQUESTED BY

WE PROPOSE TO PERFORM ALL CHANGES DESCRIBED IN THE PROPOSAL REQUEST FOR:

TO: (A/E) TO: PM (STA)

CONTRACT PRICE CHANGE: NO CHANGE INCREASE DECREASE

OF

State & County Sales Tax Not Included)

In accordance w ith the General Conditions, Cost Estimate Detail Sheet(s) are attached hereto

CONTRACT COM PLETION DATE: NO CHANGE INCREASE DECREASE OF CALENDAR DAYS

BY: DATE:

TO: SPOKANE TRANSIT AUTHORITY

A/E DATE COST VERIFICATION DATE

AGENCY DATE PROJECT M ANAGER DATE

CONTRACT SUMMARY

ORIGINAL CONTRACT SUM PREVIOUS TOTAL

PREVIOUS ADDITIONS CHANGE AMOUNT

PREVIOUS DEDUCTIONS NEW TOTAL

Days #VALUE!PERCENT CHANGE FROM ORIGINAL CONTRACT AMOUNT

You are directed to prepare a cost proposal for the work described below and/or detailed on the attachments referred to:

PROPOSAL REQUEST DATE:

PROPOSAL

P

RO

PO

SA

L R

EQ

UE

ST

We have carefully examined this proposal and find the cost to be reasonable. Therefore, we recommend acceptance.

$

$

#VALUE!

#VALUE!$

$0.00

NEW CONTRACT COMPLETION DATE

R

EC

OM

ME

ND

AT

ION

A

UT

HO

RIZ

AT

ION

C

ON

TR

AC

TO

R P

RO

PO

SA

L

AUTHORIZING SIGNATURE DATE

Spokane Transit Authority hereby accepts the foregoing proposal and authorizes the performance of the changes specified.

CONTRACTOR

The foregoing amount covers everything required in connection with the change. All other provisions of the contract remain in full force and effect. We understand that

work shall not begin prior to authorization.

The final amount of this change order differs from the cost proposal. Invoices incorporating this change order constitutes acceptance by the contractor as total

reimbersement due in connection with this change order.

This constitutes a change order to the contract only when authorizing signature is affixed.

Spokane Transit Authority General Conditions for STA Construction Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Section 007200

July 31, 2015 007200-1

SECTION 007200 – General Conditions for Spokane Transit Authority Facility Construction

Contract # 15-STA-512

The following is adopted and incorporated as STA General Conditions applicable to facilities construction. Although these conditions are organized consistent with the General Conditions for Washington State Facility Construction, the provisions herein are not identical to the Washington State provisions. Please review these

General Conditions carefully.


July 31, 2015 007200-2

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page

Part 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS ..................................... 3 1.01 DEFINITIONS ................................................... 3 1.02 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE .............................. 4 1.03 EXECUTION AND INTENT ............................. 4

Part 2 - INSURANCE AND BONDS ................................. 4 2.01 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE .. 4 2.02 COVERAGE LIMITS ........................................ 5 2.03 INSURANCE COVERAGE CERTIFICATES ... 5 2.04 PAYMENT AND PERFORMANCE BONDS ... 5 2.05 ALTERNATIVE SURETY ................................ 5 2.06 BUILDER’S RISK ............................................. 5

Part 3 - TIME AND SCHEDULE ...................................... 6 3.01 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION .................... 6 3.02 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE ........................ 6 3.03 OWNER’S RIGHT TO SUSPEND THE

WORK FOR CONVENIENCE .......................... 6 3.04 OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK

FOR CAUSE ...................................................... 7 3.05 DELAY ............................................................... 7 3.06 NOTICE TO OWNER OF LABOR DISPUTES 8 3.07 DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO ACHIEVE

TIMELY COMPLETION ................................... 8

Part 4 - SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS ................................................... 8

4.01 DISCREPANCIES AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT REVIEW ..................................... 8

4.02 PROJECT RECORD .......................................... 9 4.03 SHOP DRAWINGS ............................................ 9 4.04 ORGANIZATION OF SPECIFICATIONS ...... 10 4.05 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS,

SPECIFICATIONS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS ................................................. 10

Part 5 - PERFORMANCE ................................................ 10 5.01 CONTRACTOR CONTROL AND

SUPERVISION ................................................ 10 5.02 PERMITS, FEES, AND NOTICES .................. 11 5.03 PATENTS AND ROYALTIES ........................ 11 5.04 PREVAILING WAGES ................................... 11 5.05 HOURS OF LABOR ........................................ 11 5.06 NONDISCRIMINATION ................................. 12 5.07 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ............................... 12 5.08 OPERATIONS, MATERIAL HANDLING,

AND STORAGE AREAS ................................ 13 5.09 PRIOR NOTICE OF EXCAVATION .............. 14 5.10 UNFORESEEN PHYSICAL CONDITIONS ... 14 5.11 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES,

EQUIPMENT, VEGETATION, UTILITIES, AND IMPROVEMENTS ................................. 14

5.12 LAYOUT OF WORK ....................................... 14

TABLE OF CONTENTS Page

5.13 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT .................... 14 5.14 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF PREMISES

AND UTILITY SERVICES ............................. 15 5.15 TESTS AND INSPECTION ............................. 15 5.16 CORRECTION OF NONCONFORMING

WORK .............................................................. 15 5.17 CLEAN UP ....................................................... 16

5.18 ACCESS TO WORK AND

COMMUNICATIONS REGARDING PROJECT STATUS ......................................... 16

5.19 OTHER CONTRACTS .................................... 17 5.20 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS ...... 17 5.21 WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION ............. 18 5.22 INDEMNIFICATION ...................................... 18

Part 6 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION .................... 19 6.01 CONTRACT SUM ........................................... 19 6.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES .............................. 19 6.03 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ................... 19 6.04 PROGRESS PAYMENTS ............................... 20 6.05 PAYMENTS WITHHELD............................... 20 6.06 RETAINAGE AND BOND CLAIM RIGHTS 21 6.07 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION .................... 21 6.08 PRIOR OCCUPANCY ..................................... 21 6.09 FINAL INSPECTION, FINAL COMPLETION,

ACCEPTANCE, AND PAYMENT (PROJECT CLOSE-OUT) .................................................. 21

Part 7 - CHANGES .......................................................... 22 7.01 CHANGE IN THE WORK .............................. 22 7.02 CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT SUM............ 23 7.03 CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT TIME .......... 28

Part 8 - CLAIMS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION ......... 29 8.03 CLAIMS AUDITS ........................................... 31

Part 9 - TERMINATION OF THE WORK ...................... 32 9.01 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CAUSE .. 32 9.02 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR

CONVENIENCE .............................................. 32

Part 10 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS .................... 33 10.01 GOVERNING LAW ........................................ 33 10.02 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS ...................... 33 10.03 MEANING OF WORDS .................................. 33 10.04 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES ............................. 33 10.05 CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION ................. 33 10.06 TIME COMPUTATIONS ................................ 33 10.07 RECORDS RETENTION ................................ 33 10.08 THIRD-PARTY AGREEMENTS .................... 33 10.09 ANTITRUST ASSIGNMENT ......................... 33


July 31, 2015 007200-3

- GENERAL PROVISIONS

1.01 DEFINITIONS

A. “Application for Payment” means a written request submitted by Contractor to Owner or, if applicable, A/E for payment of Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and approved Schedule of Values, supported by such substantiating data as Owner or, if applicable, A/E may require.

B. “Architect,” “Engineer,” or “A/E” means a person or entity lawfully entitled to practice architecture or engineering, representing Owner within the limits of its delegated authority.

C. “Award” means the formal decision by the Owner notifying a responsible Bidder with the lowest responsive bid of the Owner’s acceptance of the bid and intent to enter into a contract with the Bidder.

D. “Change Order” means a written instrument signed by Owner and Contractor stating their agreement upon all of the following: (1) a change in the Work; (2) the amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if any, and (3) the extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any.

E. “Claim” means Contractor’s exclusive remedy for resolving disputes with Owner regarding the terms of a Change Order or a request for equitable adjustment, as more fully set forth in Part 8.

F. “Contract Award Amount” is the sum of the Base Bid and any accepted Alternates.

G. “Contract Documents” means the Advertisement for Bids, Instructions for Bidders, completed Bid Form, General Conditions, Modifications to the General Conditions, Supplemental Conditions, Special Conditions, Contract, other Special Forms, Drawings and Specifications, and all addenda and modifications thereof.

H. “Contract Sum” is the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Document. Except as described below, the Contract Sum includes all taxes imposed by law and properly chargeable to the Work. The Contract Sum does not include Washington State sales tax.

I. “Contract Time” is the number of calendar days allotted in the Contract Documents for achieving Substantial Completion of the Work.

J. “Contractor” means the person or entity who has agreed with Owner to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor’s duties and obligations flow down and become duties and obligations of Subcontractors.

K. “Day(s)”: Unless otherwise specified, day(s) shall mean calendar day(s).

L. “Drawings” are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location, and dimensions of the Work, and may include plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams.

M. “Final Acceptance” means the written acceptance issued to Contractor by Owner after Contractor has completed the requirements of the Contract Documents, as more fully set forth in Section 6.09E.

N. “Final Completion” means that the Work is fully and finally complete in accordance with the Contract Documents, as more fully set forth in Section 6.09D.

O. “Force Majeure” means those acts entitling Contractor to request an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time, as more fully set forth in Section 3.05A.

P. “Notice” means a written notice which has been delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended or, if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, to the last business address known to the party giving notice.

Q. ‘‘Notice to Proceed” means a notice from Owner to Contractor that defines the date on which the Contract Time begins to run.

R. “Owner” means the Spokane Transit Authority (“STA”) or its authorized representative with the authority to enter into, administer, and/or terminate the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and make related determinations and findings.

S. “Person” means a corporation, partnership, business association of any kind, trust, company, or individual.

T. “Prior Occupancy” means Owner’s use of all or parts of the Project before Substantial Completion, as more fully set forth in Section 6.08A.

U. “Progress Schedule” means a schedule of the Work, in a form satisfactory to Owner, as further set forth in Section 3.02B.

V. “Project” means the total construction of which the Work performed in accordance with the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by Owner or by separate contractors.

W. “Project Manual” means the volume usually assembled for the Work which may include the bidding requirements, sample forms, and other Contract Documents

X. “Project Record” means the separate set of Drawings and Specifications as further set forth in Section 4.02A.

Y. “Schedule of Values” means a written breakdown allocating the total Contract Sum to each principal category of Work, in such detail as requested by Owner.


July 31, 2015 007200-4

Z. “Specifications” are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services.

AA. “Subcontract” means a contract entered into by Subcontractor for the purpose of obtaining supplies, materials, equipment, or services of any kind for or in connection with the Work.

BB. “Subcontractor” means any person, other than Contractor, who agrees to furnish or furnishes any supplies, materials, equipment, or services of any kind in connection with the Work.

CC. “Substantial Completion” means that stage in the progress of the Work when the construction is sufficiently complete, as more fully set forth in Section 6.07.

DD. “Work” means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, and includes, but is not limited to, labor, materials, supplies, equipment, services, permits, and the manufacture and fabrication of components, performed, furnished, or provided in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.02 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE

Any conflict or inconsistency in the Contract Documents shall be resolved by giving the documents precedence in the following order.

1. FTA Regulations and Requirements.

2. Signed Contract, including any Change Orders.

2. Supplemental Conditions.

3. Modifications to the General Conditions.

4. General Conditions.

5. Specifications – Provisions in Division 1 shall take precedence over provisions of any other Division.

6. Drawings -- In case of conflict within the Drawings, large scale drawings shall take precedence over small scale drawings.

7. Signed and Completed Bid Form.

8. Instructions to Bidders.

9. Advertisement for Bids.

1.03 EXECUTION AND INTENT

Contractor Representations: Contractor makes the following representations to Owner:

1. Contract Sum reasonable: The Contract Sum is reasonable compensation for the Work and the Contract Time is adequate for the performance of the Work, as represented by the Contract Documents;

2. Contractor familiar with project: Contractor has carefully reviewed the Bid Documents, Contract Documents, visited and examined the Project site, become familiar with the local conditions in which the Work is to be performed, and satisfied itself as to the nature, location, character, quality and quantity of the Work, the labor, materials, equipment, goods, supplies, work, services and other items to be furnished and all other requirements of the Contract Documents, as well as the surface and subsurface conditions and other matters that may be encountered at the Project site or affect performance of the Work or the cost or difficulty thereof;

3. Contractor financially capable: Contractor is financially solvent, able to pay its debts as they mature, and possesses sufficient working capital to complete the Work and perform Contractor’s obligations required by the Contract Documents; and

4. Contractor can complete Work: Contractor is able to furnish the plant, tools, materials, supplies, equipment and labor required to complete the Work and perform the obligations required by the Contract Documents and has sufficient experience and competence to do so.

- INSURANCE AND BONDS

2.01 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE

General Insurance Requirements: Prior to commencement of the Work, Contractor shall obtain all the insurance required by the Contract Documents and provide evidence satisfactory to Owner that such insurance has been procured. Review of the Contractor’s insurance by Owner shall not relieve or decrease the liability of Contractor. Companies writing the insurance to be obtained by this part shall be licensed to do business under Chapter 48 RCW or comply with the Surplus Lines Law of the State of Washington. Contractor shall include in its bid the cost of all insurance and bond costs required to complete the base bid work and accepted alternates. Insurance carriers providing insurance in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be acceptable to Owner, and its A. M. Best rating shall be indicated on the insurance certificates. A. Term of Insurance Coverage: Contractor shall maintain

the following insurance coverage during the Work and for one year after Final Acceptance. Contractor shall also maintain the following insurance coverage during the performance of any corrective Work required by Section 5.16.


July 31, 2015 007200-5

1. General Liability Insurance: Commercial General Liability (CGL) on an Occurrence Form. Coverage shall include, but not be limited to:

Completed operations/products liability;

Explosion, collapse*, and underground; and

Employer’s liability coverage.

2. Automobile Liability Insurance: Automobile liability.

B. Industrial Insurance compliance: Contractor shall comply with the Washington State Industrial Insurance Act and, if applicable, the Federal Longshoremen’s and Harbor Workers’ Act and the Jones Act.

C. Insurance to protect for the following: All insurance coverages shall protect against claims for damages for personal and bodily injury or death, as well as claims for property damage, which may arise from operations in connection with the Work whether such operations are by Contractor or any Subcontractor. D. Owner as Additional Insured: All insurance coverages shall be endorsed to include Owner as an additional named insured for Work performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, and all insurance certificates shall evidence the Owner as an additional insured.

2.02 COVERAGE LIMITS

Insurance Amounts: The coverage limits shall be as follows:

A. Limits of Liability shall not be less than $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit for Bodily Injury and Property Damage (other than Automobile Liability) Each Occurrence; Personal Injury and Advertising Liability Each Occurrence.

B. $2,000,000 Combined Single Limit Annual General Aggregate.

C. $2,000,000 Annual Aggregate for Products and Completed Operations Liability.

D. $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit for Automobile Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability, Each Accident or Loss.

2.03 INSURANCE COVERAGE CERTIFICATES

A. Certificate required: Prior to commencement of the Work, Contractor shall furnish to Owner a completed certificate of insurance coverage.

B. List Project information: All insurance certificates shall name Owner’s Project number and Project title.

C. Cancellation provisions: All insurance certificates shall specifically require 45 Days prior notice to Owner of

cancellation or any material change, except 30 Days for surplus line insurance.

2.04 PAYMENT AND PERFORMANCE BONDS

Conditions for bonds: Payment and performance bonds for 100% of the Contract Award Amount plus state sales tax, shall be furnished for the Work, using the Payment Bond and Performance Bond form published by and available from the American Institute of Architects (AIA) – form A312 (or current version of the same). Prior to execution of a Change Order that, cumulatively with previous Change Orders, increases the Contract Award Amount by 15% or more, the Contractor shall provide either new payment and performance bonds for the revised Contract Sum, or riders to the existing payment and performance bonds increasing the amount of the bonds. The Contractor shall likewise provide additional bonds or riders when subsequent Change Orders increase the Contract Sum by 15% or more. No payment or performance bond is required if the contract Sum is $35,000 or less and Contractor agrees that Owner may, in lieu of the bond, retain 50% of the Contract Sum for the period allowed by RCW 39.08.010.

2.05 ALTERNATIVE SURETY

When alternative surety required: Contractor shall promptly furnish payment and performance bonds from an alternative surety as required to protect Owner and persons supplying labor or materials required by the Contract Documents if:

A. Owner has a reasonable objection to the surety; or

B. Any surety fails to furnish reports on its financial condition if requested by Owner.

2.06 BUILDER’S RISK

A. Contractor to buy Property Insurance: Contractor shall purchase and maintain property insurance in the amount of the Contract Sum including all Change Orders for the Work on a replacement cost basis until Substantial Completion. For projects not involving New Building Construction, “Installation Floater” is an acceptable substitute for the Builder’s Risk Insurance. The insurance shall cover the interest of Owner, Contractor, and any Subcontractors, as their interests may appear.

B. Losses covered: Contractor property insurance shall be placed on an “all risk” basis and insure against the perils of fire and extended coverage and physical loss or damage including theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, false work, temporary buildings, debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Owner’s and, if applicable, A/E’s services and expenses required as a result of an insured loss.

C. Waiver of subrogation rights: Owner and Contractor waive all subrogation rights against each other, any Subcontractors, A/E, A/E’s Subconsultants, separate contractors, if any, and any of their subcontractors, for


July 31, 2015 007200-6

damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this section or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by Owner as fiduciary. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged.

- TIME AND SCHEDULE

3.01 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION

Contractor to meet schedule: Contractor shall diligently prosecute the Work, with adequate forces, achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time, and achieve Final Completion within a reasonable period thereafter.

3.02 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Preliminary Progress Schedule: Unless otherwise provided in the Contract, supplemental conditions, or modifications to these General Conditions, Contractor shall, within 14 Days after issuance of the Notice to Proceed, submit a preliminary Progress Schedule. The Progress Schedule shall show the sequence in which Contractor proposes to perform the Work, and the dates on which Contractor plans to start and finish major portions of the Work, including dates for shop drawings and other submittals, and for acquiring materials and equipment.

B. Form of Progress Schedule: The Progress Schedule shall be created, maintained and edited using MS Project software or similar software identified and agreed to by and between the parties. The scheduling of construction is the responsibility of the Contractor and is included in the contract to assure adequate planning and execution of the work. The schedule will be used to evaluate progress of the work for payment based on the Schedule of Values. The schedule shall show the Contractor’s planned order and interdependence of activities, and sequence of work. As a minimum the schedule shall include:

• Date of Notice to Proceed;

• Activities (resources, durations, individual responsible for activity, early starts, late starts, early finishes, late finishes, etc.);

• Utility Shutdowns;

• Interrelationships and dependence of activities;

• Planned vs. actual status for each activity;

• Substantial completion;

• Punch list;

• Final inspection;

• Final completion, and

• Float time

The Schedule Duration shall be based on the Contract Time of Completion listed on the Bid Proposal form. The Owner shall not be obligated to accept any Early Completion

Schedule suggested by the Contractor. The Contract Time for Completion shall establish the Schedule Completion Date. If the Contractor feels that the work can be completed in less than the Specified Contract Time, then the Surplus Time shall be considered Project Float. This Float time shall be shown on the Project Schedule. It shall be available to accommodate changes in the work and unforeseen conditions.

Neither the Contractor nor the Owner have exclusive right to this Float Time. It belongs to the project.

C. Owner comments on Progress Schedule: Owner shall return comments on the preliminary Progress Schedule to Contractor within 14 Days of receipt. Review by Owner of Contractor’s schedule does not constitute an approval or acceptance of Contractor’s construction means, methods, or sequencing, or its ability to complete the Work within the Contract Time. Contractor shall revise and resubmit its schedule, as necessary. Owner may withhold a portion of progress payments until a Progress Schedule has been submitted which meets the requirements of this section.

D. Monthly updates and compliance with Progress

Schedule: Contractor shall utilize and comply with the Progress Schedule. On a monthly basis, or as otherwise directed by Owner, Contractor shall submit an updated Progress Schedule at its own expense to Owner indicating actual progress. If, in the opinion of Owner, Contractor is not in conformance with the Progress Schedule for reasons other than acts of Force Majeure as identified in Section 3.05, Contractor shall take such steps as are necessary to bring the actual completion dates of its work activities into conformance with the Progress Schedule, and if directed by Owner, Contractor shall submit a corrective action plan or revise the Progress Schedule to reconcile with the actual progress of the Work.

E. Contractor to notify Owner of delays: Contractor shall promptly notify Owner in writing of any actual or anticipated event which is delaying or could delay achievement of any milestone or performance of any critical path activity of the Work. Contractor shall indicate the expected duration of the delay, the anticipated effect of the delay on the Progress Schedule, and the action being or to be taken to correct the problem. Provision of such notice does not relieve Contractor of its obligation to complete the Work within the Contract Time.

3.03 OWNER’S RIGHT TO SUSPEND THE WORK FOR CONVENIENCE

A. Owner may suspend Work: Owner may, at its sole discretion, order Contractor, in writing, to suspend all or any part of the Work for up to 90 Days, or for such longer period as mutually agreed.

B. Compliance with suspension; Owner’s options: Upon receipt of a written notice suspending the Work, Contractor shall immediately comply with its terms and take all reasonable steps to minimize the incurrence of cost of performance directly attributable to such


July 31, 2015 007200-7

suspension. Within a period up to 90 Days after the notice is delivered to Contractor, or within any extension of that period to which the parties shall have agreed, Owner shall either:

1. Cancel the written notice suspending the Work; or

2. Terminate the Work covered by the notice as provided in the termination provisions of Part 9.

C. Resumption of Work: If a written notice suspending the Work is cancelled or the period of the notice or any

extension thereof expires, Contractor shall resume Work.

D. Equitable Adjustment for suspensions: Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time, or Contract Sum, or both, for increases in the time or cost of performance directly attributable to such suspension, provided Contractor complies with all requirements set forth in Part 7.

3.04 OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK FOR CAUSE

A. Owner may stop Work for Contractor’s failure to

perform: If Contractor fails or refuses to perform its obligations in accordance with the Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor, in writing, to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until satisfactory corrective action has been taken.

B. No Equitable Adjustment for Contractor’s failure to

perform: Contractor shall not be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum for any increased cost or time of performance attributable to Contractor’s failure or refusal to perform or from any reasonable remedial action taken by Owner based upon such failure.

C. Opportunity to Cure: STA in its sole discretion may, in the case of termination for breach or default, allow the Contractor an appropriate period of time, as determined by STA, in which to cure the defect of goods or service. In such case, the notice of termination will state the nature of the breach or default, the time period in which cure is permitted and other appropriate conditions. If the Contractor fails to remedy to STA’s satisfaction the breach or default of any of the terms, covenants, or conditions of this contract within the stated period of time for remedy, STA shall have the right to terminate the contract without any further obligation to the Contractor. Any such termination for default shall not in any way operate to preclude STA from also pursuing all available legal remedies against the Contractor and its sureties for said breach or default.

D. Waiver of Remedies for any Breach. In the event that STA elects to waive its remedies for any breach by the Contractor of any covenant, term or condition of this contract, such waiver by STA shall not limit STA’s legal remedies for any succeeding breach of that or of any other term, covenant, or condition of this contract.

3.05 DELAY

A. Force Majeure actions not a default; Force Majeure

defined: Any delay in or failure of performance by Owner or Contractor, other than the payment of money, shall not constitute a default hereunder if and to the extent the cause for such delay or failure of performance was unforeseeable and beyond the control of the party (“Force Majeure”). Acts of Force Majeure include, but are not limited to:

1. Acts of God or the public enemy;

2. Acts or omissions of any government entity;

3. Fire or other casualty for which Contractor is not responsible;

4. Quarantine or epidemic;

5. Strike or defensive lockout;

6. Unusually severe weather, in excess of weather conditions experienced within the area any time in the preceding ten years:

A. Monthly rainfall in excess of the highest monthly rainfall experienced for the same month.

B. Annual rainfall in excess of the highest annual rainfall experienced.

C. Monthly snowfall in excess of the highest monthly snowfall experienced for the same month.

D. Annual snowfall in excess of the highest annual snowfall experienced.

E. Average high temperatures, for the summer months, in excess of the highest temperatures experienced.

F. Average low temperatures for the winter months, lower than the lowest average temperatures experienced.

7. Unusual delay in receipt of supplies or

products which were ordered and expedited and for which no substitute reasonably acceptable to Owner was available.

B. Contract Time adjustment for Force Majeure: Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time for changes in the time of performance directly attributable to an act of Force Majeure, provided it makes a request for equitable adjustment according to Section 7.03. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum resulting from an act of Force Majeure.

C. Contract Time or Contract Sum adjustment if Owner

at fault: STA reserves the right, in its sole discretion, to extend the time for performance of the services contemplated by this Agreement.


July 31, 2015 007200-8

D. No Contract Time or Contract Sum adjustment if

Contractor at fault: Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Time or in the Contract Sum for any delay or failure of performance to the extent such delay or failure was caused by Contractor or anyone for whose acts Contractor is responsible.

E. Contract Time adjustment only for concurrent fault: To the extent any delay or failure of performance was concurrently caused by the Owner and Contractor, Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time for that portion of the delay or failure of performance that was concurrently caused, provided it makes a request for equitable adjustment according to Section 7.03, but shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Sum.

F. Contractor to mitigate delay impacts: Contractor shall make all reasonable efforts to prevent and mitigate the effects of any delay, whether occasioned by an act of Force Majeure or otherwise.

3.06 NOTICE TO OWNER OF LABOR DISPUTES

A. Contractor to notify Owner of labor disputes: If Contractor has knowledge that any actual or potential labor dispute is delaying or threatens to delay timely performance in accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor shall immediately give notice, including all relevant information, to Owner.

B. Pass through notification provisions to Subcontractors: Contractor agrees to insert a provision in its Subcontracts and to require insertion in all sub-subcontracts, that in the event timely performance of any such contract is delayed or threatened by delay by any actual or potential labor dispute, the Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor shall immediately notify the next higher tier Subcontractor or Contractor, as the case may be, of all relevant information concerning the dispute.

3.07 DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO ACHIEVE TIMELY COMPLETION

A. Liquidated Damages

1. Reason for Liquidated Damages: Timely performance and completion of the Work is essential to Owner and time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence. Owner will incur serious and substantial damages if Substantial Completion of the Work does not occur within the Contract Time. However, it would be difficult if not impossible to determine the exact amount of such damages. Consequently, provisions for liquidated damages are included in the Contract Documents.

2. Calculation of Liquidated Damages

amount: The liquidated damage amounts set forth in the Contract Documents will be

assessed not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for breach of the Contract Documents. This amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain. This amount shall be construed as the actual amount of damages sustained by the Owner, and may be retained by the Owner and deducted from periodic payments to the Contractor.

3. Contractor responsible even if Liquidated

Damages assessed: Assessment of liquidated damages shall not release Contractor from any further obligations or liabilities pursuant to the Contract Documents.

B. Actual Damages

Calculation of Actual Damages: Actual damages will be assessed for failure to achieve Final Completion within the time provided. Actual damages will be calculated on the basis of direct architectural, administrative, and other related costs attributable to the Project from the date when Final Completion should have been achieved, based on the date Substantial Completion is actually achieved, to the date Final Completion is actually achieved. Owner may offset these costs against any payment due Contractor.

- SPECIFICATIONS, DRAWINGS, AND OTHER

DOCUMENTS

4.01 DISCREPANCIES AND CONTRACT DOCUMENT REVIEW

A. Specifications and Drawings are basis of the Work: The intent of the Specifications and Drawings is to describe a complete Project to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, transportation, permits, and supplies, and perform the Work required in accordance with the Drawings, Specifications, and other provisions of the Contract Documents.

B. Parts of the Contract Documents are complementary: The Contract Documents are complementary. What is required by one part of the Contract Documents shall be binding as if required by all. Anything mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or shown on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both.

C. Contractor to report discrepancies in Contract

Documents: Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by Owner. If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor finds a conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission in the Contract Documents, it shall promptly and before proceeding with the Work affected thereby, report such conflict, error,


July 31, 2015 007200-9

inconsistency, or omission to Owner and, if applicable, A/E in writing.

D. Contractor knowledge of discrepancy in documents –

responsibility: Contractor shall do no Work without applicable Drawings, Specifications, or written modifications, or Shop Drawings where required, unless instructed to do so in writing by Owner. If Contractor performs any construction activity, and it knows or reasonably should have known that any of the Contract Documents contain a conflict, error, inconsistency, or omission, Contractor shall be responsible for the performance and shall bear the cost for its correction.

E. Contractor to perform Work implied by Contract

Documents: Contractor shall provide any work or materials the provision of which is clearly implied and is within the scope of the Contract Documents even if the Contract Documents do not mention them specifically.

F. Interpretation questions referred to Owner: Questions regarding interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents shall be referred to the Owner and, if applicable, the A/E.

4.02 PROJECT RECORD

A. Contractor to maintain Project Record Drawings and

Specifications: Contractor shall legibly mark in ink on a separate set of the Drawings and Specifications all actual construction, including depths of foundations, horizontal and vertical locations of internal and underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to permanent visible and accessible surface improvements, field changes of dimensions and details, actual suppliers, manufacturers and trade names, models of installed equipment, and Change Order Proposals (“COP”). This separate set of Drawings and Specifications shall be the “Project Record.”

B. Update Project Record weekly and keep on site: The Project Record shall be maintained on the project site throughout the construction and shall be clearly labeled “PROJECT RECORD.” The Project Record shall be updated at least weekly noting all changes and shall be available to Owner at all times.

C. Final Project Record to Owner before Final

Acceptance: Contractor shall submit the completed and finalized Project Record to Owner prior to Final Acceptance.

4.03 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Definition of Shop Drawings: “Shop Drawings” means documents and other information required to be submitted to Owner and by Contractor pursuant to the Contract Documents, showing in detail: the proposed fabrication and assembly of structural elements; and the installation (i.e. form, fit, and attachment details) of materials and equipment. Shop Drawings include, but are not limited to, drawings, diagrams, layouts, schematics, descriptive

literature, illustrations, schedules, performance and test data, samples, and similar materials furnished by Contractor to explain in detail specific portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents. For materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work, Contractor submittal shall include the name of the manufacturer, the model number, and other information concerning the performance, capacity, nature, and rating of the item. When directed, Contractor shall submit all samples at its own expense. Owner may duplicate, use, and disclose Shop Drawings provided in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. Approval of Shop Drawings by Contractor and

Owner: Contractor shall coordinate all Shop Drawings, and review them for accuracy, completeness, and compliance with the Contract Documents and shall indicate its approval thereon as evidence of such coordination and review. Where required by law, Shop Drawings shall be stamped by an appropriate professional licensed by the state of Washington. Shop Drawings submitted to Owner without evidence of Contractor’s approval shall be returned for resubmission. Contractor shall review, approve, and submit Shop Drawings with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of Owner or separate contractors. Contractor’s submittal schedule shall allow a reasonable time for Owner and, if applicable, A/E review. Owner and, if applicable, A/E will review, approve, or take other appropriate action on the Shop Drawings. Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of Shop Drawings until the respective submittal has been reviewed and the Owner and, if applicable, A/E has approved or taken other appropriate action. Owner and, if applicable, A/E shall respond to Shop Drawing submittals with reasonable promptness. Any Work by Contractor shall be in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings. Submittals made by Contractor which are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned without action.

C. Contractor not relieved of responsibility when Shop

Drawings approved: Approval, or other appropriate action with regard to Shop Drawings, by Owner and, if applicable, A/E shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for any errors or omissions in such Shop Drawings, nor from responsibility for compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Unless specified in the Contract Documents, review by Owner and, if applicable, A/E shall not constitute an approval of the safety precautions employed by Contractor during construction, or constitute an approval of Contractor’s means or methods of construction. If Contractor fails to obtain approval before installation, and the item or work is subsequently rejected, Contractor shall be responsible for all costs of correction.

D. Variations between Shop Drawings and Contract

Drawings: If Shop Drawings show variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall describe such variations in writing, separate from the Shop Drawings, at the time it submits the Shop Drawings containing such variations. If Owner and, if applicable, A/E approves any such variation, an appropriate Change Order will be issued. If the variation is minor and does not involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract


July 31, 2015 007200-10

Time, a Change Order need not be issued; however, the modification shall be recorded upon the Project Record.

E. Contractor to submit 5 copies of Shop Drawings: Unless otherwise provided in Division I, Contractor shall submit to Owner and, if applicable, A/E for approval 5 copies of all Shop Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, 3 sets of all Shop Drawings shall be retained by Owner and 2 sets shall be returned to Contractor.

4.04 ORGANIZATION OF SPECIFICATIONS

Specification organization by trade: Specifications are prepared in sections which conform generally with trade practices. These sections are for Owner and Contractor convenience and shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among the Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of the Work to be performed by any trade.

4.05 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS

A. Owner or, if applicable, A/E, not Contractor, owns

Copyright of Drawings and Specifications: The Drawings, Specifications, and other documents prepared by Owner or, if applicable, A/E (the “Preparer”) are instruments of Preparer’s service through which the Work to be executed by Contractor is described. Neither Contractor nor any Subcontractor shall own or claim a copyright in the Drawings, Specifications, and other documents prepared by Preparer, and Preparer shall be deemed the author of them and will, along with any rights of Owner, retain all common law, statutory, and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright. All copies of these documents, except Contractor’s set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to Owner or, if applicable, A/E, on request, upon completion of the Work.

B. Drawings and Specifications to be used only for this

Project: The Drawings, Specifications, and other documents prepared by the Owner or, if applicable, A/E, and copies thereof furnished to Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by Contractor or any Subcontractor on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of Owner and, if applicable, A/E. Contractor and Subcontractors are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications, and other documents prepared by Owner or, if applicable, A/E appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work.

C. Shop Drawing license granted to Owner: Contractor and all Subcontractors grant a non-exclusive license to Owner, without additional cost or royalty, to use for its own purposes (including reproduction) all Shop Drawings, together with the information and diagrams contained therein, prepared by Contractor or any Subcontractor. In providing Shop Drawings, Contractor and all Subcontractors warrant that they have authority to grant to Owner a license to use the Shop Drawings, and that such license is not in violation of any copyright or other intellectual property right. Contractor agrees to defend and indemnify Owner pursuant to the indemnity

provisions in Sections 5.03 and 5.22 from any violations of copyright or other intellectual property rights arising out of Owner’s use of the Shop Drawings hereunder, or to secure for Owner, at Contractor’s own cost, licenses in conformity with this section.

D. Shop Drawings to be used only for this Project: The Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by Contractor, Subcontractors of any tier, or its or their equipment or material suppliers, and copies thereof furnished to Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by Contractor or any Subcontractor of any tier, or material or equipment supplier, on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of Owner. The Contractor, Subcontractors of any tier, and material or equipment suppliers are granted a limited license to use and reproduce applicable portions of the Shop Drawings and other submittals appropriate to and for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Documents.

- PERFORMANCE

5.01 CONTRACTOR CONTROL AND SUPERVISION

A. Contractor responsible for Means and Methods of

construction: Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using its best skill and attention, and shall perform the Work in a skillful manner. Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. Contractor shall disclose its means and methods of construction when requested by Owner.

B. Competent Superintendence required: Performance of the Work shall be directly supervised by a competent superintendent who has authority to act for Contractor. The superintendent must be satisfactory to the Owner and shall not be changed without the prior written consent of Owner. Owner may require Contractor to remove the superintendent from the Work or Project site, if Owner reasonably deems the superintendent incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable, provided Owner has first notified Contractor in writing and allowed a reasonable period for transition.

C. Contractor responsible for acts and omissions of self

and agents: Contractor shall be responsible to Owner for acts and omissions of Contractor, Subcontractors, and their employees and agents.

D. Contractor to employ competent and disciplined

workforce: Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among all of the Contractor’s employees and other persons performing the Work. Contractor shall not permit employment of persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. Contractor’s employees shall at all times conduct business in a manner which assures fair, equal, and nondiscriminatory treatment of all persons. Owner may, by written notice, request Contractor to remove from the Work or Project site any employee


July 31, 2015 007200-11

Owner reasonably deems incompetent, careless, or otherwise objectionable.

E. Contractor to keep project documents on site: Contractor shall keep on the Project site a copy of the Drawings, Specifications, addenda, reviewed Shop Drawings, and permits and permit drawings.

F. Contractor to comply with ethical standards: Contractor shall ensure that its owner(s) and employees, and those of its Subcontractors, comply with the Ethics in Public Service Act RCW 42.52, which, among other things, prohibits state employees from having an economic interest in any public works contract that was made by, or supervised by, that employee. Contractor shall remove, at its sole cost and expense, any of its, or its Subcontractors’, employees, if they are in violation of this act.

5.02 PERMITS, FEES, AND NOTICES

A. Contractor to obtain and pay for permits: Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall pay for and obtain all permits, licenses, and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work. Prior to Final Acceptance, the approved, signed permits shall be delivered to Owner.

B. Allowances for permit fees: If allowances for permits or utility fees are called for in the Contract Documents and set forth in Contractor’s bid, and the actual costs of those permits or fees differ from the allowances in the Contract Documents, the difference shall be adjusted by Change Order.

C. Contractor to comply with all applicable laws: Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by all federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work.

5.03 PATENTS AND ROYALTIES

Payment, indemnification, and notice: Contractor is responsible for, and shall pay, all royalties and license fees. Contractor shall defend, indemnify, and hold Owner harmless from any costs, expenses, and liabilities arising out of the infringement by Contractor of any patent, copyright, or other intellectual property right used in the Work; however, provided that Contractor gives prompt notice, Contractor shall not be responsible for such defense or indemnity when a particular design, process, or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents. If Contractor has reason to believe that use of the required design, process, or product constitutes an infringement of a patent or copyright, it shall promptly notify Owner of such potential infringement.

5.04 PREVAILING WAGES

A. Contractor to pay Prevailing Wages: Contractor and Subcontractors shall pay the prevailing rate of wages to all

workers, laborers, or mechanics employed in the performance of any part of the Work in accordance with the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts, where applicable, RCW 39.12 and the rules and regulations of the Department of Labor and Industries. The schedule of prevailing wage rates for the locality or localities of the Work, is determined by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to verify the applicable prevailing wage rate.

B. Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wage: Before payment is made by the Owner to the Contractor for any work performed by the Contractor and subcontractors whose work is included in the application for payment, the Contractor shall submit, or shall have previously submitted to the Owner for the Project, a Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages, approved by the Department of Labor and Industries, certifying the rate of hourly wage paid and to be paid each classification of laborers, workers, or mechanics employed upon the Work by Contractor and Subcontractors. Such rates of hourly wage shall not be less than the prevailing wage rate.

C. Affidavit of Wages Paid: Prior to release of retainage or, where applicable, bond, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner an Affidavit of Wages Paid, approved by the Department of Labor and Industries, for the Contractor and every subcontractor, of any tier, that performed work on the Project.

D. Statement with pay application; Post Statements of

Intent at job site: Each Application for Payment submitted by Contractor shall state that prevailing wages have been paid in accordance with the prefiled statement(s) of intent, as approved. Copies of the approved intent statement(s) shall be posted on the job site with the address and telephone number of the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries where a complaint or inquiry concerning prevailing wages may be made.

E. Contractor to pay for Statements of Intent and

Affidavits: In compliance with chapter 296-127 WAC, Contractor shall pay to the Department of Labor and Industries the currently established fee(s) for each statement of intent and/or affidavit of wages paid submitted to the Department of Labor and Industries for certification.

F. Certified Payrolls: Consistent with WAC 296-127-320, the Contractor and any subcontractor shall submit a certified copy of payroll records if requested.

5.05 HOURS OF LABOR

A. Overtime: Contractor shall comply with all applicable provisions of RCW 49.28 and they are incorporated herein by reference. Pursuant to that statute, no laborer, worker, or mechanic employed by Contractor, any Subcontractor, or any other person performing or contracting to do the whole or any part of the Work, shall be permitted or required to work more than eight hours in any one


July 31, 2015 007200-12

calendar day, provided, that in cases of extraordinary emergency, such as danger to life or property, the hours of work may be extended, but in such cases the rate of pay for time employed in excess of eight hours of each calendar day shall be not less than one and one-half times the rate allowed for this same amount of time during eight hours of service.

B. 4-10 Agreements: Notwithstanding the preceding paragraph, RCW 49.28 permits a contractor or subcontractor in any public works contract subject to those provisions, to enter into an agreement with its employees in which the employees work up to ten hours in a calendar day. No such agreement may provide that the employees work ten-hour days for more than four calendar days a week. Any such agreement is subject to approval by the employees. The overtime provisions of RCW 49.28 shall not apply to the hours, up to forty hours per week, worked pursuant to any such agreement.

5.06 NONDISCRIMINATION

A. Discrimination prohibited by applicable laws: Discrimination in all phases of employment is prohibited by, among other laws and regulations, Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964, the Vietnam Era Veterans Readjustment Act of 1974, Sections 503 and 504 of the Vocational Rehabilitation Act of 1973, the Equal Employment Act of 1972, the Age Discrimination Act of 1967, the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, the Civil Rights Act of 1991, Presidential Executive Order 11246, Executive Order 11375, the Washington State Law Against Discrimination, RCW 49.60, and Gubernatorial Executive Order 85-09. These laws and regulations establish minimum requirements for affirmative action and fair employment practices which Contractor and Subcontractors must meet.

B. During performance of the Work:

1. Protected Classes: Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age, marital status, or the presence of any physical, sensory, or mental disability, Vietnam era veteran status, or disabled veteran status, nor commit any other unfair practices as defined in RCW 49.60.

2. Advertisements to state nondiscrimination: Contractor shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or for it, state that all qualified applicants will be considered for employment, without regard to race, creed, color, national origin, sex, age, marital status, or the presence of any physical, sensory, or mental disability.

3. Contractor to notify unions and others of

nondiscrimination: Contractor shall send to each labor union, employment agency, or representative of workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other

contract or understanding, a notice advising the labor union, employment agency, or workers’ representative of Contractor’s obligations according to the Contract Documents and RCW 49.60.

4. Owner and State access to Contractor

records: Contractor shall permit access to its books, records, and accounts, and to its premises by Owner, and by the Washington State Human Rights Commission, for the purpose of investigation to ascertain compliance with this section of the Contract Documents.

5. Pass through provisions to Subcontractors: Contractor shall include the provisions of this section in every Subcontract and shall require Subcontractors to include the provisions of this section in all contracts for the Project

5.07 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

A. Contractor responsible for safety: Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Work.

B. Contractor safety responsibilities: In carrying out its responsibilities according to the Contract Documents, Contractor shall protect the lives and health of employees performing the Work and other persons who may be affected by the Work; prevent damage to materials, supplies, and equipment whether on site or stored off-site; and prevent damage to other property at the site or adjacent thereto. Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders of any public body having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to protect them from damage, injury, or loss; shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection; and shall notify owners of adjacent property and utilities when prosecution of the Work may affect them.

C. Contractor to maintain safety records: Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of exposure data on all incidents relating to the Work resulting in death, traumatic injury, occupational disease, or damage to property, materials, supplies, or equipment. Contractor shall immediately report any such incident to Owner. Owner shall, at all times, have a right of access to all records of exposure.

D. Contractor to provide HazMat information and

training: Contractor shall provide all persons working on the Project site with information and training on hazardous chemicals in their work at the time of their initial assignment, and whenever a new hazard is introduced into their work area.

1. Information. At a minimum, Contractor shall inform persons working on the Project site of:

a. WAC Requirements: the requirements of


July 31, 2015 007200-13

chapter 296-62 WAC, General Occupational Health Standards;

b. Presence of Hazardous Chemicals: Any operations in their work area where hazardous chemicals are present; and

c. Hazard communications program: The location and availability of written hazard communication programs, including the required list(s) of hazardous chemicals and material safety data sheets required by chapter 296-62 WAC.

conf

2. Training. At a minimum, Contractor shall provide training for persons working on the Project site which includes: a. Detecting hazardous chemicals: Methods and

observations that may be used to detect the presence or release of a hazardous chemical in the work area (such as monitoring conducted by the employer, continuous monitoring devices, visual appearance or odor of hazardous chemicals when being released, etc.);

b. Hazards of chemicals: The physical and health hazards of the chemicals in the work area;

c. Protection from hazards: The measures such persons can take to protect themselves from these hazards, including specific procedures Contractor, or its Subcontractors, or others have implemented to protect those on the Project site from exposure to hazardous chemicals, such as appropriate work practices, emergency procedures, and personal protective equipment to be used; and

d. Hazard communications program: The details of the hazard communications program developed by Contractor, or its Subcontractors, including an explanation of the labeling system and the material safety data sheet, and how employees can obtain and use the appropriate hazard information.

E. Hazardous, toxic or harmful substances: Contractor’s

responsibility for hazardous, toxic, or harmful substances shall include the following duties:

1. Illegal use of dangerous substances: Contractor shall not keep, use, dispose, transport, generate, or sell on or about the Project site, any substances now or hereafter designated as, or which are subject to regulation as, hazardous, toxic, dangerous, or harmful by any federal, state or local law, regulation, statute or ordinance (hereinafter collectively referred to as “hazardous substances”) in violation of any such law, regulation, statute, or ordinance, but in no case shall any such hazardous substance be stored more than 90 Days on the Project site.

3. Contractor notifications of spills, failures, inspections,

citations, and fines: Contractor shall promptly notify Owner of all spills or releases of any hazardous substances which are otherwise required to be reported to any regulatory agency and pay the cost of cleanup. Contractor shall promptly notify Owner of all failures to comply with

any federal, state, or local law, regulation, or ordinance; all inspections of the Project site by any regulatory entity concerning the same; any citation, all regulatory orders or fines; and all responses or interim cleanup actions taken by or proposed to be taken by any government entity or private party on the Project site.

F. Public safety and traffic: All Work shall be performed

with due regard for the safety of the public. Contractor shall perform the Work so as to cause a minimum of interruption of vehicular traffic or inconvenience to pedestrians. All arrangements to care for such traffic shall be Contractor’s responsibilities. All expenses involved in the maintenance of traffic by way of detours shall be borne by Contractor.

G. Contractor to act in an emergency: In an emergency affecting the safety of life or the Work or of adjoining property, Contractor is permitted to act, at its discretion, to prevent such threatened loss or injury, and Contractor shall so act if so authorized or instructed.

H. No duty of safety by Owner or A/E: Nothing provided in this section shall be construed as imposing any duty upon Owner and, if applicable, A/E with regard to, or as constituting any express or implied assumption of control or responsibility over, Project site safety, or over any other safety conditions relating to employees or agents of Contractor or any of its Subcontractors, or the public.

5.08 OPERATIONS, MATERIAL HANDLING, AND STORAGE AREAS

A. Limited storage areas: Contractor shall confine all operations, including storage of materials, to Owner-approved areas.

B. Temporary buildings and utilities at Contractor

expense: Temporary buildings (e.g., storage sheds, shops, offices) and utilities may be provided by Contractor only with the consent of Owner and without expense to Owner. The temporary buildings and utilities shall be removed by Contractor at its expense upon completion of the Work.

C. Roads and vehicle loads: Contractor shall use only established roadways or temporary roadways authorized by Owner. When materials are transported in prosecuting the Work, vehicles shall not be loaded beyond the loading capacity recommended by the manufacturer of the vehicle or prescribed by federal, state, or local law or regulation.

D. Ownership and reporting by Contractor of demolished

materials: Ownership and control of all materials or facility components to be demolished or removed from the Project site by Contractor shall immediately vest in Contractor upon severance of the component from the facility or severance of the material from the Project site. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with all laws governing the storage and ultimate disposal. Contractor shall provide Owner with a copy of all manifests and receipts evidencing proper disposal when required by Owner or applicable law.


July 31, 2015 007200-14

E. Contractor responsible for care of materials and

equipment on-site: Contractor shall be responsible for

the proper care and protection of its materials and equipment delivered to the Project site. Materials and equipment may be stored on the premises subject to approval of Owner. When Contractor uses any portion of the Project site as a shop, Contractor shall be responsible for any repairs, patching, or cleaning arising from such use.

F. Contractor responsible for loss of materials and

equipment: Contractor shall protect and be responsible for any damage or loss to the Work, or to the materials or equipment until the date of Substantial Completion, and shall repair or replace without cost to Owner any damage or loss that may occur, except damages or loss caused by the acts or omissions of Owner. Contractor shall also protect and be responsible for any damage or loss to the Work, or to the materials or equipment, after the date of Substantial Completion, and shall repair or replace without cost to Owner any such damage or loss that might occur, to the extent such damages or loss are caused by the acts or omissions of Contractor, or any Subcontractor.

5.09 PRIOR NOTICE OF EXCAVATION

A. Excavation defined: Use of locator services: “Excavation” means an operation in which earth, rock, or other material on or below the ground is moved or otherwise displaced by any means, except the tilling of soil less than 12 inches in depth for agricultural purposes, or road ditch maintenance that does not change the original road grade or ditch flow line. Before commencing any excavation, Contractor shall provide notice of the scheduled commencement of excavation to all owners of underground facilities or utilities, through locator services.

5.10 UNFORESEEN PHYSICAL CONDITIONS

A. Notice requirement for concealed or unknown

conditions: If Contractor encounters conditions at the site which are subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents, or unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then Contractor shall give written notice to Owner promptly and in no event later than 7 Days after the first observance of the conditions. Conditions shall not be disturbed prior to such notice.

B. Adjustment in Contract Time and Contract Sum: If such conditions differ materially and cause a change in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, the Contractor may be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum, or both, provided it makes a request therefore as provided in Part 7.

5.11 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES, EQUIPMENT, VEGETATION, UTILITIES, AND IMPROVEMENTS

A. Contractor to protect and repair property: Contractor shall protect from damage all existing structures, equipment, improvements, utilities, and vegetation: at or near the Project site; and on adjacent property of a third party, the locations of which are made known to or should be known by Contractor. Contractor shall repair any damage, including that to the property of a third party, resulting from failure to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents or failure to exercise reasonable care in performing the Work. If Contractor fails or refuses to repair the damage promptly, Owner may have the necessary work performed and charge the cost to Contractor.

B. Tree and vegetation protection: Contractor shall only remove trees when specifically authorized to do so, and shall protect vegetation that will remain in place.

5.12 LAYOUT OF WORK

A. Advanced planning of the Work: Contractor shall plan and lay out the Work in advance of operations so as to coordinate all work without delay or revision.

B. Layout responsibilities: Contractor shall lay out the Work from Owner-established baselines and bench marks indicated on the Drawings, and shall be responsible for all field measurements in connection with the layout. Contractor shall furnish, at its own expense, all stakes, templates, platforms, equipment, tools, materials, and labor required to lay out any part of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for executing the Work to the lines and grades that may be established. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining or restoring all stakes and other marks established.

5.13 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

A. Contractor to provide new and equivalent equipment

and materials: All equipment, material, and articles incorporated into the Work shall be new and of the most suitable grade for the purpose intended, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. References in the Specifications to equipment, material, articles, or patented processes by trade name, make, or catalog number, shall be regarded as establishing a standard quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. Contractor may, at its option, use any equipment, material, article, or process that, in the judgment of A/E, is equal to that named in the specifications, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.

B. Contractor responsible for fitting parts together: Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, or patching that may be required to make its several parts fit together properly, or receive or be received by work of others set forth in, or reasonably implied by, the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not endanger any work by


July 31, 2015 007200-15

cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the Work and shall not cut or alter the work of any other contractor unless approved in advance by Owner.

C. Owner may reject defective Work: Should any of the Work be found defective, or in any way not in accordance with the Contract Documents, this work, in whatever stage of completion, may be rejected by Owner.

5.14 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF PREMISES AND UTILITY SERVICES

A. Use of Premises: Contractor’s use of Owner’s premises is limited to Project activities within the areas identified.

B. Owner’s Occupation of Site: The Owner may occupy the site and existing building(s) during the entire work period. Contractor agrees to cooperate with Owner during operation to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Contractor agrees to perform the work so as not to interfere with the Owner’s operations.

C. Contractor must allow Owner access: Contractor must at all times provide for and allow Owner access. Contractor shall not store or stage vehicles or materials on driveways or at entrances and must keep these access points serving the premises clear and available to the Owner at all times.

D. Owner to provide and charge for utilities: Owner shall make all reasonable utilities available to Contractor from existing outlets and supplies, as specified in the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the utility service consumed shall be charged to or paid for by Contractor at prevailing rates charged to Owner or, where the utility is produced by Owner, at reasonable rates determined by Owner. Contractor will carefully conserve any utilities furnished.

E. Contractor to install temporary connections and

meters: Contractor shall, at its expense and in a skillful manner satisfactory to Owner, install and maintain all necessary temporary connections and distribution lines, together with appropriate protective devices, and all meters required to measure the amount of each utility used for the purpose of determining charges. Prior to the date of Final Acceptance, Contractor shall remove all temporary connections, distribution lines, meters, and associated equipment and materials.

5.15 TESTS AND INSPECTION

A. Owner to provide for all testing and inspection of

Work: Owner shall maintain an adequate testing and inspection program and perform such tests and inspections as are necessary or required to ensure that the Work conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible for quality surveillance of all its Work and all Work performed by any Subcontractor. Unless otherwise provided, Owner shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections, and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity

acceptable to Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections, and approvals. Contractor shall give Owner timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made. Contractor shall maintain complete inspection records and make them available to Owner.

B. Owner may conduct tests and inspections: Owner may, at any reasonable time, conduct such inspections and tests as it deems necessary to ensure that the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner shall promptly notify Contractor if an inspection or test reveals that the Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents. Unless the subject items are expressly accepted by Owner, such Owner inspection and tests are for the sole benefit of Owner and do not:

1. Constitute or imply acceptance;

2. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures;

3. Relieve Contractor of responsibility for risk of loss or damage to the Work, materials, or equipment;

4. Relieve Contractor of its responsibility to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or

5. Impair Owner’s right to reject defective or nonconforming items, or to avail itself of any other remedy to which it may be entitled.

C. Inspections or inspectors do not modify Contract

Documents: Neither observations by an inspector retained by Owner, the presence or absence of such inspector on the site, nor inspections, tests, or approvals by others, shall relieve Contractor from any requirement of the Contract Documents, nor is any such inspector authorized to change any term or condition of the Contract Documents.

D. Contractor responsibilities on inspections: Contractor shall promptly furnish, without additional charge, all facilities, labor, material and equipment reasonably needed for performing such safe and convenient inspections and tests as may be required by Owner. Owner may charge Contractor any additional cost of inspection or testing when Work is not ready at the time specified by Contractor for inspection or testing, or when prior rejection makes reinspection or retest necessary. Owner shall perform its inspections and tests in a manner that will cause no undue delay in the Work.

5.16 CORRECTION OF NONCONFORMING WORK

A. Work covered by Contractor without inspection: If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the requirements in the Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by Owner, be uncovered for Owner’s observation and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense and without change in the Contract Time.


July 31, 2015 007200-16

B. Payment provisions for uncovering covered Work: If,

at any time prior to Final Completion, Owner desires to examine the Work, or any portion of it, which has been covered, Owner may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum for the costs of uncovering and replacement, and, if completion of the Work is thereby delayed, an adjustment in the Contract Time, provided it makes such a request as provided in Part 7. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay the costs of examination and reconstruction.

C. Contractor to correct and pay for non-conforming

Work: Contractor shall promptly correct Work found by Owner not to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed. Contractor shall bear all costs of correcting such nonconforming Work, including additional testing and inspections.

D. Contractor’s compliance with warranty provisions: If, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof, or within one year after the date for commencement of any system warranties established under Section 5.16D, 5.21, 6.08B, or within the terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from Owner to do so. Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. This period of one year shall be extended, with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion, by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual performance of the Work. Contractor’s duty to correct with respect to Work repaired or replaced shall run for one year from the date of repair or replacement. Obligations under this paragraph shall survive Final Acceptance.

E. Contractor to remove non-conforming Work: Contractor shall remove from the Project site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by Contractor nor accepted by Owner.

F. Owner may charge Contractor for non-conforming

Work: If Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time after written notice to do so, Owner may replace, correct, or remove the nonconforming Work and charge the cost thereof to the Contractor.

G. Contractor to pay for damaged Work during

correction: Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged Work, whether completed or partially completed, caused by Contractor’s correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

H. No period of limitation on other requirements: Nothing contained in this section shall be construed to establish a

period of limitation with respect to other obligations which Contractor might have according to the Contract Documents. Establishment of the time period of one year as described in Section 5.16D relates only to the specific obligation of Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the Contractor’s obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, including the time within which such proceedings may be commenced.

I. Owner may accept non-conforming Work and charge

Contractor: If Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum may be reduced as appropriate and equitable.

5.17 CLEAN UP

Contractor to keep site clean and leave it clean: Contractor shall at all times keep the Project site, including hauling routes, infrastructures, utilities, and storage areas, free from accumulations of waste materials. Before completing the Work, Contractor shall remove from the premises its rubbish, tools, scaffolding, equipment, and materials. Upon completing the Work, Contractor shall leave the Project site in a clean, neat, and orderly condition satisfactory to Owner. If Contractor fails to clean up as provided herein, and after reasonable notice from Owner, Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to Contractor. Contractor further agrees:

A. To comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning;

B. To not burn waste materials;

C. To not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner’s property;

D. To not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems; and

E. To remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner.

F. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated work have become the Owner’s property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed.

5.18 ACCESS TO WORK AND COMMUNICATIONS REGARDING PROJECT STATUS

A. Owner and A/E access to Work site: Contractor shall provide Owner and, if applicable, A/E access to the Work in progress wherever located.

B. Pre-Project Conference: Owner shall conduct a pre-project conference after execution of the Agreement and prior to commencement of Contractor’s performance. The parties to the Agreement shall review their respective responsibilities and personnel assignments.


July 31, 2015 007200-17

C. Attendees - The Owner, the Contractor and its superintendent, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturers, and other concerned parties shall be represented by persons authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

D. Agenda - Discuss significant items that could affect progress, including the tentative project progress schedule, critical sequencing, use of the premises, and procedures for processing Change Orders and equipment deliveries.

E. A/E shall record significant discussions, agreements and disagreements at each conference, along with the approved schedule. Distribute the meeting record to everyone concerned, promptly, including the Owner. Contractor is required to distribute recordings of significant discussions and/or agreements to affected subcontractors and prime suppliers.

F. Do not proceed if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate necessary actions to resolve impediments and reconvene the conference at the earliest feasible date.

G. A/E or Owner shall conduct Progress Meetings at regular intervals. Contractor should attempt to coordinate meeting dates with preparation of payment requests.

H. Agenda - Review minutes of the previous progress meeting. Review significant items that could affect progress. Include topics appropriate to the current status of the Project.

I. Review project progress schedule since the last meeting. Determine where each activity is in relation to the schedule, whether on time or ahead of, or behind, the schedule. Determine how areas that are behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract time.

J. Reporting - No later than 3 days after each meeting, distribute copies of minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting.

5.19 OTHER CONTRACTS

Owner may award other contracts; Contractor to cooperate: Owner may undertake or award other contracts for additional work at or near the Project site. Contractor shall reasonably cooperate with the other contractors and with Owner’s employees and shall carefully adapt scheduling and perform the Work in accordance with these Contract Documents to reasonably accommodate the other work.

5.20 SUBCONTRACTORS AND SUPPLIERS

A. Subcontractor Responsibilities: The Contractor shall include the language of this paragraph in each of its first tier subcontracts and shall require each of its subcontracts to include the same language of this section in each of their subcontracts, adjusting only as necessary the terms used for the contracting parties. Upon request of the Owner, the Contractor shall promptly provide documentation to the Owner demonstrating that the subcontractor meets the subcontractor responsibility criteria below. The requirements of this paragraph apply to all subcontractors regardless of tier. At the time of subcontract execution the Contractor shall verify that each of its first tier subcontracts meets the following bidder responsibility criteria.

1. Have a current certificate of registration as a contractor in compliance with chapter 18.27 RCW, which must have been in effect at the time of subcontract bid submittal;

2. Have a current Washington Unified Business Identifier (UBI) number;

3. If applicable, have

a. Industrial Insurance (workers’ compensation coverage for the subcontractor’s employees working in Washington, as required in Title 51 RCW;

b. A Washington Employment Security Department number, as required in Title 50 RCW;

c. A Washington Department of Revenue state excise tax registration number, as required in Title 82, RCW;

d. An electrical contractor license, if required by Chapter 19.28 RCW;

e. An elevator contractor license, if required by Chapter 19.28, RCW;

4. Not be disqualified from bidding on any public works contract under RCW 39.06.010 or 39.12.065(3).

5. On a project subject to the apprenticeship utilization

requirements in RCW 39.04.320, not have been found out of

compliance by the Washington state apprenticeship and

training council for working apprentices out of ration

without appropriate supervision, or outside their approved

work process as outlined in their standards of

apprenticeship under chapter 49.04 RCW for the one-year

period immediately preceding the date of the Owner’s first

advertisement of the project.

B. Provide names of Subcontractors and use qualified firms:

Before submitting the first Application for Payment, Contractor shall furnish in writing to Owner the names, addresses, and telephone numbers of all Subcontractors, as well as suppliers providing materials in excess of $2,500. Contractor shall utilize Subcontractors and suppliers which are experienced and qualified, and meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, if any. Contractor shall not utilize any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Owner has a reasonable objection, and shall obtain Owner’s written consent before making any substitutions or additions.


July 31, 2015 007200-18

C. Subcontracts in writing and pass through provision: All Subcontracts must be in writing. By appropriate written agreement, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, so far as applicable to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which Contractor assumes toward Owner in accordance with the Contract Documents. Each Subcontract shall preserve and protect the rights of Owner in accordance with the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights. Where appropriate, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. However, nothing in this paragraph shall be construed to alter the contractual relations between Contractor and its Subcontractors with respect to insurance or bonds. D. Coordination of Subcontractors; Contractor responsible

for Work: Contractor shall schedule, supervise, and coordinate the operations of all Subcontractors. No Subcontracting of any of the Work shall relieve Contractor from its responsibility for the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or any other obligations of the Contract Documents. E. Automatic assignment of subcontracts: Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is hereby assigned by Contractor to Owner provided that: 1. Effective only after termination and Owner approval: The assignment is effective only after termination by Owner for cause pursuant to Section 9.01 and only for those Subcontracts which Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor in writing; and 2. Owner assumes Contractor’s responsibilities: After the assignment is effective, Owner will assume all future duties and obligations toward the Subcontractor which Contractor assumed in the Subcontract. 3. Impact of bond: The assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under any bond provided in accordance with the Contract Documents.

5.21 WARRANTY OF CONSTRUCTION

A. Contractor warranty of Work: In addition to any special warranties provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents, Contractor warrants that all Work conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents and is free of any defect in equipment, material, or design furnished, or workmanship performed by Contractor.

B. Contractor responsibilities: With respect to all warranties, express or implied, for Work performed or materials furnished according to the Contract Documents, Contractor shall:

1. Obtain warranties: Obtain all warranties that would be given in normal commercial practice;

2. Warranties for benefit of Owner: Require all warranties to be executed, in writing, for the benefit of Owner;

3. Enforcement of warranties: Enforce all

warranties for the benefit of Owner, if directed by Owner; and

4. Contractor responsibility for subcontractor

warranties: Be responsible to enforce any subcontractor’s, manufacturers, or supplier’s warranties should they extend beyond the period specified in the Contract Documents.

C. Warranties beyond Final Acceptance: The obligations under this section shall survive Final Acceptance.

5.22 INDEMNIFICATION

A. In performing work and services hereunder, the Contractor, its employees, agents, and representatives, shall be acting as independent contractors, and shall not be deemed or construed to be employees or agents of STA in any manner whatsoever. The Contractor shall not hold itself out as, nor claim to be, an officer or employee of STA by reason hereof, and will not make any claim, demand, or application to or for any right or privilege applicable to an officer or employee of STA. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any claims for wages or compensation by the Contractor’s employees, agents, and representatives, and shall save and hold STA harmless therefrom.

B. To the maximum extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless STA and all of STA’s officers, employees, and agents from and against all claims, demands, suits, penalties and liability of any kind, including injuries to persons or damages to property, which arise out of or are due to any acts, errors, or omissions of the Contractor, or the Contractor’s employees, agents, and representatives in performing work and services under this Agreement. In the event that any claims, investigations, demands, suits, actions, and lawsuits arise out of any of the aforesaid acts, errors, or omissions, the Contractor shall assume all costs of defending such claims, suits, actions, or lawsuits, including legal fees incurred by STA, any penalties imposed on STA or the Contractor, and all judgments that may be obtained against STA, or any of its officers, agents, or employees in such suits. Further, the Contractor waives immunity under the Industrial Insurance Act and assumes all liability for actions brought by him or his employees against STA for injuries in the performance of this Agreement. The Contractor represents this provision has been negotiated with STA.

C. To the maximum extent permitted by law, STA shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor and all of Contractor’s officers, employees, and agents from and against all claims, demands, suits, penalties and liability of any kind, including injuries to persons or damages to property, which arise out of or are due to any acts, errors, or omissions of STA, or STA’s employees, agents, and representatives while engaged in the business of public transportation and with respect to its duties and obligations as fee owner of the real property which Contractor has been engaged to manage. In the event that any claims, investigations, demands, suits, actions, and lawsuits arise out of any of the aforesaid acts, errors, or


July 31, 2015 007200-19

omissions, STA shall assume all costs of defending such claims, suits, actions, or lawsuits, including legal fees incurred by Contractor, any penalties imposed on Contractor or STA, and all judgments that may be obtained against Contractor, or any of its officers, agents, or employees in such suits. STA represents this provision has been negotiated with Contractor.

- PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

6.01 CONTRACT SUM

Owner shall pay Contract Sum: Owner shall pay Contractor the Contract Sum plus state sales tax for performance of the Work, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

6.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

Contractor to submit Schedule of Values: Before submitting its first Application for Payment, Contractor shall submit to Owner for approval a breakdown allocating the total Contract Sum to each principal category of work, in such detail as requested by Owner (“Schedule of Values”). The approved Schedule of Values shall include appropriate amounts for mobilization and demobilization, record drawings, O&M manuals, and any other requirements for Project closeout, and shall be used by Owner as the basis for progress payments. Project closeout costs should be scheduled independent of any retainage amount. Payment for Work shall be made only for and in accordance with those items included in the Schedule of Values.

6.03 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages: The Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages for the Contractor and each Subcontractor must be on file with the Owner before commencement of work and before the first payment can be made.

B. Monthly Application for Payment with substantiation: At monthly intervals, unless determined otherwise by Owner, Contractor shall submit to Owner an itemized Application for Payment for Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the approved Schedule of Values.

• Each Application for Payment must include a statement that prevailing wages have been paid by the contractor in accordance with the pre-filed statement or statements of Intent to Pay prevailing wages on file.

• If federally funded, certified weekly payrolls must be submitted with Application for Payment.

• Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified and paid for by the Owner.

• Payment Application Times - Progress payments will be made only for actual work performed or materials delivered.

• Payment Application Forms - Use the Form for Applications for Payment included in the addenda or preapproved format.

• Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application.

• Transmittal- Submit three (3) executed copies of each Application for Payment to the Owner by means ensuring receipt within twenty-four (24) hours; one (1) copy shall be complete, including waivers of lien and similar attachments, when required.

• Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments, and recording appropriate information related to the application in a manner acceptable to the Owner.

• Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of lien from every entity who may lawfully be entitled to file a lien arising out of the Contract, and related to the work covered by the payment.

• The Contractor shall be paid, upon the submission of proper applications for payment, within thirty (30) days after STA’s approval of the Contractor’s application.

C. Contractor certifies Subcontractors paid: By submitting an Application for Payment, Contractor is certifying that all Subcontractors have been paid, less earned retainage in accordance with RCW 60.28.011, as their interests appeared in the last preceding certificate of payment. By submitting an Application for Payment, Contractor is recertifying that the representations set forth in Section 1.03 are true and correct, to the best of Contractor’s knowledge, as of the date of the Application for Payment.

D. Reconciliation of Work with Progress Schedule: At the time it submits an Application for Payment, Contractor shall analyze and reconcile, to the satisfaction of Owner, the actual progress of the Work with the Progress Schedule.

E. Payment for material delivered to site or stored off-

site: If authorized by Owner, the Application for Payment may include request for payment for material delivered to the Project site and suitably stored, or for completed preparatory work. Payment may similarly be requested for material stored off the Project site, provided Contractor complies with or furnishes satisfactory evidence of the following:


July 31, 2015 007200-20

1. Suitable facility or location: The material

will be placed in a facility or location that is structurally sound, dry, lighted and suitable for the materials to be stored;

2. Facility or location within 10 miles of

Project: The facility or location is located within a 10-mile radius of the Project. Other locations may be utilized, if approved in writing, by Owner;

3. Facility or location exclusive to Project’s

materials: Only materials for the Project are stored within the facility or location (or a secure portion of a facility or location set aside for the Project);

4. Insurance provided on materials in facility

or location: Contractor furnishes Owner a certificate of insurance extending Contractor’s insurance coverage for damage, fire, and theft to cover the full value of all materials stored, or in transit;

5. Facility or location locked and secure: The facility or location (or secure portion thereof) is continuously under lock and key, and only Contractor’s authorized personnel shall have access;

6. Owner right of access to facility or location: Owner shall at all times have the right of access in company of Contractor;

7. Contractor assumes total responsibility for

stored materials: Contractor and its surety assume total responsibility for the stored materials; and

8. Contractor provides documentation and

Notice when materials moved to site: Contractor furnishes to Owner certified lists of materials stored, bills of lading, invoices, and other information as may be required, and shall also furnish Notice to Owner when materials are moved from storage to the Project site.

6.04 PROGRESS PAYMENTS

A. Owner to pay within 30 Days: Owner shall make progress payments, in such amounts as Owner determines are properly due, within 30 Days after receipt of a properly executed Application for Payment. Owner shall notify Contractor in accordance with chapter 39.76 RCW if the Application for Payment does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Withholding retainage; Options for retainage: When allowed by law, Owner shall retain 5% of the amount of each progress payment until 45 Days after Final Acceptance and receipt of all documents required by law or the Contract Documents, including, at Owner’s request,

consent of surety to release of the retainage. In accordance with chapter 60.28 RCW, Contractor may request that monies reserved be retained in a fund by Owner, deposited by Owner in a bank or savings and loan, or placed in escrow with a bank or trust company to be converted into bonds and securities to be held in escrow with interest to be paid to Contractor. Owner may permit Contractor to provide an appropriate bond in lieu of the retained funds.

C. Title passes to Owner upon payment: Title to all Work and materials covered by a progress payment shall pass to Owner at the time of such payment free and clear of all liens, claims, security interests, and encumbrances. Passage of title shall not, however, relieve Contractor from any of its duties and responsibilities for the Work or materials, or waive any rights of Owner to insist on full compliance by Contractor with the Contract Documents.

D. Interest on unpaid balances: Payments due and unpaid in accordance with the Contract Documents may bear interest as specified in chapter. 39.76 RCW.

6.05 PAYMENTS WITHHELD

A. Owner’s right to withhold payment: Owner may withhold or, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, nullify the whole or part of any payment to such extent as may be necessary to protect Owner from loss or damage for reasons including but not limited to:

1. Non-compliant Work: Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents;

2. Remaining Work to cost more than unpaid

balance: Reasonable evidence that the Work required by the Contract Documents cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;

3. Owner correction or completion Work: Work by Owner to correct defective Work or complete the Work in accordance with Section 5.16;

4. Contractor’s failure to perform: Contractor’s failure to perform in accordance with the Contract Documents; or

5. Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions: Cost or liability that may occur to Owner as the result of Contractor’s fault or negligent acts or omissions.

B. Owner to notify Contractor of withholding for

unsatisfactory performance: In any case where part or all of a payment is going to be withheld for unsatisfactory performance, Owner shall notify Contractor in accordance with chapter 39.76, RCW.


July 31, 2015 007200-21

6.06 RETAINAGE AND BOND CLAIM RIGHTS

Chapters 39.08 RCW and 60.28 RCW incorporated by

reference: chapters 39.08 and 60.28 RCW, concerning the rights and responsibilities of Contractor and Owner with regard to the performance and payment bonds and retainage, are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference as though fully set forth herein.

6.07 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

Substantial Completion defined: Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work (or portion thereof designated and approved by Owner) when the construction is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents, so Owner has full and unrestricted use and benefit of the facilities (or portion thereof designated and approved by Owner) for the use for which it is intended. All Work other than incidental corrective or punch list work shall be completed. Substantial Completion shall not have been achieved if all systems and parts are not functional, if utilities are not connected and operating normally, if all required occupancy permits have not been issued, or if the Work is not accessible by normal vehicular and pedestrian traffic routes. The date Substantial Completion is achieved shall be established in writing by Owner. Contractor may request an early date of Substantial Completion which must be approved by Change Order. Owner’s occupancy of the Work or designated portion thereof does not necessarily indicate that Substantial Completion has been achieved.

6.08 PRIOR OCCUPANCY

A. Prior Occupancy defined; Restrictions: Owner may, upon written notice thereof to Contractor, take possession of or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work (“Prior Occupancy”) at any time prior to Substantial Completion. Unless otherwise agreed in writing, Prior Occupancy shall not: be deemed an acceptance of any portion of the Work; accelerate the time for any payment to Contractor; prejudice any rights of Owner provided by any insurance, bond, guaranty, or the Contract Documents; relieve Contractor of the risk of loss or any of the obligations established by the Contract Documents; establish a date for termination or partial termination of the assessment of liquidated damages; or constitute a waiver of claims.

B. Damage; Duty to repair and warranties: Notwithstanding anything in the preceding paragraph, Owner shall be responsible for loss of or damage to the Work resulting from Prior Occupancy. Contractor’s one year duty to repair any system warranties shall begin on building systems activated and used by Owner as agreed in writing by Owner and Contractor.

6.09 FINAL INSPECTION, FINAL COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE, AND PAYMENT (PROJECT CLOSE-OUT)

A. Final Inspection. On receipt of a request for inspection, the Owner will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Owner will

prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.

B. The Owner will repeat the inspection once when requested and assured that the work has been substantially completed. Subsequent inspections necessary to assure that the work has been substantially completed will be charged at the Owner representative’s normal billing rate and a Construction Change Directive will be prepared to deduct the representative’s charges from the Contract Sum.

1. The Owner will reinspect the work upon receipt of notice that the work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Owner.

2. Upon completion of reinspection, the Owner will prepare a certificate of final acceptance, or advise the Contractor of work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance.

C. Before requesting final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, Contractor must complete the following:

1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required.

2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes, if applicable, to the Contract Sum.

3. Submit a certified copy of the Owner’s final inspection list of items to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance and the list has been endorsed and dated by the Owner.

4. Submit a consent of surety to final payment.

5. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement, if applicable.

6. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

7. Closeout and final payment of this project may be contingent upon completion and resolution of a Davis-Bacon Prevailing Wage audit.

8. Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the work during construction.


July 31, 2015 007200-22

9. Assurance that unsettled claims will be settled

10. Assurance that work not complete and accepted will be completed without undue delay

11. Transmittal of required project construction records to Owner

12. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations have been paid

13. Removal of surplus materials (not belonging to STA), rubbish and similar elements

14. Affidavit of Wages Paid certification

15. You may be asked to submit final certified weekly payrolls.

16. All required warranties have been written and submitted

D. Final Completion defined: Final Completion shall be achieved when the Work is fully and finally complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. The date Final Completion is achieved shall be established by Owner in writing, but in no case shall constitute Final Acceptance which is a subsequent, separate, and distinct action.

E. Final Acceptance defined: Final Acceptance shall be achieved when the Contractor has completed the requirements of the Contract Documents. The date Final Acceptance is achieved shall be established by Owner in writing. Prior to Final Acceptance, Contractor shall, in addition to all other requirements in the Contract Documents, submit to Owner a written notice of any outstanding disputes or claims between Contractor and any of its Subcontractors, including the amounts and other details thereof. Neither Final Acceptance, nor final payment, shall release Contractor or its sureties from any obligations of these Contract Documents or the payment and performance, or constitute a waiver of any claims by Owner arising from Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1. Final payment (retainage or release of bond where applicable) cannot be made until Release of Lien Notices have been received from the Washington State Department of Revenue, Employment Security Department, and the Department of Labor and Industries, if applicable.

F. Final payment waives Claim rights: Acceptance of final payment by Contractor, or any Subcontractor, shall constitute a waiver and release to Owner of all claims by Contractor, or any such Subcontractor, for an increase in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, and for every act or omission of Owner relating to or arising out of the Work, except for those Claims made in accordance with the procedures, including the time limits identified in the Contract Documents.

C. Prior to and/or contemporaneous with, Final Acceptance the following must be complete:

1. Contractor must submit specific warranties,

workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications, and similar documents;

2. Contractor must obtain and submit releases enabling the Owner unrestricted use of the work and access to services and utilities; include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases as applicable;

3. Contractor must complete final clean up requirements;

4. Contractor must arrange for each installer of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner’s personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. If installers are not experienced in procedures, provide instruction by manufacturer’s representatives;

- CHANGES

7.01 CHANGE IN THE WORK

A. Changes in Work, Contract Sum, and Contract Time

by Change Order: Owner may, at any time and without notice to Contractor’s surety, order additions, deletions, revisions, or other changes in the Work. These changes in the Work shall be incorporated into the Contract Documents through the execution of Change Orders. If any change in the Work ordered by Owner causes an increase or decrease in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, an equitable adjustment shall be made as provided in Section 7.02 or 7.03, respectively, and such adjustment(s) shall be incorporated into a Change Order.

B. Owner may request COP from Contractor: If Owner desires to order a change in the Work, it may request a written Change Order Proposal (COP) from Contractor. Contractor shall submit a Change Order Proposal within 14 Days of the request from Owner, or within such other period as mutually agreed. Contractor’s Change Order Proposal shall be full compensation for implementing the proposed change in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, and including compensation for all delays in connection with such change in the Work and for any expense or inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of efficiency or productivity occasioned by the change in the Work.

C. COP Negotiations: Upon receipt of the Change Order Proposal, or a request for equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both, as provided in Sections 7.02 and 7.03, Owner may accept or reject the proposal, request further documentation, or negotiate acceptable terms with Contractor. Pending agreement on the terms of the Change Order, Owner may direct Contractor to proceed immediately with the Change Order Work. Contractor shall not proceed with any change in the Work until it has obtained Owner’s approval. All Work done pursuant to any Owner-directed change in the Work shall be executed in accordance with the Contract Documents.


July 31, 2015 007200-23

D. Change Order as full payment and final settlement: If

Owner and Contractor reach agreement on the terms of any change in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, such agreement shall be incorporated in a Change Order. The Change Order shall constitute full payment and final settlement of all claims for time and for direct, indirect, and consequential costs, including costs of delays, inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of efficiency or productivity, related to any Work either covered or affected by the Change Order, or related to the events giving rise to the request for equitable adjustment.

E. Failure to agree upon terms of Change Order; Final

offer and Claims: If Owner and Contractor are unable to reach agreement on the terms of any change in the Work, including any adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, Contractor may at any time in writing, request a final offer from Owner. Owner shall provide Contractor with its written response within 30 Days of Contractor’s request. Owner may also provide Contractor with a final offer at any time. If Contractor rejects Owner’s final offer, or the parties are otherwise unable to reach agreement, Contractor’s only remedy shall be to file a Claim as provided in Part 8.

F. Field Authorizations: The Owner may direct the Contractor to proceed with a change in the work through a written Field Authorization (also referred to as a Field Order) when the time required to price and execute a Change Order would impact the Project.

The Field Authorization shall describe and include the following:

1. The Scope of work 2. An agreed upon maximum not-to-exceed amount. 3. Any estimated change to the Contract Time 4. The method of final cost determination in accordance

with the requirements of Part 7 of the General Conditions

5. The supporting cost data to be submitted in accordance

with the requirements of Part 7 of the General Conditions

Upon satisfactory submittal by the Contractor and approval by the Owner of supporting cost data a Change Order will be executed. The Owner will not make payment to the Contractor for Field Authorization Work until that work has been incorporated into an executed Change Order.

7.02 CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT SUM

A. General Application

1. Contract Sum changes only by Change

Order: The Contract Sum shall only be changed by a Change Order. Contractor shall

include any request for a change in the Contract Sum in its Change Order Proposal.

2. Owner fault or negligence as basis for

change in Contract Sum: If the cost of Contractor’s performance is changed due to the fault or negligence of Owner, or anyone for whose acts Owner is responsible, Contractor shall be entitled to make a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum in accordance with the following procedure. No change in the Contract Sum shall be allowed to the extent: Contractor’s changed cost of performance is due to the fault or negligence of Contractor, or anyone for whose acts Contractor is responsible; the change is concurrently caused by Contractor and Owner; or the change is caused by an act of Force Majeure as defined in Section 3.05.

Notice and record keeping for

equitable adjustment: A request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum shall be based on written notice delivered to Owner within 7 Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request. For purposes of this part, “occurrence” means when Contractor knew, or in its diligent prosecution of the Work should have known, of the event giving rise to the request. If Contractor believes it is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum, Contractor shall immediately notify Owner and begin to keep and maintain complete, accurate, and specific daily records. Contractor shall give Owner access to any such records and, if requested shall promptly furnish copies of such records to Owner.

Content of notice for equitable

adjustment; Failure to comply: Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Sum for any occurrence of events or costs that occurred more than 7 Days before Contractor’s written notice to Owner. The written notice shall set forth, at a minimum, a description of: the event giving rise to the request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum; the nature of the impacts to Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier, if any; and to the extent possible the amount of the adjustment in Contract Sum requested. Failure to properly give such written notice shall, to the extent Owner’s interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor’s right to an equitable adjustment.


July 31, 2015 007200-24

Contractor to provide supplemental

information: Within 30 Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request, unless Owner agrees in writing to allow an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data, Contractor shall supplement the written notice provided in accordance with subparagraph a. above with additional supporting data. Such additional data shall include, at a minimum: the amount of compensation requested, itemized in accordance with the procedure set forth herein; specific facts, circumstances, and analysis that confirms not only that Contractor suffered the damages claimed, but that the damages claimed were actually a result of the act, event, or condition complained of and that the Contract Documents provide entitlement to an equitable adjustment to Contractor for such act, event, or condition; and documentation sufficiently detailed to permit an informed analysis of the request by Owner. When the request for compensation relates to a delay, or other change in Contract Time, Contractor shall demonstrate the impact on the critical path, in accordance with Section 7.03C. Failure to provide such additional information and documentation within the time allowed or within the format required shall, to the extent Owner’s interests are-prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor’s right to an equitable adjustment.

Contractor to proceed with Work as

directed: Pending final resolution of any request made in accordance with this paragraph, unless otherwise agreed in writing, Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Work.

Contractor to combine requests for

same event together: Any requests by Contractor for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum and in the Contract Time that arise out of the same event(s) shall be submitted together.

3. Methods for calculating Change Order

amount: The value of any Work covered by a Change Order, or of any request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum, shall be determined by one of the following methods:

Fixed Price: On the basis of a fixed price as determined in paragraph 7.02B.

Unit Prices: By application of unit

prices to the quantities of the items involved as determined in paragraph 7.02C.

Time and Materials: On the basis of time and material as determined in paragraph 7.02D.

4. Fixed price method is default; Owner may

direct otherwise: When Owner has requested Contractor to submit a Change Order Proposal, Owner may direct Contractor as to which method in subparagraph 3 above to use when submitting its proposal. Otherwise, Contractor shall determine the value of the Work, or of a request for an equitable adjustment, on the basis of the fixed price method.

B. Change Order Pricing -- Fixed Price

Procedures: When the fixed price method is used to determine the value of any Work covered by a Change Order, or of a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum, the following procedures shall apply:

1. Breakdown and itemization of details on

COP: Contractor’s Change Order Proposal, or request for adjustment in the Contract Sum, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of the costs, including labor, material, subcontractor costs, and overhead and profit. The costs shall be itemized in the manner set forth below, and shall be submitted on breakdown sheets in a form approved by Owner.

2. Use of industry standards in calculating

costs: All costs shall be calculated based upon appropriate industry standard methods of calculating labor, material quantities, and equipment costs.

3. Costs contingent on Owner’s actions: If any of Contractor’s pricing assumptions are contingent upon anticipated actions of Owner, Contractor shall clearly state them in the proposal or request for an equitable adjustment.

4. Markups on additive and deductive Work: The cost of any additive or deductive changes in the Work shall be calculated as set forth below, except that overhead and profit shall not be included on deductive changes in the Work. Where a change in the Work involves additive and deductive work by the same Contractor or Subcontractor, small tools, overhead, profit, bond and insurance markups will apply to the net difference.


July 31, 2015 007200-25

5. Breakdown not required if change less than

$1,000: If the total cost of the change in the Work or request for equitable adjustment does not exceed $1,000, Contractor shall not be required to submit a breakdown if the description of the change in the Work or request for equitable adjustment is sufficiently definitive for Owner to determine fair value.

6. Breakdown required if change between

$1,000 and $2,500: If the total cost of the change in the Work or request for equitable adjustment is between $1,000 and $2,500, Contractor may submit a breakdown in the following level of detail if the description of the change in the Work or if the request for equitable adjustment is sufficiently definitive to permit the Owner to determine fair value:

lump sum labor;

lump sum material;

lump sum equipment usage;

overhead and profit as set forth below; and

insurance and bond costs as set forth below.

7. Components of increased cost: Any request for adjustment of Contract Sum based upon the fixed price method shall include only the following items:

Craft labor costs: These are the labor costs determined by multiplying the estimated or actual additional number of craft hours needed to perform the change in the Work by the hourly labor costs. Craft hours should cover direct labor, as well as indirect labor due to trade inefficiencies. The hourly costs shall be based on the following:

(1) Basic wages and benefits: Hourly rates and benefits as stated on the Department of Labor and Industries approved “statement of intent to pay prevailing wages” or a higher amount if approved by the Owner. Direct supervision shall be a reasonable percentage not to exceed 15% of the cost of direct labor. No supervision markup shall be allowed for a working supervisor’s hours.

(2) Worker’s insurance: Direct contributions to the state of Washington for industrial insurance; medical aid; and

supplemental pension, by the class and rates established by the Department of Labor and Industries.

(3) Federal insurance: Direct contributions required by the Federal Insurance Compensation Act; Federal Unemployment Tax Act; and the State Unemployment Compensation Act.

(4) Travel allowance: Travel allowance and/or subsistence, if applicable, shall be consistent with Owner’s policy allowing reimbursement or allotment of amounts actual, reasonable, and necessary. Owner’s full policy regarding Travel is available on request.

(5) Safety: Cost incurred due to the Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act, which shall be a reasonable percentage not to exceed 2% of the sum of the amounts calculated in (1), (2), and (3) above.

Material costs: This is an itemization of the quantity and cost of materials needed to perform the change in the Work. Material costs shall be developed first from actual known costs, second from supplier quotations or if these are not available, from standard industry pricing guides. Material costs shall consider all available discounts. Freight costs, express charges, or special delivery charges, shall be itemized.

Equipment costs: This is an itemization of the type of equipment and the estimated or actual length of time the construction equipment appropriate for the Work is or will be used on the change in the Work. Costs will be allowed for construction equipment only if used solely for the changed Work, or for additional rental costs actually incurred by the Contractor. Equipment charges shall be computed on the basis of actual invoice costs or if owned, from the current edition of one of the following sources:

(1) Associated General Contractors - Washington State Department of Transportation (AGC WSDOT) Equipment Rental Agreement


July 31, 2015 007200-26

current edition, on the Contract execution date.

(2) The state of Washington Utilities and Transportation Commission for trucks used on highways.

(3) The National Electrical Contractors Association for equipment used on electrical work.

(4) The Mechanical Contractors Association of America for equipment used on mechanical work.

The Equipment Watch Rental Rate (Blue Book) shall be used as a basis for establishing rental rates of equipment not listed in the above sources. The maximum rate for standby equipment shall not exceed that shown in the AGC WSDOT Equipment Rental Agreement, current edition on the Contract execution date.

Allowance for small tools, expendables & consumable supplies: Small tools consist of tools which cost $250 or less and are normally furnished by the performing contractor. The maximum rate for small tools shall not exceed the following:

(1) 3% for contractor: For Contractor, 3% of direct labor costs.

(2) 5% for Subcontractors: For Subcontractors, 5% of direct labor costs.

Expendables and consumables supplies directly associated with the change in Work must be itemized.

Subcontractor costs: This is defined as payments Contractor makes to Subcontractors for changed Work performed by Subcontractors of any tier. The Subcontractors’ cost of Work shall be calculated and itemized in the same manner as prescribed herein for Contractor.

Allowance for overhead: This is defined as costs of any kind attributable to direct and indirect delay, acceleration, or impact, added to the total cost to Owner of any change in the Contract Sum. If the Contractor is compensated

under Section 7.03D, the amount of such compensation shall be reduced by the amount Contractor is otherwise entitled to under this subsection (f). This allowance shall compensate Contractor for all noncraft labor, temporary construction facilities, field engineering, and schedule updating, as-built drawings, home office cost, B&O taxes, office engineering, estimating costs, additional overhead because of extended time, and any other cost incidental to the change in the Work. It shall be strictly limited in all cases to a reasonable amount, mutually acceptable, or if none can be agreed upon to an amount not to exceed the rates below:

(1) Projects less than $3 million: For

projects where the Contract Award

Amount is under $3 million, the

following shall apply:

(a) Contractor markup on Contractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work actually performed by Contractor’s own forces, shall not exceed 16% of the first $50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any.

(b) Subcontractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor (including lower tier subcontractors), for any Work actually performed by its own forces, shall not exceed 16% of the first $50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any.

(c) Contractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For Contractor, for any work performed by its Subcontractor(s), shall not exceed 6% of the first $50,000 of the amount due each Subcontractor, and 4% of the remaining amount if any.

(d) Subcontractor markup for lower tier

Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor, for any Work performed by its Subcontractor(s) of any lower tier, shall not exceed 4% of the first $50,000 of the amount due the sub-Subcontractor, and 2% of the remaining amount if any.

(e) Basis of cost applicable for markup: The cost to which overhead is to be applied shall be developed in accordance with Section 7.02B 7a.-e.

(2) Projects more than $3 million: For projects where the Contract Award Amount is equal to or exceeds $3 million, the following shall apply:

(a) Contractor markup on Contractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work actually performed by Contractor’s own forces, shall not exceed 12% of the first $50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any.

(b) Subcontractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor (including lower tier subcontractors), for


July 31, 2015 007200-27

any Work actually performed by its own forces, shall not exceed 12% of the first $50,000 of the cost, and 4% of the remaining cost, if any.

(c) Contractor markup for Subcontractor Work: For Contractor, for any Work performed by its Subcontractor(s), shall not exceed 4% of the first $50,000 of the amount due each Subcontractor, and 2% of the remaining amount if any.

(d) Subcontractor markup for lower tier

Subcontractor Work: For each Subcontractor, for any Work performed by its Subcontractor(s) of any lower tier, shall not exceed 4% of the first $50,000 of the amount due the sub-Subcontractor, and 2% of the remaining amount if any.

(e) Basis of cost applicable for markup: The cost to which overhead is to be applied shall be developed in accordance with Section 7.02B 7a.-e.

Allowance for profit: This Allowance for profit is an amount to be added to the cost of any change in contract sum, but not to the cost of change in Contract Time for which contractor has been compensated pursuant to the conditions set forth in Section 7.03. It shall be limited to a reasonable amount, mutually acceptable, or if none can be agreed upon, to an amount not to exceed the rates below:

(1) Contractor/Subcontractor

markup for self-performed Work: For Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier for work performed by their forces, 6% of the cost developed in accordance with 7.02B 7a.-e.

(2) Contractor / Subcontractor

markup for Work performed at

lower tier: For Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier for work performed by a subcontractor of a lower tier, shall not exceed 4% of the subcontract cost developed in accordance with 7.02B 7a. - h.

Insurance and bond premiums: Cost of change in insurance or bond premium: This is defined as:

(1) Contractor’s liability insurance: The cost of any changes in Contractor’s liability insurance arising directly from execution of the Change Order; and

(2) Payment and Performance

Bond: The cost of the additional premium for Contractor’s bond arising directly from the changed Work.

The cost of any change in insurance or bond premium shall be added after overhead and allowance for profit are calculated in accordance with subparagraph f. and g. above.

C. Change Order Pricing -- Unit Prices

1. Content of Owner authorization: Whenever Owner authorizes Contractor to perform Work on a unit-price basis, Owner’s authorization shall clearly state:

Scope: Scope of work to be performed;

Reimbursement basis: Type of reimbursement including pre-agreed rates for material quantities; and

Reimbursement limit: Cost limit of reimbursement.

2. Contractor responsibilities: Contractor shall:

Cooperate with Owner and assist in monitoring the Work being performed. As requested by Owner, Contractor shall identify workers assigned to the Change Order Work and areas in which they are working;

Leave access as appropriate for quantity measurement; and

Not exceed any cost limit(s) without Owner’s prior written approval.

3. Cost breakdown consistent with Fixed Price

requirements: Contractor shall submit costs in accordance with Section 7.02B. and satisfy the following requirements:

Unit prices must include overhead,

profit, bond and insurance premiums: Unit prices shall include reimbursement for all direct and indirect costs of the Work, including overhead, profit, bond, and insurance costs; and

Owner verification of quantities: Quantities must be supported by field measurement statements signed by Owner.

D. Change Order Pricing -- Time-and-Material Prices

1. Content of Owner authorization: Whenever Owner authorizes Contractor to perform Work on a time-and-material basis, Owner’s authorization shall clearly state:

Scope: Scope of Work to be performed;


July 31, 2015 007200-28

Reimbursement basis: Type of

reimbursement including pre-agreed rates, if any, for material quantities or labor; and

Reimbursement limit: Cost limit of reimbursement.

2. Contractor responsibilities: Contractor shall:

Identify workers assigned: Cooperate with Owner and assist in monitoring the Work being performed. As requested by Owner, identify workers assigned to the Change Order Work and areas in which they are working;

Provide daily timesheets: Identify on daily time sheets all labor performed in accordance with this authorization. Submit copies of daily time sheets within 2 working days for Owner’s review;

Allow Owner to measure quantities: Leave access as appropriate for quantity measurement;

Perform Work efficiently: Perform all Work in accordance with this section as efficiently as possible; and

Not exceed Owner’s cost limit: Not exceed any cost limit(s) without Owner’s prior written approval.

3. Cost breakdown consistent with Fixed Price

requirements: Contractor shall submit costs

in accordance with paragraph 7.02B and

additional verification supported by:

Timesheets: Labor detailed on daily time sheets; and

Invoices: Invoices for material.

7.03 CHANGE IN THE CONTRACT TIME

A. COP requests for Contract Time: The Contract Time shall only be changed by a Change Order. Contractor shall include any request for a change in the Contract Time in its Change Order Proposal.

B. Time extension permitted if not Contractor’s fault: If the time of Contractor’s performance is changed due to an act of Force Majeure, or due to the fault or negligence of Owner or anyone for whose acts Owner is responsible, Contractor shall be entitled to make a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time in accordance with the following procedure. No adjustment in the

Contract Time shall be allowed to the extent Contractor’s changed time of performance is due to the fault or negligence of Contractor, or anyone for whose acts Contractor is responsible.

1. Notice and record keeping for Contract

Time request: A request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time shall be based on written notice delivered within 7 Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request. If Contractor believes it is entitled to adjustment of Contract Time, Contractor shall immediately notify Owner and begin to keep and maintain complete, accurate, and specific daily records. Contractor shall give Owner access to any such record and if requested, shall promptly furnish copies of such record to Owner.

2. Timing and content of Contractor’s Notice: Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Time for any events that occurred more than 7 Days before Contractor’s written notice to Owner. The written notice shall set forth, at a minimum, a description of: the event giving rise to the request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time; the nature of the impacts to Contractor and its Subcontractors of any tier, if any; and to the extent possible the amount of the adjustment in Contract Time requested. Failure to properly give such written notice shall, to the extent Owner’s interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor’s right to an equitable adjustment.

3. Contractor to provide supplemental

information: Within 30 Days of the occurrence of the event giving rise to the request, unless Owner agrees in writing to allow an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data, Contractor shall supplement the written notice provided in accordance with subparagraph 7.03B.2 with additional supporting data. Such additional data shall include, at a minimum: the amount of delay claimed, itemized in accordance with the procedure set forth herein; specific facts, circumstances, and analysis that confirms not only that Contractor suffered the delay claimed, but that the delay claimed was actually a result of the act, event, or condition complained of, and that the Contract Documents provide entitlement to an equitable adjustment in Contract Time for such act, event, or condition; and supporting documentation sufficiently detailed to permit an informed analysis of the request by Owner. Failure to provide such additional information and documentation within the time allowed or within the format required shall, to the extent Owner’s interests are prejudiced, constitute a waiver of Contractor’s right to an equitable adjustment.


July 31, 2015 007200-29

4. Contractor to proceed with Work as

directed: Pending final resolution of any request in accordance with this paragraph, unless otherwise agreed in writing, Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Work.

C. Contractor to demonstrate impact on critical path of

schedule: Any change in the Contract Time covered by a Change Order, or based on a request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Time, shall be limited to the change in the critical path of Contractor’s schedule attributable to the change of Work or event(s) giving rise to the request for equitable adjustment. Any Change Order Proposal or request for an adjustment in the Contract Time shall demonstrate the impact on the critical path of the schedule. Contractor shall be responsible for showing clearly on the Progress Schedule that the change or event: had a specific impact on the critical path, and except in case of concurrent delay, was the sole cause of such impact; and could not have been avoided by resequencing of the Work or other reasonable alternatives.

D. Cost of change in Contract Time: Contractor may request compensation for the cost of a change in Contract Time in accordance with this paragraph, 7.03D, subject to the following conditions:

1. Must be solely fault of Owner or A/E: The change in Contract Time shall solely be caused by the fault or negligence of Owner or A/E;

2. Procedures: Contractor shall follow the procedure set forth in paragraph 7.03B;

3. Demonstrate impact on critical path: Contractor shall establish the extent of the change in Contract Time in accordance with paragraph 7.03C; and:

4. Limitations on daily costs: The daily cost of any change in Contract Time shall be limited to the items below, less the amount of any change in the Contract Sum the Contractor may otherwise be entitled to pursuant to Section 7.02B 7f for any change in the Work that contributed to this change in Contract Time:

Non-productive supervision of labor: cost of nonproductive field supervision or labor extended because of the delay;

Weekly meetings and indirect

activities: cost of weekly meetings or similar indirect activities extended because of the delay;

Temporary facilities or equipment

rental: cost of temporary facilities or equipment rental extended because of the delay;

Insurance premiums: cost of

insurance extended because of the delay;

Overhead: general and administrative overhead in an amount to be agreed upon, but not to exceed 3% of the Contract Award Amount divided by the originally specified Contract Time for each Day of the delay.

- CLAIMS AND DISPUTE RESOLUTION

8.01 CLAIMS

A. A Claim is Contractor’s remedy: If the parties fail to reach agreement on the terms of any Change Order for Owner-directed Work as provided in Section 7.01, on the resolution of any request for an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum as provided in Section 7.02, the Contract Time as provided in Section 7.03, or any dispute interpretation of the parties respective obligations and duties under the Contract documents Contractor’s only remedy shall be to file a Claim with Owner as provided in this section.

B. Claim filing deadline for Contractor: Contractor shall file its Claim within 120 Days from Owner’s final offer made in accordance with Section 7.01E or by the date of Final Acceptance, whichever occurs first.

C. Claim must cover all costs and be documented: The Claim shall be deemed to cover all changes in cost and time (including direct, indirect, impact, and consequential) to which Contractor may be entitled. It shall be fully substantiated and documented. At a minimum, the Claim shall contain the following information:

1. Factual statement of Claim: A detailed factual statement of the Claim for additional compensation and time, if any, providing all necessary dates, locations, and items of Work affected by the Claim.

2. Dates: The date on which facts arose that gave rise to the claim.

3. Owner and A/E employee’s knowledgeable

about Claim: The name of each employee of Owner or A/E knowledgeable about the Claim;

4. Support from Contract Documents: The specific provisions of the Contract Documents which support the Claim;

5. Identification of other supporting

information: The identification of any documents and the substance of any oral communications that support the Claim;

6. Copies of supporting documentation: Copies of any identified documents, other than the Contract Documents, that support the Claim;


July 31, 2015 007200-30

7. Details on Claim for Contract Time: If an adjustment in the Contract Time is sought: the specific days and dates for which it is sought; the specific reasons Contractor believes an extension in the Contract Time should be granted; and Contractor’s analysis of its Progress Schedule to demonstrate the reason for the extension in Contract Time;

8. Details on Claim: for adjustment of Contract Sum: If an adjustment in the Contract Sum is sought, the exact amount sought and a breakdown of that amount into the categories set forth in, and in the detail as required by Section 7.02; and

9. Statement certifying Claim: A statement certifying, under penalty of perjury, that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting cost and pricing data are true and accurate to the best of Contractor’s knowledge and belief, that the Claim is fully supported by the accompanying data, and that the amount requested accurately reflects the adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time for which Contractor believes Owner is liable.

D. Owner’s Contracting Officer’s response to Claim filed: After Contractor has submitted a fully documented Claim that complies with all applicable provisions of Parts 7 and 8, Owner’s Contracting Officer shall respond, in writing, to Contractor as follows:

1. Response time for Claim less than $50,000: If the Claim amount is less than $50,000, with a decision within 60 Days from the date the Claim is received; or 2. Response time for Claim of $50,000 or more: If the Claim amount is $50,000 or more, with a decision within 60 Days from the date the Claim is received, or with notice to Contractor of the date by which it will render its decision. Owner will then respond with a written decision in such additional time.

E. Contracting Officer’s review of Claim and finality of

decision: To assist in the review of Contractor’s Claim, Owner’s Contracting Officer may visit the Project site, or request additional information, in order to fully evaluate the issues raised by the Claim. Contractor shall proceed with performance of the Work pending final resolution of any Claim. Owner’s Contracting Officer’s written decision as set forth above shall be final and conclusive as to all matters set forth in the Claim, unless Contractor follows the procedure set forth in Section 8.02.

F. Waiver of Contractor rights for failure to comply with

this Section: Any Claim of the Contractor against the Owner for damages, additional compensation, or additional time, shall be conclusively deemed to have been waived by the Contractor unless made in accordance with the requirements of this Section.

G. Finality of Owner’s Contracting Officer’s Decision:

This decision shall be final and conclusive unless within ten (10) calendar days from the date of receipt of its copy, the Contractor mails or otherwise furnishes a written appeal to the Chief Executive Officer (“CEO”) of STA. STA CEO review of the Contracting Officer’s decision is limited to a review and decision issued on the same record presented to the Contracting Officer.

H. Appeal procedure: In connection with appeal to CEO,

the Contractor shall be afforded an opportunity to be heard and to offer evidence in support of its position. Pending final decision of a dispute hereunder, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with the performance of this Contract while matters in dispute are being resolved. The final decision of the CEO shall be binding upon the Contractor and the Contractor shall abide by the decision. The only available review is by an arbitrator as provided below and the applicable standard of review is whether the CEO’s decision was arbitrary and capricious.

8.02 ARBITRATION A. Timing of Contractor’s demand for review of CEO’s

decision by third-party neutral (arbitration): If Contractor disagrees with STA’s CEO’s decision rendered in accordance with paragraph H above, Contractor shall provide Owner with a written demand for review by a third-party neutral (arbitration). No demand for arbitration of any such Claim shall be made later than 30 Days after the date of the CEO’s decision on such Claim; failure to demand arbitration within said 30 Days period shall result in the CEO’s decision being final and binding upon Contractor and its Subcontractors. B. Selection of the third-party neutral (Arbitrator): The parties shall mutually select a third-party neutral to review the parties’ claims within the confines of the decision issued by the CEO. If the parties are unable to mutually select a third-party neutral, they shall each appoint a neutral and the two appointed neutrals shall agree to the appointment of the third-party neutral who will preside over the matter. C. Standard of review: The arbitrator’s review shall be limited to determining whether the CEO acted arbitrarily and capriciously in issuing its decision. Decisions issued under the Administrative Procedures Act may guide the arbitrator in determining whether the CEO acted arbitrarily and capriciously. D. Costs of Arbitration: The costs of arbitration will be borne by the party against whom judgment is issued. To the extent neither party substantially prevails at arbitration, the parties will split equally the costs associated with the arbitration. E. Arbitration is forum for resolving Claims other than

those identified under Part 8 above: All Claims arising out of the Work shall be resolved by arbitration. The judgment upon the arbitration award may be entered, or review of the award may occur, in the superior court having jurisdiction thereof. No independent legal action relating to or arising from the Work shall be maintained. F. Owner may combine Claims into same arbitration: Claims between Owner and Contractor, Contractor and its


July 31, 2015 007200-31

Subcontractors, Contractor and A/E, and Owner and A/E shall, upon demand by Owner, be submitted in the same arbitration or mediation. G. Settlement outside of arbitration to be documented in

Change Order: If the parties resolve the Claim prior to arbitration judgment, the terms of the resolution shall be incorporated in a Change Order. The Change Order shall constitute full payment and final settlement of the Claim, including all claims for time and for direct, indirect, or consequential costs, including costs of delays, inconvenience, disruption of schedule, or loss of efficiency or productivity.

8.03 CLAIMS AUDITS

A. Owner may audit Claims: All Claims filed against Owner shall be subject to audit at any time following the filing of the Claim. Failure of Contractor, or Subcontractors of any tier, to maintain and retain sufficient records to allow Owner to verify all or a portion of the Claim or to permit Owner access to the books and records of Contractor, or Subcontractors of any tier, shall constitute a waiver of the Claim and shall bar any recovery.

B. Contractor to make documents available: In support of Owner audit of any Claim, Contractor shall, upon request, promptly make available to Owner the following documents:

1. Daily time sheets and supervisor’s daily reports;

2. Collective bargaining agreements;

3. Insurance, welfare, and benefits records;

4. Payroll registers;

5. Earnings records;

6. Payroll tax forms;

7. Material invoices, requisitions, and delivery confirmations;

8. Material cost distribution worksheet;

9. Equipment records (list of company equipment, rates, etc.);

10. Vendors’, rental agencies’, Subcontractors’, and agents’ invoices;

11. Contracts between Contractor and each of its Subcontractors, and all lower-tier Subcontractor contracts and supplier contracts;

12. Subcontractors’ and agents’ payment certificates;

13. Cancelled checks (payroll and vendors);

14. Job cost report, including monthly totals;

15. Job payroll ledger;

16. Planned resource loading schedules and summaries;

17. General ledger;

18. Cash disbursements journal;

19. Financial statements for all years reflecting the operations on the Work. In addition, the Owner may require, if it deems it appropriate, additional financial statements for 3 years preceding execution of the Work;

20. Depreciation records on all company equipment whether these records are maintained by the company involved, its accountant, or others;

21. If a source other than depreciation records is used to develop costs for Contractor’s internal purposes in establishing the actual cost of owning and operating equipment, all such other source documents;

22. All nonprivileged documents which relate to each and every Claim together with all documents which support the amount of any adjustment in Contract Sum or Contract Time sought by each Claim;

23. Work sheets or software used to prepare the Claim establishing the cost components for items of the Claim including but not limited to labor, benefits and insurance, materials, equipment, Subcontractors, all documents which establish the time periods, individuals involved, the hours for the individuals, and the rates for the individuals; and

24. Work sheets, software, and all other documents used by Contractor to prepare its bid.

C. Contractor to provide facilities for audit and shall

cooperate: The audit may be performed by employees of Owner or a representative of Owner. Contractor, and its Subcontractors, shall provide adequate facilities acceptable to Owner, for the audit during normal business hours. Contractor, and all Subcontractors, shall make a good faith effort to cooperate with Owner’s auditors.


July 31, 2015 007200-32

- TERMINATION OF THE WORK

9.01 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CAUSE

A. 7 Day Notice to Terminate for Cause: Owner may, upon 7 Days written notice to Contractor and to its surety, terminate (without prejudice to any right or remedy of Owner) the Work, or any part of it, for cause upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events:

1. Contractor fails to prosecute Work: Contractor fails to prosecute the Work or any portion thereof with sufficient diligence to ensure Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time;

2. Contractor bankrupt: Contractor is adjudged bankrupt, makes a general assignment for the benefit of its creditors, or a receiver is appointed on account of its insolvency;

3. Contractor fails to correct Work: Contractor fails in a material way to replace or correct Work not in conformance with the Contract Documents;

4. Contractor fails to supply workers or materials: Contractor repeatedly fails to supply skilled workers or proper materials or equipment;

5. Contractor failure to pay Subcontractors or labor: Contractor repeatedly fails to make prompt payment due to Subcontractors or for labor;

6. Contractor violates laws: Contractor materially disregards or fails to comply with laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, or orders of any public authority having jurisdiction; or

7. Contractor in material breach of Contract: Contractor is otherwise in material breach of any provision of the Contract Documents.

B. Owner’s actions upon termination: Upon termination, Owner may at its option:

1. Take possession of Project site: Take possession of the Project site and take possession of or use all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by Contractor to maintain the orderly progress of, and to finish, the Work;

2. Accept assignment of Subcontracts: Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.20; and

3. Finish the Work: Finish the Work by whatever other reasonable method it deems expedient.

C. Surety’s role: Owner’s rights and duties upon termination are subject to the prior rights and duties of the

surety, if any, obligated under any bond provided in accordance with the Contract Documents.

D. Contractor’s required actions: When Owner terminates the Work in accordance with this section, Contractor shall take the actions set forth in paragraph 9.02B, and shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is accepted.

E. Contractor to pay for unfinished Work: If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds the cost of finishing the Work, including compensation for A/E’s services and expenses made necessary thereby and any other extra costs or damages incurred by Owner in completing the Work, or as a result of Contractor’s actions, such excess shall be paid to Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. These obligations for payment shall survive termination.

F. Contractor and Surety still responsible for Work

performed: Termination of the Work in accordance with this section shall not relieve Contractor or its surety of any responsibilities for Work performed.

G. Conversion of “Termination for Cause” to

“Termination for Convenience”: If Owner terminates Contractor for cause, and it is later determined that none of the circumstances set forth in paragraph 9.01A exist, then such termination shall be deemed a termination for convenience pursuant to Section 9.02.

9.02 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE

A. Owner Notice of Termination for Convenience: Owner may, upon written notice, terminate (without prejudice to any right or remedy of Owner) the Work, or any part of it, for the convenience of Owner.

B. Contractor response to termination Notice: Unless Owner directs otherwise, after receipt of a written notice of termination for either cause or convenience, Contractor shall promptly:

1. Cease Work: Stop performing Work on the date and as specified in the notice of termination;

2. No further orders or Subcontracts: Place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, equipment, services or facilities, except as may be necessary for completion of such portion of the Work as is not terminated;

3. Cancel orders and Subcontracts: Cancel all orders and subcontracts, upon terms acceptable to Owner, to the extent that they relate to the performance of Work terminated;

4. Assign orders and Subcontracts to Owner: Assign to Owner all of the right, title, and


July 31, 2015 007200-33

interest of Contractor in all orders and subcontracts;

5. Take action to protect the Work: Take such action as may be necessary or as directed by Owner to preserve and protect the Work, Project site, and any other property related to this Project in the possession of Contractor in which Owner has an interest; and

6. Continue performance not terminated: Continue performance only to the extent not terminated.

7. Owner’s Property. If the Contractor has any property in its possession belonging to STA, the Contractor will account for the same, and return it to STA or dispose of it in the manner STA directs.

C. Terms of adjustment in Contract Sum if Contract

Terminated: If Owner terminates the Work or any portion thereof for convenience, Contractor shall be entitled to make a request for an equitable adjustment for its reasonable direct costs incurred prior to the effective date of the termination, plus a reasonable allowance for overhead and profit on Work performed prior to termination, plus the reasonable administrative costs of the termination, but shall not be entitled to any other costs or damages, whatsoever, provided however, the total sum payable upon termination shall not exceed the Contract Sum reduced by prior payments. Contractor shall be required to make its request in accordance with the provisions of Part 7.

D. Owner to determine whether to adjust Contract Time: If Owner terminates the Work or any portion thereof for convenience, the Contract Time shall be adjusted as determined by Owner.

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

10.01 GOVERNING LAW

Applicable law and venue: The Contract Documents and the rights of the parties herein shall be governed by the laws of the state of Washington. Venue shall be in the Superior Court of Spokane County, Washington.

10.02 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS

Bound to successors; Assignment of Contract: Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Neither party shall assign the Work without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations set forth in the Contract Documents.

10.03 MEANING OF WORDS

Meaning of words used in Specifications: Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. Reference to standard specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to the code of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall be to the latest standard specification, manual, or code in effect on the date for submission of bids, except as may be otherwise specifically stated. Wherever in these Drawings and Specifications an article, device, or piece of equipment is referred to in the singular manner, such reference shall apply to as many such articles as are shown on the drawings, or required to complete the installation.

10.04 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES

No waiver of rights: No action or failure to act by Owner or A/E shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract Documents, nor shall action or failure to act constitute approval or an acquiescence in a breach therein, except as may be specifically agreed in writing.

10.05 CONTRACTOR REGISTRATION

Contractor must be registered or licensed: Pursuant to RCW 39.06, Contractor shall be registered or licensed as required by the laws of the State of Washington, including but not limited to RCW 18.27.

10.06 TIME COMPUTATIONS

Computing time: When computing any period of time, the day of the event from which the period of time begins shall not be counted. The last day is counted unless it falls on a weekend or legal holiday, in which event the period runs until the end of the next day that is not a weekend or holiday.

10.07 RECORDS RETENTION

Six year records retention period: The wage, payroll, and cost records of Contractor, and its Subcontractors created or used for the Project, shall be retained for a period of not less than 6 years after the date of Final Acceptance.

10.08 THIRD-PARTY AGREEMENTS

No third party relationships created: The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind between: A/E and Contractor; Owner and any Subcontractor, or any persons other than Owner and Contractor.

10.09 ANTITRUST ASSIGNMENT

Contractor assigns overcharge amounts to Owner: Owner and Contractor recognize that in actual economic practice, overcharges resulting from antitrust violations are in fact usually


July 31, 2015 007200-34

borne by the purchaser. Therefore, Contractor hereby assigns to Owner any and all claims for such overcharges as to goods, materials, and equipment purchased in connection with the Work performed in accordance with the Contract Documents, except as to overcharges which result from antitrust violations commencing after the Contract Sum is established and which are not passed on to Owner under a Change Order. Contractor shall put a similar clause in its Subcontracts, and require a similar clause in its sub-Subcontracts, such that all claims for such overcharges on the Work are passed to Owner by Contractor.

10.10 HEADINGS AND CAPTIONS Headings for convenience only: All headings and captions used in these General Conditions are only for convenience of reference, and shall not be used in any way in connection with the meaning, effect, interpretation, construction, or enforcement of the General Conditions, and do not define the limit or describe the scope or intent of any provision of these General Conditions.


Spokane Transit Authority Special Conditions for STA Facility Construction Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Section 007300

August 4, 2015 007300-1

SECTION 007300 - Special Conditions for Spokane Transit Authority Facility Construction

Contract # 15-STA-512

1. LABOR PROVISIONS - NONCONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS

A. Overtime Requirements. No Contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any work week in which they are employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours per week unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such work week.

B. Liability for Unpaid Wages and Liquidated Damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in subparagraph (b)(1) of 29 CFR § 5.5, the Contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefore shall be liable for the unpaid wages and applicable liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in subparagraph (b)(1) of 29 CFR § 5.5 in the sum of $10 each for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of eight hours or in excess of the standard work week of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in subparagraph (b)(1) of 29 CFR § 5.5.

C. Withholding for Unpaid Wages and Liquidated Damages. The U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) or STA shall, upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the DOT, withhold or cause to be withheld, from any monies payable on account of work performed by the Contractor or subcontractor under this contract or any other federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such Contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in subparagraph (b)(2) of 29 CFR § 5.5.

D. Nonconstruction Grants. The Contractor or subcontractor shall maintain payrolls and basic payroll records during the course of the work and shall preserve them for a period of three years from the completion of the contract for all laborers and mechanics, including guards and watchmen, working on the contract. Such records shall contain the name and address of each such employee, social security number, correct classifications, hourly rates of wages paid, daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made, and actual wages paid.

E. Subcontracts. The Contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontract the clauses set forth in subparagraphs A through E of this section, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in subparagraphs A through E of this section.

2. CONFLICT OF INTEREST

No employee, officer, or agent of STA shall participate in selection, or in the award or administration of a contract if a conflict of interest, real or apparent, would be involved. Such a conflict would arise when:

A. the employee, officer, or agent;

B. any member of his immediate family;

C. his or her partner; or

D. an organization which employs, or is about to employ an employee, officer, or agent of STA has a financial or other interest in the firm, Contractor or subcontractor selected for award

Spokane Transit Authority Special Conditions for STA Facility Construction Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Section 007300

August 4, 2015 007300-2

3. EMPLOYEE SOLICITATION

Vendor, without the consent of STA, shall not directly or indirectly solicit, influence, entice or hire or attempt to solicit, influence, entice or hire any employee of STA to: (a) cease employment with STA; or (b) do business related to a business connected with the Vendor’s business during this Agreement and for a period of three (3) years from the date on which the Agreement terminates, or the work is accepted by STA, whichever is earlier. STA’s employee shall be deemed to be related to or connected with a Vendor if such STA employee becomes (a) a partner in a general or limited partnership or employee of a partnership, (b) a shareholder, officer, employee or director of a corporation, member, consultant or agent for the Vendor or any of Vendor’s affiliates, subsidiaries or connected business. This subparagraph shall survive the termination of this Agreement. This Agreement is not restricted to any geographical area.

Vendor recognizes and acknowledges that STA’s employees may receive training and other benefits from the contractual relationship with STA because of STA’s assignment of employees to work in connection with Vendor’s contract. Vendor agrees the restrictions on soliciting, influencing, enticing or hiring STA employees are reasonable.


Spokane Transit Authority Washtington State Prevailing Wage Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Section 007346

August 4, 2015 007346-1

Washington State Prevailing Wages For City of Spokane, Spokane County

In the preparation of its bid, based on these specifications, the bidder is solely responsible to: 1. use the prevailing wage schedule in effect at the bid opening date and time; and 2. determine the appropriate labor classification(s); and utilize the appropriate and correct prevailing wage and benefit

rate(s). The State of Washington Department of Labor and Industries issues revised wage schedules twice per year (every 6 months) which become effective approximately the first of March and the last of August. The wage schedule that will apply to this bid will be the schedule in effect at the time and date of the actual bid opening (the published date including any changes made through the issue of addenda). Therefore the bidder is cautioned to be mindful that addendum changing the bid opening date could make the enclosed schedule obsolete. The bidder is solely responsible to determine what schedule is applicable to the bid and to use that schedule in the preparation of its bid. The Prevailing Wage Documents for Public Works from the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries for Spokane County may be found on the Department of Labor and Industries website located at: http://www.lni.wa.gov/TradesLicensing/PrevWage/WageRates/default.asp

Questions should be referred to the State of Washington Department of Labor & Industries, 901 North Monroe, Suite 100, Spokane, Washington, phone (509) 324-2600 or to PO Box 44540, Olympia WA 98504-4540, phone (360) 902-5335 or Fax (360) 902-5300. Printed copies of the current prevailing wage forms are available upon request.

It is the responsibility of the bidder to insure that the appropriate labor classification(s) are identified and that the

applicable wage and benefit rates are taken into consideration when preparing their bid according to these

specifications.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 011000

Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Summary

July 31, 2015 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.

2. Type of the Contract.

3. Work phases.

4. Work under other contracts.

5. Products ordered in advance.

6. Owner-furnished products.

7. Use of premises.

8. Owner's occupancy requirements.

9. Work restrictions.

10. Specification formats and conventions.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 00 Sections

2. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures

governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: STA Plaza Upgrade, 15-STA-512

1. Project Location701 W. Riverside Ave, Spokane, WA 99201

B. Owner: Spokane Transit Authority (STA)

1. Owner's Representative: Jessica Charlton, STA Project Manager

C. Engineer: Coffman Engineers, 10 N Post St, Suite 500, Spokane, WA 99201

D. Architect: ALSC Architects, 203 N. Washington, Suite 400, Spokane, WA 99201

E. Construction Manager: Hill International, Inc, 818 W Riverside, Suite 350, Spokane, WA

99201



July 31, 2015 011000 - 2

1. Construction Manager has been engaged for this Project to serve as an advisor to Owner

and to provide assistance in administering the Contract for Construction between Owner

and Contractor, according to a separate contract.

F. Project Coordinator: Hill International and ALSC Architects have been appointed to serve as

Project Coordinators.

G. The Work consists of the following:

1. See Division 00 Section 003100

1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT

A. See Division 00 Section 005200

1.5 WORK PHASES

A. The Work shall be conducted in three (3) sequential phases, with each phase substantially

complete, including occupancy, before beginning the next phase unless specifically permitted in

writing by STA. See Sheet G004additional phasing information.

B. Before commencing Work of each phase, submit a schedule showing the sequence,

commencement and completion dates, and move-out and -in dates of Owner's personnel for all

phases of the Work.

1.6 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried

out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the

Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

B. Concurrent Work: STA may award separate contract(s) for construction operations at the

Project site. Those operations may be conducted simultaneously with work under this Contract.

Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

1.7 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Owner will furnish products indicated within the contract drawings. The Work includes

providing support systems to receive Owner's equipment and includes but may not be limited to

making plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections.

1. Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to

Contractor.

2. Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to

Contractor's Construction Schedule.

3. After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be

present for and assist in Owner's inspection.



July 31, 2015 011000 - 3

4. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for

replacement.

5. Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's

warranties to Contractor.

6. Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner-furnished

products. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall

designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule.

7. Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to

the Architect noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product.

8. Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner-furnished items

at Project site.

9. Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during

storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements.

10. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor

shall repair or replace them.

11. Contractor shall install and otherwise incorporate Owner-furnished items into the Work.

1.8 USE OF PREMISES

A. See Specification Division 00

1.9 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire

construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize

conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-

to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated. See Division 00 for

additional information.

1.10 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. See Specification Division 00

1.11 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the

50-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.

1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-

referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric

sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are

not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to

determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.

2. Division 00: Sections in Division 00 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in

the Specifications.



July 31, 2015 011000 - 4

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and

the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations.

These conventions are as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract

Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate.

Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words

shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where

applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications.

Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor.

Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for

clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by

others when so noted.

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context,

are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

1.12 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)



Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Project Management and Coordination

July 31, 2015 013100 - 1

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and other Division 00 and 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. Division

00 Specifications takes precedence over anything stated in this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on

Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Coordination Drawings.

2. Administrative and supervisory personnel.

3. Project meetings.

4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility

will be assigned to a specific contractor.

C. Related information is provided within Division 00 Section 007200 “General Conditions for

STA Construction”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract

Documents.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the

Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate

construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper

installation, connection, and operation.

B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other

contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.

Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections,

that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.



July 31, 2015 013100 - 2

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where

installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before

or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure

maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to

ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and

repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures

required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees

at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their

Work is required.

D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative

procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts

and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not

limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.

3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.

4. Delivery and processing of submittals.

5. Progress meetings.

6. Preinstallation conferences.

7. Project closeout activities.

8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

9. Project closeout activities.

E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with

consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually

incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials

that are designated as Owner's property.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability

necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if

coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base

Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed

data. Include the following information, as applicable:



July 31, 2015 013100 - 3

a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,

structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

b. Indicate required installation sequences.

c. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of

dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum

clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of

such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be

considered changes to the Contract.

2. Sheet Size: Per Division 00

3. Number of Copies: Per Division 00

4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those

Sections.

B. Key Personnel Names: Submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent

and other personnel in attendance at Project site per Division 00.

1.6 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL

A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory

personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.

1. Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors.

1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise

indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is

required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner, Construction Manager and

Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.

3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved per the requirements

of Division 00.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting

construction per Division 00 requirements.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each

construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or

affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and

installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect

and Construction Manager of scheduled meeting dates.



July 31, 2015 013100 - 4

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the

particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. The Contract Documents.

b. Options.

c. Related RFIs.

d. Related Change Orders.

e. Purchases.

f. Deliveries.

g. Submittals.

h. Review of mockups.

i. Possible conflicts.

j. Compatibility problems.

k. Time schedules.

l. Weather limitations.

m. Manufacturer's written recommendations.

n. Warranty requirements.

o. Compatibility of materials.

p. Acceptability of substrates.

q. Temporary facilities and controls.

r. Space and access limitations.

s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

t. Testing and inspecting requirements.

u. Installation procedures.

v. Coordination with other work.

w. Required performance results.

x. Protection of adjacent work.

y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including

required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who

should have been present.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.

Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the

Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals or as required by the

Division 00 Specifications.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Construction Manager, Engineer and

Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with

current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities

shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar

with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review

other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as

appropriate to status of Project.



July 31, 2015 013100 - 5

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.

Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,

in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction

behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to

do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and

subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements.

2) Sequence of operations.

3) Status of submittals.

4) Deliveries.

5) Off-site fabrication.

6) Access.

7) Site utilization.

8) Temporary facilities and controls.

9) Work hours.

10) Hazards and risks.

11) Progress cleaning.

12) Quality and work standards.

13) Status of correction of deficient items.

14) Field observations.

15) RFIs.

16) Status of proposal requests.

17) Pending changes.

18) Status of Change Orders.

19) Pending claims and disputes.

20) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute to Contractor the meeting minutes.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who

should have been present.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress

meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue

revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings as required. Project

coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as

progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Construction Manager, Engineer, and

Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with

current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities

shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar

with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.



July 31, 2015 013100 - 6

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting.

Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for

discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last

coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of

schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Combined Contractor's Construction

Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure

commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions

are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed

within the Contract Time.

b. Schedule Updating: Revise Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule after

each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or

recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the

following:

1) Interface requirements.

2) Sequence of operations.

3) Status of submittals.

4) Deliveries.

5) Off-site fabrication.

6) Access.

7) Site utilization.

8) Temporary facilities and controls.

9) Work hours.

10) Hazards and risks.

11) Progress cleaning.

12) Quality and work standards.

13) Change Orders.

3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to

others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.

1.8 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents,

and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the

form specified.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor

will be returned with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's

work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and

the following:

1. Project name.



July 31, 2015 013100 - 7

2. Date.

3. Name of Contractor.

4. Name of Architect and Construction Manager.

5. RFI number, numbered sequentially.

6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.

7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.

9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time

or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.

10. Contractor's signature.

11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions,

thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials,

assemblies, and attachments.

C. Hard-Copy RFIs:

1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.

D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as

indicated above.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in PDF format.

E. Architect's and Construction Manager's Action: Architect and Construction Manager will

review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow seven (7) working days for

Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received

the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals.

b. Requests for approval of substitutions.

c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents.

d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.

e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.

f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case

Architect's time for response will start again.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the

Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to

Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or

the Contract Sum, notify Architect and Construction Manager in writing within

10days of receipt of the RFI response.



July 31, 2015 013100 - 8

F. On receipt of Architect's and Construction Manager's action, update the RFI log and

immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify

Architect and Construction Manager within seven (7) days if Contractor disagrees with

response.

G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.

Submit log weekly. Use form 006313.F provided in Division 00.

1. Project name.

2. Name and address of Contractor.

3. Name and address of Architect and Construction Manager.

4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.

5. RFI description.

6. Date the RFI was submitted.

7. Date Architect's response was received.

8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate.

9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as

appropriate.





Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Quality Requirements

July 31, 2015 014000 - 1

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




00 Specification take precedence in the event of a conflict.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and

quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or

indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the

Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities

are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections

may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-

assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document

requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required

by the Engineer, Architect, Owner, Construction Manager, or authorities having

jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. Related Sections include the following:


2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during

execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed

construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after

execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and

completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract

enforcement activities performed by Engineer, Architect or Construction Manager.



July 31, 2015 014000 - 2

C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to

verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where

indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing,

or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the

Work will be judged.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project

before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or

compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing

agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to

establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e.,

plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation

of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing

laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an

employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,

including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must

be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name,

such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively

to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.

J. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a

minimum of seven (7) previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar

with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities

having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish

different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the

most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but

apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be

the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the

minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.

To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as

appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision

before proceeding.



July 31, 2015 014000 - 3

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to

demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a

recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title.

2. Description of test and inspection.

3. Identification of applicable standards.

4. Identification of test and inspection methods.

5. Number of tests and inspections required.

6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.

7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.

8. Requirements for obtaining samples.

9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:

1. Date of issue.

2. Project title and number.

3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.

4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.

5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.

6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.

7. Identification of product and Specification Section.

8. Complete test or inspection data.

9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.

10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting.

11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements.

12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.

13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,

certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee

payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for

compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels

required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling

work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has

resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.



July 31, 2015 014000 - 4

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar

to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as

well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient

production capacity to produce required units.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to

practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing

engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed

for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this

Project in material, design, and extent.

F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities

shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall

satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing

the Work.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the

experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according

to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where

required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.

2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary

Laboratory Accreditation Program.

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of

manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of

manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this

Project.

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing

for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the

following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.

b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work.

c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with

performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will

perform same tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and

methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.



July 31, 2015 014000 - 5

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and

laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,

inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor.

Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work

complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each

form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using

materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by

Architect or Construction Manager.

2. Notify Architect and Construction Manager seven (7) days in advance of dates and times

when mockups will be constructed.

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.

4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow seven (7) days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for

judging the completed Work.

6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified

in individual Sections in Divisions 02 through 49.

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,

Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing

agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to

perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as

authorized by Change Orders.

3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work

that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.

B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless

otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities

having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities

having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing

agency to perform these quality-control services.



July 31, 2015 014000 - 6

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in

writing by Owner.

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires

testing or inspecting will be performed.

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a

certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract

Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,

when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including

service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal

Procedures."

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's

responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for

construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Engineer, Architect, Construction Manager,

and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests

and inspections.

1. Notify Architect, Construction Manager, and Contractor promptly of irregularities or

deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests

are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and

inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar

quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve

or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and

similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify

agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the

following:

1. Access to the Work.

2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.

3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.

4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.

5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.

6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency.



July 31, 2015 014000 - 7

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project

site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance

and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and

replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-

control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date

established for the Notice to Proceed.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, Construction Manager, testing

agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and

inspections are required.

1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to conduct

special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of

Owner.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted.

2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.

3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.

4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to

test and inspection log for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal

working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair

damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.



July 31, 2015 014000 - 8

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other

Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas

with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section "Cutting and

Patching."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of

responsibility for quality-control services.



Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 References

July 31, 2015 014200 - 1

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,

and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the

Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"

"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on

Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"

"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having

jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control

performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,

installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,

assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,

protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site

is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on

which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent

requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if

bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards

are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.



July 31, 2015 014200 - 2

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless

otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with

industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not

bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain

copies directly from publication source.

D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and

acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the

recognized name of the organizations responsible for the standards and regulations in the

following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed

to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253

Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080

Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities

Available from Access Board

www.access-board.gov

CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800

Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800

www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html

DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697-6257

Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point

http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil

DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus

(See FS)

FED-STD Federal Standard

(See FS)

FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257



Available from Defense Standardization Program

www.dps.dla.mil

Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925

www.gsa.gov

Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800

www.nibs.org

FTMS Federal Test Method Standard

(See FS)



July 31, 2015 014200 - 3

MIL (See MILSPEC)

MIL-STD (See MILSPEC)

MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-6257



UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253

Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080

www.access-board.gov

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson

Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional

Associations of the U.S."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate

and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960

www.aluminum.org

AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333

www.aaadm.com

AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202

www.aabchq.com

AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664

www.aamanet.org

AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800

Transportation Officials

www.transportation.org

AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141

www.aatcc.org

ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888

www.airbarrier.org

ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155

www.abma-dc.org



July 31, 2015 014200 - 4

ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700

(American Concrete Institute)

www.aci-int.org

ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216

www.concrete-pipe.org

AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530

www.aeic.org

AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878

www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700

AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000

www.aga.org

AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118

www.agc.org

AHA American Hardboard Association

(Now part of CPA)

AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955

www.aham.org

AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960

www.asphaltinstitute.org

AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837

www.aia.org (202) 626-7300

AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400

www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400

AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100

www.steel.org

AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559

www.aitc-glulam.org

ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America

(Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network)

ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700

www.alsc.org

AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150

www.amca.org

ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020

www.ansi.org



July 31, 2015 014200 - 5

AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (505) 522-1437

www.aosaseed.com

APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600

www.apawood.org

APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989

www.archprecast.org

API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000

www.api.org

ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800

www.ari.org

ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917

www.asphaltroofing.org

ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723

www.asce.org (703) 295-6300

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723

Air-Conditioning Engineers (404) 636-8400

www.ashrae.org

ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763

(The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170

www.asme.org

ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040

www.asse-plumbing.org

ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585

(American Society for Testing and Materials International)

www.astm.org

AWCI AWCI International (703) 534-8300

(Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry International)

www.awci.org

AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association

(Now WCSC)

AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811

www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600

AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (334) 874-9800

www.awpa.com

AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353



July 31, 2015 014200 - 6

www.aws.org (305) 443-9353

AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337

www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711

BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122

www.buildershardware.com

BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010

www.bia.org

BICSI BICSI (800) 242-7405

www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991

BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963

(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's

Association International)

www.bifma.com

BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772

www.bissc.org

CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312

www.carpetcushion.org

CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282

www.copper.org (212) 251-7200

CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263

www.canelect.ca

CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333

www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com

CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700

www.cganet.com

CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462

www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462

CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919

www.cisca.org

CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137

www.cispi.org

CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583

www.chainlinkinfo.org

CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604

www.pbmdf.com



July 31, 2015 014200 - 7

CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772

www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607

CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846

www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176

CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200

www.crsi.org

CSA CSA International (866) 797-4272

(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000

www.csa-international.org

CSI Cast Stone Institute (770) 972-3011

www.caststone.org

CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900

www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300

CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700

www.cedarbureau.org

CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087

(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute)

www.cti.org

DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010

www.dhi.org

EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500

www.eia.org

EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462

www.eima.com (770) 968-7945

EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000

www.ejdc.org

EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040

www.ejma.org

ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937

www.esda.org

FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball Amateur 41 22 545 00 00

(The International Basketball Federation)

www.fiba.com

FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 35

(The International Volleyball Federation)



July 31, 2015 014200 - 8

www.fivb.ch

FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000

(Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System)

www.fmglobal.com

FMRC Factory Mutual Research

(Now FMG)

FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors (407) 671-3772

Association, Inc.

www.floridaroof.com

FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850

www.fluidsealing.com

FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0

www.fsc.org

GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440

www.gypsum.org

GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208

www.glasswebsite.com

GRI (Now GSI)

GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400

www.greenseal.org

GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440

www.geosynthetic-institute.org

HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744

www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700

HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200

www.gamanet.org

HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association

(Part of NAAMM)

HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900

www.hpva.org

HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550

www.hpwhite.com

IAS International Approval Services

(Now CSA International)



July 31, 2015 014200 - 9

IBF International Badminton Federation (6-03) 9283-7155

www.intbadfed.org

ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369

www.icea.net

ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830

www.icri.org

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11

www.iec.ch

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900

www.ieee.org

IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000

www.iesna.org

IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561

www.iest.org

IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234

www.igcc.org

IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510

www.igmaonline.org

ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426

www.iliai.com

ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11

www.iso.ch

Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020

www.ansi.org

ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732

www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150

ITS Intertek (800) 345-3851

www.intertek.com (713) 407-3500

ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11

www.itu.int/home

KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690

www.kcma.org

LMA Laminating Materials Association

(Now part of CPA)



July 31, 2015 014200 - 10

LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864

www.lightning.org (804) 314-8955

MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333

www.mbma.com

MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (847) 480-9138

www.maplefloor.org

MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610

www.metalframingmfg.org

MH Material Handling

(Now MHIA)

MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815

www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190

MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222

www.marble-institute.com

MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937

www.paintinfo.com

MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613

Fittings Industry Inc.

www.mss-hq.com

NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405

www.naamm.org

NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623

(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200

www.nace.org

NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926

www.nadca.com

NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) 213-7193,

ext. 453

www.aahperd.org/nagws/

NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084

www.naima.org

NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848

www.nbgqa.com

NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222

www.ncaa.org



July 31, 2015 014200 - 11

NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900

www.ncma.org

NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094

www.ncpi.org

NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550

www.ncta.com

NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698

www.nebb.org

NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110

www.necanet.org

NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901

www.nelma.org

NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200

www.nema.org

NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382

www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441

NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900

www.nfhs.org

NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555

(National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000

www.nfpa.org

NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776

www.nfrc.org

NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642

www.glass.org (703) 442-4890

NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318

www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818

NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393

www.nlga.org

NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016

(Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association)

www.nofma.org

NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545

www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070

NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622



July 31, 2015 014200 - 12

www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400

NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275

(National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010

www.nsf.org

NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415

www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788

NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736

www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930

NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association

(Now TRI)

NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association

(Now WDMA)

OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (Acquired by ITS - Intertek) (800) 966-5253

www.opl.com (210) 635-8100

PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300

www.pci.org

PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322

www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322

PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956

www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720

PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929

http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu

PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522

(Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of America) (703) 736-9666

www.landcarenetwork.org

PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540

www.post-tensioning.org

RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400

www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400

RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580

www.rfci.com

RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339

www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662

RTI (Formerly: NTRMA - National Tile Roofing Manufacturers

Association)



July 31, 2015 014200 - 13

(Now TRI)

SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323

www.sae.org (724) 776-4841

SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647

www.sdi.org

SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010

www.steeldoor.org

SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424

www.sefalabs.com

SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234

www.sgcc.org

SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075

www.siaonline.org

SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association

(Now IGMA)

SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995

www.steeljoist.org

SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991

www.smacentral.org

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980

National Association

www.smacna.org

SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100

www.smpte.org

SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154

(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics

Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division)

www.sprayfoam.org

SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611

www.spib.org

SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026

www.spri.org

SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355

www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630

SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772



July 31, 2015 014200 - 14

www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331

STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265

www.steeltank.com

SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333

www.steelwindows.com

SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974

www.swrionline.org

TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453

www.tileusa.com

TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700

Industries Alliance

www.tiaonline.org

TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700

www.masonrysociety.org

TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010

www.tpinst.org

TPI Turfgrass Producers International (847) 649-5555

www.turfgrasssod.org

TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177

(Formerly: RTI - Roof Tile Institute)

www.tileroofing.org

UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577

www.ul.com (847) 272-8800

UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902

www.uni-bell.org

USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786-5539

www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228-6800

USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422

www.usgbc.org

USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488

www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463

WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869

www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700

WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486

www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651



July 31, 2015 014200 - 15

WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association

(Now WCSC)

WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636

(Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers (212) 297-2109

Association)

www.windowcoverings.org

WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301

(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and (847) 299-5200

Door Association)

www.wdma.com

WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of (916) 372-9943

California)

www.wicnet.org

WIC Woodwork Institute of California

(Now WI)

WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889

www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591

WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333

www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441

WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930

www.wwpa.org

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract

Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names,

telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-

to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

BOCA BOCA International, Inc.

(See ICC)

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-

4100

www.iapmo.org

ICBO International Conference of Building Officials

(See ICC)

ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc.

(See ICC-ES)

ICC International Code Council (888) 422-

7233

www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-



July 31, 2015 014200 - 16

4533

ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-

6587

www.icc-es.org (562) 699-

0543

SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.

(See ICC)

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications

or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the

following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed

to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CE Army Corps of Engineers

www.usace.army.mil

CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772

www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923

DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000

www.commerce.gov

DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257

http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil

DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220

www.energy.gov

EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167

www.epa.gov

FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322

www.faa.gov

FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322

www.fcc.gov

FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332

www.fda.gov

GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111

www.gsa.gov

HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112

www.hud.gov

LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000

www.lbl.gov



July 31, 2015 014200 - 17

NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program

(See TRB)

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478

www.nist.gov

OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742

www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999

PBS Public Building Service

(See GSA)

PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694

www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs

RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540

(See USDA)

SD State Department (202) 647-4000

www.state.gov

TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934

www.nas.edu/trb

USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791

www.usda.gov

USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000

www.usps.com

E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or

other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following

list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be

accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs (800) 952-

5210

Bureau of Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation (916) 574-

2041

www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti

CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (415) 703-

2782

www.cpuc.ca.gov

TFS Texas Forest Service (936) 639-

8180

Forest Resource Development

http://txforestservice.tamu.edu



July 31, 2015 014200 - 18





Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Temporary Facilities and Controls

July 31, 2015 015000 - 1

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL




00 Specifications take precedence in the event of a conflict.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and

protection facilities.


1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work

restrictions.


3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity

requirements for products in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is

complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all

openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.

1.4 USE CHARGES

A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum.

Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not

limited to, Architect, Construction Manager, testing agencies, and authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering

and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as

required for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use

without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of

services as required for construction operations.



July 31, 2015 015000 - 2

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for

construction personnel.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary

electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each

temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume

responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its

use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned

responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch (50-mm), 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link

fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet (1.8 m) high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-

inch- (60-mm-) OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- (73-mm-) OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-

inch- (42-mm-) OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete or galvanized steel bases for

supporting posts.

B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "[Rough Carpentry

and Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry." Paint temporary demising walls white. The Owner

reserves the right to post communications materials on the demising walls at any time during

the project.

C. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick by 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by

maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with

ASTM C 36/C 36M. Paint temporary demising walls white. The Owner reserves the right to

post communications materials on the demising walls at any time during the project.

D. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool;

with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

E. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections.



July 31, 2015 015000 - 3

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature

controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel.

Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:

1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan

racks, and bookcases.

2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide

electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than 1 receptacle

on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- (1.2-m-) square

tack board.

3. Drinking water.

4. Coffee machine and supplies.

5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68

to 72 deg F (20 to 22 deg C).

6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc (215 lx) at desk

height.

C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate

materials and equipment for construction operations.

1. Store combustible materials apart from building.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by

locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,

self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating

units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for

temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille

in system and remove at end of construction.



July 31, 2015 015000 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference

with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the

Work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities

are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be

interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as

facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial

Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

1. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a

drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly

from pans.

C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of

construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,

operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are

cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion,

restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

D. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities

for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from

adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a

harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction

activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction

from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on

completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to

produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

F. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as

long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.



July 31, 2015 015000 - 5

G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination

for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements

without operating entire system.

2. Install lighting for Project identification sign.

H. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all

construction personnel.

1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments.

b. Ambulance service.

c. Contractor's home office.

d. Architect's office.

e. Engineers' offices.

f. Owner's office.

g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when

away from field office.

I. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service,

including electronic mail, in common-use facilities.

1. Provide internet connection in primary field office.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within

construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial

Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use

permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.

2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C. Parking: Use designated limited areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction

personnel.

D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.



July 31, 2015 015000 - 6

1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or

adjoining properties nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.

E. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs as

approved by the Owner. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking

entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

F. Waste Disposal Facilities: See Division 00.

G. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel. Engineer

must approve use of any such equipment within the building prior equipment mobilization.

Submit equipment

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and

equipment" and not temporary facilities.

H. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, as long as elevators

are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion,

restore elevators to condition existing before initial use, including replacing worn cables, guide

shoes, and similar items of limited life.

1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.

2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect

elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection, elevators become

damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work so no evidence remains of

correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in field to the shop, make

required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.

I. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, as long as stairs are

cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore

stairs to condition existing before initial use.

1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to protect stairs

and to maintain means of egress. If, despite such protection, stairs become damaged,

restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.

J. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering

of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct

construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that

minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable

effects.



July 31, 2015 015000 - 7

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 00 Sections and Division 01 Section

"Summary."

B. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and

harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control

procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial

Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using

environmentally safe materials.

C. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially

completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,

vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.

D. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having

jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

E. Covered Walkway: Erect structurally adequate, protective, covered walkway for passage of

individuals along adjacent public street(s). Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and

obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing.

2. Provide wood-plank overhead decking, protective plywood enclosure walls, handrails,

barricades, warning signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions

for protection and safe passage.

3. Extend back wall beyond the structure to complete enclosure fence.

4. Paint and maintain in a manner approved by Owner and Architect.

F. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in

progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar

activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate

temporary enclosures.

G. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt

migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner and tenants from fumes and noise.

1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side,

and fire-retardant plywood on construction operations side. Paint occupied side white, the

owner reserves the right to display communications material on the partitions at any time.

2. Construct dustproof partitions with 2 layers of 3-mil (0.07-mm) polyethylene sheet on

each side. Cover floor with 2 layers of 3-mil (0.07-mm) polyethylene sheet, extending

sheets 18 inches (460 mm) up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints.

Cover floor with fire-retardant plywood.

a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with

not less than 48 inches (1219 mm) between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot

mats in vestibule.

3. Insulate partitions to provide noise protection to occupied areas.

4. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks.



July 31, 2015 015000 - 8

5. Protect air-handling equipment.

6. Weather strip openings.

7. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.

H. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types

needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with

NFPA 241.

1. Prohibit smoking at project site, see Division 00 for additional information.

2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel

at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be

followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning

sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.

Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and

abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,

ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated

results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight.

D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and

protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has

ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than

Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may

have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,

clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.

Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during

construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 00

Closeout Procedures.



Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Product Requirements

July 31, 2015 016000 - 1

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




00 Specification take precedence in the event of a conflict.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for

use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on

products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.



2. Division 01 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products

specified.

3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products

and installations specified to be warranted.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or

taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"

"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or

model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product

literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or

facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new

products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal

process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities

related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,

appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and

accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other



July 31, 2015 016000 - 2

designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service

performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of

evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names

of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each

product.

1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals

Schedule.

2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:

a. Specification Section number and title.

b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents.

c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations.

d. Manufacturer's name and address.

e. Supplier's name and address.

f. Installer's name and address.

g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period.

h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery

date.

3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit

copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for

variations from Contract requirements.

a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and

designations that must be established early in Contract period.

4. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit copies

of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for

variations from Contract requirements.

5. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of

receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable

product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response,

or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the

Contract Documents.

B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product

or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and

title and Drawing numbers and titles. Engineering or Architectural design effort beyond what

has already been performed to produce the project documents that is due to a Contractor’s

substitution may be incurred at the Contractor’s expense.

1. Substitution Request Form: See Division 00.

2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:



July 31, 2015 016000 - 3

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to

other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate

contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of

the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as

performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and

requirements indicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and

installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested.

f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.

g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated.

h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for

Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction.

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall

Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided

within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's

letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.

k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.

l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated

results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution.

Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within

15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or

documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order.

b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed

substitution within time allocated.

C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify

product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section

number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or

documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product

request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable

product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional

information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."



July 31, 2015 016000 - 4

b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable

product request within time allocated.

D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01

Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more

products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously

selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods

compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible

products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,

deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent

overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that

are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other

losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original

sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for

handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to

ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.

3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.

5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment.

6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.

7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and

equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.



July 31, 2015 016000 - 5

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on

product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract

Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual

manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to

Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract

Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide

more rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and

identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and

properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a

written document using appropriate form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content requirements and

particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,

that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items

needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are

specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used

successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with

requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make

selection.

5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is

Architect's.

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications

establish "salient characteristics" of products.

7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or

equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2

"Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.



July 31, 2015 016000 - 6

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the

named product that complies with requirements.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,

provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and

manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a

product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.

5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and

manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies

with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for

consideration of an unnamed product.

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a

product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies

with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for

consideration of an unnamed product.

7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional

requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the

specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"

Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.

8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of

manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other

named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions,

and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in

Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the

other named manufacturers.

9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established

Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample.

Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other

specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"

Article for proposal of product.

10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected

from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that

complies with other specified requirements.

a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of

colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern,

density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium

items.

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors,

patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or

texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium

items.



July 31, 2015 016000 - 7

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following

conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return

requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy

conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner

must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect

for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and

similar considerations.

2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.

3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results.

4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.

5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.

6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction.

7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.

8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.

9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.

10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is

compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the

following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will

return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract

Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the

indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the

Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,

durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.

4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.

5. Samples, if requested.




Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Execution

July 31, 2015 017300 - 1

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL




00 Specifications take precedence in the event of a conflict.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work

including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout.

2. Field engineering and surveying.

3. General installation of products.

4. Coordination of Owner-installed products.

5. Progress cleaning.

6. Starting and adjusting.

7. Protection of installed construction.

8. Correction of the Work.



2. Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for

coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept

hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and



July 31, 2015 017300 - 2

verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction

affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.

B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and

construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate

and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting

the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of

sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical

services.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public

utilities serving Project site.

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or

Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances

and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of

the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

a. Description of the Work.

b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.

c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.

d. Recommended corrections.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with

existing finishes or primers.

3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of

connections before equipment and fixture installation.

4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are

to be installed.

5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or

relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances

located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to

other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before

fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the

Work.



July 31, 2015 017300 - 3

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for

clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include

a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the

Contract Documents.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on

Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are

discovered, notify Architect and Construction Manager promptly.

B. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and

levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and

duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log

available for reference by Architect and Construction Manager.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and

elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.

2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement.

3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet (2.4 m) in spaces without a suspended

ceiling, unless noted otherwise.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in

applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.

Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be

factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that

adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated

requirements.

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component

securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.



July 31, 2015 017300 - 4

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at

heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and

items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver

such items to Project site in time for installation.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,

arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered

hazardous.

3.5 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by

Owner's construction forces.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule

for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually

agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences

in actual construction progress.

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation

conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend

preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the

Work depend on Owner's construction.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate

progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce

requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and

debris.

2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the

temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.

Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for

proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly.



July 31, 2015 017300 - 5

2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written

instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials

specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning

materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure

freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing

waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining

materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from

damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through

the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure

operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the

construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise

deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for

proper operation.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification

requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage

or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.



July 31, 2015 017300 - 6

3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.

Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up

with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired

without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components

that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 024119 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Selective Demolition

July 31, 2015 024119 - 1

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 1 Section "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.

2. Division 1 Section "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures. 3. Division 14 Section “Escalators” for coordination to optimize dismantling process.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.


July 31, 2015 024119 - 2

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property , for environmental protection , for dust control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of

Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work.

D. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition.

E. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.

F. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician responsible for recovering refrigerant, stating that all refrigerant that was present was recovered and that recovery was performed according to EPA regulations. Include name and address of technician and date refrigerant was recovered.

1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.


July 31, 2015 024119 - 3

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items:

a. To Be Determined with Spokane Transit Authority.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.

C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

E. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.


July 31, 2015 024119 - 4

1. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings, preconstruction photographs.

1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation." 2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide

photographs or video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations.

3. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements, materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide

temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and

remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.


July 31, 2015 024119 - 5

C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished or salvaged according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling

specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.


July 31, 2015 024119 - 6

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in

Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

B. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area on-site. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.

B. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts.

C. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.


July 31, 2015 024119 - 7

D. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.

E. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that

will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste

Management and Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. Provide documentation of legal disposal site used.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.

3.8 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SCHEDULE

A. Existing Items to Be Removed and Salvaged: See drawings.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 033000 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Cast-In-Place Concrete

July 31, 2015 033000 - 1

SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.


1. Section 033300 "Architectural Concrete" for general building applications of specially finished formed concrete.

2. Section 035300 "Concrete Topping" for emery- and iron-aggregate concrete floor toppings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash, slag cement, other pozzolans, and silica fume; materials subject to compliance with requirements.

B. W/C Ratio: The ratio by weight of water to cementitious materials.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Spokane Transit Authority (STA)’s downtown hub, The Plaza.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Concrete Subcontractor. e. Special concrete finish Subcontractor.


July 31, 2015 033000 - 2

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints, and joint-filler strips, semirigid joint fillers, forms and form removal limitations, shoring and reshoring procedures, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, steel reinforcement installation, methods for achieving specified floor and slab flatness and levelness floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Construction Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the structure.

1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.


A. Qualification Data: ForInstaller.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Form materials and form-release agents. 4. Steel reinforcement and accessories. 5. Fiber reinforcement. 6. Curing compounds. 7. Floor and slab treatments. 8. Bonding agents. 9. Adhesives. 10. Semirigid joint filler. 11. Joint-filler strips.


July 31, 2015 033000 - 3

12. Repair materials.

D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency:

1. Aggregates: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

E. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer, detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.

1. Shoring and Reshoring: Indicate proposed schedule and sequence of stripping formwork, shoring removal, and reshoring installation and removal.

F. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.

G. Field quality-control reports.

H. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade I. Testing agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician, Grade II.

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M.

E. Mockups: Cast concrete formed-surface panels to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, texture, tolerances, floor treatments, and standard of workmanship.

1. Build panel approximately 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m) for formed surface in the location indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.


July 31, 2015 033000 - 4

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete mixtures.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

B. Waterstops: Store waterstops under cover to protect from moisture, sunlight, dirt, oil, and other contaminants.


A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M) and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:


July 31, 2015 033000 - 5

1. ACI 301 (ACI 301M). 2. ACI 117 (ACI 117M).

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials. 2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,

and as follows:

a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better. b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge

sealed. c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed. d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.

3. Overlaid Finnish birch plywood.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Forms for Cylindrical Columns, Pedestals, and Supports: Metal, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic, paper, or fiber tubes that produce surfaces with gradual or abrupt irregularities not exceeding specified formwork surface class. Provide units with sufficient wall thickness to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

D. Pan-Type Forms: Glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or formed steel, stiffened to resist plastic concrete loads without detrimental deformation.

E. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.

F. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.

G. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

H. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

I. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off glass-fiber-reinforced plastic or metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal.


July 31, 2015 033000 - 6

1. Furnish units that leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane of exposed concrete surface.

2. Furnish ties that, when removed, leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter in concrete surface.

3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Galvanized Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420)] , deformed bars, ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class I zinc coated after fabrication and bending.

D. Galvanized-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), plain-steel bars, cut true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

B. Epoxy Repair Coating: Liquid, two-part, epoxy repair coating; compatible with epoxy coating on reinforcement and complying with ASTM A 775/A 775M.

C. Zinc Repair Material: ASTM A 780/A 780M.

D. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view, where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

3. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar supports.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Cementitious Materials:


July 31, 2015 033000 - 7

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I gray. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F. 3. Slag Cement: ASTM C 989/C 989M, Grade 100 or 120. 4. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595/C 595M, [Type IS, portland blast-furnace slag

cement. 5. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240, amorphous silica.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, [Class 3S] [Class 3M] [Class 1N] coarse aggregate or better, graded. .

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: [3/4 inch (19 mm) nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

F. Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete and complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C.

G. Non-Set-Accelerating Corrosion-Inhibiting Admixture: Commercially formulated, non-set-accelerating, anodic inhibitor or mixed cathodic and anodic inhibitor; capable of forming a protective barrier and minimizing chloride reactions with steel reinforcement in concrete.

H. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979/C 979M, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis.

1. Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designation.

I. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.6 FLOOR AND SLAB TREATMENTS

A. Slip-Resistive Emery Aggregate Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive, crushed emery aggregate containing not less than 50 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 20 percent ferric oxide; unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials with 100 percent passing 3/8-inch (9.5-mm)> sieve.


July 31, 2015 033000 - 8

B. Slip-Resistive Aluminum Granule Finish: Factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, nonglazing, abrasive aggregate of not less than 95 percent fused aluminum-oxide granules.

C. Emery Dry-Shake Floor Hardener: Pigmented, factory-packaged, dry combination of portland cement, graded emery aggregate, and plasticizing admixture; with emery aggregate consisting of no less than 60 percent of total aggregate content.


D. Metallic Dry-Shake Floor Hardener: Pigmented, factory-packaged, dry combination of portland cement, graded metallic aggregate, rust inhibitors, and plasticizing admixture; with metallic aggregate consisting of no less than 65 percent of total aggregate content.


E. Unpigmented Mineral Dry-Shake Floor Hardener: Factory-packaged dry combination of portland cement, graded quartz aggregate, and plasticizing admixture.

F. Pigmented Mineral Dry-Shake Floor Hardener: Factory-packaged, dry combination of portland cement, graded quartz aggregate, color pigments, and plasticizing admixture. Use color pigments that are finely ground, nonfading mineral oxides interground with cement.


2.7 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Clear, chemically reactive, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and densifies concrete surfaces.

2.8 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering.


July 31, 2015 033000 - 9

G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 18 to 25 percent solids, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering.

H. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.

I. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.

2.9 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.

B. Semirigid Joint Filler: Two-component, semirigid, 100 percent solids, epoxy resin with a Type A shore durometer hardness of 80 according to ASTM D 2240.

C. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059/C 1059M, Type II, nonredispersible, acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene.

D. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

E. Reglets: Fabricate reglets of not less than 0.022-inch- (0.55-mm-) thick, galvanized-steel sheet. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of reglet to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

F. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) thick, with bent tab anchors. Temporarily fill or cover face opening of slots to prevent intrusion of concrete or debris.

2.10 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Underlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.


July 31, 2015 033000 - 10

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (29 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) and that can be filled in over a scarified surface to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150/C 150M, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application.

3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer.

4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa). at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Slag Cement: 50 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Slag Cement: 50 percent portland cement minimum,

with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent. 5. Silica Fume: 10 percent. 6. Combined Fly Ash, Pozzolans, and Silica Fume: 35 percent with fly ash or pozzolans not

exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent. 7. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolans, Slag Cement, and Silica Fume: 50 percent with fly ash

or pozzolans not exceeding 25 percent and silica fume not exceeding 10 percent.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50.

4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.


July 31, 2015 033000 - 11

D. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup.

2.12 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Concrete Toppings: Normal-weight concrete.

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi (27.6 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 5-1/2 sacks/CY 3. Slump Limit: [4 inches (100 mm)], plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 4. Air Content: per Structural drawingsercent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery

for 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size. 5. Air Content: Do not allow air content of trowel-finished toppings to exceed 3 percent.

2.13 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.14 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M[ and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M], and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

B. Project-Site Mixing: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer.

1. For mixer capacity of 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m) or smaller, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released.

2. For mixer capacity larger than 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m), increase mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional 1 cu. yd. (0.76 cu. m).

3. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Project identification name and number, date, mixture type, mixture time, quantity, and amount of water added. Record approximate location of final deposit in structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M), to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.


July 31, 2015 033000 - 12

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117 (ACI 117M).

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.

E. Construct forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast-concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC 303.


July 31, 2015 033000 - 13

2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and other conditions.

3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.

3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS

A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and curing and protection operations need to be maintained.

1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that support weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved its 28-day design compressive strength.

2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without loosening or disturbing shores.

B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material are not acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-release agent.

C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect.

3.4 SHORING AND RESHORING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ACI 318 (ACI 318M) and ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for design, installation, and removal of shoring and reshoring.

1. Do not remove shoring or reshoring until measurement of slab tolerances is complete.

B. In multistory construction, extend shoring or reshoring over a sufficient number of stories to distribute loads in such a manner that no floor or member will be excessively loaded or will induce tensile stress in concrete members without sufficient steel reinforcement.

C. Plan sequence of removal of shores and reshore to avoid damage to concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to support construction without excessive stress or deflection.

3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.


July 31, 2015 033000 - 14

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

1. Weld reinforcing bars according to AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, where indicated.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded-wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.6 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset

joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection.

4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.

5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.

6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Doweled Joints: Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint.

3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.


July 31, 2015 033000 - 15

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth not to exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301 (ACI 301M).

3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations, so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured

surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.

3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, or to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.


July 31, 2015 033000 - 16

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed-finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix 1 part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.

3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in one direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces to receive concrete floor toppings .

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.


July 31, 2015 033000 - 17

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M), for a randomly trafficked floor surface:

a. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 25; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 17; and of levelness, F(L) 15.

b. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 35; and of levelness, F(L) 25; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 17; for slabs-on-grade.

c. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 20; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 24; and of levelness, F(L) 15; for suspended slabs.

d. Specified overall values of flatness, F(F) 45; and of levelness, F(L) 35; with minimum local values of flatness, F(F) 30; and of levelness, F(L) 24.

3. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

G. Slip-Resistive Finish: Before final floating, apply slip-resistive aggregate finish where indicated and to concrete stair treads, platforms, and ramps. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Uniformly spread 25 lb/100 sq. ft. (12 kg/10 sq. m) of dampened slip-resistive aggregate over surface in one or two applications. Tamp aggregate flush with surface, but do not force below surface.

2. After broadcasting and tamping, apply float finish. 3. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or an abrasive stone and water

to expose slip-resistive aggregate.

H. Dry-Shake Floor Hardener Finish: After initial floating, apply dry-shake floor hardener to surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Uniformly apply dry-shake floor hardener at a rate of 100 lb/100 sq. ft. (49 kg/10 sq. m) unless greater amount is recommended by manufacturer.


July 31, 2015 033000 - 18

2. Uniformly distribute approximately two-thirds of dry-shake floor hardener over surface by hand or with mechanical spreader, and embed by power floating. Follow power floating with a second dry-shake floor hardener application, uniformly distributing remainder of material, and embed by power floating.

3. After final floating, apply a trowel finish. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by dry-shake floor hardener manufacturer and apply immediately after final finishing.

3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded.

3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 (ACI 301M) for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period.

D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.


July 31, 2015 033000 - 19

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies does not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.12 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENT APPLICATION

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatment: Prepare, apply, and finish penetrating liquid floor treatment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove curing compounds, sealers, oil, dirt, laitance, and other contaminants and complete surface repairs.

2. Do not apply to concrete that is less than 28 days' old. 3. Apply liquid until surface is saturated, scrubbing into surface until a gel forms; rewet;

and repeat brooming or scrubbing. Rinse with water; remove excess material until surface is dry. Apply a second coat in a similar manner if surface is rough or porous.

B. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.13 JOINT FILLING

A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.


July 31, 2015 033000 - 20

1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least six month(s). Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased.

B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact faces of joints clean and dry.

C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.

3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of 1 part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19 mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar matches surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing

operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.


July 31, 2015 033000 - 21

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface.

6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete, except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.

3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.

C. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Headed bolts and studs. 4. Verification of use of required design mixture. 5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 7. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and

slabs.

D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172/C 172M shall be performed according to the following requirements:


July 31, 2015 033000 - 22

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.

2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m) or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.

a. When frequency of testing provides fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

4. Air Content: ASTM C 231/C 231M, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below or 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample.

6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567/C 567M, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.

b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.

10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

11. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.


July 31, 2015 033000 - 23

12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

13. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M) within 24 hours of finishing.

3.16 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 033543 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Polished Concrete Finishing

July 31, 2015 033543 - 1

SECTION 033543 - POLISHED CONCRETE FINISHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes polished concrete finishing and scoring.

1. Concrete for polished concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, initial finishing, and curing is specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete not designated as polished concrete.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Design Reference Sample: Sample designated by Architect in the Contract Documents that reflects acceptable surface quality and appearance of polished concrete.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>.

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with polished concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures. c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. d. Cast-in-place concrete subcontractor. e. Polished concrete finishing Subcontractor.

2. Review curing procedures, construction joints, concrete repair procedures, concrete finishing, and protection of polished concrete.


July 31, 2015 033543 - 2



B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for stains and liquid floor treatments.>

C. Polishing Schedule: Submit plan showing polished concrete surfaces and schedule of polishing operations for each area of polished concrete before start of polishing operations. Include locations of all joints, including construction joints.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product requiring color selection.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed color.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Repair materials. 2. Stain materials. 3. Liquid floor treatments.


A. Field Sample Panels: After approval of verification sample and before casting concrete, produce field sample panels to demonstrate the approved range of selections made under Sample submittals. Produce a minimum of three sets of full-scale panels, approximately 48 by 48 inches (1200 by 1200 mm) minimum, to demonstrate the expected range of finish, color, and appearance variations.

1. Locate panels as indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Maintain field sample panels during construction in an undisturbed condition as a

standard for judging the completed Work. 3. Demolish and remove field sample panels when directed.

B. Mockups: Before casting concrete, build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate typical joints, surface finish, tolerances, and standard of workmanship. Build mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Demonstrate curing, finishing, and protecting of polished concrete. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


July 31, 2015 033543 - 3


A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Penetrating Liquid Floor Treatments for Polished Concrete Finish: Clear, waterborne solution of inorganic silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components; odorless; that penetrates, hardens, and is suitable for polished concrete surfaces.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

2. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for floor treatment products.>

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 POLISHING

A. Polish: Level 1: Matte finish, 100 grit.

B. Apply polished concrete finish system to cured and prepared slabs to match accepted mockup.

1. Machine grind floor surfaces to receive polished finishes level and smooth. 2. Apply reactive stain for polished concrete in polishing sequence and according to

manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Apply penetrating liquid floor treatment for polished concrete in polishing sequence and

according to manufacturer's written instructions, allowing recommended drying time between successive coats.

4. Apply penetrating stain for polished concrete in polishing sequence and according to manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Continue polishing with progressively finer-grit diamond polishing pads to gloss level, to match approved mockup.

6. Control and dispose of waste products produced by grinding and polishing operations. 7. Neutralize and clean polished floor surfaces.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 051200 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Structural Steel Framing

July 31, 2015 051200 - 1

SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel. 2. Prefabricated building columns. 3. Field-installed shear connectors. 4. Grout.


1. Section 051213 "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for additional requirements for architecturally exposed structural steel.

2. Section 053100 "Steel Decking" for field installation of shear connectors through deck. 3. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel fabrications and other steel

items not defined as structural steel. 4. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for surface-

preparation and priming requirements. 5. Section 133419 "Metal Building Systems" for structural steel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

B. Seismic-Load-Resisting System: Elements of structural-steel frame designated as "SLRS" or along grid lines designated as "SLRS" on Drawings, including columns, beams, and braces and their connections.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.


July 31, 2015 051200 - 2

B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Spokane Transit Authority (STA)’s downtown hub, The Plaza.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment Drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds,

and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.

4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.

5. Identify members and connections of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System.

C. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint whether prequalified or qualified by testing, including the following:

1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage). 2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name, for demand critical welds.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural-steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include analysis data.


A. Qualification Data: For fabricator.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers, certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.

D. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

E. Product Test Reports: For the following:

1. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis.


July 31, 2015 051200 - 3

2. Direct-tension indicators. 3. Tension-control, high-strength, bolt-nut-washer assemblies. 4. Shear stud connectors. 5. Shop primers. 6. Nonshrink grout.

F. Survey of existing conditions.

G. Source quality-control reports.

H. Field quality-control and special inspection reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category ACSE.

C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement P1 or to SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

1. Welders and welding operators performing work on bottom-flange, demand-critical welds shall pass the supplemental welder qualification testing, as required by AWS D1.8/D1.8M. FCAW-S and FCAW-G shall be considered separate processes for welding personnel qualification.

E. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 341 and AISC 341s1. 3. AISC 360. 4. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.


July 31, 2015 051200 - 4

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating

ASTM F 1852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Connections: Provide details of connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated and AISC 360. 2. Use Load and Resistance Factor Design; data are given at factored-load level.

B. Construction: Shear wall system.

2.2 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M, Grade 50 (345)] .

B. Channels, Angles, -Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.

1. Weight Class: Standard. 2. Finish: Black except where indicated to be galvanized.

F. Steel Castings: ASTM A 216/A 216M, Grade WCB with supplementary requirement S11.

G. Steel Forgings: ASTM A 668/A 668M.

H. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.


July 31, 2015 051200 - 5

2.3 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible-washer type with plain finish.

B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, cold-finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.

C. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36.

1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

D. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: [Plain] [Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C] [Mechanically

deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50].

E. Threaded Rods: [ASTM A 36/A 36M] [ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade B7] [ASTM A 354, Grade BD] [ASTM A 449] [ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50 (345)].

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) [heavy-]hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: [ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened] [ASTM A 36/A 36M]

carbon steel. 3. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

2.4 PRIMER

A. Primer: Comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type I, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.

C. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25 BCS, Type I, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.

D. Primer: SSPC-Paint 23, latex primer.


July 31, 2015 051200 - 6

E. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20..

2.5 GROUT

A. Metallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, metallic aggregate grout, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain

markings until structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-

priming operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to [SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning." Retain "Shear Connectors" Paragraph below if shear connectors are shop installed to structural steel.

F. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.


July 31, 2015 051200 - 7

G. Steel Wall-Opening Framing: Select true and straight members for fabricating steel wall-opening framing to be attached to structural-steel frame. Straighten as required to provide uniform, square, and true members in completed wall framing. Build up welded framing, weld exposed joints continuously, and grind smooth.

H. Welded Door Frames: Build up welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame. Weld exposed joints continuously and grind smooth. Plug-weld fixed steel bar stops to frames. Secure removable stops to frames with countersunk machine screws, uniformly spaced not more than 10 inches (250 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

I. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members.

1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to

steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work.

2.7 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303 for mill material.

2.8 PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS

A. Prefabricated building columns consisting of load-bearing structural-steel members protected by concrete fireproofing encased in an outer non-load-bearing steel shell.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide prefabricated building column listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 119.

1. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated.

2.9 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:


July 31, 2015 051200 - 8

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces. 6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." 4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal." 5. SSPC-SP 14/NACE No. 8, "Industrial Blast Cleaning." 6. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 7. SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning." 8. SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning." 9. SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection.

Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first.

D. Painting: Prepare steel and apply a one-coat, nonasphaltic primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide 7.00, "Painting System Guide 7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems," to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm).

2.10 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

2. Galvanize welded door frames attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls.

2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.


July 31, 2015 051200 - 9

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Bolted Connections: Inspect shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect shop-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not remove temporary shoring supporting composite deck construction until cast-in-place concrete has attained its design compressive strength.


July 31, 2015 051200 - 10

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Baseplates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Align and adjust various members that form part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that are in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean

temperature when structure is completed and in service.

E. Splice members only where indicated.

F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.

G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.


July 31, 2015 051200 - 11

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes

without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.

3.5 PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS

A. Install prefabricated building columns to comply with AISC 360, manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements of testing and inspecting agency that apply to the fire-resistance rating indicated.


A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Bolted Connections: Inspect bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on

finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted.

c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

E. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field-welded shear connectors according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M for stud welding and as follows:

1. Perform bend tests if visual inspections reveal either a less-than-continuous 360-degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector.

2. Conduct tests according to requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested.


July 31, 2015 051200 - 12

3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

D. Touchup Priming: Cleaning and touchup priming are specified in Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."


Spokane Transit Authority Section 053100 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Steel Decking

July 31, 2015 053100 - 1

SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Composite floor deck.


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight and lightweight structural concrete fill over steel deck.

2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for shop- and field-welded shear connectors. 3. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel

shapes. 4. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting

of deck. 5. Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for repair painting of primed deck and finish painting

of deck.


A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements:


July 31, 2015 053100 - 2

1. Power-actuated mechanical fasteners.

D. Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.

E. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

C. Electrical Raceway Units: Provide UL-labeled cellular floor-deck units complying with UL 209 and listed in UL's "Electrical Construction Equipment Directory" for use with standard header ducts and outlets for electrical distribution systems.

D. FM Global Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FM Global and listed in its "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings.


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

1. Protect and ventilate acoustical cellular roof deck with factory-installed insulation to maintain insulation free of moisture.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.


July 31, 2015 053100 - 3

2.2 COMPOSITE FLOOR DECK

A. Composite Floor Deck: Fabricate panels, with integrally embossed or raised pattern ribs and interlocking side laps, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Composite Steel Floor Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with the following:

1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230), G90 (Z275) zinc coating.

2. Profile Depth: As indicated. 3. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: 0.0358 inch (0.91 mm). 4. Span Condition: As indicated.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile indicated.

G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated.

H. Piercing Hanger Tabs: Piercing steel sheet hanger attachment devices for use with floor deck.

I. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch (1.52 mm) thick, with factory-punched hole of 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) minimum diameter.

J. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch (1.90 mm) thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.

K. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.


July 31, 2015 053100 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.



A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations.

C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members.

D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

1. Align cellular deck panels over full length of cell runs and align cells at ends of abutting panels.

E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.

G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION

A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated and as follows:

1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch (16 mm), nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds an

average of 12 inches (305 mm) apart, but not more than 18 inches (457 mm) apart. 3. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated.


July 31, 2015 053100 - 5

4. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location.

B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of half of the span or 36 inches (914 mm), and as follows:

1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 10 (4.8-mm-) diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws.

2. Mechanically clinch or button punch. 3. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) long welds.

C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), with end joints as follows:

1. End Joints: Lapped.

D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated.

E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck.

F. Install piercing hanger tabs at 14 inches (355 mm) apart in both directions, within 9 inches (228 mm) of walls at ends, and not more than 12 inches (305 mm) from walls at sides unless otherwise indicated.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint.


July 31, 2015 053100 - 6

1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck, to bottom surfaces of deck exposed to view.

2. Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of bottom deck surfaces are included in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

C. Repair Painting: Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of rust spots, welds, and abraded areas of both deck surfaces are included in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

D. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 054000 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Cold-Formed Metal Framing

July 31, 2015 054000 - 1

SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.


1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections. 2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud

framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests for current products:

1. Steel sheet. 2. Expansion anchors. 3. Power-actuated anchors. 4. Mechanical fasteners. 5. Vertical deflection clips. 6. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.

E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For cold-formed metal framing.


July 31, 2015 054000 - 2


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated.

B. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency, or in-house testing with calibrated test equipment indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, ductility, and metallic-coating thickness.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions."

F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.

B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering cold-formed metal framing that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Allied Studco. 2. AllSteel Products, Inc. 3. California Expanded Metal Products Company. 4. Clark Steel Framing. 5. Consolidated Fabricators Corp.; Building Products Division. 6. Craco Metals Manufacturing, LLC. 7. Custom Stud, Inc. 8. Dale/Incor. 9. Design Shapes in Steel.


July 31, 2015 054000 - 3

10. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. 11. Formetal Co. Inc. (The). 12. Innovative Steel Systems. 13. MarinoWare; a division of Ware Industries. 14. Quail Run Building Materials, Inc. 15. SCAFCO Corporation. 16. Southeastern Stud & Components, Inc. 17. Steel Construction Systems. 18. Steeler, Inc. 19. Super Stud Building Products, Inc. 20. United Metal Products, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows:

1. Grade: ST33H (ST230H) or ST50H (ST340H). 2. Coating: G60 (Z180).

2.3 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on drawings. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm). 3. Section Properties: As indicated on drawings.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. b. MarinoWare, a division of Ware Industries. c. SCAFCO Corporation d. The Steel Network, Inc.


July 31, 2015 054000 - 4

D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: 1 inch (25 mm) plus the design gap for 1-story structures.

2.4 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Hole reinforcing plates. 9. Backer plates.

2.5 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS

A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts, hooked bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.


July 31, 2015 054000 - 5

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035.

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.


July 31, 2015 054000 - 6

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.

E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch

fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


July 31, 2015 054000 - 7


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

B. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.


A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch

fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G. Install insulation, specified in Division 7 Section "Building Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.


July 31, 2015 054000 - 8

H. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

I. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

3.4 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION

A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: As indicated.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install single-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing or infill studs and anchor to building

structure as indicated on drawings. 3. Connect drift clips to cold formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.

E. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.


July 31, 2015 054000 - 9

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 055000 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Metal Fabrications

July 31, 2015 055000 - 1

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Perforated steel sheet for covering structural steel clock tower. 2. Steel framing and perforated steel sheet for elevator shaft screen. 3. Stainless steel tube sign frames. 4. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 5. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections. 6. Metal ladders. 7. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel edgings. 8. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other

Sections. 9. Salvage, refinish and install interior benches and waste baskets.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:

1. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.

2. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not specified in other Sections.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.

2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing."

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,


July 31, 2015 055000 - 2

concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide Shop Drawings for the following:

1. Steel framing and perforated steel sheet for elevator shaft screen. 2. Stainless steel tube sign frames. 3. Steel framing and supports for countertops. 4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified

in other Sections. 5. Metal ladders. 6. Structural-steel door frames. 7. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel edgings.

1.5 SAMPLES

A. Powder coat on steel, 6” x 6”.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500/A 500M, cold-formed steel tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

F. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.

1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm).


July 31, 2015 055000 - 3

2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90 (Z275) coating; 0.108-inch (2.8-mm) nominal thickness.

G. Decorative Perforated Steel Sheet: McNichols Industrial and Architectural Hole Products. 1. Product: Quality round perforated, 18 gauge galvanized steel with ½ inch diameter

openings, 11/16 inch on center, staggered pattern. Sheets 48.0 inches by 96.0 inches.

2.2 FASTENERS

A. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.

1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is indicated to be galvanized.

C. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

D. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

E. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099123 Interior Painting."

B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.

C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.


July 31, 2015 055000 - 4

E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

F. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa).

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.

E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing.

F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

G. Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.

J. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.


July 31, 2015 055000 - 5

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.

C. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for anchor and connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) baseplates with four 5/8-inch

(16-mm) anchor bolts and 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) top plates.

D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.

2.6 METAL LADDERS

A. General:

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3.

B. Steel Ladders:

1. Space siderails 18 inches (457 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated. 2. Siderails: Continuous, 1/2-by-2-1/2-inch (12.7-by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased

edges. 3. Rungs: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel bars. 4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-

oxide granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxide grout.

6. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets.

7. Primeladders, including brackets and fasteners.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.


July 31, 2015 055000 - 6

2.8 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

2.9 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.10 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

B. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surrounding surface.

2.11 SALVAGED BENCH AND WASTEBASKET REFINISHING

A. After surface preparation, powder coat metal with standard polyester powder coat finish. 1. Basis of Design: Forrest Powder Coatings, Forrest Paint Company, P.O. Box 22110,

Eugene, OR 97402, www.forrestpaint.com, phone (541)3420-1821, fax (541)344-5137. 2. Color: U-8180 S5 Bronze 3. Gloss: Satin Gloss

B. All items to be refinished must be clean to ensure a high quality finish. Accomplish surface preparation with a combination of sandblasting, phosphate washing and burn-off. The method of cleaning to be determined by the condition of the metal.

2.12 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.

B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless indicated.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.


July 31, 2015 055000 - 7

1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no

roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.

1. Benches and Waste Baskets = Match existing anchor type and finish.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that come into contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:

1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.

3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.


July 31, 2015 055000 - 8

3.3 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 057313 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Glazed Decorative Metal Railings

July 31, 2015 057313 - 1

SECTION 057313 - GLAZED DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Glass-supported railings with decorative metal infill.


1. Section 024119 “Selective Demolition” for coordination of removal of existing guard rail system.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-sided floor areas and for pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall protection.

1.4 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.


A. Evaluation Reports: For post-installed anchors, from ICC-ES.


July 31, 2015 057313 - 2


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Match existing metal base shoe: Julius Blum & Co. Inc. No. 1142, 2 1/2” x 4 1/8” for use with 1/2” glass or reuse salvaged shoe with all glazing materials completely removed.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of railings and are based on the specific system indicated. See Section 016000 "Product Requirements."

1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

2.2 METALS, GENERAL

A. Provide salvaged metal top rail, decorative metal bar in-fill, and cover plates.

2.3 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Safety Glazing: Glazing shall comply with 16 CFR 1201, Category II.

B. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Type 1 (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3. Provide products that have been tested for surface and edge compression according to ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength according to 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.

1. Glass Color: Clear. 2. Thickness for Glass Infill Panels: As required by structural loads, but not less than 10.0

mm. Match existing thickness.

C. Glazing Cement and Accessories for Structural Glazing: Glazing cement, setting blocks, shims, and related accessories as recommended or supplied by railing manufacturer for installing structural glazing in metal subrails.

1. Glazing Cement: Nonshrinking organic cement designed for curing by passing an electric current through metal subrail holding glass panel, as standard with manufacturer.

D. Glazing Gaskets for Glass Infill Panels: Glazing gaskets and related accessories recommended or supplied by railing manufacturer for installing glass infill panels in post-supported railings.


July 31, 2015 057313 - 3

2.4 FASTENERS

A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Aluminum Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Stainless-Steel Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 3. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated and capable of withstanding design loads.

C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching railings to other work unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable.

1. Provide square or hex socket flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with working capacity greater than or equal to the design load, according to an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193 or ICC-ES AC308.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79.

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.

C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

D. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate railings to match existing railing, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage.

B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.


July 31, 2015 057313 - 4

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.

E. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.

F. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.

1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is manufacturer's standard splicing method.

G. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

2.7 GLAZING PANEL FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and shapes required; provide for proper edge clearance and bite on glazing panels.

1. Clean-cut or flat-grind edges at butt-glazed sealant joints to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

2. Grind smooth exposed edges, including those at open joints, to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

B. Infill Panels: Provide tempered glass panels for both straight and curved sections.

2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

C. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings.

2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.


July 31, 2015 057313 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.

B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m). 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel

with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5 mm in 3 m).

C. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1. Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.

D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.

3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS

A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings.

3.3 INSTALLING GLASS PANELS

A. Glass-Supported Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing industry standards.

1. Attach base channel to building structure, then insert glass into base channel and bond with glazing cement.

a. Support glass panels in base channel at quarter points with channel-shaped setting blocks that also act as shims to maintain uniform space for glazing cement. Fill remaining space in base channel with glazing cement for uniform support of glass.

2. Adjust spacing of glass panels so gaps between panels are equal before securing in position.


July 31, 2015 057313 - 6

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean aluminum and stainless steel by washing thoroughly with water and soap, rinsing with clean water, and wiping dry.

B. Clean and polish glass as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Wash both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 061000 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Rough Carpentry

July 31, 2015 061000 - 1

SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Wood furring. 3. Plywood backing panels.


1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) size in least dimension.

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) size or greater but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) size in least dimension.

C. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.

D. OSB: Oriented strand board.

E. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) size or greater in least dimension.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.


July 31, 2015 061000 - 2

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.

4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.


1. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for regional materials.> 2. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for certified wood.> 3. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for certified wood.> 4. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for composite wood.> 5. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for installation adhesives.>

C. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing.


A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Post-installed anchors. 5. Metal framing anchors.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.

B. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for manufacturer qualifications.>

C. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for vendor qualifications.>


A. Stack wood products flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect wood products from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.


July 31, 2015 061000 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for regional materials.>

B. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for certified wood.>

C. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, comply with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Grade lumber by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, [mark grade stamp

on end or back of each piece] [or] [omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency].

3. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: [15 percent] [19 percent] [15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less; 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness] [15 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less; no limit for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness] [19 percent for 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less; no limit for more than 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual) thickness] unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2[ for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground].

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.[ Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.]

2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, [mark end or back of each piece] [or] [omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency].


July 31, 2015 061000 - 4

D. Application: Treat [all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated.] [items indicated on Drawings, and the following:]

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, [furring,] [stripping,] and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.

4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.

5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-

retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841.[ For enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where high temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, provide material with adjustment factors of not less than 0.85 modulus of elasticity and 0.75 for extreme fiber in bending for Project's climatological zone.]

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.[ Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 15 percent.]

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, [mark end or back of each piece] [or] [omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by testing agency].


July 31, 2015 061000 - 5

E. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, chemical formulations shall not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

F. Application: Treat [all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated.] [items indicated on Drawings, and the following:]

1. Framing for raised platforms. 2. Framing for stages. 3. Concealed blocking. 4. Framing for non-load-bearing partitions. 5. Framing for non-load-bearing exterior walls. 6. Roof construction. 7. Plywood backing panels.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Cants. 5. Furring. 6. Grounds. 7. Utility shelving.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: [Construction or No. 2] [Standard, Stud, or No. 3] grade lumber of [any species.] [any of the following species:] [the following species:]

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 6. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 7. Northern species; NLGA. 8. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.

C. Concealed Boards: [15] [19] percent maximum moisture content and [any of ]the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; No. [2] [3] grade; SPIB. 2. Hem-fir or hem-fir (north); [Construction or No. 2 Common] [Standard or

No. 3 Common] grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir; [Construction or No. 2 Common] [Standard

or No. 3 Common] grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 4. Eastern softwoods; No. [2] [3] Common grade; NeLMA. 5. Northern species; No. [2] [3] Common grade; NLGA.


July 31, 2015 061000 - 6

6. Western woods; [Construction or No. 2 Common] [Standard or No. 3 Common] grade; WCLIB or WWPA.

D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, [Exterior, A-C] [Exterior, C-C Plugged] [Exposure 1, C-D Plugged], [fire-retardant treated,] in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than [1/2-inch (13-mm)] [3/4-inch (19-mm)] nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Fasteners shall be of size and type indicated and shall comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners[ with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M] [of Type 304 stainless steel].

B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

D. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on [ICC-ES AC01] [ICC-ES AC58] [ICC-ES AC193] [or] [ICC-ES AC308] as appropriate for the substrate.

1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.

2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2 (ASTM F 738M and ASTM F 836M, Grade A1 or A4).

2.7 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

A. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

B. Allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, shall meet or exceed those [indicated] [of basis-of-design products] [of products of manufacturers listed]. Manufacturer's


July 31, 2015 061000 - 7

published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. Framing anchors shall be punched for fasteners adequate to withstand same loads as framing anchors.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.

1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.

D. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick.

1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.

E. Wall Bracing: Angle bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 15/16 by 15/16 by 0.040 inch (24 by 24 by 1 mm) thick with hemmed edges.


A. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WOOD BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for[ screeding or] attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

3.2 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION

A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work.


July 31, 2015 061000 - 8

B. Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal- (19-by-63-mm actual-) size furring [horizontally] [and] [vertically] at [24 inches (610 mm)] [600 mm] o.c.

C. Furring to Receive [Gypsum Board] [Plaster Lath]: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal- (19-by-38-mm actual-) size furring vertically at [16 inches (406 mm)] [400 mm] o.c.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes [wet] [wet enough that moisture content exceeds that specified], apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 061053 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry

July 31, 2015 061053 - 1

SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 2. Plywood sheathing. 3. Plywood backing panels.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Boards or Strips: Lumber of less than 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) size in least dimension.

B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal (38 mm actual) or greater size but less than 5 inches nominal (114 mm actual) size in least dimension.


A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated.


July 31, 2015 061053 - 2

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, materials shall comply with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Treatment shall not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.

C. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Concealed blocking. 2. Plywood backing panels. 3. Plywood sheathing.


July 31, 2015 061053 - 3

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: Standard, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of the following species:

1. Hem-fir (north); NLGA. 2. Mixed southern pine or southern pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA. 4. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA. 5. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 6. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA. 7. Northern species; NLGA. 8. Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.

C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose.

2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1, Exterior, A-C, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.


C. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

D. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.


A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).


July 31, 2015 061053 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels.

D. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim.

1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c.

E. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics do not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

F. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.

G. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

H. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 2. Table R602.3 (1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3 (2),

"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.

3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.

I. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.


July 31, 2015 061053 - 5

3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION

A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.

B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unless otherwise indicated.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 061600 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Sheathing

July 31, 2015 061600 - 1

SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Parapet sheathing. 4. Composite nail base insulated roof sheathing. 5. Subflooring. 6. Underlayment. 7. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment.


1. [Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry"] [Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry"] for plywood backing panels.

2. Section 072500 "Weather Barriers" for water-resistive barrier applied over wall sheathing.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials.

3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5516.

4. For products receiving waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.



July 31, 2015 061600 - 2

1. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for certified wood.> 2. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for certified wood.> 3. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for composite wood.> 4. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for installation adhesives.>


A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Wood-preservative-treated plywood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated plywood. 3. Foam-plastic sheathing.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.

B. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for manufacturer qualifications.>

C. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for vendor qualifications.>


A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As tested according to ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Emissions: Products shall meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."


July 31, 2015 061600 - 3

B. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for certified wood.>

C. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated.

D. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.

2.3 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2[ for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground].

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.

B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Application: [Treat all plywood unless otherwise indicated] [Treat items indicated on Drawings] [and plywood in contact with masonry or concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing].

2.4 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED PLYWOOD

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.

B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-

retardant-treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201/D 3201M at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber plywood shall be tested according to ASTM D 5516 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6305. Span ratings after treatment shall be not less than span ratings specified.[ For roof sheathing and where high-temperature fire-retardant treatment is indicated, span ratings for temperatures up to 170 deg F (76 deg C) shall be not less than span ratings specified.]


July 31, 2015 061600 - 4

C. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

D. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

E. Application: [Treat all plywood unless otherwise indicated.] [Treat plywood indicated on Drawings, and the following:]

1. Roof[ and wall] sheathing within 48 inches (1220 mm) of [fire] [party] walls. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Subflooring and underlayment for raised platforms. 4. <Insert category of plywood items required to be treated>.

2.5 WALL SHEATHING

A. Plywood Sheathing: [DOC PS 1] [Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2], [Exterior, Structural I] [Exterior] [Exposure 1, Structural I] [Exposure 1] sheathing.

1. Span Rating: Not less than [16/0] [20/0] [24/0] [32/16]. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than [11/32 inch (8.7 mm)] [3/8 inch (9.5 mm)] [1/2 inch

(13 mm)].

B. Oriented-Strand-Board Sheathing: DOC PS 2, [Exposure 1, Structural I] [Exposure 1] sheathing.

1. Span Rating: Not less than [16/0] [20/0] [24/0] [24/16] [32/16]. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than [5/16 inch (7.9 mm)] [3/8 inch (9.5 mm)] [1/2 inch

(13 mm)].

C. Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, gypsum sheathing; with water-resistant-treated core and with water-repellent paper bonded to core's face, back, and long edges.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Type and Thickness: [Regular, 1/2 inch (13 mm)] [Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm)] thick. 3. Edge and End Configuration: [V-shaped, tongue-and-groove long edges; square ends]

[Square]. 4. Size: [24 by 96 inches (610 by 2438 mm) for horizontal] [48 by 96 inches (1219 by

2438 mm) for vertical] [48 by 108 inches (1219 by 2743 mm) for vertical] [600 by 2400 mm for horizontal] [1200 by 2400 mm for vertical] [1200 by 2750 mm for vertical] installation.

D. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Type and Thickness: [Regular, 1/2 inch (13 mm)] [Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm)] thick. 3. Size: [48 by 96 inches (1219 by 2438 mm)] [48 by 108 inches (1219 by 2743 mm)] [48

by 120 inches (1219 by 3048 mm)] [1200 by 2400 mm] [1200 by 2750 mm] [1200 by 3050 mm] for vertical installation.


July 31, 2015 061600 - 5

E. Cellulose Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1278/C 1278M, gypsum sheathing.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Fiberock Sheathing with

Aqua-Tough" by United States Gypsum Co. 3. Type and Thickness: [Regular, 1/2 inch (13 mm)] [Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm)] thick. 4. Size: [48 by 96 inches (1219 by 2438 mm)] [48 by 108 inches (1219 by 2743 mm)] [48

by 120 inches (1219 by 3048 mm)] [1200 by 2400 mm] [1200 by 2750 mm] [1200 by 3050 mm].

F. Cementitious Backer Units: ASTM C 1325, Type A.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Thickness: [1/2 inch (12.7 mm)] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm)] [As indicated].

G. Fiberboard Sheathing: ASTM C 208, Type IV, [Grade 1 (Regular)] [Grade 2 (Structural)] cellulosic fiberboard sheathing with square edges, [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [25/32 inch (20 mm)] thick.

H. Extruded-Polystyrene-Foam Sheathing: ASTM C 578, Type IV, in manufacturer's standard lengths and widths with tongue-and-groove or shiplap long edges as standard with manufacturer.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Thickness: [3/4 inch (19 mm)] [1 inch (25 mm)] [As indicated]. 3. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to

NFPA 285.

I. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate-Foam Sheathing: ASTM C 1289, Type I or Type II, Class 2, rigid, cellular, polyisocyanurate thermal insulation. Foam-plastic core and facings shall have a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested individually.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Thickness: [7/16 inch (11.1 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm)] [3/4 inch

(19 mm)] [1 inch (25 mm)] [As indicated]. 3. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to

NFPA 285.

2.6 ROOF SHEATHING


1. Span Rating: Not less than [16/0] [20/0] [24/0] [32/16] [40/20] [48/24]. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than [15/32 inch (11.9 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)].


1. Span Rating: Not less than [16/0] [20/0] [24/0] [24/16] [32/16] [40/20] [48/24].


July 31, 2015 061600 - 6

2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than [7/16 inch (11.1 mm)] [15/32 inch (11.9 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)] [5/8 inch (16 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)].

2.7 PARAPET SHEATHING


1. Span Rating: Not less than [16/0] [20/0] [24/0] [32/16] [40/20] [48/24]. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than [15/32 inch (11.9 mm)] [1/2 inch (13 mm)].


1. Span Rating: Not less than [16/0] [20/0] [24/0] [24/16] [32/16] [40/20] [48/24]. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than [7/16 inch (11.1 mm)] [15/32 inch (11.9 mm)] [1/2

inch (13 mm)] [5/8 inch (16 mm)] [3/4 inch (19 mm)].

C. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Type and Thickness: [Regular, 1/2 inch (13 mm)] [Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm)] thick. 3. Size: [48 by 96 inches (1219 by 2438 mm)] [48 by 108 inches (1219 by 2743 mm)] [48

by 120 inches (1219 by 3048 mm)] [1200 by 2400 mm] [1200 by 2750 mm] [1200 by 3050 mm] for vertical installation.

D. Cementitious Backer Units: ASTM C 1325, Type A.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Thickness: [1/2 inch (12.7 mm)] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm)] [As indicated].

2.8 COMPOSITE NAIL BASE INSULATED ROOF SHEATHING

A. Oriented-Strand-Board-Surfaced, Polyisocyanurate-Foam Sheathing: ASTM C 1289, Type V with DOC PS 2, Exposure 1 oriented strand board on one face.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Polyisocyanurate-Foam Thickness: [1 inch (25 mm)] [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches

(50 mm)] [2-1/2 inches (64 mm)] [3 inches (76 mm)] [3-1/2 inches (89 mm)] [4 inches (102 mm)].

3. Oriented-Strand-Board Nominal Thickness: [7/16 inch (11.1 mm)] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm)].

B. Vented, Oriented-Strand-Board-Surfaced, Polyisocyanurate-Foam Sheathing: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, with DOC PS 2, Exposure 1 oriented strand board adhered to spacers on one face.



July 31, 2015 061600 - 7

2. Polyisocyanurate-Foam Thickness: [1 inch (25 mm)] [1-1/2 inches (38 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)] [2-1/2 inches (64 mm)] [3 inches (76 mm)] [3-1/2 inches (89 mm)] [4 inches (102 mm)].

3. Oriented-Strand-Board Nominal Thickness: [7/16 inch (11.1 mm)] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm)].

4. Spacers: Wood furring strips or blocks not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick and spaced not more than [12 inches (300 mm)] [16 inches (400 mm)] [24 inches (600 mm)] o.c.

2.9 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT

A. Plywood Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 1, [Exterior, Structural I, C-C Plugged] [Exterior, C-C Plugged] [Exposure 1, Structural I, Underlayment] [Exposure 1, Underlayment] single-floor panels.

1. Span Rating: Not less than [16] [20] [24] [32] [48]. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than [23/32 inch (18.3 mm)] [7/8 inch (22.2 mm)] [1 inch

(25 mm)]. 3. Edge Detail: [Square] [Tongue and groove]. 4. Surface Finish: Fully sanded face.

B. Oriented-Strand-Board Combination Subfloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1 single-floor panels.

1. Span Rating: Not less than [16] [20] [24] [32] [48]. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than [23/32 inch (18.3 mm)] [7/8 inch (22.2 mm)] [1 inch

(25 mm)]. 3. Edge Detail: [Square] [Tongue and groove]. 4. Surface Finish: [Fully sanded] [Resin-impregnated overlay] face.

C. Plywood Subflooring: [DOC PS 1] [Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2], [Exterior, Structural I] [Exterior] [Exposure 1, Structural I] [Exposure 1] single-floor panels or sheathing.

1. Span Rating: Not less than [16] [20] [24] [32] [48] [or] [32/16] [40/20] [48/24]. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than [23/32 inch (18.3 mm)] [7/8 inch (22.2 mm)] [1 inch

(25 mm)].

D. Oriented-Strand-Board Subflooring: DOC PS 2, Exposure 1[, Structural I sheathing] [single-floor panels or sheathing].

1. Span Rating: Not less than [16] [20] [24] [32] [48] [or] [32/16] [40/20] [48/24] [60/32]. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than [23/32 inch (18.3 mm)] [7/8 inch (22.2 mm)] [1 inch

(25 mm)].

E. Underlayment: Provide underlayment in nominal thicknesses indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) over smooth subfloors and not less than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) over board or uneven subfloors.

1. Plywood Underlayment for Resilient Flooring: DOC PS 1, [Exterior A-C] [Exterior B-C] [Exterior, C-C Plugged] [Exposure 1 Underlayment] with fully sanded face.


July 31, 2015 061600 - 8

2. Plywood Underlayment for Ceramic Tile: DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C Plugged, not less than 5/8-inch (15.9-mm) nominal thickness.

3. Plywood Underlayment for Carpet: DOC PS 1, [Exterior, C-C Plugged] [Exposure 1, Underlayment] [Interior, Underlayment].

4. Particleboard Underlayment: ANSI A208.1, [Grade PBU] [Grade M-2].

a. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for particleboard.>

5. Hardboard Underlayment: ANSI A135.4, Class 4 (Service), Surface S1S; with back side sanded.

2.10 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. For [roof] [parapet] [and] [wall] sheathing, provide fasteners [with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M] [of Type 304 stainless steel].

2. For [roof] [parapet] [and] [wall] sheathing, provide fasteners with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117.


C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.

D. Screws for Fastening Sheathing to Wood Framing: ASTM C 1002.

E. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

F. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached.

1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch (0.835 mm) thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 1002.

2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 954.

G. Screws for Fastening Composite Nail Base Insulated Roof Sheathing to Metal Roof Deck: Steel drill screws, in type and length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. Provide washers or plates if recommended by sheathing manufacturer.


July 31, 2015 061600 - 9

2.11 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. Sealant for [Paper-Surfaced] [Glass-Mat] Gypsum Sheathing: Elastomeric, medium-modulus, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant compatible with joint substrates formed by gypsum sheathing and other materials, recommended by sheathing manufacturer for application indicated and complying with requirements for elastomeric sealants specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

B. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners.

1. Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches (50 mm) wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch (390 by 390 or 390 by 780 threads/m), of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use.

C. Sheathing Tape for Foam-Plastic Sheathing: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by sheathing manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in sheathing.


A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Wood Framing: Formulation complying with [APA AFG-01] [ASTM D 3498] that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels.

1. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for VOC content of adhesive.> 2. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for low emitting adhesives.>

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in the ICC's International Building Code. 2. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),

"Alternate Attachments," in the ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.

3. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener.


July 31, 2015 061600 - 10

D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.

E. Coordinate [wall] [parapet] [and] [roof] sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.

3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated.

B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:

1. Combination Subfloor-Underlayment:

a. [Glue and nail] [Nail] to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. c. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.

2. Subflooring:

a. [Glue and nail] [Nail] [Nail or staple] to wood framing. b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. c. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.

3. Wall and Roof Sheathing:

a. [Nail] [Nail or staple] to wood framing.[ Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members at edges of wall sheathing panels.]

b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. c. Space panels 1/8 inch (3 mm) apart at edges and ends.

4. Underlayment:

a. [Nail] [Nail or staple] to subflooring. b. Space panels 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) apart at edges and ends. c. Fill and sand edge joints of underlayment receiving resilient flooring immediately

before installing flooring.


July 31, 2015 061600 - 11

3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with [nails] [or] [screws]. 2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 3. Install panels with a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts

structural elements. 4. Install panels with a 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where they abut masonry or similar materials

that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing.

C. Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongue with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent panels without forcing. Abut ends over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent panels not less than one stud spacing. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from edges and ends of panels.

2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, panels may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed.

D. Vertical Installation: Install vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges with those of adjacent panels. Attach at perimeter and within field of panel to each stud.

1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from edges and ends of panels.

2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, panels may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed.

E. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings.

2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings.

3.4 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNIT INSTALLATION

A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated.


July 31, 2015 061600 - 12

3.5 FIBERBOARD SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 846 and with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Fasten fiberboard sheathing panels to intermediate supports and then at edges and ends. Use galvanized roofing nails[ or galvanized staples]; comply with manufacturer's recommended spacing and referenced fastening schedule. Drive fasteners flush with surface of sheathing and locate perimeter fasteners at least 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from edges and ends.

C. Install sheathing vertically with long edges parallel to, and centered over, studs. Install solid wood blocking where end joints do not occur over framing. Allow 1/8-inch (3-mm) open space between edges and ends of adjacent units. Stagger horizontal joints if any.

D. Cover sheathing as soon as practical after installation to prevent deterioration from wetting.

3.6 FOAM-PLASTIC SHEATHING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Foam-Plastic Wall Sheathing: Install vapor-relief strips or equivalent for permitting escape of moisture vapor that otherwise would be trapped in stud cavity behind sheathing.

C. Apply sheathing tape to joints between foam-plastic sheathing panels and at items penetrating sheathing. Apply at upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and sheathing.

3.7 PARTICLEBOARD UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with CPA's recommendations for type of subfloor indicated. Fill and sand gouges, gaps, and chipped edges. Sand uneven joints flush.

1. Fastening Method: [Glue and nail] [Nail] [Nail or staple] underlayment to subflooring.

3.8 HARDBOARD UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with CPA's recommendations and hardboard manufacturer's written instructions for preparing and applying hardboard underlayment.

1. Fastening Method: [Nail] [Nail or staple] underlayment to subflooring.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 064116 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets

July 31, 2015 064116 - 1

SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets. 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced

architectural cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.


1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing cabinets and concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, fire-retardant-treated materials and cabinet hardware and accessories.

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other

items installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets. 4. Apply WI Certified Compliance Program label to Shop Drawings. 5. Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.

C. Samples for Verification:


July 31, 2015 064116 - 2

1. Plastic laminates, 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm), for each color, pattern, and surface finish.

2. Thermoset decorative panels, 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm), for each color, pattern, and surface finish.

3. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.


A. Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.


A. Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

B. Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated.

B. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements.


July 31, 2015 064116 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. Provide AWI grade specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard

and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.

B. Grade: Premium.

C. Type of Construction: Frameless.

D. Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Reveal overlay.

E. Reveal Dimension: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

F. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

a. Formica Corporation. b. Wilsonart International Holdings, Inc.

G. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:

1. Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS. 2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 4. Edges: Grade HGS. 5. Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels. Match color P-

Lam-3.

H. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: Thermoset decorative panels.

a. Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding. b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide

surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS. c. For shelf tops provide high pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD3, Grade

HGS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.


July 31, 2015 064116 - 4

I. Dust Panels: 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless located directly under tops.

J. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.

K. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of body.

1. Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued rabbeted joints supplemented by mechanical fasteners or glued dovetail joints.

L. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As indicated by laminate manufacturer's designations.

a. Casework countertops: Formica, Geo Fossil.5274-58, matt finish. b. Vertical surfaces: Wilsonart, Studio Teak 7960K-18, finish A.

2.2 WOOD MATERIALS

A. Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

B. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 3. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1,

Grade M-2, except for density.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Environ Biocomposites Manufacturing LLC; Biofiber Wheat. 2) Sorm Incorporated; Primeboard Premium Wheat.

4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 5. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with

thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper and complying with requirements of NEMA LD 3, Grade VGL, for test methods 3.3, 3.4, 3.6, 3.8, and 3.10.


July 31, 2015 064116 - 5

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets except for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)."

B. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch (70-mm), five-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick metal, and as follows:

1. Semiconcealed Hinges for Overlay Doors: BHMA A156.9, B01521.

C. Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.

D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.

E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.

F. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.

1. Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated-steel ball-bearing slides.

2. For drawers more than 3 inches (75 mm) high but not more than 6 inches (150 mm) high and not more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1HD-100.

3. For drawers more than 6 inches (150 mm) high or more than 24 inches (600 mm) wide, provide Grade 1HD-100.

4. For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1HD-100.

G. Plastic Slides for Sliding Glass Doors: BHMA A156.9, B07063.

H. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.

I. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.

J. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.

K. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

1. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.

L. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.


A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.


July 31, 2015 064116 - 6

C. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement.

1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.

B. Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements before disassembling for shipment.

C. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.

B. Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm).

D. Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.


July 31, 2015 064116 - 7

E. Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.

1. Use filler matching finish of items being installed.

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for not less than 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.


A. Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 064216 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Flush Wood Paneling

July 31, 2015 064216 - 1

SECTION 064216 - FLUSH WOOD PANELING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Flush wood paneling (wood-veneer wall surfacing). 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing flush wood paneling

unless concealed within other construction before paneling installation. 3. Shop finishing of flush wood paneling.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061053 “Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and

hanging strips required for installing paneling and that are concealed within other construction before paneling installation.


A. Product Data: For each type of product, including panel products adhesives and finishing materials and processes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of paneling, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. Include dimensioned plans and elevations.

1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring and blocking, including concealed blocking specified

in other Sections. 3. For paneling veneered in fabrication shop, show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain

direction, exposed face, and identification numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.

4. Apply WI Certified Compliance Program label to first page of Shop Drawings.


1. Lumber for transparent finish, not less than 5 inches (125 mm) wide by 12 inches (300 mm) long, for each species and cut, finished on one side and one edge.

2. Veneer-faced panel products for transparent finish, 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm), for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified.


July 31, 2015 064216 - 2


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockups of typical paneling as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the



A. Do not deliver paneling until painting and similar operations that could damage paneling have been completed in installation areas. If paneling must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.


A. Field Measurements: Where paneling is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support paneling by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

B. Established Dimensions: Where paneling is indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensions for areas where woodwork is to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that paneling can be installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELING, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" for grades of flush wood paneling (wood-veneer wall surfacing) indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.


July 31, 2015 064216 - 3

1. Provide AWI grades specified. 2. The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard

and additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to the quality standard.

2.2 FLUSH WOOD PANELING (WOOD-VENEER WALL SURFACING)

A. Grade: Premium.

B. Wood Species and Cut: Cherry, plain sliced.

C. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves: Slip match.

D. Matching within Panel Face: Running match.

E. Matching of Adjacent Veneer Leaves and within Panel Face: Slip, center, book match.

F. Panel-Matching Method: No matching is required between panels. Select and arrange panels for similarity of grain pattern and color between adjacent panels.

G. Panel Core Construction: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard.

1. Thickness: 3/4 inch (19 mm) or as indicated.

H. Exposed Panel Edges: Applied solid-wood banding 11/16 inch (18 mm) thick by depth of panels.

I. Panel Reveals: Solid wood, see details.

J. Assemble panels by gluing and concealed fastening.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Materials, General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.

C. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for each quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

1. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130. 2. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2. 3. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requirements in ANSI A208.1,

Grade M-2, except for density. 4. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.


July 31, 2015 064216 - 4

2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Complete fabrication, including assembly and finishing, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

B. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

2.6 SHOP FINISHING

A. General: Finish paneling at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

B. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing paneling, as applicable to each unit of work.

1. Backpriming: Apply two coats of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of paneling.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: System - 2, precatalyzed lacquer. 3. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from

closed-grain wood before staining and finishing. 4. Staining: Match Architect's sample. 5. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. 6. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.


July 31, 2015 064216 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition paneling to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing paneling, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install paneling to comply with same grade as paneling to be installed.

B. Install paneling level, plumb, true, and straight with no distortions. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). Install with no more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch (1.6 mm in 2400-mm) vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96-inch (3 mm in 2400-mm) horizontal variation from a true plane.

1. For flush paneling with revealed joints, install with variations in reveal width, alignment of top and bottom edges, and flushness between adjacent panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

C. Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed panel-hanger clips. Do not use face fastening unless covered by trim.


A. Repair damaged and defective paneling, where possible, to eliminate defects; where not possible to repair, replace paneling. Adjust for uniform appearance.

B. Clean paneling on exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 066400 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Plastic Paneling

July 31, 2015 066400 - 1

SECTION 066400 - PLASTIC PANELING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Plastic sheet paneling.


1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for installing plastic paneling.

2. Section 102600 "Wall and Door Protection" for corner guards installed over plastic paneling.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer.

2.2 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING

A. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Paneling: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319. Provide from one of these manufacturers:

1. Crane Composites, Inc. 2. Glasteel 3. Marlite 4. Newcourt, Inc. 5. Nuolo Products, Inc. 6. Parkland Plastics, Inc.


July 31, 2015 066400 - 2

7. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows when tested by a qualified testing agency according to ASTM E 84. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 76-200 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

8. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch (2.3 mm). 9. Surface Finish: Molded pebble texture. 10. Color: White.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges.

1. Color: Match panels.

B. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer.

C. Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single-component, neutral-curing or acid-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove wallpaper, vinyl wall covering, loose or soluble paint, and other materials that might interfere with adhesive bond.

B. Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even surface for panel installation.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair adhesive bond, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust.

D. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations.


July 31, 2015 066400 - 3

E. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls not less than half the width of full panels.

1. Locate trim accessories to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.

C. Install trim accessories with adhesive and nails or staples.

D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels, and bed inside corner trim in a bead of sealant.

E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.

F. Maintain uniform space between adjacent panels and between panels and floors, ceilings, and fixtures. Fill space with sealant.

G. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 071413 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Hot Fluid-Applied Rubberized Asphalt Waterproofing

July 31, 2015 071413 - 1

SECTION 071413 - HOT FLUID-APPLIED RUBBERIZED ASPHALT WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Rubberized-asphalt waterproofing membrane [unreinforced] [reinforced]. 2. Molded-sheet drainage panels. 3. Insulation.


1. Section 075556 "Fluid-Applied Protected Membrane Roofing" for hot fluid-applied, rubberized-asphalt roofing.

2. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation. 3. Section 079500 "Expansion Control" for expansion-joint systems. 4. Section 321400 "Unit Paving" for plaza-deck pavers set on setting beds.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>.

1. Review waterproofing requirements, including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins to adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.


July 31, 2015 071413 - 2

1. Include setting drawings showing layout, sizes, sections, profiles, and joint details of pedestal-supported concrete pavers.

C. Samples: For plaza-deck pavers[, full sized] in each color and texture required.


A. Qualification Data: For [Installer] [and] [testing agency].

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Mockups: Install waterproofing to [100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m)] <Insert value> of [deck] [wall] to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner treatment, thickness, texture, and execution quality.[ Install pavers and paver supports to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and set quality standards for materials and execution.]

1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.



A. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.

B. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

C. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.


A. Weather Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, or when temperature is below zero deg F (minus 18 deg C).

1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist.

B. Maintain adequate ventilation during application and curing of waterproofing materials.


July 31, 2015 071413 - 3

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace waterproofing and sheet flashings that do not comply with requirements or that fail to remain watertight within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board, drainage panels, insulation, pedestals, and pedestal-mounted pavers on plaza decks.

2. Warranty insulation retains 80 percent of original published thermal value. 3. Warranty pavers do not dish or warp and do not crack, split, or disintegrate in freeze-

thaw conditions. 4. Warranty Period: [Five] [10] <Insert number> years from date of Substantial

Completion.

B. Special Installer's Warranty: Specified form[, on warranty form at end of this Section,] signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of [two] <Insert number> years.

1. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board, drainage panels, insulation, pedestals, and pedestal-mounted pavers on plaza decks.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials [sheet flashings] [protection course] [molded-sheet drainage panels] [insulation] [pavers] [and] [pedestals] from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE

A. Hot Fluid-Applied, Rubberized-Asphalt Waterproofing Membrane: Single component; 100 percent solids; hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt.


2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with waterproofing.

B. Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M, asphaltic primer.

C. Elastomeric Sheet: 50-mil- (1.3-mm-) minimum, uncured sheet neoprene[ with manufacturer's recommended contact adhesives] as follows:

1. Tensile Strength: 1400 psi (9.6 MPa) minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C. 2. Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412.


July 31, 2015 071413 - 4

3. Tear Resistance: 125 psi (860 kPa) minimum; ASTM D 624, Die C. 4. Brittleness: Does not break at minus 30 deg F (34 deg C); ASTM D 2137.

D. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum termination bars; approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with stainless-steel anchors.

E. Sealants and Accessories: Manufacturer's recommended sealants and accessories.

F. Reinforcing Fabric: Manufacturer's recommended, spun-bonded polyester fabric.

G. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced-asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as follows:

1. Thickness: [1/8 inch (3 mm)] [1/4 inch (6 mm)], nominal. 2. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm), nominal, for vertical applications; 1/4 inch (6 mm), nominal,

elsewhere.

H. Protection Course: Manufacturer's standard, 80- to 90-mil- (2.0- to 2.3-mm-) thick, fiberglass-reinforced rubberized asphalt or modified bituminous sheet.

2.4 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS

A. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 (0.21-mm) sieve, laminated to one side [with] [or] [without] a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core, with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 15 gpm/ft. (112 to 188 L/min. per m).

B. Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a woven-geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 40 (0.43-mm) sieve, laminated to one side [with] [or] [without] a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core, with a horizontal flow rate not less than 2.8 gpm/ft. (35 L/min. per m).

2.5 INSULATION

A. Board Insulation: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa)] [Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa)] [Type VII, 60-psi (414-kPa)] [Type V, 100-psi (690-kPa)] minimum compressive resistance, [square] [or] [shiplap] edged.


B. Unfaced Wall Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa)] [or] [Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa)] minimum compressive resistance; unfaced; fabricated with shiplap or channel edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels.



July 31, 2015 071413 - 5

C. Geotextile-Faced Wall Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [Type IV, 25-psi (173-kPa)] [or] [Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa)] minimum compressive resistance; fabricated with tongue-and-groove edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels faced with a nonwoven, geotextile filter fabric.


D. Unfaced Plaza-Deck Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, [Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa)] [Type VII, 60-psi (414-kPa)] minimum compressive resistance; unfaced; fabricated with shiplapped or channel edges and with one side having ribbed drainage channels.


E. Geotextile-Faced Plaza-Deck Insulation Drainage Panels: Extruded-polystyrene board insulation complying with ASTM C 578, Type VII, 60-psi (414-kPa) minimum compressive resistance; fabricated with tongue-and-groove edges and with one side having grooved drainage channels faced with a nonwoven, geotextile filter fabric.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids.

D. Remove grease, oil, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.


July 31, 2015 071413 - 6

1. Abrasive blast clean concrete surfaces uniformly to expose top surface of fine aggregate according to ASTM D 4259 with a self-contained, recirculating, blast-cleaning apparatus. Remove material to provide a sound surface free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, or form-release agents. Remove remaining loose material and clean surfaces according to ASTM D 4258.

E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections, and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids.

3.3 JOINTS, CRACKS, AND TERMINATIONS

A. Prepare and treat substrates to receive waterproofing membrane, including joints and cracks, deck drains, corners, and penetrations according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Rout and fill joints and cracks in substrate. Before filling, remove dust and dirt according to ASTM D 4258.

2. Adhere strip of elastomeric sheet to substrate in a layer of hot rubberized asphalt. Extend elastomeric sheet a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) on each side of moving joints and cracks or joints and cracks exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, and beyond deck drains and penetrations. Apply second layer of hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt over elastomeric sheet.

3. Embed strip of reinforcing fabric into a layer of hot rubberized asphalt. Extend reinforcing fabric a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) on each side of nonmoving joints and cracks not exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, and beyond roof drains and penetrations.

a. Apply second layer of hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt over reinforcing fabric.

B. At expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall or deck-to-deck joints, bridge joints with elastomeric sheet extended a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) on each side of joints and adhere to substrates in a layer of hot rubberized asphalt. Apply second layer of hot fluid-applied, rubberized asphalt over elastomeric sheet.

3.4 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install elastomeric sheets at terminations of waterproofing membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Prime substrate with asphalt primer.

C. Install elastomeric sheet and adhere to deck and wall substrates in a layer of hot rubberized asphalt.

D. Extend elastomeric sheet up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above plaza-deck pavers and 6 inches (150 mm) onto deck to be waterproofed.

E. Install termination bars and mechanically fasten to top of elastomeric flashing sheet at terminations and perimeter of waterproofing.


July 31, 2015 071413 - 7

3.5 MEMBRANE APPLICATION

A. Apply primer, at manufacturer's recommended rate, over prepared substrate and allow it to dry.

B. Heat and apply rubberized asphalt according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Heat rubberized asphalt in an oil- or air-jacketed melter with mechanical agitator specifically designed for heating rubberized asphalt.

C. Start application with manufacturer's authorized representative present.

D. Unreinforced Membrane: Apply hot rubberized asphalt to substrates and adjoining surfaces indicated. Spread to form a uniform, unreinforced, seamless membrane, [180-mil (4.5-mm) minimum thickness] [180-mil (4.5-mm) average thickness, but not less than 125 mils ((3.2 mm))thick].

E. Reinforced Membrane: Apply hot rubberized asphalt to substrates and adjoining surfaces indicated. Spread to a thickness of 90 mils (2.3 mm); embed reinforcing fabric, overlapping sheets 2 inches (50 mm); spread another 125-mil- (3.2-mm-) thick layer to provide a uniform, reinforced, seamless membrane 215 mils (5.5 mm) thick.

F. Apply waterproofing over prepared joints and up wall terminations and vertical surfaces to heights indicated or required by manufacturer.

G. Cover waterproofing with protection course with overlapped joints before membrane is subject to [backfilling] [construction or vehicular traffic].

3.6 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use methods that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction.

1. For vertical applications, install [board insulation] [protection course] before installing drainage panels.

3.7 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Install [one or more layers of board insulation to achieve required thickness] [and] [insulation drainage panels] over waterproofed surfaces. Cut and fit to within 3/4 inch (19 mm) of projections and penetrations.

B. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units into rubberized asphalt according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.


July 31, 2015 071413 - 8

3.8 PLAZA-DECK PAVER INSTALLATION

A. Install concrete pavers according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Accurately install [fixed] [adjustable]-height paver pedestals and accessories to elevations required. Adjust for final level and slope with shims.

1. Fill paver pedestal with concrete mix, strike smooth with top of pedestal, and cure according to ACI 301.

C. Loosely lay pavers on pedestals, maintaining a uniform open joint width. Tightly seat pavers against spacers to eliminate lateral movement or drift of paving assembly. Align joint patterns parallel in each direction.

1. Lay out pavers to avoid less-than-half-width pavers at perimeter or other terminations.

D. Install pavers to not vary more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in elevation between adjacent pavers or more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) from surface plane elevation of individual paver.

E. Limit variation in paving installation to within [1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m)] <Insert dimensions> of surface plane in any direction; noncumulative.


A. Engage a full-time site representative qualified by waterproofing membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions; surface preparation; and application of membrane, flashings, protection, and drainage components; furnish daily reports to Architect.

1. Site representative shall measure membrane thickness with pin tester or other suitable device at least once for every 100 sq. ft. (10 sq. m) and include measurements in reports.

B. Testing Agency: [Owner will engage] [Engage] a qualified testing agency to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, waterproofing application, protection, and drainage components, and to furnish reports to Architect.

1. Flood Testing: Flood test each deck area for leaks, according to recommendations in ASTM D 5957, after completing and protecting waterproofing but before overlaying construction is placed. Install temporary containment assemblies, plug or dam drains, and flood with potable water. Testing agency shall observe flood testing.

a. Flood to an average depth of 2-1/2 inches (65 mm) with a minimum depth of 1 inch (25 mm) and not exceeding a depth of 4 inches (100 mm). Maintain 2 inches (50 mm) of clearance from top of sheet flashings.

b. Flood each area for [24] [48] [72] hours. c. After flood testing, repair leaks, repeat flood tests, and make further repairs until

waterproofing installation is watertight.

2. Electric Field Vector Mapping (EFVM): Testing agency shall survey entire waterproofing area for potential leaks using EFVM.


July 31, 2015 071413 - 9

3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Protect installed [board insulation] [insulation drainage panels] from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 072100 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Thermal Insulation

July 31, 2015 072100- 1

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Concealed building insulation (board and blanket). 2. Vapor retarders.


1. Division 7 Section "Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction.

2. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sound attenuation insulation and installation of insulation specified by referencing this Section.

3. Division 22 Section “Plumbing Insulation.” 4. Division 23 Section "Mechanical Insulation."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths) or rolls.


A. Plenum Rating: Provide glass-fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose test performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


July 31, 2015 072100- 2


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer.


A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:

1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment.

2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time.

3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2.2 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Fibrex Insulations Inc. 2. Owens Corning. 3. Roxul Inc. 4. Thermafiber.

B. Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

C. Locations: Acoustical and fire rated walls and assemblies.


July 31, 2015 072100- 3

2.3 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. Available Manufacturers:

1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Fiber Glass. 5. Owens Corning.

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

C. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated:

1. 5-1/2 inches (140 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 21 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75 deg F (3.7 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C).

D. Location: In non-acoustical; non-fire rated exterior framed walls and assemblies, roof assemblies.

2.4 GLASS-FIBER BOARD

A. Glass-Fiber Board, Unfaced: ASTM C 612, Type IA; unfaced, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84, passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Nominal density of 3 lb/cu. ft. (48 kg/cu. m), thermal resistivity of 4.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F (29.8 K x m/W at 24 deg C).

1. Location: Spandrel glass panels in curtainwall.

2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Two outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 25 lb/1000 sq. ft. (12 kg/100 sq. m), with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm (2.9 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Concealed Locations: 1) Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 6WW. 2) Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-65.

b. Exposed Locations: 1) Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 2FR. 2) Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-55 FR.


July 31, 2015 072100- 4

B. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.

C. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.

D. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates. VOC content not to exceed 250 g/L.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.


July 31, 2015 072100- 5

3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Seal joints between foam-plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

C. Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder in location indicated of construction, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation.

D. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures.

E. Stuff glass-fiber loose-fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).

3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS

A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.

B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches (400 mm) o.c.

C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder.

D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.

E. Use fire retardant vapor barrier at all exposed areas including above acoustical panel ceilings.


July 31, 2015 072100- 6

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 072500 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Weather Barriers

July 31, 2015 072500 - 1

SECTION 072500 - WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wrap. 2. Flexible flashing.



1. For building wrap, include data on air and water-vapor permeance based on testing according to referenced standards.


A. Evaluation Reports: For water-resistive barrier and flexible flashing, from ICC-ES.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER

A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air barrier; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: Not less than 8 perms (460 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) per ASTM E 96/E 96M, Desiccant Method (Procedure A).

2. Air Permeance: Not more than 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. at 0.3-inch wg (0.02 L/s x sq. m at 75 Pa) when tested according to ASTM E 2178.

3. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months. 4. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to

NFPA 285.


July 31, 2015 072500 - 2

B. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.

2.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING

A. Butyl Rubber Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch (1.0 mm). 1. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to

NFPA 285.

B. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch (1.0 mm). 1. Flame Propagation Test: Materials and construction shall be as tested according to

NFPA 285.

C. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended in writing by flexible flashing manufacturer for substrate.

D. Nails and Staples: Product recommended in writing by flexible flashing manufacturer and complying with ASTM F 1667.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WATER-RESISTIVE BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. Cover exposed exterior surface of sheathing with water-resistive barrier securely fastened to framing immediately after sheathing is installed.

B. Cover sheathing with water-resistive barrier as follows:

1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch (13 mm) on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations.

2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch (100-mm) overlap unless otherwise indicated.

C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.

3.2 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer.


July 31, 2015 072500 - 3

2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches (100 mm) except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.

3. Lap flashing over water-resistive barrier at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Lap water-resistive barrier over flashing at heads of openings. 5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure

that flashing is completely adhered to substrates.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 072600 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Vapor Retarders

July 31, 2015 072600 - 1

SECTION 072600 - VAPOR RETARDERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Polyethylene vapor retarders. 2. Reinforced-polyethylene vapor retarders. 3. Fire-retardant, reinforced-polyethylene vapor retarders.


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for under-slab vapor retarders. 2. Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation" for vapor retarders integral with insulation

products.




A. Product Test Reports: For each product, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 POLYETHYLENE VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, [6-mil- (0.15-mm-)] [10-mil- (0.25-mm-)] thick sheet, with maximum permeance rating of 0.1 perm (5.7 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).

2.2 REINFORCED-POLYETHYLENE VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Sheet with outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and


July 31, 2015 072600 - 2

weighing not less than [20 lb/1000 sq. ft. (9 kg/100 sq. m)] <Insert weight>, with maximum permeance rating of 0.1 perm (5.7 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).


2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT, REINFORCED-POLYETHYLENE VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Fire-Retardant, Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Sheet with outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nonwoven grid of nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than [20 lb/1000 sq. ft. (9 kg/100 sq. m)] <Insert weight>, with maximum permeance rating of 0.1 perm (5.7 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes

of [75 and 200] <Insert values>, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.

B. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and has demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.

C. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS ON FRAMING

A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings.

B. Extend vapor retarders to extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with adhesives, vapor retarder fasteners, or other anchorage system as recommended by manufacturer. Extend vapor retarders to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.

C. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs and sealing with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.


July 31, 2015 072600 - 3

D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarders.

E. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS IN CRAWL SPACES

A. Install vapor retarders over prepared grade. Lap joints a minimum of 12 inches (305 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape. Install second layer over pathways to equipment.

B. Extend vapor retarder over footings and seal to foundation wall or grade beam with manufacturer's recommended tape.

1. Extend vapor retarder vertically minimum [16 inches (406 mm)] [24 inches (610 mm)] <Insert dimension> above top of footing.

C. Seal around penetrations such as utilities and columns in order to create a monolithic, airtight membrane at grade surface, perimeter, and all vertical penetrations.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect vapor retarders from damage until concealed by permanent construction.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 075423 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing

July 31, 2015 075423 - 1

SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Repair of mechanically fastened TPO membrane roofing system. 2. Walkway pads. 3. Roof insulation.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 23 Section “Roof Top Air Handlers” for factory curbs.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. TPO: Thermoplastic polyolefin.

B. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.


A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.



B. Samples for Verification: For the following products:


July 31, 2015 075423 - 2

1. Walkway pads or rolls. 2. Metal termination bars.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with warranty requirements.


A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer approved for repair of existing Carlisle TPO membrane roofing system.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by existing membrane roofing system manufacturer to install repairs to manufacturer's product.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.


A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

C. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.


A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.


July 31, 2015 075423 - 3

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Roofing repair to conform to the requirements of the current manufacturer’s warranty. Provide letter from manufacturer approving the work done on the roof as consistent with their details. Letter to confirm that the existing roof warranty will remain in force, see attached.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING

A. Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, uniform, flexible TPO sheet.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Basis of this Specifications is: Carlisle SynTec Incorporated Sure-Weld TPO, subject to compliance with requirements, products from the following will be considered:

1. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. 2. Firestone Building Products Company. 3. Versico “Veriweld”. 4. GAF Everguard TPO.

2.3 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING MEMBRANE

A. Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: Uniform, flexible sheet formed from a thermoplastic polyolefin, internally fabric or scrim reinforced, and as follows:

1. Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm), nominal.

2. Exposed Face Colors: “White”. 3. Physical Properties:

a. Breaking Strength: 225 lbf (1 kN); ASTM D 751, grab method. b. Elongation at Break: 15 percent; ASTM D 751. c. Tearing Strength: 55 lbf (245 N) minimum; ASTM D 751, Procedure B. d. Brittleness Point: Minus 40 deg F (minus 40 deg C) ASTM D2137. e. Ozone Resistance: No cracks after sample, wrapped around a 3-inch- (75-mm-)

diameter mandrel, is exposed for 166 hours to a temperature of 104 deg F (40 deg C) and an ozone level of 100 pphm (100 mPa); ASTM D 1149.

f. Resistance to Heat Aging: 90 percent minimum retention of breaking strength, elongation at break, and tearing strength after 166 hours at 240 deg F (116 deg C); ASTM D 573.

g. Water Absorption: Less than 4 percent mass change after 166 hours' immersion at 158 deg F (70 deg C); ASTM D 471.

h. Linear Dimension Change: Plus or minus 2 percent; ASTM D 1204.


July 31, 2015 075423 - 4

2.4 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing, 55 mils (1.4 mm) thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, water based.

D. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 by 3 mm) thick; with anchors.

E. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick (25 mm wide by 1.3 mm thick), prepunched.

F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.

G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.

2.5 WALKWAYS

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway, acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. 50 foot long rolls with smooth bottom side for heat welding to roof membrane.

1. Basis of Design: Firestone Building Products, Ultra PLY TPO Walkway Pad.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced. 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at

penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.



July 31, 2015 075423 - 5

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.

B. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

C. Install sound absorbing insulation specified in Section 05310 into cells of cellular, (acoustical) roof deck in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.

D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches (68 mm) or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction.

E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.

F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with insulation.

1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers, projections, and penetrations.

G. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type.

1. Fasten insulation according to requirements in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.

2. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.

3.4 MECHANICALLY FASTENED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Mechanically fasten membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.


July 31, 2015 075423 - 6

1. For in-splice attachment, install membranes roofing with long dimension perpendicular to steel roof deck flutes.

B. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

C. Mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.

D. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

E. In-Seam Attachment: Secure one edge of TPO sheet using fastening plates or metal battens centered within membrane seam and mechanically fasten TPO sheet to roof deck.

F. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of membrane roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet membrane.

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas. 3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.

G. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in place with clamping ring.

3.5 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.

E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.

3.6 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.


July 31, 2015 075423 - 7


A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

C. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

END OF SECTION 07 54 23

See Carlisle 20 year membrane warranty issued July 10, 2006 inserted after this Section.

Spokane Transit Authority Section 078100 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Applied Fireproofing

July 31, 2015 078100 - 1

SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes sprayed fire-resistive materials.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. SFRM: Sprayed fire-resistive materials.



B. Shop Drawings: Framing plans or schedules, or both, indicating the following:

1. Extent of fireproofing for each construction and fire-resistance rating. 2. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Minimum fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance rating of

each structural component and assembly. 4. Treatment of fireproofing after application.



B. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing.

C. Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing, from ICC-ES.

D. Field quality-control reports.


July 31, 2015 078100 - 2


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements.


A. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing from single source.

C. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise.

D. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos.

2.2 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS

A. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Material: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed, lightweight, dry formulation, complying with indicated fire-resistance design, and mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar before conveyance and application or conveyed in a dry state and mixed with atomized water at place of application.

1. Provide products from one of the following manufacturers: a. Carboline Company, a subsidiary of RPM International b. Grace Construction Products c. Isolatek International d. Pyrok, Inc.

2. Application: Designated for exterior use by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Bond Strength: Minimum 150-lbf/sq. ft. (7.18-kPa) cohesive and adhesive strength based on field testing according to ASTM E 736.

4. Density: Not less than density specified in the approved fire-resistance design, according to ASTM E 605.


July 31, 2015 078100 - 3

5. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to requirements of fire-resistance design or ASTM E 605, whichever is thicker, but not less than 0.375 inch (9 mm).

6. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 7. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing

agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 10 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 10 or less.

8. Compressive Strength: Minimum 100 lbf/sq. ft. (689 kPa) according to ASTM E 761. 9. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion according to ASTM E 937. 10. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to ASTM E 759. 11. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination according to

ASTM E 760. 12. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. (0.270 g/sq. m) in 24 hours

according to ASTM E 859. 13. Fungal Resistance: Treat products with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial

formulation to result in no growth on specimens per ASTM G 21. 14. Finish: Spray-textured finish.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.

B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with one or both of the following requirements:

1. Primer and substrate are identical to those tested in required fire-resistance design by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Primer's bond strength in required fire-resistance design complies with specified bond strength for fireproofing and with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on a series of bond tests according to ASTM E 736.

C. Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listings of another qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Metal Lath: Expanded metal lath fabricated from material of weight, configuration, and finish required, according to fire-resistance designs indicated and fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Include clips, lathing accessories, corner beads, and other anchorage devices required to attach lath to substrates and to receive fireproofing.

E. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer.


July 31, 2015 078100 - 4

F. Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire-resistance design indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer. Include pins and attachment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and according to each fire-resistance design.

1. Verify that substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure.

2. Verify that objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.

3. Verify that substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, or other suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing application.

B. Verify that concrete work on steel deck is complete before beginning fireproofing work.

C. Verify that roof construction, installation of rooftop HVAC equipment, and other related work are complete before beginning fireproofing work.

D. Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.

E. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during application.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing.

C. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing.

D. For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of


July 31, 2015 078100 - 5

fireproofing. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire-resistive products after application.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, sealers, topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work.

B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fireproofing.

1. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fireproofing are in place.

2. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireproofing until application of fireproofing is completed.

D. Metal Decks:

1. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal deck substrates until concrete topping, if any, is completed.

2. Do not apply fireproofing to underside of metal roof deck until roofing is completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fireproofing.

E. Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire-resistance design and fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for conditions of exposure and intended use. For auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

F. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. After the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

G. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected.

H. Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

I. For applications over encapsulant materials, including lockdown (post-removal) encapsulants, apply fireproofing that differs in color from that of encapsulant over which it is applied.

J. Where sealers are used, apply products that are tinted to differentiate them from fireproofing over which they are applied.


July 31, 2015 078100 - 6

K. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of fireproofing material and matching finish approved for required mockups.

L. Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions.

M. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications.

N. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes:

1. Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for each finish selected.

2. Spray-Textured Finish: Finish left as spray applied with no further treatment. 3. Rolled, Spray-Textured Finish: Even finish produced by rolling spray-applied finish with

a damp paint roller to remove drippings and excessive roughness. 4. Skip-Troweled Finish: Even leveled surface produced by troweling spray-applied finish

to smooth out the texture and neaten edges. 5. Skip-Troweled Finish with Corner Beads: Even, leveled surface produced by troweling

spray-applied finish to smooth out the texture, eliminate surface markings, and square off edges.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Test and inspect as required by the IBC, Subsection 1705.13, "Sprayed Fire-Resistant Materials."

B. Perform the tests and inspections of completed Work in successive stages. Do not proceed with application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design.

C. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest. 2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results

indicate insufficient thickness, and retest.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.


July 31, 2015 078100 - 7

B. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades.

D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction.

E. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 079200 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Joint Sealants

July 31, 2015 079200 - 1

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 4. Acoustical joint sealants.


1. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color.


A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

B. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:


July 31, 2015 079200 - 2

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

C. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article.

D. Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.

E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer.

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.


July 31, 2015 079200 - 3

4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

C. Low-Emitting Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

D. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class and uses.

2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Sealant Standard: Comply with ASTM C 834 for each product of this description indicated in the Latex Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3.

2.4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of the preceding types, as approved in


July 31, 2015 079200 - 4

writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry.


July 31, 2015 079200 - 5

c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do

not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.


July 31, 2015 079200 - 6

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per

Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.6 ELASTOMERIC JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Medium-Modulus Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Provide products complying with the following:

1. Products: Provide one of the following:

a. 795; Dow Corning. b. 895; Pecora Corporation. c. Spectrem 2; Tremco.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 50. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates

indicated, O.


July 31, 2015 079200 - 7

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, masonry, ceramic tile and wood.

6. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per ASTM C 1248.

7. Applications: Use in the following exterior and interior joints, except as noted otherwise:

a. Joints and recesses formed where frames and subsills of windows, doors, louvers and vents adjoin masonry, concrete or metal frames. Use sealant at both exterior and interior surfaces of exterior wall penetrations.

b. Expansion and control joints. c. Voids where items pass through exterior walls and where dis-similar building

envelope materials meet. d. Metal-to-metal joints where sealant is indicated or specified. e. Perimeter of frames at doors, windows and access panels which adjoin exposed

interior concrete and masonry surfaces. f. Joints of interior masonry walls and partitions which adjoin columns, pilasters,

concrete walls and exterior walls unless otherwise detailed. g. Joints between edge members for acoustical tile and adjoining vertical surfaces. h. Exposed joints within glazed systems and aluminum window framing systems.

B. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Provide products formulated with fungicide that are intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and temperature extremes, and that comply with the following:


a. 786 Mildew Resistant; Dow Corning. b. 898 Silicone Sanitary Sealant; Pecora Corporation. c. Tremsil 200 Tremco.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel and ceramic tile.

6. Applications: Use in the following interior joints located in wet areas, except as noted otherwise:

a. Joints between toilet fixtures and ceramic tile; joints between shower receptors and ceramic tile; joints formed where nonplaner tile surfaces meet.

b. Joints formed between tile floors and tile base cove; joints between tile and dissimilar materials; joints occurring where substrates change; joints in vertical surfaces of ceramic tile.

c. Behind escutcheon plates at valve pipe penetrations and showerheads in showers.


July 31, 2015 079200 - 8

C. Multicomponent or Single Component Pourable (Self Leveling) Urethane Sealant: Provide products complying with the following:


a. NR-200 Urexpan; Urexpan NR-201; Pecora Corporation. b. SL 2; SL 1; BASF Building Systems. c. Dymeric 240, 240FC, Vulkem 45, 45SSL; Tremco, Inc.

2. Type and Grade: M (multicomponent) or single component and P (pourable). 3. Class: 25 Minimum. 4. Use Related to Exposure: T (traffic) . 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated,

O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Aluminum coated with a high-performance coating, galvanized steel, brick, ceramic tile and wood.

6. Applications: Use in the following exterior and interior horizontal interior joints in traffic areas, except as noted otherwise:

a. Seats of metal thresholds for exterior doors. b. Control and expansion joints in floors, slabs, ceramic tile and walkways.

3.7 LATEX JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Latex Sealant: Provide products complying with the following:


a. AC-20; Pecora Corporation. b. Tremflex 834; Tremco.

2. Applications: Use in the following paintable interior joints, except as noted otherwise.

a. Joints formed where metal interior door and relight frames adjoin gypsum wallboard surface.

b. Small voids between walls or partitions and adjacent casework, shelving, built-in or surface-mounted equipment and fixtures and similar items.

c. Interior locations, not otherwise indicated or specified, where small voids exist between materials specified to be painted.


July 31, 2015 079200 - 9

B. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer’s standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Pecora Corporation: AC-20 FTR. b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. c. Tremco Inc.; Acoustical Sealant.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 081113 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Hollow metal Doors and Frames

July 31, 2015 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal work.


1. Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories.


July 31, 2015 081113 - 2

8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.


A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

B. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies.


A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group Company.

2. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group Company.

3. Steelcraft, Division of Ingersol Rand.

4. Republic Doors and Frames.

5. Fleming, a United Dominion Company.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.


July 31, 2015 081113 - 3

2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Lite Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9.

2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Standard-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 1.

1. Physical Performance: Level C according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors:

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). c. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.032 inch (0.8

mm). d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,

polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion.

3. Frames:

a. Materials: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm).

b. Sidelite and Transom Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door frame.

c. Construction: Full profile welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

C. Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Doors:


July 31, 2015 081113 - 4

a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). c. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0

mm). d. Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless. e. Core: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,

polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion.

3. Frames:

a. Materials: steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm). b. Sidelite and Transom Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent

door frame. c. Construction: Full profile welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.4 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick.

2. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

E. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.


July 31, 2015 081113 - 5

F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors:

1. Fire Door Cores: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated. 2. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3.2 mm in 51

mm). 3. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face

sheets. 4. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors with end closures or channels of

same material as face sheets. 5. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by

NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch (19 mm) beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency.

C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Sidelite and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.

5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:


July 31, 2015 081113 - 6

a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high.

b. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm)

from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c.

6. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches (1067 mm) wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions.

7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow-metal work.

2. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

3. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. 4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation

types indicated.

2.7 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.


July 31, 2015 081113 - 7

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Louvers: Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, which comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- (0.5-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick steel frame.

1. Sightproof Louver: Stationary louvers constructed with inverted-V or inverted-Y blades.

B. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.


July 31, 2015 081113 - 8

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames for doors, transoms, sidelites, borrowed lites, and other openings, of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as

necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber

insulation. 5. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled

expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

6. In-Place Metal or Wood-Stud Partitions: Secure slip-on drywall frames in place according to manufacturer's written instructions.

7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:


July 31, 2015 081113 - 9

a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

c. At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch (15.8 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm). d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or

minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. from each corner.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 083113 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Access Doors and Frames

July 31, 2015 083113 - 1

SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.



1. Include construction details materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 2. Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS


1. Jensen Industries; Div. of Broan-Nutone, LLC. 2. J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group. 3. Karp Associates, Inc. 4. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 5. Milcor Inc. 6. Nystrom, Inc.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet.


July 31, 2015 083113 - 2

1. Locations: Where required in walls and ceilings. 2. Door: Flush panel with a core of a mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a

minimum thickness of 0.036 inch (0.9 mm). 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick sheet metal with 1-inch- (25-mm-) wide,

surface-mounted trim. 4. Automatic Closer: Spring type. 5. Latch (At secure locations or in rooms not accessible to public or students): Self-latching

bolt operated by flush screwdriver. 6. Lock (At locations accessible to the public): Manufacturer’s standard key lock.

2.2 FIRE-RATED ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:

1. Description: Door face flush with frame, with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal or uninsulated; with exposed flange, self-closing door, and concealed hinge.

2. Locations: Wall. 3. Door Size: 24 x 36. 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than 2 hours. 5. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.036 inch (0.91 mm), 20 gage, factory primed. 6. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 7. Latch and Lock: Self-latching door hardware, operated by key.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

C. Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated.


July 31, 2015 083113 - 3

1. For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board and gypsum base securely attached to perimeter of frames.

2. For concealed flanges with plaster bead for full-bed plaster applications, provide zinc-coated expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead welded to perimeter of frames.

3. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing. 4. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors.

D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed.

1. For cylinder locks, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.

B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 084113 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts

July 31, 2015 084113 - 1

SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Exterior and interior manual-swing and power assisted entrance doors and door-frame units.

2. Interior storefront system. 3. Vertical sliding service window.


1. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for finished hardware that is not specified as part of this section.

2. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass installed in doors. 3. Division 08 Section “Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls” for assemblies surrounding

doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."


A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:

1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following:

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.


July 31, 2015 084113 - 2

c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing.

d. Glazing-to-glazing contact. e. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. g. Sealant failure. h. Failure of operating units.

B. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads:

a. Basic Wind Speed: 85 mph (38 m/s). b. Importance Factor: 1.15. c. Exposure Category: C.

2. Seismic Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Deflection of Framing Members:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), whichever is smaller.

D. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds.

E. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. (0.03 L/s per sq. m) of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

F. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 8.00 lbf/sq. ft. (384 Pa).

1. Maximum Water Leakage: According to AAMA 501.1. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior and water that cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes.


July 31, 2015 084113 - 3

G. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

H. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to AAMA 1503.

I. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having an average U-factor of not more than 0.69 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (3.92 W/sq. m x K) when tested according to AAMA 1503.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum-framed systems.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior.

2. For entrance doors, include hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, functions, quantities, and locations.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements.

C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.


July 31, 2015 084113 - 4



B. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project.

C. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

D. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.

E. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer.

F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering. d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures.


July 31, 2015 084113 - 5

e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. f. Failure of operating components.


B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Entry Vestibule Entrances

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Marlin Windows, Inc. Titan Wide Stile Door – 3/16” thick entrance doors. Subject to compliance with requirements and properties of the products listed, products by one of the following may be considered:

a. PPG Industries, Wide stile. b. Vistawall Archtiectural Products. c. Marlin Windows. d. U. S. Aluminum. e. Kawneer

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.


July 31, 2015 084113 - 6

2.3 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."


July 31, 2015 084113 - 7

2.4 ENTRANCE VESTIBULE DOOR SYSTEMS

A. Manufacturer’s Heavy Wall doors and frame for manual and automatic swing operation.

1. Door Construction: 2 inch (50.8 mm) overall thickness, with minimum 3/16-inch- (4.76-mm) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten cor-ners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incorpo-rate concealed tie rods.

a. Glass at exterior door vision lights to be 1” clear, insulated tempered glass. Glass at interior vestibule doors to be clear ¼” tempered single light.

2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch (127-mm) nominal width.

a. Optional 10 inch bottom rail.

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.

a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

B. Interior Doors: Manufacturer’s medium stile glazed doors, for manual swing operation at alu-minum doors indicated to be 1-3/4” thick.

1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch-(3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deep penetration and fillet welded or that incor-porate concealed tie rods.

2. Door Design: Medium stile and Rail; 3-5-inch (127-mm) nominal width.

a. Optional 10 inch bottom rail.

3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.

a. Glass at vision lights to be 1/4” clear, tempered glass. b. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.

C. Door Hardware: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."


July 31, 2015 084113 - 8

2.5 HARDWARE A. General: Refer to Division 8 Section "Finish Hardware" for requirements for hardware items

other than those indicated to be provided by the aluminum entrance manufacturer.

2.6 STOREFRONT

A. Product:

1. System 40 – 1 ¾” x 4 ½” for interior locations where shown.

B. Performance: Tested in accordance with AAMA 501 and meets the requirements of ASTM E 331 for water penetration, and ASTM E 330 for structural performance.

C. Glazing:

1. Accommodate ¼” clear glazing as specified in Division 08 Section “Glazing”.

2.7 ALUMINUM VERTICAL SLIDING SERVICE WINDOW

A. Acceptable Manufacturer’s

1. Basis of design: Design is based on medium-duty commercial aluminum (SW) series, vertical sliding service window manufactured by C.R. Laurence Co., Inc. (800)421-6144.

B. Materials

1. Frames: Aluminum frame modules shall be constructed of 6063-T5 extruded aluminum. Poly-pile weather stripping and slide locks. Overall frame sizes are to be in accordance with the contract drawings.

2. Finish: All aluminum to be clear anodized. 3. Glazing: The glazing is to be ¼” in thickness, tempered, glass. 4. Options: Keyed lock. 5. Windows exceeding 1050 square inches, (Width x Height) require concealed sash

balance at top of window frame.

2.8 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.


July 31, 2015 084113 - 9

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install

three silencers on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors.

D. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge.

2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.


A. Entry Vestibule Entrances

1. High-Performance Organic Finish: 3-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Color and Gloss: Match architect’s sample.

B. Interior Entrances and Storefront

1. Standard architectural Class II anodic color conforming to Aluminum Association AA-M12-C22-A31 for clear anodize.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



July 31, 2015 084113 - 10

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

D. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.

2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

E. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer.

1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading door edge.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 084229.23 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Sliding Automatic Entrances

July 31, 2015 084229.23 - 1

SECTION 084229.23 - SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes exterior and interior, sliding, power-operated automatic entrances.


1. Division 8 Section “Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts” for manual swing entrance doors and storefront framing.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AAADM: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers.

B. Activation Device: A control that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door operator to open the door.

C. IBC: International Building Code.

D. Safety Device: A control that, to avoid injury, prevents a door from opening or closing.

E. For automatic door terminology, refer to BHMA A156.10 for definitions of terms.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for automatic entrances.

2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For automatic entrances.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware mounting heights, and attachment details. 2. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly,

components, and location and size of each field connection. 3. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.


July 31, 2015 084229.23 - 2

4. Indicate locations of activation and safety devices. 5. Include hardware schedule and indicate hardware types, functions, quantities, and

locations.


D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For automatic entrances, safety devices, and control systems to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic entrances that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Faulty operation of operators, controls, and hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use.


B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.


July 31, 2015 084229.23 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE ASSEMBLIES

A. Source Limitations: Obtain sliding automatic entrances from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

C. Power-Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10.


A. General: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems capable of withstanding loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated without failure, based on testing manufacturer’s standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. Failure includes the following:

1. Air infiltration and water penetration exceeding specified limits. 2. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural

movement, to glazing units.

B. Glazing: Physically and thermally isolate glazing from framing members.

C. Dead Loads: Provide entrance- and storefront- system members that do not deflect an amount which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load.

1. Provide a minimum 1/8-inch (3.18-mm) clearance between members and top of glazing or other fixed part immediately below.

2. Provide a minimum 1/16-inch (1.59-mm) clearance between members and operable windows and doors.

D. Live Loads: Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, that accommodate the supporting structures’ deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads indicated without failure of materials or permanent deformation. 1. Storefront (IG500 Test): 2. Design 65 psf (1.59) 3. Structural +/- 97.5 psf (195 mph). 4. Doors (IG500 Test): 5. Design 65 psf (1.59) 6. Structural +/- 97.5 psf (195 mph).

E. Forced Entry Resistance: Shall be tested with a 300 lb. force applied to the active door panel simultaneously with a 150 lb. force applied in both perpendicular directions to the 300 lb. force.


July 31, 2015 084229.23 - 4

F. Blast Test: Shall be tested in accordance with DoD, GSA and ASTM test proceeds. Three (3) test units 96” x 96” made up of a 3’ x 7’ door, 5’ x 6’ sidelite, 5’ x 2’ sidelite and transom passed: 1. 4.4 psi 2. 32 psi – msec impulse 3. DoD response – High and medium 4. GSA response – Condition 1 and 2 5. ASTM response – No hazard and minimal hazard

G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

H. Operating Temperature Range: Automatic entrances shall operate within minus 20 to plus 122 deg F.

I. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq.ft (0.03 L/s per sq. m)Insert value of fixed entrance-system area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

J. Opening Force:

1. Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 50 lbf (222 N) required to manually set door in motion if power fails, and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) required to open door to minimum required width.

K. Entrapment-Prevention Force:

1. Power-Operated Sliding Doors: Not more than 30 lbf (133 N) required to prevent stopped door from closing.

2.3 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrances including doors, sidelites, framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators, controls, and accessories required for a complete installation.

B. All-Glass Sliding Telescoping Automatic Entrance:

1. Single- and Biparting-Sliding Units. Provide products from one of the following:

a. Besam Entrance Solutions: ASSA ABLOY b. DORMA Automatics c. Horton Automatics; a Division of Overhead Door Corp. d. Stanley Access Technologies

2. Configuration: Single-sliding door with one sliding leaf, transom, and sidelite.


July 31, 2015 084229.23 - 5

a. Traffic Pattern: Two way. b. Mounting: Between jambs.

3. Configuration: Biparting-sliding doors with two sliding leaves, transom, and sidelites on each side.

a. Traffic Pattern: Two way. b. Mounting: Between jambs.

4. Operator Features:

a. Power opening and closing. b. Drive System: Chain or belt. c. Adjustable opening and closing speeds. d. Adjustable hold-open time between zero and 30 seconds. e. Obstruction recycle. f. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator, key operated.

5. Sliding-Door Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Carrier assembly that allows vertical adjustment; consisting of nylon- or delrin-covered, ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a continuous roller track, or ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a nylon- or delrin-covered, continuous roller track. Support doors from carrier assembly by cantilever and pivot assembly.

a. Rollers: Minimum of two ball-bearing roller wheels and two antirise rollers for each active leaf.

6. Sliding-Door Threshold: Threshold members and bottom-guide-track system with stainless-steel, ball-bearing-center roller wheels.

a. Configuration: Saddle-type threshold across door opening and recessed guide-track system at sidelites.

7. Controls: Activation and safety devices according to BHMA standards.

a. Activation Device: Motion sensor mounted on each side of door header to detect pedestrians in activating zone and to open door.

b. Safety Device: Presence sensor mounted to underside of door header and two photoelectric beams mounted in sidelite jambs on one side of the door to detect pedestrians in presence zone and to prevent door from closing.

c. Sidelite Safety Device: Presence sensor, mounted above each sidelite on side of door opening through which doors travel, to detect obstructions and to prevent door from opening.

8. Finish: Finish framing, door(s), and header with high-performance organic finish (two-coat fluoropolymer).

a. Color: Match Architect's sample.


July 31, 2015 084229.23 - 6

2.4 ENTRANCE COMPONENTS

A. Stile and Rail Doors: 1-3/4-inch- (45-mm-) thick, glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are welded, or incorporate concealed tie-rods that span full length of top and bottom rails.

1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: , snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. 2. Stile Design: Wide stile, more than 4-inch (100-mm) nominal width. 3. Bottom Rail Design: 10-inch (254-mm) nominal height. 4. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail member for each door; match stile design and finish.

B. Sidelite(s) and Transom: 1-3/4-inch- (45-mm-) deep sidelite(s) and transom with minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members matching door design.

1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Same materials and design as for stile and rail door. 2. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: , snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. 3. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail members for each sidelite; match stile design.

C. Headers: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inch- (3.2-mm-) thick extruded aluminum and extending full width of automatic entrance units to conceal door operators and controls. Provide hinged or removable access panels for service and adjustment of door operators and controls. Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access.

1. Mounting: Concealed, with one side of header flush with framing. 2. Capacity: Capable of supporting doors up to 175 lb (79 kg) per leaf over spans up to 14

feet (4.3 m) without intermediate supports.

D. Brackets and Reinforcements: High-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

E. Signage: As required by cited BHMA standard.

1. Application Process: Door manufacturer's standard process. 2. Provide sign materials with instructions for field application after glazing is installed.

2.5 MATERIALS


1. Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 2. Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).

B. Steel Reinforcement: Reinforcement with corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Use surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.


July 31, 2015 084229.23 - 7

C. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

D. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness, in entrance manufacturer's standard thickness.

F. Glazing: As specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

G. Sealants and Joint Fillers: As specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

H. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout; complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; of consistency suitable for application.

I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

J. Fasteners and Accessories: Corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

2.6 DOOR OPERATORS AND CONTROLS

A. General: Provide operators and controls, which include activation and safety devices, according to BHMA standards, for condition of exposure, and for long-term, maintenance-free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated.

B. Door Operators: Provide door operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement.

1. Door Operator Performance: Door operators shall open and close doors and maintain them in fully closed position when subjected to Project's design wind loads.

2. Electromechanical Operators: Concealed, self-contained, overhead unit powered by fractional-horsepower, permanent-magnet dc motor; with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor; with solid-state microprocessor controller; UL 325; and with manual operation with power off.

C. Motion Sensors: Self-contained, K-band-frequency, microwave-scanner units; fully enclosed by its plastic housing; adjustable to provide detection-field sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10.

1. Provide capability for switching between bidirectional and unidirectional detection. 2. For one-way traffic, sensor on egress side shall not be active when doors are fully closed.

D. Presence Sensors: Self-contained, active-infrared scanner units; adjustable to provide detection-field sizes and functions required by BHMA A156.10. Sensors shall remain active at all times.

E. Photoelectric Beams: Pulsed infrared, sender-receiver assembly for recessed mounting. Beams shall not be active when doors are fully closed.

F. Key Switch: Recess-mounted, door-control switch with key-controlled actuator; enclosed in 2-by-4-inch (50-by-100-mm) junction box. Provide faceplate engraved with letters indicating switch functions.


July 31, 2015 084229.23 - 8

1. Face-Plate Material: Stainless steel as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Functions: Two-way automatic, hold open, one-way exit, and off. 3. Mounting: Recess mounted in door head.

G. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits, provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched, or bolted.

2.7 HARDWARE

A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance and hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to match door finish.

B. Deadlocks: Deadbolt operated by exterior cylinder with minimum 1-inch- (25-mm-) long throw bolt; BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.

1. Cylinders: As specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

C. Weather Stripping: Replaceable components.

1. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. General: Factory fabricate automatic entrance components to designs, sizes, and thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards.

1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing. 2. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or

discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

3. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws, finished to match framing, fabricated from stainless steel.

a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.

b. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.

4. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

B. Framing: Provide automatic entrances as prefabricated assemblies. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment to Project site.

1. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with welded or mechanical joints. Provide subframes and reinforcement as required for a complete system to support required loads.


July 31, 2015 084229.23 - 9

2. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces.

3. Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 4. Provide components with concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. 5. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce

hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 6. Fabricate exterior components to drain condensation and water passing joints within

system to the exterior. 7. Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly from

building structure. 8. Allow for thermal expansion of exterior units.

C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads and for installing hardware.

D. Metal Cladding: Factory-fabricated and installed metal cladding, completely covering all visible surfaces as part of prefabricated entrance assembly before shipment to Project site.

1. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed finish surfaces.

2. Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 3. Provide components with concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. 4. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce

hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 5. Fabricate exterior components to drain water passing joints and condensation and

moisture occurring or migrating within system to the exterior. 6. Allow for thermal expansion at exterior entrances.

E. Door Operators: Factory fabricated and installed in headers, including adjusting and testing.

F. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and type of glazing indicated, according to GANA's "Glazing Manual."

G. Hardware: Factory install hardware to greatest extent possible; remove only as required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.

1. Provide sliding-type weather stripping, mortised into door, at perimeter of doors.

H. Controls:

1. General: Factory install activation and safety devices in doors and headers as required by BHMA A156.10 for type of door and direction of travel.

2. Install photoelectric beams in vertical jambs of sidelites, with dimension above finished floor as follows:

a. Top Beam: 48 inches (1219 mm). b. Bottom Beam: 24 inches (610 mm).


July 31, 2015 084229.23 - 10

2.9 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

B. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise indicated.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic entrances.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of power connections before automatic entrance installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install automatic entrances according to manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel, including signage, controls, wiring, and connection to the building's power supply.

1. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight.

2. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

3. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating.

B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor securely in place.

1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. 2. Set headers, carrier assemblies, tracks, operating brackets, and guides level and true to

location with anchorage for permanent support. 3. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing

members, and moisture migrating within system to exterior. 4. Level recesses for recessed thresholds using nonshrink grout.

C. Door Operators: Connect door operators to electrical power distribution system.


July 31, 2015 084229.23 - 11

D. Access-Control Devices: Connect access-control devices to access-control system as specified in Section 281300 "Access Control."

E. Controls: Install and adjust activation and safety devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel. Connect control wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

F. Guide Rails: Install rails according to BHMA A156.10, including Appendix A, and manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.

G. Glazing: Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."

H. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to provide weathertight installation.

1. Set thresholds and bottom-guide-track system, framing members and flashings in full sealant bed.

2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant.

I. Signage: Apply signage on both sides of each door as required by cited BHMA standard for direction of pedestrian travel.

J. Wiring within Automatic Entrance Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's written limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.


A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Test and inspect each automatic entrance, using AAADM inspection forms, to determine compliance of installed systems with applicable BHMA standards.

B. Automatic entrances will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware, moving parts, door operators, and controls to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer; comply with requirements of applicable BHMA standards.

1. Adjust exterior doors for weathertight closure.

B. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles).


July 31, 2015 084229.23 - 12

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean glass and metal surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match original finish.

1. Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" for cleaning and maintaining glass.

3.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include three months' full maintenance by skilled employees of automatic entrance Installer. 1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working

hours. 2. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week, emergency callback service.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic entrances.

END OF SECTION 084229.23

Spokane Transit Authority Section 084413 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls

July 31, 2015 084413 - 1

SECTION 084413 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Field-glazed aluminum curtain-wall assemblies.


1. Division 8 Section “Aluminum Framed Entrances and Storefronts” for doors.


A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing manufacturer's standard of structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1. Structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls shall withstand movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following:

a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. e. Failure of operating units.

B. Delegated Design: Design structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.


July 31, 2015 084413 - 2

D. Structural-Test Performance: Provide structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

E. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane not exceeding L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), whichever is smaller.

3. Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, limit deflection to 2 times the length of cantilevered member divided by 175.

F. Seismic Performance: Structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to as noted on the drawings.

G. Story Drift: Accommodate design displacement of adjacent stories indicated.

1. Design Displacement: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Test Performance: Meets criteria for passing based on building occupancy type when

tested according to AAMA 501.4 at design displacement and 1.5 times the design displacement.

H. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft. (480 Pa).

I. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 at dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft. (480 Pa).

1. Maximum Water Leakage: According to AAMA 501.1. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior.

J. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures:

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

2. Test Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F (24 deg C).


July 31, 2015 084413 - 3

3. Test Performance: No buckling, stress on glass, sealant failure, or excess stress on framing, anchors, and fasteners and no reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.

K. Energy Performance: Structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls shall have certified and labeled energy performance ratings according to NFRC.

1. U-Factor: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC 100 to achieve a cumulative U Factor of 0.38 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F for curtain wall.

2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.40 as determined according to NFRC 200.

3. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area as determined according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa).

4. Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified CR rating of no less than 60 as determined according to AAMA 1503.

L. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure.

1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no sealant material behind.

2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength.

M. Structural-Sealant Joints:

1. Designed to carry gravity loads of glazing. 2. Designed to produce tensile or shear stress of less than 20 psi (138 kPa). 3. Design reviewed and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.

2. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls, showing the following:

a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions.


July 31, 2015 084413 - 4

d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage. f. Resubmit Shop Drawings with changes made to details of structural-sealant-glazed

curtain walls, to successfully complete preconstruction testing.


D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

G. Energy-Performance Certificates: For structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified preconstruction testing agency, for structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls, indicating compliance with performance requirements.

I. Maintenance Data: For structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls to include in maintenance manuals. Include ASTM C 1401 recommendations for postinstallation-phase quality-control program.

J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.



B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for assemblies' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.

1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

C. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401 for design and installation of structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls.

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."


July 31, 2015 084413 - 5

E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Assembly Warranty: Standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace components of structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components.


B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Marlin Windows System 60 exterior glazed or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Arcadia, Inc. 2. EFCO Corporation. 3. TRACO. 4. United States Aluminum. 5. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company.


July 31, 2015 084413 - 6

6. Wausau Window and Wall Systems. 7. YKK AP America Inc. 8. Kawneer

2.2 MATERIALS


1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.3 FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's 6” and 7-1/2” formed- or extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

B. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.

2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing

system.

C. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors, with minimum adjustment of 1 inch (25.4 mm), that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish and are compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.

1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.

D. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.


July 31, 2015 084413 - 7

E. Framing Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealants with VOC content of 250g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24).

2.4 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Division 8 Section "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets, Spacers, Setting Blocks, Sealant Backings, and Bond Breakers: Manufacturer's standard permanent, nonmigrating types compatible with sealants and suitable for joint movement and assembly performance requirements.

C. Glazing Gaskets, Spacers, Setting Blocks, Sealant Backings, and Bond Breakers: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

D. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type, and as follows:

1. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer for use in curtain-wall assembly indicated.

a. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 100 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O; chemically curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and structural-sealant-glazed curtain-wall manufacturers for this use.

a. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

b. Color: Matching structural sealant.

2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.

B. Cleaning Agent and Cloth: As recommended by structural-sealant manufacturer.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.


July 31, 2015 084413 - 8

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 5. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior or interior as indicated. Include

accommodations for using temporary support device (dutchman) to retain glazing in place while sealant cures.

7. Components curved to indicated radii. 8. Internal guttering systems or other means to drain water passing joints, condensation

occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within structural-sealant-glazed curtain wall to exterior.

D. Factory-Assembled Frame Units:

1. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 2. Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's

written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. 3. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces. 4. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. 5. Install glazing to comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing."

E. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.


A. High-Performance Organic Finish: Three-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: Match Architect’s sample..


A. Perform quality-control procedures complying with ASTM C 1401 recommendations including, but not limited to, assembly material qualification procedures, sealant testing, and assembly fabrication reviews and checks.


July 31, 2015 084413 - 9

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmoving joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion, electrolytic

deterioration, and impediments to movement of joints. 6. Weld components in concealed locations to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish.

Protect glazing surfaces from welding. 7. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer, applying sealant or tape, or installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls to exterior.

D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.

E. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." Prepare surfaces that will contact structural sealant according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to ensure compatibility and adhesion. Preparation includes, but is not limited to, cleaning and priming surfaces.

F. Install weatherseal sealant according to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erection Tolerances: Install to comply with the following nonaccumulating maximum tolerances:


July 31, 2015 084413 - 10

1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6 mm in 12 m). 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3 mm in 6 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6 mm in 12 m). 3. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch (12.7 to 25.4 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).

c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch (25.4 mm) wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch (6 mm).

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.7 m); 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) over total length.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 087100 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Door Hardware

July 31, 2015 087100 - 1

SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for hardware used with hollow metal frames.

2. Division 8 Section "Wood Doors" for factory prefitting and factory premachining of doors for door hardware.

3. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Storefronts" for hardware used with aluminum doors and frames.

4. Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for locks used with casework doors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification sections.

1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into "hardware sets" indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on

floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials.



July 31, 2015 087100 - 2

A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer.

B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project and that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant (AHC) who is available to Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation.

C. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM, or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels. If automatic self-latching bolts, coordinators, and astragals are required they shall be furnished.

D. Submit fire test data showing compliance with UBC Std. 7-2 and supplemental “S” label requirements.

1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING

A. Tag each item, or package separately, with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT HANDLING:

A. Tag each item or package separately, with identification related to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

B. Packaging of hardware is responsibility of supplier. As material is received by hardware supplier from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate door number to match door numbers of approved hardware schedule.

C. Inventory hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that the count is correct.

D. Deliver individually packaged items at the proper times to the proper locations (shop or project site) for installation.

E. Provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to the project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items which are not immediately replaceable, so that completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses, both before and after installation.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS


July 31, 2015 087100 - 3

A. The numbers shown in the hardware groups are taken from the catalogs of the following manufacturers and are for the purpose of establishing quality, design, function and finish. Except as listed, no substitutes will be allowed, unless approved by the architect prior to bid opening. No substitutions will be allowed after bid opening. Requests for approval must be made to the architect. All substitutions must be from hardware distributors, not factory representatives.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Butts and Hinges:

a. Bommer Industries, Inc. b. Hager Hinge Co. c. Ives, Div. Ingersoll-Rand d. McKinney Products Co. e. Stanley Hardware, Div. Stanley Works.

2. Locks:

a. Schlage Lock, Div. Ingersoll-Rand

3. Cylinders:

a. Schlage Lock, Div. Ingersoll-Rand

4. Bolts:

a. Ives, Div. Ingersoll-Rand b. Rockwood Manufacturing Co. c. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company (Trimco).

5. Overhead Closers:

a. LCN Closers, Div. Ingersoll-Rand

6. Door Control Devices:


7. Door Trim Units:


8. Door Stripping and Seals:

a. National Guard Products, Inc.


July 31, 2015 087100 - 4

b. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. Reese Enterprises, Inc.

9. Exit Devices:

a. Sargent Manufacturing Company b. Von Duprin, Div. Ingersoll-Rand

10. Auto Door Operators:

a. LCN Closers, Div. Ingersoll-Rand

2.3 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION:

A. Hand of Door: Drawings show direction of slide, swing or hand of each door leaf. Furnish each item of hardware for proper installation and operation of door movement as shown.

B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized) quality than specified standard applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI A156 series standard for each type hardware item and with ANSI A156.18 for finish designation indicated. Do not furnish "optional" materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified.

C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware which has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.

D. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of such other work as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish.

E. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed when door is closed, except when no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work, except where it is not feasible to adequately reinforce the work. In such cases, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.

F. Tools and Maintenance Instructions for Maintenance: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of finish hardware.

2.4 HINGES, BUTTS AND PIVOTS:

A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template produced units.


July 31, 2015 087100 - 5

B. Screws: Furnish Phillips flat-head machine screws for installation of units, except furnish Phillips flat-head wood screws for installation of units into wood. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.

C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows:

1. Steel Hinges: Steel pins. 2. Non-ferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins. 3. Out-swinging Lockable Doors: Non-removable pins. 4. Interior Doors: Non-rising pins. 5. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where

hospital tip (HT) indicated.

D. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than one pair of hinges for each door up to 60" in height. Furnish one each additional hinge for every additional 30" or fraction thereof.

E. Continuous Hinges: Provide heavy duty full mortise type continuous hinges at all exterior openings and where noted in hardware sets.

2.5 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING:

A. General: Supplier will meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain final instructions in writing.

B. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required (master, grandmaster or great-grandmaster), integrated with the existing system.

1. Provide Schlage Primus Quad cylinders for all exterior doors

2. Provide Schlage standard keyway cylinders at all interior doors, keyway to be determined.

C. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass/bronze, stainless steel or nickel silver.

D. Comply with Owner's instructions for master keying, and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change keys for each lock which is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. Construction Master Key all locks or provide temporary cylinders for use during the construction period.

E. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel and silver only.

F. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock; 5 master keys for each master system; and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system.

1. Deliver permanent keys to Owner or Owner's representative.

G. Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, tags with self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150% of the number of locks required for the project.


July 31, 2015 087100 - 6

1. Provide hinged-panel type cabinet, for wall mounting, similar to Telkee AWC-150S.

2.6 LOCKS, LATCHES AND BOLTS:

A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware.

1. Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts, except where special threshold construction provides non-recessed strike for bolt.

B. Lock Throw: Provide 1/2" minimum throw of latchbolts on single doors, 1" minimum throw of deadbolts. Provide 3/4" minimum throw of latchbolts on UL rated pairs of doors where required by code.

C. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2" diameter rods of brass, bronze or stainless steel, with minimum 12" long rod door doors up to 7'-0" in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 7'-0" in height.

D. Exit Device Dogging: Except on fire-rated doors, wherever closers are provided on doors equipped with exit devices, equip the units with a keyed dogging device to hold the push bar down and the latch bolt in the open position.

E. Shim Kits: On doors with vision panels extending below the exit device mounting height, provide shim kits to space the exit device away from the door sufficient distance to clear the vision panel.

2.7 PUSH/PULL UNITS:

A. Exposed fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for installation; through-bolted for match pairs, but not for single units.

2.8 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES:

A. Size of units. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit, depending upon size of door, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers except as otherwise noted. Furnish drop plates and accessories as required for project conditions.

2.9 DOOR TRIM UNITS:

A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units (kick plates, edge trim, viewers, knockers, mail drops and similar units); either machine screws or self-tapping screws.

B. Fabricate protection plates (armor, kick or mop) not more than 2" less than door width on stop side and not more than 1/2' less than door width on pull side, x the height indicated.


July 31, 2015 087100 - 7

1. Plastic Plates: Plastic laminate (polyester), 1/8" (0.125") thick, beveled on all four edges.

2.10 WEATHERSTRIPPING:

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide continuous weatherstripping at each edge of every exterior door leaf. Provide type, sizes and profiles shown or scheduled. Provide non-corrosive fasteners as recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.

B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stock maintained by manufacturer.

2.11 THRESHOLDS:

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size and profile as shown or scheduled.

2.12 HARDWARE FINISHES:

A. Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest extent possible, and except as otherwise indicated. Reduce differences in color and textures as much as commercially possible where the base metal or metal forming process is different for individual units of hardware exposed at the same door or opening. In general, match items to the manufacturer's standard finish for the latch and lock set (or push-pull units) for color and texture.

B. Provide finishes which match those established by BHMA or, if none established, match the Architect's sample.

C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standard, but in no case less than specified for the applicable units of hardware by referenced standards.

D. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are those listed in ANSI A156.18 "Materials & Finishes Standard", including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes shown by certain manufacturers for their products.

E. Hardware in general to be US26D. Lock trim to be 626.

Door closers to be in lacquered finish to match other hardware.

2.12 HARDWARE SETS

A. Hardware sets indicate quantity, item, manufacturer and product designation, size, and finish or color, as applicable.

HW 01 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 30" X 2" LDW 630 IVE


July 31, 2015 087100 - 8

BAL OF HDWE RELOCATED HW 02 3 EA HINGE BB5004-545 652 BOM 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080P 06A 626 SCH 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 30" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS402CCV 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW 03 3 EA HINGE BB5000-450 652 BOM 1 EA PRIVACY LOCK L9040 06A 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS402CCV 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW 04 3 EA HINGE BB5000-450 652 BOM 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080P 06A 626 SCH 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS402CCV 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW 05 3 EA HINGE BB5004-545 652 BOM 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080P 06A 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211-FSE 630 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4011 DEL 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 30" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS402CCV 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 --- VON ACCESS CONTROL BY OTHERS HW 06 3 EA HINGE BB5000-450 652 BOM 1 EA OFFICE LOCK L9050P 06A 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS402CCV 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW 07 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE CFM83SLFHD1 628 PEM 2 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9949EO 626 VON 2 EA DOOR PULLS HD8190-0 630 IVE 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 AVB SCUSH 689 LCN 1 SET SEALS S88D DKB PEM 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 315CN AL PEM 1 EA THRESHOLD 171AK AL PEM


July 31, 2015 087100 - 9

HW 08 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE CFM83SLFHD1 628 PEM 2 EA DUMMY PANIC 330EO 626 VON 2 EA DOOR PULLS HD8190-0 630 IVE 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN HW 09 ALL HDWE BY DR MFG HW 10 1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE CFM83SLFHD1 628 PEM 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 99EO 626 VON 1 EA DOOR PULLS HD8190-0 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 AVB SCUSH 689 LCN 1 SET SEALS S88D DKB PEM 1 EA DOOR SWEEP 315CN AL PEM 1 EA THRESHOLD 171AK AL PEM HW 11 1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE CFM83SLFHD1 628 PEM 1 EA DUMMY PANIC 330EO 626 VON 1 EA DOOR PULLS HD8190-0 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 689 LCN HW 12 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE CFM83SLFHD1 628 PEM 1 EA 3-POINT DEADBOLT MS1850 X 4015 X 4085 628 ADA 2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-013 626 SCH 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 AVB SCUSH 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS402CCV 626 IVE 1 SET SEALS S88D DKB PEM 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 315CN AL PEM 1 EA THRESHOLD 171AK AL PEM HW 13 3 EA HINGE BB5000-450N 652 BOM 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080P 06A 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211-FSE 630 VON 1 EA AUTOMATIC OPERATOR 9142 689 LCN 1 EA ACTUATOR 856 630 LCN 1 EA MOUNTING BOX 868F --- LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS402CCV 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 --- VON ACCESS CONTROL BY OTHERS


July 31, 2015 087100 - 10

HW 14 3 EA HINGE BB5000-450 652 BOM 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080P 06A 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211-FSE 630 VON 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS402CCV 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 --- VON 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 --- VON HW 15 1 EA ANCHOR PIVOT 7004-045 652 BOM 3 EA HINGE BB5000-450 652 BOM 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080P 06A 626 SCH 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW 630 IVE 1 EA OVERHEAD STOP 900S 652 GLY 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW 16 3 EA HINGE BB5000-450 652 BOM 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080P 06A 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211-FSE 630 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN 1 EA WALL STOP WS402CCV 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 --- VON ACCESS CONTROL BY OTHERS HW 17 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE CFM83SLFHD1 628 PEM 2 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9949EO 626 VON 2 EA DOOR PULLS HD8190-0 630 IVE 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 689 LCN HW 18 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE CFM83SLFHD1 628 PEM 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9949NL-OP 626 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9949EO 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH 2 EA DOOR PULLS HD8190-0 630 IVE 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 SCUSH 689 LCN HW 19 3 EA HINGE BB5000-450 652 BOM 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070P 06A 626 SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS402CCV 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE


July 31, 2015 087100 - 11

HW 20 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE CFM83SLFHD1 628 PEM 1 EA 3-POINT DEADBOLT MS1850 X 4015 X 4085 628 ADA 2 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-013 626 SCH 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN 2 EA WALL STOP WS402CCV 626 IVE HW 21 6 EA HINGE BB5000-450N 652 BOM 2 EA FLUSHBOLT FB458 626 IVE 1 EA DP STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA OFFICE LOCK L9050P 06A 626 SCH 2 EA WALL STOP WS402CCV 626 IVE 2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE HW 22 1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE CFM83SLFHD1 X CC8-SER 628 PEM 1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE CFM83SLFHD1 628 PEM 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE EL9949NL-OP 626 VON 1 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9949EO 626 VON 1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-057 626 SCH 2 EA DOOR PULLS HD8190-0 630 IVE 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN 2 EA WALL STOP WS402CCV 626 IVE 1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS914 --- VON ACCESS CONTROL BY OTHERS HW 23 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE CFM83SLFHD1 628 PEM 2 EA PANIC HARDWARE 9949EO 626 VON 2 EA DOOR PULLS HD8190-0 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 AVB SCUSH 689 LCN 1 SET SEALS S88D DKB PEM 2 EA DOOR SWEEP 315CN AL PEM 1 EA THRESHOLD 171AK AL PEM EXISTING ADA OPERATOR REUSED HW 24 2 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE CFM83SLFHD1 628 PEM 2 EA DUMMY PANIC 330EO 626 VON 2 EA DOOR PULLS HD8190-0 630 IVE 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN EXISTING ADA OPERATOR REUSED HW 25 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080P 06A 626 SCH 1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211-FSE 630 VON 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA 689 LCN


July 31, 2015 087100 - 12

1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 --- VON BAL OF HDWE EXISTING ACCESS CONTROL BY OTHERS HW 26 1 EA DEADBOLT MS1850S-050 628 ADA 1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-013 626 SCH 1 EA T-TURN CYLINDER 7181TK 626 KA ALL OTHER HDWE BY DR MFG PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

Mount hardware units at heights indicated in Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed by Architect.

Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protections with finishing work specified in the Division-9 sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

Drill and counter sink units which are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards.

Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant.

3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN:

Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installations is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustments of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilation equipment.

Instruct Owner's personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware finish during the final adjustment of hardware.

Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the acceptance of hardware in each area, the Installer, accompanied by the representative of the latch and lock manufacturer, shall return to the project and re-adjust every item of hardware to restore proper function of doors and hardware. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. Replace hardware items which have deteriorated or failed due to faulty


Westview Elementary School Hardware Spokane Public Schools 08 71 00- 13 ALSC Project No. 0969

design, materials, or installation of hardware units. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware.

END SECTION 087100

Spokane Transit Authority Section 088000 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Glazing

July 31, 2015 088000 - 1

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Doors. 2. Storefront and curtainwall framing. 3. Glazed entrances. 4. Interior borrowed lites.


1. Division 08 Section "Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts" 2. Division 10 Section “Miscellaneous Specialties” for decorative film on glass. 3. Division 08 Section “Sliding Aluminum Entrances”.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.


July 31, 2015 088000 - 2

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.


A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glass Samples: For each type of the following products; 12 inches (300 mm) square.

1. Insulating glass.

C. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For installers and manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-coated, low-e coatings.

B. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for insulating glass.

D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

C. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain laminated glass and insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

D. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.

E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's "Glazing Manual."

2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."


July 31, 2015 088000 - 3

F. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

G. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.


B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within


July 31, 2015 088000 - 4

specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.

B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick unless otherwise noted.

2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite. 4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K). 5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,

according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass (Symbol F): ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass (Symbol T): ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.


July 31, 2015 088000 - 5

2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.

C. Laminated Glass (Symbol L): ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.

1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written recommendations.

2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements.

3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.

D. Insulating-Glass Units (Symbol IG): Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified.

E. Basis of Specification: Pilkington Eclipse Advantage EverGreen Low-E. Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article.

1. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Thickness of Each Lite: ¼ inch. 3. Interspace Content: Argon. 4. Indoor Lite: Clear Float Glass. 5. Outdoor Lite: Tinted Float Glass.

a. Low E Coating on #2 surface.

6. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) on inside and outside light where safety glass is required.

F. Performance: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Visible Light Transmittance (Tv): No less than 43%. 2. Winter U-Value: No greater than 0.31. 3. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): No greater than 0.29. 4. Reflectance Visible Light-Out: No greater than 17%.

G. Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C1048, Type I, Condition B, Quality-Q3.

1. Color to match existing spandrel glass – match Architect’s sample. 2. Thickness: 1/4 inch.

2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,


July 31, 2015 088000 - 6

and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Sealants used inside the weatherproofing system, shall have a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer’s standard chemically curing elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that comply with ASTM C 920 requirements including those referencing ASTM classifications for Type, Grade, Class and Uses.

C. Secondary Seal (Weatherseal): Silicone sealant secondary seals shall be compatible with structural silicone sealant (if any) used. The weatherseal shall accommodate a 50 percent increase or decrease of joint width as measured at time of application according to ASTM C 719. Provide backer rod as recommended by the manufacturer.

2.4 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.

2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with

a full bead of liquid sealant.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.


July 31, 2015 088000 - 7

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.


July 31, 2015 088000 - 8

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.


July 31, 2015 088000 - 9

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.


A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

3.7 GLASS SCHEDULE

SYMBOL TYPE LOCATION (Where indicated and: )

F Float Glass Typical interior ¼" Clear except where otherwise noted


July 31, 2015 088000 - 10

T/L Safety Glass Doors & where required by IBC ¼" Clear 2406. L at shelving and at display Safety Glass case doors and fixed panels. ¼” 3/16” Clear laminated glass shelves.

IG 1" insulating, Exterior, typical except where otherwise Clear, low E coated indicated. Tempered, Low E coated where required by IBC 2406 5/8" thick in doors. Frosted Glass ¼” Interior relights panels below 4’ AFF, Satin Film Tempered. Install surface film on Office side. S Sparndrel ¼” Kind HS heat treated float glass.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 089119 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Fixed Louvers

July 31, 2015 089119 - 1

SECTION 089119 - FIXED LOUVERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Fixed, [extruded-aluminum] [and] [formed-metal] louvers. 2. Fixed, formed-metal acoustical louvers.


1. Section 081113 "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for louvers in hollow-metal doors. 2. Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors" for louvers in flush wood doors. 3. Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" for field painting louvers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal).

C. Vertical Louver: Louver with vertical blades (i.e., the axes of the blades are vertical).

D. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.

E. Wind-Driven-Rain-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven rain performance, as determined by testing according to AMCA 500-L.



1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing.


July 31, 2015 089119 - 2

1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion.

2. Show mullion profiles and locations.

C. Samples: For each type of metal finish required.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural[ and seismic] performance requirements, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.


A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed according to AMCA 500-L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver and showing compliance with performance requirements specified.

B. Windborne-debris-impact-resistance test reports.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 3. AWS D1.6/D1.6M, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers from single source from a single manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish.


A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using structural[ and seismic] performance requirements and design criteria indicated.


July 31, 2015 089119 - 3

B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver-blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building.

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures as indicated on Drawings. 2. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure of [20 lbf/sq. ft. (957 Pa)] [30

lbf/sq. ft. (1436 Pa)] <Insert value>, acting inward or outward. 3. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on pressures indicated below:

a. Corner Zone: Within <Insert distance> of building corners, uniform pressure of <Insert design wind pressure>, acting inward, and <Insert design wind pressure>, acting outward.

b. Other Than Corner Zone: Uniform pressure of <Insert design wind pressure>, acting inward, and <Insert design wind pressure>, acting outward.

C. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Louvers located within 30 feet (9.1 m) of grade shall pass [basic] [enhanced]-protection, large-missile testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for [Wind Zone 1] [Wind Zone 2] [Wind Zone 3] [Wind Zone 4] when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than louvers indicated for use on Project.

D. Seismic Performance: Louvers, including attachments to other construction, shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to [ASCE/SEI 7] <Insert requirement>.

1. Design earthquake spectral response acceleration, short period (Sds) for Project is <Insert value>.

2. Component Importance Factor: [1.5] [1.0].

E. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.

F. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change (Range): [120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces] <Insert temperature range>.

G. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.

2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS

A. Horizontal, Nondrainable-Blade Louver <Insert drawing designation>:



July 31, 2015 089119 - 4

2. Louver Depth: [2 inches (50 mm)] [4 inches (100 mm)] [6 inches (150 mm)] <Insert dimension>.

3. Blade Profile: [Plain blade without] [Blade with] center baffle. 4. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than [0.080 inch (2.03 mm)] [0.060 inch

(1.52 mm) for blades and 0.080 inch (2.03 mm) for frames]. 5. Mullion Type: [Exposed] [Semirecessed] [Fully recessed]. 6. Louver Performance Ratings:

a. Free Area: Not less than [7.5 sq. ft. (0.70 sq. m)] [8.0 sq. ft. (0.74 sq. m)] [8.5 sq. ft. (0.79 sq. m)] <Insert value> for 48-inch- (1220-mm-) wide by 48-inch- (1220-mm-) high louver.

b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than [700 fpm (3.6 m/s)] [750 fpm (3.8 m/s)] [800 fpm (4.1 m/s)] [850 fpm (4.3 m/s)] [900 fpm (4.6 m/s)] [950 fpm (4.8 m/s)] <Insert value>.

c. Air Performance: Not more than [0.10-inch wg (25-Pa)] <Insert value> static pressure drop at [650-fpm (3.3-m/s)] [700-fpm (3.6-m/s)] [750-fpm (3.8-m/s)] <Insert value> free-area [exhaust] [intake] velocity.

B. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver <Insert drawing designation>:


2. Louver Depth: [4 inches (100 mm)] [6 inches (150 mm)] <Insert dimension>. 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than [0.080 inch (2.03 mm)] [0.060 inch

(1.52 mm) for blades and 0.080 inch (2.03 mm) for frames]. 4. Mullion Type: Exposed. 5. Louver Performance Ratings:

a. Free Area: Not less than [7.0 sq. ft. (0.65 sq. m)] [7.5 sq. ft. (0.70 sq. m)] [8.0 sq. ft. (0.74 sq. m)] [8.5 sq. ft. (0.79 sq. m)] <Insert value> for 48-inch- (1220-mm-) wide by 48-inch- (1220-mm-) high louver.

b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than [900 fpm (4.6 m/s)] [950 fpm (4.8 m/s)] [1000 fpm (5.1 m/s)] [1050 fpm (5.3 m/s)] [1100 fpm (5.6 m/s)] <Insert value>.

c. Air Performance: Not more than [0.10-inch wg (25-Pa)] <Insert value> static pressure drop at [700-fpm (3.6-m/s)] [750-fpm (3.8-m/s)] [800-fpm (4.1-m/s)] [850-fpm (4.3-m/s)] <Insert value> free-area [exhaust] [intake] velocity.

d. Air Performance: Not more than [0.15-inch wg (37-Pa)] <Insert value> static pressure drop at [900-fpm (4.6-m/s)] [950-fpm (4.8-m/s)] [1000-fpm (5.1-m/s)] <Insert value> free-area [exhaust] [intake] velocity.

6. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

C. Horizontal, Continuous-Line, Drainable-Blade Louver <Insert drawing designation>: Drainable-blade louver with blade gutters (drains) in rear two-thirds of blades only and with semirecessed mullions capable of collecting and draining water from blades.


2. Louver Depth: [6 inches (150 mm)] <Insert dimension>. 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch (2.03 mm).


July 31, 2015 089119 - 5

4. Louver Performance Ratings:

a. Free Area: Not less than [7.8 sq. ft. (0.72 sq. m)] <Insert value> for 48-inch- (1220-mm-) wide by 48-inch- (1220-mm-) high louver.

b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than [850 fpm (4.3 m/s)] <Insert value>.

c. Air Performance: Not more than [0.10-inch wg (25-Pa)] <Insert value> static pressure drop at [800-fpm (4.1-m/s)] <Insert value> free-area [exhaust] [intake] velocity.

D. Horizontal, Wind-Driven-Rain-Resistant Louver <Insert drawing designation>:


2. Louver Depth: [4 inches (100 mm)] [5 inches (125 mm)] [7 inches (175 mm)] [8 inches (200 mm)] [9 inches (225 mm)] <Insert dimension>.

3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than [0.080 inch (2.03 mm)] [0.060 inch (1.52 mm) for blades and 0.080 inch (2.03 mm) for frames].



b. Air Performance: Not more than [0.10-inch wg (25-Pa)] <Insert value> static pressure drop at [600-fpm (3.0-m/s)] [700-fpm (3.6-m/s)] [800-fpm (4.1-m/s)] <Insert value> free-area [exhaust] [intake] velocity.

c. Wind-Driven Rain Performance: Not less than [99] [95] [80] <Insert number> percent effectiveness when subjected to a rainfall rate of [3 inches (75 mm) per hour and a wind speed of 29 mph (13 m/s)] [8 inches (200 mm) per hour and a wind speed of 50 mph (22.4 m/s)] at a core-area intake velocity of [300 fpm (1.5 m/s)] [400 fpm (2.0 m/s)] [500 fpm (2.5 m/s)] <Insert value>.


E. Vertical, Wind-Driven-Rain-Resistant Louver <Insert drawing designation>:


2. Louver Depth: [4 inches (100 mm)] [6 inches (150 mm)] [8 inches (200 mm)] [9 inches (225 mm)] [12 inches (300 mm)] <Insert dimension>.

3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than [0.080 inch (2.03 mm)] [0.060 inch (1.52 mm) for blades and 0.080 inch (2.03 mm) for frames].



b. Air Performance: Not more than [0.10-inch wg (25-Pa)] <Insert value> static pressure drop at [600-fpm (3.0-m/s)] [700-fpm (3.6-m/s)] [800-fpm (4.1-m/s)] <Insert value> free-area [exhaust] [intake] velocity.


July 31, 2015 089119 - 6

c. Wind-Driven Rain Performance: Not less than 99 percent effectiveness when subjected to a rainfall rate of [3 inches (75 mm) per hour and a wind speed of 29 mph (13 m/s)] [8 inches (200 mm) per hour and a wind speed of 50 mph (22.4 m/s)] at a core-area intake velocity of [300 fpm (1.5 m/s)] [400 fpm (2.0 m/s)] [500 fpm (2.5 m/s)] <Insert value>.


F. Horizontal, Sightproof, Drainable-Blade Louver <Insert drawing designation>:


2. Louver Depth: [5 inches (125 mm)] <Insert dimension>. 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than [0.080 inch (2.03 mm)] [0.060 inch

(1.52 mm) for blades and 0.080 inch (2.03 mm) for frames]. 4. Mullion Type: Exposed. 5. Louver Performance Ratings:

a. Free Area: Not less than [8.3 sq. ft. (0.77 sq. m)] <Insert value> for 48-inch- (1220-mm-) wide by 48-inch- (1220-mm-) high louver.

b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than [750 fpm (3.8 m/s)] [950 fpm (4.8 m/s)] <Insert value>.

c. Air Performance: Not more than [0.10-inch wg (25-Pa)] <Insert value> static pressure drop at [550-fpm (2.8-m/s)] <Insert value> free-area [exhaust] [intake] velocity.

G. Vertical, Sightproof Louver <Insert drawing designation>:


2. Louver Depth: [4 inches (100 mm)] <Insert dimension>. 3. Blade Profile: [Chevron] [Y] [Labyrinth]-shaped blade. 4. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than [0.080 inch (2.03 mm)] [0.060 inch

(1.52 mm) for blades and 0.080 inch (2.03 mm) for frames]. 5. Blade Spacing: [2 inches (50 mm)] [4 inches (100 mm)] <Insert dimension> o.c. 6. Mullion Type: [Exposed] [Semirecessed] [Fully recessed].

2.4 FIXED, FORMED-METAL LOUVERS

A. Horizontal, Nondrainable-Blade Louver <Insert drawing designation>:


2. Louver Depth: [4 inches (100 mm)] [6 inches (150 mm)] <Insert dimension>. 3. Blade Profile: [Plain blade without] [Blade with] center baffle. 4. Frame and Blade Material and Nominal Thickness: Galvanized-steel sheet, not less than

[0.052 inch (1.32 mm) for frames and 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) for blades] [0.052 inch (1.32 mm)] [0.064 inch (1.63 mm)].

5. Frame and Blade Material and Nominal Thickness: Stainless-steel sheet, not less than [0.050 inch (1.27 mm)] [0.062 inch (1.59 mm)].


July 31, 2015 089119 - 7

6. Mullion Type: [Exposed] [Semirecessed] [Fully recessed]. 7. Louver Performance Ratings:


b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than [550 fpm (2.8 m/s)] [600 fpm (3.0 m/s)] [650 fpm (3.3 m/s)] [700 fpm (3.6 m/s)] <Insert value>.


B. Horizontal, Drainable-Blade Louver <Insert drawing designation>:


2. Louver Depth: [4 inches (100 mm)] [6 inches (150 mm)] <Insert dimension>. 3. Frame and Blade Material and Nominal Thickness: Galvanized-steel sheet, not less than

[0.052 inch (1.32 mm) for frames and 0.040 inch (1.02 mm) for blades] [0.052 inch (1.32 mm)] [0.064 inch (1.63 mm)].

4. Frame and Blade Material and Nominal Thickness: Stainless-steel sheet, not less than [0.050 inch (1.27 mm)] [0.062 inch (1.59 mm)].

5. Mullion Type: Exposed. 6. Louver Performance Ratings:


b. Point of Beginning Water Penetration: Not less than [800 fpm (4.1 m/s)] [850 fpm (4.3 m/s)] [900 fpm (4.6 m/s)] [950 fpm (4.8 m/s)] [1000 fpm (5.1 m/s)] <Insert value>.


d. Air Performance: Not more than [0.15-inch wg (37-Pa)] <Insert value> static pressure drop at [900-fpm (4.6-m/s)] [950-fpm (4.8-m/s)] [1000-fpm (5.1-m/s)] <Insert value> free-area velocity.


2.5 FIXED, ACOUSTICAL LOUVERS

A. Acoustic Performance: Provide acoustical louvers complying with ratings specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those specified, except for length and width for [airborne sound-transmission loss according to ASTM E 90] [outdoor-indoor, sound-transmission loss according to ASTM E 966].

B. Fixed, Formed-Metal Acoustical Louver <Insert drawing designation>: Louver with formed-metal blades filled on interior with mineral-fiber, rigid-board, acoustical insulation retained by perforated metal sheet of same material and finish as blade.


July 31, 2015 089119 - 8

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.> 2. Louver Depth: [6 inches (150 mm)] [8 inches (200 mm)] [12 inches (300 mm)] <Insert

dimension>. 3. Frame Material: Extruded aluminum or aluminum sheet, not less than 0.080-inch (2.03-

mm) nominal thickness. 4. Frame Material: Galvanized-steel sheet, not less than [0.052-inch (1.32-mm)] [0.064-

inch (1.63-mm)] nominal thickness. 5. Blade Material: Aluminum sheet, not less than [0.063-inch (1.60-mm)] [0.080-inch

(2.03-mm)] nominal thickness. 6. Blade Material: Galvanized-steel sheet, not less than [0.034-inch (0.86-mm)] [0.040-

inch (1.02-mm)] [0.052-inch (1.32-mm)] nominal thickness. 7. Blade Shape: [Straight] [Airfoil] [Chevron]. 8. Blade Angle: 45 degrees unless otherwise indicated. 9. Blade Spacing: 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. for 6-inch- (150-mm-) deep louvers. 10. Blade Spacing: [6 inches (150 mm)] [8 inches (200 mm)] o.c. for 8-inch- (200-mm-)

deep louvers. 11. Blade Spacing: [9 inches (225 mm)] [12 inches (300 mm)] o.c. for 12-inch- (300-mm-)

deep louvers. 12. Free Area: Not less than 4 sq. ft. (0.37 sq. m) for 48-inch- (1220-mm-) wide by 48-inch-

(1220-mm-) high louver. 13. Airborne Sound-Transmission Loss: [STC 10] <Insert STC value> per ASTM E 413,

determined by testing according to ASTM E 90. 14. Outdoor-Indoor, Sound-Transmission Loss: [OITC 10] <Insert OITC value> per

ASTM E 1332, determined by testing according to ASTM E 966.

2.6 LOUVER SCREENS

A. General: Provide screen at [each exterior louver] [louvers indicated].

1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: [Bird screening] [Bird screening except where insect screening is

indicated] [Insect screening].

B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with [stainless-steel machine screws] [machine screws with heads finished to match louver], spaced a maximum of 6 inches (150 mm) from each corner and at 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.

C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated.

1. Metal: Same type and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached.[ Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with clips.]

2. Finish: [Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached] [Mill finish unless otherwise indicated].

3. Type: [Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert] [Non-rewirable, U-shaped frames].

D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:

1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) square mesh, 0.063-inch (1.60-mm) wire.


July 31, 2015 089119 - 9

2. Bird Screening: Stainless steel, 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) square mesh, 0.047-inch (1.19-mm) wire.

3. Bird Screening: Flattened, expanded aluminum, 3/4 by 0.050 inch (19 by 1.27 mm) thick. 4. Insect Screening: Aluminum, 18-by-16 (1.4-by-1.6-mm) mesh, 0.012-inch (0.30-mm)

wire. 5. Insect Screening: Stainless steel, 18-by-18 (1.4-by-1.4-mm) mesh, 0.009-inch (0.23-mm)

wire.

E. Louver Screening for Galvanized-Steel Louvers:

1. Bird Screening: Galvanized steel, 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) square mesh, 0.041-inch (1.04-mm) wire.


3. Insect Screening: Galvanized steel, 18-by-14 (1.4-by-1.8-mm) mesh, 0.011-inch (0.28-mm) wire.

4. Insect Screening: Stainless steel, 18-by-18 (1.4-by-1.4-mm) mesh, 0.009-inch (0.23-mm) wire.

F. Louver Screening for Stainless-Steel Louvers:


2. Insect Screening: Stainless steel, 18-by-18 (1.4-by-1.4-mm) mesh, 0.009-inch (0.23-mm) wire.

2.7 BLANK-OFF PANELS

A. Uninsulated, Blank-Off Panels: Metal sheet attached to back of louver.

1. Aluminum sheet for aluminum louvers, not less than 0.050-inch (1.27-mm) nominal thickness.

2. Galvanized-steel sheet for galvanized-steel louvers, not less than [0.040-inch (1.02-mm)] [0.052-inch (1.32-mm)] nominal thickness.

3. Stainless-steel sheet for stainless-steel louvers, not less than [0.038-inch (0.95-mm)] [0.050-inch (1.27-mm)] nominal thickness, with grain running in same direction as grain of louver blades.

4. Panel Finish: [Same finish applied to louvers] [Same finish type applied to louvers, but black color].

5. Attach blank-off panels with [clips] [sheet metal screws] <Insert method>.

B. Insulated, Blank-Off Panels: Laminated panels consisting of an insulating core surfaced on back and front with metal sheets and attached to back of louver.

1. Thickness: [1 inch (25 mm)] [2 inches (50 mm)]. 2. Metal Facing Sheets: Aluminum sheet, not less than 0.032-inch (0.81-mm) nominal

thickness. 3. Metal Facing Sheets: Galvanized-steel sheet, not less than 0.028-inch (0.71-mm) nominal

thickness.


July 31, 2015 089119 - 10

4. Metal Facing Sheets: Stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.031-inch (0.79-mm) nominal thickness.

5. Insulating Core: [Rigid, glass-fiber-board insulation] [or] [extruded-polystyrene foam] <Insert insulation material>.

6. Edge Treatment: Trim perimeter edges of blank-off panels with louver manufacturer's standard [extruded-aluminum-channel frames, not less than 0.080-inch (2.03-mm) nominal thickness] [channel frames], with corners mitered and with same finish as panels.

7. Seal perimeter joints between panel faces and louver frames with gaskets or sealant. 8. Panel Finish: [Same finish applied to louvers] [Same type of finish applied to louvers,

but black color]. 9. Attach blank-off panels with [clips] [sheet metal screws] <Insert method>.

2.8 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.

B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, [G60 (Z180)] [G90 (Z275)] zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

D. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, [No. 2B finish] [No. 2D finish] [No. 4 finish, with grain running parallel to length of blades and frame members] [No. 4 finish, with grain running perpendicular to length of blades and frame members] [No. 4 finish, with grain running perpendicular to length of blades and parallel to length of frame members] [No. 6 finish].

E. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1. Use [Phillips flat-head] [hex-head or Phillips pan-head] [tamper-resistant] screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 3. For fastening galvanized steel, use hot-dip-galvanized steel or 300 series stainless-steel

fasteners. 4. For fastening stainless steel, use 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 5. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.

F. Postinstalled Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed for masonry, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.


July 31, 2015 089119 - 11

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Factory assemble louvers to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates.

1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade-spacing pattern [unless horizontal mullions are indicated] [where indicated].

2. Horizontal Mullions: Provide horizontal mullions at joints [unless continuous vertical assemblies are indicated] [where indicated].

C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing[, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill,] to produce uniform appearance.

D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.

1. Frame Type: [Channel] [Exterior flange] [Interior flange] unless otherwise indicated.

E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.

F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated, but not more than is recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches (1830 mm) o.c., whichever is less.

1. Fully Recessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions fully recessed behind louver blades. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction.

2. Semirecessed Mullions: Where indicated, provide mullions partly recessed behind louver blades so louver blades appear continuous. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with interlocking split mullions and close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction.

3. Exposed Mullions: Where indicated, provide units with exposed mullions of same width and depth as louver frame. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, provide interlocking split mullions designed to permit expansion and contraction.

4. Exterior Corners: Prefabricated corner units with mitered [and welded blades] [blades with concealed close-fitting splices] and with [fully recessed] [semirecessed] mullions at corners.

G. Provide [subsills made of same material as louvers] [or] [extended sills] for recessed louvers.

H. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds [concealed from view] [, threaded fasteners, or both, as standard with louver manufacturer] unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.


July 31, 2015 089119 - 12


A. Finish louvers after assembly.

B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, [AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm] [AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm] or thicker.

C. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, [AA-M12C22A42/A44, Class I, 0.018 mm] [AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm] or thicker.

1. Color: [Champagne] [Light bronze] [Medium bronze] [Dark bronze] [Black] <Insert color>.

2. Color: [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities].

D. Conversion-Coated Finish: AA-C12C42 (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating).

E. Conversion-Coated and Factory-Primed Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid-chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as specified below).

1. Organic Coating: Air-dried primer of not less than 2-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.

F. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 mm). Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

1. Color and Gloss: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's sample] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] <Insert color and gloss>.

G. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with [AAMA 2604] [AAMA 2605] and containing not less than [50] [70] percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.


H. High-Performance Organic Finish: [Three] [Four]-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than [50] [70] percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.



July 31, 2015 089119 - 13

2.11 GALVANIZED-STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A. Finish louvers after assembly.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating compatible with the organic coating to be applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas and repair according to ASTM A 780.

C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils (0.05 mm).


2.12 STAINLESS-STEEL SHEET FINISHES

A. Repair sheet finish by grinding and polishing irregularities, weld spatter, scratches, and forming marks to match surrounding finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Locate and place louvers level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.


July 31, 2015 089119 - 14

D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated.

E. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that are in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.

F. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.


A. Clean exposed louver surfaces that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period.

B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.

C. Restore louvers damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.

1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.


STA Job No. 15-STA-512 SPOKANE TRANSIT AUTHORITY

THE PLAZA RENOVATION

SECTION 09000 - FINISH SCHEDULE

l------------------------------Walls------------------------------------l

Room No. & Name

Floor

Finish Base North East South West Ceiling Remarks

BASEMENT

P001 TRANSFER VAULT

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P1R5 FUTURE TENANT

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P002 TRANSFER VAULT

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P003 TRANSFER VAULT

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P004 MECHANICAL

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P005 ELECTRICAL ROOM

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P006 GENERATOR ROOM * Replace gypsum ceiling as required to

-- -- -- -- -- -- PT-* perform work on level above.

Paint to match existing.

P007 TELEPHONE ROOM

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P008 SERVICE ELEVATOR LOBBY

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P009 CHILLER ROOM

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P010 PUMP ROOM

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P011 BOILER ROOM

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

July 31, 2015 090000 - 1




l------------------------------Walls------------------------------------l

Room No. & Name

Floor


P012 STAIR 1 - NORTH WEST

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P013 PLUMBING ROOM

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P014E ELEVATOR LOBBY

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P014S STAIR LOBBY

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P015 ELEVATOR MECHANICAL

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P016 RESTROOM

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P017 STORAGE

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P018 RESTROOM

P019 MAINTENANCE

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P020 STAIR 3 - SOUTH EAST

-- -- -- -- -- -- --

P021 MECHANICAL

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P022 HOLDING TANK

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

July 31, 2015 090000 - 2




l------------------------------Walls------------------------------------l

Room No. & Name

Floor


P023A MECHANICAL SHAFT

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P023B MECHANCIAL

-- -- -- -- -- -- --

P024 MECHANICAL

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P025 ELEVATOR SHAFT

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P026 SERVICE ELEVATOR SHAFT

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P027 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P028 PARKING * New ceiling to match existing.

-- -- -- -- -- -- APC-* Match existing as shown in A-102.

P029 RAMP

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P030 MECHANCIAL * Replace gypsum ceiling as required to

-- -- -- -- -- -- PT-* perform work on level above.

Paint to match existing.

P031 MECHANCIAL

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

FIRST FLOOR

P101 WASTE MANAGEMENT

CON-1 RB-2 FRP-1 PT-1 FRP-1 FRP-1 APC-4 Yes

FRP-1

July 31, 2015 090000 - 3




l------------------------------Walls------------------------------------l

Room No. & Name

Floor


P102 CUSTODIAL

CON-1 RB-2 FRP-1 FRP-1 -- FRP-1 APC-4 --

P103 WAITING - SOUTH

EM-1 RB-1 PT-1 STOREF. STOREF. PT-1 PT-2

P104 UNISEX RESTROOM

CT-2 -- CT-PAT* CT-PAT* CT-PAT* CT-PAT* APC-1 * See Interior Elevations for tile pattern


CT-2 -- CT-PAT* CT-PAT* CT-PAT* CT-PAT* APC-1 * See Interior Elevations for tile pattern

P106 ELECTRICAL

CON-1 RB-2 PT-1 PT-1 PT-1 PT-1 APC-1 --

P107 HALL - WASTE

CON-1 RB-2 PT-1 PT-1 PT-1 PT-1 APC-1 * FRP-1 to 4'-0" A.F.F.

FRP-1 FRP-1 FRP-1

P108 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P109 TENANT C

CON-1 -- Open Wall Temp Wall* Open Wall Gyp. Bd.** -- * Gyp Bd on mall side only

** Gyp Bd to be taped

P110 TENANT B

CON-1 -- Open Wall Temp Wall* Open Wall Gyp. Bd.** -- * Gyp Bd on mall side only

** Gyp Bd to be taped

P111 TENANT A - SUBWAY

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --


-- -- -- -- PT-* -- -- * Touch up paint as required,

match existing

July 31, 2015 090000 - 4




l------------------------------Walls------------------------------------l

Room No. & Name

Floor


P113 ENTRY - NORTH

EM-1 CTB-2 STOREF* STOREF* STOREF* PT-2 APC-3 * Existing Storefront

PT-PAT** ** See Reflected Ceiling Plan for

paint design

P114 STAIR 4 - NORTH EAST

CT-PAT* CTB-4 -- -- -- -- -- * See Floor Finish Plan for floor tile design

P115 TENANT E - ROTUNDA

-- -- -- -- -- -- PT-PAT* * See Reflected Ceiling Plan for paint

design

P116 ATRIUM

CT-PAT* CTB-1 -- -- PT-3 DM-1 -- * See Floor Finish Plan for floor tile design

CTB-2 PT-2 PT-2

WP-1 PT-1/UP-1

P117 ENTRY - EAST

EM-1 RB-1 -- -- -- -- --


-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P119 ENTRY - SOUTH

EM-1 RB-1 STOREF* PT-1 STOREF* STOREF** APC-3 * Existing storefront

PT-PAT*** ** New storefront

*** See Reflected Ceiling Plan for paint

design RCP+

P120 MALL

CT-PAT* CTB-2 -- PT-1 PT-1 PT-1 APC-2 * See Floor Finish Plan for tile pattern

RB-1 PT-2 PT-2 PT-2** ** See RCP+ for paint pattern

PT-2 PT-3 PT-3**

PT-4**

July 31, 2015 090000 - 5




l------------------------------Walls------------------------------------l

Room No. & Name

Floor


P121 ACCESSIBLE RAMP

CT-2 CTB-2 STOREF* -- PT-2 STOREF* APC-3 * Existing storefront

PT-PAT** ** See Reflected Ceiling Plan for paint

design

P122 WAITING AREA - NORTH

CT-PAT* CTB-2 -- -- -- P-1 APC-3 * See Floor Finish Plan for tile pattern

PT-PAT** ** See Reflected Ceiling Plan for paint

design

P123 ELEVATOR CABS

CT-2 CTB-2 -- -- -- -- -- --

EM-1

P124 WAITING - EAST

CT-4 CTB-4 STOREF** STOREF*** PT-2 PT-3 APC-3 * New storefront

PT-PAT**** ** Existing storefront


design

P125 WAITING PARA TRANSIT

CT-4 CTB-2 STOREF* -- PT-** -- PT-2 * Existing storefront

** Stair 4

P126 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P127 TRANSIT CENTER

CT-PAT* CTB-1 -- STOREF** PT-2 -- APC-3 * See Floor Finish Plan for tile pattern

CTB-2 PT-PAT*** ** Existing storefront


design

P128 ELECTRICAL

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P129 RAMP

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

July 31, 2015 090000 - 6




l------------------------------Walls------------------------------------l

Room No. & Name

Floor


P130 TENANT D

CON-1 -- Open Wall Open Wall Open Wall Temp Wall* -- * Gyp Bd on mall side only

P131 CUSTOMER SERVICE

CPT-1 RB-1 PT-2 PT-2 WP-1 PT-2 APC-1 * Soffit metal finish

STOREF STOREF DM-1*

PT-3 PT-3

P132 PHOTO ROOM

CT-1 CTB-1 STOREF PT-2 PT-3 DM-1 DM-1* * Soffit metal finish

STOREF UP-1 OPEN** ** Open to beyond as well

P133 REVENUE CLERK

CPT-1 RB-1 PT-1 PT-1 PT-1 PT-1 APC-1 *Soffit finish

PT-2*

P134 LEAD CUSTOMER SERVICE

CPT-1 RB-1 PT-1 -- PT-2 PT-2 APC-1 --

P135 CORRIDOR

CPT-1 RB-1 PT-1 PT-1 PT-1 PT-1 APC-1 --

P136 LOST & FOUND


P137 ACCOUNTING ROOM



CT-2 CTB-2 CT-PAT* CT-PAT* CT-PAT* CT-PAT* APC-1 --

P139 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

July 31, 2015 090000 - 7




l------------------------------Walls------------------------------------l

Room No. & Name

Floor


P140 MEN'S RESTROOM

CT-PAT* -- CT-PAT** CT-PAT** CT-PAT** CT-PAT** PT-3 --

P141 WOMEN'S RESTROOM

CT-PAT* -- CT-PAT** CT-PAT** CT-PAT** CT-PAT** PT-3 --

SECOND FLOOR

P201 STORAGE

CON-1 RB-1 PT-1 PT-1 PT-1 PT-1 -- Open to structure

P202 IT / DATA

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P203 MEN'S RESTROOM

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- Toilet partitions to be painited PT-

+ Urinal screens

P204 FAMILY RESTROOM

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --


-- -- -- -- -- -- -- Toilet partitions to be painited PT-

P206 CORRIDOR

-- CTB-3* PT-1 PT-1 PT-1 PT-1 APC-1 * Original base supplied by owner

PT-2** PT-2 ** Elevator shaft


-- -- -- -- PT-* -- -- * Touch up paint as required, match

existing

P208 JANITOR

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P209 JANITOR

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

July 31, 2015 090000 - 8




l------------------------------Walls------------------------------------l

Room No. & Name

Floor



-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P211 MEN'S RESTROOM

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P212 STORAGE

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P213 STORAGE

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P214 CALL CENTER

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P215 MANAGERS OFFICE

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P216 OFFICE EXECUTIVE

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P217 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P218 EXECUTIVE SUITE

CPT-1 RB-1 PT-1 STOREF PT-1 PT-1 APC-1 --

PT-1

P219 GALLERY

CT* CTB-4 PT- -- STOREF STOREF PT-PAT** * Repair flooring as required

PT- PT- ** See Reflected Ceiling Plan for paint

design

July 31, 2015 090000 - 9




l------------------------------Walls------------------------------------l

Room No. & Name

Floor


P220 CORRIDOR

CT-PAT* CTB-3 PT-1 STOREF -- PT-1 APC-1 * See Floor Finish Plan for tile pattern

CTB-4 PT-3 PT-1 PT-3 PT-PAT** ** See Reflected Ceiling Plan for paint

PT-2 design

PT-3


-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P222 MEETING ROOM

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P223 COMPUTER

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P224 ELECTRICAL

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P225 CALL CENTER

-- -- -- -- -- -- APC-1 --

P226 NORTH LANDING

CT-PAT* CTB-2 PT-1 -- -- PT-1 PT-PAT* * See Reflected Ceiling Plan for paint

design

P227 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P228 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P229 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P230 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

July 31, 2015 090000 - 10




l------------------------------Walls------------------------------------l

Room No. & Name

Floor


P231 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P232 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P233 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P234 PAYTON BUILDING CONNECTION

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P235 STAIR 4 - NORTH EAST

CT-PAT* CTB-4 -- -- -- -- PT-PAT** * See Floor Finish Plan for tile pattern

** See Reflected Ceiling Plan for paint

design

P236 RAMP

CT-PAT* CTB-4 -- PT-1 -- -- PT-PAT*** * See Floor Finish Plan for tile pattern

-- STOREF** ** New Storefront


design

P237 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P238 CORRIDOR

CT-PAT* CTB- PT-2 PT-1 PT-1 PT-1 PT-PAT** * See Floor Finish Plan for tile pattern

CTB-1 PT-3 ** See Reflected Ceiling Plan for paint

CTB-4 STOREF design

PT-1

P239 STA CENTER

CT-PAT* CTB- PT- PT- RAIL** RAIL** PT-PAT*** * See Floor Finish Plan for tile pattern

WP-1 WP-1 ** Insert new railing sections

STOREF STOREF *** See Reflected Ceiling Plan for paint

design

July 31, 2015 090000 - 11




l------------------------------Walls------------------------------------l

Room No. & Name

Floor


P240 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P241 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P242 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P243 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P244 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P245 STORAGE

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P246 HALL

-- CTB-3* -- PT-** -- -- PT-** * Original base supplied by owner

** Match existing paint

P247 SUPERVISOR AREA

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P248 BREAK ROOM

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P248A CORRIDOR

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P249 RECEPTION

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P249A CORRIDOR

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

July 31, 2015 090000 - 12




l------------------------------Walls------------------------------------l

Room No. & Name

Floor


P250 OFFICE

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P251 OFFICE

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P252 CONFERENCE ROOM

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P253 TRAINING AREA

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P254 OFFICE

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P255 OFFICE

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P256 WORK ROOM

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P257 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P258 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P259 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P260 SECURITY SUITE - OPEN OFFICE



CT-2 -- CT-PAT* CT-PAT* CT-PAT* CT-PAT* PT-2 * See A-411 for tile pattern

July 31, 2015 090000 - 13




l------------------------------Walls------------------------------------l

Room No. & Name

Floor


P262 INTERVIEW ROOM

JCT-1 RB-2 PT-2 PT-2 PT-2 PT-2 PT-1 --

P263 COORDINATOR OFFICE


P264 HALL - SECURITY

VCT-1 RB-2 PT-2 PT-2 PT-2 PT-1 APC-1 --

PT-2

P265 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P266 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P267 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P268 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P269 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P270 TENANT - F

-- -- Open Wall* Open Wall -- Open Wall -- * Painted Gyp Bd w reveals on atrium

side only

P271 HALL

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P272 NOT USED

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

P273 MECHANICAL

-- -- -- -- -- -- -- --

July 31, 2015 090000 - 14




l------------------------------Walls------------------------------------l

Room No. & Name

Floor


July 31, 2015 090000 - 15

SPOKANE TRANSIT AUTHORITY STA Job No. 15-STA-512 THE PLAZA

Spec. Section Item Keyword Manufacturer Description Color / Finish

FINISHES LEGEND FL - 1 July 31, 2015

03 30 00 Concrete

CON-1 Concrete Habitat Lightweight precast concrete panel Use: Cougar platform cladding

Color: #1002 Sawdust Finish: Polished

CON-2 Davis Colors Integral color concrete curb Use: Elevator art installation

Color: #677 Outback Finish: Polished

CON-3 Davis Colors Integral color concrete curb Use: Elevator art installation

Color: #8084 Light Gray Finish: Polished

05 00 00 Metal Specialties Custom Aluminum Metal Railing and Guardrail Use: Infill purpose where escalators are removed

Color: Match existing Finish: Match existing

05 70 00 Decorative Metal DM-1 McNichols Industrial and Architectural Hole Products

Quality Round Perforated, 18 Gauge Galvanized Metal, ½” Round on 11/16” Staggered, 48.0000”x96.0000” Use: Atrium Area

Color: Natural Finish: Galvanized

06 64 00 Plastic Paneling

FRP-1 Marelite

Standard Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Panels P-100 Sheet size: 4’-0” x 9’-0” Gauge: 3/32”

Color: White Finish: Pebbled

06 41 16 Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets

PLAM-1 Formica # 5274-58 Use: Casework Counters

Color: Geo Fossil Finish: Matte

PLAM-2 WilsonArt Laminate # 7960K-18 Use: Casework Verticals

Color: Studio Teak Texture: 18

PLAM-3 WilsonArt Laminate # D96-60 Use: Casework Interior

Color: Shadow Finish: 60

06 42 16 Flush Wood Paneling WP-1 Custom

Quarter sawn natural cherry wood veneer Book Matched Use: Atrium Area

Color: Natural Cherry Finish: Clear Satin




08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors Frames Painted Color: PT-2

Doors Painted Color: PT-2

09 30 00 Tiling CT-1

Daltile

Porcelain Tile, Color Body, Imagica # IG 95 Size: 12” x 24” Gauge: 5/16” Grout: GT-1 Grout Width: 1/8” Use: Floor field tile

Color: Vision (Cream White) Finish: Unpolished

CT-2

Daltile Porcelain Tile, Color Body, Imagica # IG 97 Size: 12” x 24” Gauge: 5/16” Grout: GT-2 Grout Width: 3/16” Use: Floor field tile

Color: Haze (Light Taupe) Finish: Unpolished

CT-3

Daltile Porcelain Tile, Color Body, Imagica # IG 96 Size: 12” x 24” Gauge: 5/16” Grout: GT-2 Grout Width: 3/16” Use: Floor accent tile

Color: Cosmo (Warm Medium Taupe)

Finish: Unpolished

CT-4

Daltile Porcelain Tile, Color Body, Imagica # IG 98 Size: 12” x 24” Gauge: 5/16” Grout: GT-4 Grout Width: 3/16” Use: Floor field tile

Color: Midnight (Dark Taupe)

Finish: Unpolished

CT-5

Emser Tile Glazed Body Match Porcelain Tile Alpine Size: 6” x 36” Gauge: 5/16” Grout: GT-2 Grout Width: 3/16” Use: Floor field tile

Color: Amaretto Finish: Unpolished




CT-6

United Tile / Crossville Porcelain Tile, Retroactive # A215 Size: 3” x 12” Gauge: 5/16” Grout: GT-2 Grout Width: 3/16” Use: Wall field tile

Color: Empress White Finish: Unpolished – Graffiti proof finish

CT-7

United Tile / Crossville Porcelain Tile, Retroactive # B210 Size: 3” x 12” Gauge: 5/16” Grout: GT-2 Grout Width: 3/16” Use: Wall accent tile

Color: Seabreeze (Light Blue) Finish: Unpolished – Graffiti proof finish

CT-8

United Tile / Crossville Porcelain Tile, Retroactive # A870 Size: 3” x 12” Gauge: 5/16” Grout: GT-2 Grout Width: 3/16” Use: Wall field tile

Color: Seal Taupe (Medium Taupe) Finish: Unpolished – Graffiti proof finish

CT-9

United Tile / Crossville Porcelain Tile, Retroactive # B110 Size: 3” x 12” Gauge: 5/16” Grout: GT-2 Grout Width: 3/16” Use: Wall accent tile

Color: Antico Taupe (Dark Taupe)

Finish: Unpolished – Graffiti proof finish

CT-10 Existing Tile Existing porcelain floor field tile to be provided by owner Size: approx. 12” x 12” Gauge: approx. 5/16” Grout: Match surrounding grout Grout Width: Match surrounding

Color: White with multi-color grey flecks Finish: Honed

CT-11 Emser Tile Cultura Natural Stone Pebble Mosaic Sheet Size: 12” x 12” Gauge: 5/16” Grout: GT-1 Use: Elevator art installation

Color: Summer Finish: Honed with sealer




CTB-1 Daltile Porcelain Tile Base, Color Body, Imagica IG 95 Size: 6” x 12” Gauge: 5/16” Grout: GT-1 Grout Width: 3/16”

Color: Vision (Cream White) Finish: Unpolished

CTB-2 Daltile Porcelain Tile Base, Color Body, Imagica IG 97 Size: 6” x 12” Gauge: 5/16” Grout: GT-2 Grout Width: 3/16”

Color: Haze (Light Taupe) Finish: Unpolished

CTB-3 Existing Existing porcelain floor tile cove base to be provided by owner Size: Field verify Gauge: Field verify Grout: Match existing Grout Width: Match existing Use: Repairs in existing areas

Color: “Black” Finish: Unpolished

CTB-4 Daltile Porcelain Tile Base, Color Body, Imagica # IG 98 Size: 6” x 12” Gauge: 5/16” Grout: GT-4 Grout Width: 3/16”

Color: Midnight (Dark Taupe) Finish: Unpolished

Grout GT-1 Mapei

FlexColor CQ - Sanded grout Use: CT-1, CT-11

Color: # 39 Ivory

GT-2 Mapei

FlexColor CQ - Sanded grout Use: CT-2, CT-3

Color: # 11 Sahara Beige

GT-3 Mapei

FlexColor CQ - Sanded grout Use: CT-4

Color: # 09 Gray

GT-4 Mapei

FlexColor CQ - Non-Sanded grout Use: CT-7, CT-8, CT-9

Color: # 11 Sahara Beige

GT-5 Mapei

FlexColor CQ – Non-Sanded grout Use: CT-6

Color: # 39 Ivory




09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings

APC-1 Armstrong Lay-In Acoustical Ceiling Panel Tile: Angled Tegular Tile Size: 24” x 24”, 5/8” gauge Grid: Heavy Duty 15/16”

Color – Tile: White Color – Grid: White Finish – Tile: Fine Fissured #1732

APC-2 Rulon International Custom Curved Ceiling Panel System Curvatone 900 Wood: Cherry Veneer Size: See drawings

Color: Light Cherry – LC Finish: Unperforated – W1

APC-3 Armstrong Woodworks Grille, Solid Wood Tegular Panels Tile: # 663112GLC Tegular with Vertical Blades Tile Size: 24” x 24”, 2” gauge Grid: 15/16” Prelude XL Suspension System with 4’-0” cross tee route holes at 12”

Color - Tile: Grille Light Cherry – GLC Color – Grid: Black Finish - Tile: Grille

APC-4 Armstrong Lay-In Acoustical Ceiling Panel Tile: Square Layin - Ceramaguard – Unperforated Tile Size: 24” x 24”, 5/8” gauge Grid: Heavy Duty 15/16” Use: Waste Management

Color – Tile: White Color – Grid: White Finish – Tile: Fine Fissured # 605

09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories

RB-1 Johnsonite A Tarkett Company

Rubber Wall Base Number: 283 Size: 6” High Gauge: ¼”

Color: Toast

RB-2 Johnsonite A Tarkett Company

Rubber Wall Base Number: 29 Size: 6” High Gauge: ¼”

Color: Moon Rock

Transition Strip TS-1 Johnsonite Type: Rubber Adaptor

Color: # 29 Moon Rock

09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring Vinyl Composition Tile

VCT-1 Mannington Commercial Touchstone Premium VCT Number: 9137 Size: 12” x 12” Gauge: 1/8”

Color: Sandrift


Color: Putty





Color: Bed Rock

09 68 13 Tile Carpeting CPT-1

Shaw Contract Group Multi-Level Pattern Loop Carpet Tile Style Name: Block Print Style Number: 59572

Color: Embossed # 71504

09 91 00 Painting PT-1 Benjamin Moore # 2111-70

Color: Calm

PT-2 Benjamin Moore # HC-172

Color: Revere Pewter

PT-3 Benjamin Moore Color Stories # CPS-205

Color: Cathedral Gray

PT-4 Benjamin Moore Color Stories # CPS-210

Color: Café Doppio

10 21 13 Toilet Compartments Type-1 Hadrian Floor Mounted Head Rail Braced Type

Color: # 828 Dovetail Finish: AG – Anti-graffiti powder coated

10 26 00 Wall and Door Protection CG-1 Custom

Stainless Steel L-Shaped Corner Guards 4’ High – 4” Wide Flanges

Color: Stainless Steel Finish: Brushed

12 36 61 Simulated Stone Countertops

SSC-1 CambriaUSA

Homogenous Quartz Surface Material Waterstone Collection Use: Customer Service

Color: Montgomery

12 48 13 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames

EM-1 Connexus Super Nop 52 - Entry Mat Modular Tile Fiber: 100% Asota Solution-dyed UV stabilized Polypropylene Fibers Size of Tile: 19-11/16” x 19-11/16” Gauge: ½”

Color: Beige

END OF FINISHES LEGEND

Spokane Transit Authority Section 092216 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Non-Load Bearing Steel Framing

July 31, 2015 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-LOAD BEARING STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.). 2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).


1. Division 06 “Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry” for wood blocking. 2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board".



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.


July 31, 2015 092216 - 2

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Runners:

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch (0.68 mm). b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings or as required by conditions of installation.

C. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch (0.45 mm). 2. Depth: 7/8 inch (22.2 mm).

D. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.

1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

E. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 3/4 inch (19 mm). 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum

uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch (0.8 mm). 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-

mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

F. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.018 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency.

a. Type: Postinstalled, chemical anchor or Postinstalled, expansion anchor.

2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that


July 31, 2015 092216 - 3

imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter.

D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch (1.34 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings or required by condition of installation.

E. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep.

2. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch (0.45 mm).

3. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.

a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

F. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.


July 31, 2015 092216 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.


July 31, 2015 092216 - 5

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

(13-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

E. Direct Furring:

1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

F. Z-Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 07210 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (305 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.

G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.


July 31, 2015 092216 - 6

3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 092900 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Gypsum Board

July 31, 2015 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels.


1. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.

2. Section 093013 "Ceramic Tiling" for cementitious backer units installed as substrates for ceramic tile.



1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.


July 31, 2015 092900 - 2

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Provide products from one of the following manufacturers:

a. American Gypsum. b. Certain Teed Corporation c. Georgie-Pacific Building Products. d. National Gypsum Co. e. United States Gypsum Co.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 3. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or ASTM C 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges.

1. Provide products from one of the following manufacturers:

a. Certain Teed Corporation b. Custom Building Products c. James Hardie Building Products d. United States Gypsum Company


July 31, 2015 092900 - 3

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc and Paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.

1. Basis of Design: Fry Reglet, reveal molding, DRM-625-100, or as indicated on drawings.

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.

3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and

trim flanges, use setting-type taping or drying-type, all-purpose compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, all-purpose compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, all-purpose compound.


July 31, 2015 092900 - 4

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

F. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.


July 31, 2015 092900 - 5

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.

J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Wallboard Type: 5/8 inch on all Vertical and Horizontal surfaces unless otherwise indicated.


July 31, 2015 092900 - 6

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-shaped furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

D. Curved Surfaces:

1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch- (300-mm-) long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them.

2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.

3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings and according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.


July 31, 2015 092900 - 7

2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.

D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.

3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 093013 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Ceramic Tiling

July 31, 2015 093013 - 1

SECTION 093013 - CERAMIC TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Porcelain tile. 2. Crack isolation membrane. 3. Metal edge strips.


1. Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces.

2. Section 092900 "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in its "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."

C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.

D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades.


July 31, 2015 093013 - 2



B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.


1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory. 3. Metal edge strips in 6-inch (150-mm) lengths.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.


A. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer employs Ceramic Tile Education Foundation Certified Installers or installers recognized by the U.S. Department of Labor as Journeyman Tile Layers.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of floor tile installation. 2. Build mockup of wall tile installation. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the



A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.


July 31, 2015 093013 - 3


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from single source or producer.

1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from single manufacturer and each aggregate from single source or producer.

1. Obtain setting and grouting materials, except for unmodified Portland cement and aggregate, from single manufacturer.

2. Obtain crack isolation membrane, except for sheet products, from manufacturer of setting and grouting materials.

2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated.

1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

2.3 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Ceramic Tile Type CT-1, CT-2, CT-3, CT-4: porcelain tile - floor.

1. Reference Finishes Legend for Basis of Design manufacturer. 2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency. 3. Face Size: 24” x 12”.


July 31, 2015 093013 - 4

4. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 5. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 6. Face: Variegated with square edges. 7. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 8. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 9. Grout Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 10. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where

applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

B. Ceramic Tile Type CT-5: Glazed Body porcelain tile - floor.

1. Reference Finishes Legend for Basis of Design manufacturer. 2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency. 3. Face Size: 6 inch x 36 inch. 4. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 5. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 6. Face: Variegated with square edges. 7. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 8. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 9. Grout Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 10. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable.

Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

C. Ceramic Tile Type CT-6, CT-7, CT-8, CT-9: Color Body porcelain tile - wall.

1. Reference Finishes legend for Basis of Design manufacturer. 2. Certification: Tile certified by the Porcelain Tile Certification Agency. 3. Face Size: 3 inches x 12 inches. 4. Face Size Variation: Rectified. 5. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 6. Face: Unpolished with square or cushion edges. 7. Dynamic Coefficient of Friction: Not less than 0.42. 8. Tile Color, Glaze, and Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 9. Grout Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 10. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where

applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

a. Wainscot Cap: Surface bullnose, module size same as adjoining flat tile. b. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners.

D. Ceramic Tile Type CT-11: Factory-mounted unglazed stone mosaic tile.

1. Emser Tile, Cultura series. 2. Composition: Cut stone pebble mosaic. 3. Module Size: 12 inch by 12 inch mesh. 4. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 5. Face: irregular mosaic.


July 31, 2015 093013 - 5

6. Surface: Smooth, Slip resistant. 7. Finish: Mat, opaque glaze. 8. Tile Color and Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 9. Grout Color: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

2.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following that complies with ANSI A118.12 for and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

B. Polyethylene Sheet: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing; 0.008-inch (0.2-mm) nominal thickness.

C. Acceptable Products and Manufacturers:

1. Schluter®-KIRDI. 2. Nobleseal TS, The Noble Company.

D. Description: 0.008 inch (0.2 mm) thick, polyethylene membrane, with polypropylene fleece laminated on both sides, which meet or exceed the requirements of the “American National Standard specifications for load bearing, bonded, waterproof membranes for thin-set ceramic tile and dimension stone installation A118.10”, and is listed by cUPC®, and is evaluated by ICC-ES (see Report No. ESR-2467).

E. Locations: Floors under large format tile (edges longer than 12-inches).

2.5 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.1.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Custom Building Products. b. Laticrete International, Inc. c. MAPEI Corporation.

2. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.1.

B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thinset): ANSI A118.4.




July 31, 2015 093013 - 6

2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

3. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene-rubber liquid-latex additive at Project site.

4. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

2.6 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, consisting of white or gray cement and white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.

B. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Basis of Design product indicated in Finishes Legend or matching color products by one of the following:


C. High-Performance Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Basis of Design product indicated in Finishes Legend or matching color products by one of the following:


2. Polymer Type: Ethylene vinyl acetate or acrylic additive, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients.

3. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix.


A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shaped, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications; stainless-steel, ASTM A 666, 300 Series exposed-edge material.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Ceramic Tool Company, Inc. b. Schluter Systems L.P.


July 31, 2015 093013 - 7

C. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer’s standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout.

1. Grout sealers shall comply with requirements of FloorScore certification.

D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

E. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout.

1. Grout sealers shall comply with requirements of FloorScore certification.

2.8 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified.

b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding.

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.

4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.


July 31, 2015 093013 - 8


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation" for TCNA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:

a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm) or larger. c. Tile floors consisting of rib-backed tiles.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.

E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting-bed thickness so that tiles are flush.

F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated.

1. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints.


July 31, 2015 093013 - 9

2. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

G. Joint Widths: As indicated on Finishes Legend.

H. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.

I. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.

1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them.

J. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.

K. Grout Sealer: Apply floor sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to floor-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as floor sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

3.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate.

B. Allow crack isolation membrane to cure before installing tile or setting materials over it.


A. Remove and replace tile that is damaged or that does not match adjoining tile. Provide new matching units, installed as specified and in a manner to eliminate evidence of replacement.

B. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.

1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.


July 31, 2015 093013 - 10

B. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

C. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.

3.7 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F113; thinset mortar.

a. Ceramic Tile Type: See drawings and schedule. b. Thinset Mortar: Dry-set portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Sand-portland cement, Standard sanded cement, Standard unsanded

cement, High-performance sanded or High-performance unsanded grout.

2. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA F125A; thinset mortar on crack isolation membrane.

a. Ceramic Tile Type: See drawings and schedule. b. Thinset Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Standard sanded cement, Standard unsanded cement, High-performance

sanded or High-performance unsanded grout.

B. Interior Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring:

1. Ceramic Tile Installation: TCNA W244C or TCNA W244F; thinset mortar on cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer board.

a. Ceramic Tile Type: See drawings and schedule. b. Thinset Mortar: Dry-set portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Sand-portland cement, Standard sanded cement, Standard unsanded

cement, High-performance sanded or High-performance unsanded grout.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 095113 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Acoustical Panel Ceilings

July 31, 2015 095113 - 1

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Refer to Division 1 Section “Sustainable Design Requirements – WSSP for Schools” for submittal requirements and formats.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes acoustical and wood panels with exposed and concealed suspension systems for ceilings.


1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for acoustical sealants.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AC: Articulation Class.

B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.

C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.

D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.

1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- (150-mm-) square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.

2. Wood Panel: 24” x 24” square samples of each type.

C. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.


July 31, 2015 095113 - 2


A. Source Limitations:

1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.

2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions according to the following:

1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580.

2. "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay-in Panel Ceilings." Suspended acoustical ceiling systems shall be installed in accordance with the provisions of ASTM C 635, ASTM C 636 and the structural requirements in IBC Chapter 16 and ASCE 7 Section 13.5.6. Ceiling engineering done by the manufacturer and incorporated into their installations instructions is acceptable. For seismic design categories D through F there are more stringent requirements in ASCE 7 (IBC 803.9.1.1, 1613.1).


A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.


July 31, 2015 095113 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.

2. Products to comply with Greenguard™.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches (400 mm) away from test surface per ASTM E 795.

B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.

1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.

2.3 WATER-FELTED, MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING (APC-1)

A. Products: Armstrong Fine Fissured #1732.

B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Type III, mineral base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2, water felted.

C. Color: White.

D. LR: Not less than 0.84.

E. NRC: Not less than 0.50.

F. CAC: Not less than 35.

G. Edge Detail: Angled Tegular.

H. Thickness: 5/8 inch.


July 31, 2015 095113 - 4

I. Size: 24 by 24 inches.

2.4 WATER-FELTED, MINERAL-BASE ACOUSTICAL PANELS WITH MEMBRANE-FACED OVERLAY FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING (APC-4)

A. Products: Armstrong Fine Fissured #605 “Ceramaguard Unperforated”.

B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for Type III, mineral base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2, water felted.

C. Color: White.

D. LR: Not less than 0.80.

E. NRC: Not less than 0.10.

F. CAC: Not less than 35.

G. Edge Detail: Square.

H. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15 mm).

I. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 1220 mm).

2.5 CUSTOM CURVED WOOD CEILING PANELS WITH RIBS AND ASBORPTIVE ACOUSTICAL BACKING (APC-2)

A. Products: Rulon International, Curvatone Ceiling Panels.

B. Finish: Light Cherry Stain on Plain Sliced Cherry Veneer.

C. Edge Detail: Square

D. Thickness: Per Manufacturer, see detail drawings.

E. Panel Size: See Drawings.

2.6 WOOD GRILL TEGULAR EDGE PANELS (APC-3)

A. Products: Basis of Design is Rulon International, InTEGrille PGT 9-12-22 DW. Subject to requirements, provide equivalent products from the following:

1. Armstrong, Woodworks Grill.

B. Finish: Light Cherry Stain on Solid Poplar Blades and Backer.

C. Edge Detail: Tegular Edge Design.

D. Tile Size: 24” x 24”.


July 31, 2015 095113 - 5

E. Gauge: 2 inches nominal.

2.7 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Celotex Corporation; Architectural Ceilings Marketing Dept. 3. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.

B. Roll-Formed Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.

1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member.

2. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.

C. Product Description:

1. Axiom – Classic 2” + (50 mm).

2.8 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.

B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated.

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:

1. Zinc-Coated Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.

3. At acoustical panel clouds, use stainless steel eye-bolts connected to the structure above and stainless steel wire (ASTM A-580/A 580M, Type 304 Non-Magnetic).


July 31, 2015 095113 - 6

E. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces.

F. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical panels in-place.

2.9 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL AND WOOD GRILL CEILING

A. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Celotex Corporation 3. Chicago Metallic Corp. 4. USG Interiors, Inc.

B. Steel Suspension Systems:

1. "Prelude" 15/16". 2. Heavy Duty 15/16” grid for wood grill ceiling.

2.10 METAL SUSPENSION FOR CUSTOM CURVED WOOD CEILING PANELS

A. 12 gauge stainless steel hanger wire with stainless steel eye bolts connected to structure above.

2.11 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Products: See Section 07 92 00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.


July 31, 2015 095113 - 7


A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with UBC Standard 25-2 and seismic requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.

2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 7. Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported

directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) from ends of each member.

C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.

1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed.

2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.66 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely.

3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

a. Pop rivets acceptable at 9/16” grid only. Painted to match grid.

D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.

1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings.


July 31, 2015 095113 - 8

2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.

3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 096513 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Resilient Base and Accessories

July 31, 2015 096513- 1

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories.



B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet (3 linear m) for every 500 linear feet (150 linear m) or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).


July 31, 2015 096513- 2


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 80 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Basis of this Specification is Johnsonite for Wall Base and floor transitions. Color as indicated in the Finishes Legend at the end of the Finish Schedule. Subject to compliance with the requirements and properties of the product listed, including acceptable color and texture, products of other manufacturers will be considered if submitted prior to Bid in accordance with the stipulations in the Instructions to Bidders.

2.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE (RB-1), RB-2, RB-3

A. Wall Base: ASTM F 1861.

B. Type (Material Requirement): Rubber.

C. Group (Manufacturing Method): I (solid, homogeneous) or II (layered).

D. Style: Cove (with top-set toe).

E. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

F. Height: See Finishes Legend.

G. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

H. Outside Corners: Job formed.

I. Inside Corners: Job formed.

J. Surface: Smooth.

K. Color: See Finishes legend

2.3 FLOOR TRANSITIONS/REDUCERS/EDGING


July 31, 2015 096513- 3

A. Manufacturer: Johnsonite, Schluter and Pemko.

B. See Finish Legend and drawings for specific products.


A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

D. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.


July 31, 2015 096513- 4

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Job-Formed Corners:

1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.

2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 096519 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Resilient Tile Flooring

July 31, 2015 096519 - 1

SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Vinyl composition floor tile.



B. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.

C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.




A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.



1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.


July 31, 2015 096519 - 2


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated.

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by floor tile manufacturer for installation techniques required.


A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 80 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

C. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

D. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

2.2 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE VCT-1, VCT-2, VCT-3

A. Reference Finishes Legend for Basis of Design Manufacturer.

B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile.

C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.


July 31, 2015 096519 - 3

D. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).

F. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.


A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer in writing.

4. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:


July 31, 2015 096519 - 4

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles square with room axis or in pattern indicated.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles with grain direction alternating in adjacent tiles (basket-weave pattern) or in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.

G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


July 31, 2015 096519 - 5


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply two.

E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 096813 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Tile Carpeting

July 31, 2015 096813 - 1

SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes modular carpet tile.


1. Section 024119 "Selective Demolition" for removing existing floor coverings. 2. Section 096513 "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories

installed with carpet tile.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures. b. Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures. c. Review subfloor preparation procedures. d. Review temporary facilities requirements.



1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.

2. Include manufacturer's written installation recommendations for each type of substrate.

B. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample.


July 31, 2015 096813 - 2

2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples.

C. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long

Samples.



B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.


A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m).


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.



July 31, 2015 096813 - 3


A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard."


A. Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard" for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.


a. More than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, and runs. b. Dimensional instability. c. Excess static discharge. d. Loss of tuft-bind strength. e. Loss of face fiber. f. Delamination.

3. Warranty Period: 10 Insert number years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TILE CPT-1

A. Shaw Contract Group.

B. Color: refer to finishes legend.

C. Pattern: Refer to finishes legend.


July 31, 2015 096813 - 4

D. Fiber Content: 100 percent nylon 6.

E. Fiber Type: Eco Solution Qnylon.

F. Pile Characteristic: multi-level patten loop pile.

G. Density: 6,085 oz./cu. yd. (g/cu. cm).

H. Pile Thickness: 0.142 inch (mm) for finished carpet tile according to ASTM D 6859.

I. Stitches: 9.0 stitches per inch (mm).

J. Gage: 1/12 ends per inch (mm).

K. Surface Pile Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd. (g/sq. m).

L. Backing System: ecoworx tile.

M. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).

N. Applied Treatments:

1. Soil-Resistance Treatment: ssp, shaw soil protection.

2.2 CARPET TILE EM-1

A. Connexus.

B. Color: refer to finishes legend.

C. Pattern: refer to finishes legend.

D. Fiber Content: 100% asota solution-dyed U.V. stabilized polypropylene fibers.

E. Gauge: 1/2”.

F. Size: 19 11/16” x 19 11/16”.

2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile, and are recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.


July 31, 2015 096813 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance.

B. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

C. Concrete Slabs: Verify that finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" and that surfaces are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standards" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Concrete Substrates: Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by adhesive and carpet tile manufacturers.

D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRI's "CRI Carpet Installation Standard," Section 18, "Modular Carpet" and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Installation Method: Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive.

C. Maintain dye-lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

D. Maintain pile-direction patterns indicated on Drawings.

E. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.


July 31, 2015 096813 - 6

F. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on carpet tile as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.

I. Access Flooring: Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not fill seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI's "Carpet Installation Standard," Section 20, "Protecting Indoor Installations."

C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 099113 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Exterior Painting

July 31, 2015 099113 - 1

SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on [exterior substrates.] [the following exterior substrates:]

1. Steel and iron. 2. Galvanized metal. 3. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).


1. [Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing"] [Section 051213 "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing"] for shop priming of metal substrates.

2. Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming metal fabrications. 3. Section 055116 "Metal Floor Plate Stairs" for shop priming metal floor plate stairs. 4. Section 055119 "Metal Grating Stairs" for shop priming metal grating stairs. 5. Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings" for shop [priming] [painting] pipe and tube

railings. 6. [Section 055313 "Bar Gratings"] [Section 055316 "Plank Gratings"]

[Section 055319 "Expanded Metal Gratings"] for shop priming metal gratings. 7. Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings" for tile-like coatings. 8. Section 099300 "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for surface preparation and the

application of wood stains and transparent finishes on exterior wood substrates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. MPI Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

B. MPI Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

C. MPI Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

D. MPI Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


July 31, 2015 099113 - 2

E. MPI Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.

F. MPI Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.


A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

1. Include printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted.

2. Indicate VOC content.


1. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for VOC content of paints.>

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches (200 mm) square. 2. Apply coats on Samples in steps to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

E. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations.


A. Furnish extra materials [, from the same product run,] that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Paint: [5] <Insert number> percent, but not less than [1 gal. (3.8 L)] <Insert value> of each material and color applied.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system.

a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.


July 31, 2015 099113 - 3

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.



A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C).

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F (10 and 35 deg C).

B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide product] [provide one of the products] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products] listed in the Exterior Painting Schedule for the paint category indicated.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists."

B. Material Compatibility:

1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.


July 31, 2015 099113 - 4

2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

C. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for VOC content of paints.>

D. Colors: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [Match Architect's samples] [As indicated in a color schedule] <Insert requirements>.

1. [Ten] [Twenty] [Thirty] <Insert number> percent of surface area will be painted with deep tones.


A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency.

2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Fiber-Cement Board: 12 percent. 3. Masonry (Clay and CMUs): 12 percent. 4. Wood: 15 percent. 5. Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent. 6. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Portland Cement Plaster Substrates: Verify that plaster is fully cured.

D. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.


July 31, 2015 099113 - 5

E. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers.

F. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces or mortar joints exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer if any. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer[.] [ but not less than the following:]

1. SSPC-SP 2. 2. SSPC-SP 3. 3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4. 4. SSPC-SP 11.

G. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces.

H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

I. Aluminum Substrates: Remove loose surface oxidation.


July 31, 2015 099113 - 6

J. Wood Substrates:

1. Scrape and clean knots. Before applying primer, apply coat of knot sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for exterior use in paint system indicated.

2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic

wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

K. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual."

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final

installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat only. 3. Paint both sides and edges of exterior doors and entire exposed surface of exterior door

frames. 4. Paint entire exposed surface of window frames and sashes. 5. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,

identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 6. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed

or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers.

B. Tint undercoats same color as topcoat, but tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. in including spare fuses mounted in a fuse cabinet.al, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work:

1. Paint the following work where exposed to view:

a. Equipment, including panel boards [and switch gear]. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit.


July 31, 2015 099113 - 7

g. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. h. <Insert mechanical items to be painted>.


A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness.

1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint

manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Concrete Substrates, Nontraffic Surfaces:

1. Latex over Latex Aggregate System[ MPI EXT 3.1B]:

a. Prime Coat: Textured coating, latex, flat [, MPI #42].

1) <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.

b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1) [, MPI #10].


d. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, low sheen (MPI Gloss Level 3-4) [, MPI #15].


e. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5) [, MPI #11].


July 31, 2015 099113 - 8


f. Topcoat: Latex, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6)[, MPI #119].


2. Latex Aggregate System[ MPI EXT 3.1N]:

a. Prime Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. b. Intermediate Coat: As recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer. c. Topcoat: Textured coating, latex, nonflat[, MPI #41].


d. Topcoat: Textured coating, latex, flat [, MPI #42].


B. Steel and Iron Substrates:

1. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating System[ MPI EXT 5.1B] [MPI EXT 5.1C] [MPI EXT 5.1M] [MPI EXT 5.1N]:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, zinc rich, inorganic [, MPI #19].


b. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive for metal [, MPI #79].


c. Prime Coat: Primer, rust inhibitive, water based [ MPI #107].


d. Prime Coat: Primer, epoxy, anti-corrosive [ MPI #101].


e. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. f. Intermediate Coat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, matching

topcoat. g. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (MPI Gloss Level 3)

[, MPI #161].


h. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5) [, MPI #163].



July 31, 2015 099113 - 9

i. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6) [, MPI #164].


2. Water-Based Light Industrial Coating over Epoxy System[ MPI EXT 5.1R]:

a. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based (MPI Gloss Level 3) [, MPI #161].


b. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5) [, MPI #163].


c. Topcoat: Light industrial coating, exterior, water based, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6) [, MPI #164].


3. Alkyd System [MPI EXT 5.1D] [MPI EXT 5.1Q]:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anticorrosive, for metal [, MPI #79].


b. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. c. Prime Coat: Primer, metal, surface tolerant [, MPI #23].


d. Intermediate Coat: Exterior, alkyd enamel, matching topcoat. e. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1) [, MPI #8].


f. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5) [, MPI #94].


g. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6) [, MPI #9].


4. Aluminum Paint System[ MPI EXT 5.1K]:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal [, MPI #79].



July 31, 2015 099113 - 10

b. Prime Coat: Shop primer specified in Section where substrate is specified. c. Intermediate Coat: Aluminum paint, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Aluminum paint [, MPI #1].


C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Alkyd System[ MPI EXT 5.3B]:

a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, cementitious[, MPI #26].


b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior, alkyd enamel, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, flat (MPI Gloss Level 5) [, MPI #8].


d. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5) [, MPI #94].


e. Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, gloss (MPI Gloss Level 6) [, MPI #9].



Spokane Transit Authority Section 099123 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Painting

July 31, 2015 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting and finishing of exposed interior and exteri-or items and surfaces as defined in the Master Painters Institute (MPI) Architectural Painting Manual and the following:

1. Surface preparation, priming and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other Sections.

2. Special Preparation and repainting of existing surfaces.


1. Division 1 Section "Operation & Maintenance Data" for required product information for manuals.

2. Division 7 Section "Sealants" for caulking of interior joints at or adjacent to surfaces to be painted.

3. Division 5 Section, "Metal Fabrications" for shop-priming ferrous metal. 4. Division 8 Section, "Steel Door and Frames" for shop-priming steel doors and frames.

C. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designed in schedules, except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes avail-able.

1. Painting includes field-painting exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts, hangers, ex-posed steel and iron work and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equip-ment.

2. In general, conduit, ducts, piping and like material exposed in a room or area scheduled to be painted shall be painted, same color as the adjacent surface unless otherwise indi-cated.

D. Painting is not required on prefinished items (except as noted), finished metal surfaces, con-cealed surfaces, operating parts and labels.

1. Prefinished items not to be painted include the following factory-finished components:

a. Acoustic materials.


July 31, 2015 099123 - 2

b. Plastic laminated architectural casework. c. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. d. Light fixtures. e. Switchgear. f. Distribution cabinets. g. Flush wood paneling.

2. Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling surfaces in inaccessible are-as.

3. Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include:

a. Anodized and prefinished aluminum b. Stainless steel and Chromium plate. c. Copper, bronze and brass

4. Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating equipment such as the following:

a. Valve and damper operators b. Linkages c. Sensing devices d. Motor and fan shafts

5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory Mutual or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating or nomenclature plates.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for each paint system specified, including block fillers and primers.

1. Provide the manufacturer's technical information including label analysis and instructions for handling, storage and application of each material proposed for use.

2. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish system and application. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.

3. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets to Owner's Representative at least two weeks before material is delivered to the site.

C. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions on representative samples of the actual substrate.

1. Provide stepped samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color and texture are achieved.

2. Provide a list of material and application for each coat of each sample. Label each sam-ple as to location and application.


July 31, 2015 099123 - 3


A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting sys-tem applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project that have re-sulted in a construction record of successful in-service performance.

B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.

C. Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon re-quest from other trades, furnish information or characteristics of finish materials provided for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used.

D. Paint Grade: ‘Premium’ as defined by the MPI.

E. Employ only qualified journeymen in this painting and decorating work; apprentices may be employed on the project to work under the direction of qualified journeymen.

F. Conform to the standards contained in the Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Spec-ification Manual, latest edition (hereafter referred to as MPI Painting Specification Manual) for all painting products including preparation and application of materials. MPI Painting Specifi-cation Manual as issued by the local MPI Accredited Quality assurance Association having ju-risdiction.

G. All paint manufacturers and products used shall be as listed under the “Approved Products” sec-tion of the MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual.

1.5 BENCHMARK SAMPLES (MOCK-UPS)

A. Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for existing second floor toilet compartments. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submit-tals.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating and color.

a. Existing painted steel compartment: Provide samples on at least one well lit toilet stall panel.

2. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work. Provide required sheen, color and texture on each surface.

a. After finishes are accepted, Architect will use the surface to evaluate coating sys-tems of a similar nature.

3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING


July 31, 2015 099123 - 4

A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, unopened packaged and contain-ers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:

1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type) 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number.

B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean con-dition, free of foreign materials and residue.

1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application.

1.7 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C).

B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surround-ing air temperature are between 45 deg F (7 deg C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C).

C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during ap-plication and drying periods.

D. Do not proceed with any work under this Section unless a lighting level of a minimum of 15 candlepower per square foot is provided on the surfaces to be finished.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. All materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers, fillers, thinners, solvents, etc.) shall be in accordance with the MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual “Ap-proved Product” listing and shall be from a single manufacturer for each system used.

B. Other paint materials such as linseed oil, shellac, etc. shall be the highest quality product of an approved manufacturer listed in the MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual and shall be compatible with other coating materials as required.


July 31, 2015 099123 - 5

C. All materials and paints shall be lead and mercury free and shall have low VOC content where possible.

D. Manufacturer: Provide products according to the manufacturer and product identification listed in the Finishes Legend. Subject to conformance with requirements and properties of the prod-ucts listed, products of the following manufacturers will be considered.

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore) 2. Columbia Paint Co. (Columbia) 3. Fuller (Fuller) 4. Glidden Professional (Akzonobel). 5. Parker Paint Mfg. Company (Parker) 6. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (PPG) 7. Rodda Paint Co. (Rodda) 8. The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W) 9. ICI Paint.

2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat materials and related materi-als that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's product as specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification shall not be brought to the job site.

C. Paints shall comply with Green Seal Standard GS-11 points.

D. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chem-ical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a fab-rication or finishing shop:

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L. 2. Non-Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 150 g/L. 3. Anti-Corrosive Coatings: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 4. Varnishes and Sanding Sealers: VOC not more than 350 g/L. 5. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 6. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by

weight total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more ben-zene rings).

7. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium.


July 31, 2015 099123 - 6

g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1, 2-dicholorbenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. l. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde.

2.3 COLOR SCHEDULE

A. Where colors are identified by product names and numbers, provide perfect color match to the listed colors. "P" numbers refer to color identification in the Finishes Legend included in the Finish Schedule at the end of this Section.

2.4 GLOSS

A. MPI Gloss and Sheet Standards are now as follows: Gloss @ 60 Sheen @ 85

1. Gloss Level 1: A traditional matte finish – flat Max. 5 units Max. 10 units 2. Gloss Level 2: A high side sheen flat – ‘a velvet-like’ finishMax. 10 units 10 – 35 units 3. Gloss Level 3: A traditional ‘eggshell-like’ finish 10 – 25 units 10 – 35 units 4. Gloss Level 4: A ‘satin-like’ finish 20 – 35 units Min. 35 units 5. Gloss Level 5: A traditional semi-gloss 35 – 70 units 6. Gloss Level 6: A traditional gloss 70 – 85 units 7. Gloss Level 7: A high gloss More than 85 units

2.5 PAINT SCHEDULE

A. Exterior Surfaces: Paint exterior surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual requirements:

1. Structural Steel & Metal Fabrications:

a. EXT 5.1N: W. B. Light Industrial Coating (over epoxy primer).

B. Interior Surfaces: Paint interior surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual requirements:

1. Concrete Horizontal Surfaces: Exposed floors.

a. INT.3.2G: Concrete Floor Sealer (water-based).

2. Metal Fabrications: For steel exposed to view includes second floor toilet compartments.

a. INT 5.1B: High performance acrylic (Gloss Level 5) finish.

3. Galvanized Metal: Doors, frames, miscellaneous steel, pipes, ducts, acoustical deck, etc.


July 31, 2015 099123 - 7

a. INT 5.3B: High performance acrylic (Gloss Level 5) finish.

4. Dressed Lumber and MDF: Including trim, casings, etc.

a. INT 6.3A: Latex (Gloss Level 4) finish.

5. Gypsum Board: Gypsum wallboard, drywall, “sheet rock type material,” etc.

a. INT 9.2B: High performance acrylic (Gloss Level 3, except in Toilet Rooms, Cus-todial Rooms and Electrical Room where Level 5 is required. Gloss Level 2 at ceilings except for Gloss Level 5 where Gloss Level 5 is required on walls) finish.

6. Concrete Masonry Units:

a. Int 4.2.D: High Performance Architectural Latex; (gloss level 3) finish.

7. Acoustic Panels and Tiles (Tectum):

a. Int 9.3.E: High Performance Architectural Latex; (gloss level 2) finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. Surfaces receiving paint must be thoroughly dry before paint is applied.

1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and condi-

tions within a particular area.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fix-tures and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items, if necessary, to com-pletely paint the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved.

B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatment, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.

C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified.


July 31, 2015 099123 - 8

1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. Notify Architect in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish-coat material with sub-strates primed by others.

2. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits and sandpaper as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.

a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.

b. Prime, stain or seal wood to be painted immediately upon delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides and backsides of wood including cabinets, trim, counters, cases and paneling.

c. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Backprime paneling on interior partitions where masonry, plaster or other wet wall

construction occurs on backside. e. Seal tops, bottoms and cutouts of primed or unprimed wood doors with a heavy

coat of varnish, primer or sealer immediately upon delivery.

3. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop-coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use sol-vent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).

a. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat.

4. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from gal-vanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.

5. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, cement plaster and reinforced concrete panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation.

a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the coating manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate

tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish coating to blister and burn, correct this condition before coating application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in the manufacturer's printed direc-tions.

6. Toilet Compartments and Urinal Screens: Use mechanical cleaning methods to remove dirt, grease, oils and sheen for superior paint adhesion to original finish on steel.

3.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EXISTING SURFACES SCHEDULED FOR REPAINT


July 31, 2015 099123 - 9

A. General: Reference is made to the MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual for the terminology used to describe the existing conditions. This information is not intended to permit or encourage the Bidder/Contractor to forgo site visits and inspections to determine actual con-ditions before the Contract is awarded.

3.4 MATERIALS PREPARATION

A. General: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's directions.

1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of for-eign materials or residue.

2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using.

3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended lim-its.

B. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where mul-tiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

3.5 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.

B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.

1. Paint surface treatments and finishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the appli-

cation method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coats has cured as rec-ommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce a smooth even surface according to the manufacturer's directions.

4. Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds and exposed fasteners re-ceive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

5. The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles and similar components are in place. Extend coating in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection.

6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed sur-faces. Before the final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint.


July 31, 2015 099123 - 10

8. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed sur-faces.

9. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted. 10. Paint unfinished wood cleats, underside of casework, desk tops and similar items.

C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or other-wise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent sur-face deterioration.

1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the under-coat to lift or lose adhesion.

D. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray or other applicators according to the manufacturer's directions and requirements of the surface to be painted.

1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by

the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size and recommended by

the manufacturer for the material and texture required.

E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's recommend-ed spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of not less than 4.0 mils for the entire sys-tem of prime and finish coats for three coat work, or 2.5 mils where two coat work is specified.

F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime-coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

G. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evi-dence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks or other surface imperfections.

H. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uni-form finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.

I. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not complying with specified requirements.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish and other discarded paint materials from the site.


July 31, 2015 099123 - 11

1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished sur-faces.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing and repainting as acceptable to the Architect.

B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.

1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 101100 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Visual Display Boards

July 31, 2015 101100 - 1

SECTION 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section the following:

1. Cork faced tackboards


1. Division 6 Section “Miscellaneous Carpentry” for wood blocking and grounds.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of visual display board indicated. Include individual panel weights for sliding markerboard units.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of visual display board required.

1. Include dimensioned elevations. Show location of joints between individual panels where unit dimensions exceed maximum panel length.

2. Include sections of typical trim members. 3. Show anchors, grounds, reinforcement, accessories, layout and installation details.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain visual display boards through one source from a single manufactur-er.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the follow-ing:

1. Tackboards:


July 31, 2015 101100 - 2

a. Best-Rite Chalkboard Co. b. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. c. Ghent Manufacturing, Inc. d. Greensteel, Inc. e. Lemco, Inc. f. PBS Supply, Inc. g. Nelson Adams Company

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Plastic-Impregnated-Cork Tackboard: ¼-inch (6-mm-) thick, plastic-impregnated cork sheet factory laminated to ¼-inch- (6mm-) thick hardboard backing.

1. Backing: Factory laminate cork face sheet under pressure to 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) thick fi-berboard backing.

2. Size: 4 foot by 6 foot. 3. Color: As selected from manufacturer’s standard colors.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Metal Trim and Accessories: Fabricate frames and trim of not less than 0.062-inch- (1.57 mm) thick, extruded-aluminum allow, size and shape as indicated, to suit type of installation. Pro-vide straight, single-length units. Keep joints to a minimum. Miter corners to a neat hairline closure.

1. Where size of visual display boards or other conditions require support in addition to normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or as selected by Ar-chitect from manufacturer’s standard structural support accessories to suit conditions in-dicated.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Assembly: Provide factory-assembled markerboard and tackboard units, unless field-assembled units are required.

1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to Archi-tect.

2.5 FINISHES

A. General: Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Prod-ucts” for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by the Aluminum Asso-ciation for designing aluminum finishes.


July 31, 2015 101100 - 3

C. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: Nonspecular as fabricat-ed; Chemical Finish: Etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 607.1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine wall surfaces, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other con-ditions affecting installation of visual display boards.

1. Surfaces to receive tackboards shall be dry and free of substances that would impair the bond between tackboards and substrate.

2. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Deliver factory-built visual display boards completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. If dimensions exceed panel size, provide two or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to the Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site. Use splines at joints to maintain surface alignment.

B. Install units in locations and at mounting heights indicated and according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Keep perimeter lines straight, plumb and level. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, brackets, anchors, trim and accessories necessary for complete installation. Do not use adhesives to mount marker board or tack boards.

C. Coordinate Project-site-assembled units with grounds, trim and accessories. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 101419 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Signs

July 31, 2015 101419 - 1

SECTION 101419 - SIGNS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Acrylic panel signs. 2. Dimensional characters (letters) for exterior and interior use.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of sign.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show mounting methods, grounds, mounting heights, layout, spacing, reinforcement, accessories, and installation details.

1. Provide message list for each sign, including large-scale details of wording, lettering, and Braille layout.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each sign type through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Interior Code Signage: Provide signage as required by accessibility regulations and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. These include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Signs for Accessible Spaces: Entry and Toilet Rooms



July 31, 2015 101419 - 2

A. Field Measurements: Where sizes of signs are determined by dimensions of surfaces on which they are installed, verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, advise installers of anchorage devices about specific requirements for placement of anchorage devices and similar items to be used for attaching signs.

1. For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction, furnish full size templates for installation of anchorage devices.

2. Custom anchor mounting positions required of manufacturer on all permanently anchored dimensioned lettering and feature wall panels.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.2 PANEL SIGNS

A. General: Provide panel signs that comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction.

1. Produce smooth panel sign surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) measured diagonally.

B. Manufacturers:

1. Allenite Signs; Allen Marking Products, Inc. 2. American Graphics Inc. 3. Andco Industries Corp. 4. APCO Graphics, Inc. 5. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. 6. Best Manufacturing Co. 7. Grimco, Inc. 8. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 9. Kaltech Industries Group, Inc. 10. Mills Manufacturing, Inc. 11. Mohawk Sign Systems. 12. Seton Identification Products. 13. Signature Signs, Inc.


July 31, 2015 101419 - 3

14. Supersine Company (The). 15. L&L Architectural Signs. 16. Art Source.

C. Cast-Acrylic Sheet:

1. Color: Match existing or as indicated on Sign Type included in this Section.

D. Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and smoothly finished to comply with the following requirements:

1. Edge Condition: Square cut. 2. Corner Condition: Square.

E. Laminated Panels: Permanently laminate face panels to backing sheets of material; use manufacturer's standard process.

F. Graphic Content and Style: Provide sign copy that matches existing signs or complies with requirements indicated in the Sign Schedule and on Drawings for size, style, spacing, content, mounting height and location, material, finishes, and colors of signage.

G. Tactile and Braille Copy: Manufacturer's standard process for producing copy complying with ADA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks.

1. Panel Material: Clear acrylic sheet with opaque color coating, subsurface applied. 2. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

H. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide Pantone Matching System (PMS) at colored coatings during submittals, including inks and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are nonfading for application intended.

2.3 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. A.R.K. Ramos. 2. ASI Sign Systems, Inc. 3. Charleston Industries, Inc. 4. Gemini Incorporated. 5. Grimco, Inc. 6. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 7. Kaltech Industries Group, Inc. 8. Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg. 9. Mills Manufacturing, Inc. 10. Mohawk Sign Systems. 11. Signature Sign Signs, Inc. 12. Southwell Co. (The).


July 31, 2015 101419 - 4

13. L&L Architectural Signs 14. Art Source.

B. Interior Fabricated Characters: Fabricate letters to required sizes, using .50 thick brushed aluminum. Form exposed faces and sides of characters to produce surfaces free from warp and distortion. Include internal bracing for stability and attachment of mounting accessories. Comply with requirements indicated for finish, style, and size.

1. Font:

a. San Serif Bold.

2. Size: As indicated on Sign Type drawings. 3. Adhered directly to surface indicated on Sign Type drawings. 4. Aluminum.

2.4 PANEL SIGN TYPES

A. Toilet Room Signs:

1. Material: Cast-acrylic sheet. 2. Perimeter: Unframed. 3. Copy: Raised. 4. Character Style: Arial or match existing. 5. Text: MEN, WOMEN. 6. Message: Fixed. 7. Sizes:

a. Sign: 7" x 7" b. Character: 1-inch- (25-mm-) high characters.

8. Colors:

a. Character: White b. Background: Safety Blue

B. Symbols of Accessibility: Provide 5-inch- high symbol fabricated from opaque nonreflective vinyl film, 0.0035-inch (0.089-mm) nominal thickness, with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing suitable for both exterior and interior applications.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Vinyl Film: Provide opaque nonreflective vinyl film, 0.0035-inch (0.089-mm) minimum thickness, with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing suitable for both exterior and interior applications.

B. Mounting Methods: Use concealed fasteners, double-sided vinyl tape or silicone adhesive fabricated from materials that are not corrosive to sign material and mounting surface.


July 31, 2015 101419 - 5

C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.


July 31, 2015 101419 - 6


A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


A. Clear Finish: Natural satin finish with clear polyurethane protective coat.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, provided under other sections of Work are sized and located to accommodate signs.

C. Examine supporting members to ensure that surfaces are at elevations indicated or required to comply with authorities having jurisdiction and are free from dirt and other deleterious matter.



July 31, 2015 101419 - 7

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free from distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Install signs according to Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements for mounting heights and clearances.

B. Wall-Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using methods indicated below:

1. Vinyl-Tape Mounting: Use double-sided foam tape to mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.

2. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid-silicone adhesive recommended in writing by sign manufacturer to attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. Use double-sided vinyl tape to hold sign in place until adhesive has fully cured.

3. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, concealed aluminum shim plates with predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting methods are not practicable. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate. Attach panel signs to plate using method specified above.

4. Where panel signs are scheduled or indicated to be mounted on glass, provide matching plate on opposite side of glass to conceal mounting materials.

C. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods recommended in writing by manufacturer for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing and to locate holes for fasteners.

1. Surface Mounting: Mount characters to surface as indicated on drawings.


A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 102113.13 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Metal Toilet Compartments

July 31, 2015 102113.13 - 1

SECTION 102113.13 - METAL TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes painted steel toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens.


1. Section 061053 "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for blocking. 2. Section 102800 "Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab

bars, purse shelves, and similar accessories mounted on toilet compartments.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for toilet compartments.

B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories. 3. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment-mounted grab bars and locations of

blocking for surface-mounted toilet accessories. 4. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. 5. Show locations of floor drains. 6. Show overhead support or bracing locations.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated:

1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for toilet compartments, prepared on 6-inch- (152-mm-) square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.


July 31, 2015 102113.13 - 2


A. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible.

2.2 PAINTED STEEL TOILET COMPARTMENTS

A. Manufacturers - Provide products from one of the following:

1. General Partitions Manufacturing Co. 2. Global Partitions; ASI Group. 3. Hadrian Manufacturing, Inc. 4. Accurate Partitions Corporation 5. Bradley Corporation

B. Toilet-Enclosure Style: Overhead braced.

C. Urinal-Screen Style: Wall hung, integral flange.

D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Seamless, metal facing sheets pressure laminated to core material; with continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped-and-formed edge closures; corners secured by welding or clips and exposed welds ground smooth. Exposed surfaces shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections.

1. Core Material: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin-impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch (25 mm) for doors and panels and 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for pilasters.

2. Grab-Bar Reinforcement: Provide concealed internal reinforcement for grab bars mounted on units of size and material adequate for panel to withstand applied downward load on grab bar of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446, without deformation of panel.

3. Tapping Reinforcement: Provide concealed reinforcement for tapping (threading) at locations where machine screws are used for attaching items to units.

E. Urinal-Screen Construction:


July 31, 2015 102113.13 - 3

1. Integral-Flange, Wall-Hung Urinal Screen: Similar to panel construction, with integral full-height flanges for wall attachment, and maximum 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) thick.

F. Facing Sheets and Closures: Electrolytically coated steel or hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet with nominal base-metal (uncoated) thicknesses as follows:

1. Pilasters, Braced at Both Ends: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.036 inch (0.91 mm).

2. Panels: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.030 inch (0.76 mm). 3. Doors: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.030 inch (0.76 mm). 4. Integral-Flange, Wall-Hung Urinal Screens: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not

less than 0.030 inch (0.76 mm). 5. Wedge-Shaped, Wall-Hung Urinal Screens: Manufacturer's standard thickness, but not

less than 0.036 inch (0.91 mm).

G. Pilaster Shoes: Stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.031-inch (0.79-mm) nominal thickness and 3 inches (76 mm) high, finished to match hardware.

H. Brackets (Fittings):

1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets; clear-anodized aluminum or stainless steel.

I. Steel Sheet Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard baked-on finish, including thermosetting, electrostatically applied, and powder coatings. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking.

1. Color: Match Architect’s sample: Hadrian Inc., powder coated, anti-graffiti type, Dovetail No. 828.

a. Allow for application of one color in each room.

2.3 HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories.

1. Hinges: Manufacturer's minimum 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) thick, stainless-steel continuous, cam type that swings to a closed or partially open position, allowing emergency access by lifting door. Mount with through-bolts.

2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty, surface-mounted, cast stainless-steel latch unit designed to resist damage due to slamming, with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper and with provision for emergency access. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through-bolts.

3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's heavy-duty, break away, combination cast stainless-steel hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. Mount with through-bolts.

4. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's heavy-duty, rubber-tipped, cast stainless-steel bumper at out-swinging doors. Mount with through-bolts.


July 31, 2015 102113.13 - 4

5. Door Pull: Manufacturer's heavy-duty cast stainless-steel pull at out-swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. Mount with through-bolts.

B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.

C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft-resistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot-dip galvanized steel, or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel compatible with related materials.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.

B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).

C. Brass Castings: ASTM B 584.

D. Brass Extrusions: ASTM B 455.

E. Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet for exposed applications; mill phosphatized and selected for smoothness.

1. Electrolytically Zinc Coated: ASTM A 879/A 879M, 01Z (03G). 2. Hot-Dip Galvanized: ASTM A 653/A 653M, either hot-dip galvanized or galvannealed.

F. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

G. Stainless-Steel Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication, General: Fabricate toilet compartment components to sizes indicated. Coordinate requirements and provide cutouts for through-partition toilet accessories, and solid blocking within panel where required for attachment of toilet accessories.

B. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.

C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide, in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- (914-mm-) wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- (813-mm-) wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.


July 31, 2015 102113.13 - 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for fastening, support, alignment, operating clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Confirm location and adequacy of blocking and supports required for installation.


C. Coordinate layout and installation of supports, inserts, and anchors built into other units of work for toilet compartment anchorage.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position indicated with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices.

1. Maximum Clearances:

a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch (13 mm). b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch (25 mm).

2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel.

a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.

B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.

C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging doors to return doors to fully closed position.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 102600 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Wall and Door Protection

July 31, 2015 102600 - 1

SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Corner guards.



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following products, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Corner Guards: 12 inches (300 mm) long. Include example top caps.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain wall- and door-protection products from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 CORNER GUARDS

A. Surface-Mounted, Metal Corner Guards: Fabricated as one piece from formed or extruded metal with formed edges; with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.

1. Material: Extruded aluminum, minimum 0.0625 inch (1.6 mm) thick, with clear anodic finish.

2. Wing Size: Nominal 2-1/2 by 2-1/2 inches (65 by 65 mm). 3. Corner Radius: 1/8 inch (3 mm). 4. Mounting: Adhesive.


July 31, 2015 102600 - 2

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Adhesive: As recommended by protection product manufacturer.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate wall and door protection according to requirements indicated for design, performance, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.

B. Quality: Fabricate components with uniformly tight seams and joints and with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.

2.5 FINISHES

A. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances [, fire rating,] and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls to which wall and door protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners.

1. For wall and door protection attached with adhesive, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing wall and door protection.

B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Installation Quality: Install wall and door protection according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work.


July 31, 2015 102600 - 3

B. Mounting Heights: Install wall and door protection in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean using a standard ammonia-based household cleaning agent.

B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 102800 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories

July 31, 2015 102800 - 1

SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section Include the following:

1. Toilet and bath accessories.

B. Related Sections Include the following:

1. Division 10 Section “Toilet Compartments” for compartments and screens. 2. Division 22 for underlavatory guards. 3. Division 6 Section “Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry” for blocking..

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions and thicknesses, dimensions, profiles, fastening and mounting methods, specified options, and finishes for each type of accessory specified.

B. Setting Drawings: For cutouts required in other work; include templates substrate preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchoring devices.

C. Maintenance Data: For accessories to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Provide lists of replacement parts and service recommendations.


A. Source Limitations: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas, unless otherwise approved by Architect.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by disabled persons, proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.


July 31, 2015 102800 - 2

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.

C. Coordinate location of appropriate backing for surface-mounted accessories, including Owner provided accessories.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Document.

B. Manufacturer’s Mirror Warranty: Written warranty, executed by mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects within minimum warranty period indicated.

1. Minimum Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide accessories by one of the following:

1. Toilet and Bath Accessories:

a. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. b. American Specialties, Inc. c. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. d. Bradley Corporation. e. General Accessory manufacturing Co. (GAMCO). f. McKinney/Subsidiary Kidde, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, with No. 4 finish (satin), in 0.0312-inch (0.8-mm) minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Brass: ASTM B 19, leaded and unleaded flat products; ASTM B 16 (ASTM B 16M), rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.

C. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 366/A 366M, cold rolled, commercial quality, 0.0359-inch (0.9-mm) minimum nominal thickness; surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied finish.

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 (Z180).


July 31, 2015 102800 - 3

E. Chromium Plating: ASTM B 456, Service Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service), nickel plus chromium electrodeposited on base metal.

F. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, electroplated copper coating, and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M-411.

G. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

H. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: One, maximum 1-1/2-inch- (3/8-mm-) diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed face of accessories. On interior surface not exposed to view or back surface of accessory, provide printed, waterproof label or stamped nameplate indicating manufacturer’s name and product model number.

B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate unites with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with continuous stainless-steel hinge. Provide concealed anchorage where possible.

C. Framed Glass-Mirror Units: Fabricate frames for glass-mirror units to accommodate glass edge protection material. Provide mirror backing and support system that permits rigid, tamper-resistant glass installation and prevents moisture accumulation.

1. Provide galvanized steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch (0.85 mm) and full mirror size, with nonabsorptive filler material. Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material.

D. Mirror-Unit Hangers: Provide mirror-unit mounting system that permits rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, as follows:

1. Heavy-duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove.

E. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner’s representative.

2.4 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORY SCHEDULE

A. General: Products of a single manufacturer are specified to establish general properties and level of quality for each type of accessory unit required. Products of other listed manufacturers will be acceptable where differences do not detract from function or appearance, as judged by the Architect. Provide all units indicated on drawings as work of this section, except where specified as OFOI.

B. Grab Bars: Provide stainless-steel grab bars complying with the following:


July 31, 2015 102800 - 4

1. Products: Bobrick B6806 Series. 2. Stainless-Steel Nominal Thickness: Minimum 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) (18 gauge). 3. Mounting: Concealed mounting. 4. Gripping Surfaces: Smooth, satin finish. 5. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) for heavy duty applications.

C. Mop and Broom Holder: Provide mop and broom holder complying with the following:

1. Products: Bobrick B-223x36. 2. Holder: 36-inch- long unit fabricated of minimum nominal 1.2-mm- thick, stainless-steel

hat channel with four spring-loaded, rubber, cam-type, mop/broom holders. 3. Mounting Height: 54 inches above finished floor, centered over mop sinks. 4. Location: Provide quantity (1) one at each Janitor Room.

D. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Unit: Provide stainless-steel sanitary napkin disposal unit complying with the following:

1. Products: Bobrick B-270. 2. Surface-Mounted Type: With seamless exposed walls; self-closing top cover; locking

bottom panel with stainless-steel, continuous hinge; and removable, reusable receptacle.

E. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: Provide toilet tissue dispenser complying with the following:

1. Products: Bobrick B-2740. 2. Type: Double-roll dispenser. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted with concealed anchorage. 4. Material: Satin-finish, Type 304 stainless steel with all welded construction with tumbler

lock. All locks to be keyed alike with other toilet accessories. 5. Operation: Unit shall dispense two standard rolls. Extra roll shall automatically drop in

place with bottom roll is depleted. Unit shall be equipped with two theft-resistant, heavy-duty, one-piece, molded polyethylene spindles.

6. Capacity: Designed for 5-1/2-inch-diameter-core tissue rolls.

F. Mirror Unit: Provide mirror unit complying with the following:

1. Products: Bobrick B-290 1830 and B-290 2436. 2. Stainless-Steel, Angle-Framed Mirror: Fabricate frame from minimum nominal 0.05-

inch- (1.3-mm-) thick stainless-steel angles, with square corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.

3. Location: See elevations. 4. Size: See elevations. 5. Integral shelf 5 inches deep.

G. Horizontal Wall-Mounted Baby Changing Station:

1. Product: Koala Kare, KB200-00. 2. Description: Injection-molded polystyrene with pneumatic cylinder for control of bed

operation. Anti-microbial plastic on changing surface. Built-in bed line dispenser.

H. Owner Furnished Contractor Installed (OFCI):


July 31, 2015 102800 - 5

1. Liquid soap dispensers, wall mounted. 2. Paper towel dispensers.

I. Paper Towel (Roll) Dispenser PTD:

1. Products: Bobrick B-2860. 2. Description: Lever-actuated mechanism permitting controlled delivery of paper rolls in

preset lengths per stroke. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Minimum Capacity: 8-inch (203-mm-) wide, 800-foot- (244-m-) long roll. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 6. Lockset: Tumbler type.

J. Liquid-Soap Dispenser SD:

1. Products: Bobrick B-40. 2. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form. 3. Mounting: Vertically oriented, surface mounted. 4. Capacity: 40 fluid oz. 5. Materials: Grey high impact resistant ABS push button and spout. Container black

translucent ABS. 6. Lockset: Tumbler type.

K. Seat-Cover Dispenser SCD:

1. Products: Bobrick B-221. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Minimum Capacity: 250 seat covers. 4. Exposed Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Lockset: Tumbler type.

L. OFOI: Waste Receptacles.

2.5 WARM-AIR DRYERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain warm-air dryers from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Warm-Air Dryer (WAD):

1. Products: Bobrick B-748 Vandal Resistant. 2. Description: Standard-speed, warm-air hand dryer. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Operation: Electronic-sensor activated with timed power cut-off switch. 5. Cover Material and Finish: Chrome-plated steel. 6. Electrical Requirements: 208-240V, 9-10 Amp, 1900-2400 W.


July 31, 2015 102800 - 6

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamper-resistant manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units level, plumb, and square at locations indicated, according to manufacturer’s written instructions for substrate indicated.

C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf (1112 N), when tested according to ASTM F 446.


A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation and verify that mechanisms function properly. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 104413 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Fire-Extinguisher Cabinets

July 31, 2015 104413 - 1

SECTION 104413 - FIRE-EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Includes:

1. Fire-protection cabinets for the following:

a. Portable fire extinguishers.

2. Fire-protection accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection specialties.

1. Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed cabinet finish required, prepared on samples of size indicated below and of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. If finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected.

1. Size: 6-by-6-inch- (150-by-150-mm-) square samples.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and cabinets through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


July 31, 2015 104413 - 2

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Portable Fire Extinguishers (Basis of Specification – Larsen’s Manufacturing Co. Series “MP”):

a. J.L. Industries, Inc. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. c. Potter-Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.

2. Fire-Protection Cabinets (Basis of Specification – Larsen’s Manufacturing Co. “Architectural Series” semi-recessed AL 2409-6R (FEC-1):

a. J.L. Industries, Inc. b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. c. Potter-Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: Carbon steel, complying with ASTM A 366/A 366M, commercial quality, stretcher leveled, temper rolled.

B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows:

1. Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).

2.3 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINETS

A. Cabinet Construction: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

1. Cabinet Metal: Aluminum sheet. 2. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.

B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for the following:

1. Fire extinguisher.

C. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for the following mounting conditions:

1. Semirecessed: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style of trim indicated.

D. Semirecessed Cabinet Trim Style: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with rolled edges.


July 31, 2015 104413 - 3

1. Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

a. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) backbend depth.

E. Cabinet on existing walls: Surface mounted, cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall with no trim.

F. Cabinet Trim Material: Manufacturer's standard, as follows:

1. Aluminum sheet.

G. Door Material: Manufacturer's standard, as follows:

1. Aluminum sheet.

H. Door Glazing: Manufacturer’s standard, as follows:

1. Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, King FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 mm.

I. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design, as follows:

1. Vertical duo panel with frame.

J. Door Construction: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, of materials indicated, and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

1. Provide minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick door frames, fabricated with tubular stiles and rails, and hollow-metal design.

2. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.

K. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam-action latch, or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Break-Glass Strike: Provide manufacturer’s standard metal strike, complete with chain and mounting clip, secured to cabinet.

B. Lettered Door Handle: Provide one-piece, cast-iron door handle with the work “FIRE” embossed into face.

C. Door Locks: Provide emergency release cam-lock based design, “Larsen Lock”.

D. Identification: Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.


July 31, 2015 104413 - 4

1. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to door.

a. Application Process: Silk-screened. b. Lettering Color: Red. c. Orientation: Vertical.


A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

B. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish: Nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 607.1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semirecessed cabinets are to be installed.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing fire-protection specialties.

B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Prepare recesses for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. 2. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION


July 31, 2015 104413 - 5

A. Adjust cabinet doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Refinish or replace cabinets and doors damaged during installation.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that cabinets and doors are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 115000 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Equipment

July 31, 2015 116123 - 1

SECTION 115000 - EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes:

1. Illuminated Drum Clock. 2. Cash Drawer. 3. Keyboard Tray. 4. Intercom – Table Mount. 5. Mounting Bracket System for CAD/AVL Monitors Ceiling Mounted Type. 6. Flat Panel Swing Arm Wall Display Mount. 7. Monitor Pole Mount.


1. Division 6 Section “Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets” for coordination with equipment to be built-in and supported.

2. Division 6 Section “Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry” for blocking. 3. Division 5 Section “Metal Fabrications”. 4. Division 12 Section “Quartz Agglomerate Countertops”

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each equipment item specified.

B. Shop Drawings: Anchorage details and wiring diagrams for electrically operated units.

PART 2 - GENERAL

2.1 ILLUMINATED DRUM CLOCK

A. Basis of Design: Americlock, Inc. 2240 Mason Lane, St. Louis, MO 63021, www.americlock.com, Phone (636)527-2277, Fax (636)527-3322.

B. Clock: Two 40” diameter double-sided aluminum drum clocks with custom mounting brackets. Clocks will come with vinyl roman numerals in the style of your choice which will be mounted on ¼” thick white acrylic dials. A custom wall bracket will hold the drum clocks in place and bolt to your frame. The two single sided clocks will be internally illuminated using energy efficient white LED lights that have a 50,000 hour life span. These lights will light up the clock efficiently without creating hotspots or shadows. Two (2) sets of hands of in the style of your choice will be properly reinforced and appropriately balanced, and primed and painted in the same color as the numerals. The hands will be driven by Two (2) type I231 self-starting electric


July 31, 2015 116123 - 2

movements with stainless steel spindles and brass gears, and controlled by One (1) Tempus controller. The Tempus controller will regulate the clock movements with absolute accuracy. This Tempus controller is maintenance free, has a 10 year lifetime built-in lithium battery and corrects the time automatically after power outages, including Daylight Savings Time twice a year. The clock will be painted with a Polyeurethane acrylic paint to match any color.

2.2 CASH DRAWER

A. Basis of Design: Vasario 1313 Standard Duty with US Till. APG Cash Drawer, LLC 5250 Industrial Blvd. N.E., Minneapolis, NB 55421, [email protected], Phone (763)571-5000, Fax (763)571-5771.

2.3 KEYBOARD TRAY

A. Basis of Design: Banana Board by Workrite ergonomics, http://workriteergo.com/banana-board.

B. Complete System with removable memory foam insert, built-in document holder and cord manager. Includes Pinnacles 2 keyboard arm with maintenance-free 17” or 22” ball bearing track.

C. Color: Black.

2.4 INTERCOM – TABLE MOUNT

A. Basis of Design: TTU – 3/16” Continuous Power Unit Complete. Housing 6”. Norcon Communications, Inc., 510 Burnside Ave, Inwood L.I., NY 11096, www.norcon.org, Phone (516)239-0300, Fax (516)239-8915.

2.5 MOUNTING BRACKET SYSTEM FOR MONITORS – CEILING MOUNTED TYPE

A. Basis of Design: Fusion Large Ceiling Back-to-Back 3x1 Menu Board by Chief Manufacturing of Milestone AV Technologies, www.chiefmfg.com, 6436 City West Parkway, Eden Prairie, MN 55344, Phone (800)582-6480, Fax (877)894-6918.

B. Mounting Bracket: Part # LCB3x1U. 2 each CMSO406 CMS Extension Columns at each location. 2 each CMA-372 Mount at each location.

2.6 FLAT PANEL SWING ARM WALL DISPLAY MOUNT

A. Basis of Design: Chief Manufacturing of Milestone AV Technologies, www.chiefmfg.com.

B. Mounting Bracket: Part # PNRUB.


July 31, 2015 116123 - 3

2.7 MONITOR POLE MOUNT

A. Basis of Design: Chief Manufacturing of Milestone AV Technologies, www.chiefmfg.com.

B. Pole Mount: Model TPMU Universal 37-61” with Interface Bracket PSBU included. Weight capacity 150 lbs (69 kg), Color: black.

PART 3 - GENERAL

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install equipment at locations indicated to comply with manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Test equipment after installation to confirm that the item is fully functioning.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 123640 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Stone Countertops

July 31, 2015 123640 - 1

SECTION 123640 - STONE COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes stone countertops.


1. Section 123661 "Simulated Stone Countertops" for [cultured-marble] [solid-surface] [and] [quartz-agglomerate] countertops.


A. Product Data: For each [variety of stone,] stone accessory, and manufactured product.


1. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for regional materials.> 2. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for adhesives.>

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Show locations and details of joints. 2. Show direction of veining, grain, or other directional pattern.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. For each stone type indicated, in sets of Samples not less than 12 inches (300 mm) square. Include [two] [three] or more Samples in each set and show the full range of variations in appearance characteristics expected in completed Work.



B. Material Test Reports:

1. Stone Test Reports: For[ each] stone variety proposed for use on Project, by a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with required physical properties, according to


July 31, 2015 123640 - 2

referenced ASTM standards. Base reports on testing done within previous [three] [five] <Insert number> years.

2. Sealant Compatibility and Adhesion Test Report: From sealant manufacturer indicating that sealants will not stain or damage stone.


A. Maintenance Data: For stone countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include product data for stone-care products used or recommended by Installer, and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate stone countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of stone countertops.

C. Mockup: Build mockup to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical countertop as shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockup may become part of the


1.7 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Sealant Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for compatibility and adhesion testing according to sealant manufacturer's standard testing methods and Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," Samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.


A. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, and other causes.

1. Lift stone with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move stone, if required, using dollies with cushioned wood supports.

2. Store stone on wood A-frames or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to stone. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation.


July 31, 2015 123640 - 3


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of construction to receive stone countertops by field measurements before fabrication [and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings].

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations for Stone: Obtain [each variety of] stone, [regardless of finish,] from a single quarry [, whether specified in this Section or in another Section of the Specifications,] with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties.

1. For stone types that include same list of varieties and sources, provide same variety from same source for each.

2. Make stone slabs available for examination by Architect.

a. Architect will select aesthetically acceptable slabs [and will indicate aesthetically unacceptable portions of slabs].

b. Segregate slabs selected for use on Project and mark backs indicating approval. c. Mark and photograph aesthetically unacceptable portions of slabs as directed by

Architect.

B. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide stone of varieties and from sources complying with Section 044200 "Exterior Stone Cladding."

2.2 GRANITE <Insert drawing designation>

A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 615.

B. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for regional stone materials.>

C. Description: Uniform, [fine] [medium]-grained, [white] [pink] [gray] [black] <Insert color> stone [without veining].

D. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available stone varieties that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

1. <Insert, in separate subparagraphs, names of varieties and producers, distributors, or importers>.

E. Cut: [Vein] [Fleuri].

F. Cut stone from contiguous, matched slabs in which natural markings occur.

G. Finish: [Polished] [Honed] [Thermal] [As indicated] [Match Architect's sample] <Insert finish>.


July 31, 2015 123640 - 4

H. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects.

2.3 MARBLE <Insert drawing designation>

A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 503[, Classification I Calcite] [, Classification II Dolomite] [, Group A] [, Group B] [, Group C] [, Group D].

1. Stone Abrasion Resistance: Minimum value of [10] <Insert value>, based on testing according to ASTM C 241/C 241M or ASTM C 1353.


C. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained, [white] <Insert color> stone with only slight veining.



E. Cut: [Vein] [Fleuri].

F. Cut stone from contiguous, matched slabs in which natural markings occur.

G. Finish: [Polished] [Honed] [As indicated] [Match Architect's sample] <Insert finish>.

H. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects.

2.4 SERPENTINE <Insert drawing designation>

A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 1526[, Classification I Exterior] [, Classification II Interior].



C. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available stone varieties that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:


D. Cut stone from contiguous, matched slabs in which natural markings occur.


July 31, 2015 123640 - 5

E. Finish: [Polished] [Honed] [As indicated] [Match Architect's sample] <Insert finish>.

F. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects.

2.5 SLATE <Insert drawing designation>

A. Material Standard: Comply with ASTM C 629[, Classification I Exterior] [, Classification II Interior].



C. Description: [Black] [Blue-black] [Gray] [Blue-gray] [Green] [Purple] [Mottled purple and green] [Red] slate with a fine, even grain [and unfading color,] from clear, sound stock.



E. Finish: [Honed] [Sand rubbed] [Natural cleft] [As indicated] [Match Architect's sample] <Insert finish>.

F. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects.

2.6 OTHER STONE <Insert drawing designation>

A. Material Standards:

1. Maximum Absorption per ASTM C 97/C 97: <Insert value>. 2. Minimum Compressive Strength per ASTM C 170/C 170M: <Insert value>. 3. Minimum Flexural Strength per ASTM C 880/C 880: <Insert value>. 4. Minimum Stone Abrasion Resistance per ASTM C 241/C 241M or ASTM C 1353: [10]

<Insert value>.


C. Varieties and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available stone varieties that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:



July 31, 2015 123640 - 6

D. Finish: [Polished] [Honed] [Sand rubbed] [Natural cleft] [As indicated] [Match Architect's sample] <Insert finish>.

E. Match Architect's samples for color, finish, and other stone characteristics relating to aesthetic effects.

2.7 ADHESIVES, GROUT, SEALANTS, AND STONE ACCESSORIES

A. General: Use only adhesives formulated for stone and ceramic tile and that are recommended by their manufacturer for the application indicated.

B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3.

1. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for VOC content of adhesive.> 2. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for adhesives.> 3. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

C. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, chemical-resistant, water-cleanable, tile-setting and -grouting epoxy.


D. Stone Adhesive: Two-part [epoxy] [or] [polyester] adhesive, formulated specifically for bonding stone to stone, with an initial set time of not more than two hours at 70 deg F (21 deg C).

1. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for VOC content of adhesive.> 2. <Double click to insert sustainable design text for adhesives.> 3. Color: [Clear] [Match stone]. 4. Epoxy Adhesive:

a. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

5. Polyester Adhesive:

a. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

E. Sealant for Countertops: Manufacturer's standard sealant of characteristics indicated below that complies with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" and will not stain the stone it is applied to.

1. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealant: [Mildew resistant, single component, nonsag, neutral curing, silicone] [Single component, nonsag, mildew resistant, acid curing, silicone] <Insert joint sealant>.

2. Joint Sealant: [Latex] [Single component, nonsag, neutral curing, silicone; Class 25] <Insert joint sealant>.

3. Color: [Clear] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].


July 31, 2015 123640 - 7

F. Stone Joint Splines: Stainless-steel or brass washers approximately 1 inch (25 mm) in diameter and of thickness to fit snugly in saw-cut kerf in edge of stone units.

G. Stone Cleaner: Specifically formulated for stone types, finishes, and applications indicated, as recommended by stone producer [and, if a sealer is specified, by sealer manufacturer]. Do not use cleaning compounds containing acids, caustics, harsh fillers, or abrasives.

H. Stone Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated.


2.8 STONE FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Select stone for intended use to prevent fabricated units from containing cracks, seams, and starts that could impair structural integrity or function.

1. Repairs that are characteristic of the varieties specified are acceptable provided they do not impair structural integrity or function and are not aesthetically unpleasing, as judged by Architect.

B. Grade and mark stone for final locations to produce assembled countertop units with an overall uniform appearance.

C. Fabricate stone countertops in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated.

1. For granite, comply with recommendations in NBGQA's "Specifications for Architectural Granite."

2. For [marble] [and] [serpentine], comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design Manual VI."

3. Clean sawed backs of stones to remove rust stains and iron particles. 4. Dress joints straight and at right angle to face unless otherwise indicated. 5. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stone for anchors, supports, and attachments. 6. Provide openings, reveals, and similar features as needed to accommodate adjacent work. 7. Fabricate molded edges with machines having abrasive shaping wheels made to reverse

contour of edge profile to produce uniform shape throughout entire length of edge and with precisely formed arris slightly eased to prevent snipping, and matched at joints between units. Form corners of molded edges as indicated with outside corners slightly eased unless otherwise indicated.

8. Finish exposed faces of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish of each stone type required and to match approved Samples and mockups. Provide matching finish on exposed edges of countertops, splashes, and cutouts.

D. Carefully inspect finished stone units at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements for appearance, material, and fabrication. Replace defective units.

2.9 STONE COUNTERTOPS

A. General: Comply with recommendations in MIA's "Dimension Stone - Design Manual VI."


July 31, 2015 123640 - 8

B. Nominal Thickness: Provide thickness indicated, but not less than [3/4 inch (20 mm)] [7/8 inch (22 mm)] [1-1/4 inches (32 mm)]. Gage backs to provide units of identical thickness.

C. Edge Detail: [Straight, slightly eased at top] [3/8-inch (10-mm) bevel] [3/4-inch (20-mm) full bullnose] [1-1/4-inch (20-mm) full bullnose] [3/8-inch (10-mm) radius with 2-inch (50-mm) apron] [1-1/2-inch (40-mm) laminated bullnose] [As indicated].

D. Splashes: Provide 3/4-inch- (20-mm-) thick [backsplashes] [and] [end splashes] unless otherwise indicated.

1. Height: [4 inches (100 mm)] [As indicated] <Insert dimension>. 2. Top-Edge Detail: [Straight, slightly eased at corner] [3/8-inch (10-mm) bevel] [3/4-

inch (20-mm) radius] [3/8-inch (10-mm) radius] [As indicated].

E. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints.

F. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field, with joints at locations indicated and as follows:

1. Bonded Joints: 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) or less in width. 2. Grouted Joints: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in width. 3. Sealant-Filled Joints: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in width. 4. Splined Joints: Accurately cut kerfs in edges at joints for insertion of metal splines to

maintain alignment of surfaces at joints [where indicated]. Make width of cuts slightly more than thickness of splines to provide snug fit. [Provide at least three splines in each joint.]

G. Cutouts and Holes:

1. Undercounter Fixtures: Make cutouts for undercounter fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.

a. Provide vertical edges, slightly eased at juncture of cutout edges with top and bottom surfaces of countertop and projecting 3/16 inch (5 mm) into fixture opening.

b. Provide vertical edges, rounded to 3/8-inch (10-mm) radius at juncture of cutout edges with top surface of countertop, slightly eased at bottom, and projecting 3/16 inch (5 mm) into fixture opening.

c. Provide 3/4-inch (20-mm) full bullnose edges projecting 3/8 inch (10 mm) into fixture opening.

2. Counter-Mounted Fixtures: Prepare countertops in shop for field cutting openings for counter-mounted fixtures. Mark tops for cutouts and drill holes at corners of cutout locations. Make corner holes of largest radius practical.

3. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for plumbing fittings, undercounter soap dispensers, and similar items.


July 31, 2015 123640 - 9

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates to receive stone countertops and conditions under which stone countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of stone countertops.

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of stone countertops.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements for placement of inserts and similar items to be used by stone countertop Installer for anchoring stone countertops. Furnish installers of other work with Drawings or templates showing locations of these items.

B. Before installing stone countertops, clean dirty or stained stone surfaces by removing soil, stains, and foreign materials. Clean stone by thoroughly scrubbing with fiber brushes and then drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh materials or abrasives. Allow stone to dry before installing.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm), 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum.

B. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than one-fourth of nominal joint width.

C. Variation in Plane at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64-inch (0.4-mm) difference between planes of adjacent units.

D. Variation in Line of Edge at Joints (Lipping): Do not exceed 1/64-inch (0.4-mm) difference between edges of adjacent units, where edge line continues across joint.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS

A. General: Install countertops over plywood subtops with full spread of water-cleanable epoxy adhesive.

B. General: Install countertops by adhering to supports with water-cleanable epoxy adhesive.

C. Do not cut stone in field unless otherwise indicated. If stone countertops or splashes require additional fabrication not specified to be performed at Project site, return to fabrication shop for adjustment.


July 31, 2015 123640 - 10

D. Do necessary field cutting as stone is set. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Cut lines straight, true, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.

E. Set stone to comply with requirements indicated. Shim and adjust stone to locations indicated, with uniform joints of widths indicated and with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances.[ Install anchors and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stone countertops in place.]

F. Bond joints with stone adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

1. Install metal splines in kerfs in stone edges at joints [where indicated]. Fill kerfs with stone adhesive before inserting splines and remove excess immediately after adjoining units are drawn into position.

2. Clamp units to temporary bracing, supports, or each other to ensure that countertops are properly aligned and joints are of specified width.

G. Space joints with 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) gap for filling with [grout] [sealant]. Use temporary shims to ensure uniform spacing.

1. Install metal splines in kerfs in stone edges at joints [where indicated]. Fill kerfs with [setting adhesive] [sealant] before inserting splines and remove excess immediately after adjoining units are drawn into position.


H. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Use power saws with diamond blades to cut stone. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.

I. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall with water-cleanable epoxy adhesive and to countertops with stone adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

J. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to countertops with stone adhesive. Mask areas of countertops and splashes adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears. Leave 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) gap between splashes and wall for filling with sealant. Use temporary shims to ensure uniform spacing.

K. Install backsplashes and end splashes by adhering to wall with water-cleanable epoxy adhesive. Leave 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) gap between countertop and splashes for filling with sealant. Use temporary shims to ensure uniform spacing.

L. Grout joints to comply with ANSI A108.10. Remove temporary shims before grouting. Tool grout uniformly and smoothly with plastic tool.

M. Apply sealant to [joints] [and] [gaps specified for filling with sealant]; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." Remove temporary shims before applying sealant.


July 31, 2015 123640 - 11


A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean countertops as work progresses. Remove adhesive, grout, mortar, and sealant smears immediately.

B. Remove and replace stone countertops of the following description:

1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stone. Stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect.

2. Defective countertops. 3. Defective joints, including misaligned joints. 4. Interior stone countertops and joints not matching approved Samples and mockups. 5. Interior stone countertops not complying with other requirements indicated.

C. Replace in a manner that results in stone countertops matching approved Samples and mockups, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement.

D. Clean stone countertops no fewer than six days after completion of [sealant installation] [installation], using clean water and soft rags. Do not use wire brushes, acid-type cleaning agents, cleaning compounds with caustic or harsh fillers, or other materials or methods that could damage stone.

E. Sealer Application: Apply stone sealer to comply with stone producer's and sealer manufacturer's written instructions.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 123661.19 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Quartz Agglomerate Countertops

July 31, 2015 123661.19 - 1

SECTION 123661.19 - QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Quartz agglomerate countertops and accessories.


1. Division 6 Section Plastic-Laminate-Faced Architectural Cabinets.


A. Product Data: For countertop materials.

B. Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods of joining, and cutouts.

1. Show locations and details of joints. 2. Show direction of directional pattern, if any.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Countertop material, 6 inches (150 mm) square.




A. Maintenance Data: For quartz agglomerate countertops to include in maintenance manuals. Include Product Data for care products used or recommended by Installer and names, addresses, and telephone numbers of local sources for products.


July 31, 2015 123661.19 - 2


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate countertops similar to that required for this Project, and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of countertops.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets are installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 QUARTZ AGGLOMERATE COUNTERTOP MATERIALS

A. Quartz Agglomerate: Solid sheets consisting of quartz aggregates bound together with a matrix of filled plastic resin and complying with ICPA SS-1, except for composition.

1. Basis of design: Cambria USA, Waterstone Collection, see Finishes Legend. 2. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

B. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.

C. Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.

2.2 COUNTERTOP FABRICATION

A. Fabricate countertops according to quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions and the AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards."

1. Grade: Premium.

B. Configuration:

1. Reference drawings.

C. Countertops: 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick, quartz agglomerate with front edge built up with same material.


July 31, 2015 123661.19 - 3

D. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges unless otherwise indicated. Comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly.

E. Joints: Fabricate countertops without joints.

F. Joints: Fabricate countertops in sections for joining in field.

1. Joint Locations: Not where a countertop section less than 36 inches (900 mm) long would result, unless unavoidable.

2. Joint Type: Bonded, 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) or less in width. 3. Splined Joints: Accurately cut kerfs in edges at joints for insertion of metal splines to

maintain alignment of surfaces at joints. Make width of cuts slightly more than thickness of splines to provide snug fit.

G. Cutouts and Holes:

1. Standard Deal Tray: make cutouts in the countertop for stainless deal tray where shown and of the dimensions required by the manufacturer’s instructions for the following item:

a. C.R. Laurence Co. Inc., CTDB12 10 inch by 12 inch brushed finish, stainless steel deal tray. crlaurence.com, (800)421.6144.

2. Fittings: Drill countertops in shop for grommets, monitor supports, and similar items.


A. Adhesive: Product recommended by quartz agglomerate manufacturer.

B. Sealant for Countertops: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates to receive quartz agglomerate countertops and conditions under which countertops will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of countertops.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet (3 mm in 2.4 m), 1/4 inch (6 mm) maximum. Do not exceed 1/64-inch (0.4-mm) difference between planes of adjacent units.


July 31, 2015 123661.19 - 4

B. Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Predrill holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

C. Fasten subtops to cabinets by screwing through subtops into cornerblocks of base cabinets. Shim as needed to align subtops in a level plane.

D. Secure countertops to subtops with adhesive according to quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in color to match countertop, form seams to comply with quartz agglomerate manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

E. Bond joints with adhesive and draw tight as countertops are set. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to joints to prevent adhesive smears.

1. Install metal splines in kerfs in countertop edges at joints. Fill kerfs with adhesive before inserting splines and remove excess immediately after adjoining units are drawn into position.


F. Complete cutouts not finished in shop. Mask areas of countertops adjacent to cutouts to prevent damage while cutting. Make cutouts to accurately fit items to be installed, and at right angles to finished surfaces unless beveling is required for clearance. Ease edges slightly to prevent snipping.

1. Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish.

G. Apply sealant to gaps at walls; comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."


Spokane Transit Authority Section 143100 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Escalators

July 31, 2015 143100 - 1

SECTION 143100 - ESCALATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes standard interior escalators.


1. Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete.

2. Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" for attachment plates, angle brackets, and other preparation of structural steel to support escalator trusses.

3. Section 283111 "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" for smoke detectors that activate escalator alarm and, after at least 15 seconds, cause the interruption of power to the escalator motor and brake and for connection to escalator controllers.


A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, safety features, finishes, and similar information.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details indicating coordination with building structure and relationships with other construction.

2. Indicate maximum loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and power requirements.

3. Indicate access and ventilation for escalator machine space.

C. Samples for Verification: For exposed escalator finishes, 3-inch- (75-mm-) square Samples of sheet materials, and 4-inch (100-mm) lengths of running trim members.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For escalators.




July 31, 2015 143100 - 2

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For escalator equipment, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that escalator layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and specified, are adequate for escalator system being provided.

D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For escalators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

1. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel.

B. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted escalator use.


A. Installer Qualifications: Escalator manufacturer or an authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.


A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components, and equipment in manufacturer's protective packaging. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry location.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, escalator equipment with integral anchors, and other items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for escalator equipment. Furnish templates, sleeves, escalator equipment with integral anchors, and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to escalators including sumps and floor drains in pits; electrical service; and electrical outlets, lights, and switches in pits.


July 31, 2015 143100 - 3

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace escalator work that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, operation or control system failure, including excessive malfunctions; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; the need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions.

2. Warranty Period: one year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide escalator (s) subject to compliance with the design and performance requirements of this specification. Additional manufacturers may include but are not limited to the following:

1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: KONE, Inc. Travelmaster 110 Escalator (www.kone.com).

2. Other acceptable escalator products: a. OTIS Elevator Co. – 506 NCE Escalator b. Schindler Elevator Corp. – 9300 Escalator c. Thyssen Krupp Elevator – Velino Escalator

B. Source Limitations: Obtain escalators from single manufacturer.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME/ANSI A17.1/CSA B44.

B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," to design escalators.

C. Seismic Performance: Escalators shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Project's Seismic Design Category: See drawings. 2. Escalator Component Importance Factor: 1.0.

D. Structural Performance of Balustrades, Deck Barricades, and Handrails: Provide components and assemblies capable of withstanding the effects of loads indicated in ASCE/SEI 7 for handrail assemblies and guardrail systems.

E. Truss:

1. The escalator trusses shall be designed to accommodate the loadings and factors referred to in the latest edition of ASME A17.1. The trusses shall not deflect greater


July 31, 2015 143100 - 4

than 1:750 of the distance between supports under code structural rated load for the applicable step width. The truss shall be designed to accommodate the load without intermediate (center) supports.

2. The trusses shall be constructed of rolled steel sections, continuously welded where appropriate, and treated with an approved rust inhibitor.

3. The trusses shall include all the frames, supports and reinforcements necessary for the support and fastening of the mechanical parts of the escalators.

4. There shall be no cross members on the soffit of the truss, either inside or outside. The soffit plate shall be 3/16" minimum thickness and welded and sealed to ensure it is oil tight.

5. All the necessary steelwork, trimming angles and bearing plates to support the escalators from the building structure are to be provided and fitted by the building contractor.

6. Side cladding - by Customer: Truss side cladding shall be provided and installed by the Customer.

7. Soffit cladding – by Customer: Truss soffit cladding shall be provided and installed by the Customer.

F. Isolation Mounting: Upper and lower end supports shall be isolated from building structure using a fabricated assembly of rubber and steel.

1. Seismic support type: The truss supports at each end shall be provided with isolation (anti-vibration) pads, which dampen vibration and prevent structure-borne noise being transmitted to the building structure. It is important to consider seismic activities which may occur during operation. The tenderer is asked to provide details of his solution with the tender.

G. Escalator Drive:

1. Worm Gear: The drive unit is located outside the step band, at the upper end of the escalator. The chain sprockets of the step band and the handrail driving wheels are driven via a duplex chain by a compact worm gear with an electric motor, flange-mounted at the gearbox. The main driving shaft supports the chain sprockets for the step band. The main driving shaft supports the handrail driving shaft via handrail chain and handrail wheels. The drive system assures that the handrails are moved synchronously with the step band.

2. Upper Reversing Station: Precision-machined step chain sprocket mounted on the machine output shaft and rotating on bearings.

3. Lower Reversing Station: Machined floating track system designed to maintain proper tension on the step chain by use of springs.

H. Drive Motor

1. The drive motor shall be continuously rated and of adequate size for the duty concerned in both directions of travel. The drive shall be positive and quiet. The tenderer shall include details of the motor within the tender.

2. The tenderer shall include within the tender a list of protection provided, which shall preferably be by means of temperature sensitive devices in the motor windings with a magnetically operated overload device to cater for stall conditions. The motor shall be provided with class F insulation and a minimum ingress protection class of NEMA 12.


July 31, 2015 143100 - 5

I. Brake

1. The escalator shall have a "fail-safe" operational braking system, with electric release, which shall be capable of bringing an unloaded and loaded escalator to rest within the stopping distances given in the latest edition of ASME A17.1 and maintaining it in a stationary position. The system shall control the brake torque to maintain constant deceleration independent of load.

2. The escalator shall stop automatically in the event of the operation of any safety device or electrical power failure.

3. Each escalator shall have the facility to lock the step band in position to enable work to be carried out safely within the step band.

J. Handrail Drive

1. C Handrail: To ensure the handrail runs synchronously with the step band, within a speed tolerance of 0% to 2%, a chain from the main drive shaft to the handrail shaft shall be used. A positive drive and proper tensioning of the handrail shall be achieved at all times. At the newel ends there shall be adequate sized rollers to guide the handrail around the newels. Each roller shall be fitted with sealed ball bearings and be grease lubricated.

K. Handrails

1. C Handrail: The endless rubber handrails shall be pre-stretched and provided with a nylon lining on the running faces and suitably reinforced with steel or cord tension members to enhance service life. The minimum breaking strength of the handrails shall be 27 kN. The color of the handrail shall be Black.

L. Step Chains

1. Standard Chain: The step chains shall be specifically designed for escalator applications and be of the roller type with heat-treated links to satisfy the requirements of ASME A17.1.

M. Step Chain Tension Carriage

1. A step chain tension device shall be provided in an easily accessible position in the lower machine pit. The tension carriage assembly shall be mounted on rollers with adequate lateral guidance to prevent skewing and shall be fitted with adjustable pressure springs to ensure uniform tensioning of the step chains.

N. Steps

1. Silver Aluminum: The silver painted steps shall be of an interchangeable design of rigid high tensile die cast aluminum, incorporating grooved tread plates and risers, and shall be capable of being removed and replaced without removing the skirtings or inside balustrade. Multi-piece step assemblies are not acceptable.

The step rollers shall have sealed ball bearings which are permanently grease lu-bricated. The steps are of distortion-resistant design, made of high tensile, die-cast aluminum. The tread plates have narrow grooves. The inner width between the


July 31, 2015 143100 - 6

cleats is 1/4" (average). Similar to the tread plate, the step riser is grooved verti-cally. Each step is provided with two step rollers of 3" diameter with encased, sealed-for-life ball bearings.

2. Step Demarcation – yellow plastic inserts: Provide step demarcation inserts at sides and rear of each step. Inserts to be fabricated from reinforced structural plastic, and easily replaced. Attach inserts to step with concealed fasteners. Demarcation inserts shall be yellow.

O. Step Combs

1. Comb segment material - aluminum with yellow coating: Step combs shall be manufactured from aluminum with yellow coating and be easily replaceable. The escalator must incorporate step guides of wear- resistant material to ensure precise lateral entrance of the step into the comb. Safety switches shall be fitted to the comb plate, acting both vertically and horizontally, to stop the escalator in the event of an object becoming entrapped between the steps and the combs.

P. Skirts

1. Sheet steel with a clear friction-reducing coating: Rigid sheet steel skirting panels, minimum 14 gauge, shall be provided adjacent to the steps. Flexible skirting panels with micro-switches shall not be accepted.

Q. Brush Guards

1. Stainless steel with single brush: Single brush guards shall be provided to protect the step/skirting gap. They shall follow the nose line of the steps, running continuously throughout the length of the moving step band and terminating 2" before the comb plates at both ends. At each end of the brush guard there shall be a smooth tapered aluminum leading piece to ensure that there are no sharp edges, which may be a hazard to passengers. The holder/basis shall be made of black anodized aluminum.

R. Floor Cover Plates

1. Natural ribbed stainless steel: Single panel covers of stainless steel shall be provided at the escalator entrances, covered with ribbed aluminum flooring. The covers shall be removable for maintenance purposes.

S. Balustrades

1. Glass balustrade: The balustrades shall be of clear toughened glass of the impact resistant type. Their minimum thickness shall be 3/8" and the panels shall be self-supporting without the need for mullions. The vertical height of the balustrade, both on the incline and the ends, shall be min. 40".

2. Balustrade configuration (option 1): Provide equal length incline balustrade panels with joints perpendicular to the truss.

3. Black plastic frontplates: Black plastic frontplates shall be provided at upper and lower ends, designed to include the handrail inlet device.

T. Deck


July 31, 2015 143100 - 7

1. Brushed stainless steel: The inner/outer decking and the handrail profile shall be of brushed stainless steel. The joints of all sections shall be of the flush butted type.

2. Center decking: Parallel arranged escalators shall have a common center deck.

U. Control Cabinet

1. Position of the controller cabinet - Inside truss: The controller for the escalators shall be in a sheet metal cabinet located within the top machine compartment and shall be removable for maintenance purposes. The controller shall incorporate all devices for controlling the direction of travel of the escalator and all overload and safety devices. The controller cabinet shall be protected with the following class NEMA1.

V. Operational Mode

1. Continuous: The escalator shall be started by a key switch and shall run continuously in the selected direction until stopped by a key switch or by an emergency stop.

W. Safety Devices

The escalators shall be equipped with the following safety devices/features:

1. Reversal Stop Device: Provide controller sensitive device to automatically stop the escalator should its direction reverse while operating in the ascending direction.

2. Broken Step Chain Device: Provide device on each chain as a component of the lower reversing station assembly a device to bring escalator to controlled stop when activated.

3. Step Up Thrust Device: Provide device each side of the lower curve track on the lower end of each escalator, that should a step be displace against the upthrust track, will cause the escalator to come to a controlled stop.

4. Comb-step Impact Device: Provide device at the upper and lower comb plates, impact between comb segments and step will cause the escalator to come to a controlled stop.

5. Skirt Obstruction Device: Provide devices on each side of the balustrade at upper and lower ends within the skirt panels. Device shall activate should an obstruction occur between the step and skirt panel. Switches shall be of the plunger, self-resetting type, adjustable to maintain the required position and clearance from the skirts.

6. Missing Step Device: Provide device to detect missing step or steps at the upper or lower ends of the escalator. Upon activation, the escalator will come to a controlled stop.

7. Step Demarcation Lights: Provide demarcation lights at top and bottom of each escalator. Light shall be mounted below the track system where the step leaves or enters the combplate, light shall be visible between the steps and the step/comb segment. Provide two independent green fluorescent lamps, capable of lighting the entire width of the step.

8. Handrail Entry Device: Provide device at the handrail inlet in the newel. 9. The escalator will come to a controlled stop should an object enter the handrail inlet

area. 10. Handrail Speed Monitoring Device: Provide magnetic sensor to sound an alarm, when

the speed of the handrail deviates from that of the step band by a minimum fifteen percent. If the deviation lasts for more than two seconds, device will cause the escalator to come to a controlled stop.


July 31, 2015 143100 - 8

11. Emergency Stop Buttons: Provide buttons to cut electrical power supply to the motor upon activation.

a. Locate emergency stop button at each landing in the newel upper radius quadrant, 45 degrees above horizontal. The stop button shall be red in color.

b. The button shall be housed under a clear, high impact resistant plastic, self-closing cover. Instructions for operating shall be imprinted on the cover in accordance with ASME/ANSI A17.1. When the cover is lifted, an audible alarm shall sound until returned to its closed position.

12. Safety Signs: In accordance with ASME/ANSI A17.1 provide pictorial sign at upper and lower landings.

13. Stop Switch in the machinery spaces: Provide stop switch in the upper and lower pits, upon activation of either switch escalator will come to a controlled stop.

14. Step Level Devices: Provide level devices at upper and lower ends of escalator. Devices shall detect downward displacement of the step prior to reaching the combplates. Upon activation the escalator will come to a controlled stop.

15. Step Guards: Provide guards in the upper and lower pit to protect maintenance personnel from step band.

16. Step Band lock: A locking device, with mechanical and electrical protection, to lock the step band in position for when it is necessary to work within the step band.

2.3 WIRING

A. This includes the laying of all cables and conductors from the main circuit breaker in the control cubicle to the individual controls, lighting, and safety devices inside the escalator. All the electrical installation material must be suitable for humid conditions. The cables, switching elements and electrical devices must be in accordance with NEII requirements.

2.4 CONTROL SWITCHES

A. The control switch shall be mounted at the lower end of the escalator and shall be key operated.

2.5 BEARINGS

A. All bearings of rotating shafts are to be of a high quality, high precision and self aligning, and ball or roller type as appropriate. All bearings are to be selected to give, under an appropriate load profile for applications, a minimum calculated design life of 100,000 hours (L10h) based on the ISO definition of life rating.

2.6 LUBRICATION

A. The tenderer shall define the method of lubrication and state by what means oil and other debris are removed from the escalators at periodic intervals. Where a drive chain is used to couple the drive unit to the main drive shaft, an automatic lubrication system shall be provided with sufficient oil capacity for at least one month's operation.


July 31, 2015 143100 - 9

2.7 NOTICES/SIGNS

A. A caution sign shall be located at the top and bottom landing of each escalator, readily visible to the boarding passengers. The sign shall include the following wording:

1. Caution 2. Passengers only 3. Hold handrail 4. Attend children 5. Avoid sides

2.8 ELECTRICAL SUPPLIES

A. Electrical Service: A 460 V, 3-phase, 4-wire, 60 Hz supply shall be provided by other parties. This supply shall be terminated in a junction box, adjacent to the control cabinet, and be used for the main motor power required. The tenderer shall detail the load requirements of each supply and the preferred locations of the incoming cables at the time of tender.

2.9 FACILITY SERVICES REQUIREMENTS REQUIRED BY OTHERS

A. Provide for connection to 460VAC/3 phase/60Hertz electrical power, including a fused disconnect switch and equipment-grounding conductor. Switch and grounding conductor shall terminate at the escalator controller terminal block.

B. Provide for connection to single (1) phase, 120 volt, 60 hertz, 15 amps electrical power supply including a grounding conductor terminating receptacle. Receptacle to be located within the machine space. Single-phase receptacles within wellways shall have ground-fault circuit-interrupter protection.

C. Provide for connection to dedicated phone line, located at upper end pit area at the escalator controller.

2.10 FABRICATION

A. Escalators shall be partially pre-assembled prior to delivery to the job site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine escalator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine supporting structure, machine spaces, and pits; verify critical dimensions; and examine conditions under which escalators are to be installed.


July 31, 2015 143100 - 10

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Set escalators true to line and level, properly supported, and anchored to building structure. Use established benchmarks, lines, and levels to ensure dimensional coordination of the Work.

C. Adjust installed components for smooth, efficient operation, complying with required tolerances and free of hazardous conditions. Lubricate operating parts, including bearings, tracks, chains, guides, and hardware. Test operating devices, equipment, signals, controls, and safety devices.

D. Repair damaged finishes so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.


A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of escalator installation and before permitting escalator use, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times that tests are to be performed.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate escalators.

B. Check operation of escalators with Owner's personnel present before date of Substantial Completion and again not more than one month before end of warranty period. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 211313 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Fire Protection System

July 31, 2015 211313 - 1

SECTION 211313 - FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes material, labor, equipment, design and services necessary to perform the

installation of the fire sprinkler system as shown on the drawings and as described herein.

B. This installation will consist of modifying the existing fire protection systems as part of a

renovation project. Work also includes replacing all sprinklers on the first and second floors

with new quick response sprinklers of the same style (existing sprinklers are Central o-ring type

sprinklers).

C. Design densities shall be in accordance with NFPA 13 and the following:

1. Mechanical rooms and miscellaneous storage rooms shall be designed for an ordinary

hazard group 1 density.

2. Retail areas (shelled areas) shall be designed for an ordinary hazard group 2 density.

3. Any other areas shall be designed in accordance with NFPA 13.

D. The water supply to be used in the calculations is 83 psi static, and 73 psi residual with 3000

gpm flowing at the point of connection to the existing city water main. A margin of 10%

between all demand points and the water supply is required.


A. Codes and Standards: This installation shall conform to each of the following:

1. NFPA 13, 2010 Edition, Installation of Sprinkler Systems,

2. International Building Code, 2012 Edition

3. International Fire Code, 2012 Edition

4. International Mechanical Code, 2012 Edition

5. Underwriters Laboratories Fire Protection Equipment Directory, 2015 Edition

B. All work shall comply fully with all applicable codes and standards. Nothing in the contract

documents shall be construed to permit non-compliance with any code or standard.

C. Warrantee: The contractor shall guarantee all materials, equipment and workmanship in this

installation for a period of one year from the date of completion. Any system failure during that

time shall be repaired at the contractor's expense. Contractor shall respond on site to system

problems within 24 hours.

D. Qualifications of Contractor: All work shall be performed by a Contractor with a valid

Washington State Contractor's license for the installation of fire sprinkler systems.

E. The field installation shall be supervised at all times by a journeyman sprinkler fitter or person

with equivalent experience.

1.4 APPROVALS

A. Authority Having Jurisdiction: For purposes of code compliance the Authority Having

Jurisdiction (AHJ) for this installation will be the Spokane fire department. Where there are


July 31, 2015 211313 - 2

conflicts between the AHJ and the referenced codes and standards, the more stringent shall

apply.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Material Submittals: At least 10 working days prior to submitting shop drawings, furnish to the

A/E in pdf format a complete list of equipment and products, and a manufacturer's catalog

sheet for each item to be included in the project.

B. All material submittals shall include all items listed in the product section of this specification

and all additional items necessary to provide a complete installation. Where more than one item

appears on a manufacture's catalog sheet, the item or items to be used shall be indicated.

C. Shop Drawings: At least 15 working days prior to any installation or fabrication of the system

components, the Contractor shall submit in pdf format shop drawings and hydraulic calculations

to the A/E for review by the A/E. The A/E will review the submittals and make any pertinent

comments. The contractor will then make any necessary corrections and resubmit for approval.

D. Shop drawings shall conform to, and include all items as set forth in NFPA 13.

E. After approval is received from the A/E, submit shop drawings to the AHJ for approval. Submit

evidence of final drawing approval by the AHJ to the A/E prior to the start of fabrication or

installation.

1.6 DRAWINGS OF RECORD

A. Updating Drawings: Provide and keep up to date, a complete record set of approved shop

drawings, corrected daily to show every change from the approved shop drawings. Keep this set

of prints on the job site and use only as a record set. At the conclusion of the project, provide

two sets of as-built drawings and two copies of drawings on CD in pdf and AutoCAD format to

the A/E for turning over to the owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Materials and Equipment: All materials and equipment in the system shall be new and current

products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of such materials and

equipment. Where two or more pieces of equipment are required to perform interrelated

functions, they shall be products of one manufacturer.

B. Approval Guides: Unless otherwise indicated, all products shall be listed in the latest

publication of the Underwriters Laboratory Fire Protection Directory or the Factory Mutual

Approval Guide.

2.2 PIPE

A. Schedule of Pipe: All pipe shall be ferrous, and shall meet the requirements of NFPA 13. All

threaded pipe shall be schedule 40.

2.3 FITTINGS AND COUPLINGS

A. Threaded Fittings: Threaded fittings shall be cast iron class 125, rated for 175 psi. cold water

working pressure and shall conform to ANSI B16.4, ASTM 126 and ANSI B2.1 NPT.

B. Grooved Fittings: 90's, 45's, Tees, and reducers shall be malleable iron or ductile. The fittings

shall be by Gustin Bacon, Gruvlok, Victaulic, or approved equal.

C. Grooved Couplings: Grooved couplings and reducers shall be malleable or ductile iron

conforming to ASTM A 47.


July 31, 2015 211313 - 3

D. Plain End Couplings: Plain-end couplings are permitted when installed in complete

conformance with their listings.

2.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hangers: Provide hangers to support all piping in perfect alignment without sagging or

interference, to permit free expansion and contraction, and meet the requirements of NFPA 13.

2.5 EARTHQUAKE BRACING

A. Earthquake bracing shall be with a pipe clamp and pipe with a swivel type anchor or similar to

those illustrated in NFPA 13. Other types of bracing may be used when UL-listed or FM

approved.

2.6 VALVES

A. Drain Valves: Drain valves shall be screw in bonnet bronze globe valves, rated to 175 psi non

shock cold water working pressure by Nibco, United or approved equal. Low point drain valves

shall have, in addition, a ¾ inch brass nipple with ¾ inch male hose threads and cap.

2.7 SPRINKLERS

A. Provide quick response sprinklers throughout.

B. Sprinklers in ceilings shall be glass bulb, white finish, with white recessed escutcheon, or

concealed type with flat, white cover plates as indicated on the drawings. Sprinklers which are

replaced in place shall be quick response and shall match the replaced sprinkler for style and

orifice.

C. Spare Sprinklers: Provide spare sprinklers and escutcheons for each type and style of sprinkler

used in accordance with NFPA 13 and proportioned based upon the number of each type and

style of sprinkler used on the project.

2.8 SPRINKLER HEADGUARD

A. Provide chrome- or nickel-plated, UL Listed sprinkler headguards for sprinkler heads subject to

mechanical damage or for any sprinkler lower than 7 feet above the floor.

2.9 WALL ESCUTCHEON

A. Provide plastic split ring type escutcheons. Escutcheons are only required where wall

penetrations are exposed.

2.10 FIRE ALARM AND RELATED EQUIPMENT

A. Equipment in this section is existing.

2.11 SIGNS

A. Provide all control, drain and test valves with signs identifying the type of valve and the area

affected by the valve. Signs shall be three layer etched plastic with red letters on a white

background to identify valves above ceilings or behind access doors. Lithographed metal plates

may be used in unfinished spaces or above ceilings. Provide hydraulic design information plates

as required by NFPA 13.

2.12 FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL

A. Firestopping material is to be UL classified Bio Fireshield BFS100, 200 caulk or approved

equal.


July 31, 2015 211313 - 4

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Requirements Prior to Installation: Do not order, fabricate, or install any material prior to

receipt of all approvals as stipulated in Part 1 of this Section.

B. The most current architectural backgrounds shall be used to produce shop drawings. Obtain

these from the architect prior to starting design.

C. Standards and Requirements: All installation work shall be performed in accordance with the

reference standards without exception, and as required by the AHJ. All piping shall be installed

straight, true and plumb.

D. Changes to the Work: Install all piping as shown on the approved shop drawings. Minor

deviations shall be carefully noted on the record drawings as outlined in Part 1 of this Section.

Before making significant deviations from the approved drawings, written approval must be

obtained from the Owner and the AHJ.

E. Coordination of Work: Carefully coordinate work with other trades so that unnecessary offsets

and revisions to the approved drawings are avoided. Failure to coordinate does not relieve

Contractor from meeting the performance standards herein. The contractor is responsible for

completely coordinating with all other trades and building conditions, providing all offsets as

necessary for a completely coordinated installation. No extras will be allowed for resolving

conflicts with other trades.

3.2 SPRINKLER SPACING

A. Sprinklers shall be spaced in accordance with NFPA 13.

3.3 PENETRATIONS

A. Required Clearance Around Pipe: Piping passing through fire rated assemblies, including fire

rated GWB assemblies shall be provided with clearance around the entire circumference of the

pipe. Penetrations shall be made in a neat manner using properly sized hole saw or

masonry/concrete coring as necessary.

B. Fire Rated Assemblies: The annular spaces around sprinkler pipes which penetrate fire rated

assemblies shall be filled with UL classified firestopping material in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations. Penetrations of all fire-rated assemblies shall be protected.

The shop drawings or material submittals shall clearly depict the firestopping assembly

proposed by the contractor.

C. Escutcheons: Split wall plates or escutcheons shall be installed where exposed piping or hangers

pass through a finished floor, wall or ceiling and shall fit snugly, securely and cover the

opening.

3.4 CONTROL VALVES

A. Auxiliary drain valves shall be installed in easily accessible locations.

3.5 DRAINS

A. Auxiliary Drains: Provide auxiliary drains at all low points of the system, where the trapped

section of pipe exceeds five gallons. The drain shall consist of, as a minimum, a valve, a ¾ inch

brass nipple with ¾ inch male hose threads, and cap.


July 31, 2015 211313 - 5

3.6 LAY-IN CEILINGS

A. Sprinklers in ceiling tiles shall be located in the center of tile, or at the quarter points in 2 x 4

lay-in ceilings, plus or minus 1 inch. Goosenecks or return bends shall be provided for each

pendent sprinkler to facilitate proper positioning of the sprinkler in the ceiling.

3.7 INSPECTION, PUNCH LIST AND HYDROSTATIC TESTS

A. Hydrostatic tests shall be performed in the presence of the AHJ. Any leaks or drips shall be

promptly repaired. Evidence of the completed tests shall be conveyed to the A/E by submitting

a completed contractor's Material and Test Certificate.

B. Punch List: Deficiencies found in the installation will be recorded on a punch list and delivered

to Contractor. All items on the punch list shall be promptly corrected. Notify the A/E in writing

once all punch list items have been corrected.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 220500 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Common Work for Plumbing

July 31, 2015 220500- 1

SECTION 220500 – COMMON WORK FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Requirements under this section include required work that is common to multiple sections in Division 22 and shall be complied with by all suppliers and subcontractors.

B. This Section includes the following:

1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Sleeves. 5. Escutcheons. 6. Grout. 7. Plumbing demolition. 8. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 9. Painting and finishing. 10. Concrete bases. 11. Thermometers. 12. Gages. 13. Test plugs. 14. Equipment Labels. 15. Pipe Labels. 16. Valve Tags. 17. Motors. 18. Vibration and Seismic Control. 19. Fixture Supports.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. A/E: Prime design consultant responsible for preparation of these specifications.

B. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.


July 31, 2015 220500- 2

C. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

D. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

E. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases.

F. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 3. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

H. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide submittals per Division 01, Section 013300, “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: Submit product data for each type of product indicated herein. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

C. Provide for the following:

1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Sleeves. 5. Escutcheons. 6. Grout. 7. Thermometers. 8. Gages. 9. Test plugs. 10. Equipment Labels. 11. Pipe Labels. 12. Valve Tags. 13. Vibration and Seismic Control.


July 31, 2015 220500- 3

14. Fixture Supports.

D. Refer to Div 01 for coordination drawing requirements.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. All valves and specialty valves (Valve tag list), 2. Water piping system accessories, strainers, expansion tanks, meters, backflow preventers,

gages, thermometers, trap primers, filters, 3. Drainage specialties, back water valves, drains, interceptors. 4. All equipment that includes an electrical connection and/or has recommended

maintenance, along with all related accessories. 5. All controls.


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

B. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

C. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes

involved and that certification is current.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.


A. Do not install products or materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of site conditions by field measurements before fabrication.


July 31, 2015 220500- 4


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08.

D. Coordinate work with other trades including venting, electrical connections, gas service, equipment connections, controls, etc.

E. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following:

1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.

F. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

G. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

H. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.


July 31, 2015 220500- 5

2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.3 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.


July 31, 2015 220500- 6

2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined.

1. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling. 2. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling. 3. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

C. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.

D. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.

E. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Non-pressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal band on each end.

2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Waterway Fittings:

1. Piping 2" Size and Smaller: Provide at each point of connection between copper and galvanized steel pipe, dielectric waterway design, threaded, lined with inert, non-corrosive thermoplastic.

2. Basis of Design: Clearflow Series 19100. 3. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Epco Sales, Inc. b. Watts

D. Dielectric Flanges:

1. Flanges in Copper Piping: Bronze or wrought-copper companion flange with tubing shoulder, 150-lb. or 300-lb wsp rating, as required to suit system pressure, with 1/16-inch thick red rubber gasket per ANSI/ASME B16.21.

2. Basis of Design: Watts Model 3110. 3. Alternate Manufacturers:


July 31, 2015 220500- 7

a. Clearflow. b. Epco Sales, Inc. c. Watts

E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

1. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

2. Basis of Design: PSI Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. Dielectric Flange Kit. 3. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Advance Products and Systems. b. Calpico Inc.

F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 degree F. Calpico, Inc. or Lochinvar Corp "V-Line".

G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 degree F.

1. Basis of Design: Victaulic Dielectric Nipple. 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. b. Sioux Chief,

2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.


July 31, 2015 220500- 8

2.7 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

G. Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS

A. General: Provide all steel manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. All escutcheons shall have polished chrome plated finish. Provide deep pattern escutcheons where needed to conceal couplings and fittings that protrude beyond the wall surface. No split ring escutcheons, no plastic escutcheons.

2.9 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

2.10 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAGES

A. Thermometers: Adjustable angle, Direct-mounting, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers complying with ASME B40.200.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.


July 31, 2015 220500- 9

b. Marsh Bellofram/Marshalltown. c. Miljoco Corp. d. Trerice, H. O. Co. e. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

2. Case: Highly polished, hermetically sealed, stainless steel with five-inch diameter. 3. Ring: Stainless steel. 4. Element: Bimetal coil. 5. Dial: Satin-faced, or highly polished, non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched

scale markings. 6. Pointer: Red metal. 7. Window: Double strength Glass. 8. Connector: Adjustable angle, ½” with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 9. Stem: stainless steel, for thermo-well installation and of length to suit installation. 10. Accuracy: Plus or minus one percent of range or plus or minus one scale division to

maximum of 1.5 percent of range. Scale shall be degrees Fahrenheit, unless otherwise indicated, suitable for the media operating temperatures.

11. Thermometers shall conform generally to the following: SERVICE RANGE – DEGREES F. DEG. F/DIV. Domestic hot water 0-250 2 Domestic cold water 30-130 1 Non-potable hot water 0-250 2 Non-potable cold water 30-130 1

B. Thermowells: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type, diameter, and length required to hold thermometer with extension necks of suitable length for insulated piping. Furnished by same manufacturer as thermometers.

C. Pressure Gages: Indicating-dial type complying with ASME B40.100.


a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Div. b. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. c. Marsh Bellofram. d. Miljoco Corp. e. Palmer - Wahl Instruments Inc. f. Trerice, H. O. Co. g. Weiss Instruments, Inc. h. Weksler Instruments Operating Unit; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div.

2. Case: Liquid-filled type, 4-1/2-inch diameter Grade A phosphor Bronze. 3. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is

indicated. 5. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 6. Dial: Satin-faced, non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. 7. Ring: Stainless steel.


July 31, 2015 220500- 10

8. Pointer: Red metal. 9. Window: Double strength Glass. 10. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale. 11. Vacuum-Pressure Range: 30-in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure. 12. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure. 13. Scale: Scale shall be psig or inches mercury vacuum depending on the application.

D. Shutoff Cocks for Gauges: 1/4" NPT lever handle ball valve with solid chrome-plated brass ball. Same manufacturer as gauge.

E. Pressure Snubbers: Filter type snubbing element, brass housing. Same manufacturer as gauge.

2.11 TEST PLUGS

A. Available Manufacturers:

1. MG Piping Products Co. 2. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 3. Sisco Manufacturing Co. 4. Trerice, H. O. Co. 5. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

B. Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless-steel body with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap, with extended stem beyond insulation for units to be installed in insulated piping.

C. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.

D. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing neoprene, valves gasketed orifice, suitable for inserting a 1/8” OD probe assembly.

1. Insert material for air, water, oil, or gas service at 20 to 200 deg F shall be CR. 2. Insert material for air or water service at minus 30 to plus 275 deg F shall be EPDM.

2.12 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 degree F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering


July 31, 2015 220500- 11

for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number.

C. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

D. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

E. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

F. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

G. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass beaded chain; or S-hook.

2.13 FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. General: Fixture and equipment supports shall be compatible with plumbing fixture and equipment and chase width. Manufacturer: Zurn, Josam, Wade, Smith or Mifab.

B. Wall-Hung Closet Carriers: Carrier shall be cast iron with adjustable closet connection, adjustable pylon support feet, ABS extension with test cap as required, bowl stabilizer, chrome plated trim, coated accessories and neoprene fixture gasket. Carrier shall be suitable for use with siphon jet water closets.

1. Closets shall meet or exceed the strength and deflection requirements of ANSI A112.6.1M-1997, "Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use."

2. Where fixtures are indicated for use by the handicapped, provide carrier assembly with suitable adjustability as required for mounting fixture at proper height.

3. Single closet carriers shall be provided with anchor foot leveling device bolted to floor for a positive securing of fixture.

C. Wall-Hung Urinal Supports: High-strength steel uprights with block bases for bolting to floor.


July 31, 2015 220500- 12

D. Electric Water Cooler Wall Supports: Floor-mounted fixture support, adjustable, heavy-duty steel plate and supporting studs. High-strength steel uprights shall have feet for bolting to floor.

E. Lavatory Supports: Floor-mounted support, concealed uprights, coated concealed arms with fixture locking device.

2.14 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1120, circular-corrugated-bellows type with external tie rods.


a. Badger Industries. b. Expansion Joint Systems, Inc.16 c. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. d. Flexicraft Industries. e. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. f. Metraflex, Inc. g. Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Pathway Division.

2. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints for Copper Piping: Single- or multiple-ply phosphor-bronze bellows, copper pipe end connections, and brass shrouds.

3. Metal-Bellows Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Single- or multiple-ply stainless-steel bellows, steel pipe end connections, and carbon-steel shroud.

4. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Configuration: Single-bellows type, unless otherwise indicated. 6. End Connections: Flanged.

B. Rubber Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1123, fabric-reinforced rubber with external control rods and complying with FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-Metallic Expansion Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors."


a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. b. Flexicraft Industries. c. Flex-Weld, Inc. d. Mason Industries, Inc.; Mercer Rubber Co. e. Metraflex, Inc. f. MG Piping Products Co. g. Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Pathway Division.

2. Arch Type: Single arches. 3. Spherical Type: Single spheres.

a. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Ratings for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 150 psig at 220 deg F.


July 31, 2015 220500- 13

2. Material: Buna-N or EPDM. 3. End Connections: Full-faced, integral, steel flanges with steel retaining rings.

B. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints: Manufactured assembly with two flexible-metal-hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center section of flexible hose; with inlet and outlet elbow fittings, corrugated-metal inner hoses, and braided outer sheaths.


a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. b. Flexicraft Industries. c. Metraflex, Inc.

5. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints for Copper Piping: Copper-alloy fittings with solder- joint end connections.

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 340 psig at 450 deg F ratings.

b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 300 psig at 70 deg F and 225 psig at 450 deg F ratings.

6. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints for Copper Piping: Copper-alloy fittings with solder- joint end connections.

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze hoses and double-braid bronze sheaths with 700 psig at 70 deg F and 500 psig at 450 deg F ratings.

b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 420 psig at 70 deg F and 315 psig at 450 deg ratings.

7. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Carbon-steel fittings with threaded end connections for NPS 2 and smaller and flanged end connections for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 325 psig at 600 deg F ratings.



a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 700 psig at 70 deg F and 515 psig at 600 deg F ratings.

b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 275 psig at 70 deg F and 200 psig at 600 deg F ratings.

2.15 ALIGNMENT GUIDES

A. Description: Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for alignment of piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.


July 31, 2015 220500- 14


a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. b. Flexicraft Industries. c. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. d. Metraflex, Inc. e. Senior Flexonics, Inc.; Pathway Division.

2.16 MATERIALS FOR ANCHORS

A. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.

C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.

D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

1. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel. 2. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel. 3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

E. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

1. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, 2-component epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed.

2. Stainless-steel studs are available. 3. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless

otherwise indicated. 4. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

2.17 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58-2009; “Pipe Hangers and support– Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application and Installation”: Types 1 through 59, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.


a. Anvil. b. B-Line Systems, Inc. c. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. d. Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE® e. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.


July 31, 2015 220500- 15

B. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.

C. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.

D. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping.

2.18 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. For piping 2” and below, manufactured specialty products formed from pre-galvanized commercial steel.

1. The total weight of piping and components upon each trapeze span shall not exceed the manufacturers load rating. Load ratings must include a minimum 2 X safety factor.

2.19 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels and other components.


a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div. c. Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE® d. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. e. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.

B. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.


2.20 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield.


a. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. b. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. c. Pipe Shields, Inc.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.


July 31, 2015 220500- 16

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.

2.21 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated or stainless steel, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.


a. Hilti, Inc. b. Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE® c. ITW Ramset/Red Head. d. Powers Fasteners.

2.22 PIPE STAND FABRICATION

A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.

B. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

C. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

1. Base: Stainless steel. 2. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuous-

thread rods. 3. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless-

steel, roller-type pipe support.

D. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

1. Bases: One or more plastic. 2. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels. 3. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel. 4. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.


July 31, 2015 220500- 17

E. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe support made from structural-steel shape, continuous-thread rods, and rollers for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb

2.23 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications.


a. C & S Mfg. Corp. b. HOLDRITE Corp.; Hubbard Enterprises. c. Samco Stamping, Inc.

2.24 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel shapes.



2.26 MOTORS

A. GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS

1. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.

2. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.

B. MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS

1. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level.

2. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.

C. POLYPHASE MOTORS

1. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. 2. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.


July 31, 2015 220500- 18

3. Service Factor: 1.15. 4. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.

a. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. b. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.

5. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed. 6. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage. 7. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust

loading. 8. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. 9. Insulation: Class F. 10. Code Letter Designation:

a. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.

11. Enclosure Material: Rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T.

D. POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method.

2. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.

a. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters.

b. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.

c. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.

d. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors.

3. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.

E. SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS

1. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application:

a. Permanent-split capacitor. b. Split phase. c. Capacitor start, inductor run. d. Capacitor start, capacitor run.

2. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.


July 31, 2015 220500- 19

3. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.

4. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. 5. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to

motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range.

2.27 SEISMIC CONTROLS

A. General: Provide complete seismic restraint systems for all plumbing piping and equipment. Seismic restraint systems for plumbing work shall be provided under this Division 22. The Contractor shall provide the services of a Qualified Professional Engineer (QPE), typically a structural engineer, to engineer the seismic controls. Note that certain seismic restraint manufacturers provide QPE services.

B. Seismic Restraints for New Construction: Provide engineering for seismic control of all new and relocated equipment and piping specified in Division 22. Provide all necessary seismic restraints to meet the requirements of the Code and referenced Standards.

C. Components with Importance Factor Ip=1.5: Engineering, selection and placement of seismic restraints shall be based on the following components having the an Importance Factor of Ip=1.5:

1. All sizes of piping located in Electrical Rooms, Mechanical Rooms, Generator Rooms and Refrigeration Rooms. This applies to all kinds of piping, whether connected to equipment in those rooms or not.

2. Domestic cold water equipment and piping greater than two inches in size. Domestic cold water piping two inches in size and less that does not have a readily-accessible isolation valve separating it from any piping greater than two inches in size.

3. Domestic hot water (including hot water recirculation) equipment and piping greater than two inches in size. Domestic hot water (including hot water recirculation) piping two inches in size and less that does not have a readily-accessible isolation valve separating it from any piping greater than two inches in size.

4. Waste and Vent piping greater than two inches in size. 5. All other components required by Code to have an importance factor of Ip=1.5.

D. Components with Importance Factor Ip=1.0: All components not identified above as having an Importance Factor of Ip=1.5.:

E. Omission of restraints for small components: Restraints may be omitted for smaller equipment and piping only where specifically allowed by Code and referenced Standards, and where specifically allowed by the Qualified Professional Engineer (QPE). Restraints may only be omitted after the QPE has determined that adequate flexibility will be provided between restrained and non-restrained connected elements and determined that movement of unrestrained elements will not cause damage to adjacent elements.


July 31, 2015 220500- 20

2.28 INSULATION SYSTEMS

A. Insulation for plumbing piping, valves and equipment shall be furnished and installed to meet requirements of the Energy Code.

B. New Work: Completely insulate all new work as specified and scheduled.

C. Existing Work:

1. Insulate all existing piping where existing insulation is damaged, as if it is new piping.

D. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

E. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

F. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

G. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

H. Thermal Requirements for all Pipe Insulation: Insulation thickness and/or R-value shall be as required by the local energy code or as indicated, whichever is greater.

I. Glass Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation: Glass fiber meeting ASTM C547, rigid molded. "K" value 0.23 at 75°F. Maximum service temperature shall not exceed 850°F. Jacket shall be high density, white Kraft bonded to aluminum foil for vapor barrier, reinforced with fiberglass yarn, permanently treated, secured with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips or AP jacket with outward clinch expanding staples coated with vapor barrier mastic.

1. Basis of Design: Johns Manville "Micro-Lok AP-T Plus." 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Knauf Insulation "1000 Pipe Insulation." b. Owens-Corning ASJ/SSLII.

J. General: Refer to Drawings for pipe insulation schedules.

2.29 FIXTURE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. General: Fixture and equipment supports shall be compatible with plumbing fixture and equipment and chase width.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


July 31, 2015 220500- 21

3.1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION

A. Refer to Division 01 and Division 02 specifications for general demolition requirements and procedures.

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,

clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

5. Equipment and Fixtures to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.

3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated and/or code-required slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.


July 31, 2015 220500- 22

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors where exposed to view from any location in a finished space and in stairways.

M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other potentially-wet areas two inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board

partitions. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.

Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to two inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 specification sections for flashing.

3. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 for materials and installation.

N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for one-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

O. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07.

P. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

Q. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems.


July 31, 2015 220500- 23

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.

E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping one to two-inch in size, adjacent to each valve (unless valve construction facilitates disassembly) and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in wet piping systems.

3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURE AND EQUIPMENT CARRIER SUPPORTS

A. General: All fixtures shall be rigidly installed. Carriers shall have adjustable block base feet to permit vertical position of uprights regardless of uneven floor surface. Each carrier base shall


July 31, 2015 220500- 24

be securely bolted to floor. Where 25-gauge steel framing is used for wallboard finish, provide additional structural bracing to ensure rigid installation of fixtures.

B. Wall-Hung Closet Supports: Carriers for closets; vertical or horizontal support and drainage fitting with foot and cast iron closet coupling, both of proper length for the wall thickness. Provide hanger rod support feet at each corner. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Carrier feet shall be bolted to the floor. Carrier connection to fixture shall be made with manufacturer’s standard neoprene seal.

C. Wall Hung Urinal Supports: Supports shall be installed according to manufacturer’s instructions. Where steel uprights are used, block bases shall be securely bolted to floor structure.

D. Electric Water Cooler Wall Supports: Supports shall be installed according to manufacturer’s instructions. Where steel uprights are used, block bases shall be securely bolted to floor structure.

E. Wall-Hung Lavatory Supports: For floor mounted concealed arm type with floor supports, bolt feet to floor structure. For wall-mounted type, provide heavy-duty steel plate welded or bolted to vertical steel studs. Support types shall be compatible with fixture manufacturer and wall thickness.

3.7 PAINTING

A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09, Sections 099123, "Interior Painting" and 099113, "Exterior Painting."

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.8 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05 specification sections for structural steel.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.

3.9 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS

A. Install thermometers in the outlet of each domestic, hot-water storage tank.

3.10 GAGE APPLICATIONS

A. Install pressure gages at the inlet and discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.


July 31, 2015 220500- 25

B. Install pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump.

3.11 THERMOMETER AND GAGE INSTALLATIONS

A. Install direct-mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions.

B. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated.

C. Install direct-mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most readable position.

D. Install needle-valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage.

E. Install test plugs in tees in piping.

F. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable indicators in accessible locations.

G. Install thermometers and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance for thermometers, gages, machines, and equipment.

H. Adjust faces of thermometers and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

3.12 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT LABEL PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.

3.13 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.14 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Pipe label color-coding shall be ANSI standards.

B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.


July 31, 2015 220500- 26

3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

3.15 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose connections, and , roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units.

B. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

3.16 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

3.17 EXPANSION-JOINT INSTALLATION

A. Install manufactured, nonmetallic expansion joints according to FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-Metallic Expansion Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors."

B. Install expansion joints of sizes matching size of piping in which they are installed.

C. Install alignment guides to allow expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

3.18 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION

A. Install pipe bends and loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.

B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors.

1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written instructions.

3.19 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE INSTALLATION

A. Install guides on piping adjoining pipe expansion fittings and loops.


July 31, 2015 220500- 27

B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure.

3.20 ANCHOR INSTALLATION

A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1.

C. Construct concrete anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated and include embedded fasteners.

D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion-joint manufacturer's written instructions if expansion joints are indicated.

E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors installed on or in concrete.

3.21 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure

B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.

1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.

C. Fiberglass Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with applicable portions of MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

D. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

E. Fiberglass Strut System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled fiberglass struts.

F. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

G. Fastener System Installation:


July 31, 2015 220500- 28

1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Powder actuated fasteners not allowed.

H. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.

2. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs.

I. Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for plumbing fixtures.

J. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

K. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

L. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

M. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

N. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

O. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

P. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.

Q. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:

1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping.

a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation.

b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.

c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services piping.


July 31, 2015 220500- 29

2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.

a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.

3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.


4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:

a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.

5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.22 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.

F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.


July 31, 2015 220500- 30

5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off-center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.

6. Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.

7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

9. Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.

a. Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.

b. Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.

c. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. d. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or

contraction. e. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36,

with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. f. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36,

with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.

g. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.

h. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

i. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.

j. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

k. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary.

l. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction.

G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20.

2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.


July 31, 2015 220500- 31

H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of

building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.

I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads

are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to

flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I-

beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to

structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:

a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.

13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear

horizontal movement where headroom is limited.

J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.


July 31, 2015 220500- 32

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed

1-1/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with

springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal

expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability

factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit

variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support.

L. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types:

1. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. 2. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. 3. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member. 4. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not

specified in piping system Sections. 5. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are

not specified in piping system Sections. 6. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in

concrete construction. 7. Use pipe positioning systems in pipe spaces behind plumbing fixtures to support supply

and waste piping for plumbing fixtures.


A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure.

B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.


July 31, 2015 220500- 33



C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

E. Fastener System Installation:

1. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Pipe Stand Installation:

1. Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.

2. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and mount on permanent, stationary roof curb. Refer to Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for curbs.

G. Pipe Positioning System Installation: Install support devices to make rigid supply and waste piping connections to each plumbing fixture. Refer to Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for plumbing fixtures.

H. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories.

I. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

J. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

K. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

L. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

M. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

N. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.


July 31, 2015 220500- 34

O. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:




c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.9 for building services piping.






a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.

5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.


A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.

C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.

3.25 METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports.


July 31, 2015 220500- 35

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours

of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

3.26 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.

3.27 COMMISSIONING

A. Notify the Commissioning Agent one week prior to start up of equipment.

B. Submit to the Commissioning Agent a Verification of Completion form with the pre-functional check off sheet for each component when it is ready for functional testing.

C. Assist the Commissioning Agent as required to perform the functional testing on the system components and the system as a whole.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 220700 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Plumbing Insulation Systems

July 31, 2015 230700- 1

SECTION 220700 – PLUMBING INSULATION SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services:

1. Domestic cold-water piping. 2. Domestic hot-water piping. 3. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping. 4. Sanitary waste piping exposed to freezing conditions. 5. Roof drains and rainwater leaders. 6. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.


C. Coordination:

1. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in other sections.

2. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping installer for piping insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

3. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit for each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation. 4. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access

panels.

2


July 31, 2015 230700- 2

5. Detail application of field-applied jackets.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. Insulation shall have a flame spread index of 25 or less and smoke developed rating index of 50 or less.

B. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:

1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22, Section 220500.

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

1.6 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

2


July 31, 2015 230700- 3

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

2.2 PIPE INSULATION

A. Thermal Requirements for all Pipe Insulation: Insulation thickness and/or R-value shall be as required by the local energy code or as indicated, whichever is greater.

B. Glass Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation: Glass fiber meeting ASTM C547, rigid molded. "K" value 0.23 at 75°F. Maximum service temperature shall not exceed 850°F. Jacket shall be high density, white Kraft bonded to aluminum foil for vapor barrier, reinforced with fiberglass yarn, permanently treated, secured with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips or AP jacket with outward clinch expanding staples coated with vapor barrier mastic.

1. For interior use only. Do not use on exterior piping. 2. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Johns Manville "Micro-Lok HP." b. Knauf Insulation "Earthwool 1000 Pipe Insulation." c. Owens-Corning “Fiberglas SSLII-ASJ.”

3. Factory-Applied Jacket: Requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

a. Preformed Pipe Insulation: ASJ.

C. EPDM rubber, flexible, closed-cell elastomeric insulation in tubular or sheet form. The product will meet the requirements defined in ASTM C 534.

1. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel AC, Aerocel White/Gray, Aerocel-SSPT, Aerocel W/G-SSPT, or Aerocel SA.

b. Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. c. Industrial Thermo Polymers Limited; Tundra Seal.

2. EPDM elastomeric insulation shall have a flame-spread index of 25 or less and a smoke-developed index of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, for all products through 2” thickness.

3. Product to be suitable for use from -297°F to 300°F continuous service temperature, per ASTM C 411.

4. EPDM elastomeric insulation shall have a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.245 Btu-in./h-ft2F at a 75°F mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or ASTM C 518.

5. Field-Applied Jacket: Requirements are specified in "Field-Applied Jackets" Article.


2


July 31, 2015 230700- 4

2.3 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

B. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

C. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2.4 FIELD APPLIED JACKETS

A. Jacketing of Pipes Exposed to Weather: All piping exposed to weather shall be finished with an aluminum jacket over the insulation. Aluminum jacket material shall be embossed or corrugated sheet, 0.016" nominal thickness, conforming to ASTM B209, temper H-14. Jacketing shall be applied with joints lapped not less than 2", and shall be secured with 3/8" x 0.020" thick aluminum bands located at each circumferential lap and at not more than 9" intervals throughout. Horizontal joints shall lap downward to shed water. Vertical joints shall be sealed with weatherproof silicone sealant.


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW. b. Pabco Metals Corporation. c. RPR Products Inc, "Insul-Mate".

2. Be careful to consider jacketing requirements for piping that may be outdoors, but not exposed to weather. Such piping may include piping in parking garages, within covered loading docks, etc. Make sure documents adequately address different requirements for different situations.

B. PVC Plastic: One-piece molded type fitting covers and jacketing material, gloss white. Connections, tacks, pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape. PVC material shall be 25 flame spread and 50 smoke development rated per ASTM E-84.


a. Johns Manville "Zeston 2000 PVC". b. Proto Engineered Thermoplastcs Corp. "Proto Fitting Cover System". c. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. d. Speedline Corporation "Smoke-Safe".

2.5 EQUIPMENT INSULATION

A. Flexible Glass Fiber Blanket: Flexible glass blanket shall conform to ASTM C533. "K" value 0.24 at 75° F. Maximum service temperature, 450°F. Density, 1.5 lb./cu. ft.

2


July 31, 2015 230700- 5

1. Vapor Retarder Jacket: Aluminum foil reinforced with fiber glass yarn and laminated to fire-resistant kraft, secured with UL Listed pressure sensitive tape and/or outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic as needed.


a. Johns Manville Type 812 "Spin-Glas." b. Knauf Fiber Glass "Insulation Board." c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Type 701.

B. Rigid Glass Fiber Board: Rigid glass fiber board conforming to ASTM C612. Thermal conductivity shall not exceed 0.23 Btuh-in. per square foot per °F per hour at a mean temperature of 75°F. 3.0 lb./cu.ft. density. Maximum service temperature, 450°F.

1. Vapor Retarder Jacket: Aluminum foil reinforced with fiberglass yarn mesh and laminated to chemically treated, fire-resistant kraft, secured with UL Listed pressure sensitive tape and/or outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic as needed.

2. Facing: One-inch galvanized hexagonal wire mesh stitched on one face of insulation. 3. Approved Manufacturers:

a. Johns Manville Type 814 "Spin-Glas." b. Knauf Fiber Glass "Insulation Board." c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Type 703.

C. Glass Fiber Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semi-rigid board material with factory-applied ASJ or FSK jacket complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 degree F is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x degree F or less.


a. Johns Manville "MicroFlex." b. Knauf Fiber Glass "Insulation Board." c. Owens-Corning Fiberglas "Pipe and Tank Insulation."

2.6 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement 100 to 1200 degree: Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M.

2.7 ADHESIVES AND MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. Obtain insulation and/or jacket manufacturer approval for all adhesives and mastics used. Obtain A/E approval for all locations where mastics will be used.

2


July 31, 2015 230700- 6

1. Adhesives shall not be considered an acceptable alternative to specified mechanical fastening methods without prior A/E approval.

2. All adhesives and mastics shall be suitable for the moisture conditions and temperatures that will be encountered.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

E. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.

1. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180°F. 3. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 4. Color: White.

F. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.

2.8 SEALANTS

A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. Minus 40 to plus 200°F service temperature range. Color shall be aluminum or grey.

B. ASJ Flashing Sealants and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. Minus 40 to plus 200°F service temperature range. Color shall be white.

2.9 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White, 3-inch wide, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, three-inch wide, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.

C. PVC Tape: White, 2-inch wide, vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

D. PVDC Tape: White, three-inch wide, vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. Manufacturer: Dow Chemical Company "Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Tape".

2


July 31, 2015 230700- 7

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MINIMUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

Fluid Oper-ating Tem-

perature Range and Usage (F°)

Insulation Conductivity Nominal Pipe or Tube Size (Inches)

Conductivity Btu·in./(h·ft²·°F)

Mean Rating Temperature,

°F < 1

1 to < 1 ½

1 ½ to ≤ 4

4 to < 8 ≥ 8

> 350 0.32 – 0.34 250 4.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 251 – 350 0.29 – 0.32 200 3.0 4.0 4.5 4.5 4.5 201 – 250 0.27 – 0.30 150 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0 141 – 200 0.25 – 0.29 125 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 105 – 140 0.21 – 0.28 100 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5

40 – 60 0.21 – 0.27 75 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 <40 0.20 – 0.26 75 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5

1. For piping smaller than 1 ½ inch (38 mm) and located in partitions within conditioned spaces, reduction of these thickness by 1 inch (25 mm) shall be permitted (before thickness adjustment required in footnote b) but not to a thickness less than 1 inch (25 mm).

B. Sanitary piping exposed to freezing conditions:

1. Interior – 1.5” cellular glass. 2. Exterior – 1.5” cellular glass.

C. Storm drainage piping located inside conditioned building:

1. 1” fiber glass. Install on storm drain body and all interior storm drainage piping.

D. Storm drainage piping exposed to freezing conditions:

1. Interior – 1.5” cellular glass. 2. Exterior – 1.5” cellular glass.

E. Equipment insulation:

1. Factory insulated equipment shall not require exterior insulation. 2. Water heaters and hot water storage tanks that are not factory insulated shall be insulated

with flexible glass fiber blanket or rigid glass fiber board. Insulation thickness shall be 1-1/2”.

F. Valves and pipe fittings shall be insulated as indicated below.

2


July 31, 2015 230700- 8

3.2 INSULATION WORK IN GENERAL

1. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

2. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

3. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

4. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

5. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. 6. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. 7. Do not apply insulation until surfaces to be covered have been leak tested, have had rust

and scale removed, and have been cleaned, dried and inspected. 8. Insulation shall be kept dry and clean at all times. 9. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and

specialties. 10. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at

hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

a. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. b. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on

anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

c. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

d. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

e. Continue insulation vapor barrier through penetrations except where prohibited by code.

11. Continue pipe insulation through gypsum and masonry walls only if fire stopping specified in Division 07 has a UL Listed assembly that includes a jacketed insulation. Coordinate with General Contractor.

12. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

a. Draw jacket tight and smooth. b. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

c. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

d. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. e. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material

manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

2


July 31, 2015 230700- 9

f. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.

13. All work shall be performed at ambient and equivalent temperatures as recommended by the manufacturers.

14. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

15. Joints shall be staggered on multi-layer insulation.

3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION, PIPING

A. General: Pipe insulation shall be installed in strict conformance to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Pipe insulation shall be continuous and installed on all fittings and appurtenances unless specified otherwise. Installation shall be with full-length units of insulation and using a single-cut piece to complete a run. Provide jackets for all pipe insulation.

B. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

2. Secure laps with outward clinched staples at six inches o.c, for insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces.

3. Do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant, for insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Unions, Flanges, Couplings, Strainers, and Valves:

1. Insulate all fittings, flanges, couplings, strainers, valves (and similar accessories) associated with an insulated piping system unless indicated otherwise.

2. Exposed Work: On exposed work, insulate to a diameter equal to insulation of adjacent piping provided a minimum of 0.75” of insulation is maintained around fittings, couplings, strainers and valves, otherwise, increase diameter.

3. Concealed Work: On concealed work, increase insulation diameter to maintain same insulation thickness as on adjacent piping. Use same material as specified for adjacent piping; fitting covers to be as specified hereinafter.

4. Adjustable and Serviceable Valves and Accessories: Where balancing valves, strainers and similar devices are adjustable or require servicing on less than a five-year cycle, provide removable insulation sections. Where valves with repackable glands and similar devices allow service, but manufacturer does not anticipate service frequency to be less

2


July 31, 2015 230700- 10

than five years, make reasonable provisions to allow removal and reinstallation of the same materials with minimal effort and potential for damage.

E. Thermometer and Test Wells: Insulate test thermometer, industrial thermometer, and other test wells over their exterior length. Insulate thermometer wells protruding above finish pipe or equipment insulation. Neatly taper insulation away from top of well. Insulation on thermometer wells shall be 1-1/2" minimum thickness.

F. Insulation Support at Hangers:

1. Provide support shield and 360 degree insert between support shield and piping on piping 1-1/2" diameter and larger. Fabricate insert from heavy density insulating material suitable for the temperature. Shield shall be fabricated of 14 gauge galvanized sheet metal. Insulation shields and inserts shall be not less than the following lengths:

1/2" to 2-1/2" 10" 3" to 6" 12"

2. Vapor-barrier facing of the insert shall be of the same material as the facing on the adjacent insulation. Seal inserts into the insulation with lagging adhesive for vapor seal. Where anchors are secured to insulated chilled piping, insulate anchors same as piping for a distance not less than four times insulation thickness to prevent condensation.

G. Sleeves and Wall Chases: Insulation on pipes through walls and floors shall be full size and jacketed same as adjacent insulation. Provide a metal jacket over the insulation on pipe passing through sleeves in non-fire rated walls where caulking is required.

1. Where penetrating interior walls, extend the metal jacket two inches out on either side of the wall and secure on each end with a band.

2. Provide adequate support on vertical pipe to prevent slipping.

H. Allowances for Movement: At points where pipe will move during expansion and contraction (expansion joints, Z-bends, expansion loops, etc.), clearances between the pipe and encased insulation shall be sized to permit full pipe movement without cracking or damaging insulation and casing or jacket.

I. Insulation Within Reach of Building Occupants: Where insulation is within reach of building occupants and visitors, insulation surfaces shall be protected by smooth sheet aluminum jacket material, 0.016" nominal thickness, lapped, banded, and installed same as above. The term “within reach” is defined as within ten feet of the floor, except for cases where there is reasonable protection (in the opinion of the A/E) offered by objects located between the insulation and the floor. This does not apply to insulation concealed within wall or ceiling construction and insulation located within equipment rooms that can be locked off from the normal building occupants.

J. Insulation at Roof Drains and Overflow Drains: Cover body of roof drains with heavy coating of insulating mastic or plastic insulating cement. Finish with canvas or glass cloth covering.

2


July 31, 2015 230700- 11

3.4 SPECIAL PIPE INSULATION REQUIREMENTS:

A. Kitchen Equipment Piping: Provide aluminum jackets over insulation on piping that connects to equipment (where exposed to view). Provide jackets, same as for piping. Provide escutcheons at wall, ceiling or floor penetrations.

B. Cold Piping Insulation: Exposed ends of insulation shall be sealed with vapor retarding mastic installed per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Vapor seals at butt joints shall be applied at every fourth pipe section and at each fitting to isolate any water incursion.

C. Removable Insulation Sections: Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Fabricate removable insulation sections from sections of pipe insulation or block insulation as follows. Removable flexible blankets will be allowed with prior approval if adequate covering is provided. Vapor barrier must be maintained for cold surfaces.

2. When covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of the component. Secure cover in place with stainless-steel hooks and wire.

3. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks. Extend insulation at least two inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of the component. Fill space between the component and pipe insulation with insulating cement.

3.5 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Glass Fiber Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.

2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints.

3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. 4. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,

handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection. 5. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and

nameplates. 6. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends,

joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.

3.6 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2


July 31, 2015 230700- 12

2. Terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant for applications requiring only indoor insulation. Install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends for applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. Terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant for applications

requiring only indoor insulation. Install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends for applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Floor, Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated floors, walls and partitions if firestop is rated for this approach. Obtain further direction from A/E if firestopping is not rated for insulated penetrations. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.7 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. General: Where field-applied jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with two-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with two-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

2


July 31, 2015 230700- 13

3.8 COMMISSIONING

A. Notify the Commissioning Agent one week prior to startup of equipment.




2

Spokane Transit Authority Section 221100 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Water Distribution Systems

July 31, 2015 221100- 1

SECTION 221100 – WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building.

2. Ball valves. 3. Butterfly valves. 4. Gate valves. 5. Check valves. 6. Strainers. 7. Mechanically coupled piping systems. 8. Backflow preventors. 9. Pressure reducing valves. 10. Combination balancing-shutoff valves. 11. Thermostatic mixing valves. 12. Flexible connectors. 13. Water Hammer Arrestors. 14. Trap primers.


1. Division 22, Section 220500, "Common Work for Plumbing."


1. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following products:

1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building.


July 31, 2015 221100- 2

2. Ball valves. 3. Butterfly valves. 4. Gate valves. 5. Check valves. 6. Strainers. 7. Mechanically coupled piping systems. 8. Backflow preventers. 9. Pressure reducing valves. 10. Combination balancing-shutoff valves. 11. Thermostatic mixing valves. 12. Flexible connectors. 13. Water Hammer Arrestors. 14. Trap primers.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.


A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Construction Manager and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Construction Manager's and Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER PIPE AND FITTINGS (POTABLE AND NON-POTABLE WATER)

A. Pipe General:

1. Pipe Above Ground: Seamless copper water tube, ASTM B88, Type L, hard-drawn. 2. Pipe Below Ground (3" Size and Smaller): Seamless copper water tube, ASTM B88,

Type "K," annealed, ANSI/ASME B16.22 wrought copper fittings, joints made by soldering.

B. Fittings for Copper Tubing:


July 31, 2015 221100- 3

1. Wrought copper or bronze solder-joint pressure fittings conforming to ANSI/ASME B16.18 and ANSI/ASME B16.22.

2. Adapters may be used for connecting tubing to flanges and to threaded ends of valves and equipment.

3. Solder: Lead-free, silver bearing, NSF approved, for all joints in copper water tubing. Apply flux carefully and remove all excess.

C. Unions, Copper Piping: 125-lb. wrought copper or cast bronze, solder joint type; ANSI/ASME B16.22 or ANSI/ASME B16.18.

D. Dielectric Fittings: See section 220500.

2.2 VALVES

A. General: Provide valves on all water piping systems and pumped drainage piping systems, 125-psi system working pressure and below, where shown or specified. Provide valve in water or drain connection to each removable or replaceable item of equipment.

B. Shut-Off Valves 2" and Smaller: Ball type, bronze, lead free. Bronze shall be ASTM B584 Alloy C84400. Two-piece body style, threaded ends, full port, chrome plated solid brass ball, teflon seats, adjustable packing, lever handle, blowout proof stem, 150 wsp, 600 wog.


a. Apollo No. 77CLF. b. Crane Co. Model LF 9201. c. Hammond Valve UP8301A. d. Milwaukee BA-400. e. Nibco No. T-585-70 f. Watts No. B-6080

C. Shut-Off Valves 2-1/2" and Larger: Butterfly type, full lug, ductile iron body, 400 series stainless steel stem, aluminum bronze disc, EPDM liner and seals, upper and lower stem bearing, blowout proof stem, extended neck for minimum 2" insulation, manufacturer recommended for bi-directional dead end service at full rated pressure without a downstream flange, sizes 2-1/2" through 4" shall be lever operated and 200 psi cwp; 6" through 12" shall be gear operated and 200 psi cwp; 14" and larger shall be gear operated and 150 psi cwp.


a. Demco No. NEC-511. b. Keystone No. HS-2. c. Nibco No. LD-2000.

D. Swing Check Valves 2" and Smaller: Bronze body, threaded ends, swing check, Teflon disc and seat, 125 wsp, 200 wog.



July 31, 2015 221100- 4

a. Milwaukee No. 509-T. b. Nibco No. T-413-Y. c. Stockham No. B-320-T.

E. Check Valves in Copper Tubing: Bronze body and disc, soldered joint end connections, horizontal swing check, screwed cap, 125 wsp, 200 wog.


a. Milwaukee No. 1509. b. Nibco No. S-413-B. c. Stockham No. B-309.

F. Drain Valves 1/2" to 3/4" Sizes: Bronze ball valve, two-piece body, standard port, chrome plated brass ball, RPTFE seats, lever handle, blow out proof stem, threaded or soldered with hose end, cap and chain, 150 psi wsp, 600 psi wog.


a. Apollo 78/200 Series. b. Milwaukee No. BA-100H or BA-150H.

2.3 STRAINERS

A. Strainers: Strainers shall be Y-pattern with cast-iron or bronze bodies.

B. Domestic Water System Strainers 2" and Smaller: Threaded, 250 lb., wye-pattern. Monel or stainless steel screen with 20 mesh perforations.


a. Armstrong No. CA1SC-250. b. Conbraco 59 Series. c. Watts Series 77S.

C. Strainers in Copper Tubing 2" and Smaller (Threaded Pattern): 200 lb., heavy-duty cast bronze body, Y-type, 20-mesh stainless steel screen, threaded blowdown end.


a. Armstrong No. CA1SC-250. b. Conbraco 59 Series. c. Watts Series S777S.

D. Strainers in Copper Tubing 2" and Smaller (Solder Pattern): 200 lb., heavy-duty cast bronze body, Y-type, 20-mesh stainless steel screen, threaded blowdown end.



July 31, 2015 221100- 5

a. Armstrong No. CA1SC-250. b. Conbraco 59-300 Series. c. Watts Series S777S.

2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Backflow Preventers in General:

1. Backflow preventers, valves, fittings and piping exposed in finished rooms shall be chromium-plated unless otherwise indicated.

B. Backflow preventers shall conform to the provisions of WAC 246-290-490, "Cross-Connection Control."

C. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers:

1. Reduced pressure type, line pressure operated; state and local approved; low-pressure drop with accessories and fittings required for testing by water purveyor or authority having jurisdiction; gate valve on each side, supported on steel wall brackets.

2. Manufacturer: Danfoss-Flomatic Model RPZ, Conbraco 40-200 Series, Zurn/Wilkins Model 375, Watts Series 909 or Febco Model 860.

3. Standard: ASSE 1013. 4. Operation: Continuous-pressure applications. 5. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range. 6. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; steel with interior lining that complies with

AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 7. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 8. Configuration: Designed for horizontal, straight-through flow. 9. Accessories:

a. Valves NPS 2 and Smaller: Ball type with threaded ends on inlet and outlet. b. Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside-screw and yoke-gate type with flanged

ends on inlet and outlet. c. Air-Gap Fitting: ASME A112.1.2, matching backflow-preventer connection.

D. Backflow-Preventer Test Kits:


a. Conbraco Industries, Inc. b. FEBCO; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. c. Flomatic Corporation. d. Watts; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.; Watts Regulator Company. e. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Water Control Products.

2. Description: Factory calibrated, with gages, fittings, hoses, and carrying case with test-procedure instructions.


July 31, 2015 221100- 6

2.5 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

A. Pressure Reducing Valves 2-1/2" and Smaller: Bronze body, 300 psi rated inlet high temperature rated diaphragm for hot or cold water, renewable stainless steel seat, spring cage and orifice, threaded pattern, with Y-strainer and steel perforated strainer screen.


a. Watts Series 223S or 223BS. b. Wilkins 500YSBR Series.

B. Accessory Connections: Install shut off valve on each side of reducing valve and full sized bypass with shut off valve. Install strainer on inlet side of, and the same size as pressure reducing valve. Install pressure gauge on low pressure side of line.

2.6 COMBINATION BALANCING-SHUTOFF VALVES

A. Combination Balancing-Shutoff Valves 2" and Smaller:

1. Valves shall have threaded or soldered pattern. All metal parts shall be nonferrous, pressure die-cast, nonporous copper alloy. Valves shall be capable of installation in any direction without affecting flow measurement; shall provide four functions:

a. Precise flow measurement, b. Precision flow balancing, c. Positive shut-off with no-drip seat and Teflon disc, and d. Drain connection with protective cap.

2. Valves shall have hand wheel adjustment for vernier-type setting and shall include memory setting for a tamperproof balancing setting.


a. Armstrong CBV. b. Bell & Gossett CB. c. Nibco No. T1710L or T1710.

2.7 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES FOR LAVATORIES AND SINKS

A. Thermostatic Mixing Valve for Wall-Hung Lavatories and Sinks: The thermostatic mixing valve shall control outlet temperature over a wide range of flow and shall be designed specifically for line control to wall-hung lavatories and sinks. Valve shall be bronze, brass, nylon and stainless steel construction. The valve shall employ a solid bimetal thermostat directly linked to valve porting to control the intake of hot and cold water. The adjustable high limit stop shall be set for 110F. Operating pressure shall not exceed 125 psi. Valve shall have a screwdriver-adjustment temperature dial with scale: COLD-HOT. Check valves shall be provided in both hot water and cold water inlets. Valve shall have a vandal-resistant lockable


July 31, 2015 221100- 7

handle to prevent tampering. Valve shall be recessed in wall or located in above accessible ceiling.

1. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Bradley "Navigator" TMV Series 2. Leonard Model C-210-AF-BR. 3. Powers "Hydroguard Series 490".

B. Access Frame and Door: Provide a square frame with hinged locked door for access to the recessed thermostatic mixing valve. Frame and door shall be 16-gauge Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish. Frame and door shall have concealed hinge and screwdriver operated latch. Nailer slots shall be provided for attaching to studs. In ceramic tile walls, provide with anchor straps. In plaster or wet wall construction, cover shall be flush with wall. Provide anchor holes when flushed cover is used. Door size shall be minimum 8" x 8".


a. Bradley. b. Leonard. c. Powers. d. Jay R. Smith Fig. 4762 or Fig. 4767.

2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Approved Manufacturers:

1. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. 2. Flexicraft Industries. 3. Flex-Weld, Inc. 4. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc. 5. Metraflex, Inc.

B. Bronze-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-bronze tubing with bronze wire-braid covering and ends brazed to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig. 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded copper pipe or plain-end copper tube. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged copper alloy.

C. Stainless-Steel-Hose Flexible Connectors: Corrugated-stainless-steel tubing with stainless-steel wire-braid covering and ends welded to inner tubing.

1. Working-Pressure Rating: Minimum 200 psig. 2. End Connections NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded steel-pipe nipple. 3. End Connections NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged steel nipple.


July 31, 2015 221100- 8

2.9 WATER-HAMMER ARRESTERS

A. Water-Hammer Arresters:


a. AMTROL, Inc. b. Josam Company. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. e. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. f. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. g. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. h. Watts Drainage Products. i. Zurn Industries, LLC; Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Products.

2. Standard: ASSE 1010 or PDI-WH 201. 3. Type: Metal bellows or copper tube with piston. 4. Size: ASSE 1010, Sizes AA and A through F, or PDI-WH 201, Sizes A through F.

2.10 TRAP PRIMERS

A. Mechanical Trap Primers-Intermittent Water Flow Type, TPV-X: Adjustable-type automatic trap seal primer valve, cast bronze body, 1/2" copper sweat connections or union connections. Manufacturer: Josam 88250, Wade Fig. W2400, Smith Fig. 2699 or Mifab MI-TSP-2.

B. Drainage-Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device TPV-X: ASSE 1044, lavatory P-trap with 3/8 minimum trap makeup connection, 1-1/4 trap size minimum, chrome plated cast brass. Zurn Z1021-WL; Jay R. Smith 2698-CAN.

C. Vacuum Breaker Type, Trap-Seal Primer Device TPV-X: Flush valve type with 3/8 minimum trap makeup connection, water deflector, vacuum breaker, chrome plated cast brass. Sloan VBF-72-A2, Precision Plumbing Products FVP-1VP.

PART 3 - EXECUTION






July 31, 2015 221100- 9


E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:


2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.



1. Install unions, in piping NPS 1” and larger and 2" and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in wet piping systems.

3.3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Special Requirements:

1. Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed structural capacity of floor, if stored inside.

2. Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.

B. General Requirements:

1. Shutoff Valves: Install ball type shut-off valves at the base of each plumbing riser serving more than one fixture, in each branch line serving more than one fixture, and elsewhere as shown. Install valves in positions accessible for operation and repair.

2. Grading of Piping: Where possible, grade all lines to facilitate drainage. Provide drain valves at bottom of risers. All unnecessary traps in circulating lines shall be avoided. Connect branch lines at bottom of main serving fixtures below and pitch down so that main may be drained through fixture. Connect branch lines to top of main serving only fixtures located on floor above.

3. Concealed Piping: Conceal all piping in finished areas of the building unless noted otherwise.

4. All piping shall be run parallel with building construction and 90° angles to same. 5. Provisions for Piping Covering: Allow sufficient space for the proper installation of the

pipe covering. If piping is installed too close to other piping or equipment, the piping shall be moved to avoid such interferences.


July 31, 2015 221100- 10

6. Pipe in Shafts: Piping in vertical shafts which are accessible shall be arranged to prevent obstruction to the access openings.

7. Install no piping of any kind in electrical equipment rooms, telephone equipment rooms, or elevator machine rooms.

8. Unions: Install at connections to all equipment downstream of valves, at all equipment specialties, and wherever else required to permit easy connection and disconnection. Do not conceal unions in walls, partitions or inaccessible ceilings.

9. Where grooved piping systems are utilized, unions are not required. Couplings shall serve as unions.

10. Dielectric Fittings: Provide approved dielectric type waterways, fittings or flanges where pipe sections made of dissimilar metals are to be joined to prevent metal to metal contact. Do not use dielectric unions.

C. Connections to Fixtures:

1. General: Anchor supply connections at fixtures to steel straps secured to studs. At flush valves provide fitting with lugs secured to strap. At lavatories and other fixtures, secure piping directly to strap. Provide copper tubing stubs through wall for connection to compression type stops.

2. Contractor shall provide all necessary material and labor to connect to the plumbing system all fixtures and equipment having plumbing connections and which are furnished by the Owner or specified in other sections of these specifications.

3. The supply line to each item of equipment or fixture, except faucets, flush valves or other control valves which are supplied with an integral stop, shall be equipped with a shutoff valve to enable isolation of the item for repair and maintenance without interfering with operation of other equipment or fixtures. Supply piping to all fixtures shall be anchored to prevent movement.

4. Partition-Type Stops: Provide on water supply to all fixtures which are not connected through individual exposed stops, integral stops, or stops in pipe space.

5. Electric Water Cooler Connections: Through a stop, 3/8" tubing supply, concealed within cabinet of cooler.

D. Water Hammer Arresters: Install on hot and cold water piping, located close to each faucet, control valve, flush valve, or any other type of quick closing valve or automatic valve, including lever handled manual faucets, no exception. Sizing and placement shall conform to the requirements of PDI-WH201. Arresters shall be fully accessible.

E. Installation of Trap Primers: Install trap primers in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations where readily accessible behind access doors or above accessible ceilings. Trap primer shall be located on domestic cold-water lines only. Do not prime shower drain traps.

F. Backflow Preventers:

1. Install according to applicable requirements of WAC 248-54-285, "Cross-Connection Control".

2. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers. 4. Backflow preventers shall be installed so as to be fully accessible for testing and

maintenance by the water purveyor.


July 31, 2015 221100- 11

5. Provide funnel below each backflow preventer discharge. Funnel shall include approved air gap and drain line to funnel floor drain or other approved receptor. Drain line shall be sized for maximum backflow preventer discharge. Provide steel wall brackets for support of backflow preventers. In finished areas, brackets shall be chrome-plated. In unfinished areas, brackets shall be painted.

G. Pressure Piping Regulations: All piping work, except drainage, shall conform to the "ANSI/ASME Building Services Piping Code," B31.9, including latest amendments.

H. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with memory-stop balancing valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

I. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted.

J. Install temperature-actuated, water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

1. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.

K. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each control valve and water pressure-reducing valve.

L. Install water-hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

M. Install trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.

3.4 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:

1. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. 2. Water pressure-reducing valves. 3. Calibrated balancing valves. 4. Thermostatic, water mixing valves.

B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220500.

3.5 STERILIZATION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Provide disinfection and flushing of all new and altered or repaired potable water systems in accordance with "Disinfection of Potable Water System," Uniform Plumbing Code, 2006 Edition.


July 31, 2015 221100- 12

B. Sterilization and Flushing: All water piping, twenty-four (24) hour sterilization contact time, 50 parts per million chlorine concentration. Open all valves several times, following by flushing with clean water until residual chlorine is the same as that of potable water.

C. Arrange for disposition of all flushing water.

3.6 TESTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Water Piping: All domestic cold and hot water and non-potable water piping inside building shall be tested by hydrostatic pressure at 100 psi, for a minimum of 24 hours without any leaks. Provide a pressure gauge with a shutoff and bleeder valve at the highest point of the piping being tested. Only potable water shall be used for testing.

B. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

C. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

D. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated, water mixing valves.

3.7 COMMISSIONING





Spokane Transit Authority Section 221300 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Sanitary Sewerage Systems

July 31, 2015 - 1

SECTION 221300 – SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Work under this section includes:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Cleanouts. 3. Floor drains. 4. Roof flashing assemblies. 5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 6. Flashing materials.

B. Related Sections: Division 02, Section 220500, "Common Work for Plumbing."

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

C. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.

D. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

E. PP: Polypropylene plastic.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.

221300 Systems


July 31, 2015 - 2

B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Cleanouts. 3. Floor drains. 4. Roof flashing assemblies. 5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 6. Flashing materials.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.


A. Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect and Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary waste service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste service without Architect's and Owner's written permission.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Aboveground, soil and waste piping shall be the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty hubless-piping couplings; and coupled

joints.

3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, non-pressure transition couplings.

221300 Systems


July 31, 2015 - 3

B. Aboveground, vent piping shall be the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty hubless piping couplings; and coupled

joints. 3. Galvanized-steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints. 4. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, non-pressure transition couplings.

C. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; heavy-duty hubless-piping couplings; and coupled

joints.

3. Dissimilar Pipe-Material Couplings: Shielded, non-pressure transition couplings.

D. Condensate Drain Piping: Condensate drain piping serving drain pans and cooling coil drain shall be ASTM B306 hard temper copper drainage tubing (DWV) with ANSI/ASME B16.23 cast bronze fittings.

2.2 CAST IRON SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

A. Standard of Quality: All cast iron sanitary, waste and vent piping shall bear the marking of Cast Iron Soil Pipe trademark, and shall be manufactured in the United States. All the above products shall be listed with IAPMO under file numbers:

1. No. 2862 Couplings 2. No. 3209 Closet Bends 3. No. 3270 Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings - No Hub and Service Weight.

2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

2.4 HUBLESS, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. Heavy-Duty, Hubless-Piping Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

221300 Systems


July 31, 2015 - 4

a. ANACO-Husky. b. Clamp-All Corp. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. Mission Rubber Company; a division of MCP Industries, Inc. e. Tyler Pipe.

2. Standards: ASTM C 1277 and ASTM C 1540. 3. Description: Type 304 stainless steel full shielded couplings having 2 stainless steel bands

and tightening clamps for pipe sizes 1-1/2" through 4" and 4 stainless steel bands and tightening clamps for pipe sizes 5" through 10", and 6 stainless steel bands and tightening clamps for pipe sizes 12" through 15"; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.

2.5 GALVANIZED-STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Standard Weight class. Include square-cut-grooved or threaded ends matching joining method.

B. Galvanized-Cast-Iron Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.12, threaded.

C. Steel Pipe Pressure Fittings:

1. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106/A 106M, Schedule 40, seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method.

2. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Class 150; hexagonal-stock body with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal, bronze seating surface; and female threaded ends.

3. Galvanized-Gray-Iron, Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern.

D. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME B16.1, Class 125.

1. Flange Gasket Materials: ASME B16.21, full-face, flat, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

2. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.

E. Grooved-Joint, Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:


a. Anvil International; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products, Inc. b. Grinnell Mechanical Products. c. Shurjoint Piping Products. d. Victaulic Company.

2. Galvanized, Grooved-End Fittings for Galvanized-Steel Piping: ASTM A 536 ductile-iron castings, ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable-iron castings, ASTM A 234/A 234M forged steel

221300 Systems


July 31, 2015 - 5

fittings, or ASTM A 106/A 106M steel pipes with dimensions matching ASTM A 53/A 53M steel pipe, and complying with AWWA C606 for grooved ends.

2.6 CLEANOUTS

A. General Requirements for Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall be same size as the pipe, up to 4"; not less than 4" for larger pipe. Cleanouts shall be easily accessible. Provide a minimum clearance of 24 inches to facilitate rodding. Cleanouts shall be secured with vandal-proof screws.


a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. d. Tyler Pipe. e. Watts Drainage Products. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

B. Cleanouts in Floors: Floor cleanouts shall have cast iron body and frame with square adjustable scoriated secured nickel bronze top. Unit shall be vertically adjustable for a minimum of 2". When a waterproof membrane is used in the floor system, provide clamping collars on the cleanouts. Cleanouts shall consist of "Y" fittings and 1/8 bends with brass or bronze screw plugs. Cleanouts in resilient tile floors, quarry tile and ceramic tile floors shall be provided with square top covers recessed for tile insertion. In carpeted areas, provide carpet cleanout markers.

C. Cleanouts in Vertical Piping: Provide cleanouts at or near the base of the vertical stacks with the cleanout plug located approximately 24" above the floor. If there are no fixtures installed on the lowest floor, the cleanout shall be installed at the base of the stack. Extend the cleanouts to the wall access cover. Cleanouts shall consist of sanitary tees. Provide nickel-bronze square frame and stainless steel cover with minimum opening of 6" x 6" at each wall cleanout.

D. Cleanouts in Horizontal Piping: In horizontal runs above grade, cleanouts shall consist of cast brass tapered screw plug in fitting or caulked no-hub cast iron ferrule. Plain end (no-hub) piping in interstitial spaces or above ceiling may use plain end (no-hub) blind plug and clamp.

2.7 FLOOR DRAINS

A. General Requirements:

1. Unless otherwise specified, all drains shall have cast-iron bodies. Drain outlet size, as indicated on the drawings.

2. Drains shall generally consist of a body, integral seepage pan and adjustable perforated or slotted strainer consisting of grate and threaded collar. Drains shall be of double pattern suitable for embedding in the floor construction. The seepage pan shall have weep holes or channels to permit drainage from the pan to the drainpipe.

221300 Systems


July 31, 2015 - 6

3. All drains shall be provided with trap primer connections, except shower drains. Each drain shall be provided with a P-trap and vent.

4. Drains with integral no-hub outlets are acceptable. 5. Drain Flanges and Clamps: All drains installed in slabs that are not slab-on-grade shall

include drainage flanges. All drains in membrane floors shall include flange and membrane clamping ring.

6. Finishes: Strainers of drains in showers shall be chrome-plated bronze or polished-nickel bronze; strainers in all finished areas, including stairwells, temporary unfinished areas, etc., shall be polished-nickel bronze. Strainers and grates in unfinished areas, such as boiler rooms and mechanical equipment rooms, shall be galvanized cast-iron or chromate converted cadmium or zinc electroplated coating, unless otherwise specified.

B. Drains-General Type:


a. Josam Company. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. d. Tyler Pipe. e. Watts Drainage Products. f. Wade. g. Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Floor Drain - General Service: Cast-iron body, flashing collar with protector cap, polished-nickel bronze adjustable strainer head with heel-proof grate and trap primer connection. Minimum size strainers for the following outlet pipe sizes shall be provided unless otherwise specified: 5" strainer for 2" outlet; 6" strainer for 3" outlet; 8" strainer for 4" outlet. Manufacturer: Round top pattern Smith Fig 2010-A-NB, Josam 30000-A, Wade No.1100-STD-1, Zurn No. ZN-415 or approved Mifab. Square top pattern, Smith Fig. 2010-B, Josam 30000-S, Wade 1100-GK, Zurn No. ZN-415-S or approved Mifab.

3. Floor Drain-Combination Funnel Type: Combination funnel floor-type drain, cast-iron body with adjustable strainer head with drainage flange, trap primer connection. Polished nickel bronze 8" diameter top, with polished nickel-bronze 8-1/4" x 3-1/4" funnel. Attach funnel by bolting from underside, with grate bars cut out within funnel. Manufacturer: Zurn ZN-415-8B with ZN-329 funnel, Josam 30000-8A-F9, Smith Fig. 3510 (-F19), Wade 1100-STD 8-EG8-1-MOD or approved Mifab. Square top pattern drains, 8" x 8", Zurn ZN-415-8S with ZN-329 funnel, Josam 30000-8S-F9, Smith 3510 (-F27), Wade W1100-G8-EG8-MOD or approved Mifab.

2.8 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch- thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 6 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.

1. Open-top vent without cap.

221300 Systems


July 31, 2015 - 7

2.9 DRAINAGE SPECIALTIES:

A. Air Gaps: Air gaps shall be cast bronze construction. Provide polished chrome-plated finish where exposed to view. Manufacturer: Zurn Z-1025 or Zurn Z-1025 (-CP), Josam 88900-CP, Smith Fig. 3955 or 3955 (-CP) Series or approved Wade or Mifab.

B. Open Drains:

1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

C. Deep-Seal Traps:

1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping. 3. NPS 2: 4-inch minimum water seal. 4. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch minimum water seal.

D. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, BUILDING DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS

A. General: Comply with all local code and Uniform Plumbing Code requirements for the installation of building drainage and vent piping unless otherwise indicated.

B. Installation of Floor and Roof Drains:

1. Floor drains and roof drains and shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Drains with No-Hub outlets may be used. No-Hub couplings are specified in Part 2 of this Section.

3. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

221300 Systems


July 31, 2015 - 8

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger

piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

E. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

F. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

G. Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.


A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.

3.3 TESTING AND ADJUSTING

A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

221300 Systems


July 31, 2015 - 9

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

E. Test of Drains: All floor drains, garage drains, planter drains, trench or area drains shall be flow tested to demonstrate proper operation. All traps and sumps shall be cleaned out.

3.4 COMMISSIONING





221300 Systems

Spokane Transit Authority Section 224000 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Plumbing Fixtures

July 31, 2015 224000- 1

SECTION 224000 – PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and related components.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.

C. Cast Polymer: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material. This material includes cultured-marble and solid-surface materials.

D. Cultured Marble: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material with surface coating.

E. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated.

F. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

G. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.

H. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

I. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.


July 31, 2015 224000- 2

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.



1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size installed or five of each, whichever is greater.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size installed or two of each, whichever is greater.

3. Toilet Seats: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type installed or two of each, whichever is greater.

1.6 WATER EFFICIENCY STANDARDS

A. All applicable plumbing fixtures shall conform to the water efficiency standards set forth in the Uniform Plumbing Code, latest addition.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities", Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act" for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.

G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures:


July 31, 2015 224000- 3

1. Stainless-Steel Commercial, Handwash Sinks: NSF 2 construction. 2. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.

H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and sink faucets:

1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M. 2. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 3. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011. 4. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 5. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 6. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61. 7. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 8. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951. 9. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1. 10. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:

1. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6. 2. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3. 3. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 4. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M. 5. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 6. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 7. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Warranty Period for Commercial Applications: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIXTURE TRIM

A. Trim: All trim shall be brass, including faucet, strainers, stops, etc., chromium plate over nickel finish. Faucet handles shall be chromium plated forged or cast brass or may be federal specification grade zinc, chromium plate over nickel finish.

B. Stops: Provide in each water connection to each fixture unless integral stop is specified; loose-key handle, lock shield cap, wall flange, polished chrome-plated copper tubing where exposed to view, rough finished where concealed. All stops shall be 1/2" OD flexible riser, chrome-plated.

1. Stops shall be chrome plated brass body type, constructed with no wearing parts, with metal-to-metal units.


July 31, 2015 224000- 4

a. Manufacturer: Chicago Faucet No. 1006-MMABCP or T & S Brass B-1305-6662-40.

C. Pipe Escutcheons: Chrome plated, stamped steel, hinged, split-ring escutcheon, with set screw or snap-on type. Inside diameter shall closely fit pipe outside diameter or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Outside diameter shall completely cover the opening in floors, walls, or ceilings. In exterior, damp, or corrosive environments, use stainless steel escutcheons.

1. Manufacturer: McGuire No. 127050, Chicago Faucet or Brass Craft CB647C.

D. Exposed Supplies: 1/2" O.D. tubing; one end to have a brazed or formed end for compression joints.

E. Traps: Traps on fixture outlets shall be 17-gauge cast brass, polished chrome-plated, adjustable, with trap extension and escutcheon, cleanout plug.

1. Manufacturer: Kohler, American Standard, Eljer, Crane or McGuire.

F. Barrier-Free Requirements: Operating controls for all plumbing fixtures designated for use by the physically handicapped shall comply with Uniform Building Code, “Requirements for Barrier-Free Accessibility”.


July 31, 2015 224000- 5

WATER CLOSET – Public Restrooms, Security Suite

Fixture: American Standard 3351.101; wall-hung elon-gated toilet, vitreous china, ADA compliant.

Flush Valve: Sloan Valve model 8111-1.28; exposed sensor flush valve, solar-powered, 1.28 gpf, battery back-up power source, vandal resistant stop cap, ADA compliant.

Accessories: American Standard 5901.100; heavy duty toilet seat.

P1-1


July 31, 2015 224000- 6

WATER CLOSET – Unisex

Fixture: American Standard 3351.101; wall-hung elon-gated toilet, vitreous china, ADA compliant.

Flush Valve: Sloan Valve model 111-1.28; exposed manual flush valve, 1.28 gpf, vandal resistant stop cap, ADA compliant.

Accessories: American Standard 5901.100; heavy duty toilet seat.

P1-2


July 31, 2015 224000- 7

URINAL – Public Restrooms

Fixture: American Standard 6590.001; wall-hung, flush-ing rim, ¾” inlet spud, 2” outlet connection, vit-reous china, barrier free.

Flush Valve: Sloan Valve model 8186-0.125; exposed sensor flush valve, solar-powered, 0.125 gpf, battery back-up power source, vandal resistant stop cap, ADA compliant.

Accessories: None.

P2-1


July 31, 2015 224000- 8

LAVATORY – Public Restrooms, Unisex, Secu-rity Suite

Fixture: American Standard 0436.004US; wall-hung with concealed arm carrier, vitreous china, front over-flow, 4” centers, ADA compliant.

Faucet: American Standard 6055.205; 0.5 gpm, vandal-resistant, sensor activated, battery powered, ADA compliant.

Accessories: Chrome grid strainer.

P3-1


July 31, 2015 224000- 9

SERVICE SINK - Custodial

Fixture: Zurn model Z5890; cast iron, 24”x20”, 8” center faucet holes, stainless steel rim guard, 3” exposed trap.

Faucet: Chicago Faucets model 897-CRCF; vacuum breaker spout, pail hook, wall brace, ¾” hose thread outlet, integral stop valves, rough chrome finish.

Accessories: Chrome grid strainer.

P4-1


July 31, 2015 224000- 10

WATER COOLER – Public Restroom

Fixture: Elkay Model ERFPM28FK; recessed refrigera-tion system, stainless steel grill, vandal-resistant push button, dual height, 115V, ADA compliant.

Accessories: None.

P5-1

Faucet: None.


July 31, 2015 224000- 11

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.

B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.

1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures. 2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping. 3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.

C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.

D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate.

E. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

F. Install floor-mounting, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate and wall bracket and onto waste fitting seals.

G. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

H. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

I. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture.

J. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system.


July 31, 2015 224000- 12

K. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system.

L. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

M. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of compartment.

N. Install toilet seats on water closets.

O. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

P. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

Q. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.

R. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have disposer. Install switch where indicated or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.

S. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22, Section 220500, "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

T. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Sealants are specified in Division 07, Section 07920, "Joint Sealants."

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26, Section 260526, "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26, Section 260519, "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


July 31, 2015 224000- 13


A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.

B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.

C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.

E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.

C. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following:

1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts.

2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.


July 31, 2015 224000- 14

3.8 COMMISSIONING





Spokane Transit Authority Section 230500 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Common Work Results for HVAC

July 31, 2015 230500- 1

SECTION 230500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Requirements under this section includes required work that is common to multiple sections in Division 23 and shall be complied with by all suppliers and subcontractors

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. A/E: Prime design consultant responsible for preparation of these specifications.

B. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

C. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

D. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

E. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.

F. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

G. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 2. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

H. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:

1. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.


July 31, 2015 230500- 2

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide submittals per Division 01, Section 013300, “Submittal Procedures.”

B. Product Data: Submit product data for each type of product indicated herein. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Required in the following areas: Mechanical Rooms, Pump Rooms, shafts, and congested areas required for coordination. Include as a minimum all piping and ductwork.

2. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data:

1. All valves and specialty valves (Valve tag list), 2. Piping system accessories including, but not limited to; strainers, expansion tanks,

meters, gages, thermometers, traps, filters, etc. 3. Ductwork system accessories including, but not limited to; fire and smoke dampers,

backdraft dampers, terminal units, etc. 4. All equipment that includes an electrical connection and/or has recommended

maintenance, along with all related accessories. 5. All controls.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."

B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."


involved and that certification is current.

C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.


July 31, 2015 230500- 3

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics (such as larger motor horsepower) may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.


A. Do not install products or materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of site conditions by field measurements before fabrication.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.8 TRANSITIONS AND OFFSETS BEYOND THE SCOPE OF WORK

A. Check drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work will be installed. Establish exact locations of piping and ducts in such a manner as to conform to structure, avoid obstructions, and keep openings and passageways clear. Lines that must pitch, or that must have a constant elevation, shall have the right-of-way over lines not so restricted. Maintain maximum headroom. If space conditions appear inadequate, notify the A/E before proceeding with the work. Make reasonable modifications in the work without extra cost as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades and for proper execution of the work.

B. If the total additional weight of sheet metal or piping materials (including associated fittings, hangers, seismic restraints and insulation) required for piping offsets which are not indicated or inferred on the contract documents exceeds nine percent (9%) of the total weight of the piping system, the amount exceeding this percentage may be considered to be beyond the requirements of these documents.

C. In order for additional compensation to be considered for transitions and offsets in excess of the amount stated in Paragraph B above, the Contractor shall submit to the A/E a detailed take-off of all materials indicated on the contract documents. The Contractor shall also submit a separate take-off along with coordination drawings or marked-up contract drawings with yellow highlighting indicating specifically the transitions and offsets considered to be "extra work." Additional compensation will only be considered if take-offs and drawings are received


July 31, 2015 230500- 4

by the A/E four weeks in advance of the fabrication of conflicting work in the area of concern so that the A/E may be able to determine ways to minimize or eliminate the extra work.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Description: MSS SP-58-2009; “Pipe Hangers and support– Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application and Installation”: Types 1 through 59, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.

1. Basis of Design: Anvil. 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. B-Line Systems, Inc. b. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. c. Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE® d. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.

B. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.


D. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping.

2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS

A. Description: MSS SP-58, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. For piping 2” and below, manufactured specialty products formed from pre-galvanized commercial steel.

1. The total weight of piping and components upon each trapeze span shall not exceed the manufacturers load rating. Load ratings must include a minimum 2 X safety factor.


July 31, 2015 230500- 5

a. Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE EZ-Strut™ or owner approved equivalent.

2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels and other components.

1. Basis of Design: Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd. 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.; ERISTRUT Div. c. Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE® d. PHD Manufacturing, Inc.

B. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.


2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS

A. Description: 100-psig- minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield.

1. Basis of Design: Pipe Shields, Inc. 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. b. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.

B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.

C. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier.

D. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.

E. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.

F. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature.


July 31, 2015 230500- 6

2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS

A. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated or stainless steel, for use in hardened Portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

1. Basis of Design: Hilti, Inc. 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Hubbard Enterprises/HOLDRITE® b. ITW Ramset/Red Head. c. Powers Fasteners.

2.6 PIPE STAND FABRICATION

A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion-resistant components to support roof-mounted piping.

1. Basis of Design: MIRO Industries 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.

B. Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

1. Manufacturers:

a. MIRO Industries.

C. High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

1. Basis of Design: MIRO Industries 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. b. Portable Pipe Hangers.

3. Base: Stainless steel. 4. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuous-

thread rods. 5. Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless-

steel, roller-type pipe support.

D. High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.

1. Manufacturers:


July 31, 2015 230500- 7

a. Portable Pipe Hangers.

2. Bases: One or more plastic. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels. 4. Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel. 5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.

E. Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe support made from structural-steel shape, continuous-thread rods, and rollers for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb.

2.7 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS

A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, clips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications.

1. Basis of Design: HOLDRITE Corp.; Hubbard Enterprises. 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. C & S Mfg. Corp. b. Samco Stamping, Inc.




A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

B. Plenum Rated Pipe Clamps: ASTM E-84 25/50 plastic clamps from Hubbard Enterprises/ HOLDRITE.

C. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

2.10 EXPANSION COMPENSATORS

A. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints: Manufactured assembly with two flexible-metal-hose legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center section of flexible hose; with inlet and outlet elbow fittings, corrugated-metal inner hoses, and braided outer sheaths.


July 31, 2015 230500- 8

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Metraflex Metraloop b. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. c. Flexicraft Industries. d. Flex-Pression, Ltd.

2. Flexible-Hose Expansion Joints for Copper Piping: Copper-alloy fittings with solder joint end connections.

a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 340 psig at 450 deg F ratings.



a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 325 psig at 600 deg F ratings.


2.11 ALIGNMENT GUIDES

A. Description: Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for alignment of piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Metraflex, Inc. b. Flex-Hose Co., Inc. c. Flexicraft Industries. d. Flex-Weld, Inc. e. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.

2.12 MATERIALS FOR ANCHORS

A. Indicate alignment-guide length and maximum spider travel on Drawings.

B. Description: Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two-section outer cylinder and base for alignment of piping and two-section guiding spider for bolting to pipe.

C. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.


July 31, 2015 230500- 9

D. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head.

E. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.

F. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

1. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel. 2. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel. 3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

G. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud bonding system anchor for use with hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.

1. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, 2-component epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed.

2. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.

H. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi minimum. Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete.

I. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink, nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.

1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

2.13 THERMOMETERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 2. Marsh Bellofram/Marshalltown. 3. Trerice, H. O. Co. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Thermometers: Adjustable angle, Direct-mounting, bimetallic-actuated dial thermometers complying with ASME B40.200.

1. Case: Highly polished, hermetically sealed, stainless steel with 5-inch diameter. 2. Element: Bimetal coil. 3. Dial: Satin-faced, or highly polished, non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched

scale markings. 4. Window: Double strength Glass. 5. Connector: Adjustable angle, ½” with ASME B1.1 screw threads. 6. Stem: stainless steel, for thermo-well installation and of length to suit installation.


July 31, 2015 230500- 10

7. Accuracy: Plus or minus one percent of range or plus or minus one scale to maximum of 1.5 percent of range. Scale shall be degrees Fahrenheit, unless otherwise indicated, suitable for the media operating temperatures.

8. Thermometers shall conform generally to the following: SERVICE RANGE – DEGREES F. DEG. F/DIV. Heating Hot Water 30-240 2 Condenser Water 30-130 1 Chilled Water 0-100 1 Steam and Condensate 50 to 400 2 Air Ducts 40 to 120 1

C. Thermowells: Pressure-tight, socket-type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type, diameter, and length required to hold thermometer with extension necks of suitable length for insulated piping. Furnished by same manufacturer as thermometers.

1. Threaded Stainless Steel 2. Pressure Rating – not less than piping system design pressure. 3. Stem Length – Extend 2” into fluid or to extend to center of pipe 4. Extension for insulated piping –2” nominal but not less than thickness of insulation 5. Threaded cap nut – With chain permanently fastened to well and cap.

2.14 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ashcroft Commercial Instrument Operations; Dresser Industries; Instrument Div. 2. Marsh Bellofram/Marshalltown 3. Trerice, H. O. Co. 4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

B. Direct-Mounting, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:

1. Indicating-dial type complying with ASME B40.100. 2. Case: Liquid-filled type, 4-1/2-inch diameter Grade A phosphor Bronze. 3. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is

indicated. 5. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 6. Dial: Satin-faced, nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. 7. Ring: Stainless steel. 8. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half scale. 9. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure. 10. Scale: Scale shall be psig.

C. Shutoff Cocks for Gauges: 1/4" NPT lever handle ball valve with solid chrome-plated brass ball. Same manufacturer as gauge.


July 31, 2015 230500- 11

D. Pressure Snubbers: Filter type snubbing element, brass housing. Same manufacturer as gauge.

2.15 TEST PLUGS

A. Manufacturers

1. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc. 2. Sisco Manufacturing Co. 3. Or equal.

B. Description: Corrosion-resistant brass or stainless-steel body with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap, with extended stem beyond insulation for units to be installed in insulated piping.

C. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 degree F.

D. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing neoprene, valves gasketed orifice, suitable for inserting a 1/8” OD probe assembly.

1. Insert material for air, water, oil, or gas service at 20 to 200 degree F shall be CR. 2. Insert material for air or water service at minus 30 to plus 275 degree F shall be EPDM.



1. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of length

required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

4. Basis of Design: Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. "Thunderline Link Seal." 5. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2.17 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch (0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.


July 31, 2015 230500- 12

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.

C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.

E. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

2.18 ESCUTCHEONS

A. General: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type (walls and ceilings): Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type (walls and ceilings): With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

D. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.

E. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.

F. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

2.19 GROUT


1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, non-staining, non-corrosive, non-gaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DEMOLITION

A. Refer to Division 01 specification sections for general demolition requirements and procedures.


July 31, 2015 230500- 13

B. Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. 6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,

clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

C. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.

3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated or, if conflicts exist, as indicated on Coordination Drawings.


D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated and/or code-required slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.


July 31, 2015 230500- 14

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors where exposed to view from any location in a finished space and in stairways, according to the following:

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated

finish. c. Other Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.

2. Existing Piping: Same as for new piping.

M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other potentially-wet areas two inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.

a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board

partitions. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing.

Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to two inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07, Section 076200, "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

3. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 for materials and installation.

N. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for one inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.


July 31, 2015 230500- 15

O. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07.

P. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

Q. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.



1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve (unless valve construction facilitates disassembly) and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in piping systems.

3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.

3.5 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS

A. Comply with MSS SP-69 and 89 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified otherwise in piping system Sections.

B. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish.

C. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

D. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.


July 31, 2015 230500- 16

E. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.

2. Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 degrees F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.

3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.

4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.

5. U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes. 6. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 and above, with steel

pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 7. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, from 2 rods if longitudinal

movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 8. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, if longitudinal movement

caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary.

F. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers if longer

ends are required for riser clamps.

G. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.

2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.

3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles.

4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads

are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above

by using clip and rod. 8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.

H. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation.


July 31, 2015 230500- 17

2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation.

3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.

I. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types:

1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs.

3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support.

J. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

K. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections.

L. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction.

M. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers.



N. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.

O. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.

P. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.

Q. Select and locate hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

R. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.

S. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.


July 31, 2015 230500- 18

T. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

U. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded.

V. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:




c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and ASME B31.9 for building services piping.




a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.

5. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.

3.6 PAINTING

A. Painting of HVAC systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09, Sections 099123, "Interior Painting" and 099113, "Exterior Painting."

B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES

A. Refer to Division 05.

B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.


July 31, 2015 230500- 19

3.8 GROUTING

A. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors.

3.9 COMMISSIONING





Spokane Transit Authority Section 230523 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping

July 31, 2015 230523- 1

SECTION 230523 – GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Brass ball valves. 2. Bronze ball valves. 3. Iron, single-flange butterfly valves. 4. Iron, grooved-end butterfly valves. 5. Bronze lift check valves. 6. Bronze swing check valves. 7. Iron swing check valves. 8. Iron swing check valves with closure control. 9. Iron, grooved-end swing-check valves. 10. Iron, center-guided check valves. 11. Iron, plate-type check valves. 12. Bronze gate valves. 13. Iron gate valves. 14. Bronze globe valves. 15. Iron globe valves. 16. Lubricated plug valves. 17. Eccentric plug valves.


1. Division 23 HVAC piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. 2. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and

schedules.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWP: Cold working pressure.

B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber.

C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber.


July 31, 2015 230523- 2

D. NRS: Nonrising stem.

E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke.

F. RS: Rising stem.

G. SWP: Steam working pressure.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.


A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer.

B. ASME Compliance:

1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If

outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.


July 31, 2015 230523- 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES

A. Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.

B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.

D. Valve Actuator Types:

1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger. 2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller except plug valves. 4. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of size

and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article.

E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

1. Gate Valves: With rising stem. 2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and

protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

F. Valve-End Connections:

1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. 3. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

2.2 BRASS BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. DynaQuip Controls. d. Flow-Tek, Inc.; a subsidiary of Bray International, Inc. e. Hammond Valve.


July 31, 2015 230523- 4

f. Jamesbury; a subsidiary of Metso Automation. g. Jomar International, LTD. h. Kitz Corporation. i. Legend Valve. j. Marwin Valve; a division of Richards Industries. k. Milwaukee Valve Company. l. NIBCO INC. m. Red-White Valve Corporation. n. RuB Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Forged brass. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Brass. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full.

B. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Forged brass. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Full. k. Ends: Threaded. l. Seats: PTFE or TFE. m. Stem: Brass. n. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. o. Port: Regular.

C. Three-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa).


July 31, 2015 230523- 5

d. Body Design: Three piece. e. Body Material: Forged brass. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Brass. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full.

D. Three-Piece, Full-Port, Brass Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Three piece. e. Body Material: Forged brass. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Full.

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Bronze. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full.

B. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze.


July 31, 2015 230523- 6

f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Full.

C. Three-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Three piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Bronze. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Full.

D. Three-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kPa). d. Body Design: Three piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Full.

2.4 IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 150 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated

pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel.


July 31, 2015 230523- 7

g. Disc: Aluminum bronze.

B. 150 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with NBR Seat and Aluminum-Bronze Disc:

1. Description:


pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: NBR. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Aluminum bronze.

C. 150 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Ductile-Iron Disc:

1. Description:


pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Nickel-plated or -coated ductile iron.

D. 150 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with NBR Seat and Ductile-Iron Disc:

1. Description:


pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: NBR. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Nickel-plated or -coated ductile iron.

E. 150 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc:

1. Description:


pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron.


July 31, 2015 230523- 8

e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Stainless steel.

F. 150 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with NBR Seat and Stainless-Steel Disc:

1. Description:


pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: NBR. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Stainless steel.

2.5 IRON, GROOVED-END BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. 175 CWP, Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves:

1. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). c. Body Material: Coated, ductile iron. d. Stem: Two-piece stainless steel. e. Disc: Coated, ductile iron. f. Seal: EPDM.

2.6 BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Lift Check Valves with Bronze Disc:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Vertical flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded.


July 31, 2015 230523- 9

f. Disc: Bronze.

2.7 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:


a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. e. Hammond Valve. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. h. Powell Valves. i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze.

B. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc:


a. American Valve, Inc. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa). c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze.


July 31, 2015 230523- 10

2.8 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. g. Powell Valves. h. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. NPS 14 to NPS 24 (DN 350 to DN 600), CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. f. Ends: Flanged. g. Trim: Bronze. h. Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.9 BRONZE GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, NRS Bronze Gate Valves:



2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint.


July 31, 2015 230523- 11

e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

B. Class 125, RS Bronze Gate Valves:



2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

C. Class 150, NRS Bronze Gate Valves:


a. Hammond Valve. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC. d. Powell Valves. e. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa). c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free.


July 31, 2015 230523- 12

h. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

D. Class 150, RS Bronze Gate Valves:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. c. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. f. Powell Valves. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa). c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union-ring bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

2.10 IRON GATE VALVES

A. Class 125, NRS, Iron Gate Valves:



2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. NPS 14 to NPS 24 (DN 350 to DN 600), CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged.


July 31, 2015 230523- 13

f. Trim: Bronze. g. Disc: Solid wedge. h. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

B. Class 125, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Hammond Valve. e. Legend Valve. f. Milwaukee Valve Company. g. NIBCO INC. h. Powell Valves. i. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. NPS 14 to NPS 24 (DN 350 to DN 600), CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Bronze. g. Disc: Solid wedge. h. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.11 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES

A. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Bronze Disc:


a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. c. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. f. Powell Valves. g. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa).


July 31, 2015 230523- 14

c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e. Stem and Disc: Bronze. f. Packing: Asbestos free. g. Handwheel: Malleable iron.

2.12 IRON GLOBE VALVES

A. Class 125, Iron Globe Valves:



2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-85, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free.

2.13 LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES

A. Class 125, Regular-Gland, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends:


a. Nordstrom Valves, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-78, Type II. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. NPS 14 to NPS 24 (DN 350 to DN 600), CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). d. Body Material: ASTM A 48/A 48M or ASTM A 126, cast iron with lubrication-

sealing system. e. Pattern: Regular or short.


July 31, 2015 230523- 15

f. Plug: Cast iron or bronze with sealant groove.

B. Class 125, Regular-Gland, Lubricated Plug Valves with Flanged Ends:


a. Nordstrom Valves, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-78, Type II. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. NPS 14 to NPS 24 (DN 350 to DN 600), CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). d. Body Material: ASTM A 48/A 48M or ASTM A 126, cast iron with lubrication-

sealing system. e. Pattern: Regular or short. f. Plug: Cast iron or bronze with sealant groove.

C. Class 125, Cylindrical, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends:


a. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. b. Milliken Valve Company. c. R & M Energy Systems; a unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-78, Type IV. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. NPS 14 to NPS 24 (DN 350 to DN 600), CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). d. Body Material: ASTM A 48/A 48M or ASTM A 126, cast iron with lubrication-


D. Class 125, Cylindrical, Lubricated Plug Valves with Flanged Ends:


a. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. b. Milliken Valve Company. c. R & M Energy Systems; a unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc.

2. Description:

a. Standard: MSS SP-78, Type IV.


July 31, 2015 230523- 16

b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kPa). c. NPS 14 to NPS 24 (DN 350 to DN 600), CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa). d. Body Material: ASTM A 48/A 48M or ASTM A 126, cast iron with lubrication-


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.

D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

E. Install chainwheels on operators for valves NPS 4 and larger and more than 96 inches above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor.

F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.


July 31, 2015 230523- 17

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.

3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, gate, or plug valves. 2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type. 3. Throttling Service: Globe, ball, or butterfly valves. 4. Pump-Discharge Check Valves:

a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc. b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or

with spring or iron, center-guided, metal-seat check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends except where threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below.

3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Threaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Flanged ends except where

threaded valve-end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Flanged ends. 7. For Grooved-End Copper Tubing and Steel Piping except Steam and Steam Condensate

Piping: Valve ends may be grooved.

3.5 CHILLED- AND CONDENSER-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:

1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.

2. Ball Valves: Two or three piece, full port, brass or bronze with stainless-steel trim. 3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, bronze disc. 4. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 150, NRS, bronze. 5. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 150, bronze disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:


July 31, 2015 230523- 18

1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends.

2. Iron Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 10 (DN 65 to DN 250): Class 150. 3. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300):

200 CWP, EPDM seat, aluminum-bronze, ductile-iron or stainless-steel disc. 4. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300):

175 CWP. 5. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats. 6. Iron, Grooved-End Check Valves, NPS 3 to NPS 12 (DN 80 to DN 300): 300 CWP. 7. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, OS&Y. 8. Iron Globe Valves: Class 125. 9. Lubricated Plug Valves: Class 125, regular gland, threaded or flanged. 10. Eccentric Plug Valves: 175 CWP, resilient seating.

3.6 HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller:

1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends.

2. Ball Valves: Two or three piece, full port, brass or bronze with stainless-steel trim. 3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, bronze disc. 4. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 150, NRS, bronze. 5. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 150, bronze disc.

B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger:

1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends.

2. Iron Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 10 (DN 65 to DN 250): Class 150. 3. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300):

200 CWP, EPDM seat, aluminum-bronze, ductile-iron or stainless-steel disc. 4. Iron, Grooved-End Butterfly Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300):

175 CWP. 5. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 125, metal seats. 6. Iron, Grooved-End Check Valves, NPS 3 to NPS 12 (DN 80 to DN 300): 300 CWP. 7. Iron Gate Valves: Class 125, OS&Y. 8. Iron Globe Valves: Class 125. 9. Lubricated Plug Valves: Class 125, regular gland, threaded or flanged. 10. Eccentric Plug Valves: 175 CWP, resilient seating.

3.7 COMMISSIONING




July 31, 2015 230523- 19



Spokane Transit Authority Section 230540 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC

July 31, 2015 230540- 1

SECTION 230540 – VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 EXTENT OF VIBRATION CONTROL WORK

A. Vibration Isolation: All equipment and piping as noted on the equipment, ductwork and piping schedules in Part 3 of the specification shall be provided with vibration isolators to prevent the transmission of vibration and transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflections.

B. Pipe Riser Resilient Supports: Provide resilient support for all risers subject to significant expansion and/or contraction.

1.3 EXTENT OF SEISMIC CONTROL WORK

A. Seismic Restraints for Remodeled Areas: Provide professional structural engineering for seismic control of any new equipment, ductwork and piping that is provided under Division 23. Provide all necessary seismic restraints to meet the requirements of the Code and referenced Standards.

B. Omission of restraints for small components: Restraints may be omitted for smaller equipment, ductwork and piping only where specifically allowed by Code and referenced Standards, and where specifically allowed by the Qualified Professional Engineer (QPE) specified below. Restraints may only be omitted after the QPE has determined that adequate flexibility will be provided between restrained and non-restrained connected elements and determined that movement of unrestrained elements will not cause damage to adjacent elements.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Code: 2012 International Building Code (IBC).

1.5 SEISMIC CONTROLS ENGINEERING REQUIREMENTS

A. Qualified Professional Engineer: Contractor shall provide the services of a qualified professional structural engineer to engineer, design and/or select anchorage methods for all equipment, ductwork and piping specified in this Division of the Specifications. This


July 31, 2015 230540- 2

requirement applies to equipment, ductwork and piping that is supported from above or below and that is supported with vibration isolation or not.

1. A qualified professional engineer (QPE) familiar with all of the applicable codes and design standards related to seismic protection of HVAC ductwork, piping and equipment and qualified in structural design of seismic protections and their interaction with building structures shall be responsible for execution of the work herein. Where applicable, the QPE shall also analyze wind forces and shall utilize these forces (if greater than seismic forces) when designing component anchorages. The tasks of the QPE are as follows:

a. Shall be responsible for the preparation of drawings, analysis, specifications, and inspection of the seismic protections required by Code and referenced Standards.

b. Shall coordinate with the Structural Engineer of Record of the building structure for the proper establishment of seismic values, applicable codes, and other requirements of the project related to seismic and wind design.

c. Shall verify the applicability of all codes and design standards with the Authority Having Jurisdiction and shall coordinate with the Authority where codes conflict or are open for interpretation for variances and clarifications.

d. Shall inform the Contractor where special provisions in other work, such as routine hanger hardware selection, are required to accommodate seismic restraint. Changes from specified hanger hardware will require A/E prior approval and shall be provided without change in Contract cost.

e. Shall analyze specified and/or Contractor-proposed ductwork and piping materials along with associated joining methods for seismic-related strength (flexibility and/or “toughness”) and determine bracing spacing that will maintain appropriate integrity of the ductwork and piping during and after a design seismic event. If changes in construction are recommended in order to minimize the frequency of bracing, these shall be submitted for A/E review and will only be considered if a significant cost credit is offered.

f. Shall analyze specified and/or Contractor-proposed ductwork and piping materials along with associated joining methods for flexibility and determine the appropriate point bracing should stop along a specific run (when importance factor changes or when size reduces to a point where bracing may not be required).

g. Shall acquire equipment certifications for seismic worthiness from all equipment manufacturers where required by applicable codes or these specifications. These certifications shall be included in a final report to the Owner.

h. Shall perform calculations and select all required anchors and restraints. i. Shall develop drawings (bearing QPE seal) of seismic controls that document the

seismic anchors and restraints, their layout and the details for their installation. Where design standards apply, the drawings shall note the locations and identify the standard details that apply.

2. The QPE shall be licensed to provide structural engineering in the project state.

B. Seismic-Restraint Loading: Engineering, selection and placement of seismic restraints shall be determined by the QPE after reviewing the project with the Structural Engineer of Record (for the building structure). Obtain all needed parameters directly from that engineer and clearly document these parameters within the submittals. For the purpose of pricing only, use the following values:


July 31, 2015 230540- 3

1. Site Class as Defined in the IBC: C. 2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category as Defined in the IBC: II. 3. Seismic Design Category: B 4. SDs: 0.132 5. SD1: 0.067

C. Components with Importance Factor Ip=1.5: Engineering, selection and placement of seismic restraints shall be determined by the QPE based on the following components having the an Importance Factor of Ip=1.5:

1. Fuel source equipment and all sizes of piping. 2. All sizes of piping located in Electrical Rooms, Mechanical Rooms, Generator Rooms

and Refrigeration Rooms. This applies to all kinds of piping, whether connected to equipment in those rooms or not.

3. Heating water equipment and piping greater than 2” size. Piping 2” in size and less that does not have a readily-accessible isolation valve separating it from any piping greater than 2” size.

4. Chilled water equipment and piping greater than 2” size. Piping 2” in size and less that does not have a readily-accessible isolation valve separating it from any piping greater than 2” size.

5. Supply terminal units. 6. Supply ductwork downstream of terminal units greater than 3 square feet in area. 7. Return and exhaust equipment and ductwork greater than 3 square feet in area. 8. All other components required by Code to have an importance factor of Ip=1.5.

D. Components with Importance Factor Ip=1.0: All components not identified above as having an Importance Factor of Ip=1.5.:

1.6 RELATED WORK

A. Seismic Anchorage for Housekeeping Pads:

1. Housekeeping pad reinforcement and monolithic pad attachment to the structure details and design shall be provided as part of this work, if not already adequate as indicated in the documents of other Divisions. This requirement applies only to pads that receive seismic forces for equipment anchored under this Section.

2. Housekeeping pads shall be coordinated by the seismic controls engineer to result in sizing such that a minimum edge distance of ten (10) bolt diameters is provided all around the outermost anchor bolts to allow development of full drill-in wedge anchor ratings. If cast-in anchors are to be used, the housekeeping pads shall be sized to accommodate the ACI requirements for bolt coverage and embedment.

3. Provide restraint attachment plates cast into housekeeping pads, concrete inserts, double-sided beam clamps, etc., in accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer's calculations.

1.7 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND RISER SUPPORT SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:


July 31, 2015 230540- 4

1. Vibration Isolators: Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Construction Details and Calculations:

1. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loads.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data.

1.8 SEISMIC CONTROL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

1. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

B. Construction Details and Calculations: For seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic forces required to select vibration isolators, seismic restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases.

2. Seismic-Restraint Details:

a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacings. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).


July 31, 2015 230540- 5

C. Layout Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for ductwork, piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints. Plans shall utilize copies of the contractor’s coordination plans and shall show all locations and types for the following. The registered professional engineer must stamp plans.

1. All seismic brace locations. 2. All anchorage connections to the structure. Quantity and size 3. Brace reactions at all connection points to the structure, for Structural Engineer of Record

use in checking suitability of the building structure. 4. Total vertical load at seismic brace locations. 5. Type and size of brace member. 6. Suspended utility max lbs per lineal foot or max pipe size at all seismic locations. 7. Minimum rod size at all seismic locations. 8. Vertical support anchors at non-seismic and seismic locations. 9. Horizontal members of all trapeze assemblies.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data.


A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC and all local amendments unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

B. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproved by ICC-ES, or preapproved by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNCTIONS

A. General: Flexible pipe connectors shall be provided at all piping connections to rotating equipment, isolated equipment and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Basis of Design: Mason Industries, Inc., 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Metraflex b. Twin City Hose

B. Flexible Spherical Expansion Joints: Flexible spherical expansion joints shall employ peroxide cured EPDM in the covers, liners, and Dacron tire cord frictioning. Solid steel rings shall be


July 31, 2015 230540- 6

used within the raised face rubber ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is not acceptable. Sizes 2" and larger shall have two spheres reinforced with a ring between spheres to maintain shape and complete with split ductile iron an steel flanges with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 16" to 24" may be single sphere. Sizes ¾" to 1½" may have threaded bolted flange assemblies, one sphere and cable retention. ¼" and smaller connectors shall be rated at 250 psi up to 190°F with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 190 psi at 250°F. 16" and larger connectors are rated 180 psi at 190°F and 135 psi at 250°F. Safety factors to burst and flange pullout shall be a minimum of 3/1. All joints must have permanent markings verifying a 5-minute factory test at twice the rated pressure. Concentric reducers to the above specifications many be substituted for equal ended expansion joints. Expansion joints shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of the expansion joints under pressure. Control rods need only be used in unanchored piping locations where the manufacturer determines the installation exceeds the pressure requirement without control rods, as control rods are not desirable in seismic work. If control rods are used, they must have ½" thick Neoprene washer bushings large enough in area to take the thrust at 1,000 psi maximum on the washer area. Expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Submittals shall include two test reports by independent consultants showing minimum reductions of 20dB in vibration accelerations and 10dB in sound pressure levels at typical blade passage frequencies on this or a similar product by the same manufacturer. All expansion joints shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves. Manufacturer shall verify materials are compatible with glycol or other chemicals to be utilized in the piping system.

1. Manufacturer: Mason Industries, Inc., Type "SAFEFLEX SFDEJ, SFEJ, SFDCR, or SFU" with Type "CR" control rods.

C. Flexible Stainless Steel Hose: Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel braid and carbon steel fittings. Sizes 3" and larger shall be flanged. Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Minimum lengths shall be as tabulated:

Flanged Male Nipples

3 x 14 10 x 26 ½ x9 1 ½ x 13 4 x 15 12 x 28 ¾ x10 2 x 14 5 x 19 14 x 30 1x11 2 ½ x18 6 x 20 16 x 32 1 1/4 x 12 8 x 22

1. Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible.

2. Manufacturer: Mason Industries, Inc., Type "BSS," or approved Metraflex or Unisource Manufacturing.

2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. General: Provide complete, engineered vibration-isolation systems. Engineering support shall be provided by a representative of the manufacturer, and shall be in full compliance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and the following requirements.


July 31, 2015 230540- 7

1. Basis of Design: Mason Industries, Inc., utilizing the products specified in the following paragraphs.

2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. California Dynamics Corporation. b. Kinetics Noise Control.

B. General Requirements:

1. Isolator Identification: All vibration isolators shall be clearly marked to show undeflected heights so that after installation and adjustment, deflection under load can be verified, thus determining that the load is within the proper range of the device and that the correct degree of vibration isolation is being attained.

2. Provide a balanced set of isolators for each piece of equipment. Select isolators in accordance with equipment weight distribution to allow for no less than static deflection specified. All isolators for a single piece of equipment shall have approximately equal spring deflection. A minimum of four isolators per unit is required unless otherwise indicated.

3. Each isolator shall be numbered and color-coded to show location. Code number and color shall be marked on plans, on each equipment isolator, and on each base to ensure proper placement.

4. Operating Limits: All isolators shall operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve. Load versus deflection curves shall be furnished by the manufacturer and must be linear over a deflection range of not less than 50% above the design deflection.

5. The spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

6. The theoretical vertical natural frequency for each support point, based upon the load per isolator and isolator stiffness, shall not differ from the design objectives for the equipment as a whole by more than ±10%.

7. Neoprene Mountings: All neoprene mountings shall have a shore hardness of 40–65 after minimum aging of 20 days, or corresponding oven-aging.

8. Neoprene Isolator Formulation: Formulation of the neoprene shall conform to AASHTO specifications for neoprene or ASTM D4014 specification for elastomer:

9. All vibration isolation hardware shall be designed or treated for corrosion resistance. Isolators exposed to the weather shall have steel parts zinc electroplated, PVC coated, plus a coating of neoprene or bitumastic paint. Aluminum components for outdoor installation shall be etched and painted with industrial grade enamel. Nuts, bolts, and washers shall be zinc electroplated.

C. Isolator Type 1: Two layers of ¾" thick neoprene pad consisting of 2" square waffle modules separated horizontally by a 16-gauge galvanized shim. Load distribution plates shall be used as required. Basis of Design: Mason Industries, Inc., Type Super "W."

D. Isolator Type 2: Bridge-bearing neoprene mountings shall have a minimum static deflection of 0.2" and all directional seismic capability. The mount shall consist of a ductile iron casting containing two separated and opposing molded neoprene elements. The elements shall prevent the central threaded sleeve and attachment bolt from contacting the casting during normal operation. The shock absorbing neoprene materials shall be compounded to bridge-bearing specifications. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "OPA" Number from OSHPD


July 31, 2015 230540- 8

in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Basis of Design: Mason Industries, Inc., Type Super "BR."

E. Isolator Type 3: Spring isolators shall be freestanding and laterally stable without any housing and complete with a molded neoprene cup or ¼" neoprene acoustical friction pad between the baseplate and the support. Basis of Design: Mason Industries, Inc. Type "SLF."

F. Isolator Type 4: Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting as described in Type 3, within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. A steel spacer shall be removed after adjustment. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of ½" shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Since housings will be bolted or welded in position, there must be an internal isolation pad. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall have Anchorage Preapproval "OPA" Number from OSHPD in the State of California certifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Basis of Design: Mason Industries, Inc., Type "SLR."

G. Isolator Type 5: Spring mountings built into a ductile iron or steel housing to provide all directional seismic snubbing. The snubber shall be adjustable vertically and allow a maximum of ¼" travel in all directions before contacting the resilient snubbing collars. Mountings shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "OPA" number from OSHPD in the State of California verifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Basis of Design: Mason Industries, Inc., Type “SSLFH."

H. Isolator Type 6: Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1¼" thick neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box. To maintain stability, the boxes shall not be articulated as clevis hangers nor the neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Basis of Design: Mason Industries, Inc., Type "30N."

I. Isolator Type 7: Hangers to be pre-compressed and locked at the rated deflection by means of a resilient seismic up-stop to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of a scale. Submittals shall include a drawing of the hanger showing the 30° capability. Basis of Design: Mason Industries, Inc., Type "PC30N."

2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Manufacturers: Provide complete, engineered equipment bases. Engineering support shall be provided by a representative of the manufacturer, and shall be in full compliance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and the following requirements.

1. Basis of Design: Factory-fabricated products by Mason Industries, Inc. 2. Alternate Manufacturers:


July 31, 2015 230540- 9


B. Type B-1 Base: Steel Base, factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-1/2-inches clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails.

2. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

3. Cross members shall be provided where necessary to support the equipment or to prevent twisting of the main members. The section depth of any frame member shall be not less than 1/10th of the length of the longest frame member and not less than 1/10th of the greatest span between support points. All frame members shall have the same depth.

4. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

C. Type B-2 Base: A welded structural steel base constructed of angle iron or channels, designed to spread base area of equipment to increase stability and permit suspension with hanger rods.

D. Type B-3 Base: Inertia Base, factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for placement of cast-in-place concrete.

1. Design Requirements: Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch clearance above the floor. Include equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails.

2. Base shall consist of a perimeter welded structural steel pouring form, 1/2" diameter reinforcing bars welded in place on 6" centers each way, pre-located equipment anchor bolts and pipe sleeves, and isolator brackets to reduce the mounting height of the equipment. The bottom edge of the steel reinforcing bars shall be 1-1/2" from bottom of the base. Drilled steel members shall have sleeves below the holes to receive anchor bolts. Thickness of the base shall be a minimum depth of 1/12th of the longest span, but not less than 6" deep. The base shall be sized a minimum overlap of 4" around the base of the equipment, and in the case of belt-driven equipment, 4" beyond the end of the drive shaft.

3. Structural Steel: Steel shapes, plates, and bars complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M. Bases shall have shape to accommodate supported equipment.

4. Support Brackets: Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support.

5. Fabrication: Fabricate steel templates to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors in place during placement of concrete. Obtain anchor-bolt templates from supported equipment manufacturer.

2.4 VERTICAL RISER SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide complete engineered pipe riser support systems. Engineering support shall be provided by a representative of the manufacturer, and shall be in full compliance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and the following requirements. Submittal must be stamped and signed by a licensed professional engineer in the employ of the manufacturer.


July 31, 2015 230540- 10

1. Basis of Design: Mason Industries, Inc., utilizing the following products:

a. Support spring mountings; SLF b. Anchors; ADA. c. Telescoping guides; VSG



B. Riser Supports: All vertical risers for systems with an operating temperature greater than 105 degrees F. and a height greater than 60 feet, or an operating temperature greater than 200 degrees F. and a height greater than 40 feet, shall be supported by spring isolators designed to support the riser filled with water. Risers that do not fall in these categories may utilize other means of support that will not result in more than 50% variation of force on any point of support under any operating condition.

1. Riser anchors close to the center of the run shall direct movement up and down. The anchors shall be capable of holding an upward force equal to the water weight when the system is drained. Obtain the maximum allowed point loading from the building structural engineer of record. If one level cannot accommodate the anticipated force, anchors can be located on two or three adjacent floors.

2. Long Risers: Provide support spring mountings at levels above and below the anchor level(s) when loading at the anchor level(s) would otherwise exceed the recommendations of the anchor manufacturer, maximum floor loading or would result in an unreasonable stress in the piping system itself.

3. The initial spring deflection shall be a minimum of 0.75"(20mm) or four times the thermal movement at the isolator location, whichever is greater. Calculations shall include pipe stress at end conditions and branch off locations and the manufacturer must include installation instructions.

C. Riser Guides: Provide telescoping guides where needed to maintain riser alignment. Resilient guides shall be spaced and sized properly depending on the pipe diameter. Submittals must include the initial load, initial deflection, change in deflection, final load and change in load at all spring and anchor support locations, as well as guide spacing. Proper provision shall be made for seismic protection as directed by the Seismic QPE.

D. Coordination at top and bottom of risers: Riser support manufacturer’s engineer shall direct the Contractor on special provisions needed for support and routing of horizontal piping that is connected to the top, bottom and at various midpoints of each riser. Provide additional spring hangers and similar provisions for horizontal piping as required to avoid unreasonable stress on piping and supporting elements.

2.5 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT COMPONENTS

A. Manufacturers:


July 31, 2015 230540- 11

1. Basis of Design: Pre-approved products where available from Mason Industries, Inc., custom designed products where not available from Mason Industries, Inc.


a. International Seismic Application Technology (ISAT). b. Kinetics Noise Control.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES or OSHPD.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

2. Even though the project may not be located in the State of California, all isolators that provide seismic restraint shall have an Anchorage Preapproval "OPA" Number from OSHPD (of the State of California) verifying the maximum certified load ratings.

3. Seismic Cable Restraints consisting of galvanized steel aircraft cables shall be provided for vibration-isolated components.

4. Seismic Solid Braces consisting of steel angles or channels shall be provided for all suspended components that are not vibration-isolated.

5. Pipe clevis cross bolt braces are required in all restraint locations 6. Provide hanger rod reinforcing to prevent buckling due to upward forces caused by

restraints.

C. Base-mounted equipment with vibration isolation: Where integral seismic restraints furnished with vibration isolators are not adequate, provide all-directional seismic snubbers consisting of interlocking steel members restrained by a one-piece molded neoprene bushing of bridge bearing neoprene.

D. Restraint Anchors: Provide appropriate anchors to attach equipment, seismic restraints, and vibration isolation devices (if being used for seismic restraint), to the building structure. The method of connection to the structure shall be identified at each location on the Layout Drawings. All components shall meet the requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. Where available, anchors (such as wedge anchors) shall have an evaluation report number from the ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. verifying its allowable loads

2.6 FACTORY FINISHES

A. All vibration isolation and seismic restraint hardware shall be designed or treated for corrosion resistance.

B. Items exposed to the weather shall have steel parts zinc electroplated, PVC coated, plus a coating of neoprene or bitumastic paint. Aluminum components for outdoor installation shall be etched and painted with industrial enamel.

C. Nuts, bolts, and washers shall be zinc electroplated.

D. Structural steel bases shall be thoroughly cleaned of welding slag, primed with zinc chromate and finished with two coats of industrial enamel.


July 31, 2015 230540- 12

E. Field painting shall comply with requirements in Division 09. Verify compatibility of factory finishes with field-applied coats.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 VIBRATION ISOLATION INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Vibration Isolation for Piping:

1. When piping connects to equipment is provided with vibration isolation and a flexible connection is not provided at the equipment, the first four pipe hangers shall be Type 7 with the same deflection as specified for the mountings under the connected equipment.

2. Floor supported piping shall be isolated with Type 4 isolators. 3. Do not support vibration isolated piping along with non-isolated piping on a common

trapeze. 4. Steel spring hanger boxes shall be rigidly mounted to the supporting structure-not located

in the middle of the hanger rod. 5. Hanger rods shall be aligned to clear the hanger box. 6. Load-transfer isolators, when utilized, shall temporarily maintain the piping in a rigid

position until installation is complete and fully loaded. 7. Pipe anchors are not permitted in vibration isolated piping circuits.

B. General Requirements for Equipment Bases:

1. All bases shall be installed on housekeeping pads. All bases shall be sized to include equipment and motor without overhang.

2. Motor-driven equipment shall be mounted with motors on a common base of sufficient rigidity to maintain permanent alignment.

3. All bases shall have clearance of 1-1/2" between top of floor and underside of base. 4. Inertia bases shall have 1-1/2" clearance for first 50 sq.ft. of area.

3.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install seismic restraints for all equipment and all sizes of ductwork and piping except where omission of restraints for smaller sizes is specifically allowed by Code and specifically allowed by the QPE and seismic restraint manufacture’s guidelines.

B. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

C. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

D. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

E. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.


July 31, 2015 230540- 13

F. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

G. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench. 6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior

applications.

3.3 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. The seismic QPE shall review all piping and ductwork that crosses building seismic joints and shall select or design appropriate restraints on both sides. Consider the anticipated displacement of the building structure at the joints and the flexibility of the specified duct and piping components when determining placement of restraints. If displacement will result in excessive forces within the ductwork or piping itself, which cannot be mitigated by restraint placement, contact the A/E for direction.


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust active height of spring isolators.


July 31, 2015 230540- 14

D. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

3.6 COMMISSIONING





Spokane Transit Authority Section 230550 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Identification for Piping and Equipment

July 31, 2015 230550- 1

SECTION 230550 – IDENTIFICATION FOR PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit for each type of product indicated.

B. Valve numbering scheme.

C. Valve Schedules: For each piping system to include in maintenance manuals.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.

C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS

A. Plastic Labels for Equipment:

1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/8 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware.

2. Letter Color: White. 3. Background Color: Black. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160°F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than

2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24

inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.


July 31, 2015 230550- 2

7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.

B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number.

2.2 PIPE LABELS

A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction.

B. Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.

C. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.

D. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.

1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.

2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.

2.3 VALVE TAGS

A. Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2-inch numbers.

1. Tag Material: Brass, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or stamped holes for attachment hardware.

2. Fasteners: Brass beaded chain; or S-hook.

B. Valve Schedules: For each piping system, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on valve tag), location of valve (room or space), normal-operating position (open, closed, or modulating), and variations for identification. Mark valves for emergency shutoff and similar special uses. Valve-tag schedule shall be included in operation and maintenance data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants.


July 31, 2015 230550- 3

3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.

B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.

3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION

A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09.

B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.

Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed

piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in

areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.

3.4 VALVE-TAG INSTALLATION

A. Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shutoff valves, faucets, and HVAC terminal devices and similar roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in a valve schedule.

3.5 COMMISSIONING





Spokane Transit Authority Section 230590 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Testing Adjusting and Balancing

July 31, 2015 230590- 1

SECTION 230590 – TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Division 23, Section 230500 is directly related. Other sections are indirectly related and shall be reviewed.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work under this section shall include furnishing all labor, materials, tools, and equipment necessary for testing, adjusting, and balancing (TAB) necessary to place all systems and items of equipment, specified in Division 23, in proper operating condition. All work shall be completely tested as required by this section and applicable city, county, and state codes and ordinances.

B. Submit copies of all testing, adjusting, and balancing data to A/E.

C. Leak and pressure testing of piping and duct systems and rotational testing of motors shall be performed by the installing contractor.

D. TAB shall include the following:

1. Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems. b. Multizone systems.

2. Hydronic Piping Systems:

a. Variable-flow systems. b. Primary-secondary systems.

3. HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings. 4. Vibration measuring. 5. Sound level measuring. 6. Existing systems TAB. 7. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 8. Domestic water recirculation systems. 9. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.


July 31, 2015 230590- 2

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.

B. Air Systems: Includes all outside air, supply air, return air, transfer air, exhaust air, relief air and make-up air systems.

C. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals, according to indicated quantities.

D. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors, and other pollutants.

E. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.

F. Flow rate tolerance: The allowable percentage variation, minus to plus, of actual flow rate from values (design) in the contract documents.

G. Hydronic Systems: Includes chilled water, condenser water, heating hot water, and glycol-water systems, and heat recovery water systems.

H. NC: Noise criteria.

I. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results.

J. RC: Room criteria.

K. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.

L. Smoke-Control System: An engineered system that uses fans to produce airflow and pressure differences across barriers to limit smoke movement.

M. Smoke-Control Zone: A space within a building that is enclosed by smoke barriers and is a part of a zoned smoke-control system.

N. Stair Pressurization System: A type of smoke-control system that is intended to positively pressurize stair towers with outdoor air by using fans to keep smoke from contaminating the stair towers during an alarm condition.

O. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.

P. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.


July 31, 2015 230590- 3

Q. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

R. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.

S. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

T. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system.

U. Terminal Unit: A device that controls the temperature and/or volume of air that enters or leaves a zone.

V. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.

W. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and reporting TAB procedures.

X. Zone: The space that is controlled by a terminal unit or other temperature controlling device.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit two copies of evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit two copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit two copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.

D. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm.

E. Warranties specified in this Section.


A. Contracting: The TAB agency shall be a subcontractor of the General Contractor and shall report to and be paid by the General Contractor.

B. TAB Firm Qualifications:


July 31, 2015 230590- 4

1. The TAB agency shall be either a certified member of AABC or certified by the NEBB to perform TAB service for HVAC, water balancing and vibrations and sound testing of equipment. The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the agency loses subject certification during this period, the General Contractor shall immediately notify the A/E and submit another TAB firm for approval. Any agency that has been the subject of disciplinary action by either the AABC or the NEBB within the five years preceding Contract Award shall not be eligible to perform any work related to the TAB. All work performed in this Section and in other related Sections by the TAB agency shall be considered invalid if the TAB agency loses its certification prior to Contract completion, and the successor agency’s review shows unsatisfactory work performed by the predecessor agency.

2. TAB Specialist: The TAB specialist shall be either a member of AABC or an experienced technician of the Agency certified by NEBB. The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. If, for any reason, the Specialist loses subject certification during this period, the General Contractor shall immediately notify the A/E and submit another TAB Specialist for approval. Any individual that has been the subject of disciplinary action by either the AABC or the NEBB within the five years preceding Contract Award shall not be eligible to perform any duties related to the HVAC systems, including TAB. All work specified in this Section and in other related Sections performed by the TAB specialist shall be considered invalid if the TAB Specialist loses its certification prior to Contract completion and must be performed by an approved successor.

3. TAB Specialist Responsibilities:

a. The General Contractor, within 60 days after the notice to proceed, shall identify TAB specialist who would be responsible for supervising, coordinating, scheduling and reporting all TAB work and related activities and provide necessary information as required by the A/E.

b. All TAB work shall be performed under the direct supervision of the TAB specialist.

c. The reports shall be accompanied by report forms and schematic drawings required by the TAB standard, AABC or NEBB. The reports shall be signed by the TAB specialist and shall bear the seal of the TAB standard.

d. The TAB Specialist would follow all TAB work through its satisfactory completion.

e. Final markings of settings of all HVAC adjustment devices. f. Permanently mark location of duct test ports.

4. All TAB technicians performing actual TAB work shall be experienced and must have done satisfactory work on a minimum of three projects comparable in size and complexity of this project and must be certified so by the TAB agency in writing.

C. Test Equipment Criteria: The basic instrumentation requirements and accuracy/calibration required by AABC, National Standards or by NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems and instrument manufacturer. Provide calibration history of the instruments to be used for test and balance purpose.

1. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if required by instrument manufacturer.


July 31, 2015 230590- 5

2. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration.

D. Tab Criteria:

1. One or more of the applicable AABC or NEBB publications, supplemented by ASHRAE Handbook "HVAC Applications" Chapter 36, and requirements stated herein shall be the basis for planning, procedures, and reports.

2. Flow rate tolerance: Following tolerances are allowed. For tolerances not mentioned herein follow ASHRAE Handbook "HVAC Applications", Chapter 36 as a guideline. Air Filter resistance during tests, artificially imposed if necessary, shall be at least 90 percent of final values for pre-filters and after-filters.

a. Air handling unit and all other fans, cubic feet per minute: Minus 0 percent to plus l0 percent.

b. Air terminal units (maximum values): Minus 2 percent to plus l0 percent. c. Exhaust hoods/cabinets: 0 percent to plus l0 percent. d. Minimum outside air: 0 percent to plus 10 percent. e. Individual rooms: air outlets and inlets, and air flow rates not mentioned above:

Minus 2 percent to plus l0 percent. f. Individual rooms where both supply and return/exhaust air volume is indicated:

Unless the A/E confirms that room pressurization is not a requirement, the difference between the total supply to a room and the total exhaust/return from that same room shall be 0 percent to plus l0 percent. The required difference is determined by subtracting one total (sum of values indicated at terminals in the room) from the other.

g. Heating hot water pumps: Minus five percent to plus five percent. h. Chilled water and condenser water pumps and coils: 0 percent to plus five percent.

3. Systems shall be adjusted for energy efficient operation as described in PART 3. 4. Typical TAB procedures and results shall be demonstrated to the A/E for one air

distribution system (including all fans, three terminal units, three rooms) and one hydronic system (pumps and three coils) as follows:

a. When field TAB work begins. b. During each partial final inspection and the final inspection for the project if

requested by Owner. c. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval

of TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:

5. Submittal distribution requirements. 6. The Contract Documents examination report. 7. TAB plan. 8. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements. 9. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. 10. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.


July 31, 2015 230590- 6

E. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.

2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

F. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC’s "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB’s "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."

G. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems or NEBB's " Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems, " Section II, " Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."

H. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if required by instrument manufacturer. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration.


A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities.

B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.


July 31, 2015 230590- 7

1.8 WARRANTY

A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:

B. Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on NEBB forms stating that NEBB will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions:

1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents.

2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits.

1.9 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. The following publications form a part of this specification to the extent indicated by the reference thereto. In text, the publications are referenced to by the initials of the organization.

B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE): 2003 HVAC Applications ASHRAE Handbook, Chapter 37, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing and Chapter 47, Sound and Vibration Control

C. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC): 2002 6th Edition AABC National Standards for Total System Balance

D. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB):

1. 2005 7th Edition Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, Balancing of Environmental Systems

2. 1994 1st Edition Procedural Standards for the Measurement and Assessment of Sound and Vibration

E. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): 2002 3rd Edition HVAC SYSTEMS-Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLUGS

A. Provide plastic plugs to seal holes drilled in ductwork for test purposes.


July 31, 2015 230590- 8

2.2 INSULATION REPAIR MATERIAL

A. See Division 23, Section 23070, "Mechanical Insulation". Provide for repair of insulation removed or damaged for TAB work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.

1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of Contract.

2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 01, Section "Project Record Documents."

D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems-Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine system and equipment test reports.

H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.


July 31, 2015 230590- 9

I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.

J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

L. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.

M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.

N. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows.

O. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

P. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. Verify that start-up strainers have been removed from the pump suction diffusers.

Q. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

R. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller. 2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully

closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units. 4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way

mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected. 5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and

cold walls. 6. Spot-check thermostats to determine if they have been calibrated by the Control

Contractor. 7. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 8. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents. 9. Controller set points are set at indicated values. 10. Interlocked systems are operating. 11. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.

S. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.


July 31, 2015 230590- 10

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and

access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be

met.

3.3 SYSTEMS INSPECTION REPORT

A. Inspect equipment and installation for conformance with design.

B. The inspection and report is to be done after air distribution equipment is on site and duct installation has begun, but well in advance of performance testing and balancing work. The purpose of the inspection is to identify and report deviations from design and ensure that systems will be ready for TAB at the appropriate time.

C. Reports: Follow check list format developed by AABC or NEBB supplemented by narrative comments, with emphasis on air handling units and fans. Check for conformance with submittals. Verify that diffuser and register sizes are correct. Check air terminal unit installation including flexible duct sizes and routing.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. General: During TAB all related system components shall be in full operation. Fan and pump rotation, motor loads and equipment vibration shall be checked and corrected as necessary before proceeding with TAB. Set controls and/or block off parts of distribution systems to simulate design operation of variable volume air or water systems for test and balance work.

B. Coordinate TAB procedures with any phased construction completion requirements for the project. Provide TAB reports for each phase of the project prior to partial final inspections of each phase of the project.

C. Allow sufficient time in construction schedule for TAB and submission of all reports for an organized and timely correction of deficiencies.


July 31, 2015 230590- 11

D. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section.

E. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.

F. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

G. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.

K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.


July 31, 2015 230590- 12

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as

possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters.

3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.

5. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.

6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.


July 31, 2015 230590- 13

D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR MULTIZONE SYSTEMS

A. Set unit at full flow through the cooling coil if coil has that capacity.

B. Adjust each zone damper to indicated airflow.

3.8 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.

C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:

1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check expansion tank liquid level. 3. Check makeup-water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation and set at indicated flow. 5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at

fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open.

6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so

motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures, except for positive-displacement pumps:

1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed. Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller size.


July 31, 2015 230590- 14

2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve. Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved.

3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor nameplate amperage.

4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus five percent of design.

B. If pump flow does not equal terminal flows, close a percentage of valves to simulate diversity.

C. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.

D. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.

E. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is five percent greater than indicated flow.

F. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:

1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow. 2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over

indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the lowest percentage over indicated flow.

3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.

G. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage, voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including outdoor-air temperature.

H. Measure the differential-pressure control valve settings existing at the conclusion of balancing.

3.10 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems.

3.11 PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY-SECONDARY-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Balance the primary system crossover flow first, and then balance the secondary system.

3.12 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS

A. Measure water flow through all circuits.


July 31, 2015 230590- 15

B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.

C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.

D. Measure inlet steam pressure.

E. Check the setting and operation of safety and relief valves. Record settings.

3.13 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data.

3.14 PROCEDURES FOR CHILLERS

A. Balance water flow through each evaporator and condenser to within specified tolerances of indicated flow with all pumps operating. With only one chiller operating in a multiple chiller installation, do not exceed the flow for the maximum tube velocity recommended by the chiller manufacturer. Measure and record the following data with each chiller operating at design conditions:

1. Evaporator-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure drop, and water flow. 2. If water-cooled chillers, condenser-water entering and leaving temperatures, pressure

drop, and water flow. 3. Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures, using instruments

furnished by chiller manufacturer. 4. Power factor if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatt. 5. Kilowatt input if factory-installed instrumentation is furnished for measuring kilowatt. 6. Capacity: Calculate in tons of cooling.

3.15 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans.

B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.


July 31, 2015 230590- 16

C. Record compressor data.

3.16 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS

A. Measure entering- and leaving-water temperatures and water flow.

3.17 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils. 6. Airflow. 7. Air pressure drop.

B. Electric-Heating Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Nameplate data. 2. Airflow. 3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load. 4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each incremental stage. 5. Calculated kilowatt at full load. 6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.

C. Refrigerant Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 3. Airflow. 4. Air pressure drop. 5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.

3.18 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS

A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.

B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.

C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.


July 31, 2015 230590- 17

3.19 PROCEDURES FOR VIBRATION MEASUREMENTS

A. Use a vibration meter meeting the following criteria:

1. Solid-state circuitry with a piezoelectric accelerometer. 2. Velocity range of 0.1 to 10 inches per second. 3. Displacement range of 1 to 100 mils. 4. Frequency range of at least 0 to 1000 Hz. 5. Capable of filtering unwanted frequencies.

B. Calibrate the vibration meter before each day of testing.

1. Use a calibrator provided with the vibration meter. 2. Follow vibration meter and calibrator manufacturer's calibration procedures.

C. Perform vibration measurements when other building and outdoor vibration sources are at a minimum level and will not influence measurements of equipment being tested.

1. Turn off equipment in the building that might interfere with testing. 2. Clear the space of people.

D. Perform vibration measurements after air and water balancing and equipment testing is complete.

E. Clean equipment surfaces in contact with the vibration transducer.

F. Position the vibration transducer according to manufacturer's written instructions and to avoid interference with the operation of the equipment being tested.

G. Measure and record vibration on rotating equipment over 3 hp.

H. Measure and record equipment vibration, bearing vibration, equipment base vibration, and building structure vibration. Record velocity and displacement readings in the horizontal, vertical, and axial planes.

1. Pumps:

a. Pump Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. c. Pump Base: Top and side. d. Building: Floor. e. Piping: To and from the pump after flexible connections.

2. Fans and HVAC Equipment with Fans:

a. Fan Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. c. Equipment Casing: Top and side. d. Equipment Base: Top and side. e. Building: Floor.


July 31, 2015 230590- 18

f. Ductwork: To and from equipment after flexible connections. g. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections.

3. HVAC Equipment with Compressors:

a. Compressor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. b. Motor Bearing: Drive end and opposite end. c. Equipment Casing: Top and side. d. Equipment Base: Top and side. e. Building: Floor. f. Piping: To and from equipment after flexible connections.

I. For equipment with vibration isolation, take floor measurements with the vibration isolation blocked solid to the floor and with the vibration isolation floating. Calculate and report the differences.

J. Inspect, measure, and record vibration isolation.

1. Verify that vibration isolation is installed in the required locations. 2. Verify that installation is level and plumb. 3. Verify that isolators are properly anchored. 4. For spring isolators, measure the compressed spring height, the spring OD, and the travel-

to-solid distance. 5. Measure the operating clearance between each inertia base and the floor or concrete base

below. Verify that there is unobstructed clearance between the bottom of the inertia base and the floor.

3.20 PROCEDURES FOR INDOOR-AIR QUALITY MEASUREMENTS

A. After air balancing is complete and with HVAC systems operating at indicated conditions, perform indoor-air quality testing.

B. Observe and record the following conditions for each HVAC system:

1. The distance between the outside-air intake and the closest exhaust fan discharge, cooling tower, flue termination, or vent termination.

2. Specified filters are installed. Check for leakage around filters. 3. Cooling coil drain pans have a positive slope to drain. 4. Cooling coil condensate drain trap maintains an air seal. 5. Evidence of water damage. 6. Insulation in contact with the supply, return, and outside air is dry and clean.

C. Measure and record indoor conditions served by each HVAC system. Make measurements at multiple locations served by the system if required to satisfy the following:

1. Most remote area. 2. One location per floor. 3. One location for every 5000 square feet (500 sq. m).


July 31, 2015 230590- 19

D. Measure and record the following indoor conditions for each location two times at two-hour intervals, and in accordance with ASHRAE 113:

1. Temperature. 2. Relative humidity. 3. Air velocity. 4. Concentration of carbon dioxide (ppm). 5. Concentration of carbon monoxide (ppm). 6. Nitrogen oxides (ppm). 7. Formaldehyde (ppm).

3.21 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.

1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan. 2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate

information. 3. Check the refrigerant charge. 4. Check the condition of filters. 5. Check the condition of coils. 6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate drain trap. 7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication. 8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements

taken. Report deficiencies.

B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished.

1. New filters are installed. 2. Coils are clean and fins combed. 3. Drain pans are clean. 4. Fans are clean. 5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated. 6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.

C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work.

1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows and determine the new fan, speed, filter, and coil face velocity.

2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer.

3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow and water flow rates by more than five percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated airflow and water flow rates. If five percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.

4. Air balance each air outlet.


July 31, 2015 230590- 20

3.22 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION

A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.

B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions.

C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.

D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).

E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.

F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes.

G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.

H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.

J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.

K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.

3.23 PROCEDURES FOR DOMESTIC WATER MEASUREMENTS

A. Balance recirculation lines to values shown on plans

B. Record flow rates for reach circuit setter.

3.24 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:

1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus five to plus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus five percent.


July 31, 2015 230590- 21

3.25 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.26 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

C. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:

1. Pump curves. 2. Fan curves. 3. Manufacturers' test data. 4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 5. Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings

and Product Data.

D. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the final report, as applicable:

1. Title page. 2. Name and address of TAB firm. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.

Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following:

a. Indicated versus final performance.


July 31, 2015 230590- 22

b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents.

12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated

values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:

a. Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils. e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems. g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.

E. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:

1. Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows. 2. Water and steam flow rates. 3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes. 4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations. 5. Terminal units. 6. Balancing stations. 7. Position of balancing devices.

F. Air-Handling Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:

1. Unit Data: Include the following:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Unit arrangement and class. g. Discharge arrangement. h. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. i. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). j. Number of belts, make, and size. k. Number of filters, type, and size.

2. Motor Data:

a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz.


July 31, 2015 230590- 23

d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa). c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Filter static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). f. Preheat coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). g. Cooling coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). h. Heating coil static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). i. Outside airflow in cfm (L/s). j. Return airflow in cfm (L/s). k. Outside-air damper position. l. Return-air damper position. m. Vortex damper position.

G. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:

1. Coil Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil type. d. Number of rows. e. Fin spacing in fins per inch (mm) o.c. f. Make and model number. g. Face area in square feet (sq. m). h. Tube size in NPS (DN). i. Tube and fin materials. j. Circuiting arrangement.


a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Average face velocity in fpm (m/s). c. Air pressure drop in inches wg (Pa). d. Outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in degree F (degree C). e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in degree F (degree C). f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in degree F (degree C). g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in degree F (degree C). h. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s). i. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). j. Entering-water temperature in degree F (degree C). k. Leaving-water temperature in degree F (degree C). l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types. m. Refrigerant suction pressure in psig (kPa).


July 31, 2015 230590- 24

n. Refrigerant suction temperature in degree F (degree C). o. Inlet steam pressure in psig (kPa).

H. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's factory startup equipment reports, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and unit size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Fuel type in input data. g. Output capacity in Btuh (kW). h. Ignition type. i. Burner-control types. j. Motor horsepower and rpm. k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz. l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor. m. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. n. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).


a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Entering-air temperature in degree F (degree C). c. Leaving-air temperature in degree F (degree C). d. Air temperature differential in degree F (degree C). e. Entering-air static pressure in inches wg (Pa). f. Leaving-air static pressure in inches wg (Pa). g. Air static-pressure differential in inches wg (Pa). h. Low-fire fuel input in Btuh (kW). i. High-fire fuel input in Btuh (kW). j. Manifold pressure in psig (kPa). k. High-temperature-limit setting in degree F (degree C). l. Operating set point in Btuh (kW). m. Motor voltage at each connection. n. Motor amperage for each phase. o. Heating value of fuel in Btuh (kW).

I. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed in central-station air-handling units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Coil identification. d. Capacity in Btuh (kW).


July 31, 2015 230590- 25

e. Number of stages. f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz. g. Rated amperage. h. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s). i. Face area in square feet (sq. m). j. Minimum face velocity in fpm (m/s).


a. Heat output in Btuh (kW). b. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s). c. Air velocity in fpm (m/s). d. Entering-air temperature in degree F (degree C). e. Leaving-air temperature in degree F (degree C). f. Voltage at each connection. g. Amperage for each phase.

J. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:

1. Fan Data:

a. System identification. b. Location. c. Make and type. d. Model number and size. e. Manufacturer's serial number. f. Arrangement and class. g. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. h. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm).

2. Motor Data:

a. Make and frame type and size. b. Horsepower and rpm. c. Volts, phase, and hertz. d. Full-load amperage and service factor. e. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. f. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). g. Number of belts, make, and size.


a. Total airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Total system static pressure in inches wg (Pa). c. Fan rpm. d. Discharge static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Suction static pressure in inches wg (Pa).

K. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:


July 31, 2015 230590- 26

1. Report Data:

a. System and air-handling unit number. b. Location and zone. c. Traverse air temperature in degree F (degree C). d. Duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa). e. Duct size in inches (mm). f. Duct area in square feet (sq. m). g. Indicated airflow rate in cfm (L/s). h. Indicated velocity in fpm (m/s). i. Actual airflow rate in cfm (L/s). j. Actual average velocity in fpm (m/s). k. Barometric pressure in psig (Pa).

L. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Test apparatus used. d. Area served. e. Air-terminal-device make. f. Air-terminal-device number from system diagram. g. Air-terminal-device type and model number. h. Air-terminal-device size. i. Air-terminal-device effective area in square feet (sq. m).


a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Air velocity in fpm (m/s). c. Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm (L/s). d. Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm (m/s). e. Final airflow rate in cfm (L/s). f. Final velocity in fpm (m/s). g. Space temperature in degree F (degree C).

M. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. System and air-handling unit identification. b. Location and zone. c. Room or riser served. d. Coil make and size. e. Flowmeter type.



July 31, 2015 230590- 27

a. Airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Entering-water temperature in degree F (degree C). c. Leaving-water temperature in degree F (degree C). d. Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig (kPa). e. Entering-air temperature in degree F (degree C). f. Leaving-air temperature in degree F (degree C).

N. Packaged Chiller Reports:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Make and model number. c. Manufacturer's serial number. d. Refrigerant type and capacity in gal. (L). e. Starter type and size. f. Starter thermal protection size. g. Compressor make and model number. h. Compressor manufacturer's serial number.

2. Water-Cooled Condenser Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Refrigerant pressure in psig (kPa). b. Refrigerant temperature in degree F (degree C). c. Entering-water temperature in degree F (degree C). d. Leaving-water temperature in degree F (degree C). e. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). f. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).

3. Evaporator Test Reports (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Refrigerant pressure in psig (kPa). b. Refrigerant temperature in degree F (degree C). c. Entering-water temperature in degree F (degree C). d. Leaving-water temperature in degree F (degree C). e. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). f. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa).

4. Compressor Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Suction pressure in psig (kPa). b. Suction temperature in degree F (degree C). c. Discharge pressure in psig (kPa). d. Discharge temperature in degree F (degree C). e. Oil pressure in psig (kPa). f. Oil temperature in degree F (degree C). g. Voltage at each connection. h. Amperage for each phase. i. Kilowatt input. j. Crankcase heater kilowatt.


July 31, 2015 230590- 28

k. Chilled-water control set point in degree F (degree C). l. Condenser-water control set point in degree F (degree C). m. Refrigerant low-pressure-cutoff set point in psig (kPa). n. Refrigerant high-pressure-cutoff set point in psig (kPa).

5. Refrigerant Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Oil level. b. Refrigerant level. c. Relief valve setting in psig (kPa). d. Unloader set points in psig (kPa). e. Percentage of cylinders unloaded. f. Bearing temperatures in degree F (degree C). g. Vane position. h. Low-temperature-cutoff set point in degree F (degree C).

O. Compressor and Condenser Reports: For refrigerant side of unitary systems, stand-alone refrigerant compressors, air-cooled condensing units, or water-cooled condensing units, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Unit make and model number. d. Compressor make. e. Compressor model and serial numbers. f. Refrigerant weight in lb (kg). g. Low ambient temperature cutoff in degree F (degree C).


a. Inlet-duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa). b. Outlet-duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa). c. Entering-air, dry-bulb temperature in degree F (degree C). d. Leaving-air, dry-bulb temperature in degree F (degree C). e. Condenser entering-water temperature in degree F (degree C). f. Condenser leaving-water temperature in degree F (degree C). g. Condenser-water temperature differential in degree F (degree C). h. Condenser entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). i. Condenser leaving-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). j. Condenser-water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). k. Control settings. l. Unloader set points. m. Low-pressure-cutout set point in psig (kPa). n. High-pressure-cutout set point in psig (kPa). o. Suction pressure in psig (kPa). p. Suction temperature in degree F (degree C). q. Condenser refrigerant pressure in psig (kPa). r. Condenser refrigerant temperature in degree F (degree C).


July 31, 2015 230590- 29

s. Oil pressure in psig (kPa). t. Oil temperature in degree F (degree C). u. Voltage at each connection. v. Amperage for each phase. w. Kilowatt input. x. Crankcase heater kilowatt. y. Number of fans. z. Condenser fan rpm. aa. Condenser fan airflow rate in cfm (L/s). bb. Condenser fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower. cc. Condenser fan motor voltage at each connection. dd. Condenser fan motor amperage for each phase.

P. Cooling Tower or Condenser Test Reports: For cooling towers or condensers, include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Make and type. c. Model and serial numbers. d. Nominal cooling capacity in tons (kW). e. Refrigerant type and weight in lb (kg). f. Water-treatment chemical feeder and chemical. g. Number and type of fans. h. Fan motor make, frame size, rpm, and horsepower. i. Fan motor voltage at each connection. j. Sheave make, size in inches (mm), and bore. k. Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches (mm). l. Number of belts, make, and size. m. Pump make and model number. n. Pump manufacturer's serial number. o. Pump motor make and frame size. p. Pump motor horsepower and rpm.

2. Pump Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Voltage at each connection. b. Amperage for each phase. c. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s).

3. Water Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Entering-water temperature in degree F (degree C). b. Leaving-water temperature in degree F (degree C). c. Water temperature differential in degree F (degree C). d. Entering-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). e. Leaving-water pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). f. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). g. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s).


July 31, 2015 230590- 30

h. Bleed water flow rate in gpm (L/s).

4. Air Data (Indicated and Actual Values):

a. Duct airflow rate in cfm (L/s). b. Inlet-duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa). c. Outlet-duct static pressure in inches wg (Pa). d. Average entering-air, wet-bulb temperature in degree F (degree C). e. Average leaving-air, wet-bulb temperature in degree F (degree C). f. Ambient wet-bulb temperature in degree F (degree C).

Q. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump curves and include the following:

1. Unit Data:

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and size. e. Model and serial numbers. f. Water flow rate in gpm (L/s). g. Water pressure differential in feet of head or psig (kPa). h. Required net positive suction head in feet of head or psig (kPa). i. Pump rpm. j. Impeller diameter in inches (mm). k. Motor make and frame size. l. Motor horsepower and rpm. m. Voltage at each connection. n. Amperage for each phase. o. Full-load amperage and service factor. p. Seal type.


a. Static head in feet of head or psig (kPa). b. Pump shutoff pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). c. Actual impeller size in inches (mm). d. Full-open flow rate in gpm (L/s). e. Full-open pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). f. Final discharge pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). g. Final suction pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). h. Final total pressure in feet of head or psig (kPa). i. Final water flow rate in gpm (L/s). j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase.

R. Boiler Test Reports:

1. Unit Data:


July 31, 2015 230590- 31

a. Unit identification. b. Location. c. Service. d. Make and type. e. Model and serial numbers. f. Fuel type and input in Btuh (kW). g. Number of passes. h. Ignition type. i. Burner-control types. j. Voltage at each connection. k. Amperage for each phase.


a. Operating pressure in psig (kPa). b. Operating temperature in degree F (degree C). c. Entering-water temperature in degree F (degree C). d. Leaving-water temperature in degree F (degree C). e. Number of safety valves and sizes in NPS (DN). f. Safety valve settings in psig (kPa). g. High-limit setting in psig (kPa). h. Operating-control setting. i. High-fire set point. j. Low-fire set point. k. Voltage at each connection. l. Amperage for each phase. m. Draft fan voltage at each connection. n. Draft fan amperage for each phase. o. Manifold pressure in psig (kPa).

S. Vibration Measurement Reports:

1. Date and time of test. 2. Vibration meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number. 3. Equipment designation, location, equipment, speed, motor speed, and motor horsepower. 4. Diagram of equipment showing the vibration measurement locations. 5. Measurement readings for each measurement location. 6. Calculate isolator efficiency using measurements taken. 7. Description of predominant vibration source.

T. Sound Measurement Reports: Record sound measurements on octave band and dBA test forms and on an NC or RC chart indicating the decibel level measured in each frequency band for both "background" and "HVAC system operating" readings. Record each tested location on a separate NC or RC chart. Record the following on the forms:

1. Date and time of test. Record each tested location on its own NC curve. 2. Sound meter manufacturer, model number, and serial number. 3. Space location within the building including floor level and room number. 4. Diagram or color photograph of the space showing the measurement location. 5. Time weighting of measurements, either fast or slow.


July 31, 2015 230590- 32

6. Description of the measured sound: steady, transient, or tonal. 7. Description of predominant sound source.

U. Indoor-Air Quality Measurement Reports for Each HVAC System:

1. HVAC system designation. 2. Date and time of test. 3. Outdoor temperature, relative humidity, wind speed, and wind direction at start of test. 4. Room number or similar description for each location. 5. Measurements at each location. 6. Observed deficiencies.

V. Instrument Calibration Reports to Include:

1. Instrument type and make. 2. Serial number. 3. Application. 4. Dates of use. 5. Dates of calibration.

3.27 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the Final Report.

2. Randomly check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. b. Measure water flow of at least five percent of terminals. c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the

reading to the set point. d. Measure sound levels at two locations. e. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations. f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Owner.

2. TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Owner.

3. Owner shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal eight-hour business day.


July 31, 2015 230590- 33

4. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

6. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report.

7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the final payment.

3.28 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.

3.29 COMMISSIONING





Spokane Transit Authority Section 230700 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Insulation Systems

July 31, 2015 230700- 1

SECTION 230700 – INSULATION SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Insulation materials and accessories.


C. Existing Work:

1. Insulate all existing piping and ductwork where existing insulation is damaged, as if it is new piping or ductwork.

D. Coordination:

1. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in other sections.

2. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping installer for piping insulation application, duct installer for duct insulation application, and equipment installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit for each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger.

2. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. 3. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each

type of insulation. 4. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access

panels. 5. Detail application of field-applied jackets. 6. Detail application at linkages of control devices.


July 31, 2015 230700- 2

7. Detail field application for each equipment type. 8. Make reference to applicable specification paragraph numbers (of the items discussed

above) for coordination.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 23, Section 230500, “Common Work Results for HVAC."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

C. Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing before installation of insulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.


July 31, 2015 230700- 3

F. Thermal Requirements for all Insulation: Insulation thickness, conductivity (k) value and/or R-value shall be as required by the local energy code or as indicated, whichever is greater.

2.2 PIPE INSULATION

A. Glass Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation: Glass fiber meeting ASTM C547, rigid molded. "K" value 0.23 at 75°F. Maximum service temperature shall not exceed 850°F. Jacket shall be high density, white Kraft bonded to aluminum foil for vapor barrier, reinforced with fiberglass yarn, permanently treated, secured with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips or AP jacket with outward clinch expanding staples coated with vapor barrier mastic.

1. Basis of Design: Johns Manville "Micro-Lok HP." 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Knauf Insulation "Earthwool 1000 Pipe Insulation." b. Owens-Corning “Fiberglas SSLII-ASJ.”

3. Factory-Applied Jacket: Requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.


B. Polyisocyanurate Preformed Pipe Insulation: Rigid molded polyisocyanurate pipe insulation shall meet the requirements of ASTM C591 Type IV. Materials shall have a minimum thermal conductivity of 0.19 Btu-in. per sq.ft. per °F per hour at a mean temperature of 75°F when tested in accordance with ASTM C177 or ASTM C518, latest revisions. Maximum service temperature shall not exceed 300°F. The pipe insulation shall include a vapor retarder jacket with self-sealing longitudinal laps.

1. Basis of Design: HiTherm HT-300. 2. Alternate Manufacturers: Other Polyisocyanurate manufacturers shall be allowed only if

they meet fire and smoke rating requirements for the specified thicknesses. 3. Factory-Applied Jacket: Requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets"

Article.


C. Phenolic: Preformed pipe insulation of rigid, expanded, closed-cell structure. Comply with ASTM C 1126, Type III, Grade 1.

1. Basis of Design: Resolco; Insul-Phen. 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Dyplast Products; DyTherm. b. ITW Insulation Systems; Trymer Supercel.




July 31, 2015 230700- 4

D. Calcium Silicate Pipe Insulation (Use only for inserts for fiber glass insulation at pipe supports): Rigid molded pipe insulation, asbestos-free, meeting ASTM C533, color coded throughout, "K" value 0.40 at 300°F, maximum service temperature 1200°F, minimum compressive strength of block form not less than 200 psi with 5% compression at 1-1/2" thickness. Non-combustible tested per ASTM E-136. Secured with 16-gauge stainless steel tie wire with twisted ends on maximum 12-inch centers.

1. Basis of Design: Johns Manville "Thermo-12 Gold." 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Industrial Insulation Group "Super Caltemp Gold."



E. EPDM rubber, flexible, closed-cell elastomeric insulation in tubular or sheet form. The product will meet the requirements defined in ASTM C 534.

1. Basis of Design: Armacell LLC; AP Armaflex. 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocel AC, Aerocel White/Gray, Aerocel-SSPT, Aerocel W/G-SSPT, or Aerocel SA.

b. Industrial Thermo Polymers Limited; Tundra Seal.

3. EPDM elastomeric insulation shall have a flame-spread index of 25 or less and a smoke-developed index of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, for all products through 2” thickness.

4. Product to be suitable for use from -297 F to 300 F continuous service temperature, per ASTM C 411.

5. EPDM elastomeric insulation shall have a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.245 Btu-in./h-ft2F at a 75°F mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C 177 or ASTM C 518.



2.3 EQUIPMENT AND DUCTWORK INSULATION

A. Thermal Requirements for all Equipment Insulation: Insulation thickness and/or R-value shall be as required by the local energy code or as indicated, whichever is greater.

B. Glass or Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Basis of Design: CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap. 2. Alternate Manufacturers:


July 31, 2015 230700- 5

a. Johns Manville; Microlite XG. b. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. c. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. d. Owens Corning; Softr Duct Wrap FRK.

C. Glass or Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied FSK jacket. For equipment applications, provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Basis of Design: CertainTeed Corp.; CertaPro Commercial Board. 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Johns Manville; 1000 Series Spin-Glas. b. Knauf Insulation; Insulation Board. c. Owens Corning; Fiberglas 700 Series.

2.4 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

B. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

C. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

D. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

E. PVDC Jacket for Indoor Applications: 4-mil- thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.02 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 20 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Dow Chemical Company (The); Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Film.

F. PVDC Jacket for Outdoor Applications: 6-mil-thick, white PVDC biaxially oriented barrier film with a permeance at 0.01 perms when tested according to ASTM E 96 and with a flame-spread index of 5 and a smoke-developed index of 25 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

1. Manufacturers:



July 31, 2015 230700- 6

G. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip.

1. Manufacturers:


2.5 FIELD APPLIED JACKETS

A. Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated.

B. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing.

C. Jacketing of Ducts and Pipes Exposed to Weather: All ductwork and piping exposed to weather shall be finished with an aluminum jacket over the insulation. Aluminum jacket material shall be embossed or corrugated sheet, 0.016" nominal thickness, conforming to ASTM B209, temper H-14. Jacketing shall be applied with joints lapped not less than 2", and shall be secured with 3/8" x 0.020" thick aluminum bands located at each circumferential lap and at not more than 9" intervals throughout. Horizontal joints shall lap downward to shed water. Vertical joints shall be sealed with weatherproof silicone sealant.

1. Basis of Design: Childers Products, Division of ITW "Metal Jacketing Systems." 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Pabco Metals Corporation. b. RPR Products Inc, "Insul-Mate".

D. PVC Plastic: One-piece molded type fitting covers and jacketing material, gloss white. Connections, tacks, pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape. PVC material shall be 25 flame spread and 50 smoke development rated per ASTM E-84.

1. Basis of Design: Johns Manville "Zeston 2000 PVC". 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Proto Engineered Thermoplastcs Corp. "Proto Fitting Cover System". b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; FG Series. c. Speedline Corporation "Smoke-Safe".

E. PVDC-SSL Jacket: PVDC jacket with a self-sealing, pressure sensitive, acrylic-bases adhesive covered by a removable protective strip.

1. Basis of Design: Dow Chemical Company Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Film and Saran 560 Vapor Retarder tape.

F. Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 oz/sq.yd.plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive. Manufacturer: Great Lakes Textiles Product Style 1979.

G. Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I, plain weave, and presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd. Alpha Associates, Inc.; Alpha-Maritex 84215 and 84217/9485RW, Luben 59.


July 31, 2015 230700- 7

H. Butt Straps: Materials shall be identical in all respects and appearance to the basic jacket material.

2.6 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.

1. Basis of Design: P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; "Super-Stik". 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; "Triple I" b. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; "Supertemp 1900".

B. Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement 100 to 1200 degree : Comply with ASTM C 449/C 449M.

1. Basis of Design: P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc" PK No. 127" and "Quik-Cote". 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; "SmoothKote". b. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; "Ramcote 1200". c. Rock Wool Manufacturing Company; "Delta One Shot".

2.7 ADHESIVES AND MASTICS

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated. Obtain insulation and/or jacket manufacturer approval for all adhesives and mastics used. Obtain A/E approval for all locations where mastics will be used.

1. Adhesives shall not be considered an acceptable alternative to specified mechanical fastening methods without prior A/E approval.

2. All adhesives and mastics shall be suitable for the moisture conditions and temperatures that will be encountered.

B. Flexible Elastomeric Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-24179A, Type II, Class I.

1. Basis of Design: Armacell LCC; 520 Adhesive. 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aeroseal. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-75. c. RBX Corporation; Rubatex Contact Adhesive.

C. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.

1. Basis of Design: Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-82. 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-20.


July 31, 2015 230700- 8

b. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. c. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25.

D. PVC Jacket Adhesive: Compatible with PVC jacket.

1. Basis of Design: Johns-Manville; Zeston Perma-Weld, CEEL-TITE Solvent Welding Adhesive.


a. Dow Chemical Company (The); 739, Dow Silicone. b. P.I.C. Plastics, Inc.; Welding Adhesive. c. Speedline Corporation; Speedline Solvent Weld Adhesive.

E. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on below ambient services.

1. Basis of Design: Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-35. 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90. b. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 590. c. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-40.

3. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry film thickness.

4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 5. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by weight. 6. Color: White.

F. Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above ambient services.

1. Basis of Design: Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-10 and CP-11. 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 35-00. b. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 550. c. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 55-50.

2.8 SEALANTS

A. Joint Sealants: Joint Sealants for Polyisocyanurate Products:

1. Basis of Design: Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. "44-05". 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; "CP-76". b. Foster Products Corporation"30-45N”. c. Pittsburgh Corning Corporation Pittseal "444".


July 31, 2015 230700- 9

B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. Minus 40 to plus 250 degree F service temperature range. Color shall be aluminum.

1. Basis of Design: Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. "44-05". 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; "CP-76-8". b. Foster Products Corporation"95-44”. c. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. "44-05".

C. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. Minus 40 to plus 250 degree F service temperature range. Color shall be white.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; "CP-76". b. Foster Products Corporation"95-44”. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 405. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc. "44-05".

2.9 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White, 3-inch wide, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Basis of Design: Compac Corp. "104 and 105". 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division "FT 2150". b. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; "428 AWF ASJ". c. Venture Tape; "1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus", and "1542 CW Plus/SQ".

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, three-inch wide, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.

1. Basis of Design: Compac Corp. "110 and 111". 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division "Fasson 0827". b. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; "491 AWF FSK". c. Venture Tape; "1525 CW Plus, 1528 CW Plus", and "1542 CW Plus/SQ".

C. PVC Tape: White, 2-inch wide, vapor-retarder tape matching field-applied PVC jacket with acrylic adhesive. Suitable for indoor and outdoor applications.

1. Basis of Design: Compac Corp. "130". 2. Alternate Manufacturers:


July 31, 2015 230700- 10

a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division "Fasson 9200". b. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; "370 White Pvc". c. Venture Tape; "1506 CW NS".

D. PVDC Tape for Indoor Applications: White, three-inch wide, vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. Manufacturer: Dow Chemical Company "Saran 540 Vapor Retarder Tape".

E. PVDC Tape for Outdoor Applications: White, three-inch wide, vapor-retarder PVDC tape with acrylic adhesive. Manufacturer: Dow Chemical Company "Saran 560 Vapor Retarder Tape".

2.10 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Childers Products. b. Gerrard & Co. c. PABCO Metals Corporation. d. RPR Products, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MINIMUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Fiberglass insulation shall not be used outdoors.

B. Duct insulation:

1. Supply within unconditioned spaces (above ceilings, within shafts and within mechanical rooms): R-6.

a. 2” thick, 0.75 lb/cu.ft. mineral or glass fiber blanket. b. 1-1/2” thick, 2.25 lb/cu.ft. mineral or glass fiber board.

2. Supply and return outside the building envelope: R-8.

a. 3” thick, 0.75 lb/cu.ft. mineral or glass fiber blanket. b. 2” thick, 2.25 lb/cu.ft. mineral or glass fiber board.

3. Return, relief, and exhaust within the building envelope, upstream of shut-off dampers: none required.

4. Outside air intake: within conditioned space, downstream of automatic isolation damper: R-6.

a. 2” thick, 0.75 lb/cu.ft. mineral or glass fiber blanket. b. 1-1/2” thick, 2.25 lb/cu.ft. mineral or glass fiber board.

5. Outside air intake: within conditioned space upstream of automatic isolation damper.


July 31, 2015 230700- 11

a. 6.0 lb/cu.ft. mineral or glass fiber board, R-value shall equal roof or wall values.

6. Supply, return, outside air intake, not within conditioned space in concrete or below grade: Minimum R-5.3.

a. 2” 7.3 lb/cu.ft. cellular glass.

C. Heating water piping and chilled water piping: Fluid Oper-ating Tem-

perature Range and Usage (°F)

Insulation Conductivity Nominal Pipe or Tube Size in Inches (a)

Conductivity Btu·in./(h·ft²·°F)

Mean Rating Temperature,

°F < 1 1 to < 1 ½

1 ½ to ≤ 4

4 to < 8 ≥ 8

141 – 200 0.25 – 0.29 125 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 105 – 140 0.21 – 0.28 100 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5

40 – 60 0.21 – 0.27 75 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 <40 0.20 – 0.26 75 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5

1. For piping smaller than 1 ½ inch (38 mm) and located in partitions within conditioned spaces, reduction of these thickness by 1 inch shall be permitted but not to a thickness less than 1 inch.

D. Service Schedule: System Operating Temp. (°F) Material

Heating Water 120-180

Glass-Fiber Cellular Glass Polyiso. or Phenolic Elastomeric

Chilled Water 40-60

Glass-Fiber Cellular Glass Polyiso. or Phenolic Elastomeric

Notes:

1. Polyisocyanurate allowed only if it meets fire and smoke rating requirements at this thickness.

2. Use Calcium Silicate only for inserts at pipe saddles and hangers

E. Outdoor Cooling Tower/Condenser Water Pipe Insulation: Polyisocyanurate or Phenolic; 2 inch with aluminum jacket (polyisocyanurate allowed only if it meets fire and smoke rating requirements at this thickness).

F. Valves and pipe fittings shall be insulated as indicated below.


July 31, 2015 230700- 12

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. Before insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:

1. Stainless Steel: Coat 300 series stainless steel with an epoxy primer 5 mils thick and an epoxy finish 5 mils thick if operating in a temperature range between 140 and 300 deg F. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

2. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature between 32 and 300 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.

B. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 INSULATION WORK IN GENERAL

A. General: Except as specified, material shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer.

1. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

2. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

3. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

4. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

5. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. 6. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. 7. Do not apply insulation until surfaces to be covered have been leak tested, have had rust

and scale removed, and have been cleaned, dried and inspected. 8. Insulation shall be kept dry and clean at all times. 9. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and

specialties. 10. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at

hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

a. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. b. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on

anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.

c. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.


July 31, 2015 230700- 13

d. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

e. Continue insulation vapor barrier through penetrations except where prohibited by code.

11. Continue pipe insulation through gypsum and masonry walls only if fire stopping specified in Division 07 has a UL Listed assembly that includes a jacketed insulation. Coordinate with General Contractor.

12. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

a. Draw jacket tight and smooth. b. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation

jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

c. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

d. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. e. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material

manufacturer to maintain vapor seal. f. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints

and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.

13. All work shall be performed at ambient and equivalent temperatures as recommended by the manufacturers.

14. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

15. Joints shall be staggered on multi-layer insulation. 16. Mineral fiber thermal insulating cement shall be mixed with demineralized water when

used on stainless steel surfaces. 17. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its

nominal thickness.

3.4 INSULATION INSTALLATION, PIPING

A. General: Pipe insulation shall be installed in strict conformance to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Pipe insulation shall be continuous and installed on all fittings and appurtenances unless specified otherwise. Installation shall be with full-length units of insulation and using a single-cut piece to complete a run. Provide jackets for all pipe insulation.

B. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

2. Secure laps with outward clinched staples at six inches o.c, for insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces.


July 31, 2015 230700- 14

3. Do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant, for insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Polyisocyanurate Insulation:

1. All insulation shall be tightly butted and free of voids and gaps. Vapor retarder, if used, must be continuous. All fasteners and bands shall be neatly aligned.

2. In below-ambient systems, staple, rivets, screws and other fasteners capable of penetrating the vapor retarder shall not be used.

3. Install prefabricated insulation fittings on elbows, tees, and valves. Insulation at fittings shall be the same type and thickness as on straight pipe sections.

4. Lap joints of vapor retarder jacket shall be sealed using SSL tape or manufacturer’s vapor retarder tape.

5. Elbows and fittings shall be wrapped with vapor retarder tape in a spiral fashion, using a 50% overlap between successive courses of tape.

E. Unions, Flanges, Couplings, Strainers, and Valves:

1. Insulate all fittings, flanges, couplings, strainers, valves (and similar accessories) associated with an insulated piping system unless indicated otherwise.

2. Exposed Work: On exposed work, insulate to a diameter equal to insulation of adjacent piping provided a minimum of 0.75” of insulation is maintained around fittings, couplings, strainers and valves, otherwise, increase diameter.

3. Concealed Work: On concealed work, increase insulation diameter to maintain same insulation thickness as on adjacent piping. Use same material as specified for adjacent piping; fitting covers to be as specified hereinafter.

4. Adjustable and Serviceable Valves and Accessories: Where balancing valves, strainers and similar devices are adjustable or require servicing on less than a five-year cycle, provide removable insulation sections. Where valves with repackable glands and similar devices allow service, but manufacturer does not anticipate service frequency to be less than five years, make reasonable provisions to allow removal and reinstallation of the same materials with minimal effort and potential for damage.

F. Thermometer and Test Wells: Insulate test thermometer, industrial thermometer, and other test wells over their exterior length. Insulate thermometer wells protruding above finish pipe or equipment insulation. Neatly taper insulation away from top of well. Insulation on thermometer wells shall be 1-1/2" minimum thickness.

G. Insulation Support at Hangers:

1. Provide support shield and 360 degree insert between support shield and piping on piping 1-1/2" diameter and larger. Fabricate insert from heavy density insulating material


July 31, 2015 230700- 15

suitable for the temperature. Shield shall be fabricated of 14 gauge galvanized sheet metal. Insulation shields and inserts shall be not less than the following lengths:

1/2" to 2-1/2" 10" 3" to 6" 12"

2. Vapor-barrier facing of the insert shall be of the same material as the facing on the adjacent insulation. Seal inserts into the insulation with lagging adhesive for vapor seal. Where anchors are secured to insulated chilled piping, insulate anchors same as piping for a distance not less than four times insulation thickness to prevent condensation.

H. Sleeves and Wall Chases: Insulation on pipes through walls and floors shall be full size and jacketed same as adjacent insulation. Provide a metal jacket over the insulation on pipe passing through sleeves in non-fire rated walls where caulking is required.

1. Where penetrating interior walls, extend the metal jacket two inches out on either side of the wall and secure on each end with a band.

2. Provide adequate support on vertical pipe to prevent slipping.

I. Allowances for Movement: At points where pipe will move during expansion and contraction (expansion joints, Z-bends, expansion loops, etc.), clearances between the pipe and encased insulation shall be sized to permit full pipe movement without cracking or damaging insulation and casing or jacket.

J. Insulation at Mechanical Pipe Couplings: PVC insulated fitting covers shall be applied after the installation is installed. Installation shall comply with the manufacturer's recommended procedures. Connection with the pipe insulation shall be done in a neat, finished appearance, and any required vapor barrier shall be maintained.

K. Insulation Within Reach of Building Occupants: Where insulation is within reach of building occupants and visitors, insulation surfaces shall be protected by smooth sheet aluminum jacket material, 0.016" nominal thickness, lapped, banded, and installed same as above. The term “within reach” is defined as within ten feet of the floor, except for cases where there is reasonable protection (in the opinion of the A/E) offered by objects located between the insulation and the floor. This does not apply to insulation concealed within wall or ceiling construction and insulation located within equipment rooms that can be locked off from the normal building occupants.

3.5 SPECIAL PIPE INSULATION REQUIREMENTS:

A. Cold Piping Insulation: Exposed ends of insulation shall be sealed with vapor retarding mastic installed per the manufacturer’s recommendations. Vapor seals at butt joints shall be applied at every fourth pipe section and at each fitting to isolate any water incursion.

B. Removable Insulation Sections: Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Fabricate removable insulation sections from sections of pipe insulation or block insulation as follows. Removable flexible blankets will be allowed with prior approval if adequate covering is provided. Vapor barrier must be maintained for cold surfaces.


July 31, 2015 230700- 16

2. When covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of the component. Secure cover in place with stainless-steel hooks and wire.

3. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks. Extend insulation at least two inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of the component. Fill space between the component and pipe insulation with insulating cement.

3.6 DUCTWORK AND PLENUM INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

B. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

C. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

1. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space three inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

2. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and three inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

3. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. 4. Do not over-compress insulation during installation. 5. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. 6. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with

insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

D. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing two inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, one inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

1. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

2. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 degree F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness but not less than three inches.

E. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of two inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.


July 31, 2015 230700- 17

F. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

G. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with six-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced six inches o.c.

3.7 EQUIPMENT, TANK, AND VESSEL INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Glass Fiber Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of tank and vessel surfaces.

2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints.

3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles. 4. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors, manholes,

handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for service and inspection. 5. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME stamps, and

nameplates. 6. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic to open ends,

joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.

3.8 PENETRATIONS

A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. Terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant for applications

requiring only indoor insulation. Install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends for applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing.

4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations.

1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. Terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant for applications

requiring only indoor insulation. Install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined


July 31, 2015 230700- 18

to indoor insulation ends for applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation. Seal joint with joint sealant.

3. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.

D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.

E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Floor, Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated floors, walls and partitions if firestop is rated for this approach. Obtain further direction from A/E if firestopping is not rated for insulated penetrations. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.

F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:

1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in

Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

3.9 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. General: Where field-applied jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets.

1. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with two-inch overlap at seams and joints. 2. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.

B. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with two-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainless-steel bands 12 inches o.c. and at end joints.

3.10 COMMISSIONING





Spokane Transit Authority Section 230900 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Instrumentation and Control Systems

July 31, 2015 230900 - 1

SECTION 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General, Supplementary, and Special Conditions, and Division 1 - General Requirements, apply to work specified in this section. Subcontractor must familiarize himself with the terms of the above documents.

1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDER

A. All bidders must be building automation contractors in the business of installing direct digital control building automation systems for a minimum of 3 years.

B. All bidders must have an office in the Spokane area.

C. All bidders must be authorized distributors or branch offices of the manufacturers specified.

D. All bidders must have a trained staff of application engineers, who have been certified by the manufacturer in the configuration, programming and service of the automation system.

E. The following bidders have been pre-qualified:

1. Andover Controls Corporation furnished by Alltec Controls, Inc.

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The existing BAS system is to remain in place and functional throughout the duration of the project. The BAS contractor is responsible for the demolition of controls from equipment being demolished under the project. The BAS contractor is responsible for connecting new equipment being installed under the project to the existing BAS system and providing the full functionality specified in the sequences of operation in the HVAC drawings.

B. Except as otherwise noted, the control system shall consist of all Ethernet Network Controllers, Standalone Digital Control Units, workstations, software, sensors, transducers, relays, valves, dampers, damper operators, control panels, and other accessory equipment, along with a complete system of electrical interlocking wiring to fill the intent of the specification and provide for a complete and operable system. Except as otherwise specified, provide operators for equipment such as dampers if the


July 31, 2015 230900 - 2

equipment manufacturer does not provide these. Coordinate requirements with the various Contractors.

C. The BAS contractor shall review and study all HVAC drawings and the entire specification to familiarize himself with the equipment and system operation and to verify the quantities and types of dampers, operators, alarms, etc. to be provided.

D. All interlocking, wiring and installation of control devices associated with the equipment listed below shall be provided under this Contract. When the BAS system is fully installed and operational, the BAS Contractor and representatives of the Owner will review and check out the system. At that time, the BAS contractor shall demonstrate the operation of the system and prove that it complies with the intent of the drawings and specifications.

E. The Contractor shall furnish and install components to connect the new equipment in the project to the existing building automation system including all necessary hardware and all operating and applications software necessary to perform the control sequences of operation as called for in the HVAC drawings. At a minimum, provide controls for the following equipment:

1. Roof top units 2. Exhaust fans 3. Fan Coil 4. Domestic hot water recirculation pump 5. Existing boilers with new primary pumps and existing secondary pumps 6. Power wiring to DDC devices and BAS panels.

F. Provide services and manpower necessary for commissioning of system in coordination with the HVAC Contractor, Balancing Contractor and Owner’s representative.

G. All work performed under this section of the specifications will comply with all codes, laws and governing bodies. If the drawings and/or specifications are in conflict with governing codes, the Contractor shall submit a proposal with appropriate modifications to the project to meet code restrictions. If this specification and associated drawings exceed governing code requirements, the specification will govern. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary construction permits and licenses.

1.4 TRAINING

A. Provide a minimum of (8) hours of on-site training for (2) system operators. The training will be hands-on type at the owner’s office. The training class will use the actual Operator’s Manual that will be submitted for this project.


July 31, 2015 230900 - 3

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall consist of PC-based workstations and microcomputer controllers of modular design providing distributed processing capability, and allowing future expansion of both input/output points and processing/control functions.

B. For this project the system shall consist of the following components:

1. Operator Workstation(s).

a. The BAS Contractor shall work with the existing Operator Workstation Computer onsite.

2. Ethernet-based Network Controller(s).

a. The BAS Contractor shall furnish, if not otherwise present, Ethernet-based network controllers as described in Part 2 of the specification. These controllers will connect directly to the Operator Workstation over Ethernet, provide communication to the Standalone Digital Control Units and/or other Input/Output Modules and serve as a gateway to equipment furnished by others (if applicable).

3. Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs).

a. Provide the necessary quantity and types of SDCUs to meet the requirements of the project for mechanical equipment control including air handlers, central plant control, and terminal unit control. Each SDCU will operate completely standalone, containing all of the I/O and programs to control its associated equipment.

1.6 WORK BY OTHERS

A. The BAS Contractor shall cooperate with other contractors performing work on this project necessary to achieve a complete and neat installation. To that end, each contractor shall consult the drawings and specifications for all trades to determine the nature and extent of others’ work.

B. The BAS Contractor shall furnish all control valves, sensor wells, flow meters and other similar equipment for installation by the Mechanical Contractor.

C. The BAS Contractor shall provide field supervision to the designated contractor for the installation of the following:

1. Automatic control dampers 2. Fire/smoke dampers 3. Blank-off plates for dampers that are smaller than duct size. 4. Sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate stratification.


July 31, 2015 230900 - 4

D. The Electrical Contractor shall provide:

1. All power wiring to motors, heat trace, junction boxes for power to BAS panels. 2. Furnish smoke detectors and wire to the building fire alarm system. HVAC

Contractor to mount devices. BAS Contractor to hardwire to fan shut down. 3. Auxiliary contact (pulse initiator) on the electric meter for central monitoring of

kWH and KW. Electrical Contractor shall provide the pulse rate for remote readout to the BAS. BAS contractor to coordinate this with the electrical contractor.

E. The BAS Contractor shall provide:

1. All power wiring to all smoke damper actuators for smoke control sequence.

1.7 CODE COMPLIANCE

A. Provide BAS components and ancillary equipment, which are UL-916 listed and labeled.

B. All equipment or piping used in conditioned air streams, spaces or return air plenums shall comply with NFPA 90A Flame/Smoke/Fuel contribution rating of 25/50/0 and all applicable building codes or requirements.

C. All wiring shall conform to the National Electrical Code.

D. All smoke dampers shall be rated in accordance with UL 555S.

E. Comply with FCC rules, Part 15 regarding Class A radiation for computing devices and low power communication equipment operating in commercial environments.

F. Comply with FCC, Part 68 rules for telephone modems and data sets.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. All shop drawings shall be prepared in AutoCAD software. In addition to the drawings, the Contractor shall furnish a flash drive containing the identical information. Drawings shall be A size or larger.

B. Shop drawings shall include a riser diagram depicting locations of all controllers and workstations, with associated network wiring. Also included shall be individual schematics of each mechanical system showing all connected points with reference to their associated controller. Typicals will be allowed where appropriate.

C. Submittal data shall contain manufacturer's data on all hardware and software products required by the specification. Valve, damper and air flow station schedules shall indicate size, configuration, capacity and location of all equipment.


July 31, 2015 230900 - 5

D. Software submittals shall contain narrative descriptions of sequences of operation, program listings, point lists, and a complete description of the graphics, reports, alarms and configuration to be furnished with the workstation software. Information shall be bound or in a three ring binder with an index and tabs.

E. Submit five (5) copies of submittal data and shop drawings to the Engineer for review prior to ordering or fabrication of the equipment. The Contractor prior to submitting shall check all documents for accuracy.

F. The Engineer will make corrections, if required, and return to the Contractor. The Contractor will then resubmit with the corrected or additional data. This procedure shall be repeated until all corrections are made to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the submittals are fully approved.

1.9 SYSTEM STARTUP & COMMISSIONING

A. Each point in the system shall be tested for both hardware and software functionality. In addition, each mechanical and electrical system under control of the BAS will be tested against the appropriate sequence of operation specified herein. Successful completion of the system test shall constitute the beginning of the warranty period. A written report will be submitted to the owner indicating that the installed system functions in accordance with the plans and specifications.

B. The BAS contractor shall commission and set in operating condition all major equipment and systems, such as the chilled water, hot water and all air handling systems, in the presence of the equipment manufacturer’s representatives, as applicable, and the Owner and Architect’s representatives.

C. The BAS Contractor shall provide all manpower and engineering services required to assist the HVAC Contractor and Balancing Contractor in testing, adjusting, and balancing all systems in the building. The BAS Contractor shall have a trained technician available on request during the balancing of the systems. The BAS Contractor shall coordinate all requirements to provide a complete air balance with the Balancing Contractor and shall include all labor and materials in his contract.

1.10 TRAINING The BAS Contractor shall provide both on-site training to the Owner’s representative and

maintenance personnel per the following description:

A. On-site training shall consist of a minimum of (8) hours of hands-on instruction geared at the operation and maintenance of the systems. The curriculum shall include:

1. System Overview 2. System Software and Operation

a. System access b. Software features overview


July 31, 2015 230900 - 6

c. Changing setpoints and other attributes d. Scheduling e. Editing programmed variables f. Displaying color graphics g. Running reports h. Workstation maintenance i. Application programming

3. Operational sequences including start-up, shutdown, adjusting and balancing. 4. Equipment maintenance.

1.11 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. The operation and maintenance manuals shall contain all information necessary for the operation, maintenance, replacement, installation, and parts procurement for the entire BAS. This documentation shall include specific part numbers and software versions and dates. A complete list of recommended spare parts shall be included with the leadtime and expected frequency of use of each part clearly identified.

B. Following project completion and testing, the BAS contractor will submit as-built drawings reflecting the exact installation of the system. The as-built documentation shall also include a copy of all application software both in written form and on flash drive.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. The BAS contractor shall warrant the system for 12 months after system acceptance and beneficial use by the owner. During the warranty period, the BAS contractor shall be responsible for all necessary revisions to the software as required to provide a complete and workable system consistent with the letter and intent of the Sequence of Operation section of the specification.

B. Updates to the manufacturer’s software shall be provided at no charge during the warranty period.


July 31, 2015 230900 - 7

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. General

1. The Building Automation System (BAS) shall consist of Network Control Units (NCUs), a family of Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs), Input/Output Unit Modules (IOU Modules), Operator Workstations (OWs), and one File Server to support system configurations where more than one operator workstation is required. The BAS shall provide control, alarm detection, scheduling, reporting and information management for the entire facility, and Wide Area Network (WAN) if applicable, from a single ODBC-compliant database.

B. Level 1 Network Description

1. Level 1, the main backbone of the system, shall be an Ethernet LAN/WAN. Network Control Units, Operator Workstations, and the Central File Server shall connect directly to this network without the need for Gateway devices.

C. Level 2 Network Description

1. Level 2 of the system shall consist of one or more field buses managed by the Network Control Units. The Level 2 field buses may consist of one or both of the following types:

a. An RS485, token passing bus that supports up to 127 Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs) for operation of HVAC equipment and lighting, or

b. An RS485 field bus that supports up to 32 devices from a family of plug-in, IOU modules.

2. These IOU modules may be mounted within the NCU enclosure or remotely mounted via a single, twisted, shielded pair of wires.

D. BAS

1. The BAS shall be capable of being segmented, through software, into multiple local area networks (LANs) distributed over a wide area network (WAN), sharing a single file server. This enables workstations to manage a single LAN (or building), and/or the entire system with all devices being assured of being updated by and sharing the most current database. In the case of a single workstation system, the workstation shall contain the entire database – with no need for a separate file server.

E. Standard Network Support


July 31, 2015 230900 - 8

1. All NCUs, Workstation(s) and File Server shall be capable of residing directly on the owner’s Ethernet TCP/IP LAN/WAN with no required gateways. Furthermore, the NCU’s, Workstation(s) and File Server shall be capable of using standard, commercially available, off-the-shelf Ethernet infrastructure components such as routers, switches and hubs. With this design the owner may utilize the investment of an existing or new enterprise network or structured cabling system. This also allows the option of the maintenance of the LAN/WAN to be performed by the owner’s Information Systems Department as all devices utilize standard TCP/IP components.

F. Remote Communications

1. In addition to the above LAN/WAN architecture support, the same workstation software (front end) must be capable of managing remote systems via standard dial-up phone lines as a standard component of the software. Front-end “add-on” software modules to perform remote site communication shall not be acceptable.

2. The remote system architecture shall consist of two levels providing control, alarm detection, reporting and information management for the remote facility. Level 1 shall contain the Remote Site Control Unit, communicating to the remotely located, Operator Workstation(s) through the use of a modem and a standard dial-up phone line. Level 2 shall consist of one or more field buses controlled by the RSCU. The field buses may consist of one or both of two types:

a. 1) An RS485, token passing bus that supports up to 127 Standalone Digital Control Units (SDCUs) for operation of HVAC equipment and lighting, or

b. 2) An RS485 field bus that supports up to 32 devices from a family of plug-in, IOU modules that may be mounted within the RSCU enclosure or remotely mounted on a single, twisted, shielded pair of wires.

G. System Expansion

1. The BAS system shall be scalable and expandable at all levels of the system using the same software interface, and the same Level 1 and Level 2 controllers. Systems that require replacement of either the workstation software or field controllers in order to expand the system shall not be acceptable.

2. The BAS shall be expandable to include Security and Access Control functions at any time in the future with no additional workstations, front-end software or Level 1 controllers required. Standalone Digital Control Units or IOU modules shall be able to be added to the existing Level 1 controller’s field bus(es), to perform security and card access applications. In this way, an owner’s existing investment in wiring infrastructure may be leveraged and the cost and inconvenience of adding new field bus wiring will be minimized.

3. Additionally, an integrated video badging option must be able to be included with no additional workstations required. This photo ID option must share the same database as the BAS in order to eliminate the need for updating multiple databases.

4. The system shall use the same application programming language for all levels: Operator Workstation, Network Control Unit, Remote Site Control Unit and Standalone Digital Control Unit. Furthermore, this single programming language


July 31, 2015 230900 - 9

shall be used for all applications: environmental control, card access control, intrusion detection and security, lighting control, leak detection / underground storage tank monitoring, and digital data communication interfaces to third party microprocessor-based devices.

H. Support For Open Systems Protocols

1. The BAS design must include solutions for the integration of the following “open systems” protocols: BACnet, LonTalk, and digital data communication to third party microprocessors such as chiller controllers, fire panels and variable frequency drives (VFDs).

2. The system shall also provide the ability to program custom ASCII communication drivers that will reside in the NCU, for communication to third party systems and devices. These drivers will provide real time monitoring and control of the third party systems.

2.2 NETWORK CONTROL UNITS (NCUS)

A. General

1. Network Control Units shall be microprocessor based, multi-tasking, multi-user, and employ a real time operating system. Each NCU control panel shall consist of modular hardware including power supply, CPU board, and input/output modules. A sufficient number of NCUs shall be supplied to fully meet the requirements of this specification and the attached point list.

2. NCUs for telephone dialup sites shall be of the same design as the Ethernet control units but without the plug-in Ethernet network interface card (NIC), i.e., NCUs, which include a NIC, shall be interchangeable whether used on a LAN/WAN or a dialup site.

B. Webserver Functionality

1. All NCUs on the Ethernet TCP/IP LAN/WAN shall be capable, out-of-the box, to be set up as a Web Server. The NCU shall have the ability to store HTML code and “serve” pages to a web browser. This provides the ability for any computing device utilizing a TCP/IP Ethernet connection and capable of running a standard Internet browser (Microsoft Internet Explorer, Netscape Navigator, etc.) to access real-time data from the entire BAS via any NCUs.

2. Graphics and text-based web pages shall be constructed using standard HTML code. The interface shall allow the user to choose any of the standard text or graphics-based HTML editors for page creation. It shall also allow the operator to generate custom graphical pages and forms.

3. The WEB server interface shall be capable of password security, including validation of the requesting PC’s IP address. The WEB server interface shall allow the sharing of data or information between any controller, or process or


July 31, 2015 230900 - 10

network interface (BACnet, LonTalk and TCP/IP) that the BMS has knowledge of, regardless of where the point is connected on the BAS network or where it is acquired from.

4. The BAS network controller must act directly as the WEB server. It must directly generate the HTML code to the requesting user (i.e. WEB browser), eliminating the need for and reliance on any PC-based WEB server hardware or software. To simplify graphic image space allocation, HTML graphic images, if desired, shall be stored on any shared network device. The BAS WEB server shall have the ability to acquire any necessary graphics using standard pathing syntax within the HTML code mounted within the BAS WEB server. External WEB server hardware and software are not acceptable.

C. Hardware Specifications

1. Memory:

a. A minimum of 4MB of RAM shall be provided for NCUs with expansion up to 8MB. The 8MB versions shall include a floating-point math co-processor.

2. Communication Ports:

a. Each NCU shall provide communication to both the Workstation(s) and the field buses. In addition, each NCU must have at least 3 other communications ports that support a telephone modem, portable service tool, serial printer and connection to third party controllers such as a chiller control panel. On a LAN/WAN system the NCU shall be provided with a 10Mbps plug-in Ethernet TCP/IP network interface card (NIC).

3. Input/Output (I/O):

a. Each NCU shall support the addition of the following types of inputs and outputs:

1) Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts 2) Counter Inputs for summing pulses from meters. 3) Thermistor inputs for measuring temperatures in space, ducts and

thermowells. 4) Analog inputs for pressure, humidity, flow and position

measurements. 5) Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control. 6) Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and capacity

control of primary equipment.

4. Modular Expandability:

a. The system shall employ a modular I/O design to allow easy expansion. Input and output capacity is to be provided through plug-in modules of various types or DIN-mountable IOU modules. It shall be possible to


July 31, 2015 230900 - 11

combine I/O modules as desired to meet the I/O requirements for individual control applications.

5. Hardware Override Switches:

a. All digital output units shall include three position manual override switches to allow selection of the ON, OFF, or AUTO output state. These switches shall be built into the unit and shall provide feedback to the controller so that the position of the override switch can be obtained through software. In addition each analog output shall be equipped with an override potentiometer to allow manual adjustment of the analog output signal over its full range, when the 3 position manual override switch is placed in the ON position.

6. Local Status Indicator Lamps:

a. Provide as a minimum LED indication of CPU status, Ethernet LAN status, and field bus status. For each output, provide LED indication of the value of the output (On/Off). For each output module provide an LED which gives a visual indication of whether any outputs on the module are manually overridden.

7. Real Time Clock (RTC):

a. Each NCU shall include a battery-backed, real time clock, accurate to 10 seconds per day. The RTC shall provide the following: time of day, day, month, year, and day of week. In normal operation the system clock will be based on the frequency of the AC power. The system shall automatically correct for daylight savings time and leap years and be Year 2000 compliant.

8. Power Supply:

a. The power supply for the NCUs shall be auto sensing, 120-220VAC, 60/50 Hz power, with a tolerance of +/- 20%. Line voltage below the operating range of the system shall be considered outages. The controller shall contain over voltage surge protection, and require no additional AC power signal conditioning. Optionally, if indicated on the drawings, the power supply shall accept an input voltage of (–48 VDC).

9. tomatic Restart After Power Failure:

a. Upon restoration of power after an outage, the ECU shall automatically and without human intervention: update all monitored functions; resume operation based on current, synchronized time and status, and implement special start-up strategies as required.

10. Battery backup:


July 31, 2015 230900 - 12

a. Each NCU with the standard 120-220VAC power supply shall include a programmable DC power backup system rated for a minimum of 72 hours of battery backup to maintain all volatile memory or, a minimum of 2 hours of full UPS including modem power. This power backup system shall be configurable such that at the end of a settable timeframe (such as 1 hour) of running on full UPS, the unit will shut off full UPS and switch to memory retention-only mode for the remainder of the battery power. The system shall allow the simple addition of more batteries to extend the above minimum battery backup times.

D. Software Specifications

1. General.

a. The NCU shall contain flash ROM as the resident operating system. Application software will be RAM resident. Application software will only be limited by the amount of RAM memory. There will be no restrictions placed on the type of application programs in the system. Each NCU shall be capable of parallel processing, executing all control programs simultaneously. Any program may affect the operation of any other program. Each program shall have the full access of all I/O facilities of the processor. This execution of control function shall not be interrupted due to normal user communications including interrogation, program entry, printout of the program for storage, etc.

2. User Programming Language:

a. The application software shall be user programmable. This includes all strategies, sequences of operation, control algorithms, parameters, and setpoints. The source program shall be English language-based and programmable by the user. The language shall be structured to allow for the easy configuration of control programs, schedules, alarms, reports, telecommunications, local displays, mathematical calculations, passwords, and histories. The language shall be self-documenting. Users shall be able to place comments anywhere in the body of a program. Program listings shall be configurable by the user in logical groupings.

E. Control Software:

1. The NCU shall have the ability to perform the following pre-tested control algorithms:

a. Proportional, Integral plus Derivative Control (PID) b. Self Tuning PID c. Two Position Control d. Digital Filter e. Ratio Calculator f. Equipment Cycling Protection


July 31, 2015 230900 - 13

2. Mathematical Functions:

a. Each controller shall be capable of performing basic mathematical functions (+, -, *, /), squares, square roots, exponential, logarithms, Boolean logic statements, or combinations of both. The controllers shall be capable of performing complex logical statements including operators such as >, <, =, and, or, exclusive or, etc. These must be able to be used in the same equations with the mathematical operators and nested up to five parentheses deep.

3. Energy Management Applications:

a. NCUs shall have the ability to perform any or all of the following energy management routines:

1) Time of Day Scheduling 2) Calendar Based Scheduling 3) Holiday Scheduling 4) Temporary Schedule Overrides 5) Optimal Start 6) Optimal Stop 7) Night Setback Control 8) Enthalpy Switchover (Economizer) 9) Peak Demand Limiting 10) Temperature Compensated Duty Cycling 11) CFM Tracking 12) Heating/Cooling Interlock 13) Hot/Cold Deck Reset 14) Free Cooling 15) Hot Water Reset 16) Chilled Water Reset 17) Condenser Water Reset 18) Chiller Sequencing

4. History Logging:

a. Each controller shall be capable of logging any system variable over user defined time intervals ranging from 1 second to 1440 minutes. Any system variables (inputs, outputs, math calculations, flags, etc.) can be logged in history. A maximum of 32767 values can be stored in each log. Each log can record either the instantaneous, average, minimum or maximum value of the point. Logs can be automatic or manual. Logged data shall be downloadable to the Operator Workstation for long term archiving based upon user-defined time intervals, or manual command.

5. Alarm Management:


July 31, 2015 230900 - 14

a. For each system point, alarms can be created based on high/low limits or conditional expressions. All alarms will be tested each scan of the NCU and can result in the display of one or more alarm messages or reports.

b. Up to 8 alarms can be configured for each point in the controller. c. Messages and reports can be sent to a local terminal, to the front-end

workstation(s), or via modem to a remote-computing device. d. Alarms will be generated based on their priority. A minimum of 255

priority levels shall be provided. e. If communication with the Operator Workstation is temporarily

interrupted, the alarm will be buffered in the NCU. When communications return, the alarm will be transmitted to the Operator Workstation if the point is still in the alarm condition.

6. Reporting.

a. The NCU shall be able to generate user-definable reports to a locally connected printer or terminal. The reports shall contain any combination of text and system variables. Report templates shall be able to be created by users in a word processing environment. Reports can be displayed based on any logical condition or through a user command.

2.3 STANDALONE DIGITAL CONTROL UNITS (SDCUS)

A. General:

1. Standalone Digital Control Units shall provide control of HVAC and lighting. Each controller shall have its own control programs and will continue to operate in the event of a failure or communication loss to its associated NCU.

B. Memory:

1. Control programs shall be stored in battery backed-up RAM and EPROM. Each controller shall have a minimum of 32K bytes of user RAM memory and 128K bytes of EPROM.

C. Communication Ports:

1. SDCUs shall provide a communication port to the field bus. In addition, a port shall be provided for connection of a portable service tool to support local commissioning and parameter changes with or without the NCU online. It shall be possible from a service port on any SDCU to view, enable/disable, and modify values of any point or program on any controller on the local field bus, any NCU or any SDCU on a different field bus.

D. Input/Output:

1. Each SDCU shall support the addition of the following types of inputs and outputs:


July 31, 2015 230900 - 15

a. Digital Inputs for status/alarm contacts b. Counter Inputs for summing pulses from meters. c. Thermistor Inputs for measuring temperatures in space, ducts and

thermowells. d. Analog inputs for pressure, humidity, flow and position measurements. e. Digital Outputs for on/off equipment control. f. Analog Outputs for valve and damper position control, and capacity

control of primary equipment.

E. Expandability:

1. Input and output capacity shall be expandable through the use of plug-in modules. A minimum of two modules shall be added to the base SDCU before additional power is required.

F. Networking:

1. Each SDCU will be able to exchange information on a peer to peer basis with other Standalone Digital Control Units during each field bus scan. Each SDCU shall be capable of storing and referencing global variables (on the LAN) with or without any workstations online. Each SDCU shall be able to have its program viewed and/or enabled/disabled either locally through a portable service tool or through a workstation connected to an NCU.

G. Indicator Lamps:

1. SDCUs will have as a minimum, LED indication of CPU status, and field bus status.

H. Real Time Clock (RTC):

1. An SDCU shall have a real time clock in either hardware or software. The accuracy shall be within 10 seconds per day. The RTC shall provide the following information: time of day, day, month, year, and day of week. Each SDCU shall receive a signal, every hour, over the network from the NCU which synchronizes all SDCU real time clocks.

I. Automatic Restart After Power Failure:

1. Upon restoration of power, the SDCU shall automatically and without human intervention, update all monitored functions, resume operation based on current, synchronized time and status, and implement special start-up strategies as required.

J. Battery Back Up:

1. Each SDCU shall have at least 3 years of battery back up to maintain all volatile memory.


July 31, 2015 230900 - 16

K. Alarm Management:

1. For each system point, alarms can be created based on high/low limits or conditional expressions. All alarms will be tested each scan of the SDCU and can result in the display of one or more alarm messages or reports.

2. Up to 8 alarms can be configured for each point in the controller enabling the escalation of the alarm priority (urgency) based upon which alarm(s) is/are triggered.

3. Alarm messages can be sent to a local terminal or modem connected to an NCU or to the Operator’s Workstation(s).

4. Alarms will be generated based on their priority. A minimum of 255 priority levels shall be provided.

5. If communication with the NCU is temporarily interrupted, the alarm will be buffered in the SDCU. When communications return, the alarm will be transmitted to the NCU if the point is still in the alarm condition.

L. Air Handler Controllers (To be used on units with less than 40 points)

1. AHU Controllers shall be capable of meeting the requirements of the sequence of operation found in the Execution portion of this specification and for future expansion.

2. AHU Controllers shall support all the necessary point inputs and outputs as required by the sequence and operate in a standalone fashion.

3. AHU Controllers shall be fully user programmable to allow for modification of the application software.

4. An LCD display shall be optionally available for readout of point values and to allow operators to change setpoints and system parameters.

5. A manual override switch shall be provided for all digital and analog outputs on the AHU Controller. The position of the switch shall be monitored in software and available for operator displays and alarm notification.

M. VAV Terminal Unit Controllers

1. VAV Terminal Unit Controllers shall support, but not be limited to the control of the following configurations of VAV boxes to address current requirements as described in the Execution portion of this specification, and for future expansion:

a. Single Duct Cooling Only b. Single Duct Cooling with Reheat (Electric or Hot Water) c. Fan Powered (Parallel or Series) d. Dual Duct (Constant or Variable Volume) e. Supply/Exhaust

2. VAV Controllers for single duct applications will come equipped with a built-in actuator for modulation of the air damper. The actuator shall have a minimum torque rating of 35 in.-lb., and contain an override mechanism for manual positioning of the damper during startup and service.

3. VAV Controllers shall contain an integral velocity sensor accurate to +/- 5% of the full range of the box’s CFM rating.


July 31, 2015 230900 - 17

4. Each controller shall perform the sequence of operation described in Part 3 of this specification, and have the capability for time of day scheduling, occupancy mode control, after hours operation, lighting control, alarming, and trending.

5. VAV Controllers shall be able to communicate with any other Standalone Digital Control Unit on the same field bus with or without communication to the NCU managing the field bus. Systems that fail to provide this (true peer-to-peer) capability will be limited to a maximum of 32 VAV controllers per field bus.

N. Unitary Controllers

1. Unitary Controllers shall support, but not be limited to, the control of the following systems as described in the Execution portion of this specification, and for future expansion:

a. Unit Ventilators b. Heat Pumps (Air to Air, Water to Water) c. Packaged Rooftops d. Fan Coils (2 or 4 Pipe)

2. The I/O of each Unitary Controller shall contain the sufficient quantity and types as required to meet the sequence of operation found in the Execution portion of this specification. In addition, each controller shall have the capability for time of day scheduling, occupancy mode control, after hour operation, lighting control, alarming, and trending.

O. Lighting Controllers

1. Lighting controllers shall provide direct control of 20 Amp, 277 VAC lighting circuits using mechanically held, latching relays. Controllers will contain from 8 to 48 circuits per enclosure. Each controller shall also contain inputs for direct connection to light switches and motion detectors.

2. Each controller shall have the capability for time of day scheduling, occupancy mode control, after hour operation, alarming, and trending.

P. Display Controllers

1. Display controllers are standalone, touch screen based operator interfaces. The controller shall be designed for flush mounting in a finished space, with a minimum display size of 9 x 9 inches.

2. Software shall be user programmable allowing for custom graphical images that simulate floor plans, menus, equipment schematics along with associated real time point values coming from any NCU on the network.

3. The touch screen display shall contain a minimum of 64 possible touch cells that permit user interaction for changing screens, modifying setpoints or operating equipment.

4. Systems that do not offer a display controller as specified must provide a panel mounted computer with touch screen capability as an alternative.


July 31, 2015 230900 - 18

2.4 OPERATOR WORKSTATION REQUIREMENTS

1. General.

a. The existing BAS workstation shall remain. Contractor shall ensure software is Continuum version 2.0. Supply and install upgrade software to version 2.0 as necessary. Contractor shall verify that the existing system is capable of meeting the following requirements.

b. The BAS workstation software shall be configurable as either a single workstation system (with a local database) or multi-workstation system where the database is located on a central file server. The client software on multi-workstation system shall access the file server database program via an Ethernet TCP/IP network running at either 10MBPS or 100MBPS.

c. All Workstations shall be Pentium II or better based personal computers operating under the Microsoft NT operating system. The application software shall be capable of communication to all Network Control Units and Standalone Digital Control Units, feature high-resolution color graphics, alarming, reporting, and be user configurable for all data collection and data presentation functions.

d. For multi-workstation systems, a minimum of 256 workstations shall be allowed on the Ethernet network along with the central file server. In this client/server configuration, any changes or additions made from one workstation will automatically appear on all other workstations without the requirement for manual copying of files. Multi-workstation systems with no central database will not be acceptable. Multi-workstation systems with distributed/tiered file servers and a central (master) database will be acceptable.

B. Workstation Software

1. General Description

a. The software architecture must be object-oriented in design, a true 32-bit application suite utilizing Microsoft’s OLE, COM, DCOM and ODBC technologies. These technologies make it easy to fully utilize the power of the operating system to share, among applications (and therefore to the users of those applications), the wealth of data available from the BAS.

b. The workstation functions shall include monitoring and programming of all DDC controllers. Monitoring consists of alarming, reporting, graphic displays, long term data storage, automatic data collection, and operator-initiated control actions such as schedule and setpoint adjustments.

c. Programming of controllers shall be capable of being done either off-line or on-line from any operator workstation. All information will be available in graphic or text displays. Graphic displays will feature animation effects to enhance the presentation of the data, to alert operators of problems, and to facilitate location of information throughout the DDC system. All operator functions shall be selectable through a mouse.

2. System Database


July 31, 2015 230900 - 19

a. The files server database engine must be Microsoft SQL Server, or another ODBC-compliant, relational database program. This ODBC (Open Database Connectivity)-compliant database engine allows for an owner to utilize “their” choice of database and due to its “open” architecture, allows an owner to write custom applications and/or reports which communicate directly with the database avoiding data transfer routines to update other applications. The system database shall contain all point configurations and programs in each of the controllers that have been assigned to the network. In addition, the database will contain all workstation files including color graphic, alarm reports, text reports, historical data logs, schedules, and polling records.

3. User Interface

a. The BAS workstation software shall allow the creation of a custom, browser-style interface linked to the user that has logged into the workstation software. This interface shall support the creation of “hot-spots” that the user may link to view/edit any object in the system or run any object editor or configuration tool contained in the software. Furthermore, this interface must be able to be configured to become a user’s “PC Desktop” – with all the links that a user needs to run other applications. This, along with the Windows 2000 user security capabilities, will enable a system administrator to setup workstation accounts that not only limit the capabilities of the user within the BAS software but may also limit what a user can do on the PC and/or LAN/WAN. This might be used to ensure, for example, that the user of an alarm monitoring workstation is unable to shutdown the active alarm viewer and/or unable to load software onto the PC.

4. User Security

a. The software shall be designed so that each user of the software can have a unique username and password. This username/password combination shall be linked to a set of capabilities within the software, set by and editable only by, a system administrator. The sets of capabilities shall range from View only, Acknowledge alarms, Enable/disable and change values, Program, and Administer. The system shall allow the above capabilities to be applied independently to each and every class of object in the system. The system must allow a minimum of 256 users to be configured per workstation. There shall be an inactivity timer adjustable in software that automatically logs off the current operator after the timer has expired.

5. Configuration Interface

a. The workstation software shall use a familiar Windows Explorer-style interface for an operator or programmer to view and/or edit any object (controller, point, alarm, report, schedule, etc.) in the entire system. In addition, this interface shall present a “network map” of all controllers and


July 31, 2015 230900 - 20

their associated points, programs, graphics, alarms, and reports in an easy to understand structure. All object names shall be alphanumeric and use Windows long filename conventions. Object names shall not be required to be unique throughout the system. This allows consistency in point naming. For example, each VAV controller can have an input called Space Temperature and a setpoint called CFM Setpoint. The VAV controller name shall be unique such as VAV for LAB101. Systems requiring unique object names throughout the system will not be acceptable.

b. The configuration interface shall also include support for template objects. These template objects shall be used as building blocks for the creation of the BAS database. The types of template objects supported shall include all data point types (input, output, string variables, setpoints, etc.), alarm algorithms, alarm notification objects, reports, graphics displays, schedules, and programs. Groups of template object types shall be able to be set up as template subsystems and systems. The template system shall prompt for data entry if necessary. The template system shall maintain a link to all “child” objects created by each template. If a user wishes to make a change to a template object, the software shall ask the user if he/she wants to update all of child objects with the change. This template system shall facilitate configuration and programming consistency and afford the user a fast and simple method to make global changes to the BAS.

6. Color Graphic Displays

a. The system shall allow for the creation of user defined, color graphic displays for the viewing of mechanical and electrical systems, or building schematics. These graphics shall contain point information from the database including any attributes associated with the point (engineering units, etc.). In addition operators shall be able to command equipment or change setpoints from a graphic through the use of the mouse. Requirements of the color graphic subsystem include:

1) SVGA, bit-mapped displays. The user shall have the ability to import AutoCAD generated picture files as background displays.

2) A built-in library of animated objects such as dampers, fans, pumps, buttons, knobs, gauges, ad graphs which can be “dropped” on a graphic through the use of a software configuration “wizard”. These objects shall enable operators to interact with the graphic displays in a manner that mimics their mechanical equivalents found on field installed control panels. Using the mouse, operators shall be able to adjust setpoints, start or stop equipment, modify PID loop parameters, or change schedules.

3) Status changes or alarm conditions must be able to be highlighted by objects changing screen location, size, color, text, blinking or changing from one display to another.

4) Graphic panel objects shall be able to be configured with multiple “tabbed” pages allowing an operator to quickly view individual graphics of equipment, which make up a subsystem or system.


July 31, 2015 230900 - 21

5) Ability to link graphic displays through user defined objects, alarm testing, or the result of a mathematical expression. Operators must be able to change from one graphic to another by selecting an object with a mouse - no menus will be required.

7. Automatic monitoring

a. The software shall allow for the automatic collection of data and reports from any controller through either a hardwire or modem communication link. The frequency of data collection shall be completely user-configurable.

8. Alarm Management

a. The software shall be capable of accepting alarms directly from controllers, or generating alarms based on evaluation of data in controllers and comparing to limits or conditional equations configured through the software. Any alarm (regardless of its origination) will be integrated into the overall alarm management system and will appear in all standard alarm reports, be available for operator acknowledgment, and have the option for displaying graphics, or reports.

b. Alarm management features shall include:

1) A minimum of 255 alarm notification levels. Each notification level will establish a unique set of parameters for controlling alarm display, acknowledgment, keyboard annunciation, alarm printout and record keeping.

2) Automatic logging in the database of the alarm message, point name, point value, connected controller, timestamp, username and time of acknowledgement, username and time of alarm silence (soft acknowledgement)

3) Automatic printing of the alarm information or alarm report to an alarm printer or report printer.

4) Playing an audible beep or audio (wav) file on alarm initiation or return to normal.

5) Sending an email or alphanumeric page to anyone listed in a workstation’s email account address list on either the initial occurrence of an alarm and/or if the alarm is repeated because an operator has not acknowledged the alarm within a user-configurable timeframe. The ability to utilize email and alphanumeric paging of alarms shall be a standard feature of the software integrated with the operating system’s mail application interface (MAPI). No special software interfaces shall be required.

6) Individual alarms shall be able to be re-routed to a workstation or workstations at user-specified times and dates. For example, a critical high temp alarm can be configured to be routed to a Facilities Dept. workstation during normal working hours (7am-6pm, Mon-Fri) and to a Central Alarming workstation at all other times.


July 31, 2015 230900 - 22

7) An active alarm viewer shall be included which can be customized for each user or user type to hide or display any alarm attributes.

8) The font type and color, and background color for each alarm notification level as seen in the active alarm viewer shall be customizable to allow easy identification of certain alarm types or alarm states.

9) The active alarm viewer can be configured such that an operator must type in text in an alarm entry and/or pick from a drop-down list of user actions for certain alarms. This ensures accountability (audit trail) for the response to critical alarms.

9. Custom Report Generation

a. The software will contain a built-in custom report generator, featuring word processing tools for the creation of custom reports. These custom reports shall be able to be set up to automatically run or be generated on demand. Each workstation shall be able to associate reports with any word processing or spreadsheet program loaded on the machine. When the report is displayed, it will automatically spawn the associated report editor such as MS Word.

1) Reports can be of any length and contain any point attributes from any controller on the network.

2) The report generator will have access to the user programming language in order to perform mathematical calculations inside the body of the report, control the display output of the report, or prompt the user for additional information needed by the report.

3) It shall be possible to run other executable programs whenever a report is initiated.

4) Report Generator activity can be tied to the alarm management system, so that any of the configured reports can be displayed in response to an alarm condition.

5) Standard reports shall include:

a) Points in each controller. b) Points in alarm c) Disabled points d) Overridden points e) Operator activity report f) Alarm history log. g) Program listing by controller with status. h) Network status of each controller

10. Spreadsheet-style reports

a. The software shall allow the simple configuration of row/column (spreadsheet-style) reports on any class of object in the system. These reports shall be user-configurable and shall be able to extract live (controller) data and/or data from the database. The user shall be able to set


July 31, 2015 230900 - 23

up each report to display in any text font, color and background color. In addition the report shall be able to be configured to filter data, sort data and highlight data which meets user-defined criteria.

11. HTML Reporting

a. The above spreadsheet-style reports shall be able to be run to an HTML template file. This feature will create an HTML “results” file in the directory of the HTML template. This directory can be shared with other computer users, which will allow those users with access to the directory to “point” their web browser at the file and view the report.

12. Scheduling

a. It shall be possible to configure and download from the workstation schedules for any of the controllers on the network.

1) Time of day schedules shall be in a calendar style and shall be programmable for a minimum of one year in advance. Each standard day of the week and user-defined day types shall be able to be associated with a color so that when the schedule is viewed it is very easy, at-a-glance, to determine the schedule for a particular day even from the yearly view. To change the schedule for a particular day, a user shall simply click on the day and then click on the day type.

2) Each schedule will appear on the screen viewable as the entire year, monthly, week and day. A simple mouse click shall allow switching between views. It shall also be possible to scroll from one month to the next and view or alter any of the schedule times.

3) Schedules will be assigned to specific controllers and stored in their local RAM memory. Any changes made at the workstation will be automatically updated to the corresponding schedule in the controller.

13. Programmer's Environment

a. The programmer's environment will include access to a superset of the same programming language supported in the controllers. Here the programmer will be able to configure application software off-line (if desired) for custom program development, write global control programs, system reports, wide area networking data collection routines, and custom alarm management software. On the same screen as the program editor, the programming environment shall include dockable debug and watch bars for program debugging and viewing updated values and point attributes during programming. In addition a wizard tool shall be available for loading programs from a library file in the program editor.

14. Saving/Reloading


July 31, 2015 230900 - 24

a. The workstation software shall have an application to save and restore field controller memory files. This application shall not be limited to saving and reloading an entire controller – it must also be able to save/reload individual objects in the controller. This allows off-line debugging of control programs, for example, and then reloading of just the modified information.

15. Data Logging

a. The workstation software shall have the capability to easily configure groups of data points with trend logs and display the trend log data. A group of data points shall be created by drag-and-drop method of the points into a folder. The trend log data shall be displayed through a simply menu selection. This data shall be able to be saved to file and/or printed.

16. Audit Trail

a. The workstation software shall automatically log and timestamp every operation that a user performs at a workstation, from logging on and off a workstation to changing a point value, modifying a program, enabling/disabling an object, viewing a graphic display, running a report, modifying a schedule, etc.

17. Fault Tolerant File Server Operation

a. The system shall provide the option to provide fault tolerant operation in the event of the loss of the CPU, disk drives, or other hardware required to maintain the operational integrity of the system. Operational integrity includes all user interfaces, monitoring of alarm points and access points, and executing access control functions.

b. The switchover mechanism provided shall be automatic. Should the failure be caused by hardware, then the system shall immediately switch to the Backup computer. Should the system failure be caused by software (instruction or data), the system shall not pass the faulted code to the Backup computer, otherwise the Backup shall fail in the same manner of the Primary computer.

c. Switchover to the Backup computer shall be initiated and effective (complete) in a manner and time frame that precludes the loss of event data, and shall be transparent to the system users, except for an advisory alarm message indicating that the switchover has occurred.

d. When the system fails-over from the Primary to the Backup computer, no alarm or other event shall be lost, and the Backup computer shall take control of all system functions.

e. A single component failure in the system shall not cause the entire system to fail. All system users shall be informed of any detectable component failure via an alarm event. System users shall not be logged off as a result of a system failure or switchover.

f. The Primary computer shall provide continual indication that the Backup computer is unavailable until such time that the fault has been purged.


July 31, 2015 230900 - 25

2.5 DDC SENSORS AND POINT HARDWARE

A. Temperature Sensors

1. All temperature devices shall use precision thermistors accurate to +/- 1 degree F over a range of –30 to 230 degrees F. Space temperature sensors shall be accurate to +/- .5 degrees F over a range of 40 to 100 degrees F.

2. Space sensors located in a location accessible by the public shall be tamper resistant stainless steel wall plate temperature sensors to match existing in the building.

3. Standard space sensors shall be available in an off white enclosure for mounting on a standard electrical box.

4. Where manual overrides are required, the sensor housing shall feature both an optional sliding mechanism for adjusting the space temperature setpoint, as well as a push button for selecting after hours operation.

5. Where a local display is specified, the sensor shall incorporate either an LED or LCD display for viewing the space temperature, setpoint and other operator selectable parameters. Using built in buttons, operators shall be able to adjust setpoints directly from the sensor.

6. Duct temperature sensors shall incorporate a thermistor bead embedded at the tip of a stainless steel tube. Probe style duct sensors are useable in air handling applications where the coil or duct area is less than 14 square feet.

7. Averaging sensors shall be employed in ducts which are larger than 14 square feet. The averaging sensor tube must contain at least one thermistor for every 3 feet, with a minimum tube length of 12 feet.

8. Immersion sensors shall be employed for measurement of temperature in all chilled and hot water applications as well as refrigerant applications. Thermal wells shall be brass or stainless steel for non-corrosive fluids below 250 degrees F and 300 series stainless steel for all other applications.

9. A pneumatic signal shall not be allowed for sensing temperature.

B. Pressure Sensors

1. Air pressure measurements in the range of 0 to 10” water column will be accurate to +/- 1% using a solid-state sensing element. Acceptable manufacturers include Modus Instruments and Mamac.

2. Differential pressure measurements of liquids or gases shall be accurate to =/- 0.5% of range. The housing shall be Nema 4 rated.

C. Current and KW Sensors

1. Current status switches shall be used to monitor fans, pumps, motors and electrical loads. Current switches shall be available in solid and split core models, and offer either a digital or an analog signal to the automation system. Acceptable manufacturer is Veris or approved equal.

2. Measurement of three phase power shall be accomplished with a kW/kWH transducer. This device shall utilize direct current transformer inputs to calculate the instantaneous value (kW) and a pulsed output proportional to the energy usage (kWH). Provide Veris Model 6000 Power Transducer or approved equal.


July 31, 2015 230900 - 26

D. Flow Sensors

1. Provide an insertion vortex flowmeter for measurement of liquid, gas or steam flows in pipe sizes above 3 inches.

2. Install the flow meter on an isolation valve to permit removal without process shutdown.

3. Sensors shall be manufactured by EMCO or approved equal.

E. Electric/Pneumatic Transducers

1. Electric to pneumatic transducers shall operate from either a PWM or analog signal. E/P transducers shall be rated for 0 - 20 psi operation and accurate to 2% of full scale. E/P transducers shall have a maximum air consumption of 100 SCIM.

2. E/P transducers may be installed at the end device (damper or valve), or mounted separately in a field interface panel, or as part of the controller. All transducers will be calibrated. Panel mounted transducers shall be Sensycon or approved equal.

F. Electric/Pneumatic Solenoid Valves

1. Electric solenoid operated pneumatic valves (EP's) shall have a three port operation: common, normally open and normally closed. They shall be rated for 50 psig when used for 25 psig or less applications, or rated for 150 psig when used for 100 psig or less applications. The coils shall be equipped with transient suppression devices to limit transients to 150 percent of the rated coil voltage.

2.6 CONTROL VALVES

A. Provide automatic control valves suitable for the specified controlled media (steam, water or glycol). Provide valves which mate and match the material of the connected piping. Equip control valves with the actuators of required input power type and control signal type to accurately position the flow control element and provide sufficient force to achieve required leakage specification.

B. Control valves shall meet the heating and cooling loads specified, and close off against the differential pressure conditions within the application. Valves should be sized to operate accurately and with stability from 10 to 100% of the maximum design flow.

C. Trim material shall be stainless steel for steam and high differential pressure applications.

D. Electric actuation should be provided on all terminal unit reheat applications.


July 31, 2015 230900 - 27

2.7 DAMPERS

A. Automatic dampers, furnished by the Building Automation Contractor shall be single or multiple blade as required. Dampers are to be installed by the HVAC Contractor under the supervision of the BAS Contractor. All blank-off plates and conversions necessary to install smaller than duct size dampers are the responsibility of the Sheet Metal Contractor.

B. Damper frames are to be constructed of 13 gauge galvanized sheet steel mechanically joined with linkage concealed in the side channel to eliminate noise as friction. Compressible spring stainless steel side seals, and acetal or bronze bearings shall also be provided.

C. Damper blade width shall not exceed eight inches. Seals and 3/8 inch square steel zinc plated pins are required. Blade rotation is to be parallel or opposed as shown on the schedules.

D. For high performance applications, control dampers will meet or exceed the UL Class I leakage rating.

E. Control and smoke dampers shall be Ruskin, or approved equal.

F. Provide opposed blade dampers for modulating applications and parallel blade for two position control.

2.8 DAMPER ACTUATORS

A. Electronic Actuators – the actuator shall be direct coupled over the shaft, enabling it to be mounted directly to the damper shaft without the need for connecting linkage. The actuator shall have electronic overload circuitry to prevent damage. For power-failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. Non-spring return actuators shall have an external manual gear release to allow positioning of the damper when the actuator is not powered.

2.9 SMOKE DETECTORS

A. Air duct smoke detectors shall be by Air Products & Controls or approved equal. The detectors shall operate at air velocities from 300 feet per minute to 4000 feet per minute.

B. The smoke detector shall utilize a photoelectric detector head.

C. The housing shall permit mechanical installation without removal of the detector cover.

D. The detectors shall be listed by Underwrites Laboratories and meet the requirements of UL 268A.


July 31, 2015 230900 - 28

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES

A. General

1. Installation of the building automation system shall be performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor. However, all installation shall be under the personal supervision of the Contractor. The Contractor shall certify all work as proper and complete. Under no circumstances shall the design, scheduling, coordination, programming, training, and warranty requirements for the project be delegated to a subcontractor.

B. Demolition

1. Remove controls which do not remain as part of the building automation system, all associated abandoned wiring and conduit, and all associated pneumatic tubing. The Owner will inform the Contractor of any equipment which is to be removed that will remain the property of the Owner. All other equipment which is removed will be disposed of by the Contractor.

C. Access to Site

1. Unless notified otherwise, entrance to building is restricted. No one will be permitted to enter the building unless their names have been cleared with the Owner or the Owner’s Representative.

D. Code Compliance

1. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with all applicable electrical codes and will comply with equipment manufacturer's recommendations.

E. Cleanup

1. At the completion of the work, all equipment pertinent to this contract shall be checked and thoroughly cleaned, and all other areas shall be cleaned around equipment provided under this contract.

3.2 WIRING, CONDUIT, AND CABLE All wire will be copper and meet the minimum wire size and insulation class listed below: Wire Class Wire Size Isolation Class Power 12 Gauge 600 Volt Class One 14 Gauge Std. 600 Volt Class Two 18 Gauge Std. 300 Volt Class Three 18 Gauge Std. 300 volt


July 31, 2015 230900 - 29

Communications Per Mfr. Per Mfr.

A. Power and Class One wiring may be run in the same conduit. Class Two and Three wiring and communications wiring may be run in the same conduit.

B. Where different wiring classes terminate within the same enclosure, maintain clearances and install barriers per the National Electric Code.

C. Where wiring is required to be installed in conduit, EMT shall be used. Conduit shall be minimum 1/2 inch galvanized EMT. Set screw fittings are acceptable for dry interior locations. Watertight compression fittings shall be used for exterior locations and interior locations subject to moisture. Provide conduit sealoff fitting where exterior conduits enter the building or between areas of high temperature/moisture differential.

D. Flexible metallic conduit (max. 3 feet) shall be used for connections to motors, actuators, controllers, and sensors mounted on vibration producing equipment. Liquid-tight flexible conduit shall be use in exterior locations and interior locations subject to moisture.

E. Junction boxes shall be provided at all cable splices, equipment termination, and transitions from EMT to flexible conduit. Interior dry location J-boxes shall be galvanized pressed steel, nominal four-inch square with blank cover. Exterior and damp location JH-boxes shall be cast alloy FS boxes with threaded hubs and gasketed covers.

F. Where the space above the ceiling is a supply or return air plenum, the wiring shall be plenum rated. Teflon wiring can be run without conduit above suspended ceilings. EXCEPTION: Any wire run in suspended ceilings that is used to control outside air dampers or to connect the system to the fire management system shall be in conduit.

G. Coaxial cable shall conform to RG62 or RG59 rating. Provide plenum rated coaxial cable when running in return air plenums.

H. Fiber optic cable shall include the following sizes; 50/125, 62.5/125 or 100/140.

I. Only glass fiber is acceptable, no plastic.

J. Fiber optic cable shall only be installed and terminated by an experienced contractor. The BAS contractor shall submit to the Engineer the name of the intended contractor of the fiber optic cable with his submittal documents.

3.3 HARDWARE INSTALLATION

A. Installation Practices for Wiring


July 31, 2015 230900 - 30

1. All controllers are to be mounted vertically and per the manufacturer’s installation documentation.

2. The 120VAC power wiring to each Ethernet or Remote Site controller shall be a dedicated run, with a separate breaker. Each run will include a separate hot, neutral and ground wire. The ground wire will terminate at the breaker panel ground. This circuit will not feed any other circuit or device.

3. A true earth ground must be available in the building. Do not use a corroded or galvanized pipe, or structural steel.

4. Wires are to be attached to the building proper at regular intervals such that wiring does not droop. Wires are not to be affixed to or supported by pipes, conduit, etc.

5. Conduit in finished areas, will be concealed in ceiling cavity spaces, plenums, furred spaces and wall construction. Exception; metallic surface raceway may be used in finished areas on masonry walls. All surface raceway in finished areas must be color matched to the existing finish within the limitations of standard manufactured colors.

6. Conduit, in non-finished areas where possible, will be concealed in ceiling cavity spaces, plenums, furred spaces, and wall construction. Exposed conduit will run parallel to or at right angles to the building structure.

7. Wires are to be kept a minimum of three (3) inches from hot water, steam, or condensate piping.

8. Where sensor wires leave the conduit system, they are to be protected by a plastic insert.

9. Wire will not be allowed to run across telephone equipment areas.

B. Installation Practices for Field Devices

1. Well-mounted sensors will include thermal conducting compound within the well to insure good heat transfer to the sensor.

2. Actuators will be firmly mounted to give positive movement and linkage will be adjusted to give smooth continuous movement throughout 100 percent of the stroke.

3. Relay outputs will include transient suppression across all coils. Suppression devices shall limit transients to 150% of the rated coil voltage.

4. Water line mounted sensors shall be removable without shutting down the system in which they are installed.

5. For duct static pressure sensors, the high pressure port shall be connected to a metal static pressure probe inserted into the duct pointing upstream. The low pressure port shall be left open to the plenum area at the point that the high pressure port is tapped into the ductwork.

6. For building static pressure sensors, the high pressure port shall be inserted into the space via a metal tube. Pipe the low pressure port to the outside of the building.

C. Enclosures

1. For all I/O requiring field interface devices, these devices where practical will be mounted in a field interface panel (FIP). The Contractor shall provide an


July 31, 2015 230900 - 31

enclosure which protects the device(s) from dust, moisture, conceals integral wiring and moving parts.

a. FIPs shall contain power supplies for sensors, interface relays and contactors, safety circuits, and I/P transducers.

b. The FIP enclosure shall be of steel construction with baked enamel finish, NEMA 1 rated with a hinged door and keyed lock. The enclosure will be sized for twenty percent spare mounting space. All locks will be keyed identically.

c. All wiring to and from the FIP will be to screw type terminals. Analog or communications wiring may use the FIP as a raceway without terminating. The use of wire nuts within the FIP is prohibited.

d. All outside mounted enclosures shall meet the NEMA-4 rating. e. The wiring within all enclosures shall be run in plastic track. Wiring

within controllers shall be wrapped and secured.

D. Identification

1. Identify all control wires with labeling tape or sleeves using either words, letters, or numbers that can be exactly cross-referenced with as-built drawings.

2. All field enclosures, other than controllers, shall be identified with a bakelite nameplate. The lettering shall be in white against a black or blue background.

3. Junction box covers will be marked to indicate that they are a part of the BAS system.

4. All I/O field devices (except space sensors) that are not mounted within FIP's shall be identified with name plates.

5. All I/O field devices inside FIP's shall be labeled.

E. Existing Controls.

1. Existing controls which are to be reused must each be tested and calibrated for proper operation. Existing controls which are to be reused and are found to be defective requiring replacement, will be noted to the Owner. The Owner will be responsible for all material and labor costs associated with their repair.

F. Location

1. The location of sensors is per mechanical and architectural drawings. 2. Space humidity or temperature sensors will be mounted away from machinery

generating heat, direct light and diffuser air streams. 3. Outdoor air sensors will be mounted on the north building face directly in the

outside air. Install these sensors such that the effects of heat radiated from the building or sunlight is minimized.

4. Field enclosures shall be located immediately adjacent to the controller panel(s) to which it is being interfaced.


July 31, 2015 230900 - 32

3.4 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION

A. General.

1. The Contractor shall provide all labor necessary to install, initialize, start-up and debug all system software as described in this section. This includes any operating system software or other third party software necessary for successful operation of the system.

B. Database Configuration.

1. The Contractor will provide all labor to configure those portions of the database that are required by the points list and sequence of operation.

C. Color Graphic Slides.

1. Unless otherwise directed by the owner, the Contractor will provide color graphic displays as depicted in the mechanical drawings for each system and floor plan. For each system or floor plan, the display shall contain the associated points identified in the point list and allow for setpoint changes as required by the owner.

D. Reports.

1. The Contractor will configure a minimum of 6 reports for the owner as listed below:

a. Central Plant Status Report b. Air Handler Status Report c. Space Temperature Report

E. Documentation

1. As built software documentation will include the following:

a. Descriptive point lists b. Application program listing c. Application programs with comments. d. Printouts of all reports. e. Alarm list. f. Printouts of all graphics

3.5 COMMISSIONING AND SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Point to Point Checkout.

1. Each I/O device (both field mounted as well as those located in FIPs) shall be inspected and verified for proper installation and functionality. A checkout sheet


July 31, 2015 230900 - 33

itemizing each device shall be filled out, dated and approved by the Project Manager for submission to the owner or owner’s representative.

B. Controller and Workstation Checkout.

1. A field checkout of all controllers and front end equipment (computers, printers, modems, etc.) shall be conducted to verify proper operation of both hardware and software. A checkout sheet itemizing each device and a description of the associated tests shall be prepared and submitted to the owner or owner’s representative by the completion of the project.

C. System Acceptance Testing

1. All application software will be verified and compared against the sequences of operation. Control loops will be exercised by inducing a setpoint shift of at least 10% and observing whether the system successfully returns the process variable to setpoint. Record all test results and attach to the Test Results Sheet.

2. Test each alarm in the system and validate that the system generates the appropriate alarm message, that the message appears at all prescribed destinations (workstations or printers), and that any other related actions occur as defined (i.e. graphic panels are invoked, reports are generated, etc.). Submit a Test Results Sheet to the owner.

3. Perform an operational test of each unique graphic display and report to verify that the item exists, that the appearance and content are correct, and that any special features work as intended. Submit a Test Results Sheet to the owner.

4. Perform an operational test of each third party interface that has been included as part of the automation system. Verify that all points are properly polled, that alarms have been configured, and that any associated graphics and reports have been completed. If the interface involves a file transfer over Ethernet, test any logic that controls the transmission of the file, and verify the content of the specified information.


Spokane Transit Authority Section 231123 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Facility Natural-Gas Piping

July 31, 2015 231123 - 1

SECTION 231123 - FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. 2. Piping specialties. 3. Piping and tubing joining materials. 4. Valves. 5. Mechanical sleeve seals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.


A. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated.

B. Natural-Gas System Pressures within Buildings: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is more than 0.5 psig but not more than 2 psig, and is reduced to secondary pressure of 0.5 psig or less.

C. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.


July 31, 2015 231123 - 2

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Piping specialties. 2. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of

selected models. 3. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities. 4. Dielectric fittings. 5. Mechanical sleeve seals. 6. Escutcheons.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.

C. Welding certificates.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pressure regulators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.



A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

C. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight.


A. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located.


July 31, 2015 231123 - 3

B. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide purging and startup of natural-gas supply according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of natural-gas service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Architect's written permission.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

B. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. 2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket

welding. 3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,

and threaded ends. 4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150,

including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:

a. Material Group: 1.1. b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. d. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings,

and spiral-wound metal gaskets. e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground and stainless steel

underground.

5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE.

a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.

6. Mechanical Couplings:


July 31, 2015 231123 - 4

a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1) Dresser Piping Specialties; Division of Dresser, Inc. 2) Smith-Blair, Inc.

b. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish. c. Buna-nitrile seals. d. Stainless-steel bolts, washers, and nuts. e. Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or

steel pipe to steel pipe. f. Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be factory

equipped with anode.

B. Drawn-Temper Copper Tube: Comply with ASTM B 88, Type K.

1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper, and streamlined pattern. 2. Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.24, Class 150.

a. Gasket Material: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, and spiral-wound metal gaskets.

b. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel or stainless steel.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. 2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. 3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. 4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. 5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig. 6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. 7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 8. Maximum Length: 72 inches.

B. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.

1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector. 2. Nitrile seals. 3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected. 4. For indoor or outdoor applications. 5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.

C. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger.


July 31, 2015 231123 - 5

3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area.

4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

D. Basket Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area.

4. CWP Rating: 125 psig.

E. T-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: Ductile or malleable iron with removable access coupling and end cap for strainer maintenance.

2. End Connections: Grooved ends. 3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 57

percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 750 psig.

F. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection.


A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited.

2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES

A. See "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles for where each valve type is applied in various services.

B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Comply with ASME B16.33.

1. CWP Rating: 125 psig. 2. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. 3. Dryseal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.


July 31, 2015 231123 - 6

4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.

5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for valves 1 inch and smaller.

6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inches to NPS 2 shall have initials "WOG" permanently marked on valve body.

C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.


a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze. 4. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof. 5. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof. 6. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem packing. 7. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 8. CWP Rating: 600 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to

authorities having jurisdiction. 10. Service: Suitable for natural-gas service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.

D. Bronze Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.


a. Lee Brass Company. b. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.

2. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584. 3. Plug: Bronze. 4. Ends: Threaded, socket, or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff

Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 5. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 6. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 7. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to


E. Cast-Iron, Lubricated Plug Valves: MSS SP-78.


July 31, 2015 231123 - 7


a. Flowserve. b. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. c. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. d. Milliken Valve Company. e. Mueller Co.; Gas Products Div. f. R&M Energy Systems, A Unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc.

2. Body: Cast iron, complying with ASTM A 126, Class B. 3. Plug: Bronze or nickel-plated cast iron. 4. Seat: Coated with thermoplastic. 5. Stem Seal: Compatible with natural gas. 6. Ends: Threaded or flanged as indicated in "Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve

Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles. 7. Operator: Square head or lug type with tamperproof feature where indicated. 8. Pressure Class: 125 psig. 9. Listing: Valves NPS 1 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to



A. Dielectric Unions:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co. e. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. f. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials. 4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. 5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint,

plain, or welded end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Dielectric Flanges:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Watts Regulator Co.; Division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.


July 31, 2015 231123 - 8

d. Wilkins; Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials. 4. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. 5. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint,


C. Dielectric-Flange Kits:


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Minimum Operating-Pressure Rating: 150 psig. 3. Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. 4. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or PE bolt

sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 5. Insulating materials suitable for natural gas. 6. Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, brazed-joint,


2.6 SLEEVES

A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

B. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.




a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico Inc. c. Metraflex Company (The). d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe and sleeve.


July 31, 2015 231123 - 9

3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to

sealing elements. Include one nut and bolt for each sealing element.

2.8 ESCUTCHEONS

A. General Requirements for Escutcheons: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with ID to fit around pipe or tube, and OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Escutcheons: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

C. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

D. Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Escutcheons: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome-plated finish.

E. One-Piece, Floor-Plate Escutcheons: Cast-iron floor plate.

F. Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Escutcheons: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.

2.9 GROUT


1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section.

B. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code to determine that natural-gas utilization devices are turned off in piping section affected.


July 31, 2015 231123 - 10

C. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for prevention of accidental ignition.

3.3 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code for installation and purging of natural-gas piping.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Locate valves for easy access.

H. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Install escutcheons at penetrations of interior walls, ceilings, and floors.

1. New Piping:

a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type. b. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass

type with polished chrome-plated finish. c. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-

steel type. d. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting, cast-

brass type with polished chrome-plated finish. e. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type

or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw. f. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-brass

finish. g. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with

concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips.


July 31, 2015 231123 - 11

h. Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type. i. Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw or

spring clips. j. Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.

2. Existing Piping:

a. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.

b. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips.

c. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.

d. Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and set screw.

e. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with rough-brass finish.

f. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips.

g. Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type. h. Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with set screw or

spring clips. i. Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate type.

L. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

M. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing.

1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.

N. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view.

O. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap.

1. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit.

2. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports.


July 31, 2015 231123 - 12

a. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker barriers.

3. Prohibited Locations:

a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts.

b. Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.

P. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down.

Q. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.

R. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections.

S. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode.

T. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve.

U. Install pressure gage downstream from each line regulator. Pressure gages are specified in Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.

B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.

C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing.

D. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing.

E. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping.


A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints:

1. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1.


July 31, 2015 231123 - 13

2. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. 3. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. 4. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal

threading is specified. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or

damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

D. Welded Joints:

1. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators.

2. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. 3. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds

and where damage to coating occurs during construction.

E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter.

F. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas service. Install gasket concentrically positioned.

G. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten.


A. Install hangers for horizontal steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 1 and Smaller: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.

B. Install hangers for horizontal drawn-temper copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/8: Maximum span, 48 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. NPS 1/2 and NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. NPS 3/4 and NPS 7/8: Maximum span, 84 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 1: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70.

B. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances.


July 31, 2015 231123 - 14

C. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment.

D. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance.

3.8 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for piping and valve identification. Install detectable warning tape directly above gas piping, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.9 PAINTING


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 and the International Fuel Gas Code and authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.11 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain earthquake valves.

3.12 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES MORE THAN 0.5 PSIG AND LESS THAN 5 PSIG

A. Aboveground, branch piping NPS 1 and smaller shall be one of the following:

1. Annealed-temper, copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. 2. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.

B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:

1. Steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints. 2. Steel pipe with steel welding fittings and welded joints. 3. Drawn-temper copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints.


July 31, 2015 231123 - 15

3.13 ABOVEGROUND MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2 and smaller shall be one of the following:

1. Two-piece, full-port, bronze ball valves with bronze trim. 2. Bronze plug valve.

B. Distribution piping valves for pipe sizes NPS 2-1/2 and larger shall be one of the following:


C. Valves in branch piping for single appliance shall be one of the following:



Spokane Transit Authority Section 232100 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Hydronic Piping

July 31, 2015 232100- 1

SECTION 232100 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties for the following:

1. Hot-water heating piping. 2. Chilled-water piping. 3. Makeup-water piping. 4. Condensate-drain piping. 5. Air-vent piping. 6. Safety-valve-inlet and -outlet piping.

B. Related Sections include the following: Division 23, Section 232123, "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic piping.


A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature:

1. Hot-Water Heating Piping: 150 psig at 200F. 2. Chilled-Water Piping: 150 psig at 200F. 3. Makeup-Water Piping: 80 psig at 150F. 4. Condensate-Drain Piping: 80 psig at 100F. 5. Air-Vent Piping: 150 psig at 200F. 6. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping: Equal to the pressure of the piping system to

which it is attached.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit for plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cement.

B. Submit product data for metal pipe and tubing, with specification, class or type, and schedule.


July 31, 2015 232100- 2

1. Valves. Include material data, pressure/temperature ratings, flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibrated-orifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves.

2. Air control devices. 3. Chemical treatment. 4. Hydronic specialties.

C. Shop Drawings: Detail, at ¼” scale minimum, the piping layout, fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to the building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Field quality-control test reports.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.


involved and that certification is current. 3. Systems operating above 150 psi must comply with ASME B31.1 or B31.3

C. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 01.

D. Coordinate inspection work with owner designated welding inspector.

E. Piping shall have identification affixed at factory with proper ASTM identification. Piping specialties, including valves, shall have the manufacturer's trademark, name and/or model number and pressure rating, where applicable, affixed to permanently identify the manufacturer of product.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K or L.


July 31, 2015 232100- 3

B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K.

C. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Anvil International, Inc. b. S. P. Fittings; a division of Star Pipe Products. c. Victaulic Company of America. d. Stadler-Viega e. Bronze Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.24.

2. Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM B 75, copper tube or ASTM B 584, bronze casting.

3. Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated; gasketed fitting.

4. Copper or Bronze Pressure-Seal Fittings:

a. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products manufactured by Stadler-Viega.

b. Housing: Copper. c. O-Rings and Pipe Stops: EPDM. d. Tools: Manufacturer's special tools. e. Minimum 200-psig working-pressure rating at 250 degrees F.

D. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 Grade B seamless or ERW, Schedule 40, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

B. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

C. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

D. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300 as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

E. Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.

F. Wrought Steel Butt Weld Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.9 with same wall thickness as connecting piping.

G. Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:


July 31, 2015 232100- 4

1. Material Group: 1.1. 2. End Connections: Butt welding. 3. Facings: Raised face.

H. Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:

1. Standardization: All mechanically coupled piping products shall be of one manufacturer. 2. Available Manufacturers size 2-1/2” to 24”:

a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Victaulic Company of America.

3. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or shoulders constructed to accept grooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

4. Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.

I. Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in which they are installed.

2.3 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. CPVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 441/F 441M, Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

B. CPVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM F 438 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM F 439 for Schedule 80 pipe.

C. CPVC Solvent Cement: ASTM F 493.

D. PVC Plastic Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedules 40 and 80, plain ends as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.

E. PVC Plastic Pipe Fittings: Socket-type pipe fittings, ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40 pipe; ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80 pipe.

F. PVC Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564.


A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.


July 31, 2015 232100- 5

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. Submit gasket compatability data for glycol service.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. Carbon steel machine bolts or studs and nuts, ASTM A307, Grade B.

C. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

F. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

G. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 2. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.

H. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures.

2.5 TRANSITION FITTINGS

A. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings:


a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company b. IPEX Inc. c. KBi

2. One-piece fitting with one threaded brass or copper insert and one Schedule 80 solvent-cement-joint end. Materials to match adjoining piping.

B. Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions:


a. Charlotte Pipe and Foundry Company. b. IPEX Inc. c. KBi. d. NIBCO INC.


July 31, 2015 232100- 6

2. MSS SP-107, Plastic union. Include brass or copper end, Schedule 80 solvent-cement-joint end, rubber gasket, and threaded union. Materials to match adjoining piping.


A. Description: Combination fitting of copper-alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Dielectric Fittings Two-inch and Smaller: Threaded dielectric union, ANSI/ASME B16.39.

C. Dielectric Fittings 2-1/2-inch and Larger: Flanged union with dielectric gasket and bolt sleeves, ANSI/ASME B16.42.

D. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

E. Dielectric Unions:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company b. Central Plastics Company c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; AquaSpec Commercial Products Division

2. Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 degrees F.

F. Dielectric Flanges:


a. Capitol Manufacturing Company b. Central Plastics Company c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.

2. Factory-fabricated companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.

G. Dielectric-Flange Kits:


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.


July 31, 2015 232100- 7

2. Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full-face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.

3. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.

2.7 VALVES

A. General Requirements For Valves:

1. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

2. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. 3. Valve Actuator Types:

a. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and larger. b. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. c. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 4 and smaller. d. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator; of

size and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the "Valve Installation" Article.

4. Valves in Insulated Piping: With two-inch stem extensions and the following features:

a. Gate Valves: With rising stem. b. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of nonthermal-conductive material,

and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation.

c. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck.

5. Valve-End Connections:

a. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. b. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. c. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1. d. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.

B. HVAC Water System Valves (Not Grooved-End)

1. General: Utilize the following valves for water-based systems, such as chilled water, condenser water and heating water.

2. Shut-Off Valves 2" and Smaller: Ball type, ASTM B-61, ASTM B-62. Bronze body shall be ASTM B584 Alloy C84400. Two-piece body style, threaded ends, full port, chrome plated bronze ball, Teflon seats, adjustable packing, lever handle, blowout proof stem, 150 wsp, 600 wog.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Apollo No. 77C


July 31, 2015 232100- 8

2) Crane 9303-B 3) Milwaukee BA-400 4) Nibco No. T-585-70 5) Watts No. B-6080 6) Red-White No. 5044F

3. Shut-Off Valves 2" and Smaller: Ball type, ASTM B-61, ASTM B-62. Bronze body shall be ASTM B584 Alloy C84400. Two-piece body style, threaded ends, full port, ASTM 276 Type 316 stainless steel ball and stem, Teflon seats, adjustable packing, lever handle, blowout proof stem, 150 wsp, 600 wog.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Apollo No. 77C-140 2) Crane 9303-S 3) Nibco No. T-585-70-66

4. Shutoff Valves 2-1/2" through 12”: Butterfly type, full lug, ductile iron body, 400 series stainless steel stem, aluminum bronze disc, EPDM liner and seals, upper and lower stem bearing, blowout proof stem, extended neck for minimum 2" insulation, manufacturer recommended for bi-directional dead end service at full rated pressure without a downstream flange, sizes 2-1/2" through 4" shall be lever operated and 200 psi cwp; 6" through 12" shall be gear operated and 200 psi cwp; 14" and larger shall be gear operated and 150 psi cwp.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Demco No. NEC-511 2) Keystone No. HS-2 3) Milwaukee No. CL Series 4) NIBCO No. LD-2000

5. Gate Valves 2" and Smaller: Bronze body, solid wedge disc, nonrising stem, screw-in bonnet, malleable iron hand wheel, threaded ends, 125 wsp, 200 wog.

a. Manufacturer: Milwaukee No. 105, NIBCO No. T-113, Stockham No. B-103.

6. Gate Valves 2-1/2" and Larger: Cast-iron body, bronze trim, OS & Y, bolted bonnet, flanged ends, 125 wsp, 200 wog.

a. Manufacturer: Milwaukee No. F2885-A, NIBCO No. F-617-0, Stockham No. G-623.

7. Swing Check Valves 2" and Smaller: Bronze body, swing check, Teflon disc and seat, 125 wsp, 200 wog.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Hammond IB940 2) Milwaukee No. 509-T 3) NIBCO No. T-413-Y


July 31, 2015 232100- 9

4) Red-White No. 236T 5) Stockham No. B-320-T

8. Swing Check Valves 2-1/2" and Larger: Cast-iron body, horizontal swing check, bronze trim, with brass-faced disc, brass body seat ring, flanged pattern, 125 wsp, 200 wog.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Crane 373 2) Hammond IR1124 3) Milwaukee No. F2974-A 4) NIBCO No. F-918-B 5) Red-White No. 435 6) Stockham No. G-93

9. Pump Check Valves, Non-slam Type 2-1/2" and Larger: Wafer style, cast-iron body, bronze disc and seat, center guided, stainless steel spring and screws, 200 nonshock wog.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Hammond IR9253 2) Metraflex Style 700 3) Milwaukee No. 1400 4) NIBCO No. W-910-B

C. Grooved-End HVAC Water System Valves:

1. General: At Contractor’s option, the following valves may also be used for 2-1/2” and larger water-based systems, such as chilled water, condenser water and heating water.

2. Ball Valves 2-1/2" to 3" Sizes: Ductile iron, two-piece body, grooved ends, standard port, chrome plated carbon steel ball and stem, TFE seats, lever handle, blow out proof stem, 740 psi cwp.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Anvil Gruvlok Series 7500 2) Nibco No. G-595-Y/G-590-Y 3) Victaulic Series 726

3. Butterfly Valves 2-1/2" to 4": Ductile iron body, EPDM synthetic rubber encapsulated ductile iron disc with integrally cast stem, lever operated with 10-position throttling plate, manufacturer recommended for bi-directional dead end service at full rated pressure without a downstream flange, 300 psi cwp.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Anvil Gruvlok Series 7700 2) Nibco No. GD-4765-3 3) Victaulic Vic®-300


July 31, 2015 232100- 10

4. Check Valves 2-1/2" and Larger: Ductile iron body, horizontal or vertical spring-assisted check, stainless steel spring and shaft, grooved pattern, 300 psi cwp.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Anvil Gruvlok Series 7800 2) Victaulic Series 716

5. Pump Check Valves 2-1/2" and Larger: Ductile iron body, horizontal or vertical spring-assisted check, stainless steel spring and shaft, grooved pattern 300 psi cwp.

a. Manufacturers:

1) Anvil Gruvlok Series 7800 2) Victaulic Series 716

2.8 SPECIALTY VALVES AND ACCESSORIES

A. Automatic Balancing Hose Kits:

1. Furnish and install automatic balancing hose kits at each terminal unit hot water coil. Each kit shall include automatic flow control valve, two flexible hoses (insulated), two ball valves and accessories.

a. Manufacturer: Griswold CPP-2Y series with 18 inches of insulated hoses. b. Unless indicated otherwise, the minimum differential operating pressure shall be

two psig.

2. Each hose kit shall be equipped with a two-way modulating control valve, complete with DDC actuator (furnished by the Section 230900 subcontractor), and mounted by the hose kit manufacturer. Special care shall be taken to ensure the finished assembly is protected against damage in shipping.

3. The flow control cartridge shall automatically control flow rates within five percent accuracy over an operating pressure differential range of at least 14 times the minimum required for control. Three operating pressure ranges shall be available.

a. Flow control mechanism shall consist of a stainless steel one-piece cartridge with segmented port design and full travel linear coil spring.

b. Dual pressure/temperature test valves for verifying the pressure differential across the cartridge and system shall be included.

c. The manufacturer shall be able to provide certified independent laboratory tests verifying the accuracy of performance.

4. Supply and Return Hoses: All hoses shall be equipped with swivel-end connections at terminal unit. All end connections shall be crimped to meet stated pressure ratings. Serrated or slip fit connections are not acceptable.

a. Hose material shall be stainless steel braided over a synthetic polymer liner.


July 31, 2015 232100- 11

b. Hoses shall meet or exceed ASTM D380-83 standard and withstand working pressures of 375 psi (1/2"), 300 psi (3/4"), 225 psi (1"), 200 psi (1 1/4") and 175 psi (1 1/2") at 200 degrees F.

c. Hoses shall be pre-assembled and pre-insulated.

5. Isolation Valves: Valves shall be bronze body with level handle and rated for 600 psi w.p. Valves shall be full-ported type.

6. Strainer: Strainer shall be Y-type, bronze body with brass cap, 300 psi w.p. Strainer screen shall be a 20 mesh stainless steel, easily accessible for cleaning. Strainer shall have blowdow tapping with drain valve with threaded cap. Strainers shall have identification tags.

B. Combination Balancing/Shut-Off Valves:

1. Provide balancing valves at coils, at circulating pumps and elsewhere as shown. Manufacturer: Nibco 1710, Armstrong "CBV" Circuit Balancing Valves, Bell & Gossett "Circuit Setter Plus" or Tour-Anderson Model STAD/STAS and STAF/STAG.

2. Meter: Balancing valve manufacturer shall provide one portable meter for reading differential pressure in feet head. Each meter connection shall have positive shutoff valves. Meter shall have liquid-filled pressure gauge.

3. Valves shall be globe body, flanged pattern and all metal parts of nonferrous, pressure die-cast, flow measurement; shall provide four functions:

a. Precise flow measurement b. Precision flow balancing c. Positive shut-off with no-drip seat and Teflon disc d. Drain connection with protective cap.

4. Valves shall have four 360-degree adjustment turns of handwheel for maximum Vernier-type setting with "Hidden Memory" feature to program the valve with precision tamperproof balancing setting.

C. Balance Valves (Larger pipe sizes, balancing only):

1. Valves shall be globe body, flanged pattern and all metal parts of nonferrous, pressure die-cast, nonporous copper alloy. Valves shall be capable of installation in any direction without affecting flow measurement; shall provide four functions:

a. Precise flow measurement. b. Precision flow balancing. c. Positive shut-off with no-drip seat and Teflon disc, and d. Drain connection with protective cap.

2. Valves shall have four 360°-adjustment turns of handwheel for maximum Vernier-Type setting with "Hidden Memory" feature to program the valve with precision tamperproof balancing setting.

3. Provide hand-wheel protective cover to prevent accumulation of dirt and over-painting during construction.

4. Manufacturer: Armstrong "CBV" Circuit Balancing Valves, Tour-Andersson Model STAD/STAS and STAF/STAG or Mepco MBVS.


July 31, 2015 232100- 12

D. Drain Valves 1/2" to 3/4" Sizes: Bronze ball valve, two-piece body, standard port, chrome plated brass ball, RPTFE seats, lever handle, blow out proof stem, threaded or soldered with hose end, cap and chain, 150 psi wsp, 600 psi wog. Manufacturer: Milwaukee No. BA-100H or BA-150H.

E. Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following:

a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries c. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls f. Taco

2. Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi. 3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Plug: Resin. 5. Seat: PTFE. 6. End Connections: Threaded or socket. 7. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 8. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 9. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 10. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F.

F. Cast-Iron or Steel, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide:

a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. b. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries c. Flow Design Inc. d. Gerand Engineering Co. e. Griswold Controls f. Taco g. Tour & Andersson; available through Victaulic Company of America

2. Body: Cast-iron or steel body, ball, plug, or globe pattern with calibrated orifice or venturi.

3. Ball: Brass or stainless steel. 4. Stem Seals: EPDM O-rings. 5. Disc: Glass and carbon-filled PTFE. 6. Seat: PTFE. 7. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. 8. Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter. 9. Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position. 10. CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig. 11. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F.


July 31, 2015 232100- 13

G. Automatic Flow-Control Valves:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the following:

a. Flow Design Inc. b. Griswold Controls

2. Body: Brass or ferrous metal. 3. Piston and Spring Assembly: Corrosion resistant, tamper proof, self cleaning, and

removable. 4. Combination Assemblies: Include bonze or brass-alloy ball valve. 5. Identification Tag: Marked with zone identification, valve number, and flow rate. 6. Size: Same as pipe in which installed. 7. Performance: Maintain constant flow, plus or minus five percent over system pressure

fluctuations. 8. Minimum CWP Rating: 175 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 200 degrees F.

2.9 AIR CONTROL DEVICES

A. Manual Air Vents: Compression-type, screwdriver-operated air cocks shall be furnished and installed where shown and where required for venting. Cocks shall be 1/4" in size and shall be all bronze construction.

1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 degrees F. 8. Manual Air Vents Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the following:

a. Amtrol, Inc. b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. c. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries

B. Automatic Air Vents (Low-Pressure): Built-in serviceable check valve, all construction either brass or stainless steel.

1. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 degrees F.


July 31, 2015 232100- 14


a. Hoffman No. 79 Low Pressure b. Approved Taco, Amtrol, Bell & Gossett

C. Diaphragm-Type Expansion Tanks:

1. Tank: Welded steel, rated for 125-psig working pressure and 375 degree F maximum operating temperature. Factory test with taps fabricated and supports installed and labeled according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.

2. Diaphragm: Securely sealed into tank to separate air charge from system water to maintain required expansion capacity.

3. Air-Charge Fittings: Schrader valve, stainless steel with EPDM seats.

2.10 PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE TEST STATIONS

A. Test Plugs: Provide 1/2" size, pressure and temperature type fitting constructed of solid brass with two valve cores of Nordel, suitable for 275°F at 500 psi. Each fitting shall include cap with gasket. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Peterson Equipment Co., "Pete's Plugs" or approved Sisco. 2. Test Plugs in Insulated Piping: Pete's Plug "XL" Series or approved Sisco or Flow

Design.

2.11 CHEMICAL TREATMENT

A. Comply with requirements specified in Division 23, Section 232500, "HVAC Water Treatment.

B. Bypass Chemical Feeder: Welded steel construction; 125-psig working pressure; 5-gal. capacity; with fill funnel and inlet, outlet, and drain valves. Chemicals: Specially formulated, based on analysis of makeup water, to prevent accumulation of scale and corrosion in piping and connected equipment.

C. Ethylene and Propylene Glycol: Industrial grade with corrosion inhibitors and environmental-stabilizer additives for mixing with water in systems indicated to contain antifreeze or glycol solutions. Contractor shall provide all propylene glycol refilling as required during one-year guarantee period. Provide four sample kits and testing for quarterly evaluation of the glycol solution. Testing to be done by the glycol manufacturer or certified lab capable of evaluating glycol samples for proper mix and corrosion inhibitor concentration. Charge the following systems to the glycol concentrations by weight indicated on drawings.

1. Provide all necessary inhibitors or other additives required and recommended by the glycol manufacturer for use with ferrous and nonferrous metals.

2. Provide glycol manufacturer’s premixed glycol/water solution, in the required concentration. Water in premix solution shall be distilled or demineralized water.

3. Test equipment for glycol shall be furnished and approved by the glycol manufacturer. 4. Manufacturer: Dow, Dowfrost or approved equal.


July 31, 2015 232100- 15

2.12 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES


1. Mueller Steam Company 2. Armstrong Pump 3. Watts 4. Metraflex 5. Armstrong International, Inc. 6. Hoffman Specialty; Division of ITT Industries 7. Spence Engineering Company, Inc. 8. Spirax Sarco, Inc. 9. Bell & Gossett 10. Taco

B. Y-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection for flanged end units.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger; soldered ends above suspended ceilings NPS 2 and smaller.

3. Start-up Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, 4. Operational Strainer Screens: 20 mesh stainless steel strainer 2” and smaller; 1/16”

perforated monel or stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area for 2-1/2" to 5"; 1/16” perforated monel or stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area 6" and larger.

5. CWP Rating: 250 psig 2” and Smaller, 200 psig soldered end bodies, 125 psig 2-1/2” and larger.

C. Basket Strainers:

1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, high-tensile cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection.

2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger; soldered ends above suspended ceilings NPS 2 and smaller.

3. Start-up Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, 4. Operational Strainer Screens: 20 mesh stainless steel strainer 2” and smaller; 1/16”

perforated monel or stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area for 2-1/2" to 5"; 1/16” perforated monel or stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area 6" and larger.

5. CWP Rating: 250 psig 2” and Smaller, 200 psig soldered end bodies, 125 psig 2-1/2” and larger.

D. T-Pattern Strainers:

1. Body: Ductile or malleable iron with removable access coupling and end cap for strainer maintenance.

2. End Connections: Grooved ends. 3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 57

percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 750 psig (5170 kPa).


July 31, 2015 232100- 16

E. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 23, Section 230548, "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

F. Expansion fittings are specified in Division 23, Section 230516, "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following:

1. Type L drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered, brazed pressure-seal joints.

2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange fittings; and threaded joints.

B. Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered, brazed joints.

2. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.

3. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved, mechanical joints.

C. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be any of the following:

1. Type L drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered, brazed or pressure-seal joints.

2. Schedule 40 steel pipe; Class 150, malleable-iron fittings; cast-iron flanges and flange fittings; and threaded joints.

3. Schedule 5 steel pipe; steel, pressure-seal couplings and fittings; and pressure-seal joints.

D. Chilled-water piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of] the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and brazed joints. 2. Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges

and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints. 3. Schedule 40 steel pipe; grooved, mechanical joint coupling and fittings; and grooved,

mechanical joints.

E. Makeup-water piping installed aboveground shall be the following:

1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered or brazed joints.

F. Condensate-Drain Piping:

1. Type M, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.


July 31, 2015 232100- 17

2. Schedule 40 PVC plastic pipe and fittings and solvent-welded joints.

G. Air-Vent Piping:

1. Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Outlet: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints.

H. Safety-Valve-Inlet and -Outlet Piping for Hot-Water Piping: Same materials and joining methods as for piping specified for the service in which safety valve is installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Install ball or butterfly type shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to each piece of equipment.

B. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.

C. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction.

D. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 01, for installation requirements.

E. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. The drawings do not show all required fittings and offsets that may be necessary to connect pipes to equipment and to coordinate with other trades. Coordinate with other trades for space available and relative location of HVAC equipment and accessories to be connected.

B. Install components furnished under other sections, such as: Control valve bodies, flow switches, pressure taps with valve, and wells for sensors.


D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls and column lines. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.


July 31, 2015 232100- 18

E. Space piping, including insulation, to provide one-inch minimum clearance between adjacent piping and other surfaces.

F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

G. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

H. Install piping at indicated slopes.

I. Install piping free of sags and bends.

J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

K. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

L. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

M. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves.

N. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded hose adapter with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. Drains are generally not shown on the drawings.

1. Where piping is located in heated space, provide drain valves at all low points where more than three gallons of water could be trapped.

2. Where piping is located in unheated space, including insulated piping with heat tracing, provide drain valves at all low points where any water could be trapped. In general, piping should be arranged to minimize the need for drain valves.

3. Where drain valves are indicated on the drawings, extend piping as noted.

O. Provide manual air vents at all high points in the piping systems where air might accumulate. Manual air vents are generally not shown on the drawings. Air vent valves shall be located in an accessible location and shall be positioned with discharge down such that a container can be held under the valve to receive liquid discharge. Provide tubing (same size as vent valve) from the top of the pipe to be vented to the accessible vent valve.

P. Provide automatic air vents where indicated on the drawings. Discharge from automatic air vents shall be field-piped to the nearest floor drain with a one inch air gap.

Q. Glycol systems: In glycol systems, pipe drain and vent valves (that are located near to or in the same mechanical room) back to glycol mix tank, or glycol catch tank. Do not discharge glycol to floors, floor drains or to outside.

R. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow.

S. Locate and orient valves to permit proper operation and access for maintenance. Generally locate valve stems in overhead piping in horizontal position. Provide a union adjacent to one end of all threaded end valves. Control valves usually require reducers to connect to pipe sizes


July 31, 2015 232100- 19

shown on the drawing. Install butterfly valves with the valve open as recommended by the manufacturer to prevent binding of the disc in the seat.

1. Valves in equipment rooms that are more than 8' above the floor (and not above a ceiling) shall be provided chain-operated sheaves and chains.

2. For chain-wheel operators, extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor elevation. 3. Provide tie downs for chains that impede walkways.

T. Install unions or flanges in piping adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Offset equipment connections and carefully locate unions and flanges to allow for equipment removal and repair with minimal removal of piping. Provide flexibility in equipment connections and branch line take-offs with three-elbow swing joints or as noted on the drawings.

U. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Strainers shall be installed line size, which shall mean the size of the inlet pipe shown on the drawings, not the reduced size serving the valve or equipment. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.

V. Install expansion loops, expansion joints, anchors, and pipe alignment guides as specified in Division 23, Section 230516, "Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping."

W. Identify piping as specified in Division 23, Section 230550, "Identification for Piping and Equipment."

X. Test plugs in insulated piping shall have stem length as determined by insulation thickness.

Y. Tee water piping runouts or branches into the side of mains or other branches. Where possible, do not use bull-head tees, which are two lines flowing into opposite ends of a tee and exiting out the common side.

Z. Dielectric fittings shall be used at piping connections between copper and dissimilar metals at equipment or piping to protect from galvanic corrosion. Where dissimilar piping materials are separated by dielectric fittings the separation shall include isolation of pipe hangers by insulation, plastic coated hangers or support from a nonconductive structure.

3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Seismic restraints are specified in Division 23, Section 230548, "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or

longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,

supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.


July 31, 2015 232100- 20

5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe.

6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from scratching pipe.

C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, seven feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, seven feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, nine feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.

D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, five feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, six feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, eight feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, eight feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, nine feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.

E. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors.

3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION





E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:



July 31, 2015 232100- 21

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.

3. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. 4. Make up joints so only three threads show.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten flange bolts in accordance with gasket manufacturer’s recommendations. Use full face gaskets and flat face flanges when connecting to equipment or valves with cast iron flat face flanges.

I. Pressure-Sealed Joint: Use manufacturer-recommended tool and procedure. Leave insertion marks on pipe after assembly.

J. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with coupling and gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Cut or roll grooves in ends of pipe based on pipe and coupling manufacturer's written instructions for pipe wall thickness. Use grooved-end fittings and rigid, grooved-end-pipe couplings.

K. Flexible Connectors: The piping gap shall be equal to the length of the expansion joint under pressure. Control rods passing through 1/2” thick Neoprene washer bushings large enough to take the thrust at 1000 psi of surface area may be used on unanchored piping where the manufacturer determines the condition exceeds the expansion joint rating without them. All flexible connectors shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut off valves.

3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION

A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

B. Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only. Manual vents at heat-transfer coils and elsewhere as required for air venting.

C. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a two percent upward slope toward tank.

D. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and larger.

E. Install tangential air separator in pump suction. Install blowdown piping with gate or full-port ball valve; extend full size to nearest floor drain.

F. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above the floor. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4 bypass line, from main with full-size, full-port, ball valve in the main between bypass connections. Install NPS 3/4 pipe from chemical feeder drain, to nearest equipment drain and include a full-size, full-port, ball valve.


July 31, 2015 232100- 22

G. Install expansion tanks on the floor. Vent and purge air from hydronic system, and ensure tank is properly charged with air to suit system Project requirements.

3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections.

B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.

C. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according to Division 23, Section 230519, "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."

3.8 SYSTEM CLEANING

A. Fill system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Circulate solution for a minimum of 24 hours, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water.

B. Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first year of operation.

C. Fill systems indicated to have antifreeze or glycol solutions with the following concentrations indicated on drawings.

D. Preparation of Piping Systems:

1. System shall be operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Use water meter to record capacity in each system. Record capacity and include in Operation and Maintenance manuals.

2. Make temporary piping connections; furnish temporary pumps, and temporary bypass filter as required to properly accomplish all cleaning operations.

3. Place all manual and control valves serving coil banks and terminal control units in open position during cleaning so that circulation through the mains and runouts is obtained during cleaning.

E. Piping System Cleaning Sequence: The services of a chemical treatment specialist shall be used for procedure and chemical selection.

1. Qualified Contractors: Ashland Specialty Chemical, Garratt Callahan and the Nalco Company.

a. Company shall only utilize qualified personnel active in the field of water treatment who are factory trained or authorized.

b. A single water treatment company for undivided responsibility shall perform startup, system check, water samples, analysis, cleaning, flushing, and testing.

2. Initial Flush, All Systems:

a. Completely fill the system with fresh water and circulate (1st filling).


July 31, 2015 232100- 23

b. Initial flushing shall be sufficient to remove all contaminants such as cuttings, filings, loose rust & scale, welding and soldering residue and debris.

c. Drain the entire system, including dead legs, and refill with fresh water (2nd filling).

3. Open Systems (Cooling Towers and Fluid Coolers):

a. Add cleaner per manufacturer’s recommendation. b. Circulate 24 hours. c. Drain and flush system including dead legs. d. Refill with fresh water and immediately start chemical treatment program.

4. Closed Systems:

a. Add the recommended dosage of cleaning solution to the system, circulate and bring up to the recommended temperature.

b. Test solution for proper concentration and document results. c. Circulate the solution for the time recommended by the manufacturer (4 hours

minimum and not to exceed the manufacturer’s maximum limit). d. Partially close and reopen all manual valves several times. e. Operate all automatic valves through several cycles. f. Completely drain the entire system. g. Fresh Water Flush: Refill the system with fresh water (3rd filling). Then, with

circulation pump running:

1) Open one or more drains as far downstream from the fill point as is possible. Be sure the makeup is sufficient to keep up with the drain so as to maintain a full system.

2) Partially close and reopen all manual valves several times. 3) Blowdown all strainer, dead legs and low points in the system. 4) Operate all automatic valves through several cycles. 5) Continue to flush the system in this manner until the drain water is of the

same clarity as the makeup water and testing reveals no further traces of cleaning solution (minimum one hour). Document the results.

h. Following the fresh water flush, drain the entire system:

1) Clean all strainers. 2) Remove all startup strainers. 3) Drain all dead legs.

i. Fill System (Non-Glycol Systems): Within two hours of draining the system refill with fresh water and immediately start chemical treatment program. Chemical treatment must start within two hours of filling the system with water.

j. Fill System (Glycol Systems):

1) Fill system with specified glycol, water and chemicals. 2) Glycol solution MUST BE ADDED WITHIN TWO HOURS after final

draining of the system. 3) The cleaning firm shall, upon completion of filling system with glycol

solution, tag each system so that tag is plainly visible as follows:


July 31, 2015 232100- 24

“CAUTION THIS SYSTEM HAS BEEN “CHARGED” WITH GLYCOL. DO NOT DILUTE SYSTEM WITH WATER OR DRAIN SYSTEM WITHOUT AUTHORIZATION.”


A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:

1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test

pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace

strainer screens. 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be

capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment.

5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.

B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:

1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used.

2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.

3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Provide temporary valving or cap piping at connections to existing systems as required to

confine testing to the new piping systems. 5. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the

system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping."

6. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. System must be proven to hold pressure for two hours.

7. Prepare written report of testing.

C. Perform the following before operating the system:

1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating

freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.


July 31, 2015 232100- 25

6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to specified values.

7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.

3.10 COMMISSIONING





Spokane Transit Authority Section 232123 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Hydronic Pumps

July 31, 2015 232123 - 1

SECTION 232123 - HYDRONIC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Close-coupled, in-line centrifugal pumps.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber.

B. EPT: Ethylene propylene terpolymer.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point on curves.

B. Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation and maintenance manuals.

D. Submittals shall be approved prior to shipping from factory.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hydronic pumps through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of hydronic pumps and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."


July 31, 2015 232123 - 2

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.


A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing. Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with screwed-in plugs.

B. Store pumps in dry location.

C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.

D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign matter.

E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Mechanical Seals: One mechanical seal(s) for each pump.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Motors shall be matched to pump for non-overloading service at the design impeller diameter and full speed in variable speed applications.

B. Motor size shall be as scheduled.

2.2 CLOSE-COUPLED, IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong Pumps Inc.


July 31, 2015 232123 - 3

2. Bell & Gossett; Div. of ITT Industries. 3. Grundfos Pumps Corporation. 4. Taco, Inc.

B. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, centrifugal, close-coupled, in-line pump; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts mounted horizontally or vertically. Rate pump for 150-psig minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225°F.

C. Pump Construction: Ductile Iron required for 200 psig rating.

1. Casing: Radially split, cast iron, OR ductile iron with threaded gage tappings at inlet and outlet, and threaded companion-flange connections.

2. Impeller: ASTM B 584, cast bronze; statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured with a locking cap screw. Trim impeller to match specified performance. Contractor shall provide pump impellor to supplier for re-trimming or replacement for system balancing

3. Pump Shaft: Steel, with copper-alloy shaft sleeve or Stainless steel. 4. Mechanical Seal: Carbon rotating ring against a ceramic seat held by a stainless-steel

spring, and secondary seal bellows and gasket. Include water slinger on shaft between motor and seal. Provide ni-resist seal ring for 225°F operation, tungsten carbide seal ring for 225°F operation.

5. Packing Seal: Stuffing box, with a minimum of four rings of graphite-impregnated braided yarn with bronze lantern ring between center two graphite rings, and bronze packing gland.

D. Motor: Single speed, with ball bearings, unless otherwise indicated; and rigidly mounted to pump casing. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before pump installation.

C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to be installed.


3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION

A. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors, impellers, couplings, and accessories.


July 31, 2015 232123 - 4

B. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.

C. Suspend vertically mounted, in-line centrifugal pumps independent of piping. Install pumps with motor and pump shafts vertical. Use continuous-thread hanger rods and elastomeric hangers of sufficient size to support pump weight. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Division 21 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Fire-Suppression Piping and Equipment." Hanger and support materials are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment/Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

D. Pipe-supported Pumps: Install pumps in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and use pipe hangers or other supports at proper intervals to provide complete piping support near the pump. Both suction and discharge piping shall be independently supported and properly aligned so that no strain is transmitted to the pump when flange bolts are tightened.

E. Balancing: After system balancing re-trim impellor or replace if required to optimize balance of system and reduce operating horse-power.

3.3 CONNECTIONS


B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to pumps.

D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump nozzles.

E. Install non-slam type spring check valve and shut-off valve on discharge side of pumps.

F. Install shutoff valve on suction side of pumps on pumps with 3” and larger suction connection. Install shutoff valve on discharge of all pumps.

G. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge, at integral pressure-gage tapping, or install single gage with multiple input selector valve.

H. Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit discharge.

I. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.

J. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

K. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


July 31, 2015 232123 - 5

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Check piping connections for tightness. 3. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:

a. Verify bearing lubrication. b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot liquid is

free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.

c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.

4. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump for operation.

5. Start motor. 6. Open discharge valve slowly.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

3.6 COMMISSIONING





Spokane Transit Authority Section 233100 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Metal Ducts and Casings

July 31, 2015 233100 - 1

SECTION 233100 - METAL DUCTS AND CASINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes metal ducts for supply, return, outside, and exhaust air-distribution systems in pressure classes from minus 2- to plus 10-inch wg and metal casings. Metal ducts include the following:

1. Rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall, round, and flat-oval spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings. 3. Double-wall, round, and flat-oval spiral-seam ducts and formed fittings. 4. Duct liner. 5. Turning vanes.


1. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, and flexible ducts.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

B. NUSIG: National Uniform Seismic Installation Guidelines.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Duct system design, as indicated, has been used to select size and type of air-moving and distribution equipment and other air system components. Changes to layout or configuration of duct system must be specifically approved in writing by Architect. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that proposed layout will provide original design results without increasing system total pressure.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop standard for ductwork construction utilized on this project. Include proposed duct gage, reinforcement interval, seam and joint construction for all sizes and pressure classes of


July 31, 2015 233100 - 2

rectangular, round, and oval ductwork. Submit construction standard for all plenums and fittings.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal ducts.

1. Required in the following areas: At central station air handling equipment, in mechanical rooms, and main distribution ductwork.

2. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work.

3. Duct layout indicating sizes and pressure classes. 4. Elevations of top and bottom of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Duct accessories, including access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment, vibration

isolation, and seismic restraints.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Other systems installed in same space as ducts. 3. Ceiling- and wall-mounting access doors and panels required to provide access to

dampers and other operating devices. 4. Ceiling-mounting items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,

sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

D. Submit Welding Procedure Specification, Procedure Qualification Test Record, and Welder and Welding Operator Qualification Test Record.



A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," for hangers and supports, AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum," for aluminum supporting members, and AWS D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

B. NFPA Compliance:

1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." 2. NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

C. Duct Protection, Cleaning, and Cleanliness Testing: Comply with requirements in Part 3 of this specification for protection, cleaning, and cleanliness testing of ductwork.


July 31, 2015 233100 - 3

D. Comply with NFPA 96, "Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations," Ch. 3, "Duct System," for range hood ducts, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS –DUCTWORK AND PLENUMS

A. Construction: Primary air duct construction, fittings, reinforcements, pressure and seal classifications and metal gauges shall conform to SMACNA HVAC/DCS, 2005 Edition including Addendum No. 1, 2005 SMACNA Duct Construction Standards and NFPA90A unless noted otherwise.

B. Ducts and accessories shall not pulsate or vibrate when in operation.

C. Test Ports: Provide instrument test holes with screw cap and gasket. Instrument test holes shall be attached to ducts and plenums with bolts. Seal around bolt head with duct sealant. Provide gasket to fit duct shape (rectangular or round) as needed. Provide all such test holes in ducts with instrument adapter as required for static pressure readings; exact location to be coordinated with air balancing contractor.

1. Manufacturer: Ventfabrics No. 699

D. Stuffing Boxes: Provide airtight stuffing boxes at all penetrations for instrumentation, such as sensors, thermostats, thermometers, pipes, etc.; use rubber grommets or U-channel rubber extrusions to create airtight seal.

1. Manufacturer: “Rubbercraft”.

E. At connections to building construction, use steel angles fastened to the sheet metal by sheet metal screws, attached using anchor bolts embedded in the wall or slab, with sealant under the angle, angles 2"x2"x3/16" minimum.

2.2 SHEETMETAL DUCTWORK

A. General: All ductwork shall be of sheet metal construction.

B. Pressure and Seal Classification: Unless otherwise indicated, construct ducts according to the following:

1. Supply ducts from outlet of air handlers and fans to terminal units: +6-in wg. Seal Class A.

2. Supply ducts downstream of terminal units: +1-in wg Seal Class A. 3. Return ducts: Negative 2-in wg, except ductwork from last volume damper to grille may

be negative 1-in wg. Seal class A. 4. Exhaust ducts: Negative 1-in wg. Seal Class A. 5. Any ductwork upstream of any fire, smoke or combination fire/smoke damper conveying

more than half of the total terminal airflow: +4-in wg. Seal Class A.

C. Material schedule: All ducts shall be galvanized steel unless otherwise specified.


July 31, 2015 233100 - 4

D. Galvanized Steel: Steel sheets, G-60 zinc-coated (galvanized) or zinc-iron alloy coated (galvannealed) by the hot dip process, conforming ASTM A653 unless noted otherwise.

E. Flat oval ductwork is not permitted on exhaust or return systems.

F. Pressure classes refer to both positive and negative ducts in absolute numbers unless noted otherwise.

G. Round or Oval Elbow Construction: Round or oval segmented or mitered elbows shall be minimum 3-gore for 45, 4-gore for 60, and 5-gore for 90. Adjustable round elbows are not permitted.

H. Bellmouth transitions shall be used on connections to air handling units and plenums.

I. Rectangular Elbows shall be radius or short radius with vanes, type RE 1 and RE 3 in the SMACNA manual. Mitered elbows with turning vanes and other types shall not be used, use short radius elbows with vanes where space is limited. Construct vanes per pages 4.5 and 4.6 (Figures 4-3 and 4-4) of the SMACNA manual.

J. Turning vanes for rectangular elbows:

1. Turning vanes shall be welded to runners at velocities exceeding 2,500 fpm. 2. All sheet metal duct pressure classes and velocities: Airfoil Turning Vane is acceptable.

Non-adjustable, double wall 26-gauge hot dipped galvanized steel, true airfoil type air turning vanes at square duct elbows. Factory runner, 24-gauge, with vanes 2.4”o.c. Available Manufacturer: “Aero Dyne Company”, Model HEP.

3. 2” wg. Pressure Class ducts or lower with velocities at or below 1500 fpm: 2” single width vanes, spaced 1.5”o.c. may be used when spanned lengths are 36” or less. Non-adjustable, single wall 24-gauge vane per SMACNA Fig. 4-3 & 4-4. Rail shall be 24-gauge. Available Manufacturer: “Duro Dyne”, “Ductmate” Monorail.

4. 3” wg. Pressure Class or higher ducts at any velocity and where duct velocities in any pressure class exceed 1500 fpm: 2” double width vanes, spaced 2.125”o.c. shall be used when spanned lengths are 48” or less. This vane is acceptable at lower pressure classes and velocities. Non-adjustable, double wall 26-gauge vane per SMACNA Fig. 4-3 & 4-4. The 22-gauge vane runner shall be of the tabbed style and shall have bent, or winged tabs. Straight tabs are not permitted. Available Manufacturer: “C.L. Ward & Family Inc.” Turning Vane and Speedy Rail, “Ductmate” Turning Vane and PROrail.

5. 3” wg. Pressure Class or higher ducts at any velocity and where duct velocities in any pressure class exceed 1500 fpm: 4.5” double width vanes, spaced 3.25”o.c. may be used when spanned lengths are 72” or less. Provide tie-rods for spans in excess of 72”. This vane is acceptable at lower pressure classes and velocities. Non-adjustable, double wall 24-gauge vane per SMACNA Fig. Fig. 4-3 & 4-4. Vane runner shall be of the tabbed style and shall have bent, or winged tabs. Straight tabs are not permitted. Available Manufacturer: “C.L. Ward & Family Inc.” Turning Vane and Speedy Rail, “Ductmate” PROrail.

K. Seams: All seams shall conform to SMACNA standards for the corresponding pressure and seal class and to the requirements in this specification.

1. Round and oval duct seams shall be spiral seam or continuous butt weld construction only.


July 31, 2015 233100 - 5

2. Rectangular seams for 3-in wg pressure class or higher shall be SMACNA L-1 Pittsburgh Lock or continuous butt weld only.

3. Rectangular seams for 2-in wg pressure class or lower shall be continuous butt weld, SMACNA L-1 Pittsburgh Lock, or SMACNA L-2 Button Punch Snap Lock.

4. Do not use standing seams for ducts other than plenums

L. Joints: All joints shall conform to SMACNA standards for the corresponding pressure and seal class and to the requirements in this specification.

M. Rectangular Joints: Provide prefabricated slide-on transverse duct connectors and components. Install per manufacturer guidelines for sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement(s). Formed-on SMACNA flanges T-25a (T.D.C.) or T-25b (T.D.F.) will not be accepted.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. “Ductmate Industries” 25, 35, and 45 b. “Nexus” G and J c. “W.D.C.I.” J and H

2. Rectangular joints for 2-in wg pressure class or lower may also be SMACNA

a. T-24 flanged with gasket b. T-1 Drive Slip with T-5, T-6, T-10, T-11, or T-12 S Slip

N. Round Joints: Factory fabricated transverse spiral and round duct joints conforming to SMACNA standards RT-1 through RT-6 are acceptable for ducts 20” in diameter and under. Prefabricated connectors for duct joints are permitted as noted below. Install per manufacturer guidelines for sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement(s).

1. 3”-14” Diameter: Install duct with a one piece round duct connector that includes a polyethylene gasket liner and single bolt closure. “Ductmate Industries” Quick-Sleeve Round Duct Connector, “Ward Industries” Quick Connect Model QCC (up to 12” only), or approved equal.

2. 6”-60” Diameter: Install duct with a one-piece round duct connector that includes a polyethylene gasket on each side of the connector and a single bolt closure that expands the connector to the interior of the round duct. “Ductmate Industries” Bullet Band Connector or approved equal.

3. 14”-72” Diameter: Install duct using a three-piece, gasket flanged joint consisting of two internal flanges, with integral mastic sealant and one external closure band, which compresses the gasket between the internal flanges. “Ductmate Industries” Spiralmate or approved equal.

O. Flat Oval Joints: Factory fabricated transverse flat oval duct joints conforming to SMACNA standards are acceptable for ducts with a major axis of 20” or under. Prefabricated connectors for duct joints are permitted as noted below. Install per manufacturer guidelines for sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcement(s).

1. Roll formed minor axis (semicircular) flanges with integral sealant. Straight roll-formed flange with integral sealant cut to length for major axis sizes. Precision stamped


July 31, 2015 233100 - 6

connector pieces. Extruded Butyl or Neoprene gasket applied to the face of the mating flanges and screw-type cleats at manufacturer-specified intervals around perimeter of the connection. Approved manufacturers: “Ductmate Industries” Ovalmate Flat Oval Duct Connection System.

P. See Duct Fitting Requirements detail on drawings for acceptable configurations for offsets, transitions, and take-offs.

Q. Diagonal Creasing for ducts 3-in wg or lower: Provide on all panels wider than 18". At Contractor's option, in place of diagonal creasing required for panels wider than 18", all such panels may have machine-formed transverse ribbed stiffening on 12" centers, provided such stiffening accomplishes stiffness and freedom from buckling or breathing, and does not lessen airtightness at seams and joints.

R. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless

steel, or aluminum sheets.

S. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Characteristics: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use O.

T. Gaskets in Flanged Ducts: Use soft neoprene or extruded butyl.

U. Safety Relief Access Doors: Provide positive and/or negative pressure safety relief access doors in ducts to prevent blowout or duct collapse. Provide at locations indicated on the drawings.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer: United McGill Airflow Corporation ARR or ASR or approved SMACNA design.

2.3 SHEETMETAL MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel: Steel sheets, G-60 zinc-coated (galvanized) or zinc-iron alloy coated (galvannealed) by the hot dip process, conforming ASTM A653 unless noted otherwise.


July 31, 2015 233100 - 7

2.4 CASING AND PLENUMS

A. Sheet metal for casings and plenums less than 10 feet height or width shall be 18-gauge galvanized steel. Casings and plenums 10 feet or greater width or height shall be 16-gauge. Provide continuous 2"x2"x3/16" steel angle framing on 18" centers to support the sheet metal work. Fasten lapped type seams to framing on 4" centers or standing type seams to framing on 12" centers. Provide supplementary continuous 2"x2"x3/16" steel angle bracing on horizontal surfaces to prevent deformation under system operating and "upset" pressures. Fasten sheet metal to backup angle framing and bracing with No. 8 minimum size hardened steel sheet metal screws.

B. In coil sections, humidifier sections, and outdoor intake plenums or ducts, sheet metal shall be G90 coated galvanized steel unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.

C. Where system pressures may exceed the capabilities of the construction noted above, notify the A/E prior to fabrication. Casings and plenums shall be constructed to withstand not less than 133% of the rated pressure without structural failure. Wall and roof deflections at the rated pressure shall not exceed 1/8" per foot of width.

D. Pipe penetrations of casings and plenums shall be sealed to prevent air leakage and condensation movement through the seal.

E. Joint Sealant: Fire retardant, high bonding type sealer, UL723/E84, Class I flame spread rating. Adhesive-backed cloth or metallic furnace tape will not be acceptable.

2.5 RECTANGULAR DUCT LINER

A. Provide at locations shown on drawings.

B. Fibrous-Glass Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with NAIMA AH124.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; Insulation Group “Ultra-Lite” b. Johns Manville International, Inc “Linacoustic” c. Knauf Fiber Glass GmbH., “Liner-M” d. Pittsburg Plate Glass "Textrafine" e. Owens Corning “Aeroflex”

2. Acoustical Properties: The material shall be tested by an independent testing laboratory to determine the sound absorption coefficient in accordance with ASTM C423 using Type A mounting. The sound absorption coefficients shall meet or exceed the following values:

Octave Band Center Frequency Hz

Thickness 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 1" 0.13 0.45 0.45 0.65 0.74 0.90 2" 0.25 0.73 0.94 0.95 0.95 0.95


July 31, 2015 233100 - 8

3. Materials: ASTM C 1071; surfaces exposed to airstream shall be coated to prevent erosion of glass fibers.

a. Thickness: 1 inch. b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.26 at 75 deg F mean temperature. c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-

developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84. d. Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. e. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel suitable for adhesive attachment,

mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in duct.

1) Tensile Strength: Indefinitely sustain a 50-lb- tensile, dead-load test perpendicular to duct wall.

2) Fastener Pin Length: As required for thickness of insulation and without projecting more than 1/8 inch into airstream.

3) Adhesive for Attaching Mechanical Fasteners: Comply with fire-hazard classification of duct liner system.

C. Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.


a. Aeroflex USA Inc.; Aerocell EDPM b. Armacell; AP/Armaflex SA Duct Liner. c. K-Flex USA; Duct Liner Grey.

2. Acoustical Properties: The material shall be tested by an independent testing laboratory to determine the sound absorption coefficient in accordance with ASTM C 423 with ASTM E 795 Type A mounting. The sound absorption coefficients shall meet or exceed the following values:

Octave Band Center Frequency Hz

Thickness 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 1" 0.00 0.08 0.32 0.55 0.23 0.21

3. Materials: Unicellular polyethylene thermal plastic, preformed sheet insulation complying with ASTM C 534, Type II, except for density.

a. Thickness: 1 inch. b. Thermal Conductivity (k-Value): 0.24 at 75 deg F mean temperature. c. Fire-Hazard Classification: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-

developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM C 411. d. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with

NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B.

2.6 ROUND DUCT LINER

A. Provide at locations shown on drawings.


July 31, 2015 233100 - 9

B. General: Comply with applicable requirements of acoustical lining for rectangular ductwork. Do not line underground round ducts.

C. Acoustical Lining: 1" thickness unless otherwise shown. Increase duct dimension for lining. Liner shall be suitable for continuous operation at 4,000 fpm velocity with erosion and shall conform to UL 723, resistant requirements of NFPA Pamphlet No. 90 and Uniform Mechanical Code. The "R" value shall be 4.3 when tested in accordance with ASTM C518 at 75°F mean temperature.

D. Manufacturer: Manville "Spiracoustic" or approved equal.

E. Acoustical Properties: The material shall met or exceed the following values using Type "A" mounting in accordance with ASTM C423-81.

Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) Thickness 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 NRC 1" .13 .28 .64 .88 .97 1.01 .70

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Coordination Drawings: Sheet metal duct installation shall be coordinated with other trades prior to installation in order to avoid conflict with the following other building elements:

1. Ceiling suspension assembly members. 2. Systems installed in same space as ducts (piping, electrical conduits, equipment, etc.). 3. Ceiling- and wall-mounting access doors and panels required to provide access to

dampers and other operating devices. 4. Ceiling-mounting items, including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,

sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.

B. Fabricate and install ductwork and accessories in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible.

1. Drawings show the general layout of ductwork and accessories but do not show all required fittings and offsets that may be necessary to connect ducts to equipment, terminal units, diffusers, grilles, etc., and to coordinate with other trades. Fabricate ductwork based on field measurements. Provide necessary fittings and offsets at no additional cost to the owner. Coordinate with other trades for space available and relative location of HVAC equipment and accessories on ceiling grid. Duct sizes on the drawings are inside dimensions, which shall be altered by the contractor to other dimensions with the same air handling characteristics (not less than same free area and pressure drop) where necessary to avoid interferences and clearance difficulties.

2. Comply with the requirements of Section 230500, "Transitions and Offsets Beyond the Scope of Work".

C. Provide Duct transitions, offsets and connections to dampers, coils, and other equipment in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible and with Duct Fitting Requirements detail on drawings.


July 31, 2015 233100 - 10

1. When an obstruction cannot be avoided and must be taken in by the duct, comply with SMACNA “Obstructions". Repair galvanized areas with galvanizing repair compound.

2. Construct casings, plenums, eliminators, and pipe penetrations in accordance with SMACNA Standards, Install plenum access doors to swing against air pressure so that pressure helps to maintain a tight seal.

D. Install round and flat-oval ducts in lengths not less than 12 feet unless interrupted by fittings.

E. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

F. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets, where required for balancing, and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fabricated fittings for changes in directions, size, and shape and for connections.

H. Install couplings tight to duct wall surface with a minimum of projections into duct. Secure couplings with sheet metal screws. Install screws at intervals of 12 inches, with a minimum of 3 screws in each coupling.

I. Install ducts, unless otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally and parallel and perpendicular to building lines; avoid diagonal runs.

J. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

K. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

L. Conceal ducts from view in finished spaces. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions unless specifically indicated.

M. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, fire- and smoke-control dampers, lighting layouts, and similar finished work.

N. Seal all joints and seams. Apply sealant to male end connectors before insertion, and afterward to cover entire joint and sheet metal screws.

O. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

P. Non-Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, conceal spaces between construction openings and ducts or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as ducts. Overlap openings on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

Q. Fire-Rated Partition Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, install appropriately rated fire dampers, sleeves, and firestopping sealant. Fire and smoke dampers are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." Firestopping materials and installation methods are specified in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping."

R. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to withstand, without damage to equipment, seismic force required by applicable building codes.


July 31, 2015 233100 - 11

S. Paint interiors of metal ducts that do not have duct liner, for 24 inches upstream of registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex finish coat over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.

T. New Ductwork Protection and Cleaning:

1. Each piece of shop-fabricated ductwork shall be cleaned of contaminants and oil residue, wiped down with alcohol on the inside, and then sealed with visqueen or “Ductcap Products Inc” caps before being sent to the job site.

2. Each piece of field-fabricated ductwork shall be cleaned of contaminants and oil residue and wiped down with alcohol on the inside. It shall then either be promptly installed or sealed with visqueen or “Ductcap Products Inc” caps and stored.

3. All ductwork stored on the jobsite shall remain sealed until it is installed. Unsealed sections of ductwork shall not be permitted to be stored or lying about the jobsite.

4. All ductwork shall be protected from moisture at all times. 5. All ends of installed ductwork shall be sealed with visqueen or “Ductcap Products Inc”

caps at the end of each work day.

U. Existing Ductwork Protection and Cleanliness Evaluation:

1. All ends of existing ductwork that are exposed after demolition shall be sealed with visqueen at the end of each work day.

2. Notify A/E when the majority of existing ductwork demolition has been completed and remaining existing ductwork is available for evaluation. The Owner or their designated representative will evaluate the cleanliness of the existing ductwork. The Owner may then elect to hire a contractor to clean the existing ductwork before connections are made to the new system.

V. Ductwork Cleanliness Testing:

1. The Owner or their designated representative will visually observe the metal ducts for oil residue and contaminants. Where contaminants are discovered visually or by a white-glove test, the contractor is responsible fore re-cleaning the ductwork before re-evaluation. Notify A/E when the majority of new ductwork has been installed, but before terminal units are connected and again before flexible ducts and diffusers are connected.

3.2 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. Seal duct seams and joints according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for duct pressure and seal class indicated in Part 2 of this specification section.

B. Seal ducts before external insulation is applied.

C. Adhesive-backed cloth or metallic furnace tape will not be acceptable.


July 31, 2015 233100 - 12

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors according to Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF SOUND LINER IN DUCTS

A. Round Liner Fastening: Liner shall slip into interior of sheet metal round duct in sections; finish with male/female slip-joints for strong, snug connections between sections.

B. Rectangular Fiberglass Liner:

1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

3. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive. 4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-

edge overlapping. 5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,

unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.

6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm. 7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not

exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:

a. Fan discharges. b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than

2500 fpm or where indicated.

C. Closed-Cell Elastomeric Foam Liner:

1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

3. Butt transverse joints without gaps and coat joint with adhesive. 4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted-

edge overlapping. 5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,

unless duct size and standard liner product dimensions make longitudinal joints necessary.


July 31, 2015 233100 - 13

6. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners four inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely; at three inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

7. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:

a. Fan discharges. b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are greater than

2500 fpm (12.7 m/s) or where indicated.

8. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.


A. Air Supply and Distribution Systems: The air supply and distribution system and its components shall be given an operational test.

B. Leakage Testing of Ductwork: Perform the following field test(s) and inspections according to SMACNA "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual", prepare test reports, and submit for approval.

3.6 COMMISSIONING





Spokane Transit Authority Section 233300 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Air Duct Accessories

July 31, 2015 233300- 1

SECTION 233300 – AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Volume dampers. 3. Motorized dampers. 4. Duct-mounted access doors. 5. Casing and Plenum access doors. 6. Flexible connectors. 7. Flexible ducts.


1. Division 23, Section 230900, "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for electric and pneumatic damper actuators.

2. Division 23, Section 233100 “Metal Ducts and Casings” for test ports, stuffing boxes, turning vanes, joint sealant, and safety relief access doors.

3. Division 28, Section 283111, "Fire Detection and Alarm" for duct-mounting fire and smoke detectors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit for the following:

1. Backdraft dampers. 2. Volume dampers. 3. Motorized dampers. 4. Duct-mounted access doors. 5. Casing and plenum access doors. 6. Flexible connectors. 7. Flexible ducts.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.


July 31, 2015 233300- 2

1. Manual volume damper installations. 2. Motorized dampers installation including actuator location and accessibility. 3. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, and combination fire and smoke damper installations,

including sleeves and duct-mounting access doors. 4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounting items. Show ceiling-mounting access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A. Basis of Design: Ruskin Model CBD6.

B. Alternate Manufacturers:

1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating. 3. Greenheck.

C. Description: Multiple-blade, low-leakage, parallel action gravity balanced, with blades of maximum six-inch width, with sealed edges, assembled in rattle-free manner with 90-degree stop, molded synthetic bearings, and axles; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. Counterbalances shall be on rear of blades for weather resistance.

D. Frame: 0.125-inch- thick extruded aluminum, with welded corners.

E. Blades: 0.070-inch- thick aluminum sheet with ½” tie bar linkage

F. Blade Seals: Extruded vinyl.

G. Return Spring: Adjustable tension.

H. Performance: Damper shall withstand a 3” water gauge pressure differential. Maximum leakage shall be 17.5 cfm/sf or less measured on 24” wide damper at a 1” w.g. differential pressure. Blade shall fully open at 0.05” w.g. Damper pressure drop shall be less than 0.1” w.g. at 1200 fpm.


July 31, 2015 233300- 3

2.2 VOLUME DAMPERS

A. General Description: All volume dampers shall be factory fabricated with hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability and include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Dampers shall be free from any sharp edges that would produce excessive turbulence. Dampers must be rated for the service pressure drop, velocity, and temperature.

B. Damper and Accessory Material: Same as metal duct.

C. Single Blade Volume Dampers:

1. Permitted only for rectangular ducts up to 36” wide and 12” high or round ducts up to 12” diameter.

2. Use the Opposed-Blade dampers, orifice plates, or a high-pressure drop fitting in lieu of this damper for higher velocity and pressure-drop applications (for example, upstream of a terminal box that is close to the fan).

3. Rated for velocities up to 1500 fpm and pressure drops across damper of 1 in. wg. or less. 4. Damper blade shall be minimum 22 gauge steel and shall be as close to full size as

possible without binding. Both leading and leaving edges hemmed; side edges flanged 1/2"; placed so air strikes the smooth face.

5. Damper shaft shall be minimum 3/8” square rod. Shafts shall be full length. 6. Frame shall be min. 20 gauge steel channels with mitered and welded corners. 7. Basis of Design: McGill AirFlow Corporation Models UVC8 and UVC9. 8. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Young Regulator Company

D. Rectangular and Square Opposed-Blade Volume Dampers:

1. Provide for rectangular ducts over 36” wide or 12” high or round ducts over 12” diameter and where specifically designated on the drawings.

a. May be used in place of single blade volume dampers at contractor’s option. b. Rated for velocities up to 2000 fpm and pressure drops across damper of 2 in. wg.

or less. c. Damper must be rated for the service pressure drop, velocity, and temperature.

2. Round ducts shall be provided with transitions into and out of the square damper assembly.

3. Damper blades shall be minimum 16 gauge galvanized steel. Both leading and leaving edges hemmed; side edges flanged 1/2"; placed so air strikes the smooth face.

4. Damper shafts shall be minimum 1/2” square rod. Shafts shall be full length. 5. Frames shall be min. 16 gauge galvanized steel structural or formed channels with

mitered and welded corners. 6. Basis of Design: McGill AirFlow Corporation Model UVC21. 7. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. Greenheck Model VCD-18 b. Young Regulator Company


July 31, 2015 233300- 4

E. Bearings:

1. Provide end bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

2. Bearings shall be molded synthetic, oil-impregnated bronze, Zytel, or stainless steel. 3. Basis of Design: Ventfabrics HiVel Ventlok. 4. Alternate Manufacturers:


F. Quadrants:

1. Provided with a dial regulator, heavy gauge handle, and locking nut. Size to match shaft size.

2. Provide elevated stand-off for use on all externally insulated ductwork. 3. Basis of Design: Ventfabrics Ventline Quadrant. 4. Alternate Manufacturers:


G. Quadrants for Dampers in Ducts Concealed Behind Walls and Above Non-Removable Ceilings:

1. Direct Controlled Dampers: Where possible, use direct controlled dampers. Damper regulator shall be cast into a box for flush mounting in ceilings. Cover telescopes into base to allow for expansion. Cover shall be secured by two screws to facilitate removal for adjustment of the damper. The regulator shall be made to accommodate 3/8" and 1/2" square rod.

a. Basis of Design: Young Regulator No. 301 b. Alternate Manufacturers:

1) Ventfabrics No. 666 2) Ruskin 3) Nailor

2. Cable Controlled Dampers: Balancing dampers in ducts concealed behind walls and non-removable ceilings shall be provided with cable-controls if access to the regulator cannot be immediately adjacent to the damper. Damper controller and cable shall be concealed above the ceiling. Cable shall consist of Bowden cable 0.054" stainless steel control wire encapsulated in 1/16" flexible galvanized spiral wire sheath. Control kit shall consist of 2-5/8" diameter die cast aluminum housing with three-inch diameter cover, and 14-gauge steel rack and pinion gear drive converting rotary motion to push-pull motion. Control kit shall be imbedded in the ceiling flush with the finished surface. Control kit shall be manually operated with a wrench.

a. Basis of Design: Young Regulator Model 270-301 control kit and Model 030-12 wrench.

b. Alternate Manufacturers:

1) Ventfabrics.


July 31, 2015 233300- 5

2.3 MOTORIZED DAMPERS

A. Control Dampers: AMCA-rated, opposed blade design; 0.125-inch minimum thick, extruded-aluminum frames with holes for duct mounting; damper blades shall be heavy gage extruded aluminum, airfoil type, with maximum blade width of 6 inches and length of 48 inches.

1. Secure blades to 1/2-inch diameter, zinc-plated axles using zinc-plated hardware, blade-linkage hardware of zinc-plated steel and brass, ends sealed against molded synthetic blade bearings.

2. Operating Temperature Range: From minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 3. Edge Seals, Low-Leakage: Use inflatable blade edging or replaceable rubber blade seals

and spring-loaded stainless-steel side seals, rated for leakage at less than 8 cfm per sq. ft. of damper area at differential pressure of four inch w.g. and a maximum of 3 cfm per sqft at one inch w.g. when tested according to AMCA 500D.

B. Large damper assemblies shall be made of individually driven segments that are small enough to ensure reliable operation and uniform closure across the entire damper assembly. Actuators shall be operated independently so that if one damper segment or actuator becomes inoperable, the others remain operable (provide multiple end switches wired together so if a section fails, end switch will acknowledge). Jack shafts and linkages should not be necessary and can only be used if approved by Owner.

C. See the failure mode section above for actuator responses under failure due to loss of power, loss of control air, or loss of communication. Where an actuator is to fail open or fail closed, provide spring return. Actuators shall not be dependent on batteries or capacitors to stroke to the power fail position upon loss of power.

D. Permanently stamp or scribe position indication on the end of driven shaft unless damper is visible from same location as end of shaft.

E. Actuators: See Section 230900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS.

F. Manufacturer: Ruskin, American Warming and Ventilation or approved equal dampers.

1. Control damper - Ruskin Industries Model CD50.

2.4 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS

A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

B. Rectangular Duct Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.

1. Basis of Design: Ductmate Industries, Inc. “Square Framed Access Doors, Hinged and Cammed Model”.


a. Air Balance Inc. “Series FSA” b. Greenheck


July 31, 2015 233300- 6

c. McGill AirFlow Corporation Model ARB d. Ruskin “SMACNA Standard”

3. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 4. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:

a. Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with two sash locks. b. Up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches. d. Sizes 24 by 48 Inches and Larger: One additional hinge.

C. Round Duct Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and round; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and 1-inch thickness. Include cam latches.

1. Basis of Design: Ductmate Industries, Inc. “Sandwich Access Door”. 2. Alternate Manufacturers:

a. McGill AirFlow Corporation

3. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with spin-in notched frame.

D. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.

E. Insulation: One-inch- thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.

2.5 Access Doors in Casings and Plenums:

A. Construct in accordance with SMACNA 2005 HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Fig. 9-16. Doors shall be double-wall insulated type and shall be equipped with three heavy duty zinc plated steel strap type T-hinges and two latches with lever handle on outside and inside. Doors shall be gasketed.

1. Basis of Design: Ductmate Industries, Inc. “Square Framed Access Doors, Hinged and Cammed Model”


a. Ventfabrics, Inc. "Ventlok" b. Air Balance, Inc. Series FSA

B. Latches shall have lever handle and stud to accommodate door thickness with inside beveled flange to work against door frame to give compression. Latch escutcheon shall be sponge rubber gasketed, heavy duty zinc plated steel

C. Walk-in access doors in casing and plenum walls shall be minimum 20" x 72" size.

2.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Basis of Design: Ductmate Industries, Inc. “Proflex”.

B. Alternate Manufacturers:


July 31, 2015 233300- 7

1. Ventfabrics, Inc. “Ventglas” (Indoor Installations) and “Ventlon” (Outdoor Installations). 2. Duro Dyne Corp.

C. General: Provide fabric-type flexible connectors between fans and ducts or casings, fans and plenums, and where ducts are of dissimilar metals, as indicated and where required. Fabric shall comply with UL Standard 214 and shall be accepted by NFPA for vibration isolation connectors in duct systems per NFPA Standard 90.

D. Connectors at Indoor Installations: Connectors shall be made of heavy glass fabric double-coated with neoprene, weighing approximately 30 oz. per square yard. Flexible connections shall be securely fastened by zinc-coated iron cinch-type draw bands for round ducts. For rectangular ducts, the flexible connections locked to metal collars shall be installed using normal duct construction standards and according to SMACNA 2005 HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

E. Connectors at Outdoor Installations: Connectors shall be same as specified for indoor installations except fabric shall be made of heavy glass fabric double-coated with Hypalon, weighing approximately 26 oz. per square yard.

2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 1M or approved.

B. General: Flexible duct, including connectors, shall comply with UL181, Class I, and NFPA 90A and shall have acoustical performance acceptable to the Engineer. Installed duct shall not erode, delaminate or impart loose fibers or odors into the air stream. Internal positive working pressure shall be +10 in. w.g. Internal negative working pressure shall be -5 in. w.g. through 16" diameter and –1 in. wg. at 18" and 20" diameter.

C. Materials: Flexible duct assembly shall consist of a strong and puncture resistant polyethylene inner liner and a high strength duct wall, mechanically locked together with a corrosive resistant galvanized helix to form a solid performing UL-181, Class 1 flexible duct, without the use of glue or adhesives.

D. Insulation and Vapor Barrier: The factory-fabricated flexible duct shall have blanket-type insulation, having a C Factor of not more than 0.23. The insulation shall be sheathed with a reinforced metallized vapor barrier having a maximum permeability of 0.05 perm per ASTM E96, Procedure A. The vapor barrier jacket on the flexible duct shall be sealed to vapor barrier on the connecting sheet metal ducts. Joints shall be airtight slip joints sealed and secured with a clamp.

E. Clamps: 175-lb test 6/6 nylon locking draw band at each end.

1. Manufacturer: Panduit SLT10-LH-L, Ideal "Snaplock" or Ventlock "Suretite" No. 670.

F. Acoustical Performance: Test reports from an independent laboratory showing that flexible ducts meet the performance specifications stated below. If manufacturer other than that specified is submitted, provide acoustical performance ratings for each size flexible duct.


July 31, 2015 233300- 8

Acoustical performance testing shall be performed by an independent laboratory. The specified insertion loss and radiated noise reduction of flexible duct should be met when tested with a 6 foot length of straight duct less than 500 feet per minute velocity.

Type 1M INSERTION LOSS (dB)

Duct Dia. In

Air Veloc-ity

Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz)

125 250 500 1000 2000 4000

6 <500 fpm 7.4 15.2 31.3 40.4 33.5 20.7

8 <500 fpm 5.6 10.6 23.9 34 22.5 17

12 <500 fpm 6.6 27.8 22.8 29.0 18.7 10.9

Type 1M INSERTION LOSS WITH 90 DEG. ELBOW (dB)

Duct Dia. In

Air Veloc-ity

Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz)

125 250 500 1000 2000 4000

6 <500 fpm 4.2 310.4 28.1 40 35.4 21.9

8 <500 fpm 1.3 19 34.5 35.5 25.6 16.5

12 <500 fpm 3.2 26.6 29.1 30.5 23 11.8

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible".

B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel except when another material is specifically specified (Example: aluminum made damper in galvanized duct), stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Volume Dampers:


July 31, 2015 233300- 9

1. Contractor shall set and lock all dampers in the "Full Open" position prior to balancing work.

2. Mount volume damper quadrants and end bearings so that the fasteners do not limit full damper travel.

3. Provide volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing.

4. Install volume dampers as far from the outlet as possible while maintaining at a minimum of two duct widths from branch takeoff. Install at a point where the duct is accessible, if possible; axis of the blade the long dimension.

D. Backdraft Dampers: Install on all exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside that are not specified to have automatic dampers and elsewhere as indicated.

E. Duct Silencers: Install rigidly to ducts. Maintain straight duct upstream and downstream of silencer, as shown on plans, to achieve actual installed pressure drop listed in equipment schedule.

F. Access doors are required, but not typically shown on the drawings.

1. Install duct access doors on side of duct to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units as follows:

a. Upstream of duct mounted coils, smoke detectors, and humidifiers. b. Adjacent to back draft dampers, providing access to adjust counterbalances. c. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible

links. d. Adjacent to automatic control dampers. e. At turning vanes in return and exhaust ductwork. f. For cleaning operating room supply air duct and kitchen hood exhaust duct, locate

access doors at 20-foot intervals and at each change in duct direction. Discuss access doors at turning vanes with Owner and, if desired, note in Duct Fitting Requirements Detail on drawings, typically sheet M0.1. These aid in cleaning vanes of lint or fixing vanes that come loose, but add cost and can be a source of leaks.

h. At turning vanes in return and exhaust ductwork.

2. Sizes below are from one manufacturer's literature. SMACNA lists only three sizes, 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm), 16 by 20 inches (400 by 500 mm), and 24 by 24 inches (600 by 600 mm), but makes no recommendations for applications.

3. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:

a. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. b. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. c. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. d. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. e. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. f. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

4. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors:

a. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches in diameter.


July 31, 2015 233300- 10

b. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter. c. Head and Hand Access: 12 inches in diameter. d. Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches in diameter. e. Body Access: 24 inches in diameter.

5. Label access doors according to Division 23, Section 230553, "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

G. Flexible Connectors:

1. Install immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.

2. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and higher, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

H. Flexible Ducts:

1. Refer to SMACNA 2005 Standards, Chapter 3. Ducts shall be continuous, single piece at least 6 and no more than 8 feet long. Ducts shall have at least one, but not more than two, 90 elbows. Centerline radius of bends shall be not less than two duct diameters. Clamp per SMACNA with one clamp on the core duct and one on the insulation jacket. Flexible ducts shall not penetrate floors, or any chase or partition designated as a fire or smoke barrier, including corridor penetrations fire rated one hour or two hour.

2. Comply with SMACNA support standards and the requirements below.

a. Provide 2" wide sheet metal or "Saddle-Strap" non-metallic strap hangers maximum four feet on center. More frequent supports may be required to meet sag limitation.

b. Maximum permissible sag is 1/2" per foot of spacing. c. Hangers shall be adequately attached to the building structure. Do not attach

hangers to piping, ducts, or conduit.

3.2 INSTALLATION - DEVICES FURNISHED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS

A. Motorized Dampers: Install all motorized dampers. Coordinate best location prior to ductwork fabrication and provide damper-manufacturer recommended straight duct length upstream and downstream. Dampers in ductwork and in plenums shall be provided with sheet metal closures all around the dampers frame, including mullions. Seal perimeter of damper frame closures with fire-retardant mastic for airtight closure. Construction and airtightness must be suitable for duct pressure class used. Multiple damper sections shall be bolted together and reinforced at joints with steel angles or channel mullions.

B. Smoke Detectors: Install all smoke detectors furnished by the control contractor or electrical contractor. Review smoke detector submittals and advise manufacturer of anticipated air velocity range. Coordinate best location prior to ductwork fabrication and provide detector-manufacturer recommended straight duct length upstream and downstream. Provide adequate clearance for service and removal.

C. Field-Installed Mixing Damper Installation:


July 31, 2015 233300- 11

1. Install mixing dampers specified as part of this section or as furnished by others. 2. Provide necessary blank-off plates required to install dampers that are smaller than duct

size. Provide necessary transitions required to install dampers larger than duct size. 3. Assemble multiple sections of dampers with required interconnecting linkage and extend

required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper motors. 4. Provide necessary sheet metal baffle plates to eliminate stratification and provide air

volumes specified. Locate baffles by experimentation, and affix and seal permanently in place, only after stratification problem has been eliminated.

5. Install all damper control/adjustment devices on stand-offs to allow complete coverage of insulation.

D. Air Flow Measuring Devices:

1. Install units specified as part of this section or as furnished by others. 2. Install with minimum straight run distances, upstream and downstream as recommended

by the manufacturer. Notify engineer at submittal time if required distances do not appear to be sufficient.

3.3 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS PROTECTION

A. Adequately protect equipment and materials against physical damage. Place equipment and materials in first class operating condition, or return to source of supply for repair or replacement, as determined by the engineer. Protect all equipment and materials from moisture at all times. Protect during construction against entry of foreign matter to the inside and clean both inside and outside before operation and painting.

3.4 TESTING

A. Combination Fire Smoke Damper Tests: After installation, all combination fire smoke dampers and all associated controls shall be tested to prove correct control, installation and that damper blades move freely within the confines of the damper frame and do not slip on their shafts. Contractor shall submit a signed statement in O&M Manuals certifying all dampers to be operational.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.

B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.

C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 23, Section 230593, "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC."

3.6 COMMISSIONING



July 31, 2015 233300- 12




Spokane Transit Authority Section 233400 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 HVAC Fans

July 31, 2015 233400- 1

SECTION 233400 – HVAC FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Centrifugal roof exhaust fans.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit for each type of product indicated, including fan curves, motor data, total static pressure drop, vibration transmission data, and sound power levels in all octave bands at midfrequencies.

B. Shop Drawings: For each fan, Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 3. Operation and maintenance data:


A. Single Source Responsibility: Comply with the requirements specified in Division 1.

B. Standardization: Provide air-handling units of the same manufacturer throughout where possible.



July 31, 2015 233400- 2


A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to the final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR MOVING EQUIPMENT—GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Criteria:

1. Performance data for all fans shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of AMCA Standard 210.

2. Sound power level ratings of ducted fans shall comply with AMCA Standard 330 and shall be the results of tests made in accordance with AMCA Standard 300.

3. Unit construction shall conform to applicable standards contained in AMCA Standard Handbook Publications and to requirements specified herein.

B. Safety: Safety provisions for power transmission equipment and non-ducted fan inlets and outlets shall include guards and screens, unless other provisions are required, and constructed in accordance with applicable provisions of ANSI/ASME B15.1, the recommendations of the National Safety Council and requirements specified herein. Safety provisions shall not present obstacles to measurement of driver and driven shaft speeds with revolution counter. Installation shall be such that fan vibration isolation provisions are not negated.

C. Nameplate: Provide a metallic, corrosion-resistant, embossed or stamped nameplate for each fan. Nameplate data shall include selection point capacity conditions, rpm and bhp. Permanently affix in a conspicuous location.

D. Horsepower: Motor brake horsepower input to each proposed fan shall not exceed scheduled brake horsepower.

E. Alignment: All fan wheels shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Fans shall be properly protected during shipment so that bearings are not damaged.

F. Rigging: Field-rigging methods shall not negate balancing. Lifting eyes shall be used. Shafts shall not be bent.


July 31, 2015 233400- 3

G. Bearings:

1. Bearings shall be grease lubricated. Lubrication provisions shall be such as to preclude overheating due to excess lubricant or seal blowout due to excess pressure. Grease supply fittings shall be surface ball check type. Provide manual or automatic grease pressure relief fittings as necessary to comply with specified requirements. Bearing and seal construction permitting, relief fittings shall be located on the side opposite to the supply fitting. Relief shall be visible from normal maintenance locations. Lubrication provisions shall include extension tubes where necessary to facilitate safe maintenance while equipment is operating.

2. Permanently sealed pre-lubricated antifriction bearings, which conform to above-specified materials and ANSI/AFBMA L10 life requirements, may be provided for air moving equipment with nameplate horsepower requirements less than 1/2 in lieu of relubricable bearings.

2.2 FAN DRIVES AND GUARDS

A. Drives: Provide a V-belt drive, with guard, for each fan except direct-driven type fans.

B. Provide speed controller for direct drive fans.

C. Replacement of Existing Drives: Provide all fan drive changes at existing fans to accommodate the revisions to existing air quantities as required by the alteration work and as shown. Drive changes shall be closely coordinated with air balancing work specified in Section 2305, "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing".

D. Multiple Belt Drives: For all systems with motors 2 hp and larger, drives shall be multiple belt type.

E. Horsepower Ratings of Drives: Select drives in accordance with the following except the minimum drive rating shall be 140% of the motor rating, unless specified otherwise.

1. Motors 5 HP and Smaller: Adjustable motor sheave, drive 150% of fan brake horsepower at design.

F. Drive Sheaves:

1. Sheaves shall be cast iron, groove pattern suitable for belts selected. Sheaves for two-belt drives on motors 5 hp and smaller shall be adjustable pitch type. Manufacturer: Fort Worth, T.B. Woods Sons, Dodge, Browning, or Worthington.

2. Minimum Pitch of Motor Sheaves: 4.0" for Type A belts; 6.0" for Type B; 10.0" for Type C; 4.5" for 3/8" width, 9.0" for 5/8" width.

3. Drive ratio shall give the required CFM at the static pressure of the system. In case the static pressure in any system is found to differ from that shown, change the ratio as required. Actual drives shall be to the present capacities shown.

G. Drive Belts: Select for A, B or C cross-section series, or 3/8", 5/8" or 1" width series. Belts shall be imprinted with the manufacturer's name and number identification. Minimum quantity of belts: two per drive. Manufacturer: Uniroyal, Dodge, Dayco, Goodyear, or Gates.


July 31, 2015 233400- 4

H. Setting of Belt Tension: Adjust belt tensions according to belt manufacturer's recommendations. When adjusted, there shall not be any audible belt slippage during fan acceleration from standstill to operating rpm, or during running of fan.

I. Guards:

1. Guards for each fan drive, except utility set type fans for which the guards are specified with the fan, shall be four-sided guards and shall also cover exposed parts of fan shafts. Size of guards shall also accommodate ultimate capacities shown.

2. Guards shall meet safety standards of AMCA 410, OSHA. Guards shall be provide with 1/2" mesh No. 14-gauge screen in steel angle frame; removable by unbolting sections of the guard for ease of belt replacement; supported on upper isolated base, or from the fan; shall not transmit vibration from fan or motor to the building structure.

3. Size of guards shall be adequate for present fan speed and also for future increased fan speeds where two speeds are shown.

4. Guards for roof-mounted fans shall be solid galvanized steel panels, 20-gauge minimum with screen over midsection of top and bottom of belts for inspection and shall be weathertight construction.

2.3 MOTORS

A. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.

2. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.

3. Provide electronically commutated motors or motors with 70% motor efficiency.

B. CENTRIFUGAL ROOF EXHAUST FANS

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the Greenheck product indicated on Drawings, or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. b. Loren Cook Company. c. Penn Ventilation.

2. Description: Direct- or belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.

3. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.

4. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades. 5. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following

features:

a. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.


July 31, 2015 233400- 5

b. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings.

c. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley. d. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

6. Accessories:

a. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

b. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. c. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base;

factory set to close when fan stops.

7. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch-thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine fans before installation. Reject fans that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

3.2 INSTALLATION-FANS

A. General: The installation of the fans shall conform to local codes and ordinances, NFPA 90A, and SMACNA. Mounting and supporting of all equipment including accessories and appurtenances shall be provided, including but not limited to structural supports, hangers, vibration isolators, stands, clamps, and brackets.

B. Installation of Equipment: Installation shall conform to equipment manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Equipment shall be installed, leveled and located so that working clearance is available under overhead lines and so that working space is available for all necessary servicing such as shaft removal, replacing or adjusting drives and motors, lubrication, and access to automatic controls.

3.3 ELECTRICAL WORK

A. General: Electric motor-driven equipment specified in this section shall be provided complete with motors and controls. Electric equipment and wiring shall comply with requirements of NFPA 70 and Division 26, "Electrical Work".

B. Starters: Motor starters and disconnects, unless otherwise specified or indicated shall be furnished and installed by Division 26 Contractor.


July 31, 2015 233400- 6

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section 260553, "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.5 COMMISSIONING





Spokane Transit Authority Section 233700 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Air Inlets and Outlets

July 31, 2015 233700 - 1

SECTION 233700 – AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.


1. Division 08 Section "Louvers and Vents" for fixed and adjustable louvers and wall vents, whether or not they are connected to ducts.

2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.


A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DIFFUSERS

A. General: Diffusers shall be sizes and mounting types shown on drawings and as scheduled. All diffusers shall be provided with earthquake tabs where required by code. Whether required by code or not, all diffusers shall be provided with earthquake tabs if the weight of the assembly (including all accessories and the plenum above) is more than fifteen (15) pounds unless the


July 31, 2015 233700 - 2

assembly is rigidly attached to, and can be fully supported from, a fully-supported sheet-metal duct or plenum.

B. Square Face Modular Core Adjustable Diffusers:

1. 1, 2, 3, or 4-way adjustable discharge pattern, steel construction, square or rectangular neck.

2. Back pan shall be one-piece stamped heavy gauge steel. Diffuser neck shall have 1-inch minimum depth to facilitate duct connection.

3. Diffuser core shall consist of fixed louver directional modules, which can be easily repositioned without tools in the field for 1, 2, 3, or 4-way discharge. Each module shall be easily removable to adjust the dampers in neck of the diffuser.

4. Manufacturers:Titus Model MCDAnemostat RMDKrueger 1240Price MCD Metalaire.

C. Linear Slot Diffusers:

1. The frame and support bars of the linear diffusers shall be constructed of heavy gauge extruded aluminum. The pattern controller shall be an aerodynamically curved "ice-tong" shaped steel deflector.

2. Pattern deflectors shall provide a 180° pattern adjustment. Pattern deflectors shall be positive positioning when providing a horizontal air path. Constant static pressure shall be maintained at a fixed volume under all positions of pattern adjustment.

3. Margins and Joints: Diffuser margins shall be furnished to overlap or recess the opening as required to fit the ceiling finish. Mounting frame, if required, shall be provided with positive holding concealed fasteners. When required for plaster openings, frames shall be provided with rigid bracing to maintain the opening size. Diffusers and mounting frames shall be provided in one continuous piece up to 6' in length. Continuous diffuser sections shall butt with hairline joints and be provided with interlocking splines. Diffuser margins shall be mechanically fastened to provide a neat hairline corner appearance. Heavy gauge extruded aluminum end borders, end caps, and mitered corners shall be provided to close off the ends of the diffusers. When provided with plaster frames, butt joints of diffusers and plaster frames shall be staggered. Screws, bolts, etc., shall not be used in exposed face of diffusers and return models.

4. Volume Dampers: Volume dampers shall be provided behind all active supply diffusers and return models in each slot opening. Mitered corner sections shall have blank-off baffles. Inactive sections shall be blanked with integral volume dampers. Maximum damper length shall be 24".

5. Finish:

a. Factory finish, satin anodized and etched finish. The pattern controller shall be coated dull black to accent the slot opening.

6. Manufacturers:

a. Linear diffusers with 1" wide multiple slots

1) Titus Model ML 39 2) Anemostat SLAD-F-100 3) Carnes CHFB 4) Krueger 1910 5) Price SDS100


July 31, 2015 233700 - 3

6) Metalaire.

D. Plenums for Linear Slot Diffusers and Returns:

1. Plenums shall be same manufacturer as linear diffuser manufacturer, designed specifically for field attachment of the specified diffusers. Plenums shall be galvanized steel construction and shall included a factory drawn (not welded) side inlet to fit 1, 2, 3, or 4-slot diffusers of slot width as scheduled. Standard nominal length shall be 2, 3, 4, or 5 feet, as scheduled.

2. Where specified, enhanced spread performance plenums shall be provided. Plenums shall have internal baffles to maximize air diffusion by shortening the throw and widening the spread of the discharge air.

3. Plenums shall be internally insulated when required by schedule or as indicated. Refer to acoustical lining specified earlier in this section for acceptable liners.

4. Field mounted inlet dampers, provided by plenum/diffuser manufacturer shall be furnished when specified or scheduled.

5. Manufacturers:

a. Uninsulated Plenums:

1) Titus Model MP 2) Anemostat SLAD-A 3) Carnes CXPA-N 4) Krueger TBS 1900 5) Price SDB 6) Metalaire.

b. Insulated plenums: To the extent that insulation meets requirements specified for duct acoustic lining;

1) Titus MPI 2) Anemostat SLAD-A 3) Carnes CXPA-R 4) Krueger TBSI 1900 5) Price SDBI 6) Metalaire.

E. Thermally Powered Variable Diffusers

1. Diffusers shall be square face, round-neck design, complete with integral thermally powered thermostats, warm-up controller, and sliding sleeve type VAV control dampers. Finish shall be off-white enamel.

2. Units shall be nominal 24"x24" face size for lay-in installation in a standard exposed-grid ceiling suspension system.

3. Thermal elements shall be field adjustable through the face of the diffuser through a temperature range of 70°F to 78°F and static pressures of 0.02" w.g. to 0.5" w.g.

4. Diffusers shall have remote field adjustable thermostat for minimum and maximum air flow (cfm) setpoints.

5. Manufacturer:

a. Thermal Products Corporation VFS 24 Series "Vari-Flow"


July 31, 2015 233700 - 4

b. Acutherm Therma-Fuser TF-HC-A.

2.2 GRILLES AND REGISTERS

A. General: Grilles and registers shall be sizes and mounting types shown on drawings and as scheduled.

B. Steel Supply Grilles:

1. Grilles shall be double deflection type unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Exposed deflection blades shall be horizontal when viewed from the room (typically, the first dimension indicated is the horizontal dimension).

2. Grilles shall be steel construction with a 1-1/4" wide border on all sides, having a minimum thickness of 20-gauge. Screw holes shall be countersunk. Corners shall be welded with full penetration resistance welds with a reinforcing steel patch for extra strength.

3. Deflection blades shall be constructed of heavy-duty aluminum spaced on 3/4" centers. Blades shall extend completely through the side frame on each side to provide stability throughout the complete CFM operating range of the grille. Blades shall be individually adjustable without loosening or rattling, and shall be held in place with tension wire.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Double deflection, blades parallel to long dimension:

1) Titus Model 300RL 2) Price

b. Double deflection, blades parallel to short dimension:

1) Titus Model 300RS 2) Price

c. Single deflection, blades parallel to long dimension:

1) Titus Model 301RL 2) Price

d. Single deflection, blades parallel to short dimension:

1) Titus Model 301RS 2) Price

C. Wall-mounted Steel Return and Exhaust Grilles:

1. Grilles shall have fixed deflection blades, which shall be horizontal when viewed from the room (typically, the first dimension indicated is the horizontal dimension).

2. Grilles shall be steel construction with a 1-1/4" wide border on all sides, having a minimum thickness of 20-gauge. Screw holes shall be countersunk. Corners shall be


July 31, 2015 233700 - 5

welded with full penetration resistance welds with a reinforcing steel patch for extra strength.

3. Blades shall have a formed curvature, laboratory tested and certified for performance. Blades shall be 20-gauge minimum construction. Fixed deflection angle shall be 35°.

4. Where indicated, integral opposed blade dampers shall be provided, constructed of heavy gauge steel. Damper shall be operable from the face of the grille.

5. Borders of grilles shall be suitable for installation surface and materials. Border type shall be surface mount or otherwise as indicated or required for the associated surface. Verify border requirements.

6. Finish of grilles shall be field painted. 7. Manufacturers:

a. 35° Deflection, 3/4" Spacing, Blades Parallel to Long Dimension:

1) Titus Model 350RL 2) Anemostat 3) Carnes 4) Krueger 5) Price 6) Metalaire.

b. 35° Deflection, 3/4" Spacing, Blades Parallel to Short Dimension:

1) Titus Model 350RS 2) Anemostat 3) Carnes 4) Krueger 5) Price 6) Metalaire.

D. Ceiling-mounted Steel Return and Exhaust Grilles:

1. Except as noted below, grilles shall be the same as specified for wall-mounted grilles. 2. Grilles in lay-in ceilings shall not have screw holes in the border. 3. Grilles shall have fixed deflection blades, which shall be perpendicular to the line of sight

when viewed from the center of the room. 4. Borders of grilles shall be suitable for installation surface and materials. Border type

shall be surface mount, snap-in, lay-in, spline, or channel frame type as indicated or required for the associated surface. Verify border requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.



July 31, 2015 233700 - 6

3.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS PROTECTION:

A. Adequately protect equipment and materials against physical damage. Place equipment and materials in first class operating condition, or return to source of supply for repair or replacement, as determined by A/E. Protect all equipment and materials from moisture at all times. Protect during construction against entry of foreign matter to the inside and clean both inside and outside before operation and painting.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Diffuser Connection: Provide a minimum of 12” of straight (vertical) duct above ceiling diffusers or furnish an engineer (prior) approved plenum above diffusers.

B. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb in accordance with the details and notes indicated and the recommendations and printed instructions of the manufacturer for each item.

C. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

D. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

E. Frames and Borders:

1. Diffusers and grilles shall have border or margins for tight fit to ceilings for optimum ceiling appearance, designed to cover ceiling openings and minimize dirt development on ceiling. All diffusers and grilles shall be provided with duct rings secured to diffuser or grille outer shell with concealed fasteners.

2. Square Diffusers and Grilles for Exposed "Tee" Grid Ceilings: Square diffusers and grilles that fit well within the framing grid shall be flanged. Where dimension corresponds to the grid dimension, diffuser or grille shall be the same pattern as specified above except margins shall be 5/8" wide with outside dimensions for "lay-in" installation in the standard tee spacing required by the architectural drawings.

F. Ceiling Grille Orientation: Return and exhaust grilles and registers shall be installed in ceilings such that the blade angle blocks line-of-sight into the duct from the center of the room. If the best orientation still allows the ductwork interior to be seen through the grille from any point in the room that is more than 3 feet from a wall, the visible portion of the interior shall be painted with flat-black paint.

G. Structural Supports: When very large diffusers are installed, sufficient structural support shall be provided to prevent sagging or distortion of the unit. Provide seismic restraints to prevent diffuser from being dislodged from the ceiling.

H. Where diffuser and ceiling grille assemblies that weigh more than 15 pounds (and less when required by code), they shall be fully supported independent of a lay-in ceiling grid.


July 31, 2015 233700 - 7

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. Set throw direction at all linear diffusers and modular core diffusers. In general, air shall be directed away from adjacent walls, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Request engineer direction if proper arrangement is not readily apparent.

3.5 COMMISSIONING





Spokane Transit Authority Section 234100 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Particulate Air Filtration

July 31, 2015 234100 - 1

SECTION 234100 - PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes factory-fabricated air-filter devices and media used to remove particulate matter from air for HVAC applications.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DOP: Dioctyl phthalate or bis-(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.

B. MERV: Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include dimensions; operating characteristics; required clearances and access; rated flow capacity, including initial and final pressure drop at rated airflow; efficiency and test method; fire classification; furnished specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: None required.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of filter to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air filters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

B. Comply with ARI 850.

C. Comply with ASHRAE 52.1 and ASHRAE 52.2 for method of testing and rating air-filter units.

D. Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B.


July 31, 2015 234100 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR FILTERS

A. Pleated Panel Air Filters:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Farr Company Type 30/30 b. Flanders Airpure c. American Air Filter.

2. General: Provide the air filters, complete with filter cartridges and holding frames. Filter banks shall be field erected, size and arrangement as shown on the drawings. Each filter shall be provided with an identification plate, visibly mounted after construction showing serial number, model number and all other data necessary for ordering renewable media.

3. Filter Media: Non-woven cotton fabric type, reinforced by a woven scrim backing. Synthetic media material (polyester) is not acceptable.

4. Media Support: Media support shall consist of a welded wire grid, effective open area of not less than 96%. Grid shall be bonded to filter media for rigidity.

5. Enclosing Frame: Rigid, heavy-duty beverage board with diagonal support members bonded to the air entering and an exit side of each pleat, to ensure pleat stability. The inside periphery of the enclosing frame shall be bonded to the filter pack so as to eliminate air bypass.

6. Ratings:

a. Filter shall be rated MERV 7 per ASHRAE 52.2. b. The filter media shall have an average efficiency of 25% to 30% on ASHRAE Test

Standard 52.1-92. c. Media shall have an average synthetic dust arrestance of 90-93% in accordance

with ASHRAE Test Standard 52.1-92. d. Filters shall be UL Class 2.

7. Effective Filter Media:

a. 4" Thick: The effective filter media for the 4" thick filters shall be not less than 6.75 sq. ft. of media per 1.0 sq. ft. of filter face area and shall contain 9 pleats per linear foot. Initial resistance at 500 fpm approach velocity shall not exceed 0.18 in. w.g.

b. 2" Thick: The effective filter media for the 2" thick filters shall be not less than 3.3 sq. ft. of media per 1.0 sq. ft. of filter face area and shall contain not less than 10 pleats per linear foot. Initial resistance at 500 fpm approach velocity shall not exceed 0.28 in. w.g.


July 31, 2015 234100 - 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install filters in position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.

B. Coordinate filter installations with duct and air-handling unit installations.

3.2 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS PROTECTION

A. Adequately protect equipment and materials against physical damage. Place equipment and materials in first class operating condition, or return to source of supply for repair or replacement, as determined by A/E. Protect all equipment and materials from moisture at all times. Protect during construction against entry of foreign matter to the inside and clean both inside and outside before operation and painting.

3.3 CLEANING

A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-handling and air-distribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filter media.

B. Utilize temporary high-efficiency filters during testing, balancing and commissioning to keep all systems clean. Provide temporary obstructions as needed to simulate dirty filter conditions. A complete set of new filters shall be provided no more than 4 days prior to owner's occupancy of building.

3.4 COMMISSIONING





Spokane Transit Authority Section 237433 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Packaged Outdoor Heating Cooling Units

July 31, 2015 237433 - 1

SECTION 237433 - PACKAGED, OUTDOOR, HEATING AND COOLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes cooling and heating rooftop replacement-air units.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. DDC: Direct-digital controls.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, methods of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Prepare the following by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer:

1. Mounting Details: For securing and flashing roof curb to roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system.


C. Coordination Drawings: Rooftop replacement-air units to roof-curb mounting details drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Size and location of rooftop replacement-air unit mounting rails and anchor points and methods for anchoring units to roof curb.

2. Required roof penetrations for ducts, pipes, and electrical raceways, including size and location of each penetration.

D. Startup service reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For rooftop replacement-air units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


July 31, 2015 237433 - 2


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of rooftop replacement-air units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size, installation, and structural capacity of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

B. Coordinate size, location, and installation of rooftop replacement-air unit manufacturer's roof curbs and equipment supports with roof Installer.

1. Coordinate installation of restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails, which are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within five year warranty period.

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fan Belts: One set for each belt-driven fan. 2. Filters: One set for each unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide AAON products scheduled on the drawings, or an approved substitute by one of the following:

1. Carrier Corporation. 2. McQuay International. 3. Trane; American Standard Companies, Inc. 4. YORK International Corporation.


July 31, 2015 237433 - 3

2.2 CABINET

A. Construction: Double wall.

B. Exterior Casing: Galvanized steel with baked-enamel paint finish with lifting lugs and knockouts for electrical and piping connections.

C. Interior Casing: Galvanized steel.

D. Base Rails: Galvanized-steel rails for mounting on roof curb.

E. Service Doors: Hinged access doors with neoprene gaskets.

F. Internal Insulation: Fibrous-glass duct lining complying with ASTM C 1071, Type II.

1. Thickness: 1 inch. 2. Insulation Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. 3. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical

attachment, or welding attachment to casing without damaging liner and without causing air leakage when applied as recommended by manufacturer.

G. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of galvanized-steel sheet designed for self-drainage. Fabricate pans with slopes to preclude buildup of microbial slime.

H. Roof Curb: Full-perimeter curb of sheet metal, minimum 14 inches high, with wood nailer, neoprene sealing strip, and welded Z-bar flashing.

2.3 SUPPLY-AIR FAN

A. Fan: Forward-curved centrifugal; statically and dynamically balanced, galvanized steel, mounted on solid-steel shaft with self-aligning, permanently lubricated ball bearings.

B. Motor: Open drip-proof, single-speed motor.

C. Drive: V-belt drive with matching fan pulley and adjustable motor sheaves and belt assembly with minimum 1.4 service factor.

D. Mounting: Fan wheel, motor, and drives shall be mounted in fan casing with elastomeric isolators.

2.4 HEATING COILS

A. Hot-Water Coils: Continuous-circuit coil fabricated and tested according to ARI 410 with aluminum fins and seamless copper tube in galvanized-steel casing.

1. Headers: Seamless copper tube with brazed joints, prime coated. 2. Control valves are specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for

HVAC."


July 31, 2015 237433 - 4

2.5 COOLING COILS

A. Chilled-Water Coils: Continuous-circuit coil fabricated and tested according to ARI 410 with aluminum fins and seamless copper tube in galvanized-steel casing.

1. Headers: Seamless copper tube with brazed joints, prime coated. 2. Control valves are specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for

HVAC."

2.6 OUTDOOR AIR INTAKE AND RETURN AIR DAMPERS

A. Dampers: Leakage rate, according to AMCA 500, shall not exceed 2 percent of air quantity at face velocity of 2000 fpm through damper and pressure differential of 4-inch wg.

B. Damper Operators: Electric.

C. Mixing Boxes: Parallel-blade, galvanized-steel dampers mechanically fastened to steel operating rod inside cabinet. Connect operating rods with common interconnecting linkages so dampers operate simultaneously.

D. Outdoor-Air Intake Hoods: Galvanized steel, with bird screen and finish to match cabinet.

2.7 FILTERS

A. Comply with NFPA 90A.

B. Disposable Panel Filters: 2-inch-thick, factory-fabricated, flat-panel-type, disposable air filters with holding frames, with a minimum efficiency report value of 8 according to ASHRAE 52.2 and 90 percent average arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1.

1. Media: Interlaced glass fibers sprayed with nonflammable adhesive. 2. Frame: Galvanized steel.

2.8 CONTROLS

A. Control equipment and sequence of operation are specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and on the HVAC drawings.

B. Factory-wire connection for controls' power supply.

C. Control devices, including sensors, transmitters, relays, switches, thermostats, detectors, operators, actuators, and valves, shall be manufacturer's standard items to accomplish indicated control functions.

D. Unit Controls: Controls by DDC contractor.

E. Supply-Fan Control: Time clock shall switch operation from occupied to unoccupied. Night setback thermostat shall cycle fan during unoccupied periods to maintain space temperature.


July 31, 2015 237433 - 5

1. Timer: Seven-day electronic clock.

F. Cooling/Heating Controls:

1. Mounted in return duct, space-temperature sensor that modulates control valves to maintain space temperature.

G. DDC Temperature Control: Stand-alone control module for link between unit controls and DDC temperature-control system. Control module shall be compatible with temperature-control system specified in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC." Links shall include the following:

1. Start/stop interface relay, and relay to notify DDC temperature-control system alarm condition.

2. Hardware interface or additional sensors for the following:

a. Room temperature. b. Heating/cooling coil control valves. c. Constant and variable motor loads. d. Monitor variable frequency drive operation. e. Monitor cooling load. f. Monitor economizer cycles. g. Monitor air distribution static pressure and ventilation air volumes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation of rooftop replacement-air units.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping, ducts, and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment installation.

C. Examine roof curbs and equipment supports for suitable conditions where rooftop replacement-air units will be installed.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install roof curb on roof structure, according to NRCA's "Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install and secure rooftop heating and cooling units on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction.

B. Install wall-mounting sensors furnished by manufacturers for field installation. Install control wiring and make final connections to control devices and unit control panel.


July 31, 2015 237433 - 6

3.3 CONNECTIONS


B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

1. Water Coil Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return coil with shutoff-duty valve and union or flange on the supply connection and with throttling-duty valve and union or flange on the return connection.

C. Duct Connections: Duct installation requirements are specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. Connect supply and return ducts to rooftop replacement-air units with flexible duct connectors. Flexible duct connectors are specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."

D. Electrical Connections: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Sections for power wiring, switches, and motor controls.

E. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

3.4 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

B. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and perform the following:

1. Inspect casing insulation for integrity, moisture content, and adhesion. 2. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. 3. Verify that controls are connected and operable. 4. Verify that filters are installed. 5. Clean coils and inspect for construction debris. 6. Inspect and adjust vibration isolators and seismic restraints. 7. Verify bearing lubrication. 8. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and

binding. 9. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. 10. Start unit. 11. Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices including response to

smoke detectors by fan controls and fire alarm. 12. Operate unit for run-in period. 13. Calibrate thermostats. 14. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits. 15. Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers. 16. Verify operational sequence of controls. 17. Measure and record the following airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve.


July 31, 2015 237433 - 7

a. Supply-air volume. b. Return-air volume. c. Outdoor-air intake volume.

18. Verify operation of remote panel including pilot-light operation and failure modes. Inspect the following:

a. High-limit heat exchanger. b. Alarms.

C. After startup and performance testing, change filters, verify bearing lubrication, and adjust belt tension.

D. Remove and replace components that do not pass tests and inspections and retest as specified above.

E. Prepare written report of the results of startup services.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature set points.

B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain rooftop replacement-air units. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

3.7 COMMISSIONING





Spokane Transit Authority Section 238100 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Unitary HVAC Equipment

July 31, 2015 238100 - 1

SECTION 238100 – UNITARY HVAC EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section specifies split-systems air conditioners.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Certification: Submit proof of specified ARI Certification.

D. Performance Rating: Submit catalog selection data showing equipment ratings and compliance with required sensible-to-heat-ratio, energy efficiency ratio (EER), and coefficient of performance (COP).

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of air-conditioning units with other construction.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07, "Roof Accessories."


July 31, 2015 238100 - 2

1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Filters: One set of filters for each unit.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS

A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, wall-mounted unit, with an air-cooled remote condensing unit, and field-installed refrigeration piping.

B. Wall-Mounting, Evaporator-Fan Components:

1. Unit Cabinet: The indoor unit cabinet shall be wall mounted by means of a factory supplied mounting plate. The cabinet shall be formed from high strength molded plastic with front panel access for filter. Cabinet color shall be white. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring and internal piping, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit in conjunction with the wired, wall mounted controller shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be purged with dry nitrogen before shipment from the factory.

2. Fan: The evaporator fan shall be high performance, double inlet, forward curve, direct drive sirocco fan with a single motor. The fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. The indoor fan shall be multi-speed.

3. Vane: There shall be a motorized horizontal vane to automatically direct air flow in a flow in a horizontal and downward direction for uniform air distribution. The horizontal vane shall significantly decrease downward air resistance for lower noise levels, and shall close the outlet port when operation is stopped. There shall also be a set of vertical vanes to provide horizontal swing airflow movement selected by remote control.

4. Filter: Return air shall be filtered by means of an easily removable washable filter. 5. Coil: The evaporator coil shall be of nonferrous construction with pre-coated aluminum strake

fins on copper tubing. The multi-angled heat exchanger shall have a modified fin shape that reduces air resistance for a smoother, quieter airflow. All tube joints shall be brazed with PhosCopper or silver alloy. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil.

6. Electrical: The electrical power of the unit shall be 208 volts or 230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 198 volts to 253 volts. The power to the indoor unit shall be supplied from the outdoor unit, using the Mitsubishi Electric A-Control system. For A-Control, a three (3) conductor AWG-14 wire with ground shall provide power feed and bi-directional control transmission between the outdoor and indoor units.

7. Control:

a. The control system shall consist of two (2) microprocessors, one on each indoor and outdoor unit. Field wiring shall run directly from the indoor unit interconnected by a single non-polar two wire AWG-16 stranded cable to the wall mounted controller with no


July 31, 2015 238100 - 3

splices. The control system between the outdoor unit and indoor unit shall be supplied from the outdoor unit using the Mitsubishi Electric A-Control system.

b. The system shall be capable of automatic restart when power is restored after power interruption. The system shall have self-diagnostics ability, including total hours of compressor run time. Diagnostics codes for indoor and outdoor units shall be displayed on the wired controller panel.

c. The microprocessor located in the indoor unit shall have the capability of monitoring return air temperature and indoor coil temperature, receiving and processing commands from the wired controller, providing emergency operation and controlling the outdoor unit.

d. The indoor unit shall be connected to a wall mounted wired controller to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. The wired controller shall have a large multi-language DOT liquid crystal display (LCD). There shall be a built-in weekly timer with up to eight pattern settings per day. The controller shall consist of an On/Off button, Increase/Decrease Set Temperature buttons, a Cool/Dry/Fan mode selector, a Timer Menu button, a Timer On/Off button, Set Time buttons, a Fan Speed selector, a Vane Position selector, a Louver Swing button, a Ventilation button, a Test Run button, and a Check Mode button. The controller shall have a built-in temperature sensor. Temperature shall be displayed in either Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C). Temperature changes shall be by increments of 1°F (1°C) with a range of 67°F to 87°F (19°C to 30°C).

e. The wired controller shall display operating conditions such as set temperature, room temperature, pipe temperature, pipe temperatures (i.e. liquid, discharge, indoor and outdoor), compressor operating conditions (including running current, frequency, input voltage, On/Off status and operating time), LEV opening pulses, sub cooling and discharge super heat.

f. Normal operation of the wired controller shall provide individual system control in which one wired controller and one indoor unit are installed in the same room.

g. The control voltage from the wired controller to the indoor unit shall be 12 volts, DC. The control signal between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be pulse signal 24 volts DV. Up to two wired controllers shall be able to be used to control one unit.

h. Control system shall control the continued operation of the air sweep louvers, as well as provide On/Off and mode switching. The controller shall have the capability to provide sequential starting with up to fifty seconds delay.

8. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004.

9. Drain Pan and Drain Connection: Comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2004. 10. Filters: Permanent, cleanable, or disposable with MERV rating of 6 or higher according to

ASHRAE 52.2. 11. Provide compatible condensate pump for condensate disposal. Pump shall alarm and turn off

AC unit upon high water level.

C. Air-Cooled, Compressor-Condenser Components:

1. The outdoor unit shall be equipped with a control board that interfaces with the indoor unit to perform all necessary operation functions.

2. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating at 0°F (-18°C) ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls (optional wind baffle may be required).

3. The outdoor unit shall be able to operate with a maximum height difference of 100 feet (30 meters) indoor unit to outdoor unit.


July 31, 2015 238100 - 4

4. System shall have a maximum refrigerant tubing length of 100 feet (30 meters) between indoor and outdoor units without the need for line size changes, traps or additional oil.

5. The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped, and wired. Each unit must be test run at the factory.

6. Cabinet: The casing shall be constructed from galvanized steel plate, coated with a finished with an electrostatically applied, thermally fused acrylic or polyester powder coating for corrosion protection and have a Munsell 3Y 7.8/1.1 finish. The fan grille shall be of ABS plastic.

7. Fan: Unit shall be furnished with an AC fan motor. The fan motor shall be of aerodynamic design for quiet operation, and the fan motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated. The outdoor unit shall have horizontal discharge airflow. The fan shall be mounted in front of the coil, pulling air across it from the rear and dispelling it through the front. The fan shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts.

8. Coil: The L shaped condenser coil shall be of copper tubing with flat aluminum fins to reduce debris build up. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. Refrigerant flow from the condenser shall be controlled by means of linear expansion valve (LEV) metering orifice. The LEV shall be control by a microprocessor controlled step motor.

9. Compressor: The compressor shall be a DC rotary compressor with Variable Speed Inverter Technology. The compressor shall be driven by inverter circuit to control compressor speed. The compressor speed shall dynamically vary to match the room load for significantly increasing the efficiency of the system which results in vast energy savings. To prevent liquid from accumulating in the compressor during the off cycle, a minimal amount of current shall be intermittently applied to the compressor motor to maintain enough heat. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator and high pressure safety switch. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.

10. Electrical: The electrical power of the unit shall be 208 volts or 230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 198 volts to 253 volts. The outdoor unit shall be controlled by the microprocessor located in the indoor unit. The control signal between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit shall be pulse signal 24 volts DC. The unit shall have Pulse Amplitude Modulation circuit to utilize 98% of input power supply.

11. Refrigerant: R-410A. 12. Minimum Energy Efficiency: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004, “Energy Standard for

Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Roof Curb:

1. Install on roof structure level and secure, according to NRCA's "Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Section 07 72 00, ROOF ACCESSORIES. Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts.

2. Units located over the pre-engineered building shall be secured to curbs provided by the building manufacturer.

B. Install units level and plumb maintaining manufacturer’s recommended clearances and tolerances.


July 31, 2015 238100 - 5

C. Install roof-mounting compressor-condenser components on equipment supports. Anchor units to supports with removable, cadmium-plated fasteners.

D. Install and connect pre-charged refrigerant tubing to component's quick-connect fittings. Install tubing to allow access to unit.

E. Install wall sleeves in finished wall assembly and weatherproof. Install and anchor wall sleeves to withstand, without damage seismic forces as required by code.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Verify condensate drainage requirements.

B. Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest drain.

C. Install piping adjacent to units to allow service and maintenance.

D. Ground equipment and install power wiring, switches, and controls for split systems.

E. Connect refrigerant piping to coils with shutoff valves on the suction and liquid lines at the coil and a union or flange at each connection at the coil and condenser.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Tests and Inspections: After installing units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.4 COMMISSIONING





Spokane Transit Authority Section 238219 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Fan Coil Units

July 31, 2015 238219 - 1

SECTION 238219 - FAN COIL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes fan coil units and accessories.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BAS: Building automation system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.


C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Ceiling suspension components. 2. Structural members to which fan coil units will be attached. 3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:

a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels.


July 31, 2015 238219 - 2

D. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that fan coil units, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Include the following:

1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation.

a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."

b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.

3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.


F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fan coil units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Maintenance schedules and repair part lists for motors, coils, integral controls, and filters.

G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan coil units and suspension system components with other construction that penetrates or is supported by ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.

B. Coordinate size and location of wall sleeves for outdoor-air intake.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fan coil units that fail in materials or workmanship within standard warranty period.


July 31, 2015 238219 - 3

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTED FAN COIL UNITS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the scheduled product or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. McQuay International. 2. Trane; American Standard Companies, Inc. 3. YORK International Corporation.

B. Description: Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to ARI 440, ASHRAE 33, and UL 1995.

C. Coil Section Insulation: 1-inch thick coated glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C 916.

1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Insulation and adhesive shall have a combined maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84.

D. Drain Pans: Stainless steel formed to slope from all directions to the drain connection as required by ASHRAE 62.

E. Chassis: Galvanized steel where exposed to moisture, with baked-enamel finish and removable access panels.

F. Cabinets: Steel with baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's standard paint color.

G. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.

1. Pleated Cotton-Polyester Media: 90 percent arrestance and MERV-8.

H. Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch, rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-water temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain.

I. Direct-Driven Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, multispeed motor resiliently mounted in the fan inlet. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and painted-steel or galvanized-steel fan scrolls.

J. Factory, Hydronic Piping Package: ASTM B 88, Type L copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. Label piping to indicate service, inlet, and outlet.

1. Two-way, modulating control valve for chilled-water coil. 2. Two-way, modulating control valve for heating coil. 3. Hose Kits: Minimum 400-psig working pressure, and operating temperatures from 33 to

211 deg F. Tag hose kits to equipment designations.

a. Length: 24 inches.


July 31, 2015 238219 - 4

b. Minimum Diameter: Equal to fan coil unit connection size.

4. Automatic Flow-Control Valve: Brass or ferrous-metal body; 300-psig working pressure at 250 deg F; with removable, corrosion-resistant, tamperproof, self-cleaning piston spring; factory set to maintain constant indicated flow with plus or minus 10 percent over differential pressure range of 2 to 80 psig.

5. Y-Pattern Hydronic Strainers: Cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B); 125-psig working pressure, with threaded connections, bolted cover, perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection. Include minimum NPS 1/2 hose-end, full-port, ball-type blowdown valve in drain connection.

6. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

K. Basic Unit Controls:

1. Control voltage transformer. 2. Wall-mounting temperature sensor. 3. Data entry and access port.

a. Input data includes room temperature set points and occupied and unoccupied periods.

b. Output data includes room temperature, supply-air temperature, entering-water temperature, operating mode, and status.

L. DDC Terminal Controller:

1. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods scheduled from BAS. 2. Unit Supply-Air Fan Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Fan runs continuously. b. Unoccupied Periods: Fan cycles to maintain room setback temperature.

3. Hydronic Cooling Coil Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Modulate control valve to maintain room temperature. b. Unoccupied Periods: Close control valve.

4. Heating Coil Operation:

a. Occupied Periods: Modulate control valve to provide heating if room temperature falls below thermostat set point.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Start fan and open control valve if room temperature falls below setback temperature.

M. BAS Interface Requirements:

1. Interface relay for scheduled operation. 2. Interface relay to provide indication of fault at the central workstation. 3. Provide interface for existing central BAS workstation for the following functions:

a. Adjust set points. b. Fan coil unit start, stop, and operating status.


July 31, 2015 238219 - 5

c. Data inquiry including supply and room-air temperature. d. Occupied and unoccupied schedules.

N. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical connection.

O. Capacities and Characteristics: As scheduled on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive fan coil units for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations before fan coil unit installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install fan coil units level and plumb.

B. Install fan coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.

C. Suspend fan coil units from structure with elastomeric hangers. Vibration isolators are specified in Division 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

D. Verify locations of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above finished floor.

E. Install new filters in each fan coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows:

1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. 2. Connect piping to fan coil unit factory hydronic piping package. Install piping package if

shipped loose. 3. Connect condensate drain to indirect waste.

a. Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against the pressure of fan. Install cleanouts in piping at changes of direction.


July 31, 2015 238219 - 6

B. Connect supply and return ducts to fan coil units with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct connections.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections.

3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fan coil units. Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

3.7 COMMISSIONING




July 31, 2015 238219 - 7



Spokane Transit Authority Section 260500 Plaza Upgrade 15-STA-512 Common Work Results

July 31, 2015 260500 - 1

SECTION 260500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Refer to Division 01 for submittal requirements and formats.

1.2 OUTLINE OF WORK

A. Scope: The work under this division includes furnishing all materials, equipment, labor, supervision, tools and items necessary for the construction, installation, connection, testing and operation of all electrical work for this project as shown on the Electrical Drawings and/or defined in Division 26 of the specifications.

B. Contract Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01 as they apply to the work in this section. Comply with the requirements of the other specification divisions that have additional requirements for this work as referenced under Division 26 sections.

C. Related Work Described Elsewhere: Where other divisions require electrical materials or installations under this division of the specifications, comply with all applicable requirements herein. Provide all electrical materials and installation work required to connect, test and operate equipment described in other divisions of these specifications as shown on the Electrical Drawings or specified hereinafter. Electrical installations required by other divisions but not shown on the Electrical Drawings or specifically called out in this division of the specifications shall be provided by the trade requiring the electrical work.

D. Itemized Schedule of Costs: Furnish a contract cost breakdown by specification section to the Architect with a copy to the Engineer to allow evaluation of partial payment requests. Refer to Division 01 for requirements.

E. Warranty: The Contractor shall guarantee all work installed under this specification and make good, repair or replace at his own expense, any defective work, materials or parts within the warranty period, if, in the opinion of the Architect, said defect is due to imperfection in material, design or workmanship. The warranty period shall be in accordance with Division 01 but not less than one year. Lamps are not warranted but all shall be operating at time of final acceptance. Warranty shall be submitted in writing as required in Division 01.

1.3 REGULATIONS

A. Codes and Ordinances: Comply with all applicable codes, ordinances and regulations including the National Electrical Code, the Washington Administrative Code, National Electrical Safety Code, WISHA, NFPA, and all other national, state and local codes and ordinances. Notify the Architect of any non-compliance in contract documents to applicable codes and regulations


July 31, 2015 260500 - 2

prior to installation of the work. Changes in the work after initial installation due to requirements of code enforcing agencies shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Permits: Provide and pay for all permits and fees required for this project. In addition to paying for all permits and fees, the Contractor shall be responsible for contacting the various Approving Authorities, arranging for review of shop drawings where appropriate, scheduling inspections in a timely manner, and making necessary corrections as required by the Approving Authorities.

C. Approving Authority: It is the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain and contact the appropriate "Approving Authorities" for this project. Approving Authorities will include, but not be limited to the local Fire Marshal and the local authority having jurisdiction.

D. Certificate of Inspection: Obtain a Certificate of Electrical Inspection from the local inspecting authority indicating final acceptance. Submit to the Owner upon completion of the project as part of project closeout.

E. Safety Measures to be Taken: The Architect and Engineer have not been retained or compensated to provide design and construction review services relating to the Contractor's safety precautions or to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures required for the Contractor to perform his work. The Contractor will be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. The duty of the Architect and Engineer to conduct construction observations of the Contractor's performance is not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures, in, on or near the construction site. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to comply with "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction," Volume 36, No. 75, Part II of the Federal Register by the U.S. Department of Labor. Contractor shall be responsible for providing all such safety measures and shall consult with the state or federal safety inspector for interpretation whenever in doubt as to whether safe conditions do or do not exist or whether he is or is not in compliance all with state or federal regulations.

1.4 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Intent: The Electrical Drawings and specifications are intended to include all labor and materials necessary to provide a complete and operating facility. Any materials shown and called for on the drawings but not mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, which are necessary for the proper completion of the installation or operation of the equipment, shall be furnished the same as if specifically called for in both. By submitting a bid, the Contractor is acknowledging that he has made a thorough examination of the contract documents, existing site conditions, and has determined that these documents and conditions do sufficiently describe the scope of construction work required under this contract. Any questions regarding interpretation of the contract documents shall be made in writing in a timely manner prior to the bid date to allow reasonable time for resolution of the questions.

B. Diagrammatic Drawings: The Electrical Drawings are diagrammatic and do not show exact or complete raceway and wiring configurations, routing, rating or the necessary number and types of raceway fittings, junction boxes and pull boxes. Provide all labor and materials required to execute the work specified herein or described on the Electrical Drawings.


July 31, 2015 260500 - 3

C. Any minor changes (less that 6'-6" horizontal or vertical) in the location of the raceways, outlets, boxes, devices, wiring, etc., from those shown on the drawings shall be made without extra charge, where coordination requires or if so directed by the Architect prior to rough-in.

1.5 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submittals, General: All equipment must be submitted for review prior to installation. Provide submittals in accordance with Division 01. The remaining instructions in this paragraph are intended to supplement and amplify the requirements of Division 01. Bind submittals in three-ring binder. Open catalog sheets will not be accepted. Shop drawings shall consist of one reproducible drawing and a maximum of four blueprint sets. Index to the applicable specification section with a transmittal letter bound as the first sheet. Provide an index with each section of equipment indicating exact catalog numbers of products provided. In addition, identify the specific products by catalog number within the submittal documents. Submittals will not be accepted unless they conform to these requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings, descriptive bulletins, data sheets, diagrams, catalog cuts or other additional information as required for all specified materials including the following:

Submittal Date Number Reviewed

Raceways and Fittings ____________ _______ Cable Tray ____________ _______ 600-Volt Wire and Cable ____________ _______ Outlet, Junction and Pullboxes ____________ _______ Wiring Devices ____________ _______ Electrical Identification ____________ _______ Lighting Controls ____________ Motor Controls & Misc. Equipment Connections ___________ _______ Emergency Generator ____________ _______ Switchboards ____________ _______ Disconnect Switches ____________ _______ Fuses ____________ _______ Grounding ____________ _______ Panelboards ____________ _______ Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors ____________ _______ Automatic Transfer Switches ____________ _______ Lighting ____________ _______ Dry-type transformers ____________ _______ Fire Alarm System ____________ _______ Intercom and Master Clock System ____________ _______ Telecommunications System ____________ _______ Sound Reinforcement System ____________ _______

C. Submittal Format: Submittals must be sent in complete "sets," including all specified material. Submission of individual materials will not be accepted.


July 31, 2015 260500 - 4

D. Review: The review of a manufacturer's name or product by the Architect does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing materials and equipment which comply in all details with the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for submitting materials at such a time to allow a minimum of two weeks for Engineer's review.

E. It is the Contractor's responsibility to thoroughly review vendor-assembled shop drawings, catalog cuts, etc. to ensure that these documents are complete and comply with the specifications. If this coordination effort is not done, the Architect reserves the right to reject the complete submittal without review. To insure compliance with the Architect's review comments and communication of these comments through the Contractor and supplier to the manufacturer, all corrections to shop drawings shall be done by the manufacturer and resubmitted as requested by the Architect. "Local" mark-ups of the manufacturer's shop drawings will not be accepted.

1.6 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Provide operations and maintenance manuals for all electrical equipment installed on this project in accordance with Division 01.

B. Items described shall include, but not be limited to, the equipment listed under "Shop Drawings" in this division of the specifications. Provide table of contents at front of manual indicating general content of each section. Provide index for each section of the manual with complete equipment catalog item or identification.

C. The information and diagrams included must be on the specific equipment installed for this project. General "product line" information is not acceptable. The equipment model and catalog numbers with appropriate prefixes and suffixes must be clearly indicated on the data sheets. Manuals shall contain shop drawings, schematic and wiring diagrams (showing all external connections), parts lists, operating and maintenance information. Any modifications to equipment in the field shall be updated on the drawings, diagrams, etc., to reflect the "as-built" conditions.

D. Binding: Bind with three-screw post-type binder with heavy-duty hardboard cover and cloth backing. Imprint edge of volume with name of the building, year of completion and the words "Electrical Equipment." Front of manual shall be imprinted with the words "Electrical Equipment" the name of the project, the name of the Owner, year completed, name of the Architect, Engineer and Contractor. All printing in gold lettering. If the thickness of the manual exceeds approximately 2", provide separate volumes, each approximately 2" thick with each volume imprinted as described above and with the addition of the volume number. The back edge shall be imprinted with the name of the project, name of the Owner and year of completion.

E. Provide one preliminary copy to the Commisioning Authority for review 30 days prior to scheduled training or project completion, whichever is first. One preliminary copy shall be submitted to the Engineer for review 30 days prior to completion of the project. Placeholders are to be used for information that is not available at the time of draft manula submission. Preliminary copy shall include proposed wording for cover and back edge of the manual. Submit final bound copies for distribution as required by Division 01.


July 31, 2015 260500 - 5

1.7 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Maintained on Site: A record shall be made during the progress of the project indicating the work as actually installed. Corrections and changes shall be kept up to date at all times on a separate set of record drawings kept at the job site for review by the Architect. Mark-ups may be schematic as related to interior raceway systems, however, all raceways shall be shown in proper relationship with junction boxes, panelboards, devices, and equipment. Raceways installed below grade shall be shown with both horizontal and vertical dimensions at an accuracy of ±6 inches.

B. Project Closeout: Provide one set of prints indicating work as revised, detailed and actually installed, and submit to the Architect as part of the Project Closeout documentation. Panel schedules and fixture/equipment schedules shall also be updated.

C. Additional Record Drawings: Refer to Signal and Communication Systems section for additional record drawing requirements. AutoCAD production requirements also apply to all signal and communications system drawings.

1.8 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING

A. Construction will occur in numerous phases. At the completion of each phase the electrical systems shall be tested and the Owner trained in the use of the systems. Refer to Architectural Drawings and the specifications for construction schedules and sequencing requirements.

1.9 ABBREVIATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

A. Provide: To furnish and install.

B. Wiring: Raceway, conductors and connections.

C. Exposed: Visible from occupied areas.

D. Install: To set in position and make fully operational.

E. Furnish: Purchase and deliver to the job site.

F. Required: As required by code, authority having jurisdiction or contract documents for the system and/or installation to be fully operational.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD OF QUALITY

A. General: Whenever any material or equipment is specified by patent or proprietary name or by the name of the manufacturer, such specification shall establish the standard of quality in that particular field of manufacture. The Architect shall be the sole and final judge as to quality and acceptability of substitutions, no exceptions.


July 31, 2015 260500 - 6

B. Substitutions:

1. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings or other sections of the specifications, the Contractor may offer material or equipment with equal or better qualities than those specified. Reference is made particularly to Instructions to Bidders related to prior approval requirements.

2. When the substitute equipment or material necessitates revisions to the plans or involves other trades, the Contractor shall include drawings and details showing all such changes, and coordinate and assume any liability and costs from the affected trades. Also, if a change required engineering or mechanical services or other equipment modifications, these services shall be billable to the Contractor.

2.2 PRODUCT LISTING OR LABELING

A. All electrical equipment and materials shall have Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or other approved testing facility label whenever published standards exist. Equipment in compliance with UL standards but not bearing their label is not acceptable. If the manufacturer cannot arrange for labeling of an assembled unit at the factory, the necessary inspection and acceptance by the testing facility shall be performed in the field at no additional cost to the Owner, and be acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. All materials shall be new, free from defects and arrive at the job site in original unopened containers.

3.2 MATERIAL STORAGE

A. Make all necessary provisions for storing materials and equipment at site so as to insure the quality and fitness of the items to be incorporated in the work. Equipment shall be stored to prevent damage and corrosion.

3.3 WORKMANSHIP AND COORDINATION

A. General: Workmanship shall be the best quality as recognized by the electrical construction industry and satisfactory to the Owner and Architect. Remove and replace lesser quality work as directed at no additional cost to the Owner. The Architect, or his designated representative, shall be the judge of the required quality of workmanship.

B. Work of Other Trades: The Electrical Drawings do not show complete details of the building construction. Refer to the Architectural, Structural, Civil Landscape and Mechanical Drawings for those details which may affect the execution of this work. Specific locations of construction features shall be obtained from the reference drawings, field measurements, or the trade


July 31, 2015 260500 - 7

providing the material or equipment. No extra payments will be allowed for failure to obtain this information.

C. The Contractor will not be paid for work requiring reinstallation due to lack of coordination prior to installation i.e., removing, replacing, relocating, cutting, patching or finishing. Special attention is called to the following items and all conflicts shall be coordinated prior to installation:

1. Light switches will be located on the "strike" side of the door. 2. All electrical outlets, lighting fixtures, signal and communications devices, and other

electrical devices and equipment are installed to avoid conflict with grilles, pipes, sprinkler heads, ducts and other mechanical equipment.

3. Electrical outlets, lighting fixtures, signal and communications devices and equipment are to be installed in proper relation to cabinets, counters, doors and other Architectural appurtenances.

4. Electrical characteristics (HP, KVA, voltage, phase, fusing, overload protection) of actual equipment furnished under other divisions being different from that shown on the electrical drawings.

D. Cooperation: Plan and execute work in cooperation with all other trades and utility companies. Every reasonable effort shall be made to provide all concerned with timely notice of work affecting other trades, and to prevent conflicts or interference as to space requirements, dimensions, openings, block-outs, sleeving or other matters which will cause delays or necessitate work-around methods.

E. General Construction:

1. Cutting and Patching: Provide all cutting, demolition and patching required for the installation of the electrical work on this project. Patching shall be accomplished by utilizing the general construction trades normally providing materials and labor needed for restoration of floor, ceiling or walls. Penetrations through existing structural walls, ceiling or floor slabs shall be core drilled. Spillage from core drilling shall be contained by diking, vacuuming and covering with protective plastic sheeting as required. In no case shall structural members be penetrated without prior approval of the Architect. After installation of raceways, provide approved fire sealing materials to close spaces around raceways.

2. Sleeves and openings required through floors and walls for electrical work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. This work shall be carefully coordinated with the General Contractor and other trades involved. All openings around conduits in sleeves shall be sealed with a material of equal fire rating as the material penetrated.

3. Painting: Touch up electrical equipment with factory finished surfaces as required using factory furnished paint. Coordinate field painting requirements with the Architect prior to final trim and cover installation. Do not paint screw heads, hinges, nameplates, hardware, etc. All surface-mounted raceways in finished areas will be painted as directed under the "Painting" division of the specifications. Coordinate timing of installation to minimize conflicts with painting requirements.

4. Cleaning: Promptly remove waste material and rubbish resulting from electrical work. Prior to energizing equipment, remove all chipping materials, construction dirt and debris, vacuum and wipe-down all internal areas. At completion of the project, clean all equipment and fixtures installed under this Contract.


July 31, 2015 260500 - 8

5. All penetrations through building roofing shall be flashed by a qualified roofing contractor normally in the business of commercial roofing. Flashing shall be in accordance with NRCA standard practices.

6. No penetrations shall occur in beams with internal pre-stressed cable design or concrete floor slabs with pre-stressed cabling will be allowed without prior written analysis by a structural engineer.

7. Prevent spillage during hauling operations. In cas of spills (including trenching materials) clean streets, walkways, courtyards, etc. by means of proper sweepers or other approved methods.

8. School dumpsters shall not be used by the contractor.

F. Existing Conditions:

1. General: Specific scope of demolition work and operating conditions to be encountered shall be verified by on-site review prior to submitting bid. Demolition work in general is noted or shown on the documents based upon available "drawings of record" and may not show the actual conditions as they presently exist. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing or modifying the existing electrical installation as required by the building alterations. The Contractor shall be responsible for protection of existing equipment and wiring to be retained or reinstalled and shall replace any equipment damaged during the process of removal and reinstallation.

2. Owner Retained Equipment: The Owner may wish to retain certain specific items scheduled for demolition. The Contractor shall carefully remove these items, provide protection and packaging as may be required to protect the equipment and turn over said equipment to the Owner at a place designated on the jobsite. Any equipment that the Owner does not desire to retain shall become the property of the Contractor and be removed from the site.

3. Existing Conduit and Wiring: No existing conduit or wiring shall be reused. 4. Unused Conduit and Wiring: All unused conductors in existing buildings shall be

removed. All unused conduit shall be removed except where located in or above existing construction which is not being altered and would require removal and replacement of the existing construction.

G. Continuity of Service To and In Existing Building:

1. Continuity of Service: The Contractor shall temporarily reroute or relocate existing wiring and/or equipment which is in conflict with existing building alterations and which is required to be maintained in use during construction. The Contractor's bid shall include intercepting and relocating existing raceways in 20 different locations throughout the school. Each location shall be assumed to have four ¾" EMT raceways (100 L.F. each), each containing seven AWG conductors which must be intercepted and relocated.

2. Premium Pay: Any overtime work required by this project to maintain the facility in continuous service without reducing its efficiency shall be included as a part of this contract. No additional payments will be authorized for work performed on weekends, holidays or other-than-normal working hours.


July 31, 2015 260500 - 9

3.4 REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING MATERIAL:

1. Ceiling Panels: Remove and reinstall all necessary panels in existing accessible ceilings, as required for the installation of electrical work. Where existing ceiling panels are damaged, they shall be replaced with new units. After ceiling removal and reinstallation is complete, the ceiling system appearance shall match adjacent similar ceilings that have not been removed.

2. Work Caused by Removal and Reinstallation of Existing Material: Existing electrical work which is to be removed and reinstalled as a result of the installation of work by other trades shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner.

3. Existing fluorescent fixture ballasts to be removed may contain PCB's and are to be treated as hazard materials. Removal and disposal of these fixtures are to comply with all local, state, and federal agency requirements. Provide documentation as required by the regulating agency as proof of proper disposal.

4. Openings in walls and floors resulting from removal of conduits and/or devices are to be patched with materials equivalent to adjacent surfaces. Materials used for patching shall maintain the fire rating of the existing area.

3.5 MISCELLANEOUS

A. Equipment Anchorage, Support and Bracing:

1. General: Provide complete seismic anchorage and bracing for the lateral and vertical support of conduit and electrical equipment, as required by the Uniform Building Code.

2. Conduit Crossing Structural Separations: Conduit that crosses structural or seismic separations between building units shall be installed with flexible connections, suitable to accommodate longitudinal and transverse displacements. Secure raceways each side of joint and provide minimum of 36" length flexible conduit between building units.

B. Phase Relationship: Maintain consistent phase relationship and rotation throughout the project. Check and identify proper rotation of equipment prior to energizing said equipment.

C. Housekeeping Pads: Coordinate size and location of housekeeping pads for all floor-mounted electrical equipment. Pads shall be 4 inches thick (nominal) x 2 inches larger than plan view dimensions of equipment. Provide 1-inch x 1-inch chamfer at top edges of pads.

3.6 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Site Review: On-site meetings or reviews of construction by the Architect, Engineer or Owner shall not be construed as acceptance by these parties as related to quantities, rough-in locations, and compliance with code enforcing authorities unless specific exceptions have been brought to the attention of the Architect or Engineer and have been accepted in writing.

B. Testing: The Contractor shall test all wiring and all electrical equipment to verify absence of grounds and short circuits and verify proper operation, rotation, and phase relationship. Contractor will be responsible for scheduling of tests and demonstrations at times mutually acceptable to the Owner. All equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with


July 31, 2015 260500 - 10

the requirements of this specification and the manufacturer's recommendations. Operate every device manually and automatically in accordance with its purpose. Tests shall be performed in the presence of the Owner or his designated representative. All instruments and personnel required to conduct the test shall be provided by the Contractor. Any test not witnessed by the Owner shall be waived by written document. All such documents must become the property of the Owner upon completion of construction.

C. Commissioning:

1. Selected equipment and systems are to be commissioned per Section 01 91 00 – General Commissioning Requirements and Section 26 08 00 – Commissioning for Electrical Systems. The contractor has specific responsibilities for scheduling, coordination, startup, test development, testing and documentation. Coordinate all commissioning activites with the Commissioning Aurhority.

2. Provide copies of all start up documents for systems being commissioned to the Commissioning Authority prior to start of commissioning testing.

3. Provide assistance to the Mechanical Contractor and Commissioning Agent as specified in Section 01 91 00 and 26 08 00.

D. Instruction for Owner's Personnel:

1. Scope: Following initial operation of all electrical equipment and prior to acceptance of the electrical work, conduct demonstrations of equipment operation and instruction periods for the Owner's representatives.

2. Initial Instruction Periods: Shall include preliminary discussion and presentation of information from maintenance manuals with appropriate references to drawings, followed by tours of equipment spaces explaining maintenance requirements, access methods, servicing and maintenance procedures, settings and available system and equipment adjustments.

3. Final Instruction Periods: 30 days after the initial instruction, a second instruction period shall be scheduled. The format and duration of the instruction periods shall be identical to the initial instruction periods.

4. Contractor's representatives, in general, who conduct these instructions and demonstrations shall be qualified foremen or superintendents acquainted with this project and from the trade involved. For major equipment, the representative shall be the manufacturer's representatives with operating experience and substantial design experience on this project. Their qualifications shall be submitted to the Architect and Engineer before conducting the instruction period.

5. Minimum Duration of Instruction Periods:

a. Electrical Distribution System: 4 Hours b. Lighting System: 4 hours c. Signal and Communications Systems: 4 Hours each d. Refer to other section of the specification for additional testing requirements.

6. Scheduling of Instruction Periods: Provide notice of Contractor's readiness to conduct such instruction and demonstration periods to the Owner at least two weeks prior to each instruction period and reach agreement on the date of each instruction period.

7. Attendance sheets shall be filled out for each training session listing all participants. Copies of the attendance sheets shall be provided to the Commissioning Aurhority.